FUJI COMPUTED RADIOGRAPHY
FCR VELOCITY U
CR-IR 364 (Type U)
Service Manual
The relationship between mR (milliroentgen), which
is the unit of radiation, and μC/kg (micro-coulomb/
kilogram), which is the SI derived unit of radiation, is
as follows.
1 mR = 0.258 μC/kg
FCR is a trademark or a registered trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation.
<No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted.>
Copyright © 2003-2008 FUJIFILM Corporation. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval
system, or transmitted in any form or by means, electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior
Document No.
012-201-09E
1st Edition July 31, 2003
Revised Edition - June 10, 2008
2-26-30 Nishiazabu, Minato-ku, Tokyo
Printed in Japan
written permission of FUJIFILM Corporation.
BLANK PAGE
0.1
Handling of This Manual
About This Manual
Scope
This Service Manual is applicable to Fuji Computed Radiography CR-IR 364 (Type U).
The machine is categorized as Class 1 according to IEC classification.
Notation of Unit Symbols
For notation of unit symbols, metric units set forth in the International Systems
of Units (SI) are used, as a rule. However, metric units that are allowed in the
Measurement Law, not in the SI, are used in some cases.
Precautions for Handling of This Manual
1. FUJIFILM Corporation reserves all rights related to this manual.
2. This manual should be accessible only to technical service personnel authorized by
FUJIFILM Corporation.
3. Since this manual contains confidential information of FUJIFILM Corporation, such
as the internal structure of the product, appropriate measures should be taken to
prevent illegal or inappropriate disclosure and/or use of this manual.
4. The following conducts are prohibited without prior written approval of FUJIFILM
Corporation:
- Copy or transcribe a whole or part of the contents of this manual.
- Disclose, furnish, lend, and/or transfer a whole or part of the contents of this
manual to persons other than the afore-described technical service personnel.
- Use a whole or part of the contents of this manual for purposes other than
technical servicing of the product.
5. Portions of the descriptions in this manual may be revised due to improvements on
the product.
6. Accompanying documents were originally drafted in the English language.
About Notation in the Manual
Notation of cautions, warnings, etc.
The notation formats of "warning," "caution," "instruction," "note," and "reference" are
shown below.
WARNING
Used when death or serious injury may occur if the instruction is not observed.
CAUTION
Used when minor or medium levels of physical injury may be incurred if the
instruction is not observed.
Also used when the machine may suffer serious trouble (such as unrecoverable
or difficult-to-recover trouble).
INSTRUCTION
Used when the machine may suffer damage, or any failure or malfunction may occur,
if the instruction is not observed.
NOTE
Used to indicate the matters that need attention during steps of the procedure.
REFERENCE
Used to indicate terminology or supplemental explanations.
Indication of Refer To
The "
" mark is used to indicate the chapter or section you should refer to.
Its format is as indicated below.
{MC:9.1_Exposure Unit Up-Down Drive Motor (MJ1)}
Notation in the Manual
In this Service Manual, the reader unit is sometimes denoted simply as the RU, and
the CR-IR348CL Plus as the CL or CR Console.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
0.1
0.2
Notation of Symbols
- Check/Adjustment indicator: Indicates that it is necessary to check or adjust the
installation location when the part or component
removed is to be reinstalled. This indicator is placed in
CHECK
the illustration that depicts the procedures for removing/
installing the parts or components.
When you see this indicator in an illustration, see
" Check/Adjustment Procedures" or " CHECK" in a
later section.
- Half-punch indicator:
Indicates that it is necessary to align the half-punches
when installing the parts or components. However,
it is not indicated for the half-punches for improving
ease of assembly or preventing erroneous assembly
procedures.
- 3B:
Indicates that screw-locking bond needs to be applied
to screw sections of installed parts/components.
Recommended screw-locking bond: Three Bond 1401B
Difference in Servicing Depending on the Concerned Machine,
and Handling in This Manual
The standards to be applied differ between the units having serial numbers of “#20001
to #24999” and the units having serial numbers of “#25001 or later”.
Servicing Instruments and Tools That Require
Inspection/Calibration
The machine should be installed and serviced by use of servicing instruments and
tools that have been regularly inspected and calibrated as appropriate.
If the machine were serviced using servicing instruments and tools that have not
been inspected and calibrated, proper performance of the machine could not be
guaranteed.
Servicing instruments and tools that require inspection/calibration are as listed below.
The inspection/calibration should be planned and performed in accordance with the
specifications and instruction manuals of the applicable servicing instruments and
tools.
Instruments and Tools That Require Inspection/Calibration
Name
Inspection
Calibration
Dosimeter
Steel rule (150 mm)
Steel rule (300 mm)
Digital multimeter
Calipers
(✽)
✽: A block gauge for use in inspection requires calibration.
- The units of #20001 to #24999 conform to the EMC standards IEC60601-1-2:1993.
- The units of #25001 or later conform to the EMC standard IEC60601-1-2:2001.
The servicing for the units having serial numbers of “#20001 to #24999” partially
differs from that for the units with the serial numbers of “#25001 or later”. The
operations to be specifically performed for the “units of #20001 to #24999” or the “units
of #25001 or later” are so indicated in this manual. If not mentioned, the operations
are common to all units.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
0.2
0.3
Safety Precaution
CR-IR 364 (Type U) Service Manual - Contents
Safety Precaution
1.
2.
Safety Precautions .................................................................. 1
1.1
General Precautions........................................................................1
1.2
Precautions Against Laser Radiation ..............................................2
1.3
Precautions on Patient Environment ...............................................4
Labels ....................................................................................... 4
2.1
Laser Precaution Labels..................................................................4
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.2
Laser Precaution Label Attachment Locations ............................................4
List of Labels ...............................................................................................5
Other Labels ....................................................................................6
2.2.1
2.2.2
Attachment Locations for Ratings Indication Label and Other Labels ........6
Handling Instruction Labels and Attachment Locations ............................14
3.
Protective Housings Against Laser Exposure ................... 15
4.
CLASSIFICATION .................................................................. 15
5.
Cautions on Electromagnetic Waves .................................. 16
5.1
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) ............................................16
5.1.1
5.2
6.
Further information for IEC60601-1-2:2001 (Machines Having Serial
Numbers of #25001 or Those later than #25001) .....................................16
Compliances of the Machines (Machines Having Serial
Numbers of #25001 or Those later than #25001) .........................18
CONNECTABLE PERIPHERALS .......................................... 19
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
0.3
0.4
Product Specifications
Product Specifications
1.
Specifications of Machine ...................................................... 1
1.1
List of Components .........................................................................1
1.1.1
1.1.2
For units of “#20001 to #24999” ..................................................................1
For units of "#25001 or later” ......................................................................3
1.2
Product Specifications .....................................................................5
1.3
Dimensions, Weight, and Center of Gravity ....................................5
1.4
Means for Moving and Fixing the Machine......................................6
1.5
Environmental Conditions ...............................................................7
1.6
Electrical Specifications...................................................................7
1.7
Installation Space ............................................................................8
1.8
Disposal of Machine ......................................................................10
1.9
Disposal of IP ................................................................................11
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
0.4
0.5
Machine Description (MD)
Machine Description (MD)
1.
Summary of the Machine................................................. MD-1
1.1
Features of the Machine...........................................................MD-1
1.2
System Configuration Examples ..............................................MD-2
1.3
Overall Machine Configuration and Component Names ..........MD-3
1.3.1
1.3.2
2.
System Block Diagram .............................................................MD-9
1.5
Image Data Flow ....................................................................MD-10
Mechanism and Operation of the Exposure Unit ........ MD-11
2.1
Unit Locations......................................................................... MD-11
2.2
Mechanism and Operation of Units ........................................MD-12
3.
IP Movement Mechanism................................................................... MD-12
Subscanning Mechanism ................................................................... MD-12
Scanner Unit ...................................................................................... MD-13
Erasure Unit ....................................................................................... MD-14
4.
5.
Software Operation Overview ....................................... MD-15
3.1
RU Network Setup..................................................................MD-15
3.2
Data Structures ......................................................................MD-15
3.3
Data Flow between RU and CL ..............................................MD-16
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5
012-201-09E
Data Flow during Routine Processing ................................................ MD-16
Data Flow for Software Installation .................................................... MD-17
Data Flow for Software Version Update ............................................. MD-18
Data Flow for Data Backup ................................................................ MD-18
Data Flow for Data Restore ............................................................... MD-19
Sleep Mode (Power Saving Mode).........................................MD-20
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
Machine External View and Functions ................................................. MD-3
I/O Parts Information ............................................................................ MD-5
1.4
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
3.4
Machine Status in the Sleep Mode ................................................... MD-20
Sleep Mode Setup ............................................................................. MD-20
Exiting the Sleep Mode ...................................................................... MD-20
3.5
RU Startup Process................................................................MD-21
3.6
RU Shutdown Process ...........................................................MD-22
3.7
Data Flow between Controller Unit and Operation Panel.......MD-22
3.8
Wake on LAN .........................................................................MD-22
Electrical-Related Information ...................................... MD-23
4.1
Locations of Main Electrical Components and Their Wiring ...MD-23
4.2
Information on Board Locations .............................................MD-25
4.3
Fuse Block Diagram ...............................................................MD-26
Mechanism and Operation of Elevation Unit and
Motor-Driven Grip Handle ............................................. MD-27
5.1
Elevation Unit Mechanism and Operation ..............................MD-27
5.2
Mechanism and Operation of Motor-Driven Grip Handle .......MD-29
6.
Interlock Mechanisms and Operations ........................ MD-31
7.
Options............................................................................ MD-36
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
0.5
0.6
Troubleshooting (MT)
Troubleshooting (MT)
1.
Overview of Troubleshooting...........................................MT-1
4.
Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner .............................MT-59
1.1
Flow of Troubleshooting ........................................................... MT-1
4.1
Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 1..................................... MT-59
1.2
Analysis and Check Flow Marks .............................................. MT-2
4.2
Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 2..................................... MT-61
1.3
Troubleshooting from Error Log................................................ MT-3
4.3
Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 3..................................... MT-63
4.4
Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 4..................................... MT-64
1.3.1
1.3.2
Checking the Error Log .........................................................................MT-3
Determining the Error Code of the Encountered Troble ........................MT-3
1.4
How to View Error Code ........................................................... MT-4
1.5
Detailed Information on Error Code.......................................... MT-5
1.5.1
1.6
Fuse-Related Error Detailed Information ..............................................MT-5
Location to Be First Inspected when a Failure Occurs ............. MT-6
2.
Error Code Table ...............................................................MT-7
3.
Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism .........................MT-48
3.1
Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 1................................ MT-48
3.2
Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 2................................ MT-49
3.3
Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 3................................ MT-51
3.4
Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 4................................ MT-53
3.5
Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 5................................ MT-54
3.6
Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 6................................ MT-55
3.7
Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 7................................ MT-57
3.8
Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 8................................ MT-58
3.9
Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 9............................. MT-58.1
012-201-09E
5.
6.
Error Code Analysis Flow: Electrical ...........................MT-66
5.1
Error Code Analysis Flow: Electrical 1 ................................... MT-66
5.2
Error Code Analysis Flow: Electrical 2 ................................... MT-68
5.3
Error Code Analysis Flow: Electrical 3 ................................... MT-69
5.4
Error Code Analysis Flow: Electrical 4 ................................... MT-70
5.5
Error Code Analysis Flow: Electrical 5 ................................... MT-72
5.6
Error Code Analysis Flow: Electrical 6 ................................... MT-74
Checking the Fuses ........................................................MT-75
6.1
Checking the PAT21A Board Fuses ....................................... MT-75
6.1.1
6.1.2
6.2
Checking the SND21A Board Fuses ...................................... MT-76
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.3
Check Flow for the PAT21A Board Fuses ...........................................MT-75
Procedures for Checking the PAT21A Board Fuses ...........................MT-75
Check Flow for the SND21A Board Fuses ..........................................MT-76
Procedures for Checking the SND21A Board Fuses ..........................MT-76
Checking the SND21B Board Fuses ...................................... MT-77
6.3.1
6.3.2
Check Flow for the SND21B Board Fuses ..........................................MT-77
Procedures for Checking the SND21B Board Fuses ..........................MT-77
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
0.6
0.7
Troubleshooting (MT)
6.4
Checking the ELV21A Board Fuses ....................................... MT-78
6.4.1
6.4.2
6.5
7.
Check Flow for the ELV21A Board Fuses ...........................................MT-78
Procedures for Checking the ELV21A Board Fuses ...........................MT-78
Fuses which Cannot Be Detected to Be Blown Out ............... MT-79
Checking the Voltage on the PAT21A Board .......................... MT-80
7.1.1
7.1.2
7.2
8.7
7.2.1
7.2.2
Check Flow for the Voltage on the JCT21B Board .............................MT-82
Procedures for Checking the Voltage on the JCT21B Board ..............MT-82
Checking the Sensors/Switches ....................................MT-83
8.1
Starting and Exiting the Monitoring Function.......................... MT-83
8.1.1
8.1.2
8.2
Starting the Monitoring Function .........................................................MT-83
Exiting the Monitoring Function ...........................................................MT-83
Checking the SZ1 ................................................................... MT-84
8.2.1
8.2.2
8.3
Check Flow for SZ1.............................................................................MT-84
Checking the Monitoring Function of SZ1 ...........................................MT-84
Checking the SZ2 ................................................................... MT-85
8.3.1
8.3.2
8.4
Check Flow for SZ5.............................................................................MT-88
Checking the Monitoring Function of SZ5 ...........................................MT-88
Checking the SZ6 ................................................................... MT-89
8.7.1
8.7.2
8.8
Check Flow for SZ6.............................................................................MT-89
Checking the Monitoring Function of SZ6 ...........................................MT-89
Checking the SZ7 ................................................................... MT-90
8.8.1
8.8.2
Check Flow for the Voltage on the PAT21A Board ..............................MT-80
Procedures for Checking the Voltage on the PAT21A Board ..............MT-80
Checking the Voltage on the JCT21B Board .......................... MT-82
Checking the SZ5 ................................................................... MT-88
8.6.1
8.6.2
Checking the Voltage ......................................................MT-80
7.1
8.
8.6
8.9
Check Flow for SZ7.............................................................................MT-90
Checking the Monitoring Function of SZ7 ...........................................MT-90
Checking the SZ21 ................................................................. MT-91
8.9.1
8.9.2
8.10
Checking the SH1 .................................................................. MT-93
8.10.1
8.10.2
8.11
Check Flow for SH1 ............................................................................MT-93
Checking the Monitoring Function of SH1 ..........................................MT-93
Checking the SH3/SH4 .......................................................... MT-94
8.11.1
8.11.2
8.12
Check Flow for SZ21...........................................................................MT-91
Checking the Monitoring Function of SZ21 .........................................MT-91
Check Flow for SH3/SH4 ....................................................................MT-94
Checking the Monitoring Function of SH3/SH4 ..................................MT-94
Checking the MSH1/MSH12 .................................................. MT-95
8.12.1
8.12.2
Check Flow for MSH1/MSH12 ............................................................MT-95
Checking the Monitoring Function of MSH1/MSH12 ..........................MT-95
Check Flow for SZ2.............................................................................MT-85
Checking the Monitoring Function of SZ2 ...........................................MT-85
Checking the SZ3 ................................................................... MT-86
8.4.1
8.4.2
8.5
Check Flow for SZ3.............................................................................MT-86
Checking the Monitoring Function of SZ3 ...........................................MT-86
Checking the SZ4 ................................................................... MT-87
8.5.1
8.5.2
012-201-09E
Check Flow for SZ4.............................................................................MT-87
Checking the Monitoring Function of SZ4 ...........................................MT-87
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
0.7
0.8
Troubleshooting (MT)
9.
Checking the Motors/Electromagnetic Brake/
Solenoid ...........................................................................MT-96
9.1
Checking the MZ1 .................................................................. MT-96
9.1.1
9.1.2
9.1.3
9.2
Check Flow for MZ1 ............................................................................MT-96
Checking MZ1 Operation ....................................................................MT-96
Checking the Resistance Value of MZ1 ..............................................MT-97
Checking the MZ2 .................................................................. MT-98
9.2.1
9.2.2
9.2.3
9.3
Check Flow for MZ2 ............................................................................MT-98
Checking MZ2 Operation ....................................................................MT-98
Checking the Resistance Value of MZ2 ..............................................MT-99
Checking the MZ3 ................................................................ MT-100
9.3.1
9.3.2
9.4
Check Flow for MZ3 ..........................................................................MT-100
Checking the Resistance Value of MZ3 ............................................MT-100
Checking the MB1 ................................................................ MT-101
9.4.1
9.4.2
9.5
Check Flow for MB1 ..........................................................................MT-101
Checking the Resistance Value of MB1 ............................................MT-101
Checking the MB2 ................................................................ MT-102
9.5.1
9.5.2
9.6
Check Flow for MB2 ..........................................................................MT-102
Checking the Resistance Value of MB2 ............................................MT-102
Checking the SOLH1............................................................ MT-103
9.6.1
9.6.2
9.6.3
012-201-09E
Check Flow for SOLH1 .....................................................................MT-103
Checking SOLH1 Operation .............................................................MT-103
Checking the Resistance Value of SOLH1........................................MT-104
10. Errors with no Error Code Displayed and
the Machine unable to Boot Up ...................................MT-105
10.1
Power Is not ON (The Start Switch on the Operation Panel
Does not Work) .................................................................... MT-105
10.2
Power LED on the Operation Panel Does not Light Up ....... MT-105
10.3
The Power LED on the Operation Panel and the Indicator
Lamp Stay Lit and the Machine Does not Start .................... MT-106
10.4
LCD Panel Remains Black ................................................... MT-107
10.5
LCD Panel Remains White ................................................... MT-107
10.6
Touch Button on the LCD Does not Work ............................ MT-108
11. Error with Abnormality Observed in
the Elevation Unit ..........................................................MT-109
11.1
The Elevation Unit Does not Ascend .................................... MT-109
11.2
The Elevation Unit Does not Descend ..................................MT-110
11.3
The Elevation Unit Does not Ascend/Descend...................... MT-111
11.4
Motor-Driven Grip Handle Does not Ascend .........................MT-112
11.5
Motor-Driven Grip Handle Does not Descend .......................MT-113
11.6
The Motor-Driven Grip Handle Does not Ascend/Descend ...MT-114
12. Reinstalling the Compact Flash Card ...............................MT-115
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
0.8
0.9
Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC)
Checks, Replacement and Adjustment
of Parts (MC)
1.
Precautions for Check, Replacement, and Adjustment .. MC-1
2.
Table of Contents ............................................................. MC-3
3.
Covers ............................................................................... MC-6
3.1
4.
4.1
3.2
3.3
4.1.1
4.1.2
Emergency Stop Switch Cover .......................................................... MC-11
Upper Left-Hand Side Cover of the Elevation Unit ............................ MC-11
Lower Left-Hand Side Cover of the Elevation Unit ............................ MC-12
Middle Right-Hand Side Cover of the Elevation Unit ......................... MC-13
Upper Right-Hand Side Cover of the Elevation Unit .......................... MC-13
Lower Right-Hand Side Cover of the Elevation Unit .......................... MC-14
Top Cover of the Elevation Unit ......................................................... MC-14
Lower Front Cover of the Elevation Unit ............................................ MC-15
Lower Right Front Cover of the Elevation Unit ................................... MC-15
Upper Front Cover of the Elevation Unit ............................................ MC-16
Upper Right Front Cover of the Elevation Unit ................................... MC-16
Upper Rear Cover of the Elevation Unit ............................................. MC-17
Lower Rear Cover of the Elevation Unit ............................................. MC-18
4.10
4.11
Replacing the Cables in the Exposure Unit ............................MC-47
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10.1
4.10.2
4.11.1
4.11.2
4.11.3
Controller Unit Covers ............................................................MC-18
5.
Replacing the Upper Shock Absorbing Rubbers ................................ MC-44
Replacing the Lower Shock Absorbing Rubbers ................................ MC-46
Replacing the Sensor and I/O Interface Cable (136Y8815) ............... MC-47
Replacing the DC Power Cable (136Y8817) ..................................... MC-51
Replacing the Motor Relay Cable (136Y8818) .................................. MC-54
IP ...................................................................................... MC-56
5.1
IP ............................................................................................MC-56
5.1.1
5.1.2
5.1.3
5.1.4
012-201-09E
Grid Support Assembly (for Units of “#20001 to #24999”) ................. MC-19
Grid Support Assembly (for Units of "#25001 or later”) ...................... MC-22
Grid Support, Grid Support Guide (Resin-Made) and
Guide Rail...............................................................................MC-27
Constant Force Spring ...........................................................MC-30
Grid Replacement Cover Lock Solenoid (SOLH1) ........................MC-32
Patient Protection Descent Prevention Interlock Switch
(MSH2) ...................................................................................MC-33
Patient Protection Descent Prevention Interlock Switch
(MSH3) ...................................................................................MC-34
SND21B Board Assembly ......................................................MC-35
Grid Replacement Cover Lock Mechanism ............................MC-37
Exposure Unit Front Cover Laser Safety Interlock Switches
(SH3 and SH4) .......................................................................MC-41
Shock-Absorbing Rubber .......................................................MC-44
4.3
4.4
4.5
Exposure Unit Front Cover .................................................................. MC-6
Exposure Unit Bottom Cover ............................................................... MC-9
Elevation Unit Covers .............................................................MC-10
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
3.2.6
3.2.7
3.2.8
3.2.9
3.2.10
3.2.11
3.2.12
3.2.13
Grid Support Assembly...........................................................MC-19
4.2
Exposure Unit Covers ..............................................................MC-6
3.1.1
3.1.2
Exposure Unit ................................................................ MC-19
Removing the IP................................................................................. MC-56
Reinstalling the IP .............................................................................. MC-59
Unpacking the IP ................................................................................ MC-62
Cleaning the IP................................................................................... MC-64
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
0.9
0.10
Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC)
6.
Erasure Unit .................................................................... MC-66
6.1
Erasure Unit ...........................................................................MC-66
6.1.1
6.1.2
6.1.3
7.
6.2
Cable Connector (JCT21B-CN1)............................................MC-72
6.3
Cable Connectors (JCT21A-CN1 and -CN2) .........................MC-73
6.4
Thermal Switch (TSWA1) .......................................................MC-75
Scanner Unit ................................................................... MC-76
7.1
Scanner Unit...........................................................................MC-76
7.1.1
7.1.2
7.1.3
7.1.4
8.
Removing the Erasure Unit ................................................................ MC-66
Reinstalling the Erasure Unit ............................................................. MC-68
Cleaning the Erasure Unit .................................................................. MC-71
Removing the Scanner Unit ............................................................... MC-76
Reinstalling the Scanner Unit ............................................................. MC-78
Replacement Procedures for the Scanner Unit ................................. MC-82
Unpacking the Scanner Unit .............................................................. MC-86
Subscanning Unit........................................................... MC-88
8.1
Subscanning Unit ...................................................................MC-88
8.2
SUS Belts .............................................................................MC-100
8.2.1
8.2.2
8.3
Right SUS Belt ................................................................................. MC-100
Left SUS Belt.....................................................................................MC-111
Flywheel ...............................................................................MC-122
8.3.1
8.3.2
Right Flywheel.................................................................................. MC-122
Left Flywheel .................................................................................... MC-124
8.4
Subscanning Motor (MZ1) ....................................................MC-129
8.5
Subscanning Electromagnetic Brake (MB1).........................MC-136
8.6
IP Movement Motor (MZ2) ...................................................MC-138
012-201-09E
8.7
IP Movement Electromagnetic Brake (MB2) ........................MC-140
8.8
Bucky Motor (MZ3) ...............................................................MC-147
8.9
IP Drive Timing Belt ..............................................................MC-148
8.9.1
8.9.2
8.9.3
8.9.4
8.9.5
8.9.6
8.9.7
IP Drive Timing Belt (A) ................................................................... MC-149
IP Drive Timing Belt (B) ................................................................... MC-155
IP Drive Timing Belt (C) ................................................................... MC-160
IP Drive Timing Belt (D) ................................................................... MC-166
IP Drive Timing Belt (E) ................................................................... MC-171
IP Drive Timing Belt (F) ................................................................... MC-174
Phase Adjustment of the IP Drive Timing Belts ................................ MC-177
8.10
Belt Pulley Assembly (Timing Belt (F) Idler) .........................MC-180
8.11
Flexible Cable .......................................................................MC-181
8.11.1
8.11.2
8.12
Correction Light Source Unit ................................................MC-187
8.12.1
8.12.2
8.13
Correction Light Source Unit ............................................................ MC-187
Photoconductive Material and LIT21A Board ................................... MC-188
IP Lower Stopper Mounting Bracket .....................................MC-191
8.13.1
8.13.2
8.14
Right Flexible Cable ......................................................................... MC-181
Left Flexible Cable Assembly ........................................................... MC-184
IP Lower Stopper Mounting Bracket (Right)..................................... MC-191
IP Lower Stopper Mounting Bracket (Left) ....................................... MC-194
Internal Cooling Fan .............................................................MC-198
8.14.1
8.14.2
8.14.3
8.14.4
Internal Cooling Fan (FANH1) ......................................................... MC-198
Internal Cooling Fan (FANH2) ......................................................... MC-200
Internal Cooling Fan (FANH3) ......................................................... MC-202
Internal Cooling Fans (FANH4 and FANH5) .................................... MC-203
8.15
PWC21A Board ....................................................................MC-206
8.16
LDS21A/B Board and RLY21A/B Board ...............................MC-207
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
0.10
0.11
Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC)
9.
Elevation Unit ............................................................... MC-210
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
9.9
9.10
9.11
9.12
9.13
9.14
9.15
9.16
9.17
9.18
9.19
9.20
012-201-09E
Exposure Unit Up-Down Drive Motor (MJ1) .........................MC-210
Isolation Transformer............................................................MC-215
Brake (Permanent Magnetic Type) .......................................MC-217
LED21C Board .....................................................................MC-219
Exposure Unit Elevation Upper-Limit Interlock Switch
(MSJ1) ..................................................................................MC-220
Exposure Unit Elevation Lower Limit Interlock Switch
(MSJ2) ..................................................................................MC-221
Exposure Unit Elevation Lower Limit Interlock Switch
(MSJ3) ..................................................................................MC-222
ELV21A Board ......................................................................MC-223
Emergency Stop Switch (ESJ1) ...........................................MC-225
Emergency Stop Switch (ESJ2) ...........................................MC-226
Power Circuit Breaker (NFB) ................................................MC-227
Terminal Block (TB1) ............................................................MC-229
Exposure Unit Up-Down Drive Motor (MJ1) Relay Cable
(with Resistor) ......................................................................MC-230
Operation Panel Assembly, LCD Panel and
LCN21A Board .....................................................................MC-231
Elevation Switch (Hand Switch) and AWT21A/B Board .......MC-234
Motor-Driven Grip Handle (Hand Rail/Elevation Unit) ..........MC-236
Motor-Driven Grip Handle Up-Down Drive Motor (MJ2) .......MC-238
Grip Handle Elevation Upper-Limit Interlock Switch
(MSH6) .................................................................................MC-241
Grip Handle Elevation Lower-Limit Interlock Switch
(MSH7) .................................................................................MC-242
Grip Handle Collision Prevention Proximity Switch (MSH8) .MC-243
9.21
Routing the External Connection Cables .............................MC-244
9.21.1
9.21.2
9.21.3
Routing the External Connection Cables (Operation Panel) ............ MC-244
Routing the External Connection Cables (Cable Box on the Rear of
the Exposure Unit) ........................................................................... MC-250
Routing the External Connection Cable (Potentiometer Cable) ....... MC-257
10. Controller Unit .............................................................. MC-259
10.1
Controller Unit Upper Section...............................................MC-259
10.2
Power Supply (Alpha 600/450).............................................MC-260
10.3
Compact Flash Card ............................................................MC-262
10.4
CFI21A Board .......................................................................MC-263
10.5
CPS21A Board .....................................................................MC-263
10.6
SND21A Board .....................................................................MC-264
10.7
PAT21A Board ......................................................................MC-265
10.8
ATX Board (Motherboard) ....................................................MC-266
10.9
NFB21A Board .....................................................................MC-269
10.10 Controller Unit Cooling Fans (FANK1 and FANK2) ..............MC-270
10.11
TLB21A Board (Optional) ..................................................MC-270.1
11. Replacing the Fuses and Fuse Locations ................. MC-271
11.1
PAT21A Board Fuses ...........................................................MC-272
11.2
SND21A Board Fuses ..........................................................MC-273
11.3
ELV21A Board Fuses ...........................................................MC-274
11.4
SND21B Board Fuses ..........................................................MC-275
11.5
ERS21A/B Board Fuses .......................................................MC-276
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
0.11
0.12
Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC)
12. Updating Software Versions ....................................... MC-277
13. Performing Delta Y Calculations for Verification ...... MC-282
13.1
Procedures of Delta Y Calculations ......................................MC-283
13.2
Checking the Delta Y Calculation Result ...........................MC-285.1
13.3
Countermeasures When “Data NG Pixels” Appears .........MC-285.2
Appendix 1. Replacement of the ATX Board (Motherboard) of
FB2M with the Board of FB5UM ................Appx MC1-1
14. Scanner Correction ...................................................... MC-286
15. Checking for Image Problems .................................... MC-311
16. Checking and Adjusting the Format .......................... MC-313
16.1
Checking and Adjusting the Format (Subscan Length) ........MC-313
16.2
Procedures for Checking and Adjusting the Format
(Subscan Start Point) ................................................................... MC-316
17. Jigs ................................................................................ MC-319
17.1
List of Jigs ............................................................................MC-319
17.2
How to Use the Elevation Jig Cable .....................................MC-322
17.3
How to Use the Electromagnetic Brake Releasing Jig .........MC-325
18. Tools .............................................................................. MC-328
18.1
Standard Tools .....................................................................MC-328
18.2
Special Tools and Measuring Instruments ............................MC-330
18.3
Special Consumables...........................................................MC-331
18.4
Semi-Standard Tools ............................................................MC-331
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
0.12
0.13
Maintenance Utility (MU)
Maintenance Utility (MU)
1.
2.
RU Utility ........................................................................... MU-1
1.1
RU Utility Overview ..................................................................MU-1
1.2
Tree of RU Utility Overall Tree Structure ..................................MU-1
4.
Function Overview....................................................................MU-7
Machine Maintenance ...................................................... MU-8
3.1
RU IP Address ........................................................................ MU-11
3.2
FTP Server .............................................................................MU-13
3.3
Default Gateway .....................................................................MU-14
3.4
Subnet Mask ..........................................................................MU-16
3.5
Secure Host............................................................................MU-17
3.6
Secure Net .............................................................................MU-19
3.7
Network Check .......................................................................MU-20
3.8
Loop back Test .......................................................................MU-22
3.9
Touch Point Check .................................................................MU-23
3.10
Adjust Touch Check ................................................................MU-25
3.11
Head Move .............................................................................MU-26
RU PC-TOOL ................................................................... MU-28
4.1
NEW .......................................................................................MU-33
4.2
LIST OF EXISTING RU ..........................................................MU-34
4.3
DELETE .................................................................................MU-34
4.4
MUTL ......................................................................................MU-35
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
Performance Check................................................................MU-37
[1-1]
Image Output 1 .................................................................................. MU-37
[1-2]
Image Output 2 .................................................................................. MU-38
[1-3]
Image Output 3 .................................................................................. MU-38
[1-4]
Virtual Image Output 1 ...................................................................... MU-39
[1-4-1] Mode Setting ...................................................................................... MU-39
[1-4-2] Start Output ........................................................................................ MU-40
[1-4-3] Cansel Setting .................................................................................... MU-41
[1-4-4] Start RAW Image Output ................................................................... MU-41
[1-5]
LD Performance ................................................................................. MU-42
[1-6]
Display Scanner Data ........................................................................ MU-43
[1-7]
Correction........................................................................................... MU-44
[1-7-1] Display Scanner Temperature ............................................................ MU-44
[1-7-2] Gain Setting ....................................................................................... MU-45
[1-7-2-1] Mode Setting ...................................................................................... MU-45
[1-7-3] Adjust Correction Light Source .......................................................... MU-46
[1-7-4] Update Light Source Shading ............................................................ MU-47
[1-7-5] Update CCD Offset Data.................................................................... MU-47
[1-7-6] Erase IP ............................................................................................. MU-48
[1-7-7] Update 2D Offset Data ....................................................................... MU-48
[1-7-8] Update Shading Data ......................................................................... MU-49
[1-7-8-1] Update Shading and Sensitivity Data ................................................ MU-49
[1-7-8-1-1] Mode Setting .................................................................................... MU-49
[1-7-8-2] Update Shading Data ......................................................................... MU-50
[1-7-8-2-1] Mode Setting .................................................................................... MU-50
[1-7-9] Updating the X-Ray Damage Data .................................................... MU-51
User Utility ........................................................................ MU-6
2.1
3.
[1]
[2]
Conveyance Check ................................................................MU-52
[2-1]
[2-2]
[2-2-1]
[2-2-2]
Termination Mode Setting .................................................................. MU-52
Sequence On Repeat Setting ............................................................ MU-52
Display Scanner Temperature ............................................................ MU-52
Number of Sequence Setting ............................................................. MU-53
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
0.13
0.14
Maintenance Utility (MU)
[2-2-3]
[2-2-4]
[2-2-5]
[2-2-6]
[3]
Stop Sequence On Repeat ................................................................ MU-53
Sequence Mode Setting ..................................................................... MU-54
Display Number of Sequence ............................................................ MU-54
Erasure-lamp Lighting Setting ............................................................ MU-55
Board Check...........................................................................MU-56
[3-1]
[3-1-1]
[3-1-2]
[3-1-2-1]
[3-1-2-2]
[3-1-2-3]
[3-1-2-4]
[3-2]
[3-2-1]
[3-3]
[3-3-1]
[3-3-2]
[3-3-2-1]
[3-3-2-2]
[3-3-2-3]
[3-3-2-4]
[3-4]
[3-4-1]
[3-4-2]
[3-4-2-1]
[3-4-2-2]
[3-4-3]
[3-4-4]
[3-4-5]
[3-4-6]
[3-5]
012-201-09E
Mother Board ..................................................................................... MU-56
All Check ............................................................................................ MU-56
Board Check Details .......................................................................... MU-57
SDRAM .............................................................................................. MU-57
COMPACT FLASH ............................................................................. MU-58
Interrupt .............................................................................................. MU-59
Register .............................................................................................. MU-60
PAT Board .......................................................................................... MU-61
All Check ............................................................................................ MU-61
SND Board ......................................................................................... MU-62
All Check ............................................................................................ MU-62
Board Check Details .......................................................................... MU-63
Register .............................................................................................. MU-63
Solenoid ............................................................................................. MU-64
Pulse-Motor ........................................................................................ MU-65
Fuse ................................................................................................... MU-66
ERS Board ........................................................................................ MU-67
All Check ............................................................................................ MU-67
Board Check Details .......................................................................... MU-67
Erasure-Lamp .................................................................................... MU-67
Heater and Thermistor ....................................................................... MU-68
Turn Erasure-lamp On ....................................................................... MU-69
Turn Erasure-lamp Off........................................................................ MU-70
Display Erasure Temperature............................................................. MU-70
View Erase Board Version ................................................................. MU-71
CPS Board ......................................................................................... MU-72
[3-5-1] All Check ............................................................................................ MU-72
[3-5-2] Board Check Details .......................................................................... MU-73
[3-5-2-1] DPRAM .............................................................................................. MU-73
[3-5-2-2] Communication between DSPs ......................................................... MU-73
[3-5-2-3] Transfer between DSPs ..................................................................... MU-74
[3-5-2-4] FIFO ................................................................................................... MU-75
[3-5-2-5] Internal RAM ...................................................................................... MU-76
[3-5-2-6] LVC Loopback .................................................................................... MU-77
[3-5-2-7] LVC FPGA.......................................................................................... MU-78
[3-5-2-8] PCI Interrupt ....................................................................................... MU-79
[3-5-2-9] SDRAM .............................................................................................. MU-80
[3-5-2-10] Register ............................................................................................. MU-81
[3-6]
CCD Board ......................................................................................... MU-82
[3-6-1] All Check ............................................................................................ MU-82
[3-6-2] Confirm Gain ...................................................................................... MU-83
[3-6-3] Confirm CCD Timing .......................................................................... MU-83
[3-6-4] Confirm AD Offset .............................................................................. MU-84
[3-6-5] Confirm AD MUX-Config .................................................................... MU-84
[3-7]
LED/Buzzer/PNL Board ..................................................................... MU-85
[3-7-1] All Check ............................................................................................ MU-85
[3-7-2] Board Check Details .......................................................................... MU-85
[3-7-2-1] Turn READY-LED ON ........................................................................ MU-85
[3-7-2-2] Turn READY-LED OFF ...................................................................... MU-86
[3-7-2-3] Turn CALL-LED ON ........................................................................... MU-86
[3-7-2-4] Turn CALL-LED OFF ......................................................................... MU-87
[3-7-2-5] Ring Buzzer on Minimum ................................................................... MU-87
[3-7-2-6] Ring Buzzer on Medium ..................................................................... MU-88
[3-7-2-7] Ring Buzzer on Maximum .................................................................. MU-88
[3-7-2-8] Stop Buzzer........................................................................................ MU-89
[3-7-3] Display Test Pattern ........................................................................... MU-89
[3-7-4] Quit Test Pattern ................................................................................ MU-90
[3-8]
All Board............................................................................................. MU-91
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
0.14
0.15
Maintenance Utility (MU)
[4]
Mechanical Check ..................................................................MU-92
[4-1]
[4-2]
[4-3]
[4-4]
[4-5]
[4-5-1]
[4-5-2]
[4-5-3]
[4-5-4]
[4-6]
[4-7]
[4-7-1]
[4-7-2]
[4-7-3]
[4-7-4]
[4-7-5]
[4-7-5-1]
[4-7-5-2]
[4-8]
[4-9]
[4-9-1]
[4-9-2]
[5]
Grid Change Door .............................................................................. MU-92
Bucky HP ........................................................................................... MU-92
Bucky ................................................................................................. MU-93
IP Shift HP.......................................................................................... MU-93
IP Shift................................................................................................ MU-94
Input Destination and Speed .............................................................. MU-94
Number of Sequence Setting ............................................................. MU-95
Stop Sequence .................................................................................. MU-96
Display Number of Sequence ............................................................ MU-97
Sub-Scanning HP............................................................................... MU-97
Sub-Scanning .................................................................................... MU-98
Input Mode and Speed ....................................................................... MU-98
Number of Sequence Setting ............................................................. MU-99
Stop Sequence ................................................................................ MU-100
Display Number of Sequence .......................................................... MU-101
Format Adjustment ........................................................................... MU-101
Lengths Adjustment ......................................................................... MU-101
Start Point Adjustment ..................................................................... MU-102
FAN .................................................................................................. MU-103
Electromagnetic brake .................................................................... MU-104
Sub-Scanning (SOLZ1) .................................................................... MU-104
IP Shift (SOLZ2) ............................................................................... MU-105
Scanner Check .....................................................................MU-106
[5-1]
[5-1-1]
[5-1-2]
[5-1-3]
[5-1-4]
[5-2]
[5-3]
012-201-09E
LD Check Details ............................................................................. MU-106
LD Performance Check .................................................................... MU-106
Turn LD On (Reading Level) ............................................................ MU-107
Turn LD On (Detection Level) .......................................................... MU-107
Turn LD Off....................................................................................... MU-108
Display Scanner Data ...................................................................... MU-108
Scanner Check Details .................................................................... MU-110
[5-3-1]
[5-3-2]
[5-3-3]
[5-4]
[5-4-1]
[5-4-2]
[5-4-3]
[5-4-3-1]
Calculate CCD Electronic Noise ...................................................... MU-110
Adjust Correction Light Source .........................................................MU-111
Calculate Delta Y ............................................................................. MU-112
Scanner Diagnostic .......................................................................... MU-113
Virtual Image Check (CCD21D Board - Frame Memory) ................ MU-113
Virtual Image Check (CPS Board - Frame Memory) ........................ MU-113
Virtual Image Output 1 ..................................................................... MU-114
Mode Setting .................................................................................... MU-114
[5-4-3-2] Start Output ...................................................................................... MU-115
[5-4-3-3] Cansel Setting .................................................................................. MU-116
[5-4-3-4] Start RAW Image Output ................................................................. MU-116
[5-4-4] Virtual Image Output 2 .................................................................... MU-117
[5-4-4-1] Patterned Image Output ................................................................... MU-117
[5-5]
Correction......................................................................................... MU-118
[5-5-1] Display Scanner Temperature .......................................................... MU-118
[5-5-2] Gain Setting ..................................................................................... MU-119
[5-5-2-1] Mode Setting .................................................................................... MU-119
[5-5-3] Adjust Correction Light Source ........................................................ MU-120
[5-5-4] Update Light Source Shading .......................................................... MU-121
[5-5-5] Update CCD Offset Data.................................................................. MU-122
[5-5-6] Erase IP ........................................................................................... MU-123
[5-5-7] Update 2D Offset Data ..................................................................... MU-124
[5-5-8] Update Shading Data ....................................................................... MU-125
[5-5-8-1] Update Shading and Sensitivity Data .............................................. MU-125
[5-5-8-1-1] Mode Setting .................................................................................. MU-125
[5-5-8-2] Update Shading Data ....................................................................... MU-127
[5-5-8-2-1] Mode Setting .................................................................................. MU-127
[5-5-9] Updating the X-Ray Damage Data .................................................. MU-128
[5-6]
Display Scanner Temperature .......................................................... MU-129
[5-7]
Image Re-Output ............................................................................. MU-130
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
0.15
0.16
Maintenance Utility (MU)
[6]
Software Check ....................................................................MU-131
[6-1]
Display MAC Address ...................................................................... MU-131
[7]
For Design ............................................................................MU-132
4.5
PING .....................................................................................MU-133
4.6
MON .....................................................................................MU-134
4.7
FTP .......................................................................................MU-136
4.8
INSTALL ...............................................................................MU-137
4.9
VERSION UP .......................................................................MU-138
4.10
EDIT HISTORY ....................................................................MU-139
4.11
EDIT CONFIGURATION ......................................................MU-142
4.12
EDIT CL NAME ....................................................................MU-145
4.13
BACKUP ...............................................................................MU-145
4.14
RESTORE ............................................................................MU-147
4.15
I/O TRACE EXPERT ............................................................MU-149
4.16
ERROR DB ..........................................................................MU-151
4.17
ALL RUs SETTING UNINSTALL ..........................................MU-154
4.18
ALL RUs SETTING VERSION UP .......................................MU-155
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
0.16
0.17
Service Parts List (SP)
Service Parts List (SP)
How to Use Service Parts List ...............................................................SP-1
09B.a EXPOSURE AID (GONAD PROTECTOR)/OPTION 2-1 ........SP-31
INDEX ..................................................................................................SP-2
09B.b EXPOSURE AID (GONAD PROTECTOR)/OPTION 2-2 ........SP-32
01A
EXPOSURE UNIT COVER 1 ....................................................SP-3
09C
EXPOSURE AID (CASSETTE HOLDER)/OPTION 3 .............SP-33
01B
EXPOSURE UNIT COVER 2 ....................................................SP-4
09D
EXPOSURE AID (PATIENT AID BELT)/OPTION 4 .................SP-34
02A
IP MOVEMENT MECHANISM 1 ...............................................SP-5
09E
EXPOSURE AID (LONG CASSETTE HOLDER/OPTION 5 ...SP-35
02B
IP MOVEMENT MECHANISM 2 ...............................................SP-6
09F
EXPOSURE AID (AUXILIARY GRID HANDLE)/OPTION 6 ....SP-36
02C
IP MOVEMENT MECHANISM 3 ...............................................SP-7
10
PHOTO-TIMER/OPTION ........................................................SP-37
03
SCANNER UNIT/ERASURE UNIT ............................................SP-8
11
GRID/OPTION .........................................................................SP-38
04A
SUBSCANNING MECHANISM 1 ............................................SP-10
12
CABLE.....................................................................................SP-39
04B
SUBSCANNING MECHANISM 2 ............................................SP-11
13
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ...............................................................SP-40
04C
SUBSCANNING MECHANISM 3 ............................................SP-12
14
PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE ...............................................SP-51
05A
BUCKY 1 .................................................................................SP-13
15
TABLE OF SCREWS/WASHERS INDICATION SYMBOLS ...SP-55
05B
BUCKY 2 .................................................................................SP-14
16
LIST OF QUICK WEARING PARTS ........................................SP-55
05C
BUCKY 3 .................................................................................SP-16
17
JIG ...........................................................................................SP-56
06A
EXPOSURE UNIT FRAME/WIRING 1 ....................................SP-17
06B
EXPOSURE UNIT FRAME/WIRING 2 ....................................SP-18
06C
EXPOSURE UNIT FRAME/WIRING 3 ....................................SP-19
07A
ELEVATION UNIT COVER ......................................................SP-21
07B
ELEVATION UNIT MAIN BODY 1 ...........................................SP-23
07C
ELEVATION UNIT MAIN BODY 2 ...........................................SP-24
07D
ELEVATION UNIT (OPERATION PANEL&SWITCH) ..............SP-25
07E
X RAY TUBE ELEVATION INTERLOCK/OPTION ..................SP-27
08
CONTROLLER UNIT ..............................................................SP-28
09A
EXPOSURE AID (GRIP HANDLE)/OPTION 1 ........................SP-30
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
0.17
0.18
Preventive Maintenance (PM)
Preventive Maintenance (PM)
1.
Preventive Maintenance Program .................................. PM-1
8.
Removing the Grid Support Assembly ........................ PM-20
1.1
How to Use the Preventive Maintenance Volume .................... PM-1
8.1
For units of “#20001 to #24999” ............................................. PM-20
1.2
Notation of Age ......................................................................... PM-1
8.2
For units of "#25001 or later” .................................................. PM-21
1.3
Preventive Maintenance Program List ..................................... PM-2
1.3.1
1.3.2
Maintenance Program at the Age of 0.5, 1.5, 2.5, 3.5, 4.5 and
5.5 Years ............................................................................................. PM-3
Maintenance Program at the Age of 1, 3 and 5 Years ......................... PM-4
1.3.3
Maintenance Program at the Age of 2 and 4 Years ............................ PM-4
9.
Cleaning the Erasure Filter or Replacing the
Erasure Unit .................................................................... PM-23
9.1
Cleaning the Erasure Filter..................................................... PM-23
9.2
Replacing the Erasure Unit .................................................... PM-28
2.
Checking the Error Log ................................................... PM-5
10. Test Conveyance ............................................................ PM-29
3.
Checking the Erasure Lamp Lighting Count ................. PM-7
11. Cleaning the Interior of the Machine ............................ PM-33
4.
Checking IP Exposure Count .......................................... PM-8
12. Cleaning the SUS Belts and Their Belt Pulleys ........... PM-34
5.
Checking for Image Problems ........................................ PM-9
5.1
Checking for Irregularities, Density Problems, and Sensitivity
Problems .................................................................................. PM-9
5.2
Updating the X-ray Damage Correction Data........................... PM-9
5.3
Checking the Format (Subscan Length)................................. PM-11
5.4
Checking the Format (Subscan Start Point) ........................... PM-13
5.5
Checking for False Images and Problems in Read Center .... PM-14
5.6
Checking the Film Character Format Information .................. PM-15
6.
Setting the Termination Mode ....................................... PM-16
7.
Removing the Exposure Unit Front Cover................... PM-18
012-201-09E
13. Reinstalling the Grid Support Assembly ..................... PM-35
13.1
For units of “#20001 to #24999” ............................................. PM-35
13.2
For units of "#25001 or later” .................................................. PM-37
14. Checking the Interlocks (1) ........................................... PM-40
14.1
Checking the Exposure Unit Front Cover Laser Safety
Interlock Switches (SH3 and SH4) during Bootup.................. PM-40
14.2
Checking the Exposure Unit Front Cover Laser Safety
Interlock Switches (SH3 and SH4) during the Routine Mode .. PM-41
15. Reinstalling the Exposure Unit Front Cover................ PM-44
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
0.18
0.19
Preventive Maintenance (PM)
16. Checking the Interlocks (2) ........................................... PM-45
16.1
Checking the Patient Protection Descent Prevention
Interlock Switches (MSH2 and MSH3) ................................... PM-45
16.2
Checking the Emergency Stop Switch ................................... PM-45
16.3
Checking the Grid Replacement Cover Interlock Switches
(MSH1 and MSH12) ............................................................... PM-46
16.4
Checking the Expos ure Un it Elevation Upper- Limit Interlock
Switch (MSJ 1), th e Exposure Unit Elevation Lower-Limit Interlock
Switch (MSJ2), and the Exposure Unit Temporary Stop Interlock
Switch (MSJ3) ............................................................................PM-47
16.5
Checking the Grip Handle Elevation Upper-Limit/Lower-Limit
Interlock Switches (MSH6 and MSH7) and the Grip Handle
Collision Prevention Proximity Switch (MSH8) ....................... PM-49
17. Delta Y Calculation Verification and TwoDimensional Offset Data Update .................................. PM-51
18. Checking for Image Problems ...................................... PM-55
19. Clearing the Error Log ................................................... PM-56
20. Resetting the Erasure Lamp Lighting Count ............... PM-58
21. Cleaning around the Machine and the Exterior Cover .. PM-59
22. Checking for Improper Protective Grounding ............. PM-60
23. Checking the Gonad Protector ..................................... PM-61
24. Checking the Patient Aid Belt (Only in Japan) ............ PM-62
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
0.19
0.20
Installation (IN)
Installation (IN)
1.
Specifications of Machine ................................................. IN-1
2.
Installation Work Flowchart .............................................. IN-6
3.
Preparation for Installation ............................................... IN-8
3.1
Preinstallation Work ...................................................................IN-8
3.2
Marking the Machine Main Body Installation Position ................IN-8
3.3
Unloading ...................................................................................IN-9
3.4
Preparation for Transfer ........................................................... IN-11
3.5
Transfer ....................................................................................IN-14
3.6
Checking the Items Supplied....................................................IN-15
3.6.1
3.6.2
3.7
List of Clamped Location ..........................................................IN-19
3.7.1
3.7.2
4.
For units of “#20001 to #24999” ........................................................... IN-15
For units of "#25001 or later” ............................................................... IN-17
For units of “#20001 to #24999” ........................................................... IN-19
For units of "#25001 or later” ............................................................... IN-20
Installing the Machine Main Body .................................. IN-21
4.1
Transfer to Installation Position ................................................IN-21
4.2
Adjusting the Exposure Unit Orientation and Machine Main
Body Tilt ....................................................................................IN-22
4.3
Anchoring the Machine Main Body...........................................IN-25
5.
Removing the Elevation Unit Covers and Unclamping ... IN-28
6.
Unclamping Inside the Elevation Unit ............................ IN-32
7.
Checking Fuses on the ELV21A Board .......................... IN-33
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
8.
9.
Checking Voltage and Connecting the Power Supply .. IN-34
8.1
Checking and Changing the Cable Terminal (J-TB3)
Connection ...............................................................................IN-34
8.2
Routing and Securing the Power Cable ...................................IN-35
8.3
Connecting the Power Cable of the Machine Main Body .........IN-37
8.4
Checking the Wiring Connections and Connecting to the
Distribution Switchboard...........................................................IN-38
Installing the Elevation Switch (Hand Switch) .............. IN-39
10. Installing the Optional Items (1)...................................... IN-40
10.1
Installing the Foot Switch .........................................................IN-40
10.2
Installing the Motor-Driven Grip Handle (Elevation Unit)..........IN-40
11. Removing the Exposure Unit Front Cover..................... IN-41
12. Removing and Unclamping the Grid Support
Assembly .......................................................................... IN-43
12.1
For units of “#20001 to #24999” ...............................................IN-43
12.2
For units of "#25001 or later” ....................................................IN-45
13. Unclamping the Subscanning Unit and
Replacing the Label ......................................................... IN-48
14. Checking the Exposure Unit Fuses ................................ IN-57
15. Reinstalling the Grid Support Assembly ....................... IN-58
15.1
15.2
For units of “#20001 to #24999” ...............................................IN-58
For units of "#25001 or later” ....................................................IN-60
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
0.20
0.21
Installation (IN)
16. Installing the Optional Items (2)...................................... IN-63
26. Checking Fan Operation.................................................. IN-85
16.1
Installing the Side Grip Handle .................................................IN-63
16.2
Installing the Patient Aid Belt ....................................................IN-63
16.3
Installing the Gonad Protector ..................................................IN-63
28. Adjusting the Height of Motor-Driven Grip Handle ....... IN-87
16.4
Installing the Photo-Timer Kit ...................................................IN-63
29. Installing the Optional Items (3)...................................... IN-88
17. Reinstalling the Exposure Unit Front Cover.................. IN-64
18. Changing the Operation Panel Attachment Location........IN-65
19. Changing the Cable Routing Path .................................. IN-66
20. Removing the Controller Unit Covers ............................ IN-67
21. Checking the Board Connection and Fuses of the
Controller Unit .................................................................. IN-68
22. Connecting the Cables between the Machine Main
Body and Controller Unit................................................. IN-69
23. Securing the Controller Unit and Handling Excess
Cables ............................................................................... IN-73
24. Installing the CL ............................................................... IN-76
25. Installing the RU Software............................................... IN-77
25.1
Setting the IP Address ..............................................................IN-77
25.2
Setting the CL and Checking Connection.................................IN-79
25.3
Installing the RU PC-TOOL ......................................................IN-79
25.4
Installing the RU Software ........................................................IN-80
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
27. Attaching the Grid and Adjusting the Bucky Timer ...... IN-86
29.1
Installing the Tube Interlock (Auto Tracking) ............................IN-88
30. Reinstalling the Elevation Unit Cover and
Replacing the Label ......................................................... IN-89
31. Reinstalling the Controller Unit Cover ........................... IN-91
32. Installing the Hand Rail (for Use of the Motor-Driven
Grip Handle) and Applying the Label ............................. IN-92
33. Checking the Interlocks................................................... IN-93
33.1
Checking the Exposure Unit Front Cover Laser Safety
Interlock Switches (SH3 and SH4) during Bootup....................IN-94
33.2
Checking the Exposure Unit Front Cover Laser Safety
Interlock Switches (SH3 and SH4) during the Routine Mode...IN-95
33.3
Checking the Patient Protection Descent Prevention
Interlock Switches (MSH2 and MSH3) .....................................IN-99
33.4
Checking the Emergency Stop Switch .....................................IN-99
33.5
Checking the Grid Replacement Cover Interlock Switches
(MSH1 and MSH12) ...............................................................IN-100
33.6
Checking the Expos ure Un it Elevation Upper- Limit Interlock
Switch (MSJ 1), th e Exposure Unit Elevation Lower-Limit Interlock
Switch (MSJ2), and the Exposure Unit Temporary Stop Interlock
Switch (MSJ3) ............................................................................IN-101
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
0.21
0.22
Installation (IN)
33.7
Checking the Grip Handle Elevation Upper-Limit/Lower-Limit
Interlock Switches (MSH6 and MSH7) and the Grip Handle
Collision Prevention Proximity Switch (MSH8) .......................IN-103
34. Checking for Image Problems ...................................... IN-105
Appendix 1. Installing and Removing the
Motor-Driven Grip Handle ..................... Appx IN 1-1
Appendix 2. Installing and Removing the
Foot Switch ........................................... Appx IN 2-1
34.1
Checking for Irregularities, Density Problems, and
Sensitivity Problems ...............................................................IN-105
34.2
Checking and Adjusting the Format (Subscan Length) ..........IN-105
Appendix 3. Installing and Removing the Side
Grip Handle ............................................ Appx IN 3-1
34.3
Procedures for Checking and Adjusting the Format
(Subscan Start Point) .............................................................IN-108
34.4
Checking for False Images, and Problems in Read Center
and Film Character Format Information ................................. IN-111
Appendix 4. Installing and Removing the Patient
Aid Belt (Only in Japan) ........................ Appx IN 4-1
35. Checking the Error Log ................................................. IN-113
36. Installing the Optional Items (4).................................... IN-115
36.1
Installing the Long Cassette Holder ....................................... IN-115
36.2
Installing the Auxiliary Grip Handle......................................... IN-115
Appendix 5. Installing and Removing the
Gonad Protector .................................... Appx IN 5-1
Appendix 6. Installing and Removing the
Photo-Timer Kit...................................... Appx IN 6-1
Appendix 6.1 Repositioning the Rear Cover of the
Exposure Unit .....................................................Appx IN 6-1
Appendix 6.2 Components of Photo-Timer Kit ..........................Appx IN 6-7
Appendix 6.3 Installing and Removing the Photomultiplier
Box for the Photo-Timer ....................................Appx IN 6-12
Appendix 6.3.1 Photomultiplier Box for Use with Toshiba
Photo-Timer (1ch) .........................................................Appx IN 6-12
Appendix 6.3.2 Photomultiplier Box for Use with Toshiba
Photo-Timer (2ch) ......................................................Appx IN 6-14.1
Appendix 6.3.3 Photomultiplier Box for Use with Toshiba
Photo-Timer (Semiconductor).......................................Appx IN 6-15
Appendix 6.4 Installing and Removing the Photo-Timer .........Appx IN 6-16
Appendix 6.4.1
Appendix 6.4.2
Appendix 6.4.3
Appendix 6.4.4
012-201-09E
Toshiba Photo-Timer (1ch) ...........................................Appx IN 6-16
Toshiba Photo-Timer (2ch) ...........................................Appx IN 6-22
Toshiba Photo-Timer (Semiconductor) .........................Appx IN 6-24
Hitachi Photo-Timer (1 ch and 2 ch) .............................Appx IN 6-28
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
0.22
0.23
Installation (IN)
Appendix 6.4.5
Appendix 6.4.6
Appendix 6.4.7
Appendix 6.4.8
Appendix 6.4.9
Hitachi Photo-Timer (Ion Chamber AID) .......................Appx IN 6-30
Shimadzu Photo-Timer (Ion Chamber 4ch) ..................Appx IN 6-42
COMET Photo-Timer (3ch) ...........................................Appx IN 6-45
Siemens Photo-Timer (3ch) ..........................................Appx IN 6-56
Phillips Photo-Timer (3ch) ............................................Appx IN 6-66
Appendix 7.
Installing and Removing the
Tube Interlock (Auto Tracking) ........... Appx IN 7-1
Appendix 8.
Supplementary Information about
Tube Interlock (Auto Collimation) ..........Appx IN 8-1
Appendix 9.
Supplementary Information on
X-ray Controller ................................... Appx IN 9-1
Appendix 10. Installing the Long Cassette Holder Appx IN 10-1
Appendix 11. Preparatory Procedures to Be
Followed when Clearance to the
Machine Rear is less than 100 mm ......Appx IN 11-1
Appendix 12. Changing the Operation Panel
Attachment Location ......................... Appx IN 12-1
Appendix 12.1
For Units of "#21272 or Earlier" .....................Appx IN 12-1
Appendix 12.2
For Units of "#21273 or Later" .....................Appx IN 12-11
Appendix 13. Changing the Cable Routing Path .... Appx IN 13-1
Appendix 14. Requirements Regarding Locally
Obtained Parts ................................... Appx IN 14-1
Appendix 15. Installing/Removing the Auxiliary
Grip Handle ........................................ Appx IN 15-1
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
0.23
0.24
Performance Check (PC)
Performance Check (PC)
Performance Checklist of FCR VELOCITY U .........................PC-1
Installation Information .......................................................................... PC-1
Checklist ............................................................................................... PC-1
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
0.24
0.25
Performance Check (PC)
BLANK PAGE
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
0.25
0.26
Performance Check (PC)
BLANK PAGE
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
0.26
Control Sheet
Issue date
CR-IR 364 (Type U) Service Manual
Revision number
04.15.2003
07.31.2003
11.30.2003
05.30.2004
09.30.2004
11.30.2004
07.15.2006
10.02.2006
00
01
02
03
04
05
07
08
06.10.2008
09
Reason
New release (FM3976)
Revision (FM4055)
Revision (FM4147)
Revision (FM4357)
Revision (FM4437)
Revision (FM4505)
Revision (FM4915)
Change of Corporate Name and
Corporate Logo (FM4977)
Revision (FM5369)
Safety Precaution
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Pages affected
All pages
All pages
All pages
1-3, 5, 7
1
5, 7-15
All pages
5-17
1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 9-19
Safety Precaution-1
1.
Safety Precautions
Warnings, operating precautions, and instructions should be observed to avoid
possible physical hazards and serious accidents that may occur during installation and
servicing.
Labels and name plates that describe relevant precautions are attached to the
machine. The instructions on such labels and name plates should also be observed
while installation/servicing procedures are performed.
1.1
General Precautions
Electrical System Components/Parts
- Be sure to turn OFF the power circuit breaker for the machine main body and the
circuit breaker on the distribution switchboard before an inspection or adjustment.
If an inspection or adjustment procedure is performed while the power is ON, you
may experience an electric shock, burn, short circuit, or machine malfunction. Since
some parts are not fully discharged (such as the power supply) or remain at a high
temperature (such as the lamp section) even after the power is turned OFF, exercise
due care not to touch them. Inspection or adjustment procedures that are to be
performed with the power turned ON must be completed while exercising due care
to avoid electric shock and short circuit, as instructed in this service manual.
- To restart the machine, wait twenty seconds or longer after turning OFF the power.
If you turn the power back ON shortly after power OFF, the machine may fail to start
up normally.
- When servicing a board, be sure to wear an antistatic wristband to ground your
body. If your body is not grounded, static buildup on your body may damage
electronic components on the board.
Drive System Components/Parts
- Be sure to turn OFF the power circuit breaker for the machine main body and the
circuit breaker on the distribution switchboard before an inspection or adjustment.
Inspection or adjustment procedures that are to be performed with the power turned
ON must be completed while exercising due care as instructed in this service
manual.
- To avoid safety hazards, never touch rotating components or parts. Exercise due
care so that your hands, feet, hair, and clothing are not caught in the machine.
Heavy Objects
Scanner System Components/Parts
Observe the following precautions for all the scanner system components and parts.
Failure to observe the precautions may degrade the image quality.
- When handling the scanner system components or parts, never touch surfaces
other than specified portions.
- Do not attempt to remove dust or soil by performing a cleaning procedure other than
those specified.
- Always handle the scanner system components and parts in a clean environment.
- When servicing a scanner system component or part, be sure to wear an antistatic
wristband to ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static buildup on your
body may damage electronic components of the scanner system.
Grounding
Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power cable and
additional protective ground wire connections and securing the parts with retaining
screws. To maintain safety, ensure that the parts and retaining screws removed for
servicing purposes are restored to states existing upon installation. After the parts and
retaining screws are restored to the above-mentioned states, follow the procedures set
forth in this service manual to verify that the retaining screws are securely tightened to
properly secure the parts.
Other Precautions
- Associated equipment and sub-assemblies do not in any way enhance the safety of
this unit.
- When performing a servicing procedure while the power is turned ON with a
protective housing removed, carefully proceed with the procedure while observing
the instructions described in this service manual. Further, exercise care not to drop
screws or other fasteners into the machine. If any fastener is dropped, be sure to
collect it.
- While the machine is powered, never remove or install any component/part because
you may experience an electric shock, burn, or short circuit.
- Keep clean the product name plates, safety standards labels, product serial number
labels, caution labels, and other labels attached to the machine, and do not peel
them or put another name plate or label over them.
- Upon completion of the servicing procedures, put the protective housing, screws,
and other fasteners back to their original locations and secure them in place.
When removing or installing a heavy object, pay due attention to your working posture
and get an assistant(s) as needed. Also, use suitable ancillary gear as appropriate.
Safety Devices
For safety devices, such as fuses, circuit breakers, interlock switches, and protective
housing (exposure unit front cover), their safety features should always be enabled.
Do not make any alternation or modification that may impair their functionality.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Safety Precaution-1
Safety Precaution-2
Interlock Defeating Tool
If you are forced to operate the machine while the exposure unit front cover is
removed, defeat (release) the interlock with the interlock defeating tool, which is a
special tool supplied with the machine.
In the interest of safety, do not touch any rotating part. Also, exercise care so that
your hands, feet, hair, and clothing are not caught in the machine.
After completion of servicing, be sure to remove the interlock defeating tool.
- Interlock defeating jig cable in the exposure unit
- Patient protection switch detector defeating cable
1.2
Precautions Against Laser Radiation
As indicated in the certification and indication label attached on the elevation unit
right-hand side cover of the machine, the machine complies with “Laser Products Conformance with IEC 60825-1 (Am. 2); Final Guidance for Industry and FDA (Laser
Notice No. 50).” The image reader incorporates a laser with a maximum output of 50
mW (Class 3B, semiconductor laser having a wavelength of 650-662 nm, red visible
light). Therefore, perform servicing tasks while observing the instructions set forth in
this service manual.
Precautions Against Laser Radiation Exposure
Observe the following precautions to avoid exposure to laser radiation:
Ensuring that the exposure unit front cover is set in position with the
grid replacement cover closed while the machine is powered
The machine involves laser beam radiation in a horizontal direction so that the laser
beam is likely to enter your eye. Therefore, a safety feature is incorporated so that
the laser is forcibly turned OFF if the exposure unit front cover is removed or the grid
replacement cover is open. If it is necessary to turn ON the power with these covers
removed, observe the instructions set forth in this service manual and exercise due
care to avoid laser radiation exposure.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Safety Precaution-2
Safety Precaution-3
Procedures that require precautions against laser radiation
When performing the following procedures, thoroughly observe the instructions set
forth in this service manual to avoid laser radiation exposure. Be sure to wear safety
goggles while you perform the procedures.
- Shifting the IP or moving the scanner unit up or down while the power circuit breaker
is turned ON with the exposure unit front cover removed and the grid replacement
cover open
- Removing the scanner unit to check for restoration
- Replacing or cleaning the subscanning unit parts
- Replacing the IP
After completion of a servicing procedure, thoroughly reinstall the removed protective
housing, screws, and other fasteners in their original positions to prevent laser beam
leakage out of the machine.
Precautions for Interlock Defeating Tool Use for Laser Safety
Assurance
The machine incorporates an interlock, which turns OFF the laser output circuit to
prevent exposure to laser radiation when the exposure unit front cover is removed.
If you are forced to perform any servicing procedure while the power is turned ON with
the exposure unit front cover removed, it is necessary to defeat the interlock with the
special interlock defeating tool.
After completion of servicing, be sure to remove the interlock defeating tool.
Things that should not be done to avoid exposure to laser radiation
Observe the following rules to avoid exposure to laser radiation:
- Never fail to observe the procedures set forth in the service manual.
- Never place your finger or other part of your body in an area exposed to a laser
beam.
- Never place a mirror or other light-reflecting article in the optical path of a laser
beam.
- Never change the optical path of a laser beam.
- Never remove the scanner unit while the laser is activated.
- When checking the scanner unit while it is uncovered, never stare at the secondary
scattered laser light. Also, do not forget to wear safety goggles.
Preventive maintenance for keeping the machine in compliance
In order to keep the machine in compliance with laser safety standards, perform
preventive maintenance programs described in "Preventive Maintenance Volume" at
intervals specified.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Safety Precaution-3
Safety Precaution-4
1.3
Precautions on Patient Environment
Before the machine is installed, the supervisor at the machine installation site (the
hospital’s director) should check to see whether the installation place meets the
requirements for the patient environment.
Additional Protective Grounding
If the CR-IR 364 (Type U) is installed in the patient environment with the connected
equipment in the non-medically used room, they should be connected via additional
protecting grounding wires.
Definitions of “patient environment”, “medically-used room”, and “non-medically used
room” are given below.
2.
Labels
2.1
Laser Precaution Labels
2.1.1
Laser Precaution Label Attachment Locations
Below are illustrated the protective housings and attachment locations of laser
precaution labels, as specified in "Laser Products - Conformance with IEC 60825-1
(Am. 2); Final Guidance for Industry and FDA (Laser Notice No. 50)" issued by the
FDA of the U.S.
Patient environment
Patient environment is the area for the patient to receive medical procedures (treatment,
tests, diagnosis, monitoring). It is the space measuring 2.5 m in all four directions and
2.5 m in height from the area of the patient’s body.
It excludes the space traveled by the patient to reach the medically-used room.
Medically-used room
Room equipped with protective grounding (medical use outlet or medical use
grounding terminal) implemented by the medical grounding method. The protective
grounding inside the medically-used room is equipotential, and the protective
grounding of this medically-used room is equipotential to that in the other medicallyused room.
Generally, a portion of the medically-used room is the patient environment.
Non-medically used room
Areas outside the medically-used room are considered the non-medically used room.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Safety Precaution-4
Safety Precaution-5
2.1.2
List of Labels
HHS Certification and Identification Label
SNs: 20607 or later
SNs: 25029 or later
SNs: 20606 or earlier
SNs: 25028 or earlier
012-201-08E
10.02.2006 FM4977
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Safety Precaution-5
Safety Precaution-6
IEC/EN60825-1:2001 Class 3B Panel Label #2
2.2
Other Labels
2.2.1
Attachment Locations for Ratings Indication Label
and Other Labels
Cover
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Safety Precaution-6
Safety Precaution-7
Terminal block
Ratings Indication Label
REFERENCE
The serial number is represented by lower five digits of an eight-digit number indicated
on the ratings name plate.
For use in Japan
SNs: 20001-20003, 20005, 20007-20011, 20013-20018, 20020-20023, 20025-20034,
20036-20045, 20047, 20048, 20050-20054, 20056-20061, 20064, 20067,
20068, 20070-20078, 20080-20084, 20086-20089, 20091, 20093-20098,
20101-20105, 20107, 20110, 20111, 20113-20115, 20120, 20124, 20125,
20127-20129, 20132, 20134, 20138-20140, 20142, 20149, 20151
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Safety Precaution-7
Safety Precaution-8
SNs: 20006, 20012, 20024, 20035, 20049, 20063, 20066, 20079, 20106, 20109,
20112, 20119, 20121, 20123, 20130, 20131, 20136, 20137, 20141, 20143-20148,
20150, 20152-20163, 20165-20185, 20187, 20188, 20190, 20191, 20193-20207,
20211, 20214, 20215, 20217, 20218, 20221-20226, 20228-20237, 20240,
20241, 20244-20248, 20250-20252, 20254-20256, 20260, 20263-20268, 20273,
20274, 20277, 20279-20283, 20285, 20287-20292, 20294-20296, 20299, 20301,
20303-20323, 20334-20361, 20367-20386, 20393-20408, 20412-20415, 20425
SNs: 20607 to 20921
SNs: 20426 to 20606
012-201-08E
10.02.2006 FM4977
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Safety Precaution-8
Safety Precaution-9
SNs: 20922 or later
012-201-09E
SNs: 21369 or later
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Safety Precaution-9
Safety Precaution-10
For use overseas
SNs: 20426 to 24999
SNs: 20019, 20046, 20055, 20065, 20069, 20090, 20092, 20108, 20122, 20126,
20133, 20135
SNs: 20062, 20085, 20099, 20100, 20116-20118, 20164, 20186, 20189, 20192,
20208-20210, 20212, 20213, 20216, 20219, 20220, 20227, 20238, 20239,
20242, 20243, 20249, 20253, 20257-20259, 20261, 20262, 20269-20272, 20275,
20276, 20278, 20284, 20286, 20293, 20297, 20298, 20300, 20302, 20324-20333,
20362-20366, 20387-20391, 20409-20411, 20416-20424
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Safety Precaution-10
Safety Precaution-11
SNs:
25001 or later
Manufacturer Label
REFERENCE
The manufacturer label is not applied to the machines having serial numbers of
#20607 and #25029 or those later than these numbers.
Electric Shock Caution Label (For Japan)
Stop Label
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Safety Precaution-11
Safety Precaution-12
Protective Ground Mark Label
Caution Label
Neutral Mark Label
EMC Application Label (For Japan)
Year of Manufacture and EFUP (Environmentally Friendly Use
Period) Label
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Safety Precaution-12
Safety Precaution-13
Grip Handle Caution Label
Gonad Protector Caution Label
Patient Aid Belt Caution Label (on the Part of the Belt) (For
Japan)
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Safety Precaution-13
Safety Precaution-14
Patient Aid Belt Caution Label (on the Part of the Elevation
Switch) (For Japan)
2.2.2
Handling Instruction Labels and Attachment
Locations
REFERENCE
No Handling Instruction labels are attached to the machine.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Safety Precaution-14
Safety Precaution-15
3.
Protective Housings Against Laser
Exposure
Even when a protective housing is removed for servicing purposes, laser beams will
never leak out from the machine unless the optical path is intentionally changed.
When you perform a scanner-related servicing procedure, exercise due care while
observing the instructions set forth in this service manual. After completion of the
procedure, thoroughly reinstall the removed protective housing, screws, and other
fasteners in their original positions.
Protective Housing of the Machine
The protective housing against laser exposure that is detachable from the machine is
illustrated below:
* The protective housing is the exposure unit front cover.
4.
CLASSIFICATION
1.
According to the type of protection against electrical shock
CLASS 1 EQUIPMENT
2.
According to the degree of protection against electrical shock
Type B APPLIED PART
3.
Protection against harmful ingress of water
Main unit: IPX0
Foot switch: IPX1
4.
According to the degree of safety of application in the presence of
a flammable anesthetics mixture with air or with oxygen or nitrous
oxide.
Equipment not suitable for use in the presence of a flammable anesthetics
mixture with air or with oxygen or nitrous oxide.
5.
According to the mode of operation
Exposure unit: Continuous Operation
Other Part of Equipment: Intermittent Operation
Duty Cycle: 1 minute ON, 3 minutes OFF for Up/Down Unit.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Safety Precaution-15
Safety Precaution-16
5.
Cautions on Electromagnetic
Waves
5.1
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for medical
devices to the IEC60601-1-2 : 1993, IEC60601-1-2 : 2001 (after 25001), Medical
Device Directive 93/42/EEC.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a typical medical installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference
to other devices in the vicinity.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to other devices, which can be
determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to
correct the interference by one or more of the following measures;
- Reorient or relocate the receiving device.
- Increase the separation between the equipment.
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
other device(s) are connected.
Consult the manufacturer or field service technician for help.
5.1.1
Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic emissions
The CR-IR364U is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified
below. The customer or the user of the CR-IR364U should assure that it is used in
such an environment.
Electromagnetic environment Emissions test
Compliance
guidance
RF emissions
The CR-IR364U uses RF energy only
CISPR 11
for its internal function. Therefore, its
RF emissions are very low and are not
Group 1
likely to cause any interference in nearby
electronic equipment.
RF emissions
CISPR 11
Class A
The CR-IR364U is suitable for use in all
establishments other than domestic and
Harmonic emissions
those directly connected to the public
Class A
IEC 61000-3-2
low-voltage power supply network that
supplies buildings used for domestic
Voltage fluctuations/
purposes.
flicker emissions
Complies
IEC 61000-3-3
Further information for IEC60601-1-2:2001 (Machines
Having Serial Numbers of #25001 or Those later than
#25001)
Model name VELOCITY U is referred to as CR-IR364U in this section.
- Medical electrical equipment needs special precautions regarding EMC and needs
to be installed and put into service according to the EMC information described as
follows.
- Portable and mobile RF communications equipment can affect medical electrical
equipment.
- The use of accessories, transducers and cables other than those specified, with the
exception of transducers and cables sold by FUJIFILM Corporation as replacement
parts for internal components, may result in increased emissions or decreased
immunity of the CR-IR364U.
List of Cables
Name
FUJIFILM Corporation
Parts code
I/F Cable
-
General Specification
TIA/EIA-568 Cat5 or more.
Straight cable of STP type.
- The CR-IR364U should not be used adjacent to or stacked with other equipment.
If adjacent or stacked use is necessary, the CR-IR364U should be observed to verify
normal operation in the configuration in which it will be used.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Safety Precaution-16
Safety Precaution-17
Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic immunity
The CR-IR364U is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The
customer or the user of the CR-IR364U should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Immunity test
Electrostatic
discharge (ESD)
IEC 61000-4-2
Electrical fast
transient/burst
IEC 61000-4-4
Surge
IEC 61000-4-5
Voltage dips, short
interruptions and
voltage variations on
power supply input
lines
IEC 61000-4-11
Power frequency
(50/60 Hz) magnetic
field
Electromagnetic
environment guidance
±6kV contact
±2kV contact
Floors should be
±4kV contact
wood, concrete or
ceramic tile. If floors
±8kV air
±6kV contact
are covered with
±2kV air
synthetic material,
±4kV air
the relative humidity
±8kV air
should be at least
30%.
±2kV for power supply ±2kV for power supply Mains power quality
lines
lines
should be that of a
±1kV for input/output ±1kV for input/output typical commercial or
lines
lines
hospital environment.
±1kV differential mode ±1kV differential mode Mains power quality
should be that of a
±2kV common mode ±2kV common mode typical commercial or
hospital environment.
< 5 % UT
< 5 % UT
Mains power quality
(>95 % dip in UT)
(>95 % dip in UT )
should be that of a
for 0.5 cycle
for 0.5 cycle
typical commercial or
hospital environment.
40 % UT
40 % UT
If the user of the CR(60 % dip in UT )
(60 % dip in UT )
IR364U requires
for 5 cycles
for 5 cycles
continued operation
during power mains
70 % UT
70 % UT
interruptions, it is
(30 % dip in UT )
(30 % dip in UT )
recommended that
for 25 cycles
for 25 cycles
the CR-IR364U be
powered from an
< 5 % UT
< 5 % UT
uninterruptible power
supply or a battery.
(>95 % dip in UT )
(>95 % dip in UT )
for 5 s
for 5 s
IEC 60601 test level
3 A/m
Compliance level
3 A/m
IEC 61000-4-8
Power frequency
magnetic fields
should be at levels
characteristic of a
typical location in a
typical commercial or
hospital environment.
Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic immunity
The CR-IR364U is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The
customer or the user of the CR-IR364U should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Immunity test
Conducted RF
IEC 61000-4-6
Compliance
Electromagnetic environment - guidance
level
3 Vrms
Portable and mobile RF communications
equipment should be used no closer to any
150kHz - 80MHz
part of the CR-IR364U, including cables,
than the recommended separation distance
calculated from the equation applicable to
the frequency of the transmitter.
Recommended separation distance
Radiated RF
3 V/m
IEC 61000-4-3
80MHz - 2.5GHz
3 V/m
d = 1.2
d = 1.2
80 MHz - 800 MHz
d = 2.3
800 MHz - 2.5 GHz
where P is the maximum output power rating
of the transmitter in watts (W) according to
the transmitter manufacturer and d is the
recommended separation distance in metres
(m).
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters,
as determined by an electromagnetic site
survey,a should be less than the compliance
level in each frequency range.b
Interference may occur in the vicinity
of equipment marked with the following
symbol:
NOTE 1: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is
affected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.
a
Field strength from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless)
telephones and land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV
broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic
environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be
considered. If the measured field strength in the location in which the CR-IR364U is used
exceeds the applicable RF compliance, the CR-IR364U should be observed to verify normal
operation. If abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary, such
as reorienting or relocating the CR-IR364U.
b
Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strength should be less than 3 V/m.
NOTE: UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.
012-201-09E
IEC 60601 test
level
3 Vrms
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Safety Precaution-17
Safety Precaution-18
Recommended separation distances between Portable and mobile RF
communications equipment and the CR-IR364U
The CR-IR364U is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment in which
radiated RF disturbances are controlled. The customer or the user of the CR-IR364U
can help prevent electromagnetic interference by maintaining a minimum distance
between portable and mobile RF communications equipment (transmitters) and the
CR-IR364U as recommended below, according to the maximum output power of the
communications equipment.
Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter
Rated maximum
m
output power of
transmitter
150 kHz - 80 MHz 80 MHz - 800 MHz 800 MH - 2.5 GHz
W
d = 1.2
d = 1.2
d = 2.3
0.01
0.12
0.12
0.23
0.1
0.38
0.38
0.73
1
1.2
1.2
2.3
10
3.8
3.8
7.3
12
12
100
23
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the
recommended separation distance d in metres (m) can be estimated using the
equation applicable to the frequency of the transmitter, where P is the maximum
output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter
manufacturer.
5.2
Compliances of the Machines (Machines
Having Serial Numbers of #25001 or Those
later than #25001)
The following servicing components for “the machines having serial numbers of
#25001 or those later than #25001” have been modified/added.
NOTE 1: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency
range applies.
NOTE 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic
propagation is affected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects
and people.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Safety Precaution-18
Safety Precaution-19
6.
CONNECTABLE PERIPHERALS
Accessory equipment connected to the analog and digital interfaces must be certified
according to the respective IEC standards (i.e. IEC60950-1 for data processing
equipment and IEC 60601-1 for medical equipment). Furthermore all configurations
shall comply with the system standard IEC 60601-1-1. Everybody who connects
additional equipment to the signal input part or signal output part configures a medical
system, and is therefore responsible that the system complies with the requirements
of IEC 60601-1-1. If in doubt, consult the technical services department or your local
representative.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Safety Precaution-19
Control Sheet
Issue date
CR-IR 364 (Type U) Service Manual
04.15.2003
07.31.2003
11.30.2003
06.30.2004
09.30.2004
11.30.2004
07.15.2006
06.10.2008
Revision number
00
01
02
03
04
05
07
09
Reason
New release (FM3976)
Revision (FM4055)
Revision (FM4147)
Revision (FM4357)
Revision (FM4437)
Revision (FM4505)
Revision (FM4915)
Revision (FM5369)
Product Specifications
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Pages affected
All pages
All pages
All pages
1-3, 5-7
4
1
All pages
1-4, 7, 8
Product Specifications-1
1.
Specifications of Machine
Caution label for up-down operation
18
Screw
8
T4x8 (for retaining the elevation unit upper rear cover)
19
Screw
4
BR4x6 (for protecting the screw holes for the exposure
unit transit clamp against light)
20
CD-ROM
1
Machine-specific data
21
CD-ROM
1
Control software
22
Test result sheet
1
M20x160 (to be used for moving the machine main body by the
hand lifter or temporarily placing it)
23
1
FCR VELOCITY U
1
(Japan Only)
For use with the motor-driven grip handle (only when machine is
equipped with the motor-driven grip handle)
25
Instruction manual
FUJI FILM letter of
guarantee
Attached document
1
CR-IR364 (Japan Only)
26
Attached document
1
2
2
2
2
R-IP (Japan Only)
0.5A
1.0A
1.3A
1.6A
2
2.0A
2
3.2A (LM32D)
2
4.0A
2
5.0A
2
3.2A (HM32D)
2
15A
For units of “#20001 to #24999”
Machine
1
Adjuster bolt
4
Controller unit
1
Handle
1
Remarks
Standard Accessories
CASE NO.
Remarks
2
1.1.1
Machine main body
Qty.
Label
List of Components
Qty.
Item
17
1.1
Item
CASE NO.
Item
Qty.
24
Remarks
1
Anchor bolt
4
2
3
Plain washer
Plain washer
4
4
- M12x40 (for retaining the machine main body):
For units of "#20001 to #21232"
- M12x35 (for retaining the machine main body):
For units of "#21233 or later"
W16 (for retaining the machine main body)
W12 (for retaining the machine main body)
4
Spring washer
4
SW12 (for retaining the machine main body)
5
Anchor bolt
4
M8x20 (for retaining the controller unit)
6
Plain washer
4
W8 (for retaining the controller unit)
7
Spring washer
4
SW8 (for retaining the controller unit)
8
Anchor nut
4
9
Anchor nut
10
27
Fuse
28
Cable tie
1
PLT-2S (for retaining the power cable)
M12x50 (for retaining the machine main body)
29
1
Caution label for the motor-driven grip handle
4
M8x35 (for retaining the controller unit)
30
4
BQ6x15 (for retaining the motor-driven grip handle)
Cover
4
31
2
BR4x16 (for retaining the left side of the scanner unit)
11
Cover
1
32
Screw
2
B3x25 (for retaining the right side of the scanner unit)
33
Insulating material
2
12
Screw
2
34
Shaft
2
13
Screw
1
35
Spring
2
14
Aluminum clamp
1
Anchor bolt cap
For use of the elevation unit right-hand side middle cover
(used when the operation panel is mounted on the righthand side of the machine)
T3x6 (for retaining the controller unit cable bracket)
BR4x8 (For retaining the FG clamp of the elevation switch
cable)
AL-4 (for FG clamp of elevation switch cable)
Elevation hand switch
- With the motor-driven grip handle mounted:
The motor-driven grip handle elevation switch is
mounted.
- Without the motor-driven grip handle mounted:
The motor-driven grip handle elevation switch is not
mounted.
Laser class 3B panel label
Label
Hexagon bolt with
washer
Screw
36
Cap
1
M4 (for retaining the left side of the scanner unit)
Head-free shaft (for retaining the right side of the
scanner unit)
L=12 mm (for retaining the right side of the scanner
unit)
Blind cover for the elevation switch cable hole
15
Elevation switch
1
16
Label
1
012-201-09E
37
Anchor bolt (spare)
2 M12x50 (for retaining the machine main body)
Installation
38
1 1 set of seven sheets (Japan only)
completion report
Performance check
39
1 1 set of five sheets (Japan only)
sheets
Note that the cases Nos. 29 and 30 are not included for the machine without the motor-driven
grip handle mounted.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Product Specifications-1
Product Specifications-2
CASE NO.
40
41
42
Item
Attached
document
Cover
Qty.
Remarks
1
Not applicable to Japan
2
(Vacant number)
Anchor bolt cover
Optional Items
Item
Remarks
Motor-driven grip handle (hand rail
Retrofittable if not mounted.
and elevation unit)
Foot switch
Two switches can be mounted.
Elevation switch (hand switch)
Two switches can be mounted (the second switch is
optional).
Note that the type of the elevation switch depends on
whether the machine is equipped with the motor-driven grip
handle.
Side grip handle
Auxiliary grip handle
Patient aid belt
(Japan only)
Gonad protector
Photo-timer kit
Tube auto-tracking kit
1 kΩ/2 kΩ/5 kΩ/10 kΩ
X-ray auto-collimating kit
012-201-09E
X-ray camera connection cable
15 m 6 core
Grid
1.4 m/1.8 m/3 m
Cassette holder
For use in exposure by means of a standard cassette.
Long cassette holder
For use in exposure by means of a long cassette.
Power cable
15 m, 25 m (Japan only)
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Product Specifications-2
Product Specifications-3
1.1.2
For units of "#25001 or later”
CASE NO.
Machine
Item
Qty.
Machine main body
1
Adjuster bolt
4
Controller unit
1
Handle
1
Remarks
M20x160 (to be used for moving the machine main body by the
hand lifter or temporarily placing it)
For use with the motor-driven grip handle (only when machine is
equipped with the motor-driven grip handle)
Standard Accessories
CASE NO.
Item
Qty
1
Anchor bolt
4
2
3
Plain washer
Plain washer
4
4
Remarks
- M12x40 (for retaining the machine main body):
For units of "#25001 to #25184"
- M12x35 (for retaining the machine main body):
For units of "#25185 or later"
W16 (for retaining the machine main body)
W12 (for retaining the machine main body)
4
Spring washer
4
SW12 (for retaining the machine main body)
5
Anchor bolt
4
M8x20 (for retaining the controller unit)
6
Plain washer
4
W8 (for retaining the controller unit)
7
Spring washer
4
SW8 (for retaining the controller unit)
8
Anchor nut
4
M12x50 (for retaining the machine main body)
9
Anchor nut
4
M8x35 (for retaining the controller unit)
10
Cover
4
11
Cover
1
12
Screw
2
16
Label
2
Anchor bolt cap
For use of the elevation unit right-hand side middle cover
(used when the operation panel is mounted on the righthand side of the machine)
T3x6 (for retaining the controller unit cable bracket)
For retaining the FG clamp of the elevation
switch cable: 1 pcs.
BR4x8
For retaining the ground cables in the
subscanning unit: 4 pcs.
AL-4 (for FG clamp of elevation switch cable)
Elevation hand switch
- With the motor-driven grip handle mounted
The motor-driven grip handle elevation switch is
mounted.
- Without the motor-driven grip handle mounted
The motor-driven grip handle elevation switch is not
mounted.
Laser class 3B panel label
17
Label
2
Caution label for up-down operation
18
Screw
8
T4x8 (for retaining the elevation unit upper rear cover)
13
Screw
5
14
Aluminum clamp
1
15
012-201-09E
Elevation switch
1
Item
Qty
Remarks
19
Screw
4
For protecting the screw holes for the exposure
BR4x6 unit transit clamp against light: 2 pcs.
Spare: 2 pcs.
20
CD-ROM
1
Machine-specific data
21
CD-ROM
1
Control software
22
Test result sheet
1
23
Instruction manual
1
FCR VELOCITY U
24
-
1
(Vacant number)
25
-
1
(Vacant number)
26
-
1
(Vacant number)
2
0.5A
2
1.0A
2
1.3A
2
1.6A
2
2.0A
2
3.2A (LM32D)
2
4.0A
2
5.0A
2
3.2A (HM32D)
2
15A
27
Fuse
28
Cable tie
1
PLT-2S (For retaining the power cable)
29
1
Caution label for the motor-driven grip handle
4
BQ6x15 (for retaining the motor-driven grip handle)
31
Label
Hexagon bolt with
washer
Screw
2
BR4x16 (for retaining the left side of the scanner unit)
32
Screw
2
B3x25 (for retaining the right side of the scanner unit)
33
Insulating material
2
34
Shaft
2
35
Spring
2
36
Cap
1
37
Anchor bolt (spare)
2
38
-
-
M4 (for retaining the left side of the scanner unit)
Head-free shaft (for retaining the right side of the
scanner unit)
L=12 mm (for retaining the right side of the scanner
unit)
Blind cover for the elevation switch cable hole
- M12x50 (for retaining the machine main body):
For units of "#25001 to #25184"
- M12x45 (for retaining the machine main body):
For units of "#25185 or later"
(Vacant number)
30
39
(Vacant number)
Note that the cases Nos. 29 and 30 are not included for the machine without the motor-driven
grip handle mounted.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Product Specifications-3
Product Specifications-4
CASE NO.
40
41
42
Item
Attached
document
Ground cable
Cover
Qty.
Remarks
Item
1
2
1
Optional Items
For subscanning unit
Anchor bolt cover
Remarks
Motor-driven grip handle (hand
rail and elevation unit)
Retrofittable if not mounted.
Foot switch
Two switches can be mounted.
Elevation switch (hand switch)
Two switches can be mounted (the second switch is
optional).
Note that the type of the elevation switch depends on
whether the machine is equipped with the motor-driven
grip handle.
Side grip handle
Auxiliary grip handle
Gonad protector
Photo-timer kit
Tube auto-tracking kit
1 kΩ/2 kΩ/5 kΩ/10 kΩ
X-ray auto-collimating kit
012-201-09E
X-ray camera connection cable
15 m 6 core
Grid
1.4 m/1.8 m/3 m
Cassette holder
For use in exposure by means of a standard cassette.
Long cassette holder
For use in exposure by means of a long cassette.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Product Specifications-4
Product Specifications-5
1.2
Product Specifications
Maximum Power Consumption
560W
Dimensions, Weight, and Center of Gravity
Dimensions
Machine Main Body: W645 × D450 × H1,835 (mm)
Controller Unit:
W260 × D550 × H470 (mm)
Noise
Standby:
Operation:
Single-shot noise:
1.3
50 dB or less
55 dB or less
70 dB or less
Warm-up Time
Time interval between the instant at which the power is turned ON and the instant at which
the "Ready" LED comes on (conditions: at a temperature of 25°C, a relative humidity of
50%, and an input voltage of 200 VAC).
Image reader alone: Within 2 minutes or so
*1
{Product Specifications: 1.7_Installation Space
Controller unit installation location}
Weight
Machine Main Body (standard configuration): 220 kg approx.
Machine Main Body (with full options):
240 kg approx.
Controller Unit:
21 kg approx.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Product Specifications-5
Product Specifications-6
Center of Gravity
The center of gravity is factory positioned as indicated below:
Height (from bottom): 712 mm
From rear:
191 mm
1.4
Means for Moving and Fixing the Machine
Moving
Use the adjuster bolts and hand lifter (recommended).
Fixing
- Machine main body: Four anchor bolts, four anchor nuts
- Controller unit:
Four anchor bolts, four anchor nuts
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Product Specifications-6
Product Specifications-7
1.5
Environmental Conditions
Climate Conditions
Operating
Temperature:
15-30°C
Humidity:
40-80 % Rh
Atmospheric pressure: 750-1,060 hPa
Non-operating
Temperature:
0-45°C
Humidity:
10-90 % Rh (Without moisture condensation)
Atmospheric pressure: 750-1,060 hPa
Transit/storage
Temperature:
-10-50°C
Humidity:
10-90 % Rh (Without moisture condensation)
Atmospheric pressure: 750-1,060 hPa
1.6
Electrical Specifications
Frequency
50 Hz - 60 Hz
Input Voltage
200/220/230/240 V~ ±10 % (single phase: two wire, or three wire)
Power Source and Grounding Conditions
Furnish a 250 V-20 A or higher rating circuit breaker that is dedicated to the machine.
For grounding purposes, connect the machine to a protective ground wire of an indoor
wiring system.
Power Cable Wiring Diagram
Single phase: Two wire
Vibration Conditions on the Floor (Installation Surface)
Frequency of 10 to 55 Hz, Amplitude of 0.0075 mm or less
Single phase: Three wire
Variable Magnetic Field
DC 0.3 Gauss or less
Installation Site Conditions
Avoid the following installation sites:
- Places where the temperature changes drastically
- Places near heat sources such as heaters
- Places where water leakage or machine submersion may occur
- Places where a corrosive gas may be generated
- Dusty places
- Places where the machine is subject to constant or excessive vibration or shock
- Places exposed to direct sunlight
- Places where no ventilation equipment is provided
012-201-09E
Capacity
1kVA or less
Rated Amperage
5.0 A at 200/220/230/240 V~ ±10 %
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Product Specifications-7
Product Specifications-8
Overload Protection
Circuit breaker incorporated
Power Consumption
1.7
Installation Space
Machine Main Body
<Front-rear direction>
Approx. 330 W or less in steady state
Grounding Method
The machine shall be grounded to the protective ground line of the indoor wiring.
I/F Cable
{IN:24._Installing the CL}
{INAppx:14._Requirements Regarding Locally Obtained Parts}
REFERENCES
*1: When the following photo-timers are installed, the distance between the exposure
unit surface and IP surface is 28.5 mm.
- Hitachi's photo-timer (ion chamber AID)
- COMET's photo-timer (3ch)
- Siemens' photo-timer (ion chamber, 3ch)
- Philips' photo-timer (ion chamber, 3ch)
*2: The focal distance between the X-ray tube and grid surface varies with the grid
type.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Product Specifications-8
Product Specifications-9
<Left-right direction>
<Height direction>
Controller Unit
The controller unit may be serviced with its bottom portion (excess cable
accommodation box) separated.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Product Specifications-9
Product Specifications-10
Controller Unit Installation Location
The controller unit can be installed to the right or left of the machine main body.
The maximum permissible distance between the controller unit and machine main
body is illustrated below.
NOTE
The controller unit cannot always be installed within the cable length range indicated
below depending on the cable routing between the machine main body and controller
unit. Therefore, confirm the installation location of the controller unit before securing it
by performing its anchoring procedure.
When the controller unit faces
forward
1.8
Disposal of Machine
Disposing of the equipment should be in compliance with regulations or ordinance of
the country.
Remove the ATX board (motherboard), which contains a battery, from the machine
before it is disposed of.
Be sure to return the removed ATX board (motherboard) to the Parts Center.
When the controller unit faces
sideways
Installed
to the left
(factory
default)
Installed
to the
right
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Product Specifications-10
Product Specifications-11
1.9
Disposal of IP
6. Transport and Storage Cautions
When disposing of the IP, observe the following Product Environment and Safety
Information.
Product Environmental Safety Information
The IP is not included among the hazardous articles covered by transport-related law
or among the articles requiring safety indication.
The descriptions herein have been based on generally accepted knowledge at the time
of documentation. The Intention for this document is to supply information concerning the
product's environmental safety, rather than to guarantee performance quality. In addition,
the cautions are applicable only under normal handling (originally intended usage).
1. Product
Fuji Imaging Plate Hyper HS-100
2. Composition
This product consists of portion A (i.e., a photostimulable phosphor layer that is fixed
by a support and resin) and portion B (i.e., a metal portion comprised of a substratum
and a mounting bracket). Its main ingredients are as indicated below.
(i) Weight % of portions A and B
Components
Portion A
Portion B
Description
Photostimulable phosphor layer
Metal portion (aluminum alloy, stainless steel, etc.)
Weight %
3-8
92 - 97
(ii) Ingredients and weight % of photostimulable phosphor layer (portion A)
Main Ingredients
Barium fluohalide
Resin
Additives
Polyester support
Weight %
60 - 80
3-5
7 - 15
10 - 20
The packaging material of this product is made up of a corrugated board and resin.
3. Hazard Information
The IP Is not hazardous to the human body as long as it is used in accordance with
normal handling methods (originally intended usage).
4. Fire-Related Danger and Extinguishing
There will be no danger of the IP catching fire or burning as long as it is used under
normal conditions.
The following gases will be generated if the IP is burned: carbon monoxide (CO),
carbon dioxide (C02), nitrogen compounds, and halogen gas.
If the IP is on fire: Use a water-jet, powder- or bubble-injection extinguisher, as well as
fire-protection garments and accessories, as necessary.
5. Disposal Cautions
Separate IPs which should be collected or disposed of in accordance with local
regulations. IPs for disposal should be entrusted to specialized waste disposal agents
for treatment and burial. However, because of barium elutions from the IP, in the U.S.,
IPs must be disposed of in accordance with EPA regulations.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Product Specifications-11
Control Sheet
Issue date
CR-IR 364 (Type U) Service Manual
Revision number
04.15.2003
07.31.2003
11.30.2003
06.30.2004
09.30.2004
07.15.2006
10.02.2006
00
01
02
03
04
07
08
06.10.2008
09
Reason
New release (FM3976)
Revision (FM4055)
Revision (FM4147)
Revision (FM4357)
Revision (FM4437)
Revision (FM4915)
Change of Corporate Name and
Corporate Logo (FM4977)
Revision (FM5369)
Machine Description (MD)
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Pages affected
All pages
All pages
All pages
3, 4, 7-8, 13, 15-17, 19-23, 25, 29,31
20
All pages
38
9, 10, 13, 14, 23-26, 36, 38
MD-1
1.
Summary of the Machine
1.1
Features of the Machine
Downsizing of the Machine
Machine main body: W645 x D450 x H1,835 (mm)
Controller unit:
W260 x D550 x H470 (mm)
Installation Space Savings
The machine can be installed with no rear clearance required from the wall to the rear
of the machine.
User-Friendly Design
- The IP has been set in the machine, eliminating the need of carrying cassettes.
- The grid is replaceable by the end user.
- The indicator lamp (status lamp) is provided to allow you to check the status of the
machine from the outside of the exposure room.
- Operability is improved by separating the machine main body from the CR console.
- To secure safety of the patient and the operator, the patient protection descent
prevention interlock switch is provided on the bottom of the exposure unit.
- The machine main body is equipped with the operation panel, to display patient
information and exposure menu information. The operation panel is also equipped
with a button for selecting an exposure size or the like by means of the touch panel,
the grid replacement button, and the user utility selection function.
New Technology Incorporated
- With the mechanism for raising/lowering the exposure unit incorporated, exposure of
lower extremity is possible in addition to the exposure of the thoracic part.
- Line scanning technology for realizing an ultrasmall, rapid reading CR system (HD
line scanning technology) is introduced.
- With the IP fixed within the machine, the scanner unit and the erasure unit shift for
reading or erasing the images.
Reduction in Weight of the Machine
Mass of machine main body (standard configuration): approx. 220 kg
Mass of machine main body (with full options):
approx. 240 kg
Mass of controller unit:
approx. 21 kg
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MD-1
MD-2
1.2
System Configuration Examples
Standalone Type
The example below represents the simplest system configuration, which consists
of the CR-IR 364, CL, and printer. This system allows you to perform a series of
operations, including entry of patient information (ID registration), exposure, and film
output.
Multiple-Units Connection Type
Up to two built-in units can be connected with a single CL, permitting up to two units of
the CR-IR 364 to be connected. If one FCR55xx built-in unit or CR-IR 364T (VELOCITY
T) unit is already connected, one CR-IR 364 unit can be connected.
System configuration examples where two units of the CR-IR 364 are connected and
where a mixture of the FCR55xx built-in unit or the CR-IR 364T (VELOCITY T) is
connected are shown below:
When two CR-IR 364's are connected
When the FCR55xx built-in machine or the CR-IR 364 T (VELOCITY T)
is connected concurrently with the CR-IR 364.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MD-2
MD-3
1.3
1.3.1
Overall Machine Configuration and
Component Names
Machine External View and Functions
Machine Main Body
Name
Description
Exposure unit
Produces an image on the IP and reads
an IP image with laser light and CCD.
The read image is forwarded to the
controller unit as digital data.
Elevation unit
Unit for moving up or down the exposure
unit.
Power circuit breaker
Used to turn ON/OFF the machine
power.
Remarks
Brings the exposure unit and the motorEmergency stop switch driven grip handle moving up/down to an Safety interlock switch
emergency stop.
Operation panel
See " Operation Panel".
Illuminates/extinguishes the LED to
indicate the machine status.
Glowing green: Ready for exposure.
Blinking green: A read operation is
being performed.
Glowing
An error is
orange:
encountered or a
periodic erasure
operation is
performed.
Extinguished: The machine is not
running.
Extinguished: A utility is being
executed.
Elevation switch
See " Elevation Switch".
- Two switches can be mounted
(second one: optional).
- The specifications of the elevation
switch may differ depending on
whether or not the motor-driven grip
handle is incorporated.
Patient protection
descent prevention
switch
Stops the descent of the exposure unit.
Indicator lamp
- A machine with the motor-driven
grip handle incorporated and one
without the handle are available.
Even if the machine without the
motor-driven grip handle can be
Used to keep the patient's posture during
Motor-driven grip handle
additionally equipped with the grip
exposure.
handle after the installation.
- The uppermost point of the motordriven grip handle can be set
to three levels as the end user
demands.
Controller unit
Supplies power to the entire machine and
performs processing/control operations
for various boards.
REFERENCE
Options will be described later.
{MD:7._Options}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MD-3
MD-4
Operation Panel
Elevation Switch (Hand Switch)
Name
Name
Description
Start switch
Starts up the machine.
LCD panel
Used to perform various utility operations,
such as display of patient information and
selection of exposure size.
Call LED (orange)
Illuminates in the event of an error or when
a periodic erasure operation is performed.
Power LED (green)
Illuminated when the power circuit breaker
is turned ON.
Ready LED (green)
- Illuminated when the machine is ready
for exposure.
- Blinks while a read operation is being
performed.
Brightness
adjustment control
Adjusts the brightness of the LCD panel.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
Remarks
Touch panel operation
Description
Remarks
Elevation safety switch
activation LED
Glows when the patient protection descent
prevention interlock switch is ON.
Exposure unit elevation
switch
Moves the exposure unit up and down.
Motor-driven grip handle
elevation switch
Operative only when the
Moves the motor-driven grip handle up and
motor-driven grip handle
down.
is installed.
Interlink switch
Used to interlock the exposure unit and
motor-driven grip handle in their up-down
motion.
Operative only when the
motor-driven grip handle
is installed.
Interlink LED
Glows when the exposure unit and motordriven grip handle are interlocked with
each other.
Operative only when the
motor-driven grip handle
is installed.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MSH2, MSH3
MD-4
MD-5
1.3.2
I/O Parts Information
Exposure Unit - Sensors/Switches
Symbol
Name
Subscanning HP sensor
Type
Description
PI (5 mm)
Used to detect the scanner
unit and erasure unit home
positions.
PI (5 mm)
Used to detect that the IP
movement mechanism is in the
IP reading position.
PI (5 mm)
Used to detect that the IP is in
the erasure position.
PI (5 mm)
Used to detect that the scanner
unit and the erasure unit have
overrun beyond the upper-limit
position.
PI (5 mm)
Used to detect that the scanner
unit and the erasure unit have
overrun beyond the lower-limit
position.
PI (5 mm)
Used to detect the passage
time of the scanner unit and the
erasure unit.
PI (5 mm)
Used to detect that the grid is
set in place.
PI (5 mm)
Used to detect the home
position of the Bucky.
PI (5 mm)
Used to detect whether the
grid replacement cover lock
solenoid is ON or OFF.
SH3, 4
Exposure unit front cover
laser safety interlock switch
MS
Used to detect that the
exposure unit front cover is
installed.
MSH1,
12
Grid replacement cover
interlock switch
MS
Used to detect that the grid
replacement cover is open.
MS
Used to stop the descent of the
exposure unit when the patient
protection descent prevention
interlock switch cover is
pressed while the exposure unit
is moving down.
SZ1
SZ2
SZ21
SZ3
SZ4
SZ5
SZ6
SZ7
SH1
IP reading-side HP sensor
IP erasure position sensor
Subscanning overrun sensor
(upper)
Subscanning overrun sensor
(lower)
Subscanning operation
sensor
Grid availability sensor
Bucky HP sensor
Grid cover lock sensor
MSH2, 3
Patient protection descent
prevention interlock switch
TSWA1
Thermal switch
Safety switch against abnormal
heat generation.
PI: Photointerrupter
MS: Microswitch
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MD-5
MD-6
Exposure Unit - Fans/Motors/Solenoids/Solenoid Brakes, etc.
Symbol
Type
Description
5-phase pulse
motor
Drives the subscanning
mechanism to perform a read/
erasure operation.
{MD:2.2_Mechanism
and Operation of Units}
IP movement motor
5-phase pulse
motor
Drives the IP movement
mechanism to properly position
the IP for an exposure/read/
erasure operation.
{MD:2.2_Mechanism
and Operation of Units}
MZ3
Bucky motor
2-phase pulse
motor
Moves the grid leftward/
rightward for an X-ray exposure
(Bucky operation).
MB1
Subscanning
electromagnetic brake
Electromagnetic
brake
Used to lock the scanner unit
movement mechanism (MZ1).
MB2
IP movement
electromagnetic brake
Electromagnetic
brake
Used to lock the IP movement
mechanism (MZ2).
SOLH1
Grid replacement cover
lock solenoid
Power-down
solenoid
Used to lock and unlock the
grid replacement cover.
FANH1-5
Internal cooling fan
Fan
Used to cool the interior of the
exposure unit.
LEDH3, 4
CCD functional check LED LED
LED for verifying the CCD
functionality. (mounted on the
LIT21A board)
FANA1, 2
Erasure unit cooling fan
Used to cool the erasure unit.
MZ1
MZ2
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
Name
Subscanning motor
Fan
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MD-6
MD-7
Elevation Unit - Sensors/Switches
Symbol
Type
Description
MSH6
Grip handle elevation
upper limit interlock
switch
MS
Used to detect the uppermost point
of the motor-driven grip handle.
MSH7
Grip handle elevation
lower limit interlock
switch
MS
Used to detect the lowermost point
of the motor-driven grip handle.
MSH8
Grip handle collision
prevention proximity
switch
Magnetic
proximity
switch
Used to detect that the exposure unit
comes closer to the motor-driven grip
handle.
MSJ1
Exposure unit elevation
upper limit interlock
switch
MS
Used to detect the uppermost point
of the exposure unit.
MSJ2
Exposure unit elevation
lower limit interlock
switch
MS
Used to detect the lowermost point
of the exposure unit.
Exposure unit
temporary stop interlock MS
switch
Used to stop the descent of the
exposure unit when the distance
between the exposure center of the
exposure unit and the floor reaches
approx. 550 mm while the exposure
unit is moving down.
MSJ3
ESJ1, 2
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
Name
Emergency stop switch
Interlock
switch
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Use to bring the exposure unit
and the motor-driven grip handle
which are moving up/down to an
emergency stop.
MD-7
MD-8
Elevation Unit and Controller Unit - Fans/Motors
Symbol
Name
Type
Description
MJ1
Exposure unit up-down
drive motor
Drives the exposure unit
elevation ball screw.
AC motor with
{MD:5._Mechanism and
electromagnetic
Operation of Elevation
brake
Unit and Motor-Driven
Grip Handle}
MJ2
Motor-driven grip handle
up-down drive motor
AC motor with
Drives the motor-driven grip
electromagnetic
handle elevation ball screw.
brake
FANK1, 2
Controller unit cooling fan
Fan
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
Used to cool the controller unit.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MD-8
MD-9
1.4
012-201-09E
System Block Diagram
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MD-9
MD-10
1.5
Image Data Flow
The image data read from the IP is transferred from the “machine main body”, “controller
unit” and then to “CL”. The image data flow in each unit is described below.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MD-10
MD-11
2.
2.1
Mechanism and Operation of the
Exposure Unit
Unit Locations
The respective units in the exposure unit are located as shown below.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MD-11
MD-12
2.2
Mechanism and Operation of Units
2.2.1
IP Movement Mechanism
Driving the IP movement motor (MZ2), the IP is moved to the image exposure position,
the image reading position, and the image erasure position. The IP movement
electromagnetic brake (MB2) stops the IP at the respective positions.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
2.2.2
Subscanning Mechanism
Driving the subscanning motor (MZ1), the scanner unit and the erasure unit are
moved to read or erase the X-ray image (X-ray radiation energy) accumulated on the
IP.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MD-12
MD-13
2.2.3
Scanner Unit
Laser light is linearly radiated from the laser diode toward the X-ray image (X-ray
radiation energy) accumulated on the IP, and emitted light from the IP is detected by
the CCD. Light information detected by the CCD is converted into electric signals,
and then converted into image digital information.
The image data flow from the scanner unit to the control unit is described below.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MD-13
MD-14
2.2.4
Erasure Unit
- The erasure unit is moved to erase the X-ray image (X-ray radiation energy)
accumulated on the IP while moving the erasure unit with the erasure lamp (cold
cathode fluorescent lamp) lit up. The time required to erase the X-ray image (X-ray
radiation energy) accumulated on the IP varies depends on the maximum dose
exposed detected in reading and the subsequent exposure menu transmitted from
the IP. Accordingly, the time required for erasure before exposure is longer when
high sensitivity exposure is to be made.
- When the subject is exposed at higher sensitivity than that specified in the exposure
menu or when the subject is exposed using the cassette, the X-ray radiation
energy not necessary for the IP might be accumulated. The X-ray radiation energy
accumulated on the IP is erased by the instruction from the user or when the
machine is selected as an exposure device by the IIP in this case. Fogging caused
by natural radiation is also erased.
- The erasure unit is subjected to heating by the heater and temperature control by
the cooling fan in order to function the erasure lamp normally.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MD-14
MD-15
3.
Software Operation Overview
3.1
RU Network Setup
3.2
Data Structures
The data structures of the CL hard disk (FTP server included), RU Compact Flash
Card, and DIMM are shown below:
Perform network setup from the Machine Maintenance. The Machine Maintenance is
a servicing/maintenance utility that is operated from the RU's operation panel.
The settings entered from the Machine Maintenance are written into the RU's
Compact Flash Card. However, the CL IP address (CL IP ADDR) is written from the
CL to the Compact Flash Card when the associated procedure is performed from the
RU PC-TOOL.
Setup items
Setting means
Factory default values
RU IP address
Machine Maintenance
172.16.1.10
RU subnet mask
Machine Maintenance
255.255.0.0
RU default gateway
Machine Maintenance
0.0.0.0
FTP server IP address
Machine Maintenance
172.16.1.20
CL IP address
RU PC-TOOL EDIT CL
NAME
172.16.1.20
NOTES
- The IP address of the RU (RU IP ADDR) can only be set from Machine Maintenance.
- As a rule, the IP addresses of the CL and RU are used as the same setting.
However, if the FTP server is centrally managed at a single location by
distinguishing between the IP addresses of the FTP server and CL, you should gain
full understanding of this setup before use.
REFERENCE
The following abbreviations are used:
IP:
Internet Protocol
HD:
Hard Disk
FTP: File Transfer Protocol - Used as a data sharing area.
LD:
Laser Diode
CCD: Charge Coupled Device
*1: LCD panel adjustment data, LCD panel display bitmap data, and various parameters
*2: HISTORY LOG, TRACE LOG, and ERROR LOG
REFERENCE
When the employed software version is 1.6 or later, memory devices are available so
that the media for data backup/restore are not limited to floppy disks.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MD-15
MD-16
3.3
Data Flow between RU and CL
There are five types of data flows between the RU and CL, as summarized below:
<For normal processing>
- Image data
- Log data (HISTORY LOG, TRACE LOG, and ERROR LOG)
<For software installation>
- RU application (RU-AP)
- Configuration data (CONFIGURATION)
- CL IP address (CL IP ADDR)
3.3.1
Data Flow during Routine Processing
Flow of image data
The image data read from the IP is transferred from the DIMM to the CL via the
network.
Flow of log data
The log data (HISTORY LOG, TRACE LOG, and ERROR LOG) are transferred from
the DIMM and written into the FTP server.
<For software version update>
- RU application (RU-AP)
<For data backup>
- Configuration data (CONFIGURATION)
- Machine-specific data (INDIVIDUAL DATA)
- Log data (HISTORY LOG, TRACE LOG, and ERROR LOG)
<For data restore>
- Configuration data (CONFIGURATION)
- Machine-specific data (INDIVIDUAL DATA)
- Scanner data (SCN ALL DATA)
- LD-specific data (SCN EXCITATION DATA)
- CCD-specific data (SCN CORRECTION DATA)
- Log data (HISTORY LOG only)
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MD-16
MD-17
3.3.2
Data Flow for Software Installation
For software installation, the RU PC-TOOL and RU application (RU-AP) are
transferred from the installation CD-ROM.
Flow of CL IP address (CL IP ADDR) and configuration data
(CONFIGURATION)
The settings selected by the RU PC-TOOL are transferred from the FTP server to the
Compact Flash Card in order named.
*1:
*2:
*3:
When, for instance, “RU IP ADDR” and “FTP IP ADDR” are set from the Machine
Maintenance, they are directly written into the Compact Flash Card.
When configuration data and CL IP address are set from the CL, they are written
into the FTP server and Compact Flash Card in order named.
The RU application (RU-AP) is written from the installation CD-ROM into the FTP
server and Compact Flash Card in order named.
Flow of RU application (RU-AP)
The RU application (RU-AP) is transferred from the installation CD-ROM to the FTP
server and Compact Flash Card in order named.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MD-17
MD-18
3.3.3
Data Flow for Software Version Update
For a software version update, the RU PC-TOOL version is first checked, and then the
RU application (RU-AP) is transferred from the installation CD-ROM to the FTP server
and Compact Flash Card in order named.
REFERENCE
The configuration data (CONFIGURATION) will not be transferred.
3.3.4
Data Flow for Data Backup
When data is backed up with the RU PC-TOOL, the following data is transferred to the
CL's floppy disk/hard disk:
- Configuration data (CONFIGURATION)
- Machine-specific data (INDIVIDUAL DATA)
- Log data (HISTORY LOG, TRACE LOG, and ERROR LOG)
*1: The configuration data (CONFIGURATION) is transferred from the Compact Flash
Card to the FTP server and CL's floppy disk in order named.
*2: The machine-specific data (INDIVIDUAL DATA) is transferred from the Compact
Flash Card to the FTP server (CL's hard disk).
*3: The log data (HISTORY LOG and TRACE LOG) are transferred from the DIMM to
the FTP server and CL's floppy disk in order named.
The ERROR LOG data is transferred to the FTP server and the CL’s floppy disk in
order named.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MD-18
MD-19
3.3.5
Data Flow for Data Restore
Flow for restoring backup data
When a data restore operation is performed with the RU PC-TOOL, the following data
are transferred from the CL's floppy disk/hard disk to the Compact Flash Card.
-
Configuration data (CONFIGURATION)
Machine-specific data (INDIVIDUAL DATA)
Scanner data (SCN ALL DATA)
LD specific data (SCN EXCITATION DATA)
CCD specific data (SCN CORRECTION DATA)
Log data (HISTORY LOG alone)
NOTE
The VELOCITY U stores data on both the Compact Flash Card and hard disk.
Therefore, even if the Compact Flash Card or hard disk is damaged, you can restore
machine-specific data.
- If the Compact Flash Card data is damaged, the machine-specific data stored on the
hard disk is used.
- If the hard disk is defective, the machine-specific data stored on the Compact Flash
Card is used.
Further, the Compact Flash Card may become damaged before data backup at
the time of installation. In such an instance, restore the data with the machinespecific data CD-R, which is supplied with the machine. To restore the data, choose
"INDIVIDUAL DATA" from the "RESTORE" menu of the RU PC-TOOL.
CAUTION
While a data restore operation is in progress, never turn OFF the RU power. If
the RU power turns OFF during a data restore operation, the RU cannot restart
because the program stored on the Compact Flash Card becomes damaged.
Flow for restoring data at the time of scanner parts replacement
*1: The configuration data (CONFIGURATION) is copied from the floppy disk on which
the data is backed up to the FTP server and RU Compact Flash Card in order
named.
*2: The machine-specific data (INDIVIDUAL DATA) is saved from the CL's hard disk to
the RU's Compact Flash Card.
*3: The log data (HISTORY LOG only) is copied from the floppy disk to the FTP server
and DIMM in order named.
*4: The scanner data (SCN ALL DATA) and LD- or CCD-specific data (SCN
EXCITATION DATA or SCN CORRECTION DATA) are restored using a floppy disk
that is supplied with a replacement part. These data are copied from the floppy
disk to the FTP server and RU Compact Flash Card in order named.
NOTE
Restored data takes effect when you turn the RU power OFF and then back ON.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MD-19
MD-20
3.4
Sleep Mode (Power Saving Mode)
If you do not operate the RU for a specified period of time while the sleep mode is
enabled, the RU automatically enters the sleep mode (power saving mode).
REFERENCE
3.4.3
Exiting the Sleep Mode
The RU exits the sleep mode if either of the following operation is performed:
- Touching the LCD panel
- Operating the CL
The User Utility's "sleep timer" is used to set the length of time elapse required for
entry into the sleep mode.
{Instruction Manual}
3.4.1
Machine Status in the Sleep Mode
- The temperature adjustment function for the erasure lamp heater is disabled.
- The LCD panel backlight is turned OFF.
3.4.2
Sleep Mode Setup
Automatic Sleep Mode Entry According to a Timer Setting
When the sleep mode is turned ON by the User Utility and the RU in the READY state
is not operated within the preselected "sleep mode entry time", the RU goes into the
sleep mode.
REFERENCES
- The sleep mode entry time can be set only when the sleep mode is turned ON.
- The sleep mode entry time setting is variable in 1-minute increments (the maximum
setting is 99 minutes).
{Instruction Manual}
- The RU does not enter the sleep mode while the User Utility is operated or an error
message is displayed.
Immediate Sleep Mode Entry upon User Interventions
If you turn ON the sleep mode from the operation panel while the RU is shutting down,
the RU enters the sleep mode immediately.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MD-20
MD-21
3.5
RU Startup Process
Upon RU power turn-ON, steps (1) through (9) are sequentially performed to complete
the RU startup process.
(1) Verifying the CL (FTP server) connection
Try to communicate with the CL.
If you cannot communicate with the CL, retry the communication (about 2 minutes).
If the communication with the CL is not normally effected, the machine does not
eventually go into the on-line state because it cannot notify the CL of its readiness.
However, the following machine initialization process is performed.
(2) Loading the data
(3) Checking the boards
(4) Checking the fuses
(5) Mechanical Initialization 1
(Home positioning of the Bucky, subscanning unit, and IP movement
mechanism)
→ The time data is acquired from the CL.
(6) Mechanical Initialization 2
(7) Scanner Initialization
(8) Mechanical Initialization 3
(The scanner unit moves up and down once, and the IP movement
mechanism moves front and back twice).
(9) Notifying the CL of the RU READY state
*1: The RU application (RU-AP) and other data are loaded from the Compact Flash
Card to the DIMM.
*2: The log data is loaded from the “FTP server” to the “DIMM”.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MD-21
MD-22
3.6
RU Shutdown Process
When the RU is to be shut down, terminate the system shutdown by touching the “FCR”
button on the upper right of the CR Console screen or by touching “Shutdown” on the
operation panel. The RU shutdown process is performed with one of the execution
buttons touched, and the power of the RU is then turned OFF.
With the RU shutdown process, the mechanical shutdown process and log data save
process are performed.
Mechanical Shutdown Process
3.7
Data Flow between Controller Unit and
Operation Panel
The LCD panel mounted on the operation panel has an on-screen display function
for displaying exposure information and error codes on the screen and a touch panel
function for accepting user-input information.
The LCD panel is connected to the ATX board (motherboard) mounted in the controller
unit via a VGA cable and a serial cable.
Move the IP movement mechanism to its home position, and turn ON the IP readingside HP sensor (SZ2).
Log Data Save Process
The log data (HISTORY LOG, TRACE LOG, and ERROR LOG) are saved into the
FTP server.
NOTE
If you forcibly turn OFF the power without performing the RU shutdown process, the
log data (HISTORY LOG, TRACE LOG, and ERROR LOG) will not be saved into the
FTP server.
3.8
Wake on LAN
The VELOCITY U has a Wake on LAN feature. Therefore the VELOCITY U
automatically starts up the moment the CL starts up. To use this feature, it is
necessary to install the software on the CL.
{FCR XG-1/CR CL Service Manual_FR8_Wake on LAN}
REFERENCE
While a setup procedure is performed at the CL, the VELOCITY U's MAC address is
required. The VELOCITY U's MAC address appears on the display when you choose
"Display MAC Address" under "Software Check" from the MUTL.
{MU:4.4 [6-1]_Display MAC Address}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MD-22
MD-23
4.
Electrical-Related Information
4.1
Locations of Main Electrical Components
and Their Wiring
LED21C
Potentiometer (optional)
Exposure unit
ERS21A/B
TSWA1
FANA1
JCT21A
: Control related
FANA2
JCT21B
LDA21A
LDA21A
LDD21A
: Power supply related
: Image data related
CCD21A/D
LIT21A
LIT21A
LDS
21A/B
Controller unit
Network
LAN
Tube
interlock (auto
collimation)
IDE
Shot
signal
SND21B
CPS21A LVC21A
SZ1
SZ2
SZ3
SZ4
MZ1
MZ2
SZ6
SH3
CPU
VGA
SZ5
RLY21A/B
FAN
MSH1
SND21A
Serial
FANH1
FANH2
FANH3
TLB21A
(optional)
CFI21A
Tube interlock
(auto tracking)
MB2
SZ7
+3.3V, +5V, -5V
+12V, -12V, +5VSB
Compact
Flash
Card
←ATX (motherboard)
LCD panel→
←ATX (motherboard)
LCD panel→
←SND21A
LCN21A→
←PAT21A
Potentiometer (optional)→
←PAT21A
LCN21A→
SH1
SZ21
SH4
MSH12
FANH4
FANH5
MSH2
+5V
MZ3
SOLH1
ATX board
(Motherboard)
DIMM
MB1
MSH3
LED21A
LCD
panel
+24V
+6VCP, +6V
+9V, +18V
+24V
Power supply
(α 600/α 450)
+5V
+6V, +9V
+18V
+24V
+5VSB
AC200V_N
AC200V_L
+5, +5VSB
FANK1
+24V
+5VSB
LCN21A
ELV21A
PS_ON
FANK2
←PAT21A
MSH8
ESJ1
MSJ1
MSJ2
MSJ3
MSH6
MSH7
PAT21A
+24V
ESJ2
+5V, +12V
MJ2
AC100V
MJ1
AC100V
Elevation switch (*1)
(AWT21A)
AC15V
AC100V
Transformer
REFERENCE
Elevation switch
(AWT21A)
ELV21A→
NFB21A
NFB
Foot switch (optional)
(*1): The second elevation
Terminal
switch is an option.
block
AC200V_L
AC200V_N
FG
Elevation unit
The following parts are attached when the motor-driven grip handle is installed:
MJ2/MSH6/MSH7
012-201-09E
Operation panel
PWC21A
FRAH1401.EPS
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MD-23
MD-24
Controller unit
Elevation unit
Part name
Description
Power supply (α 600/
α 450)
Used to supply power to the controller unit and exposure unit.
ATX board (motherboard)
CFI21A (Compact Flash
Card)
- ATX board
- Connector adapter
SND21A board
Sensor/motor drive-1
PAT21A board
- Used to supply power to the controller unit and exposure unit.
- X-ray tube interface (shot signal, potentiometer).
TLB21A board
X-ray tube interface: tube interlock (auto collimation)
LVC21A board
Image data relay
CPS21A board
Image data correction processing
NFB21A board
Noise filter
Part name
Description
Transformer
Used to transform the voltage to 100 VAC and 15 VAC.
ELV21A board
Elevation unit overall control
NFB
Main circuit breaker
AWT21A board
Elevation switch control
LED21C board
Status indication
Operation panel
Part name
Description
LCD panel
LCD (on-screen display) and touch panel
LCN21A board
Operation panel control.
LED21A board
Status indication
Exposure unit
Part name
Description
SND21B board
Sensor/motor drive-2
RLY21A/B board
LDS21A/B board
- Used to relay image signals.
- Used to relay control signals.
PWC21A board
JCT21B board
Power relay (scanner unit/erasure unit)
JCT21A board
- Used to relay image signals.
- Used to relay control signals.
LDD21A board
LD control.
CCD21A/D board
CCD control.
ERS21A/B board
Erasure lamp control.
LIT21A board
Light source for CCD functionality verification
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MD-24
MD-25
4.2
012-201-09E
Information on Board Locations
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MD-25
MD-26
4.3
012-201-09E
Fuse Block Diagram
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MD-26
MD-27
5.
Mechanism and Operation of
Elevation Unit and Motor-Driven
Grip Handle
5.1
Elevation Unit Mechanism and Operation
Elevation Unit Mechanism
The elevation unit of the machine allows the exposure unit to move up/down and stop
at a desired position. A guide rail and a ball-screw are employed inside the elevation
unit as a mechanism for moving up/down the exposure unit, in which the ball-screw
rotates by the exposure unit up-down drive motor (AC motor) and the gear head. The
brake on the top of the elevation unit and the exposure unit up-down drive motor serve
to prevent the exposure unit from falling down by its own weight as well as to stop the
ascent/descent of the exposure unit.
- Brake on the top of the elevation unit: Permanent magnet type
- Exposure unit up-down drive motor: Serves as a electromagnetic brake in addition
to causing the ball-screw to rotate.
Emergency stop switches are mounted on the right and left side faces of the elevation
unit, permitting an emergency stop of the exposure unit moving up/down.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
Exposure unit drop prevention
The brake on the top of the elevation unit and the exposure unit up-down drive motor
brake the ball-screw respectively to prevent the exposure unit from falling down by
its own weight. Therefore, even if the brake on the top of the elevation unit or the
exposure unit up-down drive motor is absent or faulty, the exposure unit will not fall
down by its own weight as long as either of them is mounted and working normally.
- Brake:
The brake on the top of the elevation unit brakes the ball-screw, preventing the
exposure unit from falling down by its own weight even if the exposure unit up-down
drive motor or the coupling is removed.
- Exposure unit up-down drive motor:
The exposure unit up-down drive motor brakes the ball-screw, preventing the
exposure unit from falling down by its own weight even if the brake is removed.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MD-27
MD-28
Operation of Elevation Unit
Turning ON the elevation switch (hand switch) or the exposure unit elevation foot
switch causes the exposure unit up-down drive motor (MJ1) to drive to move the
exposure unit up/down.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MD-28
MD-29
5.2
Mechanism and Operation of Motor-Driven
Grip Handle
Mechanism of Motor-Driven Grip Handle
Changing the height of motor-driven grip handle
The height (uppermost point) of the motor-driven grip handle of the machine can be
set to three levels (2,200 mm/2,300 mm/2,400 mm) by repositioning the switch dog
mounted on the pole of the motor-driven grip handle.
The motor-driven grip handle of the machine allows the motor-driven grip handle to move
up/down and stop at a desired position. The motor-driven grip handle is constituted of the
grip handle up-down drive motor, the ball-screw and the hand rail. With the motor driven,
motive power is transmitted to the timing belt, causing the ball-screw to rotate.
In addition, the grip handle up-down drive motor, which serves as a electromagnetic brake
in addition to causing the ball-screw to rotate, can keep the motor-driven grip handle at a
desired position. Therefore, the handle does not lower even if the patient holds it during
the exposure. Emergency stop switches are mounted on the right and left side faces of
the elevation unit, permitting an emergency stop of the motor-driven grip handle moving
up/down.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MD-29
MD-30
Operation of Motor-Driven Grip Handle
Turning ON the elevation switch (hand switch) or the motor-driven grip handle
elevation switch causes the motor-driven grip handle up-down drive motor (MJ2) to
drive to move the grip handle up/down.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MD-30
MD-31
6.
Interlock Mechanisms and
Operations
The grip handle collision prevention proximity switch (MSH8) has its electric circuit
open (turned OFF) with the magnet mounted on the elevation arm of the motor-driven
grip handle coming in close proximity.
Turning OFF/ON of Interlock Switches
Interlock switches of the machine employ a normally-open-type (NO) circuit which is
closed (turned ON) by pressing the actuator and a normally-closed-type (NC) circuit
which is opened (turned OFF) by pressing the actuator.
NO (normally-open-type) interlock switches
The following interlock switches have their electric circuits closed (turned ON) when
the actuator is pressed. The electric circuits keep open (turned OFF) without the
actuator pressed.
- Exposure unit front cover laser safety interlock switches (SH3 and SH4)
- Grid replacement cover interlock switches (MSH1 and MSH12)
NC (normally-closed-type) interlock switches
The following interlock switches have their electric circuits opened (turned OFF) when
the actuator is pressed. The electric circuits keep closed (turned ON) without the
actuator pressed.
-
Patient protection descent prevention interlock switches (MSH2 and MSH3)
Exposure unit elevation upper-limit interlock switch (MSJ1)
Exposure unit elevation lower-limit interlock switch (MSJ2)
Exposure unit temporary stop interlock switch (MSJ3)
Grip handle elevation upper-limit interlock switch (MSH6)
Grip handle elevation lower-limit interlock switch (MSH7)
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MD-31
MD-32
Interlock for Halting Laser Output (Protection Against Exposure
to Laser Radiation)
This interlock halts the laser output for the purpose of protecting the service engineer
against exposure to laser radiation, when it is detected that the exposure unit front
cover is removed or that the grid replacement cover is open.
Interlock target
Laser
Interlock switches
- Exposure unit front cover laser safety interlock switches (SH3 and SH4)
- Grid replacement cover interlock switches (MSH1 and MSH12)
Interlock for Exposure Unit Ascent/Descent (Patient or User
Protection)
This interlock shuts off the power supply to the exposure unit up-down drive motor
(MJ1) to stop the exposure unit moving up/down under the following conditions for the
purpose of protecting the patient or the user:
- When the patient or an object comes into contact with the patient protection descent
prevention interlock switch cover on the bottom of the exposure unit while the
exposure unit is moving down;
- When the user presses an emergency stop switch.
Interlock target
Exposure unit up-down drive motor (MJ1)
Interlock switches
- Patient protection descent prevention interlock switches (MSH2 and MSH3)
- Emergency stop switches (ESJ1 and ESJ2)
Control by interlock
- Halts the laser output when the exposure unit front cover laser safety interlock
switch (SH3 or SH4) is turned OFF.
- Halts the laser output when the grid replacement cover interlock switch (MSH1 or
MSH12) is turned OFF.
Control by interlock
Shuts off the power supply to the exposure unit up-down drive motor (MJ1) to stop the
descent of the exposure unit when the patient protection descent prevention interlock
switch (MSH2 or MSH3) or an emergency stop switch (ESJ1 or ESJ2) is turned OFF
while the exposure unit is moving down.
When the emergency stop switch (ESJ1 or ESJ2) is turned OFF, the interlock also
shuts off the power supply to the grip handle up-down drive motor (MJ2) to stop the
ascent/descent of the motor-driven grip handle.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MD-32
MD-33
Interlock for Exposure Unit Ascent/Descent with the Grid
Replacement Cover Open (User Protection)
This interlock shuts off the power supply to the exposure unit up-down drive motor (MJ1)
to stop the ascent/descent of the exposure unit for the purpose of protecting the user
when it is detected that the grid replacement cover is open..
Interlock target
Exposure unit up-down drive motor (MJ1)
Interlock switches
Grid replacement cover interlock switches (MSH1 and MSH12)
Interlock for Ascent/Descent of Exposure Unit (Machine
Protection)
This interlock shuts off the power supply to the exposure unit up-down drive motor (MJ1)
to stop the ascent/descent of the exposure unit under the following conditions for the
purpose of protecting the machine:
- The exposure unit reaches its uppermost point (at a distance of approx. 1,530 mm
from the floor to the exposure center) while the exposure unit is moving up;
- The exposure unit reaches its temporary stop point (at a distance of approx. 550
mm from the floor to the exposure center) while the exposure unit is moving down;
- The exposure unit reaches its lowermost point (at a distance of approx. 470 mm
from the floor to the exposure center) while the exposure unit is moving down;
- A distance between the exposure unit and the hand rail of the motor-driven grip
handle reaches the collision prevention distance (a distance of approx. 350 mm from
the lower side of the hand rail of the motor-driven grip handle to the upper surface of
the exposure unit) while the exposure unit is moving up.
Interlock target
Exposure unit up-down drive motor (MJ1)
Interlock switches
-
Exposure unit elevation upper-limit interlock switch (MSJ1)
Exposure unit elevation lower-limit interlock switch (MSJ2)
Exposure unit temporary stop interlock switch (MSJ3)
Grip handle collision prevention proximity switch (MSH8)
Control by interlock
Shuts off the power supply to the exposure unit up-down drive motor (MJ1) to stop the
ascent/descent of the exposure unit when the grid replacement cover interlock switch
(MSH1 or MSH12) is turned OFF.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MD-33
MD-34
Control by Interlock
- Shuts off the power supply to the exposure unit up-down drive motor (MJ1) to
stop the ascent of the exposure unit when the exposure unit elevation upper-limit
interlock switch (MSJ1) is turned OFF while the exposure unit is moving up with the
exposure unit up-down drive motor (MJ1) driven.
- Shuts off the power supply to the exposure unit up-down drive motor (MJ1) to stop
the descent of the exposure unit when the exposure unit temporary stop interlock
switch (MSJ3) is turned OFF while the exposure unit is moving down with the
exposure unit up-down drive motor (MJ1) driven.
- Shuts off the power supply to the exposure unit up-down drive motor (MJ1) to
stop the descent of the exposure unit when the exposure unit elevation lower-limit
interlock switch (MSJ2) is turned OFF while the exposure unit is moving down with
the exposure unit up-down drive motor (MJ1) driven.
- Shuts off the power supply to the exposure unit up-down drive motor (MJ1) to stop
the ascent of the exposure unit when the grip handle collision prevention proximity
switch (MSH8) is turned OFF while the exposure unit is moving up with the exposure
unit up-down drive motor (MJ1) driven.
Interlock for Ascent/Descent of Motor-Driven Grip Handle
(Machine Protection)
This interlock shuts off the power supply to the motor-driven grip handle up-down
drive motor (MJ2) to stop the ascent/descent of the motor-driven grip handle under
the following conditions for the purpose of protecting the machine:
- The motor-driven grip handle reaches its uppermost point (at a distance of approx.
2,200 mm/2,300 mm/2,400 mm from the floor to the upper side of the hand rail of
the motor-driven grip handle) while the exposure unit is moving up;
- The motor-driven grip handle reaches its lowermost point (at a distance of approx.
1515 mm from the floor to the upper side of the hand rail of the motor-driven grip
handle) while the exposure unit is moving down;
- A distance between the exposure unit and the hand rail of the motor-driven grip
handle reaches the collision prevention distance (a distance of approx. 350 mm from
the lower side of the hand rail of the motor-driven grip handle to the upper surface of
the exposure unit) while the motor-driven grip handle is moving down.
Interlock target
Motor-driven grip handle up-down drive motor (MJ2)
Interlock switches
- Grip handle elevation upper-limit interlock switch (MSH6)
- Grip handle elevation lower-limit interlock switch (MSH7)
- Grip handle collision prevention proximity switch (MSH8)
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MD-34
MD-35
Control by interlock
- Shuts off the power supply to the motor-driven grip handle up-down drive motor (MJ2)
to stop the ascent of the motor-driven grip handle when the grip handle elevation
upper-limit interlock switch (MSH6) is turned OFF while the motor-driven grip handle
is moving up with the motor-driven grip handle up-down drive motor (MJ2) driven.
- Shuts off the power supply to the motor-driven grip handle up-down drive motor (MJ2)
to stop the descent of the motor-driven grip handle when the grip handle elevation
lower-limit interlock switch (MSH7) is turned OFF while the motor-driven grip handle
is moving down with the motor-driven grip handle up-down drive motor (MJ2) driven.
- Shuts off the power supply to the motor-driven grip handle up-down drive motor (MJ2)
to stop the descent of the motor-driven grip handle when the grip handle collision
prevention proximity switch (MSH8) is turned OFF while the motor-driven grip
handle is moving down with the motor-driven grip handle up-down drive motor (MJ2)
driven.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MD-35
MD-36
7.
Options
Name
Remarks
Motor-driven grip
handle
Keeps the patient's posture during
exposure.
Side grip handle
Keeps the patient's posture during
exposure.
Auxiliary grip handle
Keeps the patient's posture during
exposure.
The auxiliary grip handle can be
mounted in combination with the
motor-driven grip handle (hand rail).
Patient aid belt
Keeps the patient's posture during
exposure.
The patient aid belt can be mounted
in combination with the side grip
handle (only in Japan).
Gonad protector
Foot switch
012-201-09E
Description
Retrofittable if not mounted.
Protects the patient’s gonad against
exposure to X-ray radiation.
Moves the exposure unit up/down.
Elevation switch
(hand switch)
Moves the exposure unit/motordriven grip handle up/down.
X-ray autocollimating kit
Automatically selects an X-ray
irradiation field for an image size,
which is selected for the exposure,
in coordination with the X-ray tube.
X-ray camera
connection cable
Makes communication between the
X-ray controller and the X-ray shot
signal.
Tube auto-tracking
kit
Sets the height of the exposure unit
in coordination with the X-ray tube.
Photo-timer kit
Automatically controls the exposure
during the image exposure for X-ray
diagnosis. Detects the X-rays which
have transmitted through the subject
and convert it from visible light to
electric signals. Shuts off the X-rays
when the electricity quantity reaches
a predetermined value to control the
exposure.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
- The type of the elevation switch
depends on whether the machine
is equipped with the motor-driven
grip handle. When the machine
is equipped with the motordriven grip handle, it also has an
operation switch for moving the
motor-driven grip handle up/down.
- Two switches can be mounted (the
second switch is optional).
15 m 6 core
-
Phillips: 10 kΩ
Toshiba: 5 kΩ
Hitachi: 2 kΩ
Shimadzu: 1 kΩ
Toshiba photo-timer 1ch
Toshiba photo-timer 2ch
Toshiba semiconductor phototimer
Hitachi photo-timer 1ch
Hitachi photo-timer 2ch
Hitachi ion chamber AID
Shimadzu ion chamber 4ch
Siemens ion chamber 3ch
Phillips ion chamber 3ch
COMET photo-timer 3ch
MD-36
MD-37
Name
Description
Remarks
Grid
Eliminates scattered X-rays (to
reduce the fogging of the scattered
rays) during exposure while keeping
the tube voltage required for
obtaining appropriate density and
contrast, so as to obtain highly sharp
images.
-
Power cable
Supplies the power supply to the
machine.
15 m/25 m (Only in Japan)
Cassette holder
Used in exposure by means of a
standard cassette.
Long cassette holder
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
Used in exposure by means of a
long cassette.
FFD=140_8:1
FFD=180_8:1
FFD=140_10:1
FFD=180_10:1
FFD=140_12:1
FFD=180_12:1
FFD=300_12:1
The long cassette holder can
be mounted in combination with
the cassette holder used for
the exposure with the standard
cassette.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MD-37
MD-38
BLANK PAGE
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MD-38
MD-39
BLANK PAGE
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MD-39
Control Sheet
Issue date
CR-IR 364 (Type U) Service Manual
04.15.2003
07.31.2003
11.30.2003
06.30.2004
09.30.2004
10.28.2005
07.15.2006
06.10.2008
Revision number
00
01
02
03
04
06
07
09
Reason
New release (FM3976)
Revision (FM4055)
Revision (FM4147)
Revision (FM4357)
Revision (FM4437)
Revision (FM4737)
Revision (FM4915)
Revision (FM5369)
Troubleshooting (MT)
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Pages affected
All pages
All pages
All pages
3-59
20, 41
3-24, 26-45, 50
All pages
5, 5.1, 5.2, 6, 10, 11, 14-16, 18-20, 22,
26, 27, 32, 43, 44, 46, 58.1, 58.2, 62,
68, 70, 71, 74, 80, 93, 95, 103,
105-108, 112-119
MT-1
1.
Overview of Troubleshooting
1.1
Flow of Troubleshooting
Error Classifications
RU errors can be roughly classified into the following three categories:
1. Errors causing the CL screen or the LCD of the RU to display an error
code
Trouble occurred
Mechanical, electrical, scanner, or software errors that cause the CL screen or the
LCD of the RU to display an error code upon error detection.
Check the Error Log
2. Errors with no error code displayed and the machine unable to boot
up
{MT:1.3.1_Checking the Error Log}
No error code can be detected, and the progress of a process is interrupted.
3. Errors causing abnormalities in the elevation unit
{MT:1.6_Location to Be First Inspected when a Failure Occurs}
1. Errors causing the CL screen or the LCD of the RU to display an
error code
Errors caused by failures in connector connection of the elevation unit, or caused by
component abnormalities.
{MT:1.3_Troubleshooting from Error Log}
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
"Analysis Flow"
"Check Flow"
2. Errors with no error code displayed and the machine unable to
boot up
{MT:10._Errors with no Error Code Displayed and the Machine
unable to Boot Up}
3. Errors causing abnormalities in the elevation unit
{MT:11._Error with Abnormality Observed in the Elevation Unit}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-1
MT-2
1.2
Analysis and Check Flow Marks
In the Troubleshooting volume, troubleshooting procedures are described in the form
of a flow. Various marks are used for flow simplification.
Examples of Analysis/Check Flow Mark Usage
Example 1: Example of operation item
Marks Used in Flows
Refer to pages in "Chapter 8,
8.4 Subscanning Motor (MZ1)" of the
MC volume to perform the procedures.
Indicates an operation item.
The operation description is given next to a circle.
○
Replace the MZ1.
{MC:8.4_Subscanning Motor (MZ1)}
FRAH2101.EPS
Q1
N
Y
Indicates that the flow of operation branches off in a
specific direction depending on the result of the check
described next to Q1 .
The actual check procedures may be described in the
mark positioned
reference section indicated by the
below the text of Q1 .
Indicates the section you should refer to.
The chapter/section number and title are indicated.
Example 2: Example where check is performed
Q1 Result of SZ1 monitoring check normal?
{MT:8.2.2_Checking the Monitoring Function of SZ1}
Y
N
Refer to pages in "Chapter 8, 8.2.2 Checking the Monitoring
Function of SZ1" of the MT volume for checks.
If normal, proceed in the direction of the arrow "Y"; if not,
proceed in the direction of the arrow "N".
{MT:X.X_XXXXX}
Chapter, section, or subsection title
FRAH2102.EPS
Chapter, section, or subsection number
Volume title
FRAH2104.EPS
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-2
MT-3
1.3
Troubleshooting from Error Log
1.3.1
Checking the Error Log
Using the RU PC-TOOL ERROR DB, view the error log and check the occurrence of
error codes.
1.3.2
Determining the Error Code of the Encountered
Troble
(1) Group the errors that occurred from the error codes displayed on the
ERROR DB screen of the RU PC-TOOL.
(Example)
Divide into error occurrence groups A and B based on the error occurrence time.
(2) Locate the error that is responsible for the encountered trouble (the
error that occurred first).
START
Start the RU PC-TOOL.
(Example)
The first error in the error occurrence group A is “12340”.
{MU:4._RU PC-TOOL}
Back Up the ERROR LOG.
{MU:4.13_BACKUP}
Start the ERROR DB to view the error log.
{MU:4.16_ERROR DB}
END
Purpose of Making a Backup of the Error Log
An error log is added to the file whenever an error occurs during the operation of the
machine, and when the file becomes full, its entries are overwritten on a first-in, firstout basis.
Before troubleshooting, back up the error log, which contains the information about
errors encountered during the user’s use of the machine.
Purpose of Viewing the Error Log
When an error occurs, it may incur two or more additional errors. The error code
displayed on the CL represents the last-encountered error.
You must therefore view the error log to locate the error code related to the
encountered trouble before proceeding to perform troubleshooting.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-3
MT-4
1.4
How to View Error Code
X: Error level
Error level notations
FATAL error: 0
- The user is notified of an error occurrence.
- Level of error where the routine processing cannot be resumed.
- It is necessary to immediately troubleshoot and take remedial action.
Y: Error category
0: OS (operating system software), libraries
1: Image processing CPU
2: Scanner control
3: Mechanical control
4: Overall control
5: Network control
6: Reserved
7: Electrical/hardware related
8: Board
9: Others (software installation, version update, etc.)
ZZ: Reference number
It is managed according to each error category.
WARNING: 1
- The user is notified of an error occurrence.
- Errors that occur due to erroneous user operation.
- If this level of error occurred at the same time with another level of warning, it is
necessary to troubleshoot and take remedial action.
WARNING: 2
- An error is logged, but the user is not notified.
- Level of error where the function associated with the error is rendered unusable.
- It is necessary to immediately troubleshoot and take remedial action.
WARNING: 3
- An error is logged, but the user is not notified.
- Errors that occur when servicing procedures are performed, or errors related to the
network.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-4
MT-5
1.5
Detailed Information on Error Code
Various detailed information is added, depending on conditions where an error occurs,
to an error code displayed on the ERROR DB screen of the RU PC-TOOL or an error
code displayed when the error occurs during the execution of various kinds of utility.
You can identify the cause of the error from the detailed information. Described in this
section is the meaning of the detailed information added to the error code.
1.5.1
Fuse-Related Error Detailed Information
/dev/sensor/34
/dev/sensor/35
/dev/sensor/36
/dev/sensor/38
Error Code 12810
The error code “12810” appears when a blown-out fuse is detected during the routine
processing.
The error code and detailed information (expansion error code) on the fuse that fails
are displayed on the ERROR DB screen.
<Display example>
Expansion
error code
Expansion
error code
/dev/sensor/39
/dev/sensor/40
F12
SND21B board
F9
SND21B board
F10
SND21B board
F11
SND21B board
F14
SND21B board
F1
SND21B board
/dev/sensor/23 It is detected that the MZ2 or the MB2 fuse is blown out.
F2
SND21B board
0x02
/dev/sensor/24 It is detected that the MZ3 fuse is blown out.
F3
SND21B board
/dev/sensor/25 It is detected that the SOLH1 fuse is blown out.
F4
SND21B board
0x04
/dev/sensor/19
/dev/sensor/20
/dev/sensor/21
/dev/sensor/22
Cause
It is detected that the 3.3V internal power supply fuse is
blown out.
It is detected that the 5V external output power supply
fuse 1 is blown out.
It is detected that the 5V internal power supply fuse is
blown out.
It is detected that the 5VL external output power supply
fuse 2 is blown out.
It is detected that the 5V sensor system fuse is blown
out.
It is detected that the MZ1 or the MB1 fuse is blown out.
/dev/sensor/26 It is detected that the FAN1-4 fuses are blown out.
It is detected that the LD power supply 1 fuse is blown
/dev/sensor/27
out.
It is detected that the LD power supply 2 fuse is blown
/dev/sensor/28
out.
It is detected that the LD logic power supply 1 fuse is
/dev/sensor/29
blown out.
It is detected that the CCD drive power supply 1 fuse is
/dev/sensor/31
blown out.
It is detected that the CCD drive power supply 2 fuse is
/dev/sensor/32
blown out.
It is detected that the exposure unit I/O power supply
/dev/sensor/33
fuse is blown out.
012-201-09E
Fuse mounted
board
F5
PAT21A board
F6
PAT21A board
F7
PAT21A board
F11
PAT21A board
F17
PAT21A board
F18
PAT21A board
It is detected that the erasure inverter
power supply 1 fuse is blown out.
It is detected that the erasure inverter
power supply 2 fuse is blown out.
It is detected that the motor solenoid
power supply fuse is blown out.
It is detected that the FB2M board
(motherboard) power supply fuse is
blown out.
It is detected that the RS232C power
supply 1 fuse is blown out.
It is detected that the RS232C power
supply 2 fuse is blown out.
The error codes “12841” and “12851” appear when the blown-out of the fuse is
detected during the board check for the RU PC-TOOL.
The error code and detailed information (hexadecimal code) on the fuse that fails are
displayed.
Fuse mounted
board
/dev/sensor/18
Fuse mark
Error codes 12841/12851
Fuse
mark
/dev/sensor/17
Cause
F5 to F8 SND21B board
F2
PAT21A board
F3
PAT21A board
F4
PAT21A board
F8
PAT21A board
F9
PAT21A board
F10
PAT21A board
Error code: 12841
<Display example>
Hexadecimal
code
0x01
0x08
0x10
0x0a
0x09
0x20
Cause
It is detected that the MZ1 or MB1 fuse is
blown out.
It is detected that the MZ2 or MB2 fuse is
blown out.
It is detected that the MZ3 fuse is blown out.
Fuse
mark
Fuse mounted
board
F1
SND21B board
F2
SND21B board
F3
SND21B board
It is detected that the SOLH1 fuse is blown out.
F4
It is detected that the FAN1-4 fuses are blown
F5 to F8
out.
It is detected that the 5V internal power supply
F10
fuse is blown out.
It is detected that the 3.3V internal power
F12
supply fuse is blown out.
It is detected that the 5V sensor system fuse is
F14
blown out.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
SND21B board
SND21B board
SND21B board
SND21B board
SND21B board
MT-5
MT-5.1
Error code: 12851
<Display example>
Detail code (including
hexadecimal code)
PFCS1R=0x01
PFCS1R=0x02
PFCS1R=0x04
PFCS2R=0x04
PFCS1R=0x40
PFCS2R=0x40
012-201-09E
Cause
It is detected that the LD power supply 1
fuse is blown out.
It is detected that the LD power supply 2
fuse is blown out.
It is detected that the LD logic power supply
1 fuse is blown out.
It is detected that the motor solenoid power
supply fuse is blown out.
It is detected that the exposure unit I/O
power supply fuse is blown out.
It is detected that the RS232C power supply
2 fuse is blown out.
Fuse
mark
Fuse
mounted
board
F2
PAT21A board
F3
PAT21A board
F4
PAT21A board
F7
PAT21A board
F10
PAT21A board
F18
PAT21A board
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-5.1
MT-5.2
BLANK PAGE
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-5.2
MT-6
1.6
Location to Be First Inspected when a
Failure Occurs
When some errors (troubles) occur in the machine, check the phenomenon of the
error and the location to be first inspected according to the following table before
normal troubleshooting.
Phenomenon of Error and Location to Be First Inspected
Phenomenon
Location to be first inspected
Connector
RLY21A: CN1
JCT21A: CN3
CCD21A: CN2
LVC21A: CN1
PWC21A: CN21
JCT21B: CN22
10210:
LDD21A: CN2
Whole LDs lower limit current error PAT21A: CN6
H-CN1
K-CN2
JCT21A: CN6
10211:
JCT21B: CN21
Whole LDs upper limit current error
LDD21A: CN1, CN9
10262:
JCT21A: CN4
CCD timing setting error
CCD21A: CN3
10266:
PWC21A: CN22, CN32
PAT21A: CN16
AD converter error
10300:
SZ3
Incorrect sensor data in initializing
SZ5
(Subscanner mechanism)
SZ1
10310:
MZ1
Home positioning error (Subscanner
MB1
mechanism)
H-CN26
SZ2
10330:
MZ2
Home positioning error (IP Shifter
MB2
mechanism)
SND21B: CN21
SZ7
MZ3
10350:
SND21B: CN11, CN22
Home positioning error (Bucky
H-CN21
mechanism)
H-CN22
K-CN4
Fuse
RLY21A
JCT21A
CCD21A
LVC21A
10113:
DSP input/output data error
012-201-09E
Concerned
board
PAT21A: F2,
F3
PAT21A: F4
PWC21A
JCT21B
LDD21A
PAT21A
JCT21A
JCT21B
LDD21A
JCT21A
CCD21A
PWC21A
PAT21A
Phenomenon
10390:
Detection of the front cover open
SND21B
LCD panel remains black.
SND21B: F2
SND21B
LCD panel remains white.
SND21B: F3
PAT21A: F7
SND21B
PAT21A
Connector
Indicator lamp does not light up.
Buzzer remains making sound.
Fuse
Concerned
board
H-CN25
SND21B: CN9, CN13
RLY21A/B: CN3
LDS21A/B: CN2, CN3,
CN4
10700:
PWC21A: CN1, CN31
Erasure lamp unlit detection error
JCT21A: CN1, CN2,
CN5
JCT21B: CN1, CN4
ERS21A/B: CN1, CN2
SND21A: CN2
SND21B: CN1, CN12
RLY21A: CN2, CN4
10813:
PAT21A: CN8
SND21B-S board undetected
H-CN2
K-CN3
Power is not ON.
PAT21A: CN2, CN5,
(The start switch on the operation CN15
ATX: CN41, CN45
panel does not work.)
PAT21A: CN4, CN14
Power LED on the operation panel
LCN21A: CN2, CN3
does not light up.
K-CN6
The power LED (Ready/Power/
PAT21A: CN1, CN20
Call) on the operation panel and
CFI21A: CN1, CN3
the indicator lamp stay lit and the
ATX: CN6
machine does not start.
Touch button on the LCD panel
does not work.
SND21B: F1
Location to be first inspected
ATX: CN17
LCD: CN5
PAT21A: CN12
LCN21A: CN1
LCD: CN1, CN2
ELV21A: CN5, CN11,
CN12
K-CN5
ATX: CN18
LCD: CN3, CN4
LCN21A: CN4
SND21A: CN3
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
SND21B
RLY21A/B
LDS21A/B
SND21B: F9, F11 PWC21A
JCT21A
JCT21B
ERS21A/B
SND21B: F12
PAT21A: F10
SND21A
SND21B
RLY21A
PAT21A
PAT21A: F1
PAT21A
ATX
PAT21A
LCN21A
PAT21A: F11,
F13,
F14,
F17
PAT21A
CFI21A
ATX
PAT21A: F18
PAT21A
ATX
LCD
ELV21A: F2, F3,
F4
PAT21A
LCN21A
LCD
ELV21A
ATX
LCD
LCN21A
SND21A
MT-6
MT-7
2.
Error Code Table
Error
Code
10110
Error Name
DSP micro program loading error
Occurrence Condition
Probable Cause and Remedy
[During bootup]
An attempt is made to load the microprogram residing in the DIMM
on the ATX board (motherboard) to the DSP located on the CPS21A
board, but an error is detected.
Analysis
Flow
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
- Check the CPS21A board.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{MT:5.1}
{SP:13.}
- Reinstall the RU software.
{IN:25.}
10111
DSP idling start up error
[During bootup]
After the microprogram residing in the DIMM on the ATX board
(motherboard) is loaded to the DSP located on the CPS21A board,
the machine cannot be booted, resulting in failure to return to the
DSP idle state.
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
- Check the CPS21A board.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{MT:5.1}
{SP:13.}
- Reinstall the RU software.
{IN:25.}
10112
DSP processing time-out error
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
[During bootup/routine processing]
The DSP located on the CPS21A board is activated, but the operation - Check the CPS21A board.
of the DSP does not end normally within the specified period of time,
{MU:4.4 [3]}
thus resulting in a time-out.
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{MT:5.1}
{SP:13.}
- Reinstall the RU software.
{IN:25.}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-7
MT-8
Error
Code
Error Name
Occurrence Condition
Probable Cause and Remedy
[During routine processing]
The DSP detected an error in the input/output data.
10113
Analysis
Flow
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
- Check the CPS21A board.
DSP input/output data error
{MU:4.4 [3]}
{MT:5.1}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
10114
Correction data from Compact
Flash Card read error (File
reading error)
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
[During bootup/routine processing]
An attempt is made to load the correction data to the memory located - Check the CPS21A board.
on the CPS21A board, but an error is detected.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{MT:5.1}
{SP:13.}
- Reinstall the RU software.
{IN:25.}
10120
Internal CCD data transmission
unmatched error
[During bootup]
The test data from the CPS21A board is transferred to the DIMM on
the ATX board (motherboard), but inconsistency of the test data is
detected.
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
- Check the CPS21A board.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{MT:5.1}
{SP:13.}
- Reinstall the RU software.
{IN:25.}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-8
MT-9
Error
Code
Error Name
Occurrence Condition
Probable Cause and Remedy
[During bootup/routine processing]
The fault detecting current monitor circuit for each LD detects current
underconsumption for all the LDs.
Analysis
Flow
- Check the SH3/SH4/MSH1/MSH12.
{MC:4.}
- Check the LD assembly.
{MU:4.4 [1-5]}
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
10210
Whole LDs lower limit current
error
- Check the SND21A/SND21B board.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
{MT:4.1}
- Check the voltage of the LD assembly.
{MT:7.}
- Check the boards/connected connectors/cables
among the LD assembly, the SND21B and the
ATX board (motherboard).
{SP:13.}
[During bootup/routine processing]
The fault detecting current monitor circuit for each LD detects current
overconsumption for all the LDs.
- Check the LD assembly.
{MU:4.4 [1-5]}
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
- Check the SND21A/SND21B board.
10211
Whole LDs upper limit current
error
{MU:4.4 [3]}
- Check the voltage of the LD assembly.
{MT:4.1}
{MT:7.}
- Check the boards/connected connectors/cables
among the LD assembly, the SND21B and the
ATX board (motherboard).
{SP:13.}
[During bootup]
The DSP detects an error during self-diagnostics of the CPS21A
board.
10260
CPS21A initial diagnosis error
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
- Check the CPS21A board.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{MT:5.1}
{SP:13.}
- Reinstall the RU software.
{IN:25.}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-9
MT-10
Error
Code
Error Name
Occurrence Condition
Probable Cause and Remedy
[During bootup/M-Utility]
Although an AD gain was set for the CCD, an error was detected by
a comparison check.
10261
AD Gain setting error
Analysis
Flow
- Check the voltage of the CCD assembly.
{MT:7.}
- Check the boards/connected connectors/cables
among the CCD assembly, the SND21B and the
ATX board (motherboard) (signal system).
{MT:4.2}
- Check the boards/connected connectors/cables
among the CCD assembly, the LDS/RLY board
and the CPS21A board (image data system).
{SP:13.}
[During bootup/M-Utility]
Although a timing value was set for the CCD, an error was detected
by a comparison check.
10262
CCD timing setting error
- Check the voltage of the CCD assembly.
{MT:7.}
- Check the boards/connected connectors/cables
among the CCD assembly, the SND21B and the
ATX board (motherboard) (signal system).
{MT:4.2}
- Check the boards/connected connectors/cables
among the CCD assembly, the LDS/RLY board
and the CPS21A board (image data system).
{SP:13.}
[During bootup/M-Utility]
Although an AD offset was set for the CCD, an error was detected by
a comparison check.
10263
AD offset setting error
- Check the voltage of the CCD assembly.
{MT:7.}
- Check the boards/connected connectors/cables
among the CCD assembly, the SND21B and the
ATX board (motherboard) (signal system).
{MT:4.2}
- Check the boards/connected connectors/cables
among the CCD assembly, the LDS/RLY board
and the CPS21A board (image data system).
{SP:13.}
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-10
MT-11
Error
Code
Error Name
Occurrence Condition
Probable Cause and Remedy
Analysis
Flow
- Check the voltage of the CCD assembly.
[During bootup]
Although the MUX-CONFIG comparison check and setup adjustment
{MT:7.}
procedures are performed for the CCD, the maximum retry count was
- Check the boards/connected connectors/cables
exceeded.
10264
among the CCD assembly, the SND21B and the
ATX board (motherboard) (signal system).
AD MUX-CONFIG setting error
{MT:4.2}
- Check the boards/connected connectors/cables
among the CCD assembly, the LDS/RLY board
and the CPS21A board (image data system).
{SP:13.}
[During bootup]
The AD9826 error is detected.
10266
AD Converter error
- Check the voltage of the CCD assembly.
{MT:7.}
- Check the boards/connected connectors/cables
among the CCD assembly, the SND21B and the
ATX board (motherboard) (signal system).
{MT:4.2}
- Check the boards/connected connectors/cables
among the CCD assembly, the LDS/RLY board
and the CPS21A board (image data system).
{SP:13.}
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-11
MT-12
Error
Code
Error Name
Occurrence Condition
Probable Cause and Remedy
Analysis
Flow
- Check the SZ1.
[During bootup]
An error is detected in the sensor information for the four sensors (SZ1, - Check the SZ3.
SZ3, SZ4, and SZ5) of the subscanning unit.
- Check the SZ4.
(For example, SZ3 and SZ4 both indicate CLOSE.)
10300
Incorrect sensor data in initializing
(Subscanner mechanism)
<I/O name>
SZ1: Subscanning HP sensor
SZ3: Subscanning overrun sensor (upper)
SZ4: Subscanning overrun sensor (lower)
SZ5: Subscanning operation sensor
- Check the SZ5.
{MU:4.4[4]}
{MU:4.6}
- Check the SND21A/SND21B board.
{MT:3.1}
{MU:4.4 [3]}
- Check the subscanning mechanism.
{MU:4.4[4]}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
10310
Home positioning error
(Subscanner mechanism)
[During bootup/routine processing]
The MZ1 is turned ON, but the SZ1 remains unchanged.
- Check the interlock.
<I/O name>
MZ1: Subscanning motor
SZ1: Subscanning HP sensor
- Check the MZ1.
{MD:6.}
- Check the SZ1.
{MU:4.4[4]}
{MU:4.6}
- Check the SND21A/SND21B board.
{MT:3.2}
{MU:4.4 [3]}
- Check the subscanning mechanism.
{MU:4.4[4]}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-12
MT-13
Error
Code
10316
Error Name
Motor stop time-out error
(Subscanner mechanism)
Occurrence Condition
Probable Cause and Remedy
[During bootup/routine processing]
The motor controller within the SND21B board fails to generate a
specified number of pulses.
Analysis
Flow
- Check the interlock.
{MD:6.}
- Check the SND21B board.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
-
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
[During routine processing]
When the MZ1 was turned ON, the SZ1 was closed. Therefore, an
attempt was made to move the SZ1 to its home position. However,
the maximum retry count was exceeded.
10317
Out of defined moving time
(Subscanner unit) and retrial over
<I/O name>
MZ1: Subscanning motor
SZ1: Subscanning HP sensor
- Check the MZ1.
- Check the SZ1.
{MU:4.4[4]}
{MU:4.6}
- Check the SND21A/SND21B board.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
{MT:3.2}
- Check the subscanning mechanism.
{MU:4.4[4]}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
10330
Home positioning error
(IP Shifter mechanism)
[During bootup/routine processing]
The MZ2 is turned ON, but the SZ2 remains unchanged.
- Check the interlock.
<I/O name>
MZ2: IP movement motor
SZ2: IP reading-side HP sensor
- Check the MZ2.
{MD:6.}
- Check the SZ2.
{MU:4.4[4]}
{MU:4.6}
- Check the SND21A/SND21B board.
{MT:3.3}
{MU:4.4 [3]}
- Check the IP movement mechanism.
{MU:4.4[4]}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-13
MT-14
Error
Code
Error Name
Occurrence Condition
Probable Cause and Remedy
[During bootup/routine processing]
The motor controller within the SND21B board fails to generate a
specified number of pulses.
10336
Motor stop time-out error (IP
Shifter mechanism)
Analysis
Flow
- Check the interlock.
{MD:6.}
- Check the SND21B board.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
- Check the IP movement mechanism.
-
{MU:4.4[4]}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
10350
[During bootup/routine processing]
The MZ3 is turned ON, but the SZ7 remains unchanged.
- Check the interlock.
<I/O name>
MZ3: Bucky motor
SZ7: Bucky HP sensor
- Check the MZ3.
{MD:6.}
- Chec k the SZ7.
{MU:4.4[4]}
Home positioning error (Bucky
mechanism)
{MU:4.6}
- Check the SND21A/SND21B board.
{MT:3.4}
{MU:4.4 [3]}
- Check the Bucky mechanism.
{MU:4.4[4]}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
[During bootup]
The MSH1/MSH2 is closed, but the OPEN state is detected by the
SH1.
10375
Cover lock error in bootup
<I/O name>
MSH1/MSH12: Grid replacement cover interlock switch
SH1: Grid cover lock sensor
- Check the MSH1/MSH12.
- Check the SH1.
{MU:4.6}
- Check the SND21A/SND21B board.
{MT:3.9}
{MU:4.4 [3]}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
10390
Detection of the front cover open
[During bootup/routine processing]
The OPEN state was detected by the SH3/SH4.
- Check the SH3/SH4.
<I/O name>
SH3/SH4: Exposure unit front cover laser safety interlock switch
- Check the SND21A/SND21B board.
{MU:4.6}
{MU:4.4 [3]}
{MT:3.5}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-14
MT-15
Error
Code
10700
Error Name
Erasure lamp unlit detection error
Occurrence Condition
Probable Cause and Remedy
[During bootup/routine processing]
Unlit conditions of a plurality of erasure lamps are detected.
- Check the fuses (SND21B board: F9, F11)
<I/O name>
TSWA1: Thermal switch
- Check the erasure unit (ERS21 board).
Analysis
Flow
{MT:6.5}
- Check the TSWA1.
{MT:5.2}
{MU:4.4 [3]}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
10811
SND21A board undetected
[During bootup]
The CPU within the ATX board (motherboard) makes an attempt to
read/write the register in the SND21A board, but an error is detected.
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
- Check the SND21A board.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
{MT:5.3}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
10812
SND21B board undetected
[During bootup]
The CPU within the ATX board (motherboard) makes an attempt to
read/write the register in the SND21B board, but an error is detected.
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
- Check the SND21B board.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
{MT:5.4}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
10813
SND21B-S board undetected
[During bootup]
The CPU within the ATX board (motherboard) makes an attempt
to read/write the register in the SND21B-S board, but an error is
detected.
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
- Check the SND21B board (SND21B-S board).
{MU:4.4 [3]}
{MT:5.4}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
[During bootup]
The CPU within the ATX board (motherboard) makes an attempt to
read/write the register in the CCD21A board, but an error is detected.
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
- Check the SND21A/SND21B board.
- Check the CCD assembly.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
10814
CCD21A board undetected
- Check the voltage of the CCD assembly.
{MT:7.}
- Check the boards/connected connectors/cables
among the CCD assembly, the SND21B and the
ATX board (motherboard).
{SP:13.}
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-15
MT-16
Error
Code
Error Name
Occurrence Condition
Probable Cause and Remedy
[During bootup]
The CPU within the ATX board (motherboard) makes an attempt to
read/write the register in the LDA21A board, but an error is detected.
10815
LDA21A board undetected
Analysis
Flow
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
- Check the SND21A/SND21B board.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
- Check the voltage of the LD assembly.
{MT:7.}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
10816
ERS21 board undetected
[During bootup]
The CPU within the ATX board (motherboard) makes an attempt to
read/write the register in the ERS21 board, but an error is detected.
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
- Check the SND21A/SND21B board.
- Check the erasure unit (ERS21 board).
{MU:4.4 [3]}
-
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
10820
CPS21A board undetected
[During bootup]
The CPU within the ATX board (motherboard) makes an attempt to
read/write the register in the CPS21A board, but an error is detected.
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
- Check the CPS21A board.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
{MT:5.1}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
10830
ERS21 board version
unrecognized
[During bootup]
The CPU within the ATX board fails to recognize the board version
within the ERS21 board.
- Check the erasure unit (ERS21 board).
- Check the TSWA1.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
-
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-16
MT-17
Error
Code
Error Name
Occurrence Condition
Probable Cause and Remedy
Analysis
Flow
11210
Warning of lower LD operating
current
[During bootup/routine processing]
The fault detecting current monitor circuit for each LD detects current
underconsumption for one or more LDs.
Same as the error code 10210.
{MT:4.1}
11211
Warning of upper LD operating
current
[During bootup/routine processing]
The fault detecting current monitor circuit for each LD detects current
overconsumption for one or more LDs.
Same as the error code 10211.
{MT:4.1}
[During bootup/routine processing]
The current consumption of at least one LD increased so that the
resulting current was more than 1.2 times larger than the initial
current value.
11212
Warning of increased LD
operating current
- Check the voltage of the LD assembly.
{MU:4.4 [1-5]}
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
- Check the SND21A/SND21B board.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
- Check the voltage of the LD assembly.
{MT:4.1}
{MT:7.}
- Check the boards/connected connectors/cables
among the LD assembly, the SND21B and the
ATX board (motherboard).
{SP:13.}
11221
Thermistor circuit failure in
Scanner
- Check the thermal sensor of the scanner unit
[During bootup/routine processing]
(possibility of failure).
A circuit error of the temperature monitoring thermistor of the scanner
unit is detected.
{MU:4.4 [5-6]}
{MT:4.3}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
11222
Low temperature error in Scanner
[During bootup/routine processing]
The temperature monitoring thermistor of the scanner unit detects a
temperature of
0°C or lower.
- Check the thermal sensor of the scanner unit
(possibility of failure).
{MU:4.4 [5-6]}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{MT:4.3}
{SP:13.}
- Check the room temperature.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-17
MT-18
Error
Code
11223
Error Name
Warning of high temperature in
Scanner
Occurrence Condition
Probable Cause and Remedy
[During routine processing]
The temperature monitoring thermistor of the scanner unit detects a
temperature of 47°C or higher.
Analysis
Flow
- Check the FANH1-5.
{MU:4.4 [4-8]}
- Check the thermal sensor of the scanner unit .
{MU:4.4 [5-6]}
{MT:4.4}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
11224
High temperature error in Scanner
[During routine processing]
The temperature monitoring thermistor of the scanner unit detects a
temperature of 48°C or higher.
- Check the FANH1-5.
{MU:4.4 [4-8]}
- Check the thermal sensor of the scanner unit.
{MU:4.4 [5-6]}
{MT:4.4}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
[During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility]
A CCD error is detected while CCD artifact correction data is being
generated.
- Reperform the correction procedures.
{MC:14.}
- Check the light blocking of the exposure unit.
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
- Check the CPS21A board.
- Check the SND21A/SND21B board.
11241
CCD defect correction data
generation error
- Check the CCD assembly.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
- Check the voltage of the CCD assembly.
-
{MT:7.}
- Check the boards/connected connectors/cables
among the CCD assembly, the SND21B and the
ATX board (motherboard) (signal system).
- Check the boards/connected connectors/cables
among the CCD assembly, the LDS/RLY board
and the CPS21A board (image data system).
{SP:13.}
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-18
MT-19
Error
Code
Error Name
Occurrence Condition
Probable Cause and Remedy
[During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility]
An attempt is made to generate CCD dark current correction data,
but a CCD error is detected.
Analysis
Flow
- Reperform the correction procedures.
{MC:14.}
- Check the light blocking of the exposure unit.
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
- Check the CPS21A board.
- Check the SND21A/SND21B board.
11242
Dark current correction data
generation error
- Check the CCD assembly.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
- Check the voltage of the CCD assembly.
-
{MT:7.}
- Check the boards/connected connectors/cables
among the CCD assembly, the SND21B and the
ATX board (motherboard) (signal system).
- Check the boards/connected connectors/cables
among the CCD assembly, the LDS/RLY board
and the CPS21A board (image data system).
{SP:13.}
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-19
MT-20
Error
Code
Error Name
Occurrence Condition
Probable Cause and Remedy
[During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility]
An attempt is made to generate CCD defect correction data, but a
luminosity error of the correction light source is detected.
Analysis
Flow
- Check the fuses (PAT board: F8, F9)
{MT:6.5}
- Reperform the correction procedures.
{MC:14.}
- Check the light blocking of the exposure unit.
- Check the CCD functional check LED assembly.
{MU:4.4 [1-4]}
{MC:8.12}
11244
Corrective light source error
(defect correction data generation
error)
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
- Check the CPS21A board.
- Check the SND21A/SND21B board.
-
- Check the CCD assembly.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
- Check the voltage of the CCD assembly.
{MT:7.}
- Check the boards/connected connectors/cables
among the CCD assembly, the SND21B and the
ATX board (motherboard) (signal system).
- Check the boards/connected connectors/cables
among the CCD assembly, the LDS/RLY board
and the CPS21A board (image data system).
{SP:13.}
[During M-Utility]
The SOLH1 is turned ON, but the SH1 does not transition from
CLOSE to OPEN.
11370
Cover lock release error in grid
change work
<I/O name>
SOLH1: Grid replacement cover lock solenoid
SH1: Grid cover lock sensor
- Check the SOLH1.
- Check the SH1.
{MU:4.4[4]}
{MU:4.6}
- Check the SND21A/SND21B board.
{MT:3.6}
{MU:4.4 [3]}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-20
MT-21
Error
Code
Error Name
Occurrence Condition
Probable Cause and Remedy
[During M-Utility]
The SOLH1 is turned OFF, but the SH1 does not transition from
OPEN to CLOSE.
11371
Cover lock error in grid change
work
<I/O name>
SOLH1: Grid replacement cover lock solenoid
SH1: Grid cover lock sensor
Analysis
Flow
- Check the SOLH1.
- Check the SH1.
{MU:4.4[4]}
{MU:4.6}
- Check the SND21A/SND21B board.
{MT:3.6}
{MU:4.4 [3]}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
[During bootup/routine processing]
The SH1 detected the OPEN state for a period of longer than 1
second.
11372
Detection of the grid change cover
open
<I/O name>
SH1: Grid cover lock sensor
- Check the SOLH1.
- Check the SH1.
{MU:4.4[4]}
{MU:4.6}
- Check the SND21A/SND21B board.
{MT:3.6}
{MU:4.4 [3]}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
11400
Detection of over 1R X-ray dose
exposed
[During routine processing]
It is detected that the IP was irradiated by X-rays of 1 R or more.
- Check the exposure conditions.
11401
Detection of 1.5R X-ray dose
exposed
[During routine processing]
It is detected that the IP was irradiated by X-rays of 1.5 R or more.
- Check the exposure conditions.
Patient information unregistered
[During image transfer]
The patient information corresponding to the processed IP has not
been registered in the CL when the menu is not selected.
- Check the CL.
-
11512
ID information obtaining error
[During routine processing]
Although the RU sent an ID information inquiry to the CL, the ID
information could not be acquired due to a CL error.
- Check the CL.
-
11530
RU image data retransmitted
[During routine processing]
The image data is retransmitted from the RU to the CL.
- Check the network.
-
11531
RU image data retransmission
error
[During routine processing]
An attempt is made to retransmit the unsent image data to the CL
after communication with the CL is suspended, but the CL rejects it.
- Check the CL.
-
11511
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
- Check the light blocking of the exposure unit.
- Check the light blocking of the exposure unit.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
-
-
MT-21
MT-22
Error
Code
11700
Error Name
Warning of Erasure lamp unlit
Occurrence Condition
Probable Cause and Remedy
[During bootup/routine processing]
One or more erasure lamps are blown.
Analysis
Flow
- Check the erasure unit (ERS21 board).
{MU:4.4 [3]}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{MT:5.2}
{SP:13.}
11701
Thermistor failure error (Erasure
lamp)
[During bootup/routine processing]
An error is detected on the TSWA1 of the erasure unit.
- Check the erasure unit (ERS21 board).
- Check the TSWA1.
<I/O name>
TSWA1: Thermal switch
{MU:4.4 [3]}
{MT:5.2}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
11702
11710
12030
Heater failure (Erasure lamp)
Periodic erasing performed
[During bootup/routine processing]
The TSWA1 of the erasure unit does not detect a change in
temperature.
- Check the erasure unit (ERS21 board).
- Check the TSWA1.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
<I/O name>
TSWA1: Thermal switch
{MT:5.2}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
Periodic erasure at intervals of four hours is performed.
-
[During bootup]
An attempt is made to load the bitmap file (LCD panel display screen
data) from the Compact Flash Card to the SDRAM (DIMM), an error
is detected.
Bit map file loading error
-
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
{MU:4.4 [3]}
- Mount and remove the Compact Flash Card (to
check for incomplete insertion of the Card).
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{MT:5.5}
{SP:13.}
- Reinstall the RU software.
{IN:25.}
[During bootup]
An attempt is made to load touch panel adjustment file from the
Compact Flash Card to the SDRAM (DIMM), an error is detected.
12032
Touch panel adjustment file
loading error
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
{MU:4.4 [3]}
- Mount and remove the Compact Flash Card (to
check for incomplete insertion of the Card).
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{MT:5.5}
{SP:13.}
- Reinstall the RU software.
{IN:25.}
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-22
MT-23
Error
Code
12039
Error Name
Connecting error
Occurrence Condition
Probable Cause and Remedy
[During routine processing]
When a procedure for connecting the CL to the RU was performed,
no exposure size/menu appeared on the RU’s LCD panel.
Analysis
Flow
- Check the CL.
- Mount and remove the Compact Flash Card (to
check for incomplete insertion of the Card).
-
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
12040
Message sending error
[During routine processing]
When a procedure for establishing the communication between the
CL and RU was performed, no exposure size/menu appeared on the
RU’s LCD panel.
- Check the CL.
- Mount and remove the Compact Flash Card (to
check for incomplete insertion of the Card).
-
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
12071
12072
12112
FTP server access error
[During bootup/routine processing]
Communication with the CL results in failure to access the FTP
server.
Alternatively, the FTP server can be accessed, but connected.
- Check the CL.
-
History file loading error
[During bootup]
The history file could not be read from the STATISITCS folder in the
FTP server.
- Check the CL.
-
DSP processing time-out error
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
[During routine processing]
The DSP located on the CPS21A board is activated, but the operation - Check the CPS21A board.
of the DSP does not end normally within the specified period of time,
{MU:4.4 [3]}
thus resulting in a time-out.
{MT:5.1}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
[During routine processing]
The DSP detects a warning level error in the input data.
12113
DSP input/output data error
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
- Check the CPS21A board.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
{MT:5.1}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-23
MT-24
Error
Code
12114
Error Name
Correction data from Compact
Flash Card read error (File
reading error)
Occurrence Condition
Probable Cause and Remedy
[During routine processing/M-Utility]
The correction data file could not be read from the Compact Flash
Card, the reading was retried.
Analysis
Flow
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
{MU:4.4 [3]}
- Mount and remove the Compact Flash Card (to
check for incomplete insertion of the Card).
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{MT:5.5}
{SP:13.}
- Reinstall the RU software.
{IN:25.}
12115
Correction data to CPS21A board
load error (Transfer error)
[During routine processing/M-Utility]
An attempt is made to load the correction data onto the memory
located on the CPS21A board, but an error is detected. Thus the
loading was retried.
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
- Check the CPS21A board.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{MT:5.1}
{SP:13.}
- Reinstall the RU software.
{IN:25.}
12116
Correction data from CPS21A
board read error (Transfer error)
[During routine processing/M-Utility]
An attempt is made to read newly created correction data from the
memory located on the CPS21A board, but an error is detected.
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
- Check the CPS21A board.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{MT:5.1}
{SP:13.}
- Reinstall the RU software.
{IN:25.}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-24
MT-25
Error
Code
Error Name
Occurrence Condition
Probable Cause and Remedy
[During routine processing/M-Utility]
An attempt is made to write newly created correction data on the
Compact Flash Card, but an error is detected.
12117
Correction data to Compact Flash
Card load error (File save error)
Analysis
Flow
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
{MU:4.4 [3]}
- Mount and remove the Compact Flash Card (to
check for incomplete insertion of the Card).
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{MT:5.5}
{SP:13.}
- Reinstall the RU software.
{IN:25.}
[During routine processing]
The DSP detected an error in input/output data.
12118
DSP input/output data error
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
- Check the CPS21A board.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
{MT:5.1}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
12121
Defect pixel correction data file
save error
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
[During routine processing/M-Utility]
Error code No.12116 and 12117 occurred three times after calculating - Check the CPS21A board.
the defect pixel correction data, a retrial count is over.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{MT:5.1}
{SP:13.}
- Reinstall the RU software.
{IN:25.}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-25
MT-26
Error
Code
Error Name
Occurrence Condition
Probable Cause and Remedy
[During routine processing/M-Utility]
An error is detected in calculation of the AD gain value for the CCD.
Analysis
Flow
- Check the exposure conditions (exposure
dose, 17 inch x 17 inch irradiation field, no grid,
no photo-timer, normal X ray tube, clearance
between the X ray tube and the front cover of the
exposure unit (IP)).
- Check contamination of the IP.
→ Clean the IP.
{MC:5.1.4}
- Reperform the correction procedures.
{MC:14.}
- Check the light blocking of the exposure unit.
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
- Check the CPS21A board.
12231
- Check the SND21A/SND21B board.
Correction process error (AD
gain)
- Check the CCD assembly.
-
{MU:4.4 [3]}
- Check the LD assembly.
{MU:4.4 [1-5]}
- Check by means of calculation of Delta Y.
{MC:13.}
- Check the voltage of the CCD assembly.
{MT:7.}
- Check the boards/connected connectors/cables
among the CCD assembly, the SND21B and the
ATX board (motherboard) (signal system).
- Check the boards/connected connectors/cables
among the CCD assembly, the LDS/RLY board
and the CPS21A board (image data system).
{SP:13.}
12232
Correction process error (Leakage
light data correction calculation)
[During routine processing/M-Utility]
The calculated value of the leak correction data is detected to be
abnormal.
Same as the error code 12231.
-
12233
Correction process error (Shading
correction data calculation)
[During routine processing/M-Utility]
An error is detected in the calculated value of the shading correction
data.
Same as the error code 12231.
-
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-26
MT-27
Error
Code
Error Name
Occurrence Condition
12234
Correction process error (Linearity
correction data calculation)
[During routine processing/M-Utility]
The calculated value of the linearity correction data is detected to be
abnormal.
12235
Correction process error (Specific
defect data updating)
[During routine processing/M-Utility]
An error is detected in calculated data of the specific defect data.
12236
Correct process error (X rays
damaged data calculation)
[During routine processing/M-Utility]
The calculated value of the X-ray damage data is detected to be
abnormal.
12238
Correction process error (Unstable
adjusted light amount of corrective
light source)
[During routine processing/M-Utility]
The luminosity adjustment during correction of the correction light
source is detected to be abnormal.
Correction process error
(Unmatched judgment of
corrective light source)
[During routine processing/M-Utility]
The luminosity adjustment for the correction light source correction is
detected to be abnormal.
Correction process error
(Corrective light source
adjustment error)
[During routine processing/M-Utility]
The luminosity adjustment for the correction light source correction is
detected to be abnormal.
12241
Warning on defect pixel correction
data generation error
[During routine processing/M-Utility]
An attempt is made to generate CCD defect correction data, but a
CCD warning is detected.
Same as the error code 12231.
-
12242
Warning on dark correction data
generation error
[During routine processing/M-Utility]
An attempt is made to generate CCD dark current correction data,
but a CCD warning is detected.
Same as the error code 12231.
-
12239
12240
012-201-09E
Probable Cause and Remedy
Analysis
Flow
Same as the error code 12231.
-
Same as the error code 12231.
-
Same as the error code 12231.
-
- Check the CCD functional check LED assembly.
{MU:4.4 [1-4]}
-
- Same as the error code 12231.
- Check the CCD functional check LED assembly.
{MU:4.4 [1-4]}
-
- Same as the error code 12231.
- Check the CCD functional check LED assembly.
{MU:4.4 [1-4]}
-
- Same as the error code 12231.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-27
MT-28
Error
Code
12243
Error Name
Reference light correction data
generation error
Occurrence Condition
Probable Cause and Remedy
[During routine processing/M-Utility]
An attempt is made to generate CCD reference light current
correction data, but a CCD warning is detected.
- Check the CCD functional check LED assembly.
{MU:4.4 [1-4]}
{MC:8.12}
12245
[During routine processing/M-Utility]
An error was found in a calculated data value concerning shading
sensitivity that was without sensitivity adjustment.
12246
Invalid request for under
correction process
[During M-Utility]
A command cannot be accepted because the reader unit is busy.
12247
Correction processing undone (the
grid exists.)
[During M-Utility]
Command reception was unachievable because the grid was not
removed.
[During M-Utility]
Error code No.12115 occurred three times when loading the
correction data on the CPS21A board, a retrial count is over.
Correction data loading error
-
- Same as the error code 12231.
Correction processing error
(Shading correction data updating
without sensitivity adjustment)
12248
Analysis
Flow
Same as the error code 12231.
-
No remedy is required (wait until the operation
quits).
-
Remove the grid and then try again.
-
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
- Check the CPS21A board.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{MT:5.1}
{SP:13.}
- Reinstall the RU software.
{IN:25.}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-28
MT-29
Error
Code
12249
Error Name
Correction data read error
Occurrence Condition
Probable Cause and Remedy
[During M-Utility]
Error code No.12117 occurred three times when reading the
correction data from the Compact Flash Card, a retrial count is over.
Analysis
Flow
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
{MU:4.4 [3]}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
{MT:5.5}
- Reinstall the RU software.
{IN:25.}
12250
Correction process error (Delta Y)
[During routine processing/M-Utility]
An error occurs in calculation of Delta Y.
Same as the error code 12231.
[During M-Utility]
An error is detected for the DPRAM of the CPS21A board.
12251
-
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
- Check the CPS21A board.
Self-diagnostic DPRAM test error
{MU:4.4 [3]}
{MT:5.1}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
12252
Self-diagnostic communication
test error between DSPs
[During M-Utility]
An error is detected for the communication test on the control data
exchanged with the DSP of the CPS21A board.
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
- Check the CPS21A board.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
{MT:5.1}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-29
MT-30
Error
Code
12253
Error Name
Self-diagnostic communication
test error between DSPs
Occurrence Condition
Probable Cause and Remedy
[During M-Utility]
An error is detected for the communication test on the image data
transferred with the DSP of the CPS21A board.
Analysis
Flow
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
- Check the CPS21A board.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
{MT:5.1}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
12254
Self-diagnostic FIFO input test
error
[During M-Utility]
An error is detected for the memory of the CPS21A board.
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
- Check the CPS21A board.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
{MT:5.1}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
12255
Self-diagnostic PCI interruption
test error
[During M-Utility]
An error is detected for the interrupt between the CPS21A board and
ATX board (motherboard).
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
- Check the CPS21A board.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
{MT:5.1}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
12256
Self-diagnostic RAM marching
test error
[During M-Utility]
An error is detected in the DSP on the CPS21A board.
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
- Check the CPS21A board.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
{MT:5.1}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
12257
Self-diagnostic LVC loop back test
error
[During M-Utility]
A communication error between the CPS21A board and LVC21A
board is detected.
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
- Check the CPS21A board.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
{MT:5.1}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
12258
Self-diagnostic LVC FPGA Read/
Write test error
[During M-Utility]
An attempt is made to read/write from the CPS21A board to the
LVC21A board, but an error is detected.
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
- Check the CPS21A board.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
{MT:5.1}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-30
MT-31
Error
Code
12259
Error Name
Self-diagnostic SDRAM marching
test error
Occurrence Condition
Probable Cause and Remedy
[During M-Utility]
An error is detected in the DSP on the CPS21A board.
Analysis
Flow
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
- Check the CPS21A board.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
{MT:5.1}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
12261
AD Gain setting comparison
check error
[During bootup/M-Utility]
Although an AD gain was set for the CCD, an error was detected by a Same as the error code 12231.
comparison check.
{MT:4.2}
12262
CCD timing setting comparison
check error
[During bootup/M-Utility]
Although a timing value was set for the CCD, an error was detected
by a comparison check.
Same as the error code 12231.
{MT:4.2}
12263
AD offset timing setting
comparison check error
[During bootup/M-Utility]
Although an AD offset was set for the CCD, an error was detected by
a comparison check.
Same as the error code 12231.
{MT:4.2}
12264
AD MUX-CONFIG comparison
check error
[During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility]
After the MUX-CONFIG setup procedure was performed for the CCD, Same as the error code 10263.
an error was detected by a comparison check.
{MT:4.2}
12265
CCD binning count/line count/
storage time comparison check
error
[During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility]
After the binning count/line count/storage time setup procedure was
performed for the CCD, an error was detected by a comparison
check.
12266
AD Converter error
[During bootup]
The AD9826 error is detected.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
Same as the error code 12231.
Same as the error code 10266.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
{MT:4.2}
-
MT-31
MT-32
Error
Code
Error Name
Occurrence Condition
Probable Cause and Remedy
[During M-Utility]
Virtual image output is generated, but the virtual image cannot be
outputted within the specified time.
Analysis
Flow
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
- Check the CPS21A board.
- Check the SND21A/SND21B board.
- Check the CCD assembly.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
12290
Self-diagnostic internal CCD data
transfer time-out error
- Check the voltage of the CCD assembly.
{MT:7.}
-
- Check the boards/connected connectors/cables
among the CCD assembly, the SND21B and the
ATX board (motherboard) (signal system).
- Check the boards/connected connectors/cables
among the CCD assembly, the LDS/RLY board
and the CPS21A board (image data system).
{SP:13.}
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
[During M-Utility]
Virtual image output is generated, but the virtual image data outputted - Check the CPS21A board.
is detected to be abnormal.
- Check the SND21A/SND21B board.
- Check the CCD assembly.
{MU:4.4[3]}
12291
Self-diagnostic internal CCD data
transfer unmatched error
- Check the voltage of the CCD assembly.
{MT:7.}
-
- Check the boards/connected connectors/cables
among the CCD assembly, the SND21B and the
ATX board (motherboard) (signal system).
- Check the boards/connected connectors/cables
among the CCD assembly, the LDS/RLY board
and the CPS21A board (image data system).
{SP:13.}
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-32
MT-33
Error
Code
Error Name
Occurrence Condition
Probable Cause and Remedy
[During routine processing]
The MZ1 is turned ON, but the SZ3 transitions from OPEN to
CLOSE.
12311
Overrun in reading (Subscanner
mechanism)
Analysis
Flow
- Check the MZ1.
- Check the SZ3.
{MU:4.4[4]}
<I/O name>
MZ1: Subscanning motor
SZ3: Subscanning overrun sensor (upper)
{MU:4.6}
- Check the SND21A/SND21B board.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
{MT:3.7}
- Check the subscanning mechanism.
{MU:4.4[4]}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
[During routine processing]
The MZ1 is turned ON, but an error is detected during SZ5 operation
measurement time.
12312
Reading speed error (Subscanner
mechanism)
<I/O name>
MZ1: Subscanning motor
SZ5: Subscanning operation sensor
- Check the MZ1.
- Check the SZ5.
{MU:4.4[4]}
{MU:4.6}
- Check the SND21A/SND21B board.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
{MT:3.8}
- Check the subscanning mechanism.
{MU:4.4[4]}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
[During routine processing]
The MZ1 is turned ON, but the SZ4 transitions from OPEN to
CLOSE.
12313
Subscanner motor overrun (dose
detection)
<I/O name>
MZ1: Subscanning motor
SZ4: Subscanning overrun sensor (lower)
- Check the MZ1.
- Check the SZ4.
{MU:4.4[4]}
{MU:4.6}
- Check the SND21A/SND21B board.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
-
- Check the subscanning mechanism.
{MU:4.4[4]}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-33
MT-34
Error
Code
Error Name
Occurrence Condition
Probable Cause and Remedy
[During routine processing]
The MZ1 is turned ON, but the SZ3 transitions from OPEN to
CLOSE.
12314
Subscanner motor overrun (In godown erasing)
Analysis
Flow
- Check the MZ1.
- Check the SZ3.
{MU:4.4[4]}
<I/O name>
MZ1: Subscanning motor
SZ3: Subscanning overrun sensor (upper)
{MU:4.6}
- Check the SND21A/SND21B board.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
{MT:3.7}
- Check the subscanning mechanism.
{MU:4.4[4]}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
[During routine processing]
The MZ1 is turned ON, but the SZ4 transitions from OPEN to
CLOSE.
12315
Subscanner motor overrun (In goup erasing)
- Check the MZ1.
- Check the SZ4.
{MU:4.4[4]}
<I/O name>
MZ1: Subscanning motor
SZ4: Subscanning overrun sensor (lower)
{MU:4.6}
- Check the SND21A/SND21B board.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
-
- Check the subscanning mechanism.
{MU:4.4[4]}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
12317
12318
12319
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
Positioning error (Subscanner
unit)
Out of defined moving time
(Subscanner unit)
Out of defined moving time
(Subscanner unit)
[During routine processing]
Although the MZ1 was turned ON, the SZ1 was closed. Therefore,
the SZ1 was moved to its home position.
<I/O name>
MZ1: Subscanning motor
SZ1: Subscanning HP sensor
[During routine processing]
The moving time detected in the X-ray dose detection sequence was
outside the predefined range. Therefore, the SZ1 was moved to its
home position.
Same as the error code 12324.
{MT:3.2}
Same as the error code 12324.
{MT:3.2}
Same as the error code 12324.
{MT:3.2}
<I/O name>
SZ1: Subscanning HP sensor
[During routine processing]
Since the erasure time was outside the predefined range, the SZ1
was moved to its home position to retry the erasure operation.
<I/O name>
SZ1: Subscanning HP sensor
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-34
MT-35
Error
Code
Error Name
Occurrence Condition
Probable Cause and Remedy
[During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility]
The MZ1 is turned ON, but the SZ1 does not transition from OPEN to
CLOSE, so that a retry is performed.
12320
Home positioning-in error retrial
(Subscanner mechanism)
<I/O name>
MZ1: Subscanning motor
SZ1: Subscanning HP sensor
Analysis
Flow
- Check the MZ1.
- Check the SZ1.
{MU:4.4[4]}
{MU:4.6}
- Check the SND21A/SND21B board.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
{MT:3.2}
- Check the subscanning mechanism.
{MU:4.4[4]}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
[During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility]
The MZ1 is turned ON, but the SZ1 does not transition from CLOSE
to OPEN, so that a retry is performed.
12321
Home positioning-out error retrial
(Subscanner mechanism)
<I/O name>
MZ1: Subscanning motor
SZ1: Subscanning HP sensor
- Check the MZ1.
- Check the SZ1.
{MU:4.4[4]}
{MU:4.6}
- Check the SND21A/SND21B board.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
{MT:3.2}
- Check the subscanning mechanism.
{MU:4.4[4]}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-35
MT-36
Error
Code
Error Name
Occurrence Condition
Probable Cause and Remedy
[During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility]
The MZ1 is turned ON, but the SZ1 does not transition from CLOSE
to OPEN, so that a retry is performed.
12322
Home positioning detection error
retrial (Subscanner)
<I/O name>
MZ1: Subscanning motor
SZ1: Subscanning HP sensor
Analysis
Flow
- Check the MZ1.
- Check the SZ1.
{MU:4.4[4]}
{MU:4.6}
- Check the SND21A/SND21B board.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
{MT:3.2}
- Check the subscanning mechanism.
{MU:4.4[4]}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
[During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility]
The MZ1 is turned ON, but the SZ1 does not transition from OPEN to
CLOSE, so that a retry is performed.
12323
Retrial for moving error in
home positioning (Subscanner
mechanism)
<I/O name>
MZ1: Subscanning motor
SZ1: Subscanning HP sensor
- Check the MZ1.
- Check the SZ1.
{MU:4.4[4]}
{MU:4.6}
- Check the SND21A/SND21B board.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
{MT:3.2}
- Check the subscanning mechanism.
{MU:4.4[4]}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
[During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility]
The MZ1 is turned ON, but the SZ1 does not transition from OPEN to
CLOSE, so that a retry is performed.
12324
Home positioning with HP check
(Subscanner mechanism)
<I/O name>
MZ1: Subscanning motor
SZ1: Subscanning HP sensor
- Check the MZ1.
- Check the SZ1.
{MU:4.4[4]}
{MU:4.6}
- Check the SND21A/SND21B board.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
{MT:3.2}
- Check the subscanning mechanism.
{MU:4.4[4]}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-36
MT-37
Error
Code
12337
12338
Error Name
Positioning error (IP shifter)
Out of defined moving time (IP
shifter)
Occurrence Condition
Probable Cause and Remedy
[During routine processing]
Although the MZ2 was turned ON, the SZ2 was closed. Therefore,
the SZ2 was moved to its home position.
<I/O name>
MZ2: IP movement motor
SZ2: IP reading-side HP sensor
[During routine processing]
Although the MZ2 was turned ON, the moving time was outside
the predefined range. Therefore, the SZ2 was moved to its home
position.
Home positioning-in error retrial
(IP Shifter mechanism)
Same as the error code 12340.
{MT:3.3}
Same as the error code 12341.
{MT:3.3}
<I/O name>
MZ2: IP movement motor
SZ2: IP reading-side HP sensor
[During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility]
The MZ2 is turned ON, but the SZ2 does not transition from OPEN to
CLOSE, so that a retry is performed.
12340
Analysis
Flow
<I/O name>
MZ2: IP movement motor
SZ2: IP reading-side HP sensor
- Check the MZ2.
- Check the SZ2.
{MU:4.4[4]}
{MU:4.6}
- Check the SND21A/SND21B board.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
{MT:3.3}
- Check the IP movement mechanism.
{MU:4.4[4]}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
[During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility]
The MZ2 is turned ON, but the SZ2 does not transition from CLOSE
to OPEN, so that a retry is performed.
12341
Home positioning-out error retrial
(IP Shifter mechanism)
<I/O name>
MZ2: IP movement motor
SZ2: IP reading-side HP sensor
- Check the MZ2.
- Check the SZ2.
{MU:4.4[4]}
{MU:4.6}
- Check the SND21A/SND21B board.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
{MT:3.3}
- Check the IP movement mechanism.
{MU:4.4[4]}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-37
MT-38
Error
Code
Error Name
Occurrence Condition
Probable Cause and Remedy
[During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility]
The MZ2 is turned ON, but the SZ2 does not transition from CLOSE
to OPEN, so that a retry is performed.
12342
Retrial for detection error in home
positioning (IP shifter mechanism)
<I/O name>
MZ2: IP movement motor
SZ2: IP reading-side HP sensor
Analysis
Flow
- Check the MZ2.
- Check the SZ2.
{MU:4.4[4]}
{MU:4.6}
- Check the SND21A/SND21B board.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
{MT:3.3}
- Check the IP movement mechanism.
{MU:4.4[4]}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
[During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility]
The MZ2 is turned ON, but the SZ2 does not transition from OPEN to
CLOSE, so that a retry is performed.
12343
Retrial for moving error in home
positioning (IP shifter mechanism)
<I/O name>
MZ2: IP movement motor
SZ2: IP reading-side HP sensor
- Check the MZ2.
- Check the SZ2.
{MU:4.4[4]}
{MU:4.6}
- Check the SND21A/SND21B board.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
{MT:3.3}
- Check the IP movement mechanism.
{MU:4.4[4]}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
[During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility]
The MZ2 is turned ON, but the SZ2 does not transition from OPEN to
CLOSE, so that a retry is performed.
12344
Home positioning with HP check
(IP shifter mechanism)
<I/O name>
MZ2: IP movement motor
SZ2: IP reading-side HP sensor
- Check the MZ2.
- Check the SZ2.
{MU:4.4[4]}
{MU:4.6}
- Check the SND21A/SND21B board.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
{MT:3.3}
- Check the IP movement mechanism.
{MU:4.4[4]}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-38
MT-39
Error
Code
Error Name
Occurrence Condition
Probable Cause and Remedy
[During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility]
The MZ3 is turned ON, but the SZ7 does not transition from CLOSE
to OPEN, so that a retry is performed.
12362
Retrial for detection error in home
positioning (Bucky mechanism)
<I/O name>
MZ3: Bucky motor
SZ7: Bucky HP sensor
Analysis
Flow
- Check the MZ3.
- Check the SZ7.
{MU:4.4[4]}
{MU:4.6}
- Check the SND21A/SND21B board.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
{MT:3.4}
- Check the Bucky mechanism.
{MU:4.4[4]}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
[During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility]
The MZ3 is turned ON, but the SZ7 does not transition from OPEN to
CLOSE, so that a retry is performed.
12363
Retrial for moving error in home
positioning (Bucky mechanism)
<I/O name>
MZ3: Bucky motor
SZ7: Bucky HP sensor
- Check the MZ3.
- Check the SZ7.
{MU:4.4[4]}
{MU:4.6}
- Check the SND21A/SND21B board.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
{MT:3.4}
- Check the Bucky mechanism.
{MU:4.4[4]}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
[During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility]
The MZ3 is turned ON, but the SZ7 does not transition from CLOSE
to OPEN, so that a retry is performed.
12364
Home positioning with HP check
(Bucky mechanism)
<I/O name>
MZ3: Bucky motor
SZ7: Bucky HP sensor
- Check the MZ3.
- Check the SZ7.
{MU:4.4[4]}
{MU:4.6}
- Check the SND21A/SND21B board.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
{MT:3.4}
- Check the Bucky mechanism.
{MU:4.4[4]}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-39
MT-40
Error
Code
Error Name
Occurrence Condition
Probable Cause and Remedy
[During M-Utility]
The SOLH1 is turned ON, but the SH1 does not transition from
CLOSE to OPEN, so that a retry is performed.
12370
Warning on cover lock release in
grid change work
<I/O name>
SOLH1: Grid replacement cover lock solenoid
SH1: Grid cover lock sensor
Analysis
Flow
- Check the SOLH1.
- Check the SH1.
{MU:4.4[4]}
{MU:4.6}
- Check the SND21A/SND21B board.
{MT:3.6}
{MU:4.4 [3]}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
[During M-Utility]
The SOLH1 is turned OFF, but the SH1 does not transition from
OPEN to CLOSE, so that a retry is performed.
12371
Warning on cover lock retrial in
grid change work
<I/O name>
SOLH1: Grid replacement cover lock solenoid
SH1: Grid cover lock sensor
- Check the SOLH1.
- Check the SH1.
{MU:4.4[4]}
{MU:4.6}
- Check the SND21A/SND21B board.
{MT:3.6}
{MU:4.4 [3]}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
[During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility]
The SH1 detected the OPEN state for a period of longer than 1
second.
12372
Detection of the grid change
cover open
<I/O name>
SH1: Grid cover lock sensor
- Check the SOLH1.
- Check the SH1.
{MU:4.4[4]}
{MU:4.6}
- Check the SND21A/SND21B board.
{MT:3.6}
{MU:4.4 [3]}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
12380
Parameter format error of
mechanism control
[During M-Utility]
The format of an input parameter is improper.
(Example: "1" is inputted, instead of "1.0".)
- Check the operation procedures.
-
12381
Out of range error of mechanism
control parameters
[During M-Utility]
The input parameter value is out of range.
(Example: "3" is inputted, instead of "1" or "2".)
- Check the operation procedures.
-
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-40
MT-41
Error
Code
Error Name
Occurrence Condition
Probable Cause and Remedy
Analysis
Flow
Invalid instruction for mechanism
control (IP shifter position)
[During M-Utility]
An operating instruction is not consistent with the current IP
movement mechanism status.
(Example: An instruction for moving from the erasure position to the
exposure position is given while in the reading state.)
- Check the operation procedures.
-
12383
Invalid instruction for mechanism
control (Subscanner position)
[During M-Utility]
An operating instruction is not consistent with the current subscanning
- Check the operation procedures.
mechanism status.
(Example: An instruction for moving to the lower position is given
while in the subscanning HP state.)
-
12384
Invalid instruction for mechanism
control (others in successive
operation)
[During M-Utility]
A command cannot be accepted because of continuous operation.
12385
Out of range error of calculation
result for mechanism control
12382
- Check the operation procedures.
-
[During M-Utility]
The result of the format adjustment is out of range.
- Check the operation procedures.
-
12386
Invalid request for under
successive operation (reading)
[During M-Utility]
A command cannot be accepted because of continuous operation.
- Check the operation procedures.
-
12387
Invalid request for under
successive operation (primary
erasing)
[During M-Utility]
A command cannot be accepted because of continuous operation.
- Check the operation procedures.
-
12388
Invalid request for under sleeping
[During M-Utility]
Continuous operation cannot be accepted because of sleep mode.
- Check the operation procedures.
-
[During M-Utility]
The subscan length adjustment value could not be written into the
Compact Flash Memory.
12389
Mechanism control parameters
save error
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
{MU:4.4 [3]}
- Mount and remove the Compact Flash Card (to
check for incomplete insertion of the Card).
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{MT:5.5}
{SP:13.}
- Reinstall the RU software.
{IN:25.}
12390
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
Detection of the front cover open
[During routine processing]
The OPEN state was detected by the SH3/SH4.
<I/O name>
SH3/SH4: Exposure unit front cover laser safety interlock switch
Same as the error code 10390.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
{MT:3.5}
MT-41
MT-42
Error
Code
Error Name
12391
Mechanism control parameter
from Compact Flash memory read
error (file reading error)
[During bootup]
The mechanism control parameter could not be read from the
Compact Flash memory.
Message format error
[During bootup/routine processing]
An illegal command is received from the CL.
Message sending error
- Check the CL.
[During bootup/routine processing]
An attempt is made to transmit a message from the RU to the CL, but - Check the network (execute the PING command
an error is detected.
or the like).
-
RES message receiving time-out
[During bootup/routine processing]
RU sent a REQUEST message to CL, but it could not receive a
RESPONSE message, resulting in time-out.
- Check the CL.
-
12522
ACK receiving time-out
[During bootup/routine processing]
RU sent a message to CL, but it could not receive an ACK response,
resulting in time-out.
- Check the CL.
12523
Forbidden Response to REQ:SET
message
12510
12520
12521
Occurrence Condition
Probable Cause and Remedy
Analysis
Flow
- Reinstall the RU software.
{IN:25.}
- Replace the Compact Flash Card.
-
{MC:10.3}
- Check the CL.
- Check the network (execute the PING command
or the like).
-
- Check the network (execute the PING command
or the like).
-
[During routine processing]
The REQ:SET message is transmitted from the RU, but a response
other than OK is received from the CL.
- Check the CL.
-
12524
Forbidden Response to StartProcess message
[During routine processing]
REQ:CTL Start-Process is transmitted from the RU, but Forbidden is
received during the response from the CL.
- Check the CL.
-
12525
Forbidden Response to REQ:INQ
message
[During routine processing]
REQ:INQ is transmitted from the RU, but Forbidden is received
during the response from the CL (except the unregistered ID and
barcode errors).
- Check the CL.
-
12526
Forbidden Response to StartRead message
[During routine processing]
REQ:CTL Start-Read is transmitted from the RU, but Forbidden is
received during the response from the CL.
- Check the CL.
-
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-42
MT-43
Error
Code
Error Name
Occurrence Condition
Probable Cause and Remedy
Analysis
Flow
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
[During M-Utility]
An attempt is made to update the Config data, but the data cannot be
{MU:4.4 [3]}
updated into the Compact Flash Card.
12690
- Mount and remove the Compact Flash Card (to
check for incomplete insertion of the Card).
Configuration file updating error
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{MT:5.5}
{SP:13.}
- Reinstall the RU software.
{IN:25.}
12700
Warning on detection of erasure
lamp unlit at initialization
[During bootup]
One of the erasure lamps is blown.
- Check the erasure unit (ERS21 board).
{MU:4.4 [3]}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
12710
Periodic erasing performed
Periodic erasure at intervals of four hours is performed.
12802
Register read/write error
[During M-Utility]
An error is detected for register diagnostic of board check.
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
12803
SDRAM error
[During M-Utility]
An error is detected for SDRAM (DIMM) diagnostic of board check.
- Mount and remove the DIMM (to check for
incomplete insertion of the DIMM).
[During M-Utility]
An error is detected for Compact Flash Card diagnostic of board
check.
- Mount and remove the Compact Flash Card (to
check for incomplete insertion of the Card).
12804
Compact Flash Card read error
{MT:5.2}
-
{SP:13.}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
-
-
{MT:5.5}
- Reinstall the RU software.
{IN:25.}
12805
Compact Flash Card data error
[During M-Utility]
An error is detected for Compact Flash Card diagnostic of board
check.
- Mount and remove the Compact Flash Card (to
check for incomplete insertion of the Card).
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
{SP:13.}
{MT:5.5}
- Reinstall the RU software.
{IN:25.}
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-43
MT-44
Error
Code
12806
12810
Error Name
Interruption error
Occurrence Condition
Probable Cause and Remedy
[During M-Utility]
An error is detected for interrupt diagnostic of board check.
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
[During routine processing]
A blown out fuse or disconnection is detected.
- Check the fuses (PAT board: F5, F6)
{SP:13.}
Analysis
Flow
-
{MT:6.5}
- Replace the defective fuse.
Detection of fuse blown out or
disconnection
{MT:6.}
{MT:5.6}
{MC:11.}
- Check the board.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
12822
Register read/write error on CPS
board
[During M-Utility]
Register diagnosis in the board check on CPS21A detected an error.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
- Check the connected connectors/cables.
-
{SP:13.}
[During M-Utility]
Register diagnosis in the board check on CCD21A/D detected an
error.
12832
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
Register read/write error on CCD
board
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
- Check the SND21A/SND21B board.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
- Check the voltage of the CCD assembly.
{MT:7.}
-
- Check the boards/connected connectors/cables
among the CCD assembly, the SND21B and the
ATX board (motherboard) (signal system).
{SP:13.}
12841
Fuse trouble on SND board
[During M-Utility]
Fuse diagnosis in the board check on SND21A/SND21B detected
trouble.
- Replace the defective fuse or the board.
{MT:6.}
{MC:11.}
-
- Check each of the boards.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
12842
Register read/write error on SND
board
[During M-Utility]
Register diagnosis in the board check on SND21A/SND21B detected
an error.
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
- Check the SND21A/SND21B board.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
- Check the boards/connected connectors/cables
among the SND21A, the SND21B and the ATX
board (motherboard) (image data system).
-
{SP:13.}
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-44
MT-45
Error
Code
12847
Error Name
Solenoid trouble on SND board
Occurrence Condition
Probable Cause and Remedy
- Check the SND21A/SND21B board.
[During M-Utility]
Solenoid diagnosis in the board check on SND21A/SND21B detected
{MU:4.4 [3]}
trouble.
- Check the solenoid.
Analysis
Flow
-
{MU:4.4[4]}
12848
Pulse motor trouble on SND
board
[During M-Utility]
Pulse motor diagnosis in the board check on SND21A/SND21B
detected trouble.
- Check the SND21A/SND21B board.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
- Check the motor.
{MU:4.4[4]}
[During M-Utility]
Fuse diagnosis in the board check on PAT21A detected trouble.
- Replace the defective fuse or the board.
12851
Fuse trouble on PAT board
13032
Failed in file loading for no touch
panel correction
[During bootup]
The touch panel calibration cannot be done.
13034
UI debugging information
Unlikely error condition associated with the RU software occurs.
- Check each of the boards.
The touch panel calibration cannot be done.
- Reperform touch panel correction.
13035
Touch panel adjustment error
-
{MT:6.}
-
{MC:11.}
- Reperform touch panel correction.
- Replace the LCD panel and the LCN21A board.
-
{MC:9.14}
- Replace the LCD panel and the LCN21A board.
-
-
{MC:9.14}
[During bootup/routine processing]
An unduly low current consumption was detected by the LD’s fault
detecting current monitor circuit.
- Check the SH3/SH4/MSH1/MSH12.
{MC:4.}
- Check the LD assembly.
{MU:4.4 [1-5]}
13210
Detection of lower limit of LD
operating current
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
- Check the SND21A/SND21B board.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
{MT:4.1}
- Check the voltage of the LD assembly.
{MT:7.}
- Check the boards/connected connectors/cables
among the LD assembly, the SND21B and the
ATX board (motherboard).
{SP:13.}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-45
MT-46
Error
Code
Error Name
Occurrence Condition
Probable Cause and Remedy
[During bootup/routine processing]
An unduly high current consumption was detected by the LD’s fault
detecting current monitor circuit.
13211
Analysis
Flow
- Check the LD assembly.
{MU:4.4 [1-5]}
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
- Check the SND21A/SND21B board.
Detection of upper limit of LD
operating current
{MU:4.4 [3]}
- Check the voltage of the LD assembly.
{MT:4.1}
{MT:7.}
- Check the boards/connected connectors/cables
among the LD assembly, the SND21B and the
ATX board (motherboard).
{SP:13.}
[During bootup/routine processing]
The LD’s current consumption increased so that the resulting current
was more than 1.2 times larger than the initial current value.
13212
- Check the LD assembly.
{MU:4.4 [1-5]}
- Check the ATX board (motherboard).
- Check the SND21A/SND21B board.
Detection of increased LD
operating current
{MU:4.4 [3]}
- Check the voltage of the LD assembly.
{MT:4.1}
{MT:7.}
- Check the boards/connected connectors/cables
among the LD assembly, the SND21B and the
ATX board (motherboard).
{SP:13.}
13225
Recovered from the Scanner low
temperature error
[During bootup/routine processing]
Recovery from the scanner low temperature error (20°C or lower)
was achieved (42°C).
-
-
13226
Recovered from the Scanner high
temperature warning
[During bootup/routine processing]
Recovery from the scanner high temperature warning state (47°C or
higher) was achieved (42°C).
-
-
13227
Scanner temperature check
1 (Recovered from the high
temperature error)
[During bootup/routine processing]
Recovery from the scanner high temperature error state (48°C or
higher) was achieved (42°C).
-
-
13520
Detection of communication
abortion to CL
[During bootup/routine processing]
An aborted communication between the RU and CL is detected.
012-201-09E
- Check the CL.
- Check the communication line.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
-
MT-46
MT-47
Error
Code
13521
13530
Error Name
Occurrence Condition
Analysis
Flow
Detection of communication
failure to CL
[During bootup/routine processing]
- Check the CL.
Because the communication between the RU and CL is aborted, the
connection is interrupted, and initialization of communication between - Check the communication line.
the RU and CL is performed again.
-
CL image data receiving timeout
[During bootup/routine processing]
Because the data sent from the RU is received late, image
retransmission from the RU is performed.
-
[During bootup/routine processing]
The operation of each processing task does not quit.
19000
Probable Cause and Remedy
Software runaway detection
(monitoring software runaway)
- Check the network.
- Reboot the machine.
- Check the board.
{MU:4.4 [3]}
- Reinstall the RU software.
-
{IN:25.}
- Replace the Compact Flash Card.
{MC:10.3}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-47
MT-48
3.
3.1
Error Code Analysis Flow:
Mechanism
Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 1
Error Code
10300: Incorrect sensor data in initializing (Subscanner mechanism)
An error is detected in the sensor information for the sensors (SZ1, SZ3, and
SZ5) of the subscanning unit during bootup.
Error-Related I/O Locations
Analysis Flow
START
Check the error log in the ERROR DB.
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log?
{MT:1.3_Troubleshooting from Error Log}
N
Y
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
Q2 Check the fuse on the PAT21A board.
{MT:6.1_Checking the PAT21A Board Fuses}
Q3 Check the voltage on the PAT21A board.
{MT:7.1_Checking the Voltage on the PAT21A Board}
Q4 Check the fuse on the SND21B board.
{MT:6.3_Checking the SND21B Board Fuses}
Q5 Check the sensor (SZ1).
{MT:8.2_Checking the SZ1}
Q6 Check the sensor (SZ3).
{MT:8.4_Checking the SZ3}
Q7 Check the sensor (SZ5).
{MT:8.6_Checking the SZ5}
Q8 Error recurs after the connector and the relay connector of the following board are
reseated?
1. SND21B board
2.Connectors (K-CN3/K-CN4/H-CN2)
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
N
Y
END
Replace the following board.
1. SND21B board
{MC:4.7_SND21B Board Assembly}
{SP:06C_EXPOSURE UNIT FRAME/WIRING 3}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-48
MT-49
3.2
Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 2
Error-Related I/O Locations
Error Code
10310: Home positioning error (Subscanner mechanism)
The MZ1 is turned ON during bootup/routine processing, but the SZ1 remains
unchanged.
10317: Out of defined moving time (Subscanner unit) and retrial over
When the MZ1 was turned ON during routine processing, the SZ1 was closed.
Therefore, an attempt was made to move the SZ1 to its home position.
However, the maximum retry count was exceeded.
12317: Positioning error (Subscanner unit)
Although the MZ1 was turned ON during routine processing, the SZ1 was
closed. Therefore, the SZ1 was moved to its home position.
12318: Out of defined moving time (Subscanner unit)
During routine processing, the moving time detected in the X-ray dose
detection sequence was outside the predefined range. Therefore, the SZ1
was moved to its home position.
12319: Out of defined moving time (Subscanner unit)
Since the erasure time was outside the predefined range during routine
processing, the SZ1 was moved to its home position to retry the erasure
operation.
12320: Home positioning-in error retrial (Subscanner mechanism)
The MZ1 is turned ON during bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, but the SZ1
does not transition from OPEN to CLOSE, so that a retry is performed.
12321: Home positioning-out error retrial (Subscanner mechanism)
The MZ1 is turned ON during bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, but the SZ1
does not transition from CLOSE to OPEN, so that a retry is performed.
12322: Home positioning detection error retrial (Subscanner)
The MZ1 is turned ON during bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, but the SZ1
does not transition from CLOSE to OPEN, so that a retry is performed.
12323: Retrial for moving error in home positioning (Subscanner mechanism)
The MZ1 is turned ON during bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, but the SZ1
does not transition from OPEN to CLOSE, so that a retry is performed.
12324: Home positioning with HP check (Subscanner mechanism)
The MZ1 is turned ON during bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, but the SZ1
does not transition from OPEN to CLOSE so that a retry is performed.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-49
MT-50
Analysis Flow
START
Check the error log in the ERROR DB.
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log?
{MT:1.3_Troubleshooting from Error Log}
N
Y
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
Q2 Check the fuse on the PAT21A board.
{MT:6.1_Checking the PAT21A Board Fuses}
Q3 Check the voltage on the PAT21A board.
{MT:7.1_Checking the Voltage on the PAT21A Board}
Q4 Check the fuse on the SND21B board.
{MT:6.3_Checking the SND21B Board Fuses}
Q5 Check the sensor (SZ1).
{MT:8.2_Checking the SZ1}
Q6 Check the motor (MZ1).
{MT:9.1_Checking the MZ1}
Q7 Check the motor (MB1).
{MT:9.4_Checking the MB1}
Q8 Error recurs after the connector and the relay connector of the following board are
reseated?
1. SND21B board
2. Connectors (K-CN3/K-CN4/H-CN2)
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
N
Y
END
Replace the following board.
1. SND21B board
{MC:4.7_SND21B Board Assembly}
{SP:06C_EXPOSURE UNIT FRAME/WIRING 3}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-50
MT-51
3.3
Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 3
Error-Related I/O Locations
Error Code
10330: Home positioning error (IP Shifter mechanism)
The MZ2 is turned ON during bootup/routine processing, but the SZ2 remains
unchanged.
12337: Positioning error (IP shifter)
Although the MZ2 was turned ON during routine processing, the SZ2 was
closed. Therefore, the SZ2 was moved to its home position.
12338: Out of defined moving time (IP shifter)
Although the MZ2 was turned ON during routine processing, the moving time
was outside the predefined range. Therefore, the SZ2 was moved to its home
position.
12340: Home positioning-in error retrial (IP Shifter mechanism)
The MZ2 is turned ON during bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, but the SZ2
does not transition from OPEN to CLOSE, so that a retry is performed.
12341: Home positioning-out error retrial (IP Shifter mechanism)
The MZ2 is turned ON during bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, but the SZ2
does not transition from CLOSE to OPEN, so that a retry is performed.
12342: Retrial for detection error in home positioning (IP shifter mechanism)
The MZ2 is turned ON during bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, but the SZ2
does not transition from CLOSE to OPEN, so that a retry is performed.
12343: Retrial for moving error in home positioning (IP shifter mechanism)
The MZ2 is turned ON during bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, but the SZ2
does not transition from OPEN to CLOSE, so that a retry is performed.
12344: Home positioning with HP check (IP shifter mechanism)
The MZ2 is turned ON during bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, but the SZ2
does not transition from OPEN to CLOSE, so that a retry is performed.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-51
MT-52
Analysis Flow
START
Check the error log in the ERROR DB.
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log?
{MT:1.3_Troubleshooting from Error Log}
N
Y
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
Q2 Check the fuse on the PAT21A board.
{MT:6.1_Checking the PAT21A Board Fuses}
Q3 Check the voltage on the PAT21A board.
{MT:7.1_Checking the Voltage on the PAT21A Board}
Q4 Check the fuse on the SND21B board.
{MT:6.3_Checking the SND21B Board Fuses}
Q5 Check the sensor (SZ2).
{MT:8.3_Checking the SZ2}
Q6 Check the motor (MZ2).
{MT:9.2_Checking the MZ2}
Q7 Check the electromagnetic brake (MB2).
{MT:9.5_Checking the MB2}
Q8 Error recurs after the connector and the relay connector of the following board are
reseated?
1. SND21B board
2. Connectors (K-CN3/K-CN4/H-CN2)
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
N
Y
END
Replace the following board.
1. SND21B board
{MC:4.7_SND21B Board Assembly}
{SP:06C_EXPOSURE UNIT FRAME/WIRING 3}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-52
MT-53
3.4
Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 4
Error Code
Analysis Flow
START
10350: Home positioning error (Bucky mechanism)
The MZ3 is turned ON during bootup/routine processing, but the SZ7 remains
unchanged.
Check the error log in the ERROR DB.
12362: Retrial for detection error in home positioning (Bucky mechanism)
The MZ3 is turned ON during bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, but the SZ7
does not transition from CLOSE to OPEN, so that a retry is performed.
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log?
12363: Retrial for moving error in home positioning (Bucky mechanism)
The MZ3 is turned ON during bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, but the SZ7
does not transition from OPEN to CLOSE, so that a retry is performed.
12364: Home positioning with HP check (Bucky mechanism)
The MZ3 is turned ON during bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, but the SZ7
does not transition from CLOSE to OPEN, so that a retry is performed.
Error-Related I/O Locations
{MT:1.3_Troubleshooting from Error Log}
N
Y
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
Q2 Check the fuse on the PAT21A board.
{MT:6.1_Checking the PAT21A Board Fuses}
Q3 Check the voltage on the PAT21A board.
{MT:7.1_Checking the Voltage on the PAT21A Board}
Q4 Check the fuse on the SND21B board.
{MT:6.3_Checking the SND21B Board Fuses}
Q5 Check the sensor (SZ7).
{MT:8.8_Checking the SZ7}
Q6 Check the motor (MZ3).
{MT:9.3_Checking the MZ3}
Q7 Error recurs after the connector and the relay connector of the following board are
reseated?
1. SND21B board
2. Connectors (K-CN3/K-CN4/H-CN2/H-CN21/H-CN22)
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
N
Y
END
Replace the following board.
1. SND21B board
{MC:4.7_SND21B Board Assembly}
{SP:06C_EXPOSURE UNIT FRAME/WIRING 3}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-53
MT-54
3.5
Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 5
Error Code
Analysis Flow
START
10390: Detection of the front cover open
During bootup/routine processing, the OPEN state was detected by the SH3/
SH4.
Check the error log in the ERROR DB.
12390: Detection of the front cover open
During routine processing, the OPEN state was detected by the SH3/SH4.
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log?
Error-Related I/O Locations
{MT:1.3_Troubleshooting from Error Log}
N
Y
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
Q2 Check the fuse on the PAT21A board.
{MT:6.1_Checking the PAT21A Board Fuses}
Q3 Check the voltage on the PAT21A board.
{MT:7.1_Checking the Voltage on the PAT21A Board}
Q4 Check the fuse on the SND21B board.
{MT:6.3_Checking the SND21B Board Fuses}
Q5 Is the exposure unit front cover correctly installed?
{MC:3.1_Exposure Unit Covers}
N
Y
Reinstall the exposure unit front cover.
Q6 Check the switches (SH3/SH4).
{MT:8.11_Checking the SH3/SH4}
Q7 Error recurs after the connector and the relay connector of the following board are
reseated?
1. SND21B board
2. Connectors (K-CN3/K-CN4/H-CN2)
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
N
Y
END
Replace the following board.
1. SND21B board
{MC:4.7_SND21B Board Assembly}
{SP:06C_EXPOSURE UNIT FRAME/WIRING 3}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-54
MT-55
3.6
Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 6
Error-Related I/O Locations
Error Code
11370: Cover lock release error in grid change work
The SOLH1 is turned ON during M-Utility, but the SH1 does not transition
from CLOSE to OPEN.
11371: Cover lock error in grid change work
The SOLH1 is turned OFF during M-Utility, but the SH1 does not transition
from OPEN to CLOSE.
11372: Detection of the grid change cover open
During bootup/routine processing, the SH1 detected the OPEN state for a
period of longer than 1 second.
12370: Warning on cover lock release in grid change work
The SOLH1 is turned ON during M-Utility, but the SH1 does not transition
from CLOSE to OPEN, so that a retry is performed.
12371: Warning on cover lock retrial in grid change work
The SOLH1 is turned OFF during M-Utility, but the SH1 does not transition
from OPEN to CLOSE, so that a retry is performed.
12372: Detection of the grid change cover open
During bootup/routine processing, the SH1 detected the OPEN state for a
period of longer than 1 second.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-55
MT-56
Analysis Flow
Q7 Check the solenoid (SOLH1).
{MT:9.6_Checking the SOLH1}
START
Q8 Error recurs after the connector and the relay connector of the following board are
reseated?
Check the error log in the ERROR DB.
1. SND21B board
2. Connectors (K-CN3/K-CN4/H-CN2)
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log?
N
{MT:1.3_Troubleshooting from Error Log}
N
Y
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
Q2 Check the fuse on the PAT21A board.
{MT:6.1_Checking the PAT21A Board Fuses}
Y
END
Replace the following board.
1. SND21B board
{MC:4.7_SND21B Board Assembly}
{SP:06C_EXPOSURE UNIT FRAME/WIRING 3}
Q3 Check the voltage on the PAT21A board.
{MT:7.1_Checking the Voltage on the PAT21A Board}
Q4 Check the fuse on the SND21B board.
{MT:6.3_Checking the SND21B Board Fuses}
Q5 Is the exposure unit front cover correctly installed?
{MC:3.1_Exposure Unit Covers}
N
Y
Reinstall the exposure unit front cover.
Q6 Check the sensor (SH1).
{MT:8.10_Checking the SH1}
Q7
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-56
MT-57
3.7
Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 7
Error Code
12311: Overrun in reading (Subscanner mechanism)
The MZ1 is turned ON during routine processing, but the SZ3 transitions from
OPEN to CLOSE.
12314: Subscanner motor overrun (In go-down erasing)
The MZ1 is turned ON during routine processing, but the SZ3 transitions from
OPEN to CLOSE.
Error-Related I/O Locations
Analysis Flow
START
Check the error log in the ERROR DB.
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log?
{MT:1.3_Troubleshooting from Error Log}
N
Y
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
Q2 Check the fuse on the PAT21A board.
{MT:6.1_Checking the PAT21A Board Fuses}
Q3 Check the voltage on the PAT21A board.
{MT:7.1_Checking the Voltage on the PAT21A Board}
Q4 Check the fuse on the SND21B board.
{MT:6.3_Checking the SND21B Board Fuses}
Q5 Check the sensor (SZ3).
{MT:8.4_Checking the SZ3}
Q6 Check the motor (MZ1).
{MT:9.1_Checking the MZ1}
Q7 Check the electromagnetic brake (MB1).
{MT:9.4_Checking the MB1}
Q8 Error recurs after the connector and the relay connector of the following board are
reseated?
1. SND21B board
2. Connectors (K-CN3/K-CN4/H-CN2)
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
N
Y
END
Replace the following board.
1. SND21B board
{MC:4.7_SND21B Board Assembly}
{SP:06C_EXPOSURE UNIT FRAME/WIRING 3}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-57
MT-58
3.8
Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 8
Error Code
12312: Reading speed error (Subscanner mechanism)
The MZ1 is turned ON during routine processing, but an error is detected
during SZ5 operation measurement time.
Error-Related I/O Locations
Analysis Flow
START
Check the error log in the ERROR DB.
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log?
{MT:1.3_Troubleshooting from Error Log}
N
Y
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
Q2 Check the fuse on the PAT21A board.
{MT:6.1_Checking the PAT21A Board Fuses}
Q3 Check the voltage on the PAT21A board.
{MT:7.1_Checking the Voltage on the PAT21A Board}
Q4 Check the fuse on the SND21B board.
{MT:6.3_Checking the SND21B Board Fuses}
Q5 Check the sensor (SZ5).
{MT:8.6_Checking the SZ5}
Q6 Check the motor (MZ1).
{MT:9.1_Checking the MZ1}
Q7 Check the electromagnetic brake (MB1).
{MT:9.4_Checking the MB1}
Q8 Error recurs after the connector and the relay connector of the following board are
reseated?
1. SND21B board
2. Connectors (K-CN3/K-CN4/H-CN2)
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
N
Y
END
Replace the following board.
1. SND21B board
{MC:4.7_SND21B Board Assembly}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-58
MT-58.1
3.9
Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 9
Error Code
10375: Cover lock error in bootup
The MSH1/MSH2 is closed, but the OPEN state is detected by the SH1 during
bootup.
Error-Related I/O Locations
Analysis Flow
START
Check the error log in the ERROR DB.
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log?
{MT:1.3_Troubleshooting from Error Log}
N
Y
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
Q2 Check the fuse on the PAT21A board.
{MT:6.1_Checking the PAT21A Board Fuses}
Q3 Check the voltage on the PAT21A board.
{MT:7.1_Checking the Voltage on the PAT21A Board}
Q4 Check the fuse on the SND21B board.
{MT:6.3_Checking the SND21B Board Fuses}
Q5 Check the grid cover lock sensor (SH1).
{MT:8.10_Checking the SH1}
Q6 Check the grid replacement cover interlock switch (MSH1/MSH2).
{MT:8.12_Checking the MSH1/MSH12}
Q7 Error recurs after the connector and the relay connector of the following board are
reseated?
1. SND21B board
2. Connectors (B-CN102/H-CN2)
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
N
Y
END
Replace the following board.
1. SND21B board
{MC:4.7_SND21B Board Assembly}
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-58.1
MT-58.2
BLANK PAGE
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-58.2
MT-59
4.
Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner
Analysis Flow
START
4.1
Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 1
Error Code
10210: Whole LDs lower limit current error
During bootup/routine processing, the fault detecting current monitor circuit for
each LD detects current underconsumption for all the LDs.
10211: Whole LDs upper limit current error
During bootup/routine processing, the fault detecting current monitor circuit for
each LD detects current overconsumption for all the LDs.
11210: Warning of lower LD operating current
During bootup/routine processing, the fault detecting current monitor circuit for
each LD detects current underconsumption for one or more LDs.
11211: Warning of upper LD operating current
During bootup/routine processing, the fault detecting current monitor circuit for
each LD detects current overconsumption for one or more LDs.
11212: Warning of increased LD operating current
During bootup/routine processing, the current consumption of at least one LD
increased so that the resulting current was more than 1.2 times larger than
the initial current value.
13210: Detection of lower limit of LD operating current
During bootup/routine processing, an unduly low current consumption was
detected by the LD’s fault detecting current monitor circuit.
13211: Detection of upper limit of LD operating current
During bootup/routine processing, an unduly high current consumption was
detected by the LD’s fault detecting current monitor circuit.
13212: Detection of increased LD operating current
During bootup/routine processing, the LD’s current consumption increased
so that the resulting current was more than 1.2 times larger than the initial
current value.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
Check the error log in the ERROR DB.
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log?
{MT:1.3_Troubleshooting from Error Log}
N
Y
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
Q2 Check the fuse on the PAT21A board.
{MT:6.1_Checking the PAT21A Board Fuses}
Q3 Check the voltage on the PAT21A board.
{MT:7.1_Checking the Voltage on the PAT21A Board}
Q4 Check the fuse on the SND21B board.
{MT:6.3_Checking the SND21B Board Fuses}
Q5 Check the voltage on the JCT21B board.
{MT:7.2_Checking the Voltage on the JCT21B Board}
Q6 Result of LD performance check normal?
{MU:4.4 [5-1-1]_LD Performance Check}
N
Y
Q8
Q7
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-59
MT-60
Q7 Error recurs after the connector and the relay connector of the following board are
reseated?
1. LDD21A board connectors (CN1/CN2/CN9)
2. JCT21A board connector (CN6)
3. JCT21B board connectors (CN21/CN22)
4. Connectors (H-CN1/K-CN2)
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
N
Y
END
Replace the scanner unit.
{MC:7.1_Scanner Unit}
{SP:03_SCANNER UNIT/ERASURE UNIT}
Q8 Error recurs after the connector of the following board is reseated?
1. LDD21A board connectors (CN1/CN2/CN9)
2. JCT21A board connector (CN6)
3. JCT21B board connectors (CN21/CN22)
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
N
Y
END
Replace the scanner unit.
{MC:7.1_Scanner Unit}
{SP:03_SCANNER UNIT/ERASURE UNIT}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-60
MT-61
4.2
Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 2
Error Code
Analysis Flow
START
10261: AD Gain setting error
Although an AD gain was set for the CCD during bootup/M-Utility, an error
was detected by a comparison check.
Check the error log in the ERROR DB.
10262: CCD timing setting error
Although a timing value was set for the CCD during bootup/M-Utility, an error
was detected by a comparison check.
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log?
10263: AD offset setting error
Although an AD offset was set for the CCD during bootup/M-Utility, an error
was detected by a comparison check.
10264: AD MUX-CONFIG setting error
Although the MUX-CONFIG comparison check and setup adjustment
procedures are performed for the CCD during bootup, the maximum retry
count was exceeded.
{MT:1.3_Troubleshooting from Error Log}
N
Y
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
Q2 Check the fuse on the PAT21A board.
{MT:6.1_Checking the PAT21A Board Fuses}
Q3 Check the voltage on the PAT21A board.
{MT:7.1_Checking the Voltage on the PAT21A Board}
10266: AD Converter error
The AD9826 error is detected during bootup.
12261: AD Gain setting comparison check error
Although an AD gain was set for the CCD during bootup/M-Utility, an error
was detected by a comparison check.
Q4 Check the fuse on the SND21B board.
12262: CCD timing setting comparison check error
Although a timing value was set for the CCD during bootup/M-Utility, an error
was detected by a comparison check.
Q5 Check the voltage on the JCT21B board.
12263: AD offset timing setting comparison check error
Although an AD offset was set for the CCD during bootup/M-Utility, an error
was detected by a comparison check.
Q6 Result of ATX board (motherboard) check normal?
12264: AD MUX-CONFIG comparison check error
After the MUX-CONFIG setup procedure was performed for the CCD during
bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, an error was detected by a comparison
check.
12265: CCD binning count/line count/storage time comparison check error
After the binning count/line count/storage time setup procedure was
performed for the CCD during bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, an error
was detected by a comparison check.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
{MT:6.3_Checking the SND21B Board Fuses}
{MT:7.2_Checking the Voltage on the JCT21B Board}
{MU:4.4 [3-1]_Mother Board}
N
Y
Q10
Q7 Result of CPS21A board check normal?
{MU:4.4 [3-5]_CPS21A Board}
N
Y
Q11
Q8
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-61
MT-62
Q8 Result of CCD21A board check normal?
{MU:4.4 [3-6]_CCD Board}
N
Y
Y
1. CCD21A board connectors (CN1/CN2/CN3)
2. LDD21A board connectors (CN1/CN2/CN9)
3. JCT21A board connectors (CN1/CN2/CN3/CN4/CN6)
4. JCT21B board connectors (CN3/CN4/CN21/CN22)
5. LDS21A/B board connectors (CN3/CN4)
6. RLY21A/B board connectors (CN3/CN4)
7. CPS21A board connectors (CN1-1/CN1-2) (PCI slot 4)
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
Y
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
N
Q12
Q9 Error recurs after the connector of the following board is reseated?
N
Q11 Error recurs after the CPS21A board connectors (CN1-1/CN1-2) (PCI slot 4) are reseated?
END
END
Replace the CPS21A board.
{MC:10.5_CPS21A Board}
{SP:08_CONTROLLER UNIT}
Q12 Error recurs after scanner correction is executed?
{MC:14_Scanner Correction}
N
Y
END
Q13 Error recurs after the connector of the following board is reseated?
1. CCD21A board connectors (CN1/CN2/CN3)
2. LDD21A board connectors (CN1/CN2/CN9)
3. JCT21A board connectors (CN1/CN2/CN3/CN4/CN6)
4. JCT21B board connectors (CN3/CN4/CN21/CN22)
5. LDS21A/B board connectors (CN3/CN4)
6. RLY21A/B board connectors (CN3/CN4)
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
Replace the boards in the order named.
1. LDS21A/B board, RLY21A/B board
{MC:8.16_LDS21A/B Board and RLY21A/B Board}
{SP:06C_EXPOSURE UNIT FRAME/WIRING 3}
2. CPS21A board
{MC:10.5_CPS21A Board}
{SP:08_CONTROLLER UNIT}
3. Scanner unit
{MC:7.1_Scanner Unit}
{SP:03_SCANNER UNIT/ERASURE UNIT}
N
Y
END
Replace the scanner unit.
Q10 Error recurs after the ATX board (motherboard) connector is reseated?
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
N
Y
{MC:7.1_Scanner Unit}
{SP:03_SCANNER UNIT/ERASURE UNIT}
END
Replace the ATX board (motherboard).
{MC:10.8_ATX Board (Motherboard)}
{SP:08_CONTROLLER UNIT}
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-62
MT-63
4.3
Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 3
Error Code
Q6 Temperatures of thermistors (TSWZ1/TSWZ2/TSWZ3) of the scanner unit normal?
{MU:4.4 [5-6]_Display Scanner Temperature}
N
11221: Thermistor circuit failure in Scanner
A circuit error of the temperature monitoring thermistor of the scanner unit is
detected during bootup/routine processing.
Y
Q7 Error recurs after the connector of the following board is reseated?
1. LDD21A board connectors (CN2/CN9)
2. JCT21B board connectors (CN21/CN22)
3. PWC21A board
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
11222: Low temperature error in Scanner
During bootup/routine processing, the temperature monitoring thermistor of
the scanner unit detects a temperature of 0°C or lower.
N
Analysis Flow
Y
START
1. PWC21A board
{MC:8.15_PWC21A Board}
{SP:06A_EXPOSURE UNIT FRAME/WIRING 1}
2. Scanner unit
{MC:7.1_Scanner Unit}
{SP:03_SCANNER UNIT/ERASURE UNIT}
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log?
{MT:1.3_Troubleshooting from Error Log}
Y
END
Replace the boards in the order named.
Check the error log in the ERROR DB.
N
Q8
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
Q8 Error recurs after the connector of the following board is reseated?
1. LDD21A board connectors (CN2/CN9)
2. JCT21B board connectors (CN21/CN22)
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
Q2 Check the fuse on the PAT21A board.
{MT:6.1_Checking the PAT21A Board Fuses}
Q3 Check the voltage on the PAT21A board.
{MT:7.1_Checking the Voltage on the PAT21A Board}
Q4 Check the fuse on the SND21B board.
N
Y
END
Replace the scanner unit.
{MC:7.1_Scanner Unit}
{SP:03_SCANNER UNIT/ERASURE UNIT}
{MT:6.3_Checking the SND21B Board Fuses}
Q5 Check the voltage on the JCT21B board.
{MT:7.2_Checking the Voltage on the JCT21B Board}
Q6
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-63
MT-64
4.4
Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 4
Error Code
Q7 Temperatures of thermistors (TSWZ1/TSWZ2/TSWZ3) of the scanner unit normal?
{MU:4.4 [5-6]_Display Scanner Temperature}
N
11223: Warning of high temperature in Scanner
During routine processing, the temperature monitoring thermistor of the
scanner unit detects a temperature of 47°C or higher.
Y
Q8 Error recurs after the connector of the following board is reseated?
1. LDD21A board connectors (CN2/CN9)
2. JCT21B board connectors (CN21/CN22)
3. PWC21A board
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
11224: High temperature error in Scanner
During routine processing, the temperature monitoring thermistor of the
scanner unit detects a temperature of 48°C or higher.
N
Analysis Flow
Y
START
1. Scanner unit
{MC:7.1_Scanner Unit}
{SP:03_SCANNER UNIT/ERASURE UNIT}
2. PWC21A board
{MC:8.15_PWC21A Board}
{SP:06A_EXPOSURE UNIT FRAME/WIRING 1}
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log?
{MT:1.3_Troubleshooting from Error Log}
Y
END
Replace the boards in the order named.
Check the error log in the ERROR DB.
N
Q10
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
Q9 Error recurs after the connectors of the fan that fails are reseated?
1. FAN1/FAN2/FAN3/FAN4/FAN5
2. Connector (H-CN31)
3. SND21B board connector (CN7)
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
Q2 Check the fuse on the PAT21A board.
{MT:6.1_Checking the PAT21A Board Fuses}
N
Q3 Check the voltage on the PAT21A board.
{MT:7.1_Checking the Voltage on the PAT21A Board}
Q4 Check the fuse on the SND21B board.
{MT:6.3_Checking the SND21B Board Fuses}
Q5 Check the voltage on the JCT21B board.
{MT:7.2_Checking the Voltage on the JCT21B Board}
Y
END
Replace the fans.
1. FANH1-5
{MC:8.14.1_Internal Cooling Fan (FANH1)}
{MC:8.14.2_Internal Cooling Fan (FANH2)}
{MC:8.14.3_Internal Cooling Fan (FANH3)}
{MC:8.14.4_Internal Cooling Fans (FANH4 and FANH5)}
{SP:06B_EXPOSURE UNIT FRAME/WIRING 2}
Q6 Operation of the internal cooling fans (FAN1-5) normal?
{MU:4.4 [4-8]_FAN}
N
Y
Q9
Q7
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-64
MT-65
Q10 Error recurs after the connector of the following board is reseated?
1. LDD21A board connectors (CN2/CN9)
2. JCT21B board connectors (CN21/CN22)
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
N
Y
END
Replace the scanner unit.
{MC:7.1_Scanner Unit}
{SP:03_SCANNER UNIT/ERASURE UNIT}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-65
MT-66
5.
Error Code Analysis Flow:
Electrical
12115: Correction data to CPS21A board load error (Transfer error)
During routine processing/M-Utility, an attempt is made to load the correction
data onto the memory located on the CPS21A board, but an error is detected.
Thus the loading was retried.
5.1
Error Code Analysis Flow: Electrical 1
12116: Correction data from CPS21A board read error (Transfer error)
During routine processing/M-Utility, an attempt is made to read newly created
correction data from the memory located on the CPS21A board, but an error
is detected.
Error Code
10110: DSP micro program loading error
During bootup, an attempt is made to load the microprogram residing in the
DIMM on the ATX board (motherboard) to the DSP located on the CPS21A
board, but an error is detected.
10111: DSP idling start up error
After the microprogram residing in the DIMM on the ATX board (motherboard)
is loaded to the DSP located on the CPS21A board during bootup, the
machine cannot be booted, resulting in failure to return to the DSP idle state.
10112: DSP processing time-out error
The DSP located on the CPS21A board is activated during bootup/routine
processing, but the operation of the DSP does not end normally within the
specified period of time, thus resulting in a time-out.
10113: DSP input/output data error
During routine processing, the DSP detected an error in the input/output data.
10114: Correction data from Compact Flash Card read error (File reading error)
During bootup/routine processing, an attempt is made to load the correction
data to the memory located on the CPS21A board, but an error is detected.
10120: Internal CCD data transmission unmatched error
During bootup, the test data from the CPS21A board is transferred to the
DIMM on the ATX board (motherboard), but inconsistency of the test data is
detected.
10260: CPS21A initial diagnosis error
During bootup, the DSP detects an error during self-diagnostics of the
CPS21A board.
10820:CPS21A board undetected
During bootup, the CPU within the ATX board (motherboard) makes an
attempt to read/write the register in the CPS21A board, but an error is
detected.
12112: DSP processing time-out error
The DSP located on the CPS21A board is activatedsuring routine processing,
but the operation of the DSP does not end normally within the specified period
of time, thus resulting in a time-out.
12113: DSP input/output data error
During routine processing, the DSP detects a warning level error in the input
data.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
12118: DSP input/output data error
The DSP detected an error in input.output data during routine processing.
12121: Defect pixel correction data file save error
During routine processing/M-Utility, error code No.12116 and 12117 occurred
three times after calculating the defect pixel correction data, a retrial count is
over.
12248: Correction data loading error
During M-Utility, error code No.12115 occurred three times when loading the
correction data on the CPS21A board, a retrial count is over.
12251: Self-diagnostic DPRAM test error
During M-Utility, an error is detected for the DPRAM of the CPS21A board.
12252: Self-diagnostic communication test error between DSPs
During M-Utility, an error is detected for the communication test on the control
data exchanged with the DSP of the CPS21A board.
12253: Self-diagnostic communication test error between DSPs
During M-Utility, an error is detected for the communication test on the image
data transferred with the DSP of the CPS21A board.
12254: Self-diagnostic FIFO input test error
During M-Utility, an error is detected for the memory of the CPS21A board.
12255: Self-diagnostic PCI interruption test error
During M-Utility, an error is detected for the interrupt between the CPS21A
board and ATX board (motherboard).
12256: Self-diagnostic RAM marching test error
During M-Utility, an error is detected in the DSP on the CPS21A board.
12257: Self-diagnostic LVC loop back test error
During M-Utility, a communication error between the CPS21A board and
LVC21A board is detected.
12258: Self-diagnostic LVC FPGA Read/Write test error
During M-Utility, an attempt is made to read/write from the CPS21A board to
the LVC21A board, but an error is detected.
12259: Self-diagnostic SDRAM marching test error
During M-Utility, an error is detected in the DSP on the CPS21A board.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-66
MT-67
Analysis Flow
Q7 Error recurs after the ATX board (motherboard) connector is reseated?
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
N
START
Y
Check the error log in the ERROR DB.
END
Q8 Error recurs after the RU software is re-installed?
{IN:25._Installing the RU Software}
N
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log?
{MT:1.3_Troubleshooting from Error Log}
N
Y
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
Y
END
Replace the ATX board (motherboard).
{MC:10.8_ATX Board (Motherboard)}
{SP:08_CONTROLLER UNIT}
Q2 Check the fuse on the PAT21A board.
{MT:6.1_Checking the PAT21A Board Fuses}
Q3 Check the voltage on the PAT21A board.
Q9 Error recurs after the CPS21A board connectors (CN1-1/CN1-2) (PCI slot 4) are reseated?
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
{MT:7.1_Checking the Voltage on the PAT21A Board}
N
Q4 Result of ATX board (motherboard) check normal?
{MU:4.4 [3-1]_Mother Board}
N
Y
Q7
Y
END
Replace the CPS21A board.
{MC:10.5_CPS21A Board}
{SP:08_CONTROLLER UNIT}
Q5 Result of CPS21A board check normal?
{MU:4.4 [3-5]_CPS21A Board}
N
Y
Q9
Q6 Error recurs after the connector of the following board is reseated?
1. CPS21A board connectors (CN1-1/CN1-2) (PCI slot 4)
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
N
Y
END
Replace the boards in the order named.
1. CPS21A board
{MC:10.5_CPS21A Board}
{SP:08_CONTROLLER UNIT}
2. ATX Board (Motherboard)
{MC:10.8_ATX Board (Motherboard)}
{SP:08_CONTROLLER UNIT}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-67
MT-68
5.2
Error Code Analysis Flow: Electrical 2
Q5 Check the voltage on the JCT21B board.
{MT:7.2_Checking the Voltage on the JCT21B Board}
Error Code
10700: Erasure lamp unlit detection error
During bootup/routine processing, unlit conditions of a plurality of erasure
lamps are detected.
11700: Warning of Erasure lamp unlit
During bootup/routine processing, one or more erasure lamps are blown.
11701: Thermistor failure error (Erasure lamp)
During bootup/routine processing, an error is detected on the TSWA1 of the
erasure unit.
Q6 Result of ERS21 board check normal?
{MU:4.4 [3-4]_ERS Board}
N
Q7 Error recurs after the connector and the relay connector of the following board are
reseated?
1. JCT21A board connectors (CN1/CN2/CN5)
2. JCT21B board connectors (CN1/CN4)
3. ERS21 board connectors (CN1/CN2)
4. PWC21A board connectors (CN21/CN22/CN31)
5. LDS21A/B board connectors (CN2/CN3/CN4)
6. RLY21A/B board connector (CN2)
7. SND21B-S board connector (CN9)
8. Connectors (H-CN2/K-CN3/K-CN4)
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
11702: Heater failure (Erasure lamp)
During bootup/routine processing, the TSWA1 of the erasure unit does not
detect a change in temperature.
12700: Warning on detection of erasure lamp unlit at initialization
During bootup, one of the erasure lamps is blown.
Analysis Flow
N
Y
START
Q8
Y
END
Replace the boards in the order named.
1. Erasure unit
Check the error log in the ERROR DB.
{MC:6.1_Erasure Unit}
{SP:03_SCANNER UNIT/ERASURE UNIT}
2. SND21B board
{MC:4.7_SND21B Board Assembly}
{SP:06C_EXPOSURE UNIT FRAME/WIRING 3}
3. PWC21A board
{MC:8.15_PWC21A board}
{SP:06A_EXPOSURE UNIT FRAME/WIRING 1}
4. LDS21A/B board, RLY21A/B board
{MC:8.16_LDS21A/B Board and RLY21A/B Board}
{SP:06C_EXPOSURE UNIT FRAME/WIRING 3}
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log?
{MT:1.3_Troubleshooting from Error Log}
N
Y
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
Q2 Check the fuse on the PAT21A board.
{MT:6.1_Checking the PAT21A Board Fuses}
Q3 Check the voltage on the PAT21A board.
Q8 Error recurs after the erasure unit connectors are reseated?
1. JCT21A board connectors (CN1/CN2/CN5)
2. JCT21B board connectors (CN1/CN4)
3. ERS21 board connectors (CN1/CN2)
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
{MT:7.1_Checking the Voltage on the PAT21A Board}
Q4 Check the fuse on the SND21B board.
N
{MT:6.3_Checking the SND21B Board Fuses}
Y
Q5
END
Replace the erasure unit.
{MC:6.1_Erasure Unit}
{SP:03_SCANNER UNIT/ERASURE UNIT}
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-68
MT-69
5.3
Error Code Analysis Flow: Electrical 3
Q7 Error recurs after the connector of the following board is reseated?
1. SND21A board connectors (CN1-1/CN1-2) (PCI slot 2)
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
Error Code
10811: SND21A board undetected
During bootup, the CPU within the ATX board (motherboard) makes an
attempt to read/write the register in the SND21A board, but an error is
detected.
N
Y
END
Replace the boards in the order named.
1. SND21A board
{MC:10.6_SND21A Board}
{SP:08_CONTROLLER UNIT}
2. ATX board (motherboard)
{MC:10.8_ATX Board (Motherboard)}
{SP:08_CONTROLLER UNIT}
Analysis Flow
START
Check the error log in the ERROR DB.
Q8 Error recurs after the ATX board (motherboard) connector is reseated?
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log?
{MT:1.3_Troubleshooting from Error Log}
N
Y
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
N
Y
END
Replace the ATX board (motherboard).
{MC:10.8_ATX Board (Motherboard)}
{SP:08_CONTROLLER UNIT}
Q2 Check the fuse on the PAT21A board.
{MT:6.1_Checking the PAT21A Board Fuses}
Q3 Check the voltage on the PAT21A board.
Q9 Error recurs after the SND21A board connectors (CN1-1/CN1-2) (PCI slot 2) are reseated?
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
{MT:7.1_Checking the Voltage on the PAT21A Board}
Q4 Check the fuse on the SND21A board.
{MT:6.2_Checking the SND21A Board Fuses}
Q5 Result of ATX board (motherboard) check normal?
N
Y
END
Replace the SND21A board.
{MC:10.6_SND21A Board}
{SP:08_CONTROLLER UNIT}
{MU:4.4 [3-1]_Mother Board}
N
Y
Q8
Q6 Result of SND board check normal?
{MU:4.4 [3-3]_SND Board}
N
Y
Q9
Q7
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-69
MT-70
5.4
Error Code Analysis Flow: Electrical 4
Error Code
Q6 Result of SND board check normal?
{MU:4.4 [3-3]_SND Board}
N
10812: SND21B board undetected
During bootup, the CPU within the ATX board (motherboard) makes an
attempt to read/write the register in the SND21B board, but an error is
detected.
Q7 Error recurs after the connector and the relay connector of the following board are
reseated?
1. SND21B board connectors (CN1/CN11/CN12)
2. SND21A board connector (CN2)
3. RLY21A/B board connectors (CN2/CN4)
4. Connectors (H-CN2/K-CN3/K-CN4)
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
10813: SND21B-S board undetected
During bootup, the CPU within the ATX board (motherboard) makes an
attempt to read/write the register in the SND21B-S board, but an error is
detected.
N
Analysis Flow
Y
START
1. SND21B board
{MC:4.7_SND21B Board Assembly}
{SP:06C_EXPOSURE UNIT FRAME/WIRING 3}
2. SND21A board
{MC:10.6_SND21A board}
{SP:08_CONTROLLER UNIT}
3. ATX board (motherboard)
{MC:10.8_ATX Board (Motherboard)}
{SP:08_CONTROLLER UNIT}
4. RLY21A/B board
{MC:8.16_LDS21A/B Board and RLY21A/B Board}
{SP:06C_EXPOSURE UNIT FRAME/WIRING 3}
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log?
{MT:1.3_Troubleshooting from Error Log}
Y
END
Replace the boards in the order named.
Check the error log in the ERROR DB.
N
Q9
Y
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
Q2 Check the fuse on the PAT21A board.
{MT:6.1_Checking the PAT21A Board Fuses}
Q3 Check the voltage on the PAT21A board.
Q8 Error recurs after the ATX board (motherboard) connector is reseated?
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
{MT:7.1_Checking the Voltage on the PAT21A Board}
Q4 Check the fuse on the SND21B board.
{MT:6.3_Checking the SND21B Board Fuses}
Q5 Result of ATX board (motherboard) check normal?
N
Y
END
Replace the ATX board (motherboard).
{MC:10.8_ATX Board (Motherboard)}
{SP:08_CONTROLLER UNIT}
{MU:4.4 [3-1]_Mother Board}
N
Y
Q8
Q6
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-70
MT-71
Q9 Error recurs after the connector and the relay connector of the following board are
reseated?
1. SND21B board connectors (CN1/CN11/CN12)
2. SND21A board connector (CN2)
3. RLY21A/B board connectors (CN2/CN4)
4. Connectors (H-CN2/K-CN3/K-CN4)
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
N
Y
END
Replace the boards in the order named.
1. SND21B board
{MC:4.7_SND21B Board Assembly}
{SP:06C_EXPOSURE UNIT FRAME/WIRING 3}
2. SND21A board
{MC:10.6_SND21A Board}
{SP:08_CONTROLLER UNIT}
3. RLY21A/B board
{MC:8.16_LDS21A/B Board and RLY21A/B Board}
{SP:06C_EXPOSURE UNIT FRAME/WIRING 3}
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-71
MT-72
5.5
Error Code Analysis Flow: Electrical 5
Error Code
12030: Bit map file loading error
An attempt is made to load the bitmap file (LCD panel display screen data)
from the Compact Flash Card to the SDRAM (DIMM) during bootup, an error
is detected.
12032: Touch panel adjustment file loading error
An attempt is made to load touch panel adjustment file from the Compact
Flash Card to the SDRAM (DIMM) during bootup, an error is detected.
Analysis Flow
START
Check the error log in the ERROR DB.
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log?
{MT:1.3_Troubleshooting from Error Log}
N
Y
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
12114: Correction data from Compact Flash Card read error (File reading error)
The correction data file could not be read from the Compact Flash Card
during routine processing/M-Utility, the reading was retried.
Q2 Check the fuse on the PAT21A board.
12117: Correction data to Compact Flash Card load error (File save error)
An attempt is made to write newly created correction data on the Compact
Flash Card during routine processing/M-Utility, but an error is detected.
Q3 Check the voltage on the PAT21A board.
12249: Correction data read error
During M-Utility, error code No.12117 occurred three times when reading the
correction data from the Compact Flash Card, a retrial count is over.
Q4 Result of ATX board (motherboard) check normal?
12389: Mechanism control parameters save error
During M-Utility, the subscan length adjustment value could not be written into
the Compact Flash Memory.
12690: Configuration file updating error
An attempt is made to update the Config data during M-Utility, but the data
cannot be updated into the Compact Flash Card.
12804: Compact Flash Card read error
During M-Utility, an error is detected for Compact Flash Card diagnostic of
board check.
12805: Compact Flash Card data error
During M-Utility, an error is detected for Compact Flash Card diagnostic of
board check.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
{MT:6.1_Checking the PAT21A Board Fuses}
{MT:7.1_Checking the Voltage on the PAT21A Board}
{MU:4.4 [3-1]_Mother Board}
N
Y
Q6
Q5 Error recurs after the connector of the following board is reseated?
1. CFI21A board
2. ATX board (motherboard)
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
N
Y
END
Replace the boards in the order named.
1. CFI21A board
{MC:10.4_CFI21A Board}
{SP:08_CONTROLLER UNIT}
2. ATX board (motherboard)
{MC:10.8_ATX Board (Motherboard)}
{SP:08_CONTROLLER UNIT}
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-72
MT-73
Q6 Error recurs after the Compact Flash Card is reseated?
{MC:10.3_Compact Flash Card}
N
Y
END
Q7 Error recurs after the connector of the following board is reseated?
1. CFI21A board
2. ATX board (motherboard)
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
N
Y
END
Q8 Error recurs after the RU software is re-installed?
{IN:25._Installing the RU Software}
N
Y
END
Replace the boards in the order named.
1. CFI21A board
{MC:10.4_CFI21A Board}
{SP:08_CONTROLLER UNIT}
2. ATX board (motherboard)
{MC:10.8_ATX Board (Motherboard)}
{SP:08_CONTROLLER UNIT}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-73
MT-74
5.6
Error Code Analysis Flow: Electrical 6
Q5 Error recurs after the connector of the following board is reseated?
1. SND21B board connector (CN1)
2. SND21A board connectors (CN2/CN5)
3. RLY21A/B board connectors (CN2/CN4)
4. PAT21A board connector (CN13)
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
Error Code
12810: Detection of fuse blown out or disconnection
During routine processing, a blown out fuse or disconnection is detected.
Analysis Flow
Y
START
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log?
{MT:1.3_Troubleshooting from Error Log}
Y
END
Replace the boards in the order named.
Check the error log in the ERROR DB.
N
N
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
Q2 Check the fuse on the PAT21A board.
1. SND21B board
{MC:4.7_SND21B Board Assembly}
{SP:06C_EXPOSURE UNIT FRAME/WIRING 3}
2. PAT21A board
{MC:10.7_PAT21A Board}
{SP:08_CONTROLLER UNIT}
3. SND21A board
{MC:10.6_SND21A Board}
{SP:08_CONTROLLER UNIT}
4. RLY21A/B board
{MC:8.16_LDS21A/B Board and RLY21A/B Board}
{SP:06C_EXPOSURE UNIT FRAME/WIRING 3}
{MT:6.1_Checking the PAT21A Board Fuses}
Q3 Check the voltage on the PAT21A board.
{MT:7.1_Checking the Voltage on the PAT21A Board}
Q4 Check the fuse on the SND21B board.
{MT:6.3_Checking the SND21B Board Fuses}
Q5
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-74
MT-75
6.
Checking the Fuses
6.1
6.1.2
Procedures for Checking the PAT21A Board Fuses
(1) Check the locations of the fuses on the PAT21A board.
Checking the PAT21A Board Fuses
NOTE
Blown-out of some fuses on the PAT21A board cannot be detected by the board check
of the RU PC-TOOL. Refer to “6.5 Fuses which Cannot Be Detected to Be Blown
Out” for those fuses.
{MT:6.5_Fuses which Cannot Be Detected to Be Blown Out}
6.1.1
Check Flow for the PAT21A Board Fuses
START
Q1 Result of PAT21A board check normal?
{MU:4.4 [3-2-1]_All Check}
Y
N
Return to the analysis flow.
Check the error code that occurs and detailed information of the fuse.
{MT:1.5.1_Fuse-Related Error Detailed Information}
Remove the controller unit left-hand side cover.
{MC:3.3_Controller Unit Covers}
(2) Check continuity of the fuse.
Q2 Check the associated fuse from the fuse related error detailed information.
Fuse normal?
{MT:6.1.2_Procedures for Checking the PAT21A Board Fuses}
Y
N
Return to the analysis flow.
Replace the fuse.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-75
MT-76
6.2
6.2.1
Checking the SND21A Board Fuses
Check Flow for the SND21A Board Fuses
6.2.2
Procedures for Checking the SND21A Board Fuses
(1) Check the locations of the fuses on the SND21A board.
START
Q1 Result of SND21A board check normal?
{MU:4.4 [3-3-2-4]_Fuse}
Y
N
Return to the analysis flow.
Remove the SND21A board.
{MC:10.6_SND21A Board}
Q2 SND21A board fuse normal?
{MT:6.2.2_Procedures for Checking the SND21A Board Fuses}
Y
N
Return to the analysis flow.
(2) Check continuity of the fuse.
Replace the fuse.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-76
MT-77
6.3
Checking the SND21B Board Fuses
6.3.2
Procedures for Checking the SND21B Board Fuses
(1) Check the locations of the fuses on the SND21B board.
NOTE
Blown-out of some fuses on the SND21B board cannot be detected by the board
check of the RU PC-TOOL. Refer to “6.5 Fuses which Cannot Be Detected to Be
Blown Out” for those fuses.
{MT:6.5_Fuses which Cannot Be Detected to Be Blown Out}
6.3.1
Check Flow for the SND21B Board Fuses
START
Q1 Result of SND21B board check normal?
{MU:4.4 [3-3-2-4]_Fuse}
Y
N
Return to the analysis flow.
Check the error code that occurs and detailed information of the fuse.
{MT:1.5.1_Fuse-Related Error Detailed Information}
Remove the SND21B board assembly.
{MC:4.7_SND21B Board Assembly}
Q2 Check the associated fuse from the fuse related error detailed information.
Fuse normal?
(2) Check continuity of the fuse.
{MT:6.3.2_Procedures for Checking the SND21B Board Fuses}
Y
N
Return to the analysis flow.
Replace the fuse.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-77
MT-78
6.4
6.4.1
Checking the ELV21A Board Fuses
Check Flow for the ELV21A Board Fuses
6.4.2
Procedures for Checking the ELV21A Board Fuses
(1) Check the locations of the fuses on the ELV21A board.
START
Remove the ELV21A board.
{MC:9.8_ELV21A Board}
Q1 ELV21A board fuse normal?
{MT:6.4.2_Procedures for Checking the ELV21A Board Fuses}
Y
N
Return to the analysis flow.
Replace the fuse.
(2) Check continuity of the fuse.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-78
MT-79
6.5
Fuses which Cannot Be Detected to Be
Blown Out
SND21B Board
Fuse No.
Phenomenon of error observed when this fuse has blown out
The error code “10700” appears on the CL window or on the operation panel.
Blown-out of some fuses on the PAT21A/SND21B board cannot be detected by the
board check of the RU PC-TOOL. It may result in difficulty in determining the cause of
the error. Shown below are the Nos. of the fuses whose blown-out cannot be detected
by the board check of the RU PC-TOOL and the phenomena of the errors.
PAT21A Board
Fuse No.
Phenomenon of error observed when this fuse has blown out
F5
The error code “12810” appears in the ERROR DB of the RU PC-TOOL. The
expansion error code is “dev/sensor/34”.
F6
The error code “12810” appears on the ERROR DB window of the RU PCTOOL. The expansion error code is “dev/sensor/35”.
F9
The error code “11244” appears on the CL window.
The error code “10700” appears on the CL window or on the operation panel.
F8
F11
The error code “11244” appears on the CL window.
F9
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-79
MT-80
7.
Checking the Voltage
7.1
Checking the Voltage on the PAT21A Board
7.1.2
Procedures for Checking the Voltage on the PAT21A
Board
(1) Check the locations of the PAT21A board test pins.
WARNING
To avoid possible electric shock hazard from high voltage, observe the
following precautions.
- Do not touch the power supply terminals.
- When making voltage measurements, do not touch the probe (metal portion)
of a tester.
7.1.1
Check Flow for the Voltage on the PAT21A Board
START
Q1 Voltage on the PAT21A board normal?
{MT:7.1.2_Procedures for Checking the Voltage on the PAT21A Board}
Y
N
Return to the analysis flow.
Turn OFF the power supply and the circuit breaker of the machine.
Reseat the PAT21A board connector.
{MC:10.7_PAT21A Board}
(2) Measure the voltage value of each test pin.
Check to make sure that the voltage values of the test pins are within the reference
value.
TP11
Measurement voltage
Measurement point
Reference voltage value
+6V1
1 pin − 6 pin
+6.35V±5 %
+6V2
5 pin − 6 pin
+6.35V±5 %
+6V
2 pin − 6 pin
+6.35V±5 %
+9V
3 pin − 7 pin
+9.0V±5 %
+18V
4 pin − 8 pin
+18.0V±5 %
Measurement voltage
Measurement point
Reference voltage value
ERS_+24V1
1 pin − 2 pin
+25.0V±5 %
ERS_+24V2
3 pin − 4 pin
+25.0V±5 %
Q2 Again check the voltage on the PAT21A board.
Voltage on the PAT21A board normal?
{MT:7.1.2_Procedures for Checking the Voltage on the PAT21A Board}
Y
N
END
Replace the board and the power supply unit in the order named.
1. PAT21A board
{MC:10.7_PAT21A Board}
{SP:08_CONTROLLER UNIT}
2. Power supply (Alpha 600)
{MC:10.2_Power Supply (Alpha 600/450)}
{SP:08_CONTROLLER UNIT}
012-201-09E
TP12
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-80
MT-81
TP13
Measurement voltage
Measurement point
Reference voltage value
+24VP
1 pin − 5 pin
1 pin − 10 pin
+25.5V±5 %
+24VF
2 pin − 5 pin
2 pin − 10 pin
+25.5V±5 %
+24VL
6 pin − 5 pin
6 pin − 10 pin
+25.5V±5 %
+12V
3 pin − 5 pin
3 pin − 10 pin
+12.0V±5 %
+3.3V
4 pin − 5 pin
4 pin − 10 pin
+3.3V±5 %
+5V
7 pin − 5 pin
7 pin − 10 pin
+5.2V±5 %
-12V
8 pin − 5 pin
8 pin − 10 pin
-12.0V±10 %
+5VSB
9 pin − 5 pin
9 pin − 10 pin
+5.0V±5 %
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-81
MT-82
7.2
Checking the Voltage on the JCT21B Board
WARNING
To avoid possible electric shock hazard from high voltage, observe the
following precautions.
- Do not touch the power supply terminals.
7.2.1
7.2.2
Procedures for Checking the Voltage on the JCT21B
Board
(1) Turn ON the eight DIP switches and check to make sure that all LEDs
are lit.
JCT21B board
J2
Check Flow for the Voltage on the JCT21B Board
J1
#1
[ON]
DipSW x8
START
CN4
Remove the grid support assembly.
{MC:4.1_Grid Support Assembly}
OFF
Q1 Voltage on the JCT21B board normal?
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ON
{MT:7.2.2_Procedures for Checking the Voltage on the JCT21B Board}
Y
N
CN3
Return to the analysis flow.
CN2
24V1 5V2 16V 6V1
24V2 5V1
9V 6V2
Turn OFF the power supply and the circuit breaker of the machine.
#2
[Make sure the LEDs are lit]
LED x8
JCT21B board
Reseat the following board connectors.
1. JCT21B board connector (CN1)
2. PWC21A board
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
Q2 Again check the voltage on the JCT21B board.
Voltage on the JCT21B board normal?
{MT:7.2.2_Procedures for Checking the Voltage on the JCT21B Board}
Y
N
END
Replace the boards in the order named.
1. Erasure unit
{MC:6.1_Erasure Unit}
{SP:03_SCANNER UNIT/ERASURE UNIT}
2. PWC21A board
{MC:8.15_PWC21A Board}
{SP:06A_EXPOSURE UNIT FRAME/WIRING 1}
FRAH2702.EPS
REFERENCE
The LEDs on the JCT21B board which are lit indicate that the voltage supplied
from the power supply unit to the JCT21B board is normal.
Information of each lit LED is shown below.
LED name
Information
6V1
LED for checking LD assembly voltage supply
6V2
LED for checking LD assembly voltage supply
16V
LED for checking CCD assembly voltage supply
9V
LED for checking CCD assembly voltage supply
5V2
LED for checking CCD assembly and LD assembly voltage supply
5V1
LED for checking erasure unit and LD assembly voltage supply
24V1
LED for checking erasure unit voltage supply
24V2
LED for checking erasure unit voltage supply
(2) Turn OFF the eight DIP switches.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-82
MT-83
8.
Checking the Sensors/Switches
8.1
8.1.2
Exiting the Monitoring Function
(1) Click the [STOP] button.
Starting and Exiting the Monitoring
Function
With the RU PC-TOOL sensor monitoring function activated, turn ON/OFF the sensor
to be checked. If the sensor status changes corresponding to the ON/OFF timing, it
can be judged that the sensor is normal.
8.1.1
Starting the Monitoring Function
(1) From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU.
(2) Click the
button.
(2) Click the [MON] button.
(3) Click the [START] button.
→ When the RU operates under this condition, display entries are added whenever
the I/O changes.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-83
MT-84
8.2
8.2.1
Checking the SZ1
Check Flow for SZ1
8.2.2
Checking the Monitoring Function of SZ1
(1) Start the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC TOOL}
(2) Start monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.
START
{MT:8.1.1_Starting the Monitoring Function}
Q1 Result of SZ1 monitoring check normal?
{MT:8.2.2_Checking the Monitoring Function of SZ1}
Y
N
Return to the analysis flow.
Q2 Light shielding unit of SZ1 free from contamination with dirt or the like?
N
Y
Clean.
1. The actuator is deformation-free.
2. Distance from sensor
3. Installation position of sensor
Y
{MU:4.4 [4-6]_Sub-Scanning HP}
NOTE
The MUTL “Sub-Scanning HP” cannot be executed in some cases depending
on the error level that has occurred. Protect the SZ1 against light by a piece of
paper or the like.
(4) Check the monitoring display.
Q3 The actuator for light-shielding SZ1 and installation of SZ1 normal?
N
(3) Execute "Sub-Scanning HP" of the MUTL.
GOOD indication
“OPEN” or “CLOSE” is indicated for a sensor to be checked.
Correct the actuator. Or reinstall SZ1.
Q4 Connector connection normal? Check the following points.
1. The SZ1 connector is securely plugged in.
2. The connector H-CN26 is securely plugged in.
3. The SND21B board connector CN3 is securely plugged in.
4. The connector pins mentioned above are free from damage.
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
N
Y
“OPEN” or “CLOSE” is not indicated for a sensor to be checked.
Restore.
Replace SZ1.
NO GOOD indication
NOTE
{SP:04B_SUBSCANNING MECHANISM 2}
Click on the [START] button in the monitoring window to start the monitoring
beforehand. Unless the monitoring is started, nothing is displayed in the window
even when the sensor changes its status.
(5) Exit the monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.
{MT:8.1.2_Exiting the Monitoring Function}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-84
MT-85
8.3
8.3.1
Checking the SZ2
Check Flow for SZ2
8.3.2
Checking the Monitoring Function of SZ2
(1) Start the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC TOOL}
(2) Start monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.
START
{MT:8.1.1_Starting the Monitoring Function}
Q1 Result of SZ2 monitoring check normal?
{MT:8.3.2_Checking the Monitoring Function of SZ2}
Y
N
Return to the analysis flow.
Q2 Light shielding unit of SZ2 free from contamination with dirt or the like?
N
Y
Clean.
1. The actuator is deformation-free.
2. Distance from sensor
3. Installation position of sensor
Y
{MU:4.4 [4-4]_IP Shift HP}
NOTE
The MUTL “IP Shift HP” cannot be executed in some cases depending on the
error level that has occurred. Protect the SZ2 against light by a piece of paper or
the like.
(4) Check the monitoring display.
Q3 The actuator for light-shielding SZ2 and installation of SZ2 normal?
N
(3) Execute "IP Shift HP" of the MUTL.
GOOD indication
“OPEN” or “CLOSE” is indicated for a sensor to be checked.
Correct the actuator. Or reinstall SZ2.
Q4 Connector connection normal? Check the following points.
1. The SZ2 connector is securely plugged in.
2. The connector H-CN26 is securely plugged in.
3. The SND21B board connector CN3 is securely plugged in.
4. The connector pins mentioned above are free from damage.
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
N
Y
“OPEN” or “CLOSE” is not indicated for a sensor to be checked.
Restore.
Replace SZ2.
NO GOOD indication
NOTE
{SP:02C_IP MOVEMENT MECHANISM 3}
Click on the [START] button in the monitoring window to start the monitoring
beforehand. Unless the monitoring is started, nothing is displayed in the window
even when the sensor changes its status.
(5) Exit the monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.
{MT:8.1.2_Exiting the Monitoring Function}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-85
MT-86
8.4
8.4.1
Checking the SZ3
Check Flow for SZ3
8.4.2
Checking the Monitoring Function of SZ3
(1) Start the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC TOOL}
(2) Start monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.
START
{MT:8.1.1_Starting the Monitoring Function}
Q1 Result of SZ3 monitoring check normal?
{MT:8.4.2_Checking the Monitoring Function of SZ3}
Y
N
Return to the analysis flow.
Q2 Light shielding unit of SZ3 free from contamination with dirt or the like?
N
Y
(3) Shield the light to SZ3 by a piece of paper or the like.
(4) Check the monitoring display.
GOOD indication
“OPEN” or “CLOSE” is indicated for a sensor to be checked.
Clean.
Q3 The actuator for light-shielding SZ3 and installation of SZ3 normal?
1. The actuator is deformation-free.
2. Distance from sensor
3. Installation position of sensor
N
Y
Correct the actuator. Or reinstall SZ3.
Q4 Connector connection normal? Check the following points.
1. The SZ3 connector is securely plugged in.
2. The connector H-CN26 is securely plugged in.
3. The SND21B board connector CN3 is securely plugged in.
4. The connector pins mentioned above are free from damage.
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
N
Y
Restore.
Replace SZ3.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
NO GOOD indication
“OPEN” or “CLOSE” is not indicated for a sensor to be checked.
NOTE
Click on the [START] button in the monitoring window to start the monitoring
beforehand. Unless the monitoring is started, nothing is displayed in the window
even when the sensor changes its status.
(5) Exit the monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.
{MT:8.1.2_Exiting the Monitoring Function}
{SP:04B_SUBSCANNING MECHANISM 2}
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-86
MT-87
8.5
8.5.1
Checking the SZ4
Check Flow for SZ4
8.5.2
Checking the Monitoring Function of SZ4
(1) Start the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC TOOL}
(2) Start monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.
START
{MT:8.1.1_Starting the Monitoring Function}
Q1 Result of SZ4 monitoring check normal?
{MT:8.5.2_Checking the Monitoring Function of SZ4}
Y
N
Return to the analysis flow.
Q2 Light shielding unit of SZ4 free from contamination with dirt or the like?
N
Y
(3) Shield the light to SZ4 by a piece of paper or the like.
(4) Check the monitoring display.
GOOD indication
“OPEN” or “CLOSE” is indicated for a sensor to be checked.
Clean.
Q3 The actuator for light-shielding SZ4 and installation of SZ4 normal?
1. The actuator is deformation-free.
2. Distance from sensor
3. Installation position of sensor
N
Y
Correct the actuator. Or reinstall SZ4.
Q4 Connector connection normal? Check the following points.
1. The SZ4 connector is securely plugged in.
2. The connector H-CN26 is securely plugged in.
3. The SND21B board connector CN3 is securely plugged in.
4. The connector pins mentioned above are free from damage.
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
N
Y
Restore.
Replace SZ4.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
NO GOOD indication
“OPEN” or “CLOSE” is not indicated for a sensor to be checked.
NOTE
Click on the [START] button in the monitoring window to start the monitoring
beforehand. Unless the monitoring is started, nothing is displayed in the window
even when the sensor changes its status.
(5) Exit the monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.
{MT:8.1.2_Exiting the Monitoring Function}
{SP:04B_SUBSCANNING MECHANISM 2}
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-87
MT-88
8.6
8.6.1
Checking the SZ5
Check Flow for SZ5
8.6.2
Checking the Monitoring Function of SZ5
(1) Start the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC TOOL}
(2) Start monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.
START
{MT:8.1.1_Starting the Monitoring Function}
Q1 Result of SZ5 monitoring check normal?
{MT:8.6.2_Checking the Monitoring Function of SZ5}
Y
N
Return to the analysis flow.
Q2 Light shielding unit of SZ5 free from contamination with dirt or the like?
N
Y
Clean.
Q3 The actuator for light-shielding SZ5 and installation of SZ5 normal?
1. The actuator is deformation-free.
2. Distance from sensor
3. Installation position of sensor
N
Y
(3) Carry out automatic conveyance with “Conveyance Check” of the
MUTL.
{MU:4.4 [2]_Conveyance Check}
NOTE
The MUTL “Conveyance Check” cannot be executed in some cases depending
on the error level that has occurred. Protect the SZ5 against light by a piece of
paper or the like.
(4) Check the monitoring display.
GOOD indication
“OPEN” or “CLOSE” is indicated for a sensor to be checked.
Correct the actuator. Or reinstall SZ5.
Q4 Connector connection normal? Check the following points.
1. The SZ5 connector is securely plugged in.
2. The connector H-CN26 is securely plugged in.
3. The SND21B board connector CN3 is securely plugged in.
4. The connector pins mentioned above are free from damage.
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
N
Y
NO GOOD indication
Restore.
Replace SZ5.
“OPEN” or “CLOSE” is not indicated for a sensor to be checked.
NOTE
{SP:04B_SUBSCANNING MECHANISM 2}
Click on the [START] button in the monitoring window to start the monitoring
beforehand. Unless the monitoring is started, nothing is displayed in the window
even when the sensor changes its status.
(5) Exit the monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.
{MT:8.1.2_Exiting the Monitoring Function}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-88
MT-89
8.7
8.7.1
Checking the SZ6
Check Flow for SZ6
8.7.2
Checking the Monitoring Function of SZ6
(1) Start the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC TOOL}
(2) Start monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.
START
{MT:8.1.1_Starting the Monitoring Function}
Q1 Result of SZ6 monitoring check normal?
{MT:8.7.2_Checking the Monitoring Function of SZ6}
Y
N
Return to the analysis flow.
(3) Replace the grid. Or shield the SZ6 against light with a piece of paper
or the like.
(4) Check the monitoring display.
GOOD indication
Q2 Light shielding unit of SZ6 free from contamination with dirt or the like?
N
Y
“OPEN” or “CLOSE” is indicated for a sensor to be checked.
Clean.
Q3 The actuator for light-shielding SZ6 and installation of SZ6 normal?
1. The actuator is deformation-free.
2. Distance from sensor
3. Installation position of sensor
N
Y
Correct the actuator. Or reinstall SZ6.
Q4 Connector connection normal? Check the following points.
1. The SZ6 connector is securely plugged in.
2. The connector H-CN26 is securely plugged in.
3. The SND21B board connector CN3 is securely plugged in.
4. The connector pins mentioned above are free from damage.
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
N
Y
“OPEN” or “CLOSE” is not indicated for a sensor to be checked.
NOTE
Click on the [START] button in the monitoring window to start the monitoring
beforehand. Unless the monitoring is started, nothing is displayed in the window
even when the sensor changes its status.
Restore.
Replace SZ6.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
NO GOOD indication
(5) Exit the monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.
{MT:8.1.2_Exiting the Monitoring Function}
{SP:05B_BUCKY 2}
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-89
MT-90
8.8
8.8.1
Checking the SZ7
Check Flow for SZ7
8.8.2
Checking the Monitoring Function of SZ7
(1) Start the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC TOOL}
(2) Start monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.
START
{MT:8.1.1_Starting the Monitoring Function}
Q1 Result of SZ7 monitoring check normal?
{MT:8.8.2_Checking the Monitoring Function of SZ7}
Y
N
Return to the analysis flow.
Q2 Light shielding unit of SZ7 free from contamination with dirt or the like?
N
Y
Clean.
1. The actuator is deformation-free.
2. Distance from sensor
3. Installation position of sensor
Y
{MU:4.4 [4-2]_Bucky HP}
NOTE
The MUTL “Bucky HP” cannot be executed in some cases depending on the
error level that has occurred. Protect the SZ7 against light by a piece of paper or
the like.
(4) Check the monitoring display.
Q3 The actuator for light-shielding SZ7 and installation of SZ7 normal?
N
(3) Execute "Bucky HP" of the MUTL.
GOOD indication
“OPEN” or “CLOSE” is indicated for a sensor to be checked.
Correct the actuator. Or reinstall SZ7.
Q4 Connector connection normal? Check the following points.
1. The SZ7 connector is securely plugged in.
2. The connector H-CN26 is securely plugged in.
3. The SND21B board connector CN3 is securely plugged in.
4. The connector pins mentioned above are free from damage.
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
N
Y
“OPEN” or “CLOSE” is not indicated for a sensor to be checked.
Restore.
Replace SZ7.
NO GOOD indication
NOTE
{SP:06A_EXPOSURE UNIT FRAME/WIRING 1}
Click on the [START] button in the monitoring window to start the monitoring
beforehand. Unless the monitoring is started, nothing is displayed in the window
even when the sensor changes its status.
(5) Exit the monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.
{MT:8.1.2_Exiting the Monitoring Function}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-90
MT-91
8.9
8.9.1
Checking the SZ21
Check Flow for SZ21
8.9.2
Checking the Monitoring Function of SZ21
(1) Start the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC TOOL}
(2) Start monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.
START
{MT:8.1.1_Starting the Monitoring Function}
Q1 Result of SZ21 monitoring check normal?
{MT:8.9.2_Checking the Monitoring Function of SZ21}
Y
N
Return to the analysis flow.
Q2 Light shielding unit of SZ21 free from contamination with dirt or the like?
N
Y
Clean.
Q3 The actuator for light-shielding SZ21 and installation of SZ21 normal?
1. The actuator is deformation-free.
2. Distance from sensor
3. Installation position of sensor
N
Y
Correct the actuator. Or reinstall SZ21.
(3) Carry out automatic conveyance with “Conveyance Check” of the
MUTL.
{MU:4.4 [2]_Conveyance Check}
NOTE
The MUTL “Conveyance Check” cannot be executed in some cases depending
on the error level that has occurred. Protect the SZ21 against light by a piece of
paper or the like.
(4) Check the monitoring display.
GOOD indication
“OPEN” or “CLOSE” is indicated for a sensor to be checked.
NOTE
The name displayed in the monitoring window is “FRBIT” if the monitoring of
SZ21 is executed.
Q4 Connector connection normal? Check the following points.
1. The SZ21 connector is securely plugged in.
2. The connector H-CN26 is securely plugged in.
3. The SND21B board connector CN3 is securely plugged in.
4. The connector pins mentioned above are free from damage.
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
N
Y
Restore.
Replace SZ21.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
{SP:02C_IP MOVEMENT MECHANISM 3}
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-91
MT-92
NO GOOD indication
“OPEN” or “CLOSE” is not indicated for a sensor to be checked.
NOTE
Click on the [START] button in the monitoring window to start the monitoring
beforehand. Unless the monitoring is started, nothing is displayed in the window
even when the sensor changes its status.
(5) Exit the monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.
{MT:8.1.2_Exiting the Monitoring Function}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-92
MT-93
8.10
Checking the SH1
8.10.1
Check Flow for SH1
8.10.2
Checking the Monitoring Function of SH1
(1) Start the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC TOOL}
(2) Start monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.
START
{MT:8.1.1_Starting the Monitoring Function}
Q1 Result of SH1 monitoring check normal?
{MT:8.10.2_Checking the Monitoring Function of SH1}
Y
N
Return to the analysis flow.
Q2 Light shielding unit of SH1 free from contamination with dirt or the like?
N
Y
Clean.
1. The actuator is deformation-free.
2. Distance from sensor
3. Installation position of sensor
Y
{MU:4.4 [4-1]_Grid Change Door}
NOTE
The MUTL “Grid Change Door” cannot be executed in some cases depending
on the error level that has occurred. Protect the SH1 against light by a piece of
paper or the like.
(4) Check the monitoring display.
Q3 The actuator for light-shielding SH1 and installation of SH1 normal?
N
(3) Execute "Grid Change Door" of the MUTL.
GOOD indication
“OPEN” or “CLOSE” is indicated for a sensor to be checked.
Correct the actuator. Or reinstall SH1.
Q4 Connector connection normal? Check the following points.
1. The SH1 connector is securely plugged in.
2. The connector H-CN26 is securely plugged in.
3. The SND21B board connector CN3 is securely plugged in.
4. The connector pins mentioned above are free from damage.
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
N
Y
“OPEN” or “CLOSE” is not indicated for a sensor to be checked.
Restore.
Replace SH1.
NO GOOD indication
NOTE
{SP:05C_BUCKY 3}
Click on the [START] button in the monitoring window to start the monitoring
beforehand. Unless the monitoring is started, nothing is displayed in the window
even when the sensor changes its status.
(5) Exit the monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.
{MT:8.1.2_Exiting the Monitoring Function}
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-93
MT-94
8.11
Checking the SH3/SH4
8.11.1
Check Flow for SH3/SH4
8.11.2
Checking the Monitoring Function of SH3/SH4
(1) Start the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC TOOL}
(2) Start monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.
START
{MT:8.1.1_Starting the Monitoring Function}
Q1 Result of SH3/SH4 monitoring check normal?
{MT:8.11.2_Checking the Monitoring Function of SH3/SH4}
Y
N
Return to the analysis flow.
Q2 Installation of SH3/SH4 normal? Check the following points.
1. The actuator is deformation-free.
2. Distance from switch
3. nstallation position of switch
N
Y
(3) Simultaneously press down SH3/SH4.
(4) Check the monitoring display.
GOOD indication
“OPEN” or “CLOSE” is indicated for a switch to be checked.
NOTE
The name displayed in the monitoring window is “SH03” if the monitoring of SH3/
SH4 is executed.
Correct the actuator. Or reinstall SH3/SH4.
Q3 FAST-ON terminal or the connector connection normal? Check the following points.
1. The FAST-ON terminals of SH3/SH4 are securely plugged in.
2. The connector H-CN25 is securely plugged in.
3. The SND21B board connector CN3 is securely plugged in.
4. The connector pins mentioned above are free from damage.
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
N
Y
Restore.
NO GOOD indication
Replace the SH3 or SH4.
{MC:4.9_Exposure Unit front Cover Laser Safety Interlock Switch (SH3 and
SH4)}
{SP:06C_EXPOSURE UNIT FRAME/WIRING 3}
“OPEN” or “CLOSE” is not indicated for a switch to be checked.
NOTE
Click on the [START] button in the monitoring window to start the monitoring
beforehand. Unless the monitoring is started, nothing is displayed in the window
even when the switch changes its status.
(5) Exit the monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.
{MT:8.1.2_Exiting the Monitoring Function}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-94
MT-95
8.12
Checking the MSH1/MSH12
8.12.1
Check Flow for MSH1/MSH12
8.12.2
Checking the Monitoring Function of MSH1/MSH12
(1) Start the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC TOOL}
(2) Start monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.
START
{MT:8.1.1_Starting the Monitoring Function}
Q1 Result of MSH1/MSH2 monitoring check normal?
{MT:8.12.2_Checking the Monitoring Function of MSH1/MSH12}
Y
N
Return to the analysis flow.
(3) Open/close the grid replacement cover. Or press down the MSH1/
MSH12 at the same time.
(4) Check the monitoring display.
GOOD indication
Q2 Installation of MSH1/MSH2 normal? Check the following points.
1. The actuator is deformation-free.
2. Distance from switch
3. Installation position of switch
N
Y
Correct the actuator. Or reinstall MSH1/MSH12.
“OPEN” or “CLOSE” is indicated for a switch to be checked.
NOTE
The name displayed in the monitoring window is “MSH1” if the monitoring of
MSH1/MSH12 is executed.
Q3 Connector connection normal? Check the following points.
1. The connectors H-CN29/H-CN26 are securely plugged in.
2. The SND21B board connector CN3 is securely plugged in.
3. The connector pins mentioned above are free from damage.
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
N
Y
Restore.
Replace the MSH1 or MSH12.
{SP:05C_BUCKY 3}
NO GOOD indication
“OPEN” or “CLOSE” is not indicated for a switch to be checked.
NOTE
Click on the [START] button in the monitoring window to start the monitoring
beforehand. Unless the monitoring is started, nothing is displayed in the window
even when the sensor changes its status.
(5) Exit the monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.
{MT:8.1.2_Exiting the Monitoring Function}
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-95
MT-96
9.
9.1
9.1.1
Checking the Motors/
Electromagnetic Brake/Solenoid
Checking the MZ1
Check Flow for MZ1
START
{MT:9.1.2_Checking MZ1 Operation}
N
Checking MZ1 Operation
(1) Start the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC TOOL}
(2) Execute "Sub-Scanning HP" of the MUTL.
{MU:4.4 [4-6]_Sub-Scanning HP}
(3) Check the operation results.
GOOD indication
“RESULT-OK” is displayed on the MUTL.
Q1 MZ1 operation normal?
Y
9.1.2
Return to the analysis flow.
NO GOOD indication
The display is other than “RESULT-OK” on the MUTL.
(4) Exit the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC TOOL}
Q2 Drive system mechanism of MZ1 normal?
1. The driving shaft and the pinion gear are free from deformation.
2. The driving belt and the SUS belt are free from damage/slack.
N
Y
Restore.
Q3 Connector connection normal?
1. The MZ1 connector is securely plugged in.
2. The SND21B board connector CN21 is securely plugged in.
3. Pins of the above connectors are free from damage.
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
N
Y
Restore.
Q4 MZ1 resistance value normal?
{MT:9.1.3_Checking the Resistance Value of MZ1}
Y
N
Return to the analysis flow.
Replace the MZ1.
{MC:8.4_Subscanning Motor (MZ1)}
{SP:04C_SUBSCANNING MECHANISM 3}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-96
MT-97
9.1.3
Checking the Resistance Value of MZ1
(1) Check the connector (MZ1) for measuring the resistance value of MZ1.
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
Connector (MZ1) pin marks
(2) Measure the resistance value of MZ1.
Check to make sure that the resistance value is within the reference value.
Resistance value of MZ1
Measurement points
Reference resistance value
2 pin (orange) − 4 pin (green)
2 pin (orange) − 5 pin (red)
3 pin (black) − 4 pin (green)
1.6 – 2.0 Ω
3 pin (black) − 6 pin (blue)
5 pin (red) − 6 pin (blue)
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-97
MT-98
9.2
9.2.1
Checking the MZ2
Check Flow for MZ2
9.2.2
Checking MZ2 Operation
(1) Start the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC TOOL}
(2) Execute "IP Shift HP" of the MUTL.
START
{MU:4.4 [4-4]_IP Shift HP}
Q1 MZ2 operation normal?
{MT:9.2.2_Checking MZ2 Operation}
Y
N
Return to the analysis flow.
Q2 Drive system mechanism of MZ2 normal?
1. The driving shaft and the pinion gear are free from deformation.
2. The driving belt is free from damage/slack.
N
Y
(3) Check the operation results.
GOOD indication
“RESULT-OK” is displayed on the MUTL.
NO GOOD indication
The display is other than “RESULT-OK” on the MUTL.
(4) Exit the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC TOOL}
Restore.
Q3 Connector connection normal?
1. The MZ2 connector is securely plugged in.
2. The connectors H-CN21/H-CN22 are securely plugged in.
3. The SND21B board connectors CN21/CN22 are securely plugged in.
4. Pins of the above connectors are free from damage.
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
N
Y
Restore.
Q4 MZ2 resistance value normal?
{MT:9.2.3_Checking the Resistance Value of MZ2}
Y
N
Return to the analysis flow.
Replace the MZ2.
{MC:8.6_IP Movement Motor (MZ2)}
{SP:02A_IP MOVEMENT MECHANISM 1}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-98
MT-99
9.2.3
Checking the Resistance Value of MZ2
(1) Check the connector (MZ2) for measuring the resistance value of MZ2.
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
Connector (MZ2) pin marks
(2) Measure the resistance value of MZ2.
Check to make sure that the resistance value is within the reference value.
Resistance value of MZ2
Measurement points
Reference resistance value
2 pin (orange) – 4 pin (green)
2 pin (orange) – 5 pin (red)
3 pin (black) – 4 pin (green)
1.0 – 1.3 Ω
3 pin (black) – 6 pin (blue)
5 pin (red) – 6 pin (blue)
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-99
MT-100
9.3
9.3.1
Checking the MZ3
Check Flow for MZ3
9.3.2
Checking the Resistance Value of MZ3
(1) Start the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC TOOL}
(2) Execute "Bucky" of the MUTL.
START
{MU:4.4 [4-3]_Bucky}
Q1 MZ3 operation normal?
{MT:9.3.2_Checking the Resistance Value of MZ3}
Y
N
Return to the analysis flow.
Q2 Drive system mechanism of MZ3 normal?
1. The driving shaft and the bearing are free from deformation.
N
Y
(3) Check the operation results.
GOOD indication
“RESULT-OK” is displayed on the MUTL.
NO GOOD indication
The display is other than “RESULT-OK” on the MUTL.
(4) Exit the RU PC-TOOL.
Restore.
{MU:4._RU PC TOOL}
Q3 Connector connection normal?
1. The MZ3 connector is securely plugged in.
2. The connectors H-CN21/H-CN22 are securely plugged in.
3. The SND21B board connectors CN21/CN22 are securely plugged in.
4. Pins of the above connectors are free from damage.
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
N
Y
Restore.
Replace the MZ3.
{MC:8.8_Bucky Motor (MZ3)}
{SP:06A_EXPOSURE UNIT FRAME/WIRING 1}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-100
MT-101
9.4
9.4.1
Checking the MB1
Check Flow for MB1
9.4.2
Checking the Resistance Value of MB1
(1) Check the connector (MB1) for measuring the resistance value of MB1.
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
Connector (MB1) pin marks
START
Q1 MB1 installation normal?
1. The distance between the magnet body and the brake shoe is in a range from 0.2 to 0.4 mm.
2. The brake shoe smoothly rotates when the electromagnetic brake is released.
N
Y
Restore.
Q2 Connector connection normal?
1. The MB1 connector is securely plugged in.
2. The connectors H-CN26/H-CN21 are securely plugged in.
3. The SND21B board connector CN21 is securely plugged in.
4. Pins of the above connectors are free from damage.
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
N
Y
Restore.
(2) Measure the resistance value of MB1.
Check to make sure that the resistance value is within the reference value.
Resistance value of MB1
Measurement points
Reference resistance value
1 pin – 2 pin
74.2 – 90.7 Ω
Q3 MB1 resistance value normal?
{MT:9.4.2_Checking the Resistance Value of MB1}
Y
N
Return to the analysis flow.
Replace the MB1.
{MC:8.5_Subscanning Electromagnetic Brake (MB1)}
{SP:04C_SUBSCANNING MECHANISM 3}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-101
MT-102
9.5
9.5.1
Checking the MB2
Check Flow for MB2
9.5.2
Checking the Resistance Value of MB2
(1) Check the connector (MB2) for measuring the resistance value of MB2.
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
Connector (MB2) pin marks
START
Q1 MB2 installation normal?
1. The distance between the magnet body and the brake shoe is in a range from 0.2 to 0.4 mm.
2. The brake shoe smoothly rotates when the electromagnetic brake is released.
N
Y
Restore.
Q2 Connector connection normal?
1. The MB2 connector is securely plugged in.
2. The connector H-CN21 is securely plugged in.
3. The SND21B board connector CN21 is securely plugged in.
4. Pins of the above connectors are free from damage.
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
N
Y
Restore.
(2) Measure the resistance value of MB2.
Check to make sure that the resistance value is within the reference value.
Resistance value of MB2
Measurement points
Reference resistance value
1 pin − 2 pin
74.2 – 90.7 Ω
Q3 MB2 resistance value normal?
{MT:9.5.2_Checking the Resistance Value of MB2}
Y
N
Return to the analysis flow.
Replace the MB2.
{MC:8.7_IP Movement Electromagnetic Brake (MB2)}
{SP:02A_IP MOVEMENT MECHANISM 1}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-102
MT-103
9.6
Checking the SOLH1
9.6.1
Check Flow for SOLH1
9.6.2
Checking SOLH1 Operation
(1) Start the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC TOOL}
(2) Execute "Grid Change Door" of the MUTL.
START
{MU:4.4 [4-1]_Grid Change Door}
Q1 SOLH1 operation normal?
{MT:9.6.2_Checking SOLH1 Operation}
Y
N
Return to the analysis flow.
Q2 SOLH1 installation normal?
1. The actuator smoothly works.
N
Y
(3) Check the operation results.
GOOD indication
SOLH1 activates when “LOCK” or “UNLOCK” is selected.
NO GOOD indication
SOLH1 does not activate when “LOCK” or “UNLOCK” is selected.
(4) Exit the RU PC-TOOL.
Restore.
{MU:4._RU PC TOOL}
Q3 Connector connection normal?
1. The SOLH1 connector is securely plugged in.
2. The connector H-CN21 is securely plugged in.
3. The SND21B board connector CN5 is securely plugged in.
4. Pins of the above connectors are free from damage.
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
N
Y
Restore.
Q4 SOLH1 resistance value normal?
{MT:9.6.3_Checking the Resistance Value of SOLH1}
Y
N
Return to the analysis flow.
Replace the SOLH1.
{MC:4.4_Grid Replacement Cover Lock Solenoid (SOLH1)}
{SP:05C_BUCKY 3}
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-103
MT-104
9.6.3
Checking the Resistance Value of SOLH1
(1) Check the connector (CN3) for measuring the resistance value of
SOLH1.
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
Connector (SOLH1) pin marks
(2) Measure the resistance value of SOLH1.
Check to make sure that the resistance value is within the reference value.
Resistance value of SOLH1
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
Measurement points
Reference resistance value
1 pin (black) − 2 pin (blue)
96 – 118 Ω
2 pin (blue) − 3 pin (orange)
43 – 53 Ω
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-104
MT-105
10. Errors with no Error Code Displayed
and the Machine unable to Boot Up
10.2
10.1
Analysis Flow
Power Is not ON (The Start Switch on the
Operation Panel Does not Work)
Analysis Flow
unit is turned ON.
Q1 The power LED on the operation panel lit?
Y
START
Check to make sure that the power circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard/controller
START
N
Power LED on the Operation Panel Does
not Light Up
Q1 Check the voltage on the PAT21A board.
{MT:7.1_Checking the Voltage on the PAT21A Board}
Follow the analysis flow mentioned below to cope with.
{MT:10.2_Power LED on the Operation Panel Does not Light Up}
Q2 Error recurs after the connector and the relay connector of the following board are
reseated?
Q2 The start switch on the operation panel depressed?
N
Y
1. PAT21A board connectors (CN4/CN14)
2. LCN21A board connectors (CN2/CN3)
3. Connector (K-CN6)
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
Restore.
N
Q3 Check the fuse on the PAT21A board.
{MT:6.1_Checking the PAT21A Board Fuses}
Q4 Check the voltage on the PAT21A board.
{MT:7.1_Checking the Voltage on the PAT21A Board}
Q5 Error recurs after the following board connectors are reseated?
1. PAT21A board connectors (CN2/CN5/CN15)
2. ATX board (motherboard) connectors (CN41/CN45)
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
N
Y
END
Y
END
Replace the boards in the order named.
1. LCN21A board
{MC:9.14_Operation Panel Assembly, LCD Panel and LCN21A Board}
{SP:07D_ELEVATION UNIT (OPERATION PANEL&SWITCH)}
2. LCD panel
{MC:9.14_Operation Panel Assembly, LCD Panel and LCN21A Board}
{SP:07D_ELEVATION UNIT (OPERATION PANEL&SWITCH)}
3. PAT21A board
{MC:10.7_PAT21A Board}
{SP:08_CONTROLLER UNIT}
4. Power supply (Alpha 600)
{MC:10.2_Power Supply (Alpha 600/450)}
{SP:08_CONTROLLER UNIT}
Replace the boards in the order named.
1. PAT21A board
{MC:10.7_PAT21A Board}
{SP:08_CONTROLLER UNIT}
2. ATX board (motherboard)
{MC:10.8_ATX Board (Motherboard)}
{SP:08_CONTROLLER UNIT}
3. Power supply (Alpha 600)
{MC:10.2_Power Supply (Alpha 600/450)}
{SP:08_CONTROLLER UNIT}
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-105
MT-106
10.3
The Power LED on the Operation Panel
and the Indicator Lamp Stay Lit and the
Machine Does not Start
START
Q1 Check the fuse on the PAT21A board.
{MT:6.1_Checking the PAT21A Board Fuses}
Q2 Check the voltage on the PAT21A board.
{MT:7.1_Checking the Voltage on the PAT21A Board}
Q3 Error recurs after the Compact Flash Card is reseated?
{MC:10.3_Compact Flash Card}
Y
{MT:12._Reinstalling the Compact Flash Card}
N
Y
END
Replace the boards in the order named.
Analysis Flow
N
Q5 Error recurs after the Compact Flash Card is reinstalled?
1. Compact Flash Card
{MC:10.3_Compact Flash Card}
{SP:08_CONTROLLER UNIT}
2. CFI21A board
{MC:10.4_CFI21A Board}
{SP:08_CONTROLLER UNIT}
3. PAT21A board
{MC:10.7_PAT21A Board}
{SP:08_CONTROLLER UNIT}
4. ATX board (Motherboard)
{MC:10.8_ATX Board (Motherboard)}
{SP:08_CONTROLLER UNIT}
5. Power supply (Alpha 600)
{MC:10.2_Power Supply (Alpha 600/450)}
{SP:08_CONTROLLER UNIT}
END
Q4 Error recurs after the following board connectors are reseated?
1. PAT21A board connectors (CN1/CN20)
2. CFI21A board connectors (CN1/CN3)
3. ATX board (motherboard) connector (CN6)
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
N
Y
END
Q5
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-106
MT-107
10.4
LCD Panel Remains Black
10.5
LCD Panel Remains White
Analysis Flow
Analysis Flow
START
START
Q1 Error recurs after the brightness adjustment control on the operation panel is adjusted?
Q1 Error recurs after the brightness adjustment control on the operation panel is adjusted?
N
Y
N
END
Y
END
Q2 Check the fuse on the PAT21A board.
Q2 Check the fuse on the PAT21A board.
Q3 Check the voltage on the PAT21A board.
Q3 Check the voltage on the PAT21A board.
Q4 Error recurs after the connector and the relay connector of the following board are
Q4 Error recurs after the following board connectors are reseated?
{MT:6.1_Checking the PAT21A Board Fuses}
{MT:7.1_Checking the Voltage on the PAT21A Board}
reseated?
1. PAT21A board connector (CN12)
2. LCN21A board connector (CN1)
3. LCD panel connectors (CN1/CN2)
4. ELV21A board connectors (CN5/CN11/CN12)
5. Connectors (K-CN5/J-CN3)
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
N
Y
END
Replace the boards in the order named.
1. LCN21A board
{MC:9.14_Operation Panel Assembly, LCD Panel and LCN21A Board}
{SP:07D_ELEVATION UNIT (OPERATION PANEL&SWITCH)}
2. LCD panel
{MC:9.14_Operation Panel Assembly, LCD Panel and LCN21A Board}
{SP:07D_ELEVATION UNIT (OPERATION PANEL&SWITCH)}
3. ELV21A board
{MC:9.8_ELV21A Board}
{SP:07C_ELEVATION UNIT MAIN BODY 2}
4. PAT21A board
{MC:10.7_PAT21A Board}
{SP:08_CONTROLLER UNIT}
5. Power supply (Alpha 600)
{MC:10.2_Power Supply (Alpha 600/450)}
{SP:08_CONTROLLER UNIT}
012-201-09E
{MT:6.1_Checking the PAT21A Board Fuses}
{MT:7.1_Checking the Voltage on the PAT21A Board}
1. ATX board (motherboard) connector (CN18)
2. LCD panel connectors (CN3/CN4)
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
N
Y
END
Replace the boards in the order named.
1. LCD panel
{MC:9.14_Operation Panel Assembly, LCD Panel and LCN21A Board}
{SP:07D_ELEVATION UNIT (OPERATION PANEL&SWITCH)}
2. ATX board (Motherboard)
{MC:10.8_ATX Board (Motherboard)}
{SP:08_CONTROLLER UNIT}
3. PAT21A board
{MC:10.7_PAT21A Board}
{SP:08_CONTROLLER UNIT}
4. Power supply (Alpha 600)
{MC:10.2_Power Supply (Alpha 600/450)}
{SP:08_CONTROLLER UNIT}
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-107
MT-108
10.6
Touch Button on the LCD Does not Work
Analysis Flow
START
Q1 Check the fuse on the PAT21A board.
{MT:6.1_Checking the PAT21A Board Fuses}
Q2 Check the voltage on the PAT21A board.
{MT:7.1_Checking the Voltage on the PAT21A Board}
Q3 Error recurs after the following board connectors are reseated?
1. ATX board (motherboard) connector (CN17)
2. LCD panel connector (CN5)
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
N
Y
END
Replace the boards in the order named.
1. LCD panel
{MC:9.14_Operation Panel Assembly, LCD Panel and LCN21A Board}
{SP:07D_ELEVATION UNIT (OPERATION PANEL&SWITCH)}
2. ATX board (motherboard)
{MC:10.8_ATX Board (Motherboard)}
{SP:08_CONTROLLER UNIT}
3. PAT21A board
{MC:10.7_PAT21A Board}
{SP:08_CONTROLLER UNIT}
4. Power supply (Alpha 600)
{MC:10.2_Power Supply (Alpha 600/450)}
{SP:08_CONTROLLER UNIT}
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-108
MT-109
11. Error with Abnormality Observed in
the Elevation Unit
11.1
The Elevation Unit Does not Ascend
Analysis Flow
START
Q1 Is MSJ1 installed normally?
1. The actuator is free from deformation.
2. Interval from the switch
3. Switch location
{MC:9.5_Exposure Unit Elevation Upper-Limit Interlock Switch (MSJ1)}
The elevation unit does not ascend by pressing the exposure unit elevation switch
(ascent).
Error-Related I/O Locations
N
Y
Correct the actuator or replace MSJ1.
Q2 Is MSH8 installed normally?
1. Connection of the terminal is free from errors.
{MC:9.20_Grip Handle Collision Prevention Proximity Switch (MSH8)}
N
Y
Reconnect the terminal or replace the MSH8.
Q3 Error recurs after the following board connectors and the relay connectors are reseated?
1. AWT21A board connector (CN1)
2. ELV21A board connectors (CN2/CN6/CN7)
3. Connectors (H-CH3/J-CN2/J-CN7/J-CN12)
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
N
Y
END
Replace the components in the following order.
1. AWT21A board (elevation switch)
{MC:9.15_Elevation Switch (Hand Switch) and AWT21A/B Board}
{SP:07D_ELEVATION UNIT (OPERATION PANEL&SWITCH)}
2. ELV21A board
{MC:9.8_ELV21A Board}
{SP:07C_ELEVATION UNIT MAIN BODY 2}
3. Exposure unit up-down drive motor (MJ1)
{MC:9.1_Exposure Unit Up-Down Drive Motor (MJ1)}
{SP:07B_ELEVATION UNIT MAIN BODY 1}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-109
MT-110
11.2
The Elevation Unit Does not Descend
The elevation unit does not descend by pressing the exposure unit elevation switch
(descent).
Error-Related I/O Locations
Analysis Flow
START
Q1 Is the exposure unit front cover correctly installed?
{MC:3.1_Exposure Unit Covers}
N
Y
Reinstall the exposure unit front cover.
Q2 Is MSH2/MSH3 installed normally?
1. The actuator is free from deformation.
2.
nterval from the switch
3. Switch location
{MC:4.5_Patient Protection Descent Prevention Interlock Switch (MSH2)}
{MC:4.6_Patient Protection Descent Prevention Interlock Switch (MSH3)}
N
Y
Correct the actuator or replace MSH2/MSH3.
Q3 Is MSJ2 installed normally?
1. The actuator is free from deformation.
2. nterval from the switch
3. Switch location
{MC:9.6_Exposure Unit Elevation Lower Limit Interlock Switch (MSJ2)}
N
Y
Correct the actuator or replace MSJ2.
Q4 Error recurs after the following board connectors and the relay connectors are reseated?
1. AWT21A board connector (CN1)
2. ELV21A board connectors (CN2/CN6/CN7/CN9)
3. Connectors (H-CN23/H-CN3/J-CN2/J-CN7/J-CN12)
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
N
Y
END
Replace the components in the following order.
1. AWT21A board (elevation switch)
{MC:9.15_Elevation Switch (Hand Switch) and AWT21A/B Board}
{SP:07D_ELEVATION UNIT (OPERATION PANEL&SWITCH)}
2. ELV21A board
{MC:9.8_ELV21A Board}
{SP:07C_ELEVATION UNIT MAIN BODY 2}
3. Exposure unit up-down drive motor (MJ1)
{MC:9.1_Exposure Unit Up-Down Drive Motor (MJ1)}
{SP:07B_ELEVATION UNIT MAIN BODY 1}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-110
MT-111
11.3
The Elevation Unit Does not Ascend/
Descend
The elevation unit does not ascend nor descend by pressing the exposure unit
elevation switch (ascent/descent).
Error-Related I/O Locations
Analysis Flow
START
Q1 Emergency stop switch (ESJ1/ESJ2) is pressed?
Y
N
Release the emergency stop switch (ESJ1/ESJ2).
Q2 Check the ELV21A Board fuses.
{MT:6.4_Checking the ELV21A Board Fuses}
Q3 Error recurs after the following board connectors and the relay connectors are reseated?
1. AWT21A board connector (CN1)
2. ELV21A board connectors (CN1/CN2/CN4/CN6/CN7/CN9)
3. Connectors (H-CH3/J-CN2/J-CN7/J-CN12)
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
N
Y
END
Replace the components in the following order.
1. AWT21A board (elevation switch)
{MC:9.15_Elevation Switch (Hand Switch) and AWT21A/B Board}
{SP:07D_ELEVATION UNIT (OPERATION PANEL&SWITCH)}
2. ELV21A board
{MC:9.8_ELV21A Board}
{SP:07C_ELEVATION UNIT MAIN BODY 2}
3. Exposure unit up-down drive motor (MJ1)
{MC:9.1_Exposure Unit Up-Down Drive Motor (MJ1)}
{SP:07B_ELEVATION UNIT MAIN BODY 1}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-111
MT-112
11.4
Motor-Driven Grip Handle Does not Ascend
The motor-driven grip handle does not ascend by pressing the motor-driven grip
handle elevation switch (ascent).
Error-Related I/O Locations
Analysis Flow
START
Q1 Is MSH6 installed normally?
1. The actuator is free from deformation.
2. Interval from the switch
3. Switch location
{MC:9.18_Grip Handle Elevation Upper-Limit Interlock Switch (MSH6)}
N
Y
Correct the actuator or replace MSH6.
Q2 Error recurs after the following board connectors and the relay connectors are reseated?
1. AWT21A board connector (CN1)
2. ELV21A board connectors (CN3/CN6/CN7)
3. Connectors (J-CN8/J-CN10/J-CN12)
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
N
Y
END
Replace the components in the following order.
1. AWT21A board (elevation switch)
{MC:9.15_Elevation Switch (Hand Switch) and AWT21A/B Board}
{SP:07D_ELEVATION UNIT (OPERATION PANEL&SWITCH)}
2. ELV21A board
{MC:9.8_ELV21A Board}
{SP:07C_ELEVATION UNIT MAIN BODY 2}
3. Motor-driven grip handle up-down drive motor (MJ2)
{MC:9.17_Motor-Driven Grip Handle Up-Down Drive Motor (MJ2)}
{SP:09A_EXPOSURE AID (GRIP HANDLE)/OPTION 1}
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-112
MT-113
11.5
Motor-Driven Grip Handle Does not
Descend
The motor-driven grip handle does not descend by pressing the motor-driven grip
handle elevation switch (descent).
Error-Related I/O Locations
Analysis Flow
START
Q1 Is MSH7 installed normally?
1. The actuator is free from deformation.
2. Interval from the switch
3. Switch location
{MC:9.19_Grip Handle Elevation Lower-Limit Interlock Switch (MSH7)}
N
Y
Correct the actuator or replace MSH7.
Q2 Is MSH8 installed normally?
1. Connection of the terminal is free from errors.
{MC:9.20_Grip Handle Collision Prevention Proximity Switch (MSH8)}
N
Y
Reconnect the terminal or replace the MSH8.
Q3 Error recurs after the following board connectors and the relay connectors are reseated?
1. AWT21A board connector (CN1)
2. ELV21A board connectors (CN3/CN6/CN7)
3. Connectors (J-CN8/J-CN10/J-CN12)
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
N
Y
END
Replace the components in the following order.
1. AWT21A board (elevation switch)
{MC:9.15_Elevation Switch (Hand Switch) and AWT21A/B Board}
{SP:07D_ELEVATION UNIT (OPERATION PANEL&SWITCH)}
2. ELV21A board
{MC:9.8_ELV21A Board}
{SP:07C_ELEVATION UNIT MAIN BODY 2}
3. Motor-driven grip handle up-down drive motor (MJ2)
{MC:9.17_Motor-Driven Grip Handle Up-Down Drive Motor (MJ2)}
{SP:09A_EXPOSURE AID (GRIP HANDLE)/OPTION 1}
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-113
MT-114
11.6
The Motor-Driven Grip Handle Does not
Ascend/Descend
The motor-driven grip handle does not ascend nor descend by pressing the motordriven grip handle elevation switch (ascent/descent).
Error-Related I/O Locations
Analysis Flow
START
Q1 Emergency stop switch (ESJ1/ESJ2) is pressed?
Y
N
Release the emergency stop switch (ESJ1/ESJ2).
Q2 Check the ELV21A board fuses.
{MT:6.4_Checking the ELV21A Board Fuses}
Q3 Error recurs after the following board connectors and the relay connectors are reseated?
1. AWT21A board connector (CN1)
2. ELV21A board connectors (CN1/CN3/CN4/CN6/CN7/CN9)
3. Connectors (H-CN3/J-CN2/J-CN10/J-CN12)
{SP:13_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
N
Y
END
Replace the components in the following order.
1. AWT21A board (elevation switch)
{MC:9.15_Elevation Switch (Hand Switch) and AWT21A/B Board}
{SP:07D_ELEVATION UNIT (OPERATION PANEL&SWITCH)}
2. ELV21A board
{MC:9.8_ELV21A Board}
{SP:07C_ELEVATION UNIT MAIN BODY 2}
3. Motor-driven grip handle up-down drive motor (MJ2)
{MC:9.17_Motor-Driven Grip Handle Up-Down Drive Motor (MJ2)}
{SP:09A_EXPOSURE AID (GRIP HANDLE)/OPTION 1}
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-114
MT-115
12. Reinstalling the Compact Flash Card
When an error occurs such that the machine does not boot up, the program of the
Compact Flash Card might have been damaged. Reinstall the Compact Flash Card in
this case, and check if the machine recovers.
Reinstallation
(6) Enter a space and “E:” after “.\INITIAL\APL_INITIAL.BAT”
NOTE
This procedure is for inputting the drive name of the Compact Flash Card.
Although the drive name is input as “E” in this example, the drive name for the
Card differs depending on the PC to be used. Confirm the drive name for the
Compact Flash Card before inputting.
(1) Remove the Compact Flash Card.
{MC:10.3_Compact Flash Card}
(2) Insert the Compact Flash Card that has been removed into the CF slot
of the PC.
(3) Format the Compact Flash Card.
(4) Insert the CD-ROM of the RU application into the CD-ROM drive of the
PC.
(5) Select “.\INITIAL\APL_INITIAL.BAT” from the FILE EXECUTION.
(7) Click the [EXECUTE] button.
Write into the Compact Flash Card starts.
REFERENCE
It takes approx. 6 minutes to write into the Compact Flash Card.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-115
MT-116
(8) Click the [EXIT] button after the completion of write into the Compact
Flash Card.
Backing Up the Data
Described below are the procedures for directly backing up the machine specific data
stored in the CL.
The data to be backed up include:
- LOG/MACHINE file folders in the 200.16.1.10 file folder
(9) Remove the Compact Flash Card from the PC.
(10) Mount the Compact Flash Card.
Reverse the removal procedures for reinstallation.
{MC:10.3_Compact Flash Card}
(11) Set the IP address.
NOTE
The IP address setting is initialized to the default setting after reinstallation of the
Compact Flash Card. Be sure to again set the IP address before staring up the
machine.
{IN:25.1_Setting the IP Address}
(12) Install the RU software.
{IN:25.4_Installing the RU Software}
(13) Restore the following data.
REFERENCE
The capacity of the data to be acquired sometimes exceeds 10 MB.
- CONFIGURATION
- INDIVIDUAL DATA (HD->RU)
{MU:4.14_RESTORE}
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-116
MT-117
(1) Press the [Windows] Flag Mark key on the CL keyboard to display the
Start menu of Windows.
(3) Open the [CR-IR364] file folder.
(2) Select [Run...] from the Start menu of Windows. When the dialog
opens, type [C:\Program Files\FUJIFILM\FCR] and click on the [OK]
button.
(4) Copy the [200.16.1.10] file folder into a recording medium.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-117
MT-118
BLANK PAGE
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-118
MT-119
BLANK PAGE
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MT-119
Control Sheet
Issue date
CR-IR 364 (Type U) Service Manual
Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of
Parts (MC)
012-201-09E
Revision number
Reason
04.15.2003
07.31.2003
11.30.2003
06.30.2004
00
01
02
03
New release (FM3976)
Revision (FM4055)
Revision (FM4147)
Revision (FM4357)
09.30.2004
04
Revision (FM4437)
11.30.2004
10.28.2005
07.15.2006
10.02.2006
05
06
07
08
Revision (FM4505)
Revision (FM4737)
Revision (FM4915)
Change of Corporate Name and
Corporate Logo (FM4977)
06.10.2008
09
Revision (FM5369)
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Pages affected
All pages
All pages
All pages
1-6, 14, 15, 15.1, 15.2, 21, 25, 26, 27,
32, 34-41, 45, 47, 48, 51-69, 72, 73, 77,
78, 80, 81, 83, 84, 86, 89, 93, 94, 99,
102-106, 125, 127, 129, 130, 133, 134.1,
134.2, 135, 138, 140, 147, 148, 148.1,
148.2, 149, 156-183
1, 18, 125, 126.1, 126.2, 160, 162,
165-167, 167.1, 167.2, 169
1, 2, 5-11, 13-15, 15.1-15.6
17, 19, 20, 105, 129
All pages
319-321
4, 5, 18, 32, 47, 49, 51, 52, 64, 65, 68,
82, 87, 90, 138, 139, 184, 207-209,
250-252, 258, 260-264, 267, 268, 270.1,
270.2, 278-285, 285.1-285.4, 286, 287,
289, 299, 306-310, 313, 315, 316, 318,
321, Appx MC 1-1-14
MC-1
1.
Precautions for Check,
Replacement, and Adjustment
- In this volume, descriptions are omitted regarding components that do not require
special attention or adjustment during their removal/reinstallation. For removal
procedures for such components, refer to the Parts List Volume.
- When performing check/replacement/adjustment procedures on the machine, the
following precautions should be observed.
WARNING
CAUTIONS
- When servicing the interior of the exposure unit, exercise care not to bend or
damage the SUS belts.
- When servicing the SUS belts and their belt pulleys within the exposure unit,
be sure to wear gloves. If they are touched with bare hands or soiled with
dust, dirt, or other foreign matter, be sure to wipe them clean with a cloth
dampened with dehydrated ethanol.
- Do not touch the guide rails with bare hands when servicing in the exposure
unit.
To avoid electric shock hazards, be sure to turn OFF the power circuit
breaker on the machine main body and the circuit breaker on the distribution
switchboard.
WARNING/CAUTION
Observe the warnings and cautions described in the "Safety Precautions".
CAUTIONS
- When servicing a board, be sure to wear a wristband to ground your body.
If your body is not grounded, static buildup on your body may damage
electronic components on the board.
- When servicing a board, do not apply force to the center of the board or bend
the board while holding both sides of the board. If the board is bent or force
is applied to its center, a crack may occur on a soldered connection, resulting
in a failure in its connection.
- When servicing a board, do not touch connector pins mounted on the board
with bare hands.
- Never remove the red-painted screws.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
INSTRUCTION
Some of the illustrations in this volume contain check/adjustment and half-punch
indicators as needed.
For removal and reinstallation, perform the procedures as instructed by such
indicators.
- Check/Adjustment indicator: Indicates that it is necessary to check or adjust the
installation location when the part or component
removed is to be reinstalled. This indicator is placed in
CHECK
the illustration that depicts the procedures for
removing/installing the parts or components.
When you see this indicator in an illustration, see
" Check/Adjustment Procedures" or " CHECK" in a
later section.
- Half-punch indicator:
Indicates that it is necessary to align the half-punches
when installing the parts or components. However,
it is not indicated for the half-punches for improving
ease of assembly or preventing erroneous assembly
procedures.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-1
MC-2
INSTRUCTIONS
- The yellow-painted screws require adjustments when components are reinstalled.
When reinstalling the components, follow the check/adjustment procedures.
- Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power cable and
additional protective ground wire connections and securing the parts with retaining
screws. To maintain safety, ensure that the parts and retaining screws removed
for servicing purposes are restored to states existing upon installation. After the
parts and retaining screws are restored to the above-mentioned states, follow the
procedures set forth in this service manual to verify that the retaining screws are
securely tightened to properly secure the parts.
INSTRUCTION
When installing the photo interrupter, securely retain it with latches of the interrupter. If
the latches are damaged or the photo interrupter cannot be securely retained with the
latches, the sensor will not work normally.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-2
MC-3
2.
3.
Table of Contents
Covers
3.
3.1
Covers
Exposure Unit Covers
MC-6
MC-6
3.2
Elevation Unit Covers
MC-10
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
Exposure Unit Front Cover
Exposure Unit Bottom Cover
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
3.2.6
3.2.7
3.2.8
3.2.9
3.2.10
3.2.11
3.2.12
3.2.13
3.3
4.
Exposure Unit
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
Emergency Stop Switch Cover
Upper Left-Hand Side Cover of
the Elevation Unit
Lower Left-Hand Side Cover of
the Elevation Unit
Middle Right-Hand Side Cover of
the Elevation Unit
Upper Right-Hand Side Cover of
the Elevation Unit
Lower Right-Hand Side Cover of
the Elevation Unit
Top Cover of the Elevation Unit
Lower Front Cover of the Elevation Unit
Lower Right Front Cover of the Elevation Unit
Upper Front Cover of the Elevation Unit
Upper Right Front Cover of the Elevation Unit
Upper Rear Cover of the Elevation Unit
Lower Rear Cover of the Elevation Unit
Controller Unit Covers
5.
IP
5.
IP
5.1 IP
5.1.1 Removing the IP
5.1.2 Reinstalling the IP
5.1.3 Unpacking the IP
5.1.4 Cleaning the IP
MC-56
MC-56
MC-56
MC-59
MC-62
MC-64
6.
Erasure Unit
6.
Erasure Unit
6.1 Erasure Unit
6.1.1 Removing the Erasure Unit
6.1.2 Reinstalling the Erasure Unit
6.1.3 Cleaning the Erasure Unit
6.2 Cable Connector (JCT21B-CN1)
6.3 Cable Connectors (JCT21A-CN1 and -CN2)
6.4 Thermal Switch (TSWA1)
MC-66
MC-66
MC-66
MC-68
MC-71
MC-72
MC-73
MC-75
7.
Scanner Unit
7.
Scanner Unit
7.1 Scanner Unit
7.1.1 Removing the Scanner Unit
7.1.2 Reinstalling the Scanner Unit
7.1.3 Replacement Procedures for
the Scanner Unit
7.1.4 Unpacking the Scanner Unit
MC-76
MC-76
MC-76
MC-78
MC-6
MC-9
MC-11
MC-11
MC-12
MC-13
MC-13
MC-14
MC-14
MC-15
MC-15
MC-16
MC-16
MC-17
MC-18
MC-18
4.
Exposure Unit
MC-19
4.1 Grid Support Assembly
MC-19
4.1.1 Grid Support Assembly
(for Units of “#20001 to #24999”)
MC-19
4.1.2 Grid Support Assembly
(for Units of "#25001 or later”)
MC-22
4.2 Grid Support, Grid Support Guide
(Resin-Made) and Guide Rail
MC-27
4.3 Constant Force Spring
MC-30
4.4 Grid Replacement Cover Lock Solenoid
(SOLH1)
MC-32
4.5 Patient Protection Descent Prevention
Interlock Switch (MSH2)
MC-33
4.6 Patient Protection Descent Prevention
Interlock Switch (MSH3)
MC-34
4.7 SND21B Board Assembly
MC-35
4.8 Grid Replacement Cover Lock Mechanism MC-37
4.9 Exposure Unit Front Cover Laser Safety
Interlock Switches (SH3 and SH4)
MC-41
4.10 Shock-Absorbing Rubber
MC-44
4.10.1 Replacing the Upper Shock Absorbing
Rubbers
MC-44
4.10.2 Replacing the Lower Shock Absorbing
Rubbers
MC-46
4.11 Replacing the Cables in the Exposure Unit MC-47
4.11.1 Replacing the Sensor and I/O Interface
Cable (136Y8815)
MC-47
4.11.2 Replacing the DC Power Cable (136Y8817) MC-51
4.11.3 Replacing the Motor Relay Cable
(136Y8818)
MC-54
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-82
MC-86
MC-3
MC-4
8.
Subscanning Unit
012-201-09E
8.
Subscanning Unit
MC-88
8.1 Subscanning Unit
MC-88
8.2 SUS Belts
MC-100
8.2.1 Right SUS Belt
MC-100
8.2.2 Left SUS Belt
MC-111
8.3 Flywheel
MC-122
8.3.1 Right Flywheel
MC-122
8.3.2 Left Flywheel
MC-124
8.4 Subscanning Motor (MZ1)
MC-129
8.5 Subscanning Electromagnetic Brake (MB1) MC-136
8.6 IP Movement Motor (MZ2)
MC-138
8.7 IP Movement Electromagnetic Brake (MB2) MC-140
8.8 Bucky Motor (MZ3)
MC-147
8.9 IP Drive Timing Belt
MC-148
8.9.1 IP Drive Timing Belt (A)
MC-149
8.9.2 IP Drive Timing Belt (B)
MC-155
8.9.3 IP Drive Timing Belt (C)
MC-160
8.9.4 IP Drive Timing Belt (D)
MC-166
8.9.5 IP Drive Timing Belt (E)
MC-171
8.9.6 IP Drive Timing Belt (F)
MC-174
8.9.7 Phase Adjustment of the IP Drive Timing
Belts
MC-177
8.10 Belt Pulley Assembly (Timing Belt (F) Idler) MC-180
8.11 Flexible Cable
MC-181
8.11.1 Right Flexible Cable
MC-181
8.11.2 Left Flexible Cable Assembly
MC-184
8.12 Correction Light Source Unit
MC-187
8.12.1 Correction Light Source Unit
MC-187
8.12.2 Photoconductive Material and
LIT21A Board
MC-188
8.13 IP Lower Stopper Mounting Bracket
MC-191
8.13.1 IP Lower Stopper Mounting Bracket
(Right)
MC-191
8.13.2 IP Lower Stopper Mounting Bracket (Left) MC-194
8.14 Internal Cooling Fan
MC-198
8.14.1 Internal Cooling Fan (FANH1)
MC-198
8.14.2 Internal Cooling Fan (FANH2)
MC-200
8.14.3 Internal Cooling Fan (FANH3)
MC-202
8.14.4 Internal Cooling Fans
(FANH4 and FANH5)
MC-203
8.15 PWC21A Board
MC-206
8.16 LDS21A/B Board and RLY21A/B Board
MC-207
9.
Elevation Unit
9.
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
Elevation Unit
Exposure Unit Up-Down Drive Motor (MJ1)
Isolation Transformer
Brake (Permanent Magnetic Type)
LED21C Board
Exposure Unit Elevation Upper-Limit
Interlock Switch (MSJ1)
9.6 Exposure Unit Elevation Lower Limit
Interlock Switch (MSJ2)
9.7 Exposure Unit Elevation Lower Limit
Interlock Switch (MSJ3)
9.8 ELV21A Board
9.9 Emergency Stop Switch (ESJ1)
9.10 Emergency Stop Switch (ESJ2)
9.11 Power Circuit Breaker (NFB)
9.12 Terminal Block (TB1)
9.13 Exposure Unit Up-Down Drive Motor
(MJ1) Relay Cable (with Resistor)
9.14 Operation Panel Assembly, LCD Panel
and LCN21A Board
9.15 Elevation Switch (Hand Switch) and
AWT21A/B Board
9.16 Motor-Driven Grip Handle (Hand Rail/
Elevation Unit)
9.17 Motor-Driven Grip Handle Up-Down
Drive Motor (MJ2)
9.18 Grip Handle Elevation Upper-Limit
Interlock Switch (MSH6)
9.19 Grip Handle Elevation Lower-Limit
Interlock Switch (MSH7)
9.20 Grip Handle Collision Prevention
Proximity Switch (MSH8)
9.21 Routing the External Connection Cables
9.21.1 Routing the External Connection Cables
(Operation Panel)
9.21.2 Routing the External Connection Cables
(Cable Box on the Rear of the
Exposure Unit)
9.21.3 Routing the External Connection Cable
(Potentiometer Cable)
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-210
MC-210
MC-215
MC-217
MC-219
MC-220
MC-221
MC-222
MC-223
MC-225
MC-226
MC-227
MC-229
MC-230
MC-231
MC-234
MC-236
MC-238
MC-241
MC-242
MC-243
MC-244
MC-244
MC-250
MC-257
MC-4
MC-5
10.
Controller Unit
10.
Controller Unit
10.1 Controller Unit Upper Section
10.2 Power Supply (Alpha 600/450)
10.3 Compact Flash Card
10.4 CFI21A Board
10.5 CPS21A Board
10.6 SND21A Board
10.7 PAT21A Board
10.8 ATX Board (Motherboard)
10.9 NFB21A Board
10.10 Controller Unit Cooling Fans
(FANK1 and FANK2)
10.11 TLB21A Board (Optional)
Replacing the Fuses
and Fuse Locations
11.
12.
Updating Software
Versions
12.
13.
Performing Delta Y
Calculations for
ification
13.
11.
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5
MC-259
MC-259
MC-260
MC-262
MC-263
MC-263
MC-264
MC-265
MC-266
MC-269
MC-271
MC-272
MC-273
MC-274
MC-275
MC-276
Updating Software Versions
MC-277
14.
Scanner Correction
MC-286
15.
Checking for Image
Problems
15.
Checking for Image Problems
MC-311
16.
Checking and Adjusting
the Format
16.
Checking and Adjusting the Format
16.1 Checking and Adjusting the Format
(Subscan Length)
16.2 Procedures for Checking and Adjusting
the Format (Subscan Start Point)
MC-313
17.
17.1
17.2
17.3
Jigs
List of Jigs
How to Use the Elevation Jig Cable
How to Use the Electromagnetic Brake
Releasing Jig
MC-319
MC-319
MC-322
18.
18.1
18.2
18.3
18.4
Tools
Standard Tools
Special Tools and Measuring Instruments
Special Consumables
Semi-Standard Tools
MC-328
MC-328
MC-330
MC-331
MC-331
18.
Tools
012-201-09E
Replacement of the ATX Board
(Motherboard) of FB2M with the
Board of FB5UM
Appx MC1-1
MC-285.2
Scanner Correction
Jigs
Appendix 1.
MC-282
MC-283
MC-285.1
14.
17.
Replacement of
the ATX Board
(Motherboard) of
FB2M with the
Board of FB5UM
MC-270
MC-270.1
Replacing the Fuses and
Fuse Locations
PAT21A Board Fuses
SND21A Board Fuses
ELV21A Board Fuses
SND21B Board Fuses
ERS21A/B Board Fuses
Performing Delta Y Calculations for
Verification
13.1 Procedures of Delta Y Calculations
13.2 Checking the Delta Y Calculation Result
13.3 Countermeasures When
“Data NG Pixels” Appears
Appendix 1.
MC-313
MC-316
MC-325
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-5
MC-6
3.
Covers
3.1
Exposure Unit Covers
{SP:INDEX}
3.1.1
Exposure Unit Front Cover
Removal Procedures
CAUTIONS
- When servicing the interior of the exposure unit, exercise care not to bend or
damage the SUS belts.
- When servicing the SUS belts and their belt pulleys within the exposure unit,
be sure to wear gloves.
If they are accidentally touched with bare hands or soiled with dust, dirt, or
other foreign matters, be sure to wipe them clean with a cloth dampened with
dehydrated ethanol.
- Do not touch the guide rails with bare hands when servicing in the exposure
unit.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-6
MC-7
(1) Remove the grid.
{Instruction Manual}
(2) Remove the exposure unit front cover.
INSTRUCTIONS
- When the exposure unit front cover is to be removed, be sure to disconnect the
cable connector (H-CN23). If the exposure unit front cover is to be removed
without disconnecting the cable connector (H-CN23), the connector might get
damaged or the cable might be broken.
- When the exposure unit front cover is to be removed, do not bring it into
contact with the shaft (door sensing) of the grid replacement cover interlock
switches (MSH1 and MSH12).
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-7
MC-8
Removal Procedures
INSTRUCTION
Check to make sure that the ground cable is surely connected within the exposure unit
before putting on the exposure unit top cover.
(1) Reinstall the exposure unit front cover.
NOTES
- When reinstalling the exposure unit front cover, exercise care not to have the
cable caught in.
- When reinstalling the exposure unit front cover, always connect the cable
connector (H-CN23). Otherwise, the exposure unit will not lower even if the
exposure unit elevation switch (descent) switch is turned ON.
- When the exposure unit front cover is to be reinstalled, do not bring it into
contact with the shaft (door sensing) of the grid replacement cover interlock
switches (MSH1 and MSH12).
{CHECK 1}
Check/Adjustment Procedures
Check to make sure that there is no gap between the front cover and the rear cover of
the exposure unit. If a gap is present, the external light might enter the exposure unit,
resulting in image problems.
CHECK 1
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-8
MC-9
3.1.2
Exposure Unit Bottom Cover
{SP:INDEX}
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the exposure unit front cover.
{MC:3.1.1_Exposure Unit Front Cover}
(2) Remove the exposure unit bottom cover.
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the exposure unit bottom cover.
INSTRUCTION
When the exposure unit bottom cover is to be reinstalled, do not use a kind of
screws other than that specified in the manual (TP4x8). When another kind of
screw (such as BR4x8) is used by mistake, the following failure occurs.
- Even if the exposure unit elevation switch (descent) is turned ON and the
patient protection descent prevention interlock switch cover is pressed while
the exposure unit is lowering, the electric circuit of the patient protection
descent prevention interlock switches (MSH2 and MSH3) do not close (turn
ON), and as a result the exposure unit keeps going down.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-9
MC-10
3.2
Elevation Unit Covers
Location of Covers
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
No.
Name
Refer to
1
Emergency stop switch cover
{MC:3.2.1_Emergency Stop Switch
Cover}
2
Upper left-hand side cover of
elevation unit
{MC:3.2.2_Upper Left-Hand Side
Cover of the Elevation Unit}
3
Lower left-hand side cover of
elevation unit
{MC:3.2.3_Lower Left-Hand Side
Cover of the Elevation Unit}
4
Middle right-hand side cover of
elevation unit
{MC:3.2.4_Middle Right-Hand Side
Cover of the Elevation Unit}
5
Upper right-hand side cover of
elevation unit
{MC:3.2.5_Upper Right-Hand Side
Cover of the Elevation Unit}
6
Lower right-hand side cover of
elevation unit
{MC:3.2.6_Lower Right-Hand Side
Cover of the Elevation Unit}
7
Top cover of elevation unit
{MC:3.2.7_Top Cover of the
Elevation Unit}
8
Lower front cover of elevation unit
{MC:3.2.8_Lower Front Cover of the
Elevation Unit}
9
Lower right front cover of elevation
unit
{MC:3.2.9_Lower Right Front Cover
of the Elevation Unit}
10
Upper front cover of elevation unit
{MC:3.2.10_Upper Front Cover of the
Elevation Unit}
11
Upper right front cover of elevation
unit
{MC:3.2.11_Upper Right Front Cover
of the Elevation Unit}
12
Upper rear cover of elevation unit
{MC:3.2.12_Upper Rear Cover of the
Elevation Unit}
13
Lower rear cover of elevation unit
{MC:3.2.13_Lower Rear Cover of the
Elevation Unit}
14
Cable protective cover (only
overseas)
{MC:3.2.3_Lower Left-Hand Side
Cover of the Elevation Unit}
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-10
MC-11
3.2.1
Emergency Stop Switch Cover
3.2.2
Upper Left-Hand Side Cover of the Elevation Unit
{SP:INDEX}
{SP:INDEX}
Removal Procedures
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the emergency stop switch cover.
(1) Remove the emergency stop switch cover.
{MC:3.2.1_Emergency Stop Switch Cover}
(2) Remove the upper left-hand side cover of the elevation unit.
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the emergency stop switch cover.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the upper left-hand side cover of the elevation unit.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-11
MC-12
3.2.3
Lower Left-Hand Side Cover of the Elevation Unit
{SP:INDEX}
NOTE
A machine for use outside Japan is equipped with the cable protective cover. Remove
the cable protective cover before removing the lower left-hand side cover of the
elevation unit.
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the emergency stop switch cover.
{MC:3.2.1_Emergency Stop Switch Cover}
(2) Remove the lower left-hand side cover of the elevation unit.
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the lower left-hand side cover of the elevation unit.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-12
MC-13
3.2.4
Middle Right-Hand Side Cover of the Elevation Unit
{SP:INDEX}
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the middle right-hand side cover of the elevation unit.
3.2.5
Upper Right-Hand Side Cover of the Elevation Unit
Removal Procedures
{SP:INDEX}
(1) Remove the middle right-hand side cover of the elevation unit.
{MC:3.2.4_Middle Right-Hand Side Cover of the Elevation Unit}
(2) Remove the upper right-hand side cover of the elevation unit.
REFERENCE
If the motor-driven grip handle is not installed, the motor-driven grip handle
descent step (#1 below) need not be performed.
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the middle right-hand side cover of the elevation unit.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the right-hand side cover of the elevation unit.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-13
MC-14
3.2.6
Lower Right-Hand Side Cover of the Elevation Unit
3.2.7
Top Cover of the Elevation Unit
{SP:INDEX}
{SP:INDEX}
Removal Procedures
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the middle right-hand side cover of the elevation unit.
{MC:3.2.4_Middle Right-Hand Side Cover of the Elevation Unit}
(2) Remove the lower right-hand side cover of the elevation unit.
(1) Remove the upper left-hand side cover of the elevation unit.
{MC:3.2.2_Upper Left-Hand Side Cover of the Elevation Unit}
(2) Remove the top cover of the elevation unit.
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the top cover of the elevation unit.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the lower right-hand side cover of the elevation unit.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-14
MC-15
3.2.8
Lower Front Cover of the Elevation Unit
3.2.9
Lower Right Front Cover of the Elevation Unit
{SP:INDEX}
{SP:INDEX}
Removal Procedures
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the lower front cover of the elevation unit.
(1) Remove the lower right-hand side cover of the elevation unit.
{MC:3.2.6_Lower Right-Hand Side Cover of the Elevation Unit}
(2) Remove the lower front cover of the elevation unit.
{MC:3.2.8_Lower Front Cover of the Elevation Unit}
(3) Remove the lower right front cover of the elevation unit.
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the lower front cover of the elevation unit.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the lower right front cover of the elevation unit.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-15
MC-16
3.2.10
Upper Front Cover of the Elevation Unit
3.2.11
Upper Right Front Cover of the Elevation Unit
{SP:INDEX}
{SP:INDEX}
Removal Procedures
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the top cover of the elevation unit.
{MC:3.2.7_Top Cover of the Elevation Unit}
(2) Remove the lower front cover of the elevation unit.
{MC:3.2.8_Lower Front Cover of the Elevation Unit}
(1) Remove the lower right-hand side cover of the elevation unit.
{MC:3.2.6_Lower Right-Hand Side Cover of the Elevation Unit}
(2) Remove the upper front cover of the elevation unit.
{MC:3.2.10_Upper Front Cover of the Elevation Unit}
(3) Remove the upper front cover of the elevation unit.
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the the upper front cover of the elevation unit.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-16
MC-17
(3) Remove the upper right front cover of the elevation unit.
3.2.12
Upper Rear Cover of the Elevation Unit
{SP:INDEX}
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the upper rear cover of the elevation unit.
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the upper rear cover of the elevation unit.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the upper right front cover of the elevation unit.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-17
MC-18
3.2.13
Lower Rear Cover of the Elevation Unit
3.3
Controller Unit Covers
{SP:INDEX}
{SP:INDEX}
Removal Procedures
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the lower rear cover of the elevation unit.
(1) Remove the controller unit covers.
-
Left-hand side cover of controller unit
Front cover of controller unit
Inner front cover of controller unit
Rear cover of controller unit
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the controller unit covers.
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the lower rear cover of the elevation unit.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
012-201-09E
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE
Check to make sure that the ground cable is surely connected within the
controller unit before putting on the controller unit cover.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-18
MC-19
4.
Exposure Unit
4.1
(2) Remove the cover on the top of the grid support assembly.
Grid Support Assembly
{SP:INDEX}
NOTE
The procedures of removing/reinstalling the grid support assembly for the “machines
having serial numbers of #20001 to #24999” differ from the procedures for the
“machines having serial numbers of #25001 and those later than #25001”. Refer to
the applicable procedures when removing/reinstalling the grid support assembly.
4.1.1
Grid Support Assembly (for Units of “#20001 to
#24999”)
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the exposure unit front cover.
{MC:3.1.1_Exposure Unit Front Cover}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-19
MC-20
(3) Remove the grid support assembly.
CAUTION
Do not touch the guide rails with bare hands when servicing in the exposure
unit.
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Retain the upper side of the grid support assembly.
Push the bracket (A portion) of the grid support assembly against the machine frame
for fixing.
INSTRUCTION
When the grid support assembly is to be removed, be sure to disconnect the cable
connector (SZ6). If the grid support assembly is to be removed without disconnecting
the cable connector (SZ6), the connector might get damaged or the cable might be
broken.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-20
MC-21
(2) Retain the lower side of the grid support assembly, and connect the
cable connector (SZ6).
(3) Put the cover on the upper portion of grid support assembly.
Be sure to fasten the FG cable together.
INSTRUCTION
To attach the FG cable, check the orientation of the FG cable terminal, and bring
it into the bracket under the bracket.
(4) Reinstall the exposure unit front cover.
{MC:3.1.1_Exposure Unit Front Cover}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-21
MC-22
4.1.2
Grid Support Assembly (for Units of "#25001 or later”)
(2) Remove the cover on the top of the grid support assembly.
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the exposure unit front cover.
{MC:3.1.1_Exposure Unit Front Cover}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-22
MC-23
(3) Draw out the shield plates from the right- and left-hand side faces of
the grid support assembly.
(4) Remove the shield plate retaining bracket under the grid support
assembly.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
(5) Remove the grid support assembly.
INSTRUCTION
When the grid support assembly is to be removed, be sure to disconnect the
cable connector (SZ6). If the grid support assembly is to be removed without
disconnecting the cable connector (SZ6), the connector might get damaged or
the cable might be broken.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-23
MC-24
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Retain the upper side of the grid support assembly.
(2) Retain the lower side of the grid support assembly, and connect the
cable connector (SZ6).
Push the bracket (A portion) of the grid support assembly against the machine frame
for fixing.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-24
MC-25
(3) Retain the shield plate under the grid support assembly with the
bracket.
(4) Insert the shield plates on the right- and left-hand side faces of the
grid support assembly into the frames.
CAUTION
Do not forcibly press the screwdriver against the bracket when retaining the
shield plate under the grid support assembly with the bracket. Otherwise, the
scanner unit might get damaged.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-25
MC-26
(5) Check to make sure that a gap remains between the shield plate of the
grid support assembly, which has been inserted into the frame, and
the flexible cable retaining bracket.
(6) Put the cover on the upper portion of grid support assembly.
INSTRUCTION
If the shield plate of the grid support assembly and the flexible cable retaining
bracket are in contact, draw out the shield plate of the grid support assembly, and
leave a gap between the shield plate of the grid support assembly and the flexible
cable retaining bracket.
(7) Reinstall the exposure unit front cover.
{MC:3.1.1_Exposure Unit Front Cover}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-26
MC-27
4.2
Grid Support, Grid Support Guide (ResinMade) and Guide Rail
{SP:INDEX}
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the exposure unit front cover.
{MC:3.1.1_Exposure Unit Front Cover}
(2) Retain the grid support and the grid support assembly with cable ties.
NOTE
(3) Remove the screws which retain the constant force spring while
holding the spring by the finger.
CAUTION
The constant force spring will roll up by approx. 3 cm by its tension after the
screws which retain the constant force spring are removed. Be sure to remove
the screws while holding the constant force spring by the finger when the
screws which retain the constant force spring are to be removed. Otherwise,
you might cut your finger on the edge of the constant force spring when the
spring rolls up.
{CHECK 1}
The grid support will drop after the screws which retain the two constant force
springs are removed. Use the cable ties before removing the screws which retain
the two constant force springs, to prevent the grid support from dropping.
(4) Cut the cable ties, and move the grid support to the lowermost point.
Support the grid support on the hand.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-27
MC-28
(5) Remove the grid support.
(7) Remove the grid support assembly and place it on a table as shown
below.
{MC:4.1_Grid Support Assembly}
INSTRUCTION
Do not lean the grid support assembly against something when placing the grid
support assembly. Otherwise, the assembly might deform.
(8) Remove the right and left guide rails and the resin-made grid support
guide.
(6) Remove the resin-made grid support guide attached to the left-hand of
the grid support.
{CHECK 3}
{CHECK 2}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-28
MC-29
Reinstallationl Procedures
(1) Reinstall the grid support guide, the guide rails and the grid support.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
CHECK 3
Push the guide rails in the directions shown below in the figure to retain the center of
the right and left guide rails with the screws.
(2) Check to make sure that the grid support smoothly works after the
reinstallation.
Check/Adjustment Procedures
CHECK 1
Manually lower the grid support to its lowermost point after the constant force spring is
attached, to check that the spring does not twist.
If the spring twists, loosen the screw (BR3x6) which retains the constant force spring,
and tighten it again.
CHECK 2
Put the resin-made grid support guide with its notch facing inward. If put in an
erroneous orientation, the grid support may not smoothly work.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-29
MC-30
4.3
Constant Force Spring
{SP:INDEX}
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the grid support assembly.
{MC:4.1_Grid Support Assembly}
(2) Remove the constant force spring while holding it by the finger.
CAUTION
The constant force spring will roll up by approx. 3 cm by its tension after the
screws which retain the constant force spring are removed. Be sure to remove
the screws while holding the constant force spring by the finger when the
screws which retain the constant force spring are to be removed. Otherwise,
you might cut your finger on the edge of the constant force spring when the
spring rolls up.
NOTE
Do not stretch the constant force spring over 1,000 mm. The spring might get
damaged.
{CHECK 1}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-30
MC-31
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the constant force spring.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
Check/Adjustment Procedures
CHECK 1
Manually lower the grid support to its lowermost point after the constant force spring is
attached, to check that the spring does not twist.
If the spring twists, once lower the grid support to its lowermost point, loosen the
screw (BR3x6) which retains the constant force spring, and tighten it again.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-31
MC-32
4.4
Grid Replacement Cover Lock Solenoid
(SOLH1)
{SP:INDEX}
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the exposure unit front cover.
{MC:3.1.1_Exposure Unit Front Cover}
(2) Remove the grid replacement cover lock solenoid (SOLH1) assembly.
{CHECK 1}
Exploded View
For the exploded view of the grid replacement cover lock solenoid (SOLH1) assembly,
see the Service Parts List.
{SP:05C_BUCKY 3}
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the the grid replacement cover lock solenoid (SOLH1)
assembly.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
Check/Adjustment Procedures
CHECK 1
Align the frame (A portion) of the subscanning unit with the bracket end surface of
the grid replacement cover lock solenoid (SOLH1) assembly when reinstalling the
solenoid (SOLH1) assembly.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-32
MC-33
4.5
Patient Protection Descent Prevention
Interlock Switch (MSH2)
{SP:INDEX}
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the exposure unit front cover.
{MC:3.1.1_Exposure Unit Front Cover}
(2) Remove the patient protection descent prevention interlock switch
(MSH2).
{CHECK 1}
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the patient protection descent prevention interlock switch
(MSH2).
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
(2) Check the operation of the patient protection descent prevention
interlock switch (MSH2).
{IN:33.3_Checking the Patient Protection Descent Prevention Interlock
Switches (MSH2 and MSH3)}
Check/Adjustment Procedures
CHECK 1
- Check to make sure that the cable terminal is correctly connected.
- Check that the FAST-ON terminal is inserted all the way in.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-33
MC-34
4.6
Patient Protection Descent Prevention
Interlock Switch (MSH3)
{SP:INDEX}
Removal Procedures
Check/Adjustment Procedures
CHECK 1
- Check to make sure that the cable terminal is correctly connected.
- Check that the FAST-ON terminal is inserted all the way in.
(1) Remove the exposure unit front cover.
{MC:3.1.1_Exposure Unit Front Cover}
(2) Remove the patient protection descent prevention interlock switch
(MSH3).
{CHECK 1}
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the patient protection descent prevention interlock switch
(MSH3).
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
(2) Check the operation of the patient protection descent prevention
interlock switch (MSH3).
{IN:33.3_Checking the Patient Protection Descent Prevention Interlock
Switches (MSH2 and MSH3)}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-34
MC-35
4.7
SND21B Board Assembly
{SP:INDEX}
CAUTIONS
- When servicing a board, be sure to wear a wristband to ground your body.
If your body is not grounded, static buildup on your body may damage
electronic components on the board.
- Be sure to manually support the erasure unit/scanner unit when moving the
erasure unit/scanner unit by the electromagnetic brake releasing jig after the
SND21B board is removed. Otherwise, the erasure unit/scanner unit might
rapidly drop and get damaged.
(7) Remove the board protective sheet.
INSTRUCTION
In putting over the board protective sheet, exercise care not to bring the board
protective sheet into contact with the cable of the internal cooling fan (FANH3) to
have the cable connector disconnected.
Removal Procedures
REFERENCE
When the machine is terminated in error and the HEAD-MNT mode cannot be set
in the M-Utility, use the electromagnetic brake releasing jig to move the scanner unit
upward by approx. 10 cm from under the exposure unit.
(1) Turn ON the power of the CL.
(2) Turn ON the power of the RU.
Power ON in the following order.
- Power circuit breaker of the machine main body
- Start switch on the operation panel
(8) Remove the screws which retain the SND21B board assembly.
REFERENCE
Two of the screws which retain the SND21B board are located on the rear of the
exposure unit.
(3) With the MUTL, select the HEAD-MNT mode.
{MU:4.4 [2-1]_Termination Mode Setting}
(4) Turn OFF the power of RU.
Power OFF in the following order.
- "Shutdown" button on the operation panel
- Power circuit breaker of the machine main body
(5) Remove the grid support assembly.
{MC:4.1_Grid Support Assembly}
(6) Remove the exposure unit bottom cover.
{MC:3.1.2_Exposure Unit Bottom Cover}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-35
MC-36
(9) Remove the SND21B board assembly.
INSTRUCTION
Exercise care not to have the cable caught when reinstalling the SND21B board.
Exploded View
For the exploded view of the SND21B board assembly, see the Service Parts List.
{SP:06C_EXPOSURE UNIT FRAME/WIRING 3}
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the SND21B board assembly.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-36
MC-37
4.8
Grid Replacement Cover Lock Mechanism
{SP:INDEX}
The grid replacement cover opens/closes when the grid replacement cover lock
mechanism activates. The grid replacement cover lock mechanism works as shown
below when the grid replacement cover is opened and closed.
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the exposure unit front cover.
{MC:3.1.1_Exposure Unit Front Cover}
(2) Remove the plates and guides which retain the grid replacement cover
lock mechanism.
NOTE
Align the protrusion of the guide with the opening of the plate when putting on the
guide.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-37
MC-38
(3) Remove the resin roller assembly and remove the stopper.
NOTE
(4) Remove the arm assembly and the bracket from the exposure unit
front cover.
Do not bend the A portion (shown in the figure) of the stopper when removing/
reinstalling the stopper.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-38
MC-39
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the grid replacement cover lock mechanism.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
(2) Check to make sure that the grid replacement cover lock mechanism
normally works.
2-1 Slide the stopper to the right-hand, and unlock the grid replacement cover.
Check to make sure that the stopper and the leaf spring are unlocked.
INSTRUCTION
The stopper (claw) of the grid replacement cover lock mechanism is liable to
deform. Check to make sure that the stopper (claw) has not deformed before
reinstalling the grid replacement cover lock mechanism. If the stopper (claw) has
deformed, the grid replacement cover cannot be closed (locked).
\
2-2 Push the leaf spring from upward while the stopper and the leaf spring are
unlocked. Check to make sure that the stopper slides to the left by the tension
of the tension coil spring, and the stopper and the leaf spring are locked.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-39
MC-40
2-3 Close (lock) the grid replacement cover.
Check to make sure that the grid replacement cover will not open by pushing
up the latch of the cover.
INSTRUCTION
Make sure that the stopper and the leaf spring are unlocked before closing the
grid replacement cover. Otherwise, the latch of the cover comes into contact
with the stopper (claw) of the grid replacement cover lock mechanism, causing
the stopper (claw) to deform. If the stopper (claw) has deformed, the grid
replacement cover cannot be closed (locked).
(3) Reinstall the exposure unit front cover.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
{MC:3.1.1_Exposure Unit Front Cover}
(4) Turn ON the power of the RU.
Power ON in the following order.
- Power circuit breaker of the machine main body
- Start switch on the operation panel
(5) Push the [Grid replacement] button on the operation panel. Make sure
that the replacement cover opens (unlocks).
(6) Close the grid replacement cover.
Check to make sure that the grid replacement cover will not open by pushing up the
latches of the cover.
2-4 Check to make sure that the grid replacement cover is opened (unlocked) when
the arm is manually pressed downward from the exposure unit front cover.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-40
MC-41
4.9
Exposure Unit Front Cover Laser Safety
Interlock Switches (SH3 and SH4)
{SP:INDEX}
Removal Procedures
REFERENCE
When the machine is terminated in error and the HEAD-MNT mode cannot be set in
the M-Utility, use the solenoid brake releasing jig to move the scanner unit upward by
approx. 10 cm from under the exposure unit.
(1) Turn ON the power of the CL.
(6) Remove the exposure unit front cover laser interlock switch (SH3)
located under the board protective sheet.
NOTE
If the Hitachi’s photo-timer (ion chamber AID), COMET's photo-timer (3ch),
Siemens’ photo-timer (ion chamber 3ch) or Philips’ photo-timer (ion chamber 3ch)
is used, the shapes of the following parts and the locations of the mounting holes
are different from those shown in the figure.
- Counter plate
- Leaf spring
- Mounting hole locations (front)
{CHECK 1}
(2) Turn ON the power of the RU.
Power ON in the following order.
- Power circuit breaker of the machine main body
- Start switch on the operation panel
(3) With the MUTL, select the HEAD-MNT mode.
{MU:4.4 [2-1]_Termination Mode Setting}
(4) Turn OFF the power of RU.
Power OFF in the following order.
- "Shutdown" button on the operation panel
- Power circuit breaker of the machine main body
(5) Remove the grid support assembly.
{MC:4.1_Grid Support Assembly}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-41
MC-42
(7) Remove the exposure unit front cover laser interlock switch (SH4)
located under the board protective sheet.
NOTE
If the Hitachi’s photo-timer (ion chamber AID), COMET's photo-timer (3ch),
Siemens’ photo-timer (ion chamber 3ch) or Philips’ photo-timer (ion chamber 3ch)
is used, the shapes of the following parts and the locations of the mounting holes
are different from those shown in the figure.
- Counter plate
- Leaf spring
- Mounting hole locations (front)
{CHECK 1}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the exposure unit front cover laser safety interlock switches
(SH3 and SH4).
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
(2) Check the operation of the exposure unit front cover laser safety
interlock switches (SH3 and SH4).
{IN:33.1_Checking the Exposure Unit Front Cover Laser Safety Interlock
Switches (SH3 and SH4) during Bootup}
INSTRUCTION
Use the two front screw holes out of a total of four on the frame to install the
exposure unit front cover laser safety interlock switches (SH3 and SH4) if the
machine is equipped with a photo-timer of the following types. If the two inner
screw holes are used, the sensor will not work normally.
- Hitachi’s photo-timer (ion chamber AID)
- COMET's photo-timer (3ch)
- Siemens’ photo-timer (ion chamber 3ch)
- Philips’ photo-timer (ion chamber 3ch)
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-42
MC-43
Check/Adjustment Procedures
CHECK 1
- Check that the terminals are in the correct mounting positions.
- Check that the FAST-ON terminal is inserted all the way in.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-43
MC-44
4.10
Shock-Absorbing Rubber
4.10.1
Replacing the Upper Shock Absorbing Rubbers
{SP:INDEX}
INSTRUCTION
Always replace the upper shock absorbing rubbers as a pair.
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the grid support assembly.
{MC:4.1_Grid Support Assembly}
(2) Remove the screws (BQ6x12) which retain the subscanning unit on
the upper shock absorbing rubbers while supporting the subscanning
unit by the hand.
CAUTION
If the two screws (BQ6x12) which retain the subscanning unit are removed,
the subscanning unit is supported only by the lower shock absorbing rubbers.
Accordingly, be sure to support the subscanning unit by the hand when
removing the two screws (BQ6x12).
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-44
MC-45
(3) Tilt the subscanning unit forward of the machine, and remove the
shock absorbing rubbers.
(4) Replace the upper shock absorbing rubbers.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
INSTRUCTION
Exercise care to apply appropriate torque when retightening the screws (BQ6x12)
to retain the upper shock absorbing rubbers. The appropriate retightening torque
value is 150N•cm.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-45
MC-46
4.10.2
Replacing the Lower Shock Absorbing Rubbers
{SP:INDEX}
INSTRUCTION
Always replace the lower shock absorbing rubbers as a pair.
Preparatory Procedures
(1) Check that the shape of the tip of the Allen wrench is of a ball point
type.
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the subscanning unit.
{MC:8.1_Subscanning Unit}
(2) Remove the lower shock absorbing rubbers.
NOTE
Always use the ball point of the Allen wrench to access the screws (Q6x20) which
retain the lower shock absorbing rubbers.
If an Allen wrench of a ball point type is not available, remove the right and left
IP lower stopper mounting brackets before removing the subscanning unit in the
procedure (1).
{MC:8.13.1_IP Lower Stopper Mounting Bracket (Right)}
{MC:8.13.2_IP Lower Stopper Mounting Bracket (Left)}
Shape of the Allen wrench
REFERENCE
Use the Allen wrench while tilted when the screws which retain the lower shock
absorbing rubbers are to be accessed without removing the right and left IP lower
stopper mounting brackets. Use the ball point when tilting the Allen wrench for
use. If the wrench is used tilted on the side without the ball point, the screw holes
might get damaged.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
(3) Replace the lower shock absorbing rubbers.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-46
MC-47
4.11
4.11.1
Replacing the Cables in the Exposure Unit
Replacing the Sensor and I/O Interface Cable
(136Y8815)
{SP:INDEX}
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the subscanning unit.
{MC:8.1_Subscanning Unit}
(2) Disconnect the cable connectors (H-CN1 and H-CN2) from the rear of
the exposure unit.
General Cable Diagram
REFERENCE
Connect the sensor and I/O interface cable from the A portion shown in the figure.
Refer to the reinstallation procedures for details.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-47
MC-48
(3) Remove the exposure unit rear frame assembly.
(5) Disconnect the terminals (COM and NC) from the grip handle collision
prevention proximity switch (MSH8) on the rear of the exposure unit.
(6) Disconnect the sensor and I/O interface cable.
Sensor and
I/O interface cable
(4) Remove the cover from rear of the exposure unit.
#1 [Remove]/
#3 [Tighten]
BR3x8
#2
[Disconnect]
Connector
(H-CN23)
FRAH3460.EPS
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-48
MC-49
Reinstallation Procedures
(3) Connect the cable connectors (LDS21A/B-CN2 and H-CN3).
(1) Position the sensor and I/O interface cable.
Position the cable tie to serve as the reference as shown in the figure.
AL-7
DETAIL A
#2
[Tighten]
BR4x8
#2
[Connect]
CN2
AL-10
NK-N4
#1
[Tighten]
BR4x8
A
Reference
cable tie
AL-9
AL-8
#3
[Connect]
H-CN3
#3
[Tighten]
BR4x8
#1
[Tighten]
BR4x8 (x9)
FRAH3461.EPS
FRAH3463.EPS
(2) Route the cable connector (H-CN23) and connect it to the bracket.
DETAIL A
(4) Retain the H-CN24 and H-CN26 cables on the frame with nylon clamps.
REFERENCE
Again fix the cable tie which is cut in the procedure #1 after the H-CN24 and
H-CN26 cables are adjusted in length.
#2 [Remove]/
#4 [Tighten]
BR3x6
DETAIL A
Bracket
A
#1
[Insert]
Cable
#3
[Adjust]
Cable
#3
[Connect]
Connector
(H-CN23)
FRAH3462.EPS
#2
[Attach] NK-6N
120 mm
#1 [Cut]/
#5 [Fasten]
Cable tie
A
H-CN24
H-CN26
#4
[Tighten]
BR4x8 (x2)
FRAH3464.EPS
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-49
MC-50
(5) Retain the H-CN31 cable on the frame with the nylon clamps.
DETAIL A
#1
[Retain]
BR4x8 (x4)
A
NK-4N
FRAH3465.EPS
(6) Pass the terminals (COM and NC) of the grip handle collision
prevention proximity switch (MSH8) through the frame, and fix them
to the grip handle collision prevention proximity switch (MSH8) on the
rear of the exposure unit.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-50
MC-51
4.11.2
Replacing the DC Power Cable (136Y8817)
{SP:INDEX}
General Cable Diagram
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the cable retaining auxiliary plate and the cable guard
bracket.
DETAIL A
REFERENCE
Connect the DC power cable from the A portion shown in the figure. Refer to the
reinstallation procedures for details.
Auxiliary plate of
cable retainer
#1
[Remove]
BR4x8 (x2)
B
DETAIL B
Cable guard
bracket
A
#2
[Remove]
BR4x8 (x2)
FRAH3468.EPS
(2) Disconnect the DC power cable.
#1
[Disconnect]
DC power
cable
FRAH3469.EPS
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-51
MC-52
Reinstallation Procedures
(3) Connect the cable connector (RLY21A/B-CN4).
(1) Position the DC power cable and retain it with the aluminum clamp.
DETAIL A
DETAIL A
The cable tie should align in height
with the corner of the bracket
A
Reference
cable tie
A
#1
[Tighten]
BR4x8
AL-10
#1
[Tighten]
BR4x8 (x4)
#2
[Connect]
Connector (CN2)
FRAH3472.EPS
(4) Mount the cable retaining auxiliary plate.
NOTE
DC power cable
FRAH3470.EPS
(2) Connect the cable connectors (H-CN1 and H-CN2) to the rear cover.
Do not retain the PWC21A-CN21 and -CN22 cables with the cable retaining
auxiliary plate. If retained, the connector cannot be connected to the PWC21A
board.
DETAIL A
DETAIL A
H-CN2
PWC21A-CN1
#2
[Connect]
Connector x2
Do not retain with
the auxiliary plate.
H-CN1
Auxiliary
plate
#1
[Tighten]
BR4x8 (x3)
A
#1
[Tighten]
BR4x8 (x2)
A
AL-8
PWC21A-CN22
PWC21A-CN21
FRAH3471.EPS
FRAH3473.EPS
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-52
MC-53
(5) Accommodate the excess of the DC power cable, and retain the cable
with the cable ties.
DETAIL A
70-80mm
A
#1
[Fasten]
Cable tie
#2
[Fasten]
Cable tie
FRAH3474.EPS
(6) Reinstall the cable guard bracket.
DETAIL A
A
Bracket
#1
[Tighten]
BR4x8 (x2)
FRAH3475.EPS
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-53
MC-54
4.11.3
Replacing the Motor Relay Cable (136Y8818)
{SP:INDEX}
Removal Procedures
(1) Cut the cable tie and remove the cable retaining auxiliary plate.
General Cable Diagram
DETAIL A
REFERENCE
#1
[Cut]
Cable tie
Fix the part between the A and B portions (see the figure) by the nylon clamps when
connecting the motor relay cable. Refer to the reinstallation procedures for details.
Auxiliary
plate
A
#2
[Remove]
BR4x8 (x2)
FRAH3477.EPS
(2) Disconnect the motor relay cable.
#1
[Disconnect]
Motor relay cable
FRAH3478.EPS
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-54
MC-55
Reinstallation Procedures
(3) Retain the cable with the cable tie.
(1) Position the motor relay cable and retain it with a nylon clamp.
DETAIL A
DETAIL A
Cable tie
NK-6N
Fasten at the center of
the two cable ties
Cable tie
#1
[Fasten]
Cable tie
A
#1
[Tighten]
BR4x8 (x2)
A
FRAH3481.EPS
(4) Reinstall the cable guard bracket.
DETAIL A
FRAH3479.EPS
(2) Mount the cable retaining auxiliary plate.
DETAIL A
A
Bracket
#1
[Tighten]
BR4x8 (x2)
Auxiliary
plate
A
#1
[Tighten]
BR4x8 (x2)
FRAH3475.EPS
FRAH3480.EPS
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-55
MC-56
5.
IP
5.1
IP
{SP:INDEX}
INSTRUCTIONS
- Do not leave the IP in a removed state for a period of longer than 24 hours.
- Do not lean the removed IP upright against anything. Be sure to place it on a flat
workbench with the fluorescent surface (protective layer) facing upward.
- Be sure to handle the IP by its brackets (shown below), which are attached to the
right- and left-hand sides of the IP. If your hand or finger comes into contact with
the IP fluorescent surface (protective layer) or dust attaches, clean the IP.
{MC:5.1.4_Cleaning the IP}
5.1.1
Removing the IP
REFERENCE
If the machine abnormally ends and you cannot select the IP-MNT mode with the
MUTL, move the IP to the exposure position with the electromagnetic brake releasing
jig.
{MC:17.3_How to Use the Electromagnetic Brake Releasing Jig}
Preparations
(1) Turn ON the power of CL.
(2) Turn ON the power of RU.
Power ON in the following order.
- Power circuit breaker of the machine main body
- Start switch on the operation panel
(3) With the MUTL, select the IP-MNT mode.
{MU:4.4 [2-1]_Termination Mode Setting}
REFERENCE
When you press the shutdown button on the RU operation panel after termination
mode selection, the selected mode is executed.
(4) Turn OFF the power of RU.
Power OFF in the following order.
- [Shutdown] button on the operation panel
- Power circuit breaker of the machine main body
(5) Remove the grid support assembly.
{MC:4.1_Grid Support Assembly}
NOTE
The IP mass about 6 kg. Carefully handle the IP when you remove or install it.
REFERENCE
When replacing or installing the IP, perform delta Y calculations for verification and
make scanner corrections.
�
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-56
MC-57
(6) Attach the IP protective sheet to the IP fluorescent surface (protective
layer).
INSTRUCTION
If your hand, your finger, or tape comes into contact with the IP fluorescent
surface (protective layer), clean the IP.
{MC:5.1.4_Cleaning the IP}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
Removing the IP
WARNING
Do not secure the four IP retaining stoppers while all of them are placed in the
upper position. If the four IP retaining stoppers are simultaneously loosened
and slid upward, the leaf spring for fastening the IP to the machine is released.
This may cause the IP to fall off to damage the human body or itself. When
removing or installing the IP, be sure to follow the procedure set forth in the
manual.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-57
MC-58
(1) Loosen the screws for IP retaining stoppers (b) and (d). Slide the IP
retaining stoppers upward and loosely retain them.
INSTRUCTION
When sliding IP retaining stoppers (b) and (d) upward and loosely retaining them,
begin by performing the procedure for IP retaining stopper (d).
(3) Remove the IP, while supporting the IP and sliding upward the IP
retaining stoppers (a) and (c) by the finger.
CAUTION
To prevent the IP from falling off, remove the IP while holding the brackets (shown
in the figure) that are attached to the right- and left-hand sides of the IP.
(2) Loosen the screws for IP retaining stoppers (a) and (c).
REFERENCE
Do not slide IP retaining stoppers (a) and (c) upward and secure. When removing
the IP, slide the IP retaining stoppers with your fingers.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-58
MC-59
5.1.2
Reinstalling the IP
Reinstallation Procedures
NOTE
When installing the IP, attach the IP protective sheet to the IP fluorescent surface
(protective layer).
(2) Check that the screws for IP retaining stoppers (a) and (c) are
loosened. If not, loosen the screws for IP retaining stoppers (a) and (c).
INSTRUCTION
In the above step, do not screw down IP retaining stoppers (a) and (c). When
installing the IP, slide IP retaining stoppers (a) and (c) with your fingers.
REFERENCE
When installing a brand-new IP, unpack it.
{MC:5.1.3_Unpacking the IP}
(1) Check that IP retaining stoppers (b) and (d) are loosely retained after
they are slid upward. If not, slide IP retaining stoppers (b) and (d)
upward and loosely retain them.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-59
MC-60
(3) Install the IP, while supporting the IP and sliding upward the IP
retaining stoppers (a) and (c) by the finger.
(4) Loosen the screws for IP retaining stoppers (b) and (d), and then slide
the IP retaining stoppers downward.
Ensure that the IP is pressed against the spring of the IP movement mechanism.
After IP installation, be sure to slide IP retaining stoppers (a) and (c) downward.
CAUTION
To prevent the IP from falling off, install the IP while holding the brackets (shown
in the figure) that are attached to the right- and left-hand sides of the IP.
INSTRUCTION
Do not screw down IP retaining stoppers (a) and (c). The screws for securing IP
retaining stoppers (a) and (c) are to be tightened in step (5).
(5) Screw down IP retaining stoppers (a), (b), (c), and (d), which were slid
downward in steps (3) and (4).
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-60
MC-61
(6) Verify that the IP is properly installed.
(7) Remove the IP protective sheet.
NOTE
Store the removed IP protective sheet for later use.
(8) Reinstall the grid support assembly.
{MC:4.1_Grid Support Assembly}
(9) Reinstall the exposure unit front cover.
{MC:3.1.1_ Exposure Unit Front Cover}
(10) Perform delta Y calculations for verification.
{MC:13._Performing Delta Y Calculations for Verification}
(11) Correct the scanner.
{MC:14._Scanner Correction}
(12) Reset the exposure count.
{MU:4.10_EDIT HISTORY}
NOTES
- Reset the exposure count only when the IP is replaced.
- From the RU PC-TOOL's EDIT HISTORY window, reset the PROCESSING
COUNTER value.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-61
MC-62
5.1.3
Unpacking the IP
(3) Take out the IP from the vinyl bag.
REFERENCE
When you place an order for a brand-new IP, it will be supplied in a dedicated packing
box. The procedure for unpacking the supplied IP is described in this section.
�
(1) Remove the IP.
{MC:5.1.1_Removing the IP}
(2) Open the package box.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-62
MC-63
(4) Slide IP retaining stoppers (b) and (d) upward and then loosely retain
them. At the same time, loosen the screws for IP retaining stoppers (a)
and (c).
(5) Reinstall the IP.
{MC:5.1.2_Reinstalling the IP}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-63
MC-64
5.1.4
Cleaning the IP
CAUTION
When handling the IP, observe the following precautions to prevent the IP from
being scratched or soiled.
Precautions when holding the IP
- Do not touch the IP fluorescent surface (protective layer) by hands or
fingers.
- When servicing the IP, be sure to wear gloves.
Precautions when placing the IP on a table or the like
- Carefully handle the IP not to bump it against the corner of the table or
the like.
- Put the IP on a wide, flat, and clean place.
- Do not stack IPs one after another.
General Precautions
If the IP bumps against something or falls, be sure to visually check it and
verify its image. If, for instance, the IP fluorescent surface (protective layer)
is damaged, the image stored on the IP may become abnormal.
(1) Turn ON the power of RU.
Power ON in the following order.
- Power circuit breaker of the machine main body
- Start switch on the operation panel
(2) With the MUTL, select the IP-MNT mode.
{MU:4.4 [2-1]_Termination Mode Setting}
(3) Turn OFF the power of RU.
Power OFF in the following order.
- [Shutdown] button on the operation panel
- Power circuit breaker of the machine main body
(4) Check to ensure that the IP fluorescent surface (protective layer) is
free of scratches, smudges, cracks, or kink marks.
REFERENCE
Replace the IP if any scratch, crack or kink mark, or severe smudge which cannot
be removed by cleaning is observed on the IP fluorescent surface (protective
layer).
REFERENCE
For IP cleaning, use gauze and dehydrated ethanol (containing not less than 99.5 %
v/v ethanol, pharmacopoeia or reagent).
Cleaning Procedures
CAUTIONS
- Never use a cleaning solvent or an eraser other than the specified dehydrated
ethanol. The use of an improper substance may cause IP deterioration.
- Do not frequently use dehydrated ethanol for cleaning purposes.
- Do not apply any undue force to IPs when cleaning them. Excessive IP
cleaning may incur IP performance degradation.
- The dehydrated ethanol to be used must be contained in a light-tight
container that can be hermetically sealed. After use, the remaining dehydrated
ethanol must be stored in the hermetically-sealable, light-tight container. The
dehydrated ethanol may deteriorate depending on its storage condition.
- Exercise care not to press your fingernails against IPs or otherwise scratch
them.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-64
MC-65
(5) Clean the IP fluorescent surface (protective layer).
(6) Check the IP fluorescent surface (protective layer) side again for
scratches, smudges, cracks, or kink marks.
INSTRUCTION
Follow the precautions below to prevent the IP fluorescent surface from getting
damaged or having dust or the like attached, when cleaning the IP.
- Use a piece of gauze to clean the IP fluorescent surface. Never use a material
such as dust-free paper other than gauze.
- Hold the piece of gauze as shown in the figure to clean the IP fluorescent
surface for removing the dust or smudges. Do not press the gauze against the
IP fluorescent surface or scrub it with excessive force.
- Use a piece of dry gauze if the dust or smudges can be easily removed from
the IP fluorescent surface.
- Only when the smudges adhering to the IP fluorescent surface cannot be
removed by the dry gauze, use a piece of gauze moistened with a minimum
amount of dehydrated ethanol. After the fluorescent surface (protective layer)
is cleaned with the gauze moistened with the dehydrated ethanol, evenly wipe
off the ethanol using dry gauze and get the fluorescent surface (protective
layer) completely dried.
Fluorescent surface
(protective layer)
INSTRUCTION
If any abnormality is revealed by an image check, clean the IP again.
GOOD
Gauze
Reinforcement
frame
Do not wipe the structure
correction marker region
with dehydrated ethanol.
NO GOOD
Gauze
FRAH3509.EPS
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-65
MC-66
6.
Erasure Unit
6.1
Erasure Unit
{SP:INDEX}
6.1.1
Removing the Erasure Unit
(1) Disconnect the cable connectors.
{MC:6.2_Cable Connector (JCT21B-CN1)}
{MC:6.3_Cable Connectors (JCT21A-CN1 and -CN2)}
(2) Remove the brackets.
CAUTIONS
- Do not touch the erasure filter face of the erasure lamp immediately after the
operation is stopped. Since it remains at high temperatures, you may suffer
burns.
- When servicing the erasure unit, be sure to wear a wristband to ground your
body. If your body is not grounded, static buildup on your body may damage
board-mounted electronic components.
- After the erasure unit is cooled down, place it on a clean sheet to prevent it
from being soiled by dust or dirt on the floor. Also, ensure that the erasure
unit is laid down with the erasure filter surface facing downward.
- Never remove the erasure lamp.
NOTE
The mass of the erasure unit is approx. 2 kg. Carefully handle the erasure unit when
you remove or install it.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-66
MC-67
(3) Disconnect the cable connectors.
(4) Remove the erasure unit while supporting it by hand.
NOTES
- When grasping the erasure unit, do not touch its printed circuit board, flat
cable, or erasure filter.
- If you inadvertently touch the erasure filter, clean it with a moistened cloth.
- Fully exercise care not to bring the erasure unit into contact with the IP when
removing the erasure unit.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-67
MC-68
6.1.2
Reinstalling the Erasure Unit
(1) Reinstall the erasure unit while supporting it by hand.
INSTRUCTIONS
CHECK 1
When reinstalling the erasure unit in its position, ensure that the flat cable and
connector connected to the scanner unit are not caught between the scanner unit and
erasure unit.
- When grasping the erasure unit, do not touch its printed circuit board, flat
cable, or erasure filter.
- If you inadvertently touch the erasure filter, clean it with a moistened cloth.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-68
MC-69
(2) Connect the cable connectors.
CAUTION
If the flat cable is connected slantly, its terminal gets short-circuited, and the
damage of the scanner unit might result. Exercise care.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-69
MC-70
CHECK 2
(3) Reinstall the brackets.
- Use care not to erroneously interchange the front and back surfaces of the flat
cable.
- Insert the flat cable squarely into its position.
- Insert the flat cable all the way into the connector.
(4) Connect the cable connectors.
{MC:6.2_Cable Connector (JCT21B-CN1)}
{MC:6.3_Cable Connectors (JCT21A-CN1 and -CN2)}
(5) Reset the erasure lamp illumination count.
NOTES
- Reset the erasure lamp exposure count only when the erasure unit is replaced.
- From the RU PC-TOOL's EDIT HISTORY window, reset the ERASURE LAMP
value.
{MU:4.10_EDIT HISTORY}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-70
MC-71
6.1.3
Cleaning the Erasure Unit
CAUTIONS
- Do not use dehydrated ethanol for cleaning the erasure filter surface. Wipe
only the erasure filter surface clean with a moistened cloth.
- Never remove the erasure lamps.
(1) Remove the erasure unit.
{MC:6.1.1_Removing the Erasure Unit}
(2) Wipe the erasure filter surface clean with a moistened cloth.
(3) Reinstall the erasure unit.
{MC:6.1.2_Reinstalling the Erasure Unit}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-71
MC-72
6.2
Cable Connector (JCT21B-CN1)
(4) Disconnect the cable connector (JCT21B-CN1)
{SP:INDEX}
CAUTION
When servicing a board, be sure to wear a wristband to ground your body. If
your body is not grounded, static buildup on your body may damage electronic
components on the board.
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the exposure unit front cover.
{MC:3.1.1_Exposure Unit Front Cover}
(2) Remove the grid support assembly.
{MC:4.1_Grid Support Assembly}
(3) Remove the cable retaining bracket.
{CHECK 1}
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the cable connector (JCT21B-CN1).
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
Check/Adjustment Procedures
CHECK 1
Make sure that the cable retaining bracket is attached properly.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-72
MC-73
6.3
Cable Connectors (JCT21A-CN1 and -CN2)
(4) Disconnect the connectors (JCT21A-CN1 and -CN2).
{SP:INDEX}
CAUTION
When servicing a board, be sure to wear a wristband to ground your body. If
your body is not grounded, static buildup on your body may damage electronic
components on the board.
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the exposure unit front cover.
{MC:3.1.1_Exposure Unit Front Cover}
(2) Remove the grid support assembly.
{MC:4.1_Grid Support Assembly}
(3) Remove the cable retaining bracket.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-73
MC-74
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the cable connectors (JCT21A-CN1 and -CN2).
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
INSTRUCTION
Check/Adjustment Procedures
CHECK 1
- Use care not to erroneously interchange the front and back surfaces of the flat
cable.
Follow the procedures below to reinstall the cable retaining bracket.
- Insert the flat cable squarely into its position.
- Insert the flat cable all the way into the connector.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-74
MC-75
6.4
Thermal Switch (TSWA1)
{SP:INDEX}
CAUTION
When servicing a board, be sure to wear a wristband to ground your body. If
your body is not grounded, static buildup on your body may damage electronic
components on the board.
INSTRUCTION
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the exposure unit front cover.
{MC:3.1.1_Exposure Unit Front Cover}
(2) Remove the grid support assembly.
{MC:4.1_Grid Support Assembly}
(3) Remove the thermal switch (TSWA1).
{CHECK 1}
When the terminal is to be disconnected from the thermal switch (TSWA1), disconnect
it while pushing the protrusion (see the figure) at the center of the terminal. Otherwise,
the terminal or the sensor might get damaged, or the cable might break.
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the thermal switch (TSWA1).
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
CHECK 1
Connect the terminal so that the protrusion of the connector faces upward.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-75
MC-76
7.
Scanner Unit
7.1
Scanner Unit
{SP:INDEX}
CAUTIONS
- Do not touch the surface of the scanner unit immediately after the operation
is stopped. Since it remains at high temperatures, you may suffer burns.
- When servicing the scanner unit, be sure to ground your body with an
antistatic wristband. If your body is not grounded, the static buildup on your
body may damage electronic parts on the board.
- After the scanner unit is removed, be sure to secure it to the scanner unit
base.
(4) Turn OFF the power of RU.
Power OFF in the following order.
- "Shutdown" button on the operation panel
- Power circuit breaker of the machine main body
(5) Disconnect the connectors.
{MC:6.2_Cable Connector (JCT21B-CN1)}
{MC:6.3_Cable Connectors (JCT21A-CN1 and -CN2)}
(6) Remove the brackets.
NOTE
The mass of the scanner unit is approx. 3 kg. Exercise care when removing and/or
installing the scanner unit.
REFERENCES
- When replacing or installing the scanner unit, perform delta Y calculations for
verification and make scanner corrections.
- When replacing the scanner unit with a brand-new one, restore the machine-specific
data with the floppy disk supplied with the new scanner unit. After completion of the
restore operation, back up the machine-specific data on the hard disk.
7.1.1
Removing the Scanner Unit
REFERENCE
When the machine is terminated in error and the HEAD-MNT mode cannot be set
in the M-Utility, use the electromagnetic brake releasing jig to move the scanner unit
upward by approx. 10 cm from under the exposure unit.
(1) Turn ON the power of the CL.
(2) Turn ON the power of the RU.
Power ON in the following order.
- Power circuit breaker of the machine main body
- Start switch on the operation panel
(3) With the MUTL, select the HEAD-MNT mode.
{MU:4.4 [2-1]_Termination Mode Setting}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-76
MC-77
(7) Disconnect the cable connectors.
(8) Remove the scanner unit while supporting it by hand.
CAUTION
When grasping the scanner unit, do not touch its printed circuit board or flat
cable.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-77
MC-78
(9) Secure the scanner unit onto the scanner unit base.
CAUTION
When mounting the scanner unit on its base, do not shock it.
7.1.2
Reinstalling the Scanner Unit
REFERENCE
When installing a brand-new scanner unit, perform the scanner unit unpacking
procedure.
{MC:7.1.3_Replacement Procedures for the Scanner Unit}
(1) Remove the scanner unit from its base.
CAUTION
When grasping the scanner unit, do not touch its printed circuit board or flat
cable.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-78
MC-79
(2) Secure the scanner unit while it is pressed against the positioning
members on the left-hand side.
(3) Secure the scanner unit with the brackets.
CHECK 1
- Check to make sure that the leaf spring presses the scanner unit downward.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-79
MC-80
(4) Connect the cable connectors.
CHECK 2
- Use care not to erroneously interchange the front and back surfaces of the flat
cable.
- Insert the flat cable squarely into its position.
- Insert the flat cable all the way into the connector.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-80
MC-81
(5) Reinstall the brackets.
INSTRUCTION
The cable tie retained in the procedure #4 should retain the cables of the
connectors (CN21 and CN22) connected to the JCT21B board.
The head of the cable tie should be located under the bracket.
(6) Connect the cable connectors.
{MC:6.2_Cable Connector (JCT21B-CN1)}
{MC:6.3_Cable Connectors (JCT21A-CN1 and -CN2)}
(7) Turn ON the power of the RU.
Power ON in the following order.
- Power circuit breaker of the machine main body
- Start switch on the operation panel
(8) Perform delta Y calculations for verification.
{MC:13._Performing Delta Y Calculations for Verification}
(9) Correct the scanner.
{MC:14._Scanner Correction}
(10) Reset the laser illumination time/illumination count.
NOTES
- Reset the laser illumination time/illumination count only when the scanner unit
has been replaced.
- From the RU PC-TOOL’s EDIT HISTORY window, reset the LASER value.
{MU:4.10_EDIT HISTORY}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-81
MC-82
7.1.3
Replacement Procedures for the Scanner Unit
INSTRUCTIONS
- When the scanner unit is to be replaced with one with the versions E or later, the RU
software version need be updated to V1.14 or newer.
- When the scanner unit is to be replaced with one with the versions F or later, the RU
software version need be updated to V1.15 or newer.
NOTE
2. Data Acquisition of the Troubled Scanner Unit
The data of the troubled scanner unit is collected for diagnosing the cause of the
trouble. The data to be collected for the diagnosis are as follows:
- ERROR/ANALYSIS file folder in the LOG file folders
- CCD/CORRECT/FORMAT/LD file folders in the MACHINE file folder
- Display window of the scanner data list (text data) after the CCD electronic noise is
calculated
When the scanner unit is to be replaced, acquire the scanner unit data for diagnosis.
The acquired scanner unit data should be sent back in the scanner unit packing box
together with the troubled scanner unit. If abnormal image data (JPG) or an output
abnormal image film to be used for the diagnosis is available, pack in the packing box
together with the unit.
REFERENCE
The operation flow for replacing the scanner unit is as follows:
1. Backup of the machine-specific data of the troubled scanner unit
↓
2. Data acquisition of the troubled scanner unit
↓
3. Removal of the troubled scanner unit
↓
4. Installation of a new scanner unit
- Performing delta Y calculations for verification
- Scanner correction
- Resetting the total time of laser ON (laser illumination time)/illumination count
1. Backup of the machine-specific data of the troubled scanner unit
(1) Back up the machine-specific data of the troubled scanner unit.
{MC:14.[14]_Backing Up the Machine-Specific Data}
REFERENCE
In this procedure, the data recorded on the Compact Flash Card of the RU is
backed up in the FTP server (HD) as preparation for acquiring the data required
for the diagnosis.
012-201-09E
*: The names of the file folders may vary depending on the machine in which the
scanner unit to be replaced is incorporated.
REFERENCE
The capacity of the data to be acquired sometimes exceeds 10 MB.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-82
MC-83
(1) Copy the LOG file folder on a recording medium.
1-1 Press the [Windows] Flag Mark key on the CL keyboard to display the Start
menu of Windows
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
1-2 Select [Run...] from the Start menu of Windows. When the dialog opens, type
[C:\Program Files\FUJIFILM\FCR] and click on the [OK] button.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-83
MC-84
1-3 Open the [CR-IR364] file folder.
1-5 Open the file folder of the IP address of interest.
Shown here is the [200.16.1.10] file as an example.
1-6 Copy the [LOG] file folder and [MACHINE] file folder on a recording medium.
1-4 Open the [SYSTEM] file folder.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-84
MC-85
(2) Store the display window of the scanner data list (text data) after
the CCD electronic noise is calculated, and copy it on a recording
medium.
{MU:4.4 [5-2]_Display Scanner Data}
3. Removal of the Troubled Scanner Unit
(1) Remove the troubled scanner unit.
{MC:7.1.1_Removing the Scanner Unit}
4. Installation of a New Scanner Unit
(1) Install a new scanner unit.
{MC:7.1.2_Installing the Scanner Unit}
(2) Perform delta Y calculations for verification.
{MC:13._Performing Delta Y Calculations for Verification}
(3) Correct the scanner.
{MC:14._Scanner Correction}
(4) Reset the laser illumination time/illumination count.
NOTE
From the RU PC-TOOL’s EDIT HISTORY window, reset the LASER value.
{MU:4.10_EDIT HISTORY}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-85
MC-86
7.1.4
Unpacking the Scanner Unit
REFERENCE
A brand-new scanner unit is supplied in a dedicated case. This section describes the
procedure for unpacking a brand-new scanner unit. Perform the following procedure
only when you unpack a brand-new scanner unit.
(2) Take out the scanner unit from the box.
REFERENCE
The scanner unit is attached to the scanner unit base.
(1) Open the dedicated case, and take out a packing box of the scanner
unit, the floppy disk (machine-specific data) and the retainer.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-86
MC-87
(3) Remove the new scanner unit from the scanner unit base.
(4) Install the new scanner unit.
{MC:7.1.2_Installing the Scanner Unit}
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-87
MC-88
8.
Subscanning Unit
8.1
Subscanning Unit
{SP:INDEX}
WARNING
The subscanning unit is a heavy object. Removal/reinstallation of the
subscanning unit must be done by two or more persons.
Items to Be Prepared:
Preparatory Procedures
Always follow the procedures below before removing the subscanning unit.
REFERENCE
Moving the exposure unit to a height where the subscanning unit can be easily
removed before actually removing the subscanning unit can save labor in removal.
(1) Output a uniform image.
{ Outputting Uniform Image}
(2) Back up the machine specific data.
{MC:14.[14]_Backing Up the Machine-Specific Data}
[Jig/tool]
- Electromagnetic brake releasing jig
- Dosimeter
- Tape
[Others]
- Table for keeping the removed subscanning unit
Height: Longer than the distance from the upper end of the upper stay to the
lower end of the lower stay
Width: Shorter than the width from the right end to the left end of the upper and
lower stays
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-88
MC-89
Outputting Uniform Image
Always output a uniform image before removing the subscanning unit.
The image exposed in this procedure is used to compare images before and after the
removal of the subscanning unit.
(1) Register the following exposure menu on the CL.
- “Test” – “Sensitivity” (size: 17 inches x 17 inches)
(2) Set the dosimeter at the center of the exposure plane and expose an
IP to a dose of 3 mR and 10 mR.
Record the measurements and the exposure conditions after the X-ray exposure.
INSTRUCTIONS
- When the IP is exposed to a dose of 3 mR, set the exposure conditions so that
the measurement measured by the dosimeter is 2.5 to 5.0 mR.
- When the IP is exposed to a dose of 10 mR, set the exposure conditions so
that the measurement measured by the dosimeter is 7.5 to 12.5 mR.
NOTE
Do not put an obstacle which blocks X-rays between the X-ray bulb and the
exposure unit front cover.
REFERENCES
- Typical exposure conditions for exposing an IP to a dose of 3 mR are indicated
below:
Distance: 1.8 m
Voltage:
80 kV
Amperage: 50 mA
Time:
0.039 sec
- Typical exposure conditions for exposing an IP to a dose of 10 mR are
indicated below:
Distance: 1.8 m
Voltage:
80 kV
Amperage: 50 mA
Time:
0.13 sec
(3) Output the film to the printer.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-89
MC-90
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the IP.
{MC:5.1.1_Removing the IP}
(2) Disconnect the flat cables (LDS21A/B-CN3 and LDS21A/B-CN4) from
the LDS21A/B board.
{MC:8.16_LDS21A/B Board and RLY21A/B Board_ Removal Procedures:
Procedures (2) to (3)}
(3) Temporarily retain the flat cables removed in the procedure (2) on the
frame of the subscanning unit by a tape or the like.
CAUTION
Temporarily retain the flat cable on the frame of the subscanning unit so that the
cable is located below the cable guard bracket on the rear of the left flywheel. If
the flat cable is in contact with or comes over the cable guard bracket, the flat
cable might be caught or pulled to result in breakage in installing/removing the
subscanning unit.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-90
MC-91
(4) Disconnect the cables from the connector (MB2) and the connector
(MB1), and connect the cable of the electromagnetic brake releasing
jig.
(6) Move the IP movement mechanism from the exposure position to the
reading position, and turn OFF the MB2 switch of the electromagnetic
brake releasing jig.
INSTRUCTION
Move the IP movement mechanism from the exposure position to the reading
position. When it is to be moved, alternatively, from the reading position to the
exposure position, manually rotate the belt pulley of the IP drive timing belt (E).
(5) Turn ON the MB2 switch of the electromagnetic brake releasing jig,
and unlock the IP movement electromagnetic brake (MB2).
(7) Move the erasure unit/scanner unit upward in the machine until the
PWC21A board can be removed. Turn OFF the electromagnetic brake
releasing jig MB1 switch.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-91
MC-92
(8) Disconnect the cable connectors (MB1 and MB2) of the
electromagnetic brake releasing jig, and connect the original cable
connectors (MB1 and MB2).
(13) Disconnect the cable connectors (H-CN21, H-CN22, H-CN24, H-CN26,
H-CN31 and MZ1).
(9) Remove the correction light source unit.
{MC:8.12.1_Correction Light Source Unit_ Removal Procedures: Procedure
(7)}
(10) Remove the SND21B board.
{MC:4.7_SND21B Board Assembly_ Removal Procedures: Procedures (6)
and (7)}
(11) Remove the PWC21A board.
{MC:8.15_PWC21A Board_ Removal Procedures: Procedures (2) to (4)}
(12) Remove the bracket for the PWC21A board.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-92
MC-93
(14) Remove the terminal of the FG cables.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
(15) Remove the transit clamp.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-93
MC-94
(16) Move the bracket (for retaining the grid support assembly) to a
position where you can access the screw retaining the lower shock
absorbing rubber.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
(17) Remove the screws which retain the lower shock absorbing rubbers.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-94
MC-95
(18) Remove the screws which retain the subscanning unit on the upper
shock absorbing rubbers while holding the subscanning unit by the
hand.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-95
MC-96
(19) Remove the subscanning unit and place it on the table.
CAUTIONS
- When the subscanning unit is to be removed/reinstalled, be sure to hold the
unit on the regions indicated in the figure below. If the subscanning unit is
held on other regions, the unit might get damaged.
- Do not bring the right and left cable guide auxiliary plates on the right and left
of the subscanning unit into contact with the table when placing the unit on
the table. If the auxiliary plate deforms, it might adversely affect the flexible
cable and cause an error in images.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CAUTION
Support the subscanning unit on the two stays as indicated in the figure below
when placing the unit on the table.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-96
MC-97
Reinstallation Procedures
CAUTION
Exercise care not to have the cables caught when reinstalling the subscanning
unit.
(2) Put the subscanning unit on the exposure unit, and temporarily retain
it.
INSTRUCTION
Do not forcibly put a screw when temporarily retaining the subscanning unit.
Otherwise, the shock absorbing rubber might twist and get damaged.
(1) Tie the cables on the frame of the exposure unit with a cable tie.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-97
MC-98
(3) Position the subscanning unit.
INSTRUCTION
The rear frame assembly of the exposure unit has a plurality of protrusions. Use
the uppermost and lowermost protrusions on the right-hand side of the rear frame
assembly of the exposure unit to measure a distance between the cable guide
bracket and the protrusions of the rear frame assembly of the exposure unit.
(4) Retain the subscanning unit.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
CAUTION
Do not excessively tighten the screw (BQ6x12) when the subscanning unit is to
be retained on the upper shock absorbing rubber (torque value: 150 N•cm).
If the screw (BQ6x12) is excessively tightened, the upper shock absorbing
rubber might be torn, causing the subscanning unit to disengage.
INSTRUCTION
Cut the cable tie which is fastened in the procedure (1), before connecting the
cable connectors.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-98
MC-99
(5) Set the dosimeter at the center of the exposure plane and expose an
IP to a dose of 3 mR and 10 mR.
The exposure conditions should be the same as those for the exposure during the
preparatory procedures.
(6) Output the film to the printer.
(7) Compare the image output in the procedure (6) with the image output
during the preparatory procedures, and make sure that there is no
change in the images.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-99
MC-100
8.2
8.2.1
SUS Belts
Right SUS Belt
{SP:INDEX}
CAUTION
When servicing the SUS belts or their pulleys in the exposure unit, always wear
gloves. If they are inadvertently touched with bare hands, or soiled with dirt,
dust, foreign matters or the like, wipe them clean with a cloth dampened with
dehydrated ethanol. Do not bend or damage the SUS belt.
INSTRUCTION
Removal Procedures
(1) Turn ON the power of the RU.
Power ON in the following order.
- Power circuit breaker of the machine main body
- Start switch on the operation panel
(2) Move up/down the exposure unit, and stop it at a height from the floor
to the exposure center of 1,000 mm or more.
REFERENCE
Secure a sufficient clearance from the exposure unit to the floor before removing
the SUS belt, so as to prevent the SUS belt from accidentally coming into contact
with the floor.
When the SUS belt is removed, a phase shifts between the right and the left of the
scanner unit. When reinstalling the SUS belt, adjust the phase difference between the
right and the left of the scanner unit to be less than 1 mm.
(3) Remove the IP.
{MC:5.1.1_Removing the IP}
(4) Remove the erasure unit.
{MC:6.1.1_Removing the Erasure Unit}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-100
MC-101
(5) Remove the cable retaining bracket.
NOTE
Move away the cable retaining bracket, which is removed, to a location not
interfering with the removal of the IP drive timing belt.
(6) Remove the extension coil spring (tension spring).
NOTE
The extension coil spring while being mounted has strong tension. Exercise care
not to pinch the finger when removing the extension coil spring.
REFERENCE
Use of long-nose pliers is recommended in removal of the extension coil spring.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-101
MC-102
(7) Remove the SUS belt guard.
(8) Remove the SUS belts.
NOTE
When removing the SUS belt, exercise care not to get it cracked or bent due to
the contact with peripheral members.
REFERENCE
The SUS belts are about 1,442 mm long.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-102
MC-103
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Remove the scanner unit leveling jigs.
(3) Turn ON the electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB2 switch to unlock
the IP movement mechanism lock electromagnetic brake (MB2).
(4) Move the IP movement mechanism from the exposure position to the
reading position, and turn OFF the electromagnetic brake releasing jig
MB2 switch.
(2) Disconnect the cables from the connector (MB2) and the connector
(MB1), and connect the cable of the electromagnetic brake releasing
jig.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-103
MC-104
(5) Turn ON the MB1 switch of the electromagnetic brake releasing jig
while supporting the center of the bottom of the scanner unit by the
hand, and unlock the subscanning electromagnetic brake (MB1).
CAUTION
Do not touch the board region and the flat cable when holding the scanner unit.
(6) Move the scanner unit to a position where the scanner unit leveling
jigs can be mounted. Turn OFF the electromagnetic brake releasing jig
MB1 switch.
CAUTION
When the scanner unit is to be moved, be sure to hold the scanner unit on the
regions indicated in the figure below. If the unit is held on other regions, the
scanner unit might get damaged. Do not push or pull the flat cable (see the fiure below) which is connected with the scanner unit. The connector connecting
with the flat cable might be damaged, or the flat cable might be disconnected.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-104
MC-105
(7) Mount the scanner unit leveling jigs, using the screw holes for
mounting the erasure unit.
INSTRUCTION
The scanner unit leveling jigs are used to prevent the phase shift between the
right and the left of the scanner unit. Retain the scanner unit leveling jigs them
while pushing the machine upward viewed from the front when reinstalling them.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
(8) Turn ON the electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB1 switch to unlock
the subscanning electromagnetic brake (MB1).
(9) Push the scanner unit leveling jigs against the shaft mounted
on the cam (push the scanner unit downward), and turn OFF the
electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB1 switch. Check to make sure
that there is no gap in a contact between the scanner unit leveling jigs
and the shaft mounted on the cam.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-105
MC-106
(10) Reinstall the SUS belt.
REFERENCE
See the figure below for routing the SUS belt.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
NOTES
- Check the front and the back of the SUS belt before reinstalling the belt. Place
the SUS belt so that the bracket mounted on the belt faces forward.
- Position the SUS belt at the center of each belt pulley when reinstalling the
belt.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-106
MC-107
(11) Retain the SUS belt with the bracket.
(12) Reinstall the extension coil spring (tension spring).
REFERENCE
Use of long-nose pliers is recommended when installing the extension coil spring.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-107
MC-108
(13) Remove the scanner unit leveling jigs.
(14) Turn ON the electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB1 switch to unlock
the subscanning electromagnetic brake (MB1).
(15) Slowly reciprocate twice the scanner unit in the subscanning
direction, and check to make sure that the SUS belt does not extend
off the belt pulley.
INSTRUCTION
If the SUS belt extends off the belt pulley, again carry out the removal/
reinstallation of the SUS belt.
{MC:8.2.1_Right SUS Belt_ Removal Procedures: Procedures (6) and (8)}
(16) Move the scanner unit upward in the machine, where the distance
between the scanner unit pedestal and the aluminum base can be
measured by a steel rule, and turn OFF the electromagnetic brake
releasing jig MB1 switch.
(17) Measure the distance between the scanner unit pedestal and the
aluminum base (A on the right of the machine, and B on the left of the
machine), and calculate the phase difference between the right and
the left of the scanner unit.
Make sure that the calculated phase difference is less than 1 mm (|A-B| < 1 mm).
{MC:8.2.1_Right SUS Belt_ Reinstallation Procedures: Procedures (1) to (15)}
INSTRUCTION
If the phase difference is 1 mm or larger, again carry out the removal/reinstallation
of the SUS belt.
{MC:8.2.1_Right SUS Belt_ Removal Procedures: Procedures (6) and (8)}
{MC:8.2.1_Right SUS Belt_ Reinstallation Procedures: Procedures (1) to (17)}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-108
MC-109
(18) Reinstall the SUS belt guard.
(19) Turn ON the electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB1 switch to unlock
the subscanning electromagnetic brake (MB1).
(20) Move the scanner unit to the home position, and turn OFF the
electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB1 switch.
(21) Reinstall the cable retaining bracket.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-109
MC-110
(22) Mount the scanner unit leveling jigs on its original positions.
(23) Turn ON the MB2 switch of the electromagnetic brake releasing jig,
and unlock the IP movement electromagnetic brake (MB2).
(24) Move the IP movement mechanism from the reading position to the
exposure position. Turn OFF the electromagnetic brake releasing jig
MB2 switch.
(25) Disconnect the cable connectors (MB1 and MB2) of the
electromagnetic brake releasing jig, and connect the original cable
connectors (MB1 and MB2).
(26) Reinstall the erasure unit.
{MC:6.1.2_Reinstalling the Erasure Unit}
(27) Reinstall the IP.
{MC:5.1.2_Reinstalling the IP}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-110
MC-111
8.2.2
Left SUS Belt
{SP:INDEX}
CAUTION
When servicing the SUS belts or their pulleys in the exposure unit, always wear
gloves. If they are inadvertently touched with bare hands, or soiled with dirt,
dust, foreign matters or the like, wipe them clean with a cloth dampened with
dehydrated ethanol. Do not bend or damage the SUS belt.
INSTRUCTION
When the SUS belt is removed, a phase shifts between the right and the left of the
scanner unit. When reinstalling the SUS belt, adjust the phase difference between the
right and the left of the scanner unit to be less than 1 mm.
Removal Procedures
(1) Turn ON the power of the RU.
Power ON in the following order.
- Power circuit breaker of the machine main body
- Start switch on the operation panel
(2) Move up/down the exposure unit, and stop it at a height from the floor
to the exposure center of 1,000 mm or more.
REFERENCE
Secure a sufficient clearance from the exposure unit to the floor before removing
the SUS belt, so as to prevent the SUS belt from accidentally coming into contact
with the floor.
(3) Remove the IP.
{MC:5.1.1_Removing the IP}
(4) Remove the erasure unit.
{MC:6.1.1_Removing the Erasure Unit}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-111
MC-112
(5) Remove the cable retaining bracket while holding it by the hand, and
temporarily retain on the bottom of the frame by a tape or the like.
NOTE
Always hold the cable retaining bracket by the hand when removing it.
Otherwise, the cable retaining bracket might drop, resulting in breakage of the flat
cable.
(6) Remove the extension coil spring (tension spring).
NOTE
The extension coil spring while being mounted has strong tension. Exercise care
not to pinch the finger when removing the extension coil spring.
REFERENCE
Use of long-nose pliers is recommended in removal of the extension coil spring.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-112
MC-113
(7) Remove the SUS belt guard.
(8) Remove the SUS belt.
NOTE
When removing the SUS belt, exercise care not to get it cracked or bent due to
the contact with peripheral members.
REFERENCE
The SUS belts are about 1,442 mm long.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-113
MC-114
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Remove the scanner unit leveling jigs.
(3) Turn ON the electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB2 switch to unlock
the IP movement mechanism lock electromagnetic brake (MB2).
(4) Move the IP movement mechanism from the exposure position to the
reading position, and turn OFF the electromagnetic brake releasing jig
MB2 switch.
(2) Disconnect the cables from the connector (MB2) and the connector
(MB1), and connect the cable of the electromagnetic brake releasing
jig.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-114
MC-115
(5) Turn ON the MB1 switch of the electromagnetic brake releasing jig
while supporting the center of the bottom of the scanner unit by the
hand, and unlock the subscanning electromagnetic brake (MB1).
CAUTION
Do not touch the board region and the flat cable when holding the scanner unit.
(6) Move the scanner unit to a position where the scanner unit leveling
jigs can be mounted. Turn OFF the electromagnetic brake releasing jig
MB1 switch.
CAUTION
When the scanner unit is to be moved, be sure to hold the scanner unit on the
regions indicated in the figure below. If the unit is held on other regions, the
scanner unit might get damaged. Do not push or pull the flat cable (see the figure below) which is connected with the scanner unit. The connector connecting
with the flat cable might be damaged, or the flat cable might be disconnected.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-115
MC-116
(7) Mount the scanner unit leveling jigs, using the screw holes for
mounting the erasure unit.
INSTRUCTION
The scanner unit leveling jigs are used to prevent the phase shift between the
right and the left of the scanner unit. Retain the scanner unit leveling jigs them
while pushing the machine upward viewed from the front when reinstalling them.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
(8) Turn ON the electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB1 switch to unlock
the subscanning electromagnetic brake (MB1).
(9) Push the scanner unit leveling jigs against the shaft mounted
on the cam (push the scanner unit downward), and turn OFF the
electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB1 switch.
Check to make sure that there is no gap in a contact between the
scanner unit leveling jigs and the shaft mounted on the cam.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-116
MC-117
(10) Reinstall the SUS belt.
REFERENCE
See the figure below for routing the SUS belt.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
NOTES
- Check the front and the back of the SUS belt before reinstalling the belt. Place
the SUS belt so that the bracket mounted on the belt faces forward.
- Position the SUS belt at the center of each belt pulley when reinstalling the
belt.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-117
MC-118
(11) Retain the SUS belt with the bracket.
(12) Reinstall the extension coil spring (tension spring).
REFERENCE
Use of long-nose pliers is recommended when installing the extension coil spring.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-118
MC-119
(13) Remove the scanner unit leveling jigs.
(14) Turn ON the electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB1 switch to unlock
the subscanning electromagnetic brake (MB1).
(15) Slowly reciprocate twice the scanner unit in the subscanning
direction, and check to make sure that the SUS belt does not extend
off the belt pulley.
INSTRUCTION
If the SUS belt extends off the belt pulley, again carry out the removal/
reinstallation of the SUS belt.
{MC:8.2.2_Left SUS Belt_ Removal Procedures: Procedures (6) and (8)}
(16) Move the scanner unit upward in the machine, where the distance
between the scanner unit pedestal and the aluminum base can be
measured by a steel rule, and turn OFF the electromagnetic brake
releasing jig MB1 switch.
(17) Measure the distance between the scanner unit pedestal and the
aluminum base (A on the right of the machine, and B on the left of the
machine), and calculate the phase difference between the right and
the left of the scanner unit.
Make sure that the calculated phase difference is less than 1 mm (|A-B| < 1 mm).
{MC:8.2.2_Left SUS Belt_ Reinstallation Procedures: Procedures (1) to (15)}
INSTRUCTION
If the phase difference is 1 mm or larger, again carry out the removal/reinstallation
of the SUS belt.
{MC:8.2.2_Left SUS Belt_ Removal Procedures: Procedures (6) and (8)}
{MC:8.2.2_Left SUS Belt_ Reinstallation Procedures: Procedures (1) to (17)}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-119
MC-120
(18) Reinstall the SUS belt guard.
(19) Turn ON the electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB1 switch to unlock
the subscanning electromagnetic brake (MB1).
(20) Move the scanner unit to the home position, and turn OFF the
electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB1 switch.
(21) Reinstall the cable retaining bracket.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-120
MC-121
(22) Mount the scanner unit leveling jigs on its original positions.
(23) Turn ON the MB2 switch of the electromagnetic brake releasing jig,
and unlock the IP movement electromagnetic brake (MB2).
(24) Move the IP movement mechanism from the reading position to the
exposure position. Turn OFF the electromagnetic brake releasing jig
MB2 switch.
(25) Disconnect the cable connectors (MB1 and MB2) of the
electromagnetic brake releasing jig, and connect the original cable
connectors (MB1 and MB2).
(26) Reinstall the erasure unit.
{MC:6.1.2_Reinstalling the Erasure Unit}
(27) Reinstall the IP.
{MC:5.1.2_Reinstalling the IP}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-121
MC-122
8.3
Flywheel
8.3.1
Right Flywheel
{SP:INDEX}
INSTRUCTION
When the right flywheel is to be removed, loosen the coupling on the right of the
subscanning motor (MZ1). If the coupling on the right of the subscanning motor (MZ1)
is loosened, the phase shifts between the right and the left of the scanner unit. When
the right flywheel is to be reinstalled, adjust the phase difference between the right
and the left of the scanner unit to be less than 1 mm. This adjustment is conducted
when the right SUS belt is to be reinstalled.
(3) Loosen the screws which retain the SUS belt pulleys, the right
flywheel and the ring.
REFERENCE
As the coupling is shifted toward the subscanning motor (MZ1) in the procedure
(2), the shaft of the subscanning motor (MZ1) and the shaft on which the right
flywheel is mounted is separated. Therefore, rotate the shaft on which the right
flywheel is mounted, and you can access the screws which retain the SUS belt
pulleys, the right flywheel and the ring.
{CHECK 1}
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the right SUS belt.
{MC:8.2.1_Right SUS Belt}
(2) Loosen the screws which retain the coupling on the right of the
subscanning motor (MZ1), and move the coupling toward the
subscanning motor (MZ1).
REFERENCE
When the screws which retain the coupling cannot be accessed, unlock the
subscanning electromagnetic brake (MB1) by the electromagnetic brake releasing
jig, and manually move the scanner unit until you can access the screws which
retain the coupling.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-122
MC-123
CHECK 2
(4) Remove the right flywheel.
NOTE
Support the flywheel by the hand when the shaft is to be drawn out.
{CHECK 2}
{CHECK 3}
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the right flywheel.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
The D-cut flat surfaces are provided on the right and left of the shaft for retaining the
belt pulley, the ring and the brake shoe. Place the shaft so that a smaller D-cut flat
surface (for retaining the belt pulley) is positioned on the right of the machine, when
mounting the shaft.
CHECK 3
The flywheel has a determined mount position.
When mounting the flywheel, align the flywheel with the marking for positioning the
flywheel on the shaft.
Check/Adjustment Procedures
CHECK 1
Align the following parts with the D-cut flat surface of the shaft and fix there.
- SUS belt pulley
- Flywheel
- Ring
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-123
MC-124
8.3.2
Left Flywheel
{SP:INDEX}
INSTRUCTIONS
- Loosen the screws which retain the brake shoe of the subscanning electromagnetic
brake (MB1) when removing the left flywheel. Adjust the gap between the body of
the subscanning electromagnetic brake (MB1) and the brake shoe when reinstalling
the left flywheel.
- When the left flywheel is to be removed, loosen the coupling on the left of the
subscanning motor (MZ1). If the coupling on the left of the subscanning motor
(MZ1) is loosened, the phase shifts between the right and the left of the scanner
unit. When the left flywheel is to be reinstalled, adjust the phase difference between
the right and the left of the scanner unit to be less than 1 mm. This adjustment is
conducted when the left SUS belt is to be reinstalled.
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the left SUS belt.
{MC:8.2.2_Left SUS Belt}
(2) Loosen the screws which retain the coupling on the left of the
subscanning motor (MZ1), and move the coupling toward the
subscanning motor (MZ1).
REFERENCE
When the screws which retain the coupling cannot be accessed, unlock the
subscanning electromagnetic brake (MB1) by the electromagnetic brake releasing jig,
and manually move the scanner unit until you can access the screws which retain the
coupling.
(3) Disconnect the cables from the connector (MB2) and the connector
(MB1), and connect the cable of the electromagnetic brake releasing
jig.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-124
MC-125
(4) Turn ON the electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB1 switch to unlock
the subscanning electromagnetic brake (MB1).
REFERENCE
Unlocking the subscanning electromagnetic brake (MB1), you can access
the SUS belt pulleys, the left flywheel, the brake shoe of the subscanning
electromagnetic brake (MB1), and the screws which retain the ring.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
(5) Loosen the screws which retain the SUS belt pulley, the left flywheel,
the brake shoe of the subscanning electromagnetic brake (MB1) and
the ring.
{CHECK 1}
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-125
MC-126
(6) Turn OFF the electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB1 switch.
(7) Remove the left flywheel.
(1) Reinstall the left flywheel.
NOTE
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
Support the flywheel by the hand when the shaft is to be drawn out.
{CHECK 2}
{CHECK 5}
Reinstallation Procedures
{CHECK 3}
{CHECK 4}
Check/Adjustment Procedures
CHECK 1
Align the following parts with the D-cut flat surface of the shaft and fix there.
- SUS belt pulley
- Left Flywheel
- Brake shoe of the subscanning electromagnetic brake (MB1)
- Ring
CHECK 2
The D-cut flat surfaces are provided on the right and left of the shaft for retaining the
belt pulley, the ring and the brake shoe. Place the shaft so that a smaller D-cut flat
surface (for retaining the belt pulley) is positioned on the left of the machine, when
mounting the shaft.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-126
MC-127
CHECK 3
When the gap between the brake body and the brake shoe of the subscanning
electromagnetic brake (MB1) is to be adjusted, the brake adjustment jig is inserted
between the brake body and the brake shoe of the subscanning electromagnetic
brake (MB1). Therefore, there should be a clearance between the shaft and the brake
shoe. If the shaft and the brake shoe are in tight contact, the gap cannot be adjusted.
When the shaft is to be inserted into the subscanning unit, leave the clearance of
approx. 1 mm between the shaft and the brake shoe.
CHECK 5
When reinstalling the left flywheel, the gap between the brake body and the brake
shoe of the subscanning electromagnetic brake (MB1) should be adjusted.
Follow the procedures below to adjust the gap.
(1) Turn ON the electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB1 switch to unlock
the subscanning electromagnetic brake (MB1).
(2) Insert the brake adjustment jig (thickness of 0.3 mm) between the
body and the brake shoe of the subscanning electromagnetic brake
(MB1), and adjust the gap between the brake body and the brake shoe.
<Gap should be adjusted to a value of: 0.2 to 0.3 mm>
INSTRUCTION
When the brake shoe is to be retained with the screws (WP4x6), align the brake
shoe with the D-cut flat surface on which the flywheel is mounted.
CHECK 4
The flywheel has a determined mount position.
When mounting the flywheel, align the flywheel with the marking for positioning the
flywheel on the shaft.
REFERENCE
When the brake adjustment jig is not available, use the thickness gauges (two
pieces with a thickness of 0.3 mm).
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-127
MC-128
(3) Check to make sure that the subscanning electromagnetic brake (MB1)
is correctly mounted.
3-1 Turn ON (unlock) the electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB1 switch, and
check to make sure that the steel rule with a length of 150 mm (thickness of
0.5 mm) cannot be inserted into the gap between the brake body and the brake
shoe.
(4) Turn ON the electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB1 switch, and
check to make sure that the scanner unit can be moved in the
subscanning direction.
(5) Check to make sure that the scanner unit does not move even if it
is to be manually moved in the subscanning direction, when the
electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB1 switch is turned OFF.
3-2 Check to make sure that a gap is left between the brake body and the brake
shoe when the electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB1 switch is turned ON
(unlocked). In addition, check to make sure that there is no contact and friction
between the brake body and the brake shoe (no abnormal sound occurs), when
the shaft of the subscanning motor (MZ1) is rotated once.
3-3 Check to make sure that the shaft of the subscanning motor (MZ1) does not
rotate (locks) when the electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB1 switch is turned
OFF (locked).
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-128
MC-129
8.4
Subscanning Motor (MZ1)
{SP:INDEX}
INSTRUCTION
When the couplings on the right and left of the subscanning motor (MZ1) are
loosened, the phase shifts between the right and the left of the scanner unit. Adjust
the phase difference between the right and the left of the scanner unit to be less than
1 mm according to the procedures when reinstalling the subscanning motor (MZ1).
(4) Loosen the screws which retain the coupling, and move the coupling
toward the subscanning motor (MZ1).
REFERENCE
When the screws which retain the coupling cannot be accessed, unlock the
subscanning electromagnetic brake (MB1) by the electromagnetic brake releasing
jig, and manually move the scanner unit until you can access the screws which
retain the coupling.
NOTE
The mass of the subscanning motor is approx. 5 kg. Carefully handle it when you
remove or install it.
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the IP.
{MC:5.1.1_Removing the IP}
(2) Remove the erasure unit.
{MC:6.1.1_Removing the Erasure Unit}
(3) Remove the PWC21A board cover.
(5) Remove the subscanning motor (MZ1) assembly.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-129
MC-130
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Remove the scanner unit leveling jigs.
(2) Disconnect the cables from the connector (MB2) and the connector
(MB1), and connect the cable of the electromagnetic brake releasing
jig.
(3) Turn ON the electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB2 switch to unlock
the IP movement mechanism lock electromagnetic brake (MB2).
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-130
MC-131
(4) Move the IP movement mechanism from the exposure position to the
reading position, and turn OFF the electromagnetic brake releasing jig
MB2 switch.
(5) Turn ON the MB1 switch of the electromagnetic brake releasing jig
while supporting the center of the bottom of the scanner unit by the
hand, and unlock the subscanning electromagnetic brake (MB1).
CAUTION
Do not touch the board region and the flat cable when holding the scanner unit.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-131
MC-132
(6) Move the scanner unit to a position where the scanner unit leveling
jigs can be mounted. Turn OFF the electromagnetic brake releasing jig
MB1 switch.
CAUTION
When the scanner unit is to be moved, be sure to hold the scanner unit on the
regions indicated in the figure below. If the unit is held on other regions, the
scanner unit might get damaged. Do not push or pull the flat cable (see the figure below) which is connected with the scanner unit. The connector connecting
with the flat cable might be damaged, or the flat cable might be disconnected.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-132
MC-133
(7) Mount the scanner unit leveling jigs, using the screw holes for
mounting the erasure unit.
INSTRUCTION
The scanner unit leveling jigs are used to prevent the phase shift between the
right and the left of the scanner unit. Retain the scanner unit leveling jigs them
while pushing the machine upward viewed from the front when reinstalling them.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
(8) Turn ON the electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB1 switch to unlock
the subscanning electromagnetic brake (MB1).
(9) Push the scanner unit leveling jigs against the shaft mounted
on the cam (push the scanner unit downward), and turn OFF the
electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB1 switch.
Check to make sure that there is no gap in a contact between the scanner unit
leveling jigs and the shaft mounted on the cam.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-133
MC-134
(10) Reinstall the subscanning motor (MZ1) assembly.
(14) Move the scanner unit upward in the machine, where the distance
between the scanner unit pedestal and the aluminum base can be
measured by a steel rule, and turn OFF the electromagnetic brake
releasing jig MB1 switch.
(15) Measure the distance between the scanner unit pedestal and the
aluminum base (A on the right of the machine, and B on the left of the
machine), and calculate the phase difference between the right and
the left of the scanner unit.
Make sure that the calculated phase difference is less than 1 mm (|A-B| < 1 mm).
(11) Move the coupling toward the flywheel and fix it there.
(12) Remove the scanner unit leveling jigs.
(13) Turn ON the electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB1 switch to unlock
the subscanning electromagnetic brake (MB1).
INSTRUCTION
If the phase difference is 1 mm or larger, again carry out the reinstallation of the
coupling.
{MC:8.4_Subscanning Motor (MZ1)_ Removal Procedures: Procedure (4)}
{MC:8.4_Subscanning Motor (MZ1)_ Reinstallation Procedures: Procedure
(11)}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-134
MC-135
(16) Turn ON the electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB1 switch to unlock
the subscanning electromagnetic brake (MB1).
(17) Manually move the scanner unit to the home position.
(18) Turn OFF the electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB1 switch.
(19) Mount the scanner unit leveling jigs on its original positions.
(20) Reinstall the PWC21A board cover.
(21) Turn ON the MB2 switch of the electromagnetic brake releasing jig,
and unlock the IP movement electromagnetic brake (MB2).
(22) Manually move the IP movement mechanism from the reading position
to the exposure position.
(23) Turn OFF the electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB2 switch.
(24) Disconnect the cable connectors (MB1 and MB2) of the
electromagnetic brake releasing jig, and connect the original cable
connectors (MB1 and MB2).
(25) Reinstall the erasure unit.
{MC:6.1.2_Reinstalling the Erasure Unit}
(26) Reinstall the IP.
{MC:5.1.2_Reinstalling the IP}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-135
MC-136
8.5
Subscanning Electromagnetic Brake (MB1)
{SP:INDEX}
REFERENCE
The subscanning electromagnetic brake (MB1) consists of a brake body and a brake
shoe. The brake body is mounted on a frame in the exposure unit by means of the
brake retaining bracket, and the brake shoe is fixed to the shaft on which the left
flywheel is mounted. When the subscanning electromagnetic brake (MB1) is to be
replaced, the brake body and the brake shoe should be replaced together. When the
subscanning electromagnetic brake (MB1) is to be reinstalled, the gap between the
brake body and the brake shoe need be adjusted. The adjustment procedures are
carried out when the left flywheel is installed.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the left flywheel.
{MC:8.3.2_Left Flywheel}
(2) Remove the subscanning electromagnetic brake (MB1) together with
the bracket.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-136
MC-137
(3) Remove the subscanning electromagnetic brake (MB1) from the
bracket.
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the subscanning electromagnetic brake (MB1).
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-137
MC-138
8.6
IP Movement Motor (MZ2)
(3) Remove the IP movement motor (MZ2) together with the bracket.
{SP:INDEX}
REFERENCE
The brake shoe of the IP movement electromagnetic brake (MB2) is mounted on the
shaft of the IP movement motor (MZ2). When the IP movement motor (MZ2) is to be
reinstalled, the gap between the brake body and the brake shoe of the IP movement
electromagnetic brake (MB2) need be adjusted.
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the IP movement electromagnetic brake (MB2).
{MC:8.7_IP Movement Electromagnetic Brake (MB2)_ Removal Procedures}
(2) Disconnect the cable connector of the IP movement motor (MZ2).
{CHECK 1}
(4) Remove the IP movement motor (MZ2).
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-138
MC-139
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the IP movement motor (MZ2) together with the bracket.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
(2) Reinstall the IP movement electromagnetic brake (MB2).
{MC:8.7_IP Movement Electromagnetic Brake (MB2)_ Reinstallation
Procedures}
(3) Check to make sure that the IP movement electromagnetic brake (MB2)
normally works.
{MC:8.7_IP Movement Electromagnetic Brake (MB2)_ Check/Adjustment
Procedures}
Check/Adjustment Procedures
CHECK 1
When retaining the cable with a cable tie, retain it so that the distance from the cable
connector (MZ2) to the cable tie is approx. 3 cm.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-139
MC-140
8.7
IP Movement Electromagnetic Brake (MB2)
{SP:INDEX}
REFERENCE
The IP movement electromagnetic brake (MB2) consists of a brake body and a brake
shoe. The brake body is mounted on a frame in the exposure unit by means of the
brake retaining bracket, and the brake shoe is fixed to the shaft of the IP movement
motor (MZ2). When the IP movement electromagnetic brake (MB2) is to be replaced,
replace the brake body and the brake shoe together. When the IP movement
electromagnetic brake (MB2) is to be installed, the gap between the brake body and
the brake shoe need be adjusted.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the IP.
{MC:5.1.1_Removing the IP}
(2) Disconnect the cable connector of the IP movement electromagnetic
brake (MB2) from the bracket.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-140
MC-141
(3) Connect the cable connector of the electromagnetic brake releasing
jig (MB2) to the cable connector of the IP movement electromagnetic
brake (MB2).
(5) Remove the body of the IP movement electromagnetic brake (MB2)
together with its bracket.
(4) Turn ON the MB2 switch of the electromagnetic brake releasing jig,
and unlock the IP movement electromagnetic brake (MB2).
(6) Turn OFF the electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB2 switch, and
disconnect the cable connector (MB2) of the electromagnetic brake
releasing jig.
(7) Remove the body of the IP movement electromagnetic brake (MB2) on
the bracket.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-141
MC-142
(8) Disconnect the brake shoe of the IP movement electromagnetic brake
(MB2) from the shaft of the IP movement motor (MZ2).
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Temporarily retain the brake shoe of the IP movement electromagnetic
brake (MB2) on the shaft of the IP movement motor (MZ2).
INSTRUCTION
When the brake shoe is to be temporarily retained with the screws (WP4x6), align
the screws with the D-cut flat surfaces of the IP movement motor (MZ2).
REFERENCE
Retain the screws (WP4x6), which are temporarily retained in the procedure,
after the gap between the brake body and the brake shoe is adjusted (procedure
(6)).
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-142
MC-143
(2) Mount the body of the IP movement electromagnetic brake (MB2) on
the bracket.
(3) Connect the cable connector of the electromagnetic brake releasing
jig (MB2) to the cable connector of the IP movement electromagnetic
brake (MB2).
(5) Reinstall the body of the IP movement electromagnetic brake (MB2)
together with its bracket.
INSTRUCTION
When the body of the IP movement electromagnetic brake (MB2) is to be
reinstalled together with the bracket, verify the mount position in relation to the
brake shoe.
(4) Turn ON the MB2 switch of the electromagnetic brake releasing jig,
and unlock the IP movement electromagnetic brake (MB2).
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-143
MC-144
(6) Insert the brake adjustment jig (thickness of 0.3 mm) between the
body and the brake shoe of the IP movement electromagnetic brake
(MB2), and adjust the gap between the brake body and the brake shoe.
<Gap should be adjusted to a value of: 0.2 to 0.3 mm>
INSTRUCTION
When the brake shoe is to be retained with the screws (WP4x6), align the screws
with the D-cut flat surfaces of the IP movement motor (MZ2).
REFERENCE
When the brake adjustment jig is not available, use the thickness gauges (two
pieces with a thickness of 0.3 mm).
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
(7) Check to make sure that the IP movement electromagnetic brake (MB2)
is correctly mounted.
7-1 Check that the gap between the brake body and the brake shoe is of an equal
width when the electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB2 switch is turned ON
(unlocked). Check that the brake shoe does not shift up and down from the
brake body when the electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB2 switch is turned
OFF (locked). If the gap between the brake body and the brake shoe is not
of the same width or the brake shoe shifts up and down from the brake body,
loosen the screws which retain the bracket for mounting the brake body, and
adjust its mount position.
7-2 Turn ON (unlock) the electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB2 switch, and
check to make sure that the steel rule with a length of 150 mm (thickness of
0.5 mm) cannot be inserted into the gap between the brake body and the brake
shoe.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-144
MC-145
7-3 Check to make sure that a gap is left between the brake body and the brake
shoe when the electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB2 switch is turned ON
(unlocked). In addition, check to make sure that there is no contact and friction
between the brake body and the brake shoe (no abnormal sound occurs), when
the shaft of the IP movement motor (MZ2) is rotated once.
(8) Turn OFF the electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB2 switch, and
disconnect the cable connector (MB2) of the electromagnetic brake
releasing jig.
(9) Mount the cable connector of the IP movement electromagnetic brake
(MB2) on the bracket, and connect the cable connector (MB2) which
has originally been connected.
7-4 Check to make sure that the shaft of the IP movement motor (MZ2) does not
rotate (locks) when the electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB2 switch is turned
OFF (locked).
(10) Reinstall the IP.
{MC:5.1.2_Reinstalling the IP}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-145
MC-146
Check/Adjustment Procedures
It is necessary to check that the IP movement electromagnetic brake (MB2) normally
works with the IP installed, after the gap between the brake body and the brake shoe
is adjusted.
REFERENCE
If the following phenomena are observed as a result of checking if the IP movement
electromagnetic brake (MB2) normally works, the gap adjustment between the brake
body and the brake shoe might have failed or the IP movement electromagnetic brake
(MB2) has some failure.
In this case, again adjust the gap between the brake body and the brake shoe.
- The IP moves toward the reading position when the IP is slightly pushed, even if the
IP movement electromagnetic brake (MB2) is locked.
- The IP cannot be manually moved from the exposure position to the reading
position, when the IP movement electromagnetic brake (MB2) is unlocked by means
of the electromagnetic brake releasing jig.
CHECK 1
CHECK 2
Check to make sure that the IP can be manually moved from the exposure position to
the reading position, when the IP movement electromagnetic brake (MB2) is unlocked
by means of the electromagnetic brake releasing jig.
(1) Disconnect the cable from the connector (MB2), and connect the cable
(MB2) of the electromagnetic brake releasing jig.
(2) Turn ON the MB2 switch of the electromagnetic brake releasing jig,
and unlock the IP movement electromagnetic brake (MB2).
(3) Manually move the IP from the exposure position to the reading
position.
CAUTION
When moving the IP, slowly move while holding the regions indicated in the
figure below. Exercise care not to touch the peripheral members when moving
the IP.
Slightly push the IP by the hand while the IP movement electromagnetic brake (MB2)
is locked, and check that the IP does not move toward the reading position.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-146
MC-147
8.8
Bucky Motor (MZ3)
{SP:INDEX}
(3) Remove the bucky motor (MZ3) from the arm assembly.
{CHECK 1}
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the IP.
{MC:5.1.1_Removing the IP}
(2) Remove the bucky motor (MZ3) together with the arm assembly.
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the bucky motor (MZ3).
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
Check/Adjustment Procedures
CHECK 1
- When the arm is to be retained with the screws (WP4x6), align the screws with the
D-cut flat surfaces of the motor shaft.
- Retain with the arm leveled with the shaft surface.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-147
MC-148
8.9
IP Drive Timing Belt
Mount Position of the IP Drive Timing Belt and Circumferential
Length
REFERENCE
If the IP drive timing belt is removed, the phase of the IP movement mechanism shifts.
Adjust the distance between the cam and the bearing at four positions shown in the
figure below to be 1 mm or less, when the IP drive timing belt is to be mounted. The
phase of the IP movement mechanism is adjusted by setting the distance between the
cam and the bearing at the four positions to be 1 mm or less.
- Circumferential length of IP drive timing belts (A) to (D): 213 mm
- Circumferential length of IP drive timing belt (E):
264 mm
- Circumferential length of IP drive timing belt (F):
720 mm
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-148
MC-149
8.9.1
IP Drive Timing Belt (A)
{SP:INDEX}
(3) Remove the cable retaining bracket.
NOTE
Move away the cable retaining bracket, which is removed, to a location not
interfering with the removal of the IP drive timing belt.
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the IP.
{MC:5.1.1_Removing the IP}
(2) Disconnect the cable connector (JCT21B-CN1).
{MC:6.2_Cable Connector (JCT21B-CN1)}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-149
MC-150
(4) Disconnect the cables from the connector (MB2) and the connector
(MB1), and connect the cable of the electromagnetic brake releasing
jig.
(6) Move the IP movement mechanism from the exposure position to the
reading position, and turn OFF the electromagnetic brake releasing jig
MB2 switch.
INSTRUCTION
When the IP movement mechanism is to be moved from the exposure position to
the reading position or vice versa, manually rotate the belt pulleys of the IP drive
timing belt (E).
(5) Turn ON the MB2 switch of the electromagnetic brake releasing jig,
and unlock the IP movement electromagnetic brake (MB2).
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-150
MC-151
(7) Loosen the screws which retain the arm assembly (belt tension).
(8) Remove the IP drive timing belt (A).
NOTE
Pull out the belt pulley to the right-hand side of the machine when the IP drive
timing belt is to be removed. The spacer mounted on the shaft of the belt pulley
might drop into the machine at this time. Hold the spacer by the hand when
pulling out the belt pulley to the right-hand side of the machine.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-151
MC-152
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the IP drive timing belt (A).
NOTE
The shaft of the belt pulley need not be retained with the screw (AQ5x25). It will
be retained during the alignment of phase of the IP movement mechanism.
(2) Retain the arm assembly.
NOTE
When the arm assembly is to be retained, do not fix it while pressing the belt
pulley of the arm assembly strongly against the IP timing belt. If it is strongly
pressed, the phase might not be aligned. When the arm assembly is to be
retained, push a part with the extension coil spring is hooked two or three times,
and secure the assembly with the screw by applying tension to the timing belt by
the tension of the extension coil spring (auto-tension).
(3) Turn ON the MB2 switch of the electromagnetic brake releasing jig,
and unlock the IP movement electromagnetic brake (MB2).
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-152
MC-153
(4) Move the IP movement mechanism from the reading position to the
exposure position (press the bearing against the cam), and turn OFF
the electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB2 switch.
INSTRUCTION
When the IP movement mechanism is to be moved from the exposure position to
the reading position or vice versa, manually rotate the belt pulleys of the IP drive
timing belt (E).
(5) Push the cam against the bearing, and secure the shaft of the timing
belt and arm.
NOTE
When the shaft of the timing belt and the arm are to be secured, push the shaft of
the timing belt and the arm from both sides, and insert the shaft of the timing belt
into the arm.
REFERENCE
The shaft of the timing belt pulley and the arm where the belt has been removed/
reinstalled are not retained with the screws. Therefore, the cam and the bearing
do not come into contact even if the cam is pushed against the bearing and the
electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB2 switch is turned OFF.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-153
MC-154
(6) Measure the distance between the cam and the bearing at all of four
positions indicated in the figure below, and check that the distance is
1 mm or less.
REFERENCE
When all of the distances between the cam and the bearing at the four positions
are 1 mm or less, the phase adjustment of the IP movement mechanism is
considered to have been correctly done. If the phase adjustment is not correctly
done, loosen the screws which retain the shaft of the timing belt pulley and the
arm, and again take the procedure (5). If a phase shift occurs at other positions
from those where the phase adjustment is done, loosen the screws which retain
the shaft of the timing belt pulley and the arm at all of the four positions, and
again carry out the phase adjustment.
{MC:8.9.7_Phase Adjustment of the IP Drive Timing Belts}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
(7) Disconnect the cable connectors (MB1 and MB2) of the
electromagnetic brake releasing jig, and connect the original cable
connectors (MB1 and MB2).
(8) Reinstall the cable retaining bracket.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
(9) Connect the cable connector (JCT21B-CN1).
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
{MC:6.2_Cable Connector (JCT21B-CN1)}
(10) Reinstall the IP.
{MC:5.1.2_Reinstalling the IP}
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-154
MC-155
8.9.2
IP Drive Timing Belt (B)
{SP:INDEX}
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the IP.
(2) Disconnect the cables from the connector (MB2) and the connector
(MB1), and connect the cable of the electromagnetic brake releasing
jig.
(3) Turn ON the MB2 switch of the electromagnetic brake releasing jig,
and unlock the IP movement electromagnetic brake (MB2).
{MC:5.1.1_Removing the IP}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-155
MC-156
(4) Move the IP movement mechanism from the exposure position to the
reading position, and turn OFF the electromagnetic brake releasing jig
MB2 switch.
(5) Loosen the screws which retain the arm assembly (belt tension).
INSTRUCTION
When the IP movement mechanism is to be moved from the exposure position to
the reading position or vice versa, manually rotate the belt pulleys of the IP drive
timing belt (E).
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-156
MC-157
(6) Remove the IP drive timing belt (B).
NOTE
Pull out the belt pulley to the right-hand side of the machine when the IP drive
timing belt is to be removed. The spacer mounted on the shaft of the belt pulley
might drop into the machine at this time. Hold the spacer by the hand when
pulling out the belt pulley to the right-hand side of the machine.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the IP drive timing belt (B).
NOTE
The shaft of the belt pulley need not be retained with the screw (AQ5x25). It will
be retained during the alignment of phase of the IP movement mechanism.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-157
MC-158
(2) Retain the arm assembly.
NOTE
When the arm assembly is to be retained, do not fix it while pressing the belt
pulley of the arm assembly strongly against the IP timing belt. If it is strongly
pressed, the phase might not be aligned. When the arm assembly is to be
retained, push a part with the extension coil spring is hooked two or three times,
and secure the assembly with the screw by applying tension to the timing belt by
the tension of the extension coil spring (auto-tension).
(4) Move the IP movement mechanism from the reading position to the
exposure position (press the bearing against the cam), and turn OFF
the electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB2 switch.
INSTRUCTION
When the IP movement mechanism is to be moved from the exposure position to
the reading position or vice versa, manually rotate the belt pulleys of the IP drive
timing belt (E).
REFERENCE
The shaft of the timing belt pulley and the arm where the belt has been removed/
reinstalled are not retained with the screws. Therefore, the cam and the bearing
do not come into contact even if the cam is pushed against the bearing and the
electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB2 switch is turned OFF.
(3) Turn ON the MB2 switch of the electromagnetic brake releasing jig,
and unlock the IP movement electromagnetic brake (MB2).
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-158
MC-159
(5) Push the cam against the bearing, and secure the shaft of the timing
belt and arm.
NOTE
When the shaft of the timing belt and the arm are to be secured, push the shaft of
the timing belt and the arm from both sides, and insert the shaft of the timing belt
into the arm.
(6) Measure the distance between the cam and the bearing at all of four
positions indicated in the figure below, and check that the distance is
1 mm or less.
REFERENCE
When all of the distances between the cam and the bearing at the four positions
are 1 mm or less, the phase adjustment of the IP movement mechanism is
considered to have been correctly done. If the phase adjustment is not correctly
done, loosen the screws which retain the shaft of the timing belt pulley and the
arm, and again take the procedure (5). If a phase shift occurs at other positions
from those where the phase adjustment is done, loosen the screws which retain
the shaft of the timing belt pulley and the arm at all of the four positions, and
again carry out the phase adjustment.
{MC:8.9.7_Phase Adjustment of the IP Drive Timing Belts}
(7) Disconnect the cable connectors (MB1 and MB2) of the
electromagnetic brake releasing jig, and connect the original cable
connectors (MB1 and MB2).
(8) Reinstall the IP.
{MC:5.1.2_Reinstalling the IP}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-159
MC-160
8.9.3
IP Drive Timing Belt (C)
{SP:INDEX}
(2) Diconnect the connectors (JCT21A-CN1 and -CN2).
{MC:6.3_Cable Connectors (JCT21A-CN1 and -CN2)}
(3) Remove the cable retaining bracket while holding it by the hand, and
temporarily retain on the bottom of the frame by a tape or the like.
NOTES
- Always hold the cable retaining bracket by the hand, when removing it.
Otherwise, the cable retaining bracket might fall down, resulting in the damage
of the flat cable.
- Move away the retaining bracket which has been removed so that removal of
the IP drive timing belt is not interfered, and temporarily retain there with a tape
or the like.
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the IP.
{MC:5.1.1_Removing the IP}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-160
MC-161
(4) Disconnect the cables from the connector (MB2) and the connector
(MB1), and connect the cable of the electromagnetic brake releasing
jig.
(6) Move the IP movement mechanism from the exposure position to the
reading position, and turn OFF the electromagnetic brake releasing jig
MB2 switch.
INSTRUCTION
When the IP movement mechanism is to be moved from the exposure position to
the reading position or vice versa, manually rotate the belt pulleys of the IP drive
timing belt (E).
(5) Turn ON the MB2 switch of the electromagnetic brake releasing jig,
and unlock the IP movement electromagnetic brake (MB2).
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-161
MC-162
(7) Loosen the screws which retain the arm assembly (belt tension).
(8) Remove the IP drive timing belt (C).
NOTE
Pull out the belt pulley to the left-hand side of the machine when the IP drive
timing belt is to be removed. The spacer mounted on the shaft of the belt pulley
might drop into the exposure unit at this time. Hold the spacer by the hand when
pulling out the belt pulley to the left-hand side of the machine.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-162
MC-163
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the IP drive timing belt (C).
NOTE
The shaft of the belt pulley need not be retained with the screw (AQ5x25). It will
be retained during the alignment of phase of the IP movement mechanism.
(2) Retain the arm assembly.
NOTE
When the arm assembly is to be retained, do not fix it while pressing the belt
pulley of the arm assembly strongly against the IP timing belt. If it is strongly
pressed, the phase might not be aligned. When the arm assembly is to be
retained, push a part with the extension coil spring is hooked two or three times,
and secure the assembly with the screw by applying tension to the timing belt by
the tension of the extension coil spring (auto-tension).
(3) Turn ON the MB2 switch of the electromagnetic brake releasing jig,
and unlock the IP movement electromagnetic brake (MB2).
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-163
MC-164
(4) Move the IP movement mechanism from the reading position to the
exposure position (press the bearing against the cam), and turn OFF
the electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB2 switch.
INSTRUCTION
When the IP movement mechanism is to be moved from the exposure position to
the reading position or vice versa, manually rotate the belt pulleys of the IP drive
timing belt (E).
(5) Push the cam against the bearing, and secure the shaft of the timing
belt and arm.
NOTE
When the shaft of the timing belt and the arm are to be secured, push the shaft of
the timing belt and the arm from both sides, and insert the shaft of the timing belt
into the arm.
REFERENCE
The shaft of the timing belt pulley and the arm where the belt has been removed/
reinstalled are not retained with the screws. Therefore, the cam and the bearing
do not come into contact even if the cam is pushed against the bearing and the
electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB2 switch is turned OFF.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-164
MC-165
(6) Measure the distance between the cam and the bearing at all of four
positions indicated in the figure below, and check that the distance is
1 mm or less.
REFERENCE
When all of the distances between the cam and the bearing at the four positions
are 1 mm or less, the phase adjustment of the IP movement mechanism is
considered to have been correctly done. If the phase adjustment is not correctly
done, loosen the screws which retain the shaft of the timing belt pulley and the
arm, and again take the procedure (5). If a phase shift occurs at other positions
from those where the phase adjustment is done, loosen the screws which retain
the shaft of the timing belt pulley and the arm at all of the four positions, and
again carry out the phase adjustment.
{MC:8.9.7_Phase Adjustment of the IP Drive Timing Belts}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
(7) Disconnect the cable connectors (MB1 and MB2) of the
electromagnetic brake releasing jig, and connect the original cable
connectors (MB1 and MB2).
(8) Reinstall the cable retaining bracket.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
(9) Connect the connectors (JCT21A-CN1 and -CN2).
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
{MC:6.3_Cable Connectors (JCT21A-CN1 and -CN2)}
(10) Reinstall the IP.
{MC:5.1.2_Reinstalling the IP}
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-165
MC-166
8.9.4
IP Drive Timing Belt (D)
{SP:INDEX}
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the IP.
{MC:5.1.1_Removing the IP}
(2) Disconnect the cables from the connector (MB2) and the connector
(MB1), and connect the cable of the electromagnetic brake releasing
jig.
(3) Turn ON the MB2 switch of the electromagnetic brake releasing jig,
and unlock the IP movement electromagnetic brake (MB2).
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-166
MC-167
(4) Move the IP movement mechanism from the exposure position to the
reading position, and turn OFF the electromagnetic brake releasing jig
MB2 switch.
(5) Loosen the screws which retain the arm assembly (belt tension).
INSTRUCTION
When the IP movement mechanism is to be moved from the exposure position to
the reading position or vice versa, manually rotate the belt pulleys of the IP drive
timing belt (E).
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-167
MC-168
(6) Remove the IP drive timing belt (D).
NOTE
Pull out the belt pulley to the left-hand side of the machine when the IP drive
timing belt is to be removed. The spacer mounted on the shaft of the belt pulley
might drop into the exposure unit at this time. Hold the spacer by the hand when
pulling out the belt pulley to the left-hand side of the machine.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the IP drive timing belt (D).
NOTE
The shaft of the belt pulley need not be retained with the screw (AQ5x25). It will
be retained during the alignment of phase of the IP movement mechanism.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-168
MC-169
(2) Retain the arm assembly.
NOTE
When the arm assembly is to be retained, do not fix it while pressing the belt
pulley of the arm assembly strongly against the IP timing belt. If it is strongly
pressed, the phase might not be aligned. When the arm assembly is to be
retained, push a part with the extension coil spring is hooked two or three times,
and secure the assembly with the screw by applying tension to the timing belt by
the tension of the extension coil spring (auto-tension).
(4) Move the IP movement mechanism from the reading position to the
exposure position (press the bearing against the cam), and turn OFF
the electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB2 switch.
INSTRUCTION
When the IP movement mechanism is to be moved from the exposure position to
the reading position or vice versa, manually rotate the belt pulleys of the IP drive
timing belt (E).
REFERENCE
The shaft of the timing belt pulley and the arm where the belt has been removed/
reinstalled are not retained with the screws. Therefore, the cam and the bearing
do not come into contact even if the cam is pushed against the bearing and the
electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB2 switch is turned OFF.
(3) Turn ON the MB2 switch of the electromagnetic brake releasing jig,
and unlock the IP movement electromagnetic brake (MB2).
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-169
MC-170
(5) Push the cam against the bearing, and secure the shaft of the timing
belt and arm.
NOTE
When the shaft of the timing belt and the arm are to be secured, push the shaft of
the timing belt and the arm from both sides, and insert the shaft of the timing belt
into the arm.
(6) Measure the distance between the cam and the bearing at all of four
positions indicated in the figure below, and check that the distance is
1 mm or less.
REFERENCE
When all of the distances between the cam and the bearing at the four positions
are 1 mm or less, the phase adjustment of the IP movement mechanism is
considered to have been correctly done. If the phase adjustment is not correctly
done, loosen the screws which retain the shaft of the timing belt pulley and the
arm, and again take the procedure (5). If a phase shift occurs at other positions
from those where the phase adjustment is done, loosen the screws which retain
the shaft of the timing belt pulley and the arm at all of the four positions, and
again carry out the phase adjustment.
{MC:8.9.7_Phase Adjustment of the IP Drive Timing Belts}
(7) Disconnect the cable connectors (MB1 and MB2) of the
electromagnetic brake releasing jig, and connect the original cable
conntectors (MB1 and MB2).
(8) Reinstall the IP.
{MC:5.1.2_Reinstalling the IP}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-170
MC-171
8.9.5
IP Drive Timing Belt (E)
{SP:INDEX}
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the IP drive timing belts (B and D).
{MC:8.9.2_IP Drive Timing Belt (B)}
{MC:8.9.4_IP Drive Timing Belt (D)}
(2) Remove the IP movement motor (MZ2).
{MC:8.6_IP Movement Motor (MZ2)}
(3) Remove the arm assembly of the IP drive timing belt (D).
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-171
MC-172
(4) Loosen the screws which retain the belt pulley.
{CHECK 1}
{CHECK 4}
{CHECK 2}
{CHECK 3}
(5) Pull out the shaft to the right-hand side of the machine until the IP
drive timing belt (E) can be removed, and remove the IP drive timing
belt (E).
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the IP drive timing belt (E).
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-172
MC-173
Check/Adjustment Procedures
CHECK 1
CHECK 3
When reinstalling the belt pulley (C), push the belt pulley against the bearing.
When reinstalling the belt pulley (A), align the end face of the shaft with the end face
of the belt pulley (A).
CHECK 4
When retaining the belt pulleys (A, B and C) with the screws, align them with the D-cut
flat surfaces of the shaft.
CHECK 2
Reinstall the belt pulley (B) to align with the A portion (indicated in the figure).
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-173
MC-174
8.9.6
IP Drive Timing Belt (F)
{SP:INDEX}
(3) Pull out the shaft, and remove the upper belt pulley of the IP drive
timing belt (F).
Removing the upper belt pulley, the upper part of the IP drive timing belt (F)
disengages.
REFERENCE
The shaft is pulled out to the right of the machine (procedure (2)) to remove the
IP drive timing belt (E). By further pulling out the shaft to the right, the upper belt
pulley of the IP drive timing belt (F) can be removed.
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the right flywheel.
{MC:8.3.1_Right Flywheel}
(2) Remove the IP drive timing belt (E).
{MC:8.9.5_IP Drive Timing Belt (E)}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-174
MC-175
(4) Remove the internal cooling fan (FANH1).
{MC:8.14.1_Internal Cooling Fan (FAN1H) }
(5) Remove the IP drive timing belt (A).
(8) Pull out the shaft, and remove the IP drive timing belt (F).
{CHECK 1}
{CHECK 4}
{CHECK 2}
{CHECK 3}
{MC:8.9.1_IP Drive Timing Belt (A) }
(6) Remove the IP drive timing belt (C).
{MC:8.9.3_IP Drive Timing Belt (C) }
(7) Remove the arm assembly of the IP drive timing belt (C).
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-175
MC-176
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the IP drive timing belt (F).
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
INSTRUCTION
Check/Adjustment Procedures
CHECK 1
When reinstalling the belt pulley (A), align the end face of the shaft with the end face
of the belt pulley (A).
When the IP drive timing belts (A, B, C and D) are reinstalled, adjust the phase
at a time on four portions instead of individual phase adjustments. Therefore, the
screws (AQ5x25) need not be retained until the phase adjustment.
{MC:8.9.7_Phase Adjustment of the IP Drive Timing Belts}
CHECK 2
When reinstalling the belt pulley (B), push the belt pulley against the bearing. This
procedure is taken after the belt pulley (A) is reinstalled.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-176
MC-177
CHECK 3
The positional relation between the IP drive timing belt (F) and the belt pulley
assembly (timing belt (F) idler) is as shown below.
8.9.7
Phase Adjustment of the IP Drive Timing Belts
REFERENCE
The following procedures are to be taken when the IP drive timing belts (A, B, C
and D) are to be reinstalled at a time, or when the phases at four positions of the IP
movement mechanism vary.
CHECK 4
When retaining the belt pulleys (A and B) with the screws, align them with the D-cut
flat surfaces of the shaft.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-177
MC-178
Adjustment Procedures
(1) Loosen the screws which retain the shaft and the arm of the timing
belts at four positions of the IP movement mechanism.
(2) Press the bearing of the IP movement mechanism against the cam,
and retain the shafts with the arms of the four timing belt pulleys of
the IP movement mechanism by the screws.
REFERENCE
After the IP drive timing belts (A, B, C and D) are removed/reinstalled, the
shaft and the arm of the timing belt are not retained with the screws (AQ5x25).
Therefore, this procedure is not necessary when the IP drive timing belts (A, B, C
and D) are removed/reinstalled.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-178
MC-179
(3) Measure the distance between the cam and the bearing at all of four
positions indicated in the figure below, and check that the distance is
1 mm or less.
INSTRUCTION
If a distance between the cam and the bearing is longer than 1 mm, follow the
procedures below only at the location.
Timing belts (A) and (B)
Timing belts (C) and (D)
(4) Temporarily install the IP.
{MC:5.1.2_Reinstalling the IP_ Reinstallation Procedures: Procedures (1) to
(6)}
(5) Turn ON the electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB2 switch, and let
the IP fall by its own weight to the reading position.
(6) Manually move the IP from the reading position to the exposure
position.
(7) Remove the IP.
{MC:5.1.1_Removing the IP}
(8) Measure the distance between the cam and the bearing at a total of
four locations, and check that the distance is 1 mm or less.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-179
MC-180
8.10
Belt Pulley Assembly (Timing Belt (F) Idler)
{SP:INDEX}
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the upper belt pulley of the IP drive timing belt (F).
{MC:8.9.6_IP Drive Timing Belt (F) _ Removal Procedures: Procedures (1) to
(3)}
(2) Remove the belt pulley assembly.
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the belt pulley assembly (timing belt (F) idler).
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
Check/Adjustment Procedures
CHECK 1
Retain the belt pulley assembly (timing belt (F) idler) by pushing it against the rear of
the machine.
{CHECK 1}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-180
MC-181
8.11
Flexible Cable
8.11.1
Right Flexible Cable
(3) Remove the bracket which retains the right flexible cable assembly.
{SP:INDEX}
(1) Remove the PWC21A board.
{MC:8.15_PWC21A Board}
(2) Remove the bracket for the PWC21A board.
(4) Disconnect the cable connector (JCT21B-CN1).
{MC:6.2_Cable Connector (JCT21B-CN1)}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-181
MC-182
(5) Remove the cable retaining bracket, and remove the right flexible
cable assembly.
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the right flexible cable assembly.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-182
MC-183
Check/Adjustment Procedures
CHECK 1
Carry out automatic successive conveyance 100 or more times, and check that the
right flexible cable does not come onto the bracket. Also check that the flexible cable
is not forcibly pressed against the bracket wall on the front or the rear of the machine.
{MU:4.4 [2]_Conveyance Check}
If the right flexible cable comes onto the bracket or is forcibly pushed against the
bracket wall on the front or the rear of the machine, make use of a gap between the
cable retaining bracket and the flexible cable to prevent the right flexible cable from
coming onto the bracket or forcibly being pressed against the bracket wall.
<When the flexible cable is to be moved and retained toward the bracket wall on the
front of the machine>
<When the flexible cable is to be moved and retained toward the bracket wall on the
rear of the machine>
CHECK 2
Output a uniform image exposed to a dose of 1 mR, and check to make sure that no
peculiar irregularity (lateral streak) is left.
{MC:15._Checking for Image Problems}
When peculiar irregularity occurs on the image even if the right flexible cable does not
mount onto the bracket nor is strongly pushed against the bracket, replace the right
flexible cable.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-183
MC-184
8.11.2
Left Flexible Cable Assembly
{SP:INDEX}
(3) Disconnect the flexible cables from the connectors (LDS21A/B-CN3
and CN4).
Removal Procedures
INSTRUCTION
Note the following precautions in removing or reinstalling the let flexible cable
assembly.
- Exercise care not to bring the flexible cable into contact with peripheral members,
ausing breakage by a flaw or bend.
- Do not touch the surface connecting with the connector with the fingers. If it is
touched, wipe the surface clean with a cloth dampened with dehydrated ethanol to
eliminate grease.
(1) Remove the IP.
{MC:5.1.1_Removing the IP}
(2) Remove the LDS21A/B board cover.
(4) Diconnect the connectors (JCT21A-CN1 and -CN2).
{MC:6.3_Cable Connectors (JCT21A-CN1 and -CN2)}
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-184
MC-185
(5) Remove the cable retaining bracket.
{CHECK 1}
{CHECK 2}
(6) Disconnect the left flexible cable while holding it by the hand.
NOTE
Do not bring the left flexible cable into contact with the peripheral members when
disconnecting.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-185
MC-186
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the left flexible cable assembly.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
Check/Adjustment Procedures
CHECK 2
- Check to make sure that the cable retaining bracket is installed to align with the
marking on the left flexible cable.
- Check to make sure that the flexible cable is not in contact with the edge of the
bracket indicated in the figure below when moving the erasure unit/scanner unit to
above the machine.
CHECK 1
Align the cable retaining bracket with the marking for positioning it on the cable, when
retaining the left flexible cable with the cable retaining bracket.
Exercise care not to have the cable caught.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-186
MC-187
8.12
Correction Light Source Unit
8.12.1
Correction Light Source Unit
{SP:INDEX}
Removal Procedures
(7) Remove the correction light source unit.
NOTE
When the correction light source unit is to be removed or reinstalled, exercise
care not to bring the LIT21A board mounted on the correction light source unit
into contact with the subscanning HP sensor (SZ1) and the subscanning overrun
sensor (lower) (SZ4), causing the sensors to come off.
REFERENCE
When the machine is terminated in error and the HEAD-MNT mode cannot be set
in the M-Utility, use the electromagnetic brake releasing jig to move the scanner unit
upward by approx. 10 cm from under the exposure unit.
{MC:17.3_How to Use the Electromagnetic Brake Releasing Jig}
(1) Turn ON the power of the CL.
(2) Turn ON the distribution switchboard breaker and the power supply of
the exposure unit.
(3) Turn ON the power of the RU.
Power ON in the following order.
- Power circuit breaker of the machine main body
- Start switch on the operation panel
(4) Select the “HEAD-MNT” mode in the termination mode setting of the
RU PC-TOOL. Move up the scanner unit above machine by approx. 10
cm from the home position.
{MU:4.4 [2-1]_Termination Mode Setting}
REFERENCE
Pressing the shutdown button on the RU operation panel after setting the
termination mode, the selected mode is executed.
(5) Turn OFF the power of RU.
Power OFF in the following order.
- "Shutdown" button on the operation panel
- Power circuit breaker of the machine main body
(6) Remove the grid support assembly.
{MC:4.1_Grid Support Assembly}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-187
MC-188
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the correction light source unit.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE
When the connectors are to be connected to the LIT21A boards on the right- and
left-hand sides of the correction light source unit, note that the procedures for
routing the cable in connecting it to the right-hand side from those in connecting
to the left-hand side.
8.12.2
Photoconductive Material and LIT21A Board
{SP:INDEX}
CAUTION
When servicing a board, be sure to wear a wristband to ground your body. If
your body is not grounded, static buildup on your body may damage electronic
components on the board.
INSTRUCTION
Always wear gloves when servicing the photoconductive material. If the material is
touched, always eliminate grease with dehydrated ethanol.
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the correction light source unit.
{MC:8.12.1_Correction Light Source Unit}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-188
MC-189
(2) Remove the stoppers which retain the plane parallel plate.
{CHECK 1}
(3) Remove the plane parallel plate and the photoconductive material.
{CHECK 2}
(4) Remove the LIT21A boards from the right and left of the correction
light source unit.
{CHECK 3}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-189
MC-190
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the photoconductive material and the LIT21A boards.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
CHECK 3
Reinstall the LIT21A board so that a clearance between the board and the bracket is 0.5
mm or less.
Check/Adjustment Procedures
CHECK 1
Pinch the plane parallel plate between the claws of the stopper when reinstalling the
stopper to retain the plane parallel plate.
CHECK 2
The photoconductive material has D-cut notches at both ends. Align the notch of the
material with the slot of the receive for installation.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-190
MC-191
8.13
IP Lower Stopper Mounting Bracket
8.13.1
IP Lower Stopper Mounting Bracket (Right)
(6) Remove the IP lower stopper (right) from the IP lower stopper
mounting bracket (right).
{SP:INDEX}
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the right SUS belt.
{MC:8.2.1_Right SUS Belt}
(2) Remove the scanner unit.
{MC:7.1.1_Removing the Scanner Unit}
(3) Remove the internal cooling fan (FANH1) assembly.
{MC:8.14.1_Internal Cooling Fan (FANH1) }
(4) Remove the correction light source unit.
{MC:8.12.1_Correction Light Source Unit}
(5) Remove the arm assembly of the IP drive timing belt (A).
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
(7) Disconnect the connectors (SZ1 and SZ4), and remove the clamp and
the edge saddle.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-191
MC-192
(8) Remove the IP lower stopper mounting bracket (right).
NOTE
Always remove the IP lower stopper mounting bracket (right) from the front of
the machine. If removed from the right of the machine, the IP lower stopper
mounting bracket (right) might come into contact with the guide bracket of the
flexible cable, causing damage on the flexible cable.
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the IP lower stopper mounting bracket (right).
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
(2) Connect the connectors (SZ1 and SZ4), and reinstall the clamp and
the edge saddle.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
(3) Mount the IP lower stopper (right) on the IP lower stopper mounting
bracket (right).
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE
Mount the IP lower stopper (right) at the lowermost position of the long hole.
Reposition the IP lower stopper (right) after moving the IP to the home position by
the MUTL.
(4) Reinstall the arm assembly of the IP drive timing belt (A).
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-192
MC-193
(5) Reinstall the correction light source unit.
{MC:8.12.1_Correction Light Source Unit}
(13) Disconnect the connector (MB1), and connect the connector (MB1) of
the electromagnetic brake lock releasing jig.
(6) Reinstall the internal cooling fan (FANH1) assembly.
{MC:8.14.1_Internal Cooling Fan (FANH1) }
(7) Reinstall the scanner unit.
{MC:7.1.2_Reinstalling the Scanner Unit}
(8) Reinstall the right SUS belt.
{MC:8.2.1_Right SUS Belt}
INSTRUCTION
Check the phase of the IP drive mechanism after reinstalling the right SUS belt.
If a shift is observed in the phase, adjust the phase of the IP drive timing belt.
{MC:8.9.7_Phase Adjustment of the IP Drive Timing Belts}
(9) Turn ON the power of the CL.
(10) Turn ON the power of the RU.
Power ON in the following order.
- Power circuit breaker of the machine main body
- Start switch on the operation panel
(14) Turn ON the electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB1 switch to unlock
the subscanning electromagnetic brake (MB1).
REFERENCE
By turning ON/OFF the RU power supply in the procedures (10) and (11), the IP
is moved to the home position.
(11) Turn OFF the power of RU.
Power OFF in the following order.
- "Shutdown" button on the operation panel
- Power circuit breaker of the machine main body
(12) Remove the grid support assembly.
{MC:4.1_Grid Support Assembly}
(15) Move the erasure unit/scanner unit upward in the machine until the IP
protective sheet can be put on.
CAUTION
Do not touch the board region and the flat cable when holding the scanner unit.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-193
MC-194
(16) Put on the IP protective sheet.
REFERENCE
The IP protective sheet is put on to avoid contact of the IP with the steel rule to
be used in the procedure (17).
(17) Reposition the IP lower stopper so that the distance between the lower part
of the IP and the upper surface of the IP lower stopper (right) is 9 ± 0.15
mm.
NOTE
Reinstall the IP lower stopper to be parallel with the IP.
8.13.2
IP Lower Stopper Mounting Bracket (Left)
{SP:INDEX}
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the left SUS belt.
{MC:8.2.2_Left SUS Belt}
(2) Remove the scanner unit.
{MC:7.1.1_Removing the Scanner Unit}
(3) Remove the internal cooling fan (FANH4 and FANH5) assemblies.
{MC:8.14.4_Internal Cooling Fan (FANH4 and FANH5)}
(4) Remove the correction light source unit.
{MC:8.12.1_Correction Light Source Unit}
(5) Remove the arm assembly of the IP drive timing belt (C).
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-194
MC-195
(6) Remove the IP lower stopper (left) from the IP lower stopper mounting
bracket (left).
(8) Remove the IP lower stopper mounting bracket (left).
NOTE
Always remove the IP lower stopper mounting bracket (left) from the front of the
machine. If removed from the right of the machine, the IP lower stopper mounting
bracket (left) might come into contact with the guide bracket of the flexible cable,
causing damage on the flexible cable.
(7) Remove the clamp and the edge saddle.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-195
MC-196
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the IP lower stopper mounting bracket (left).
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
(2) Reinstall the clamp and the edge saddle.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
(3) Mount the IP lower stopper (left) on the IP lower stopper mounting
bracket (left).
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE
Mount the IP lower stopper (left) at the lowermost position of the long hole.
Reposition the IP lower stopper (left) after moving the IP to the home position by
the MUTL.
(4) Reinstall the arm assembly of the IP drive timing belt (C).
(5) Reinstall the correction light source unit.
{MC:8.12.1_Correction Light Source Unit}
(6) Reinstall the internal cooling fan (FANH4 and FANH5) assemblies.
{MC:8.14.4_Internal Cooling Fan (FANH4 and FANH5)}
(7) Reinstall the scanner unit.
{MC:7.1.2_Reinstalling the Scanner Unit}
(8) Reinstall the left SUS belt.
{MC:8.2.2_Left SUS Belt}
INSTRUCTION
Check the phase of the IP drive mechanism after reinstalling the left SUS belt. If
a shift is observed in the phase, adjust the phase of the IP drive timing belt.
{MC:8.9.7_Phase Adjustment of the IP Drive Timing Belts}
(9) Turn ON the power of the CL.
(10) Turn ON the power of the RU.
Power ON in the following order.
- Power circuit breaker of the machine main body
- Start switch on the operation panel
REFERENCE
By turning ON/OFF the RU power supply in the procedures (10) and (11), the IP
is moved to the home position.
(11) Turn OFF the power of RU.
Power OFF in the following order.
- "Shutdown" button on the operation panel
- Power circuit breaker of the machine main body
(12) Remove the grid support assembly.
{MC:4.1_Grid Support Assembly}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-196
MC-197
(13) Disconnect the connector (MB1), and connect the connector (MB1) of
the electromagnetic brake lock releasing jig.
(16) Put on the IP protective sheet.
REFERENCE
The IP protective sheet is put on to avoid contact of the IP with the steel rule to
be used in the procedure (17).
(17) Reposition the IP lower stopper so that the distance between the lower
part of the IP and the upper surface of the IP lower stopper (left) is 9 ±
0.15 mm.
NOTE
Reinstall the IP lower stopper to be parallel with the IP.
(14) Turn ON the electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB1 switch to unlock
the subscanning electromagnetic brake (MB1).
(15) Move the erasure unit/scanner unit upward in the machine until the IP
protective sheet can be put on.
CAUTION
Do not touch the board region and the flat cable when holding the scanner unit.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-197
MC-198
8.14
Internal Cooling Fan
8.14.1
Internal Cooling Fan (FANH1)
(3) Turn ON the electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB1 switch to unlock
the subscanning electromagnetic brake (MB1).
{SP:INDEX}
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the IP.
{MC:5.1.1_Removing the IP}
(2) Disconnect the cables from the connector (MB2) and the connector
(MB1), and connect the cable of the electromagnetic brake releasing
jig.
(4) Move the scanner unit upward in the machine until the internal cooling
fan (FANH1) can be removed.
CAUTION
When the scanner unit is to be moved, be sure to hold the scanner unit on the
regions indicated in the figure below. If the unit is held on other regions, the
scanner unit might get damaged. Do not push or pull the flat cable (see the figure below) which is connected with the scanner unit. The connector connecting
with the flat cable might be damaged, or the flat cable might be disconnected.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-198
MC-199
(5) Turn OFF the electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB1 switch.
(6) Remove the internal cooling fan (FANH1).
{CHECK 1}
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the internal cooling fan (FANH1).
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
Check/Adjustment Procedures
CHECK 1
When reinstalling the internal cooling fan (FANH1), place the air outlet forward of the
machine, and place the label stuck to the fan toward the fan mounting bracket.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-199
MC-200
8.14.2
Internal Cooling Fan (FANH2)
{SP:INDEX}
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the IP.
{MC:5.1.1_Removing the IP}
(2) Disconnect the cables from the connector (MB2) and the connector
(MB1), and connect the cable of the electromagnetic brake releasing
jig.
(4) Move the scanner unit upward in the machine until the board
protective sheet can be removed.
CAUTION
When the scanner unit is to be moved, be sure to hold the scanner unit on the
regions indicated in the figure below. If the unit is held on other regions, the
scanner unit might get damaged. Do not push or pull the flat cable (see the figure below) which is connected with the scanner unit. The connector connecting
with the flat cable might be damaged, or the flat cable might be disconnected.
(3) Turn ON the electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB1 switch to unlock
the subscanning electromagnetic brake (MB1).
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-200
MC-201
(5) Turn OFF the electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB1 switch.
(6) Remove the SND21B board assembly.
{MC:4.7_SND21B Board Assembly_ Removal Procedures: Procedures (7) to
(9)}
(7) Remove the correction light source unit.
{MC:8.12.1_Correction Light Source Unit_ Removal Procedures: Procedure
(7)}
(8) Remove the internal cooling fan (FANH2).
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the internal cooling fan (FANH2).
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
Check/Adjustment Procedures
CHECK 1
When reinstalling the internal cooling fan (FANH2), place the air outlet forward of the
machine, and place the label stuck to the fan toward the fan mounting bracket.
{CHECK 1}
REFERENCE
The internal cooling fan (FANH2) mounting bracket and the internal cooling fan
(FANH3) assembly are tightened together by the screw (BR4x12).
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-201
MC-202
8.14.3
Internal Cooling Fan (FANH3)
{SP:INDEX}
(3) Remove the internal cooling fan (FANH3).
{CHECK 1}
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the internal cooling fan (FANH2) together with the bracket.
{MC:8.14.2_Internal Cooling Fan (FANH2) }
(2) Remove the internal cooling fan (FANH3) assembly.
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the internal cooling fan (FANH3).
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
Check/Adjustment Procedures
CHECK 1
When reinstalling the internal cooling fan (FANH3), check the arrow marked on the
fan, and place the label stuck to the fan toward the fan mounting bracket.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-202
MC-203
8.14.4
Internal Cooling Fans (FANH4 and FANH5)
{SP:INDEX}
(3) Turn ON the electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB1 switch to unlock
the subscanning electromagnetic brake (MB1).
REFERENCE
The internal cooling fans (FANH4 and FANH5) are mounted with one common
mounting bracket.
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the IP.
{MC:5.1.1_Removing the IP}
(2) Disconnect the cables from the connector (MB2) and the connector
(MB1), and connect the cable of the electromagnetic brake releasing
jig.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-203
MC-204
(4) Move the scanner unit upward in the machine until the board
protective sheet can be removed.
CAUTION
When the scanner unit is to be moved, be sure to hold the scanner unit on the
regions indicated in the figure below. If the unit is held on other regions, the
scanner unit might get damaged. Do not push or pull the flat cable (see the figure below) which is connected with the scanner unit. The connector connecting
with the flat cable might be damaged, or the flat cable might be disconnected.
(5) Turn OFF the electromagnetic brake releasing jig MB1 switch.
(6) Remove the SND21B board assembly.
{MC:4.7_SND21B Board Assembly_ Removal Procedures: Procedures (7) to
(9)}
(7) Remove the correction light source unit.
{MC:8.12.1_Correction Light Source Unit_ Removal Procedures: Procedure
(7)}
(8) Remove the internal cooling fans (FANH4 and FANH5) assemblies.
{CHECK 1}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-204
MC-205
(9) Remove the internal cooling fans (FANH4 and FANH5).
{CHECK 2}
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the internal cooling fans (FANH4 and FANH5).
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
Check/Adjustment Procedures
CHECK 1
When reinstalling the internal cooling fan (FANH4), always retain the cable of the fan
(FANH4) with a clamp. If the SND21B board is to be removed/reinstalled without the
cable retained with the clamp, the cable connector of the internal cooling fan (FANH4)
might come into contact with the cable connecting to the SND21B board and get
disengaged.
CHECK 2
- When reinstalling the internal cooling fan (FANH4), place the air outlet forward of the
machine, and place the label stuck to the fan toward the fan mounting bracket.
- When reinstalling the internal cooling fan (FANH5), place the air outlet forward of the
machine, and place the label stuck to the fan opposite to the fan mounting bracket.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-205
MC-206
8.15
PWC21A Board
(3) Disconnect the cable from the PWC21A board.
{SP:INDEX}
CAUTION
When servicing a board, be sure to wear a wristband to ground your body. If
your body is not grounded, static buildup on your body may damage electronic
components on the board.
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the IP.
{MC:5.1.1_Removing the IP}
(2) Remove the PWC21A board cover.
(4) Remove the PWC21A board.
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the PWC21A board.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-206
MC-207
8.16
LDS21A/B Board and RLY21A/B Board
{SP:INDEX}
(3) Disconnect the flexible cables from the connectors (LDS21A/B-CN3
and -CN4).
{CHECK 1}
CAUTION
When servicing a board, be sure to wear a wristband to ground your body. If
your body is not grounded, static buildup on your body may damage electronic
components on the board.
REFERENCE
The LDS21A/B board and RLY21A/B board can be simultaneously removed due to
the employed parts mounting structure.
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the IP.
{MC:5.1.1_Removing the IP}
(2) Remove the LDS21A/B board cover.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-207
MC-208
(4) Disconnect the cable connector (LDS21A/B-CN2) and the cable
connector (RLY21A-CN4).
(6) Remove the LDS21A/B board and the RLY21A/B board together with
the bracket.
(5) Disconnect the cable connectors (RLY21A/B-CN1 and RLY21A-CN2)
from the rear of the exposure unit.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-208
MC-209
(7) Remove the LDS21A/B board.
(8) Remove the RLY21A/B board.
Check/Adjustment Procedures
CHECK 1
- Use care not to erroneously interchange the front and back surfaces of the flat
cable.
- Insert the flat cable squarely into its position.
Reinstallation Procedures
- Insert the flat cable all the way into the connector.
(1) Reinstall the LDS21A/B board and RLY21A/B board.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-209
MC-210
9.
Elevation Unit
9.1
Exposure Unit Up-Down Drive Motor (MJ1)
{SP:INDEX}
WARNINGS
- Do not remove the exposure unit up-down drive motor (MJ1) with the brake (of
permanent magnetic type) removed, which retains the ball screw. Otherwise,
the exposure unit might drop, causing injury on human bodies or damage on
the machine.
- Always turn OFF the power circuit breaker and the distribution switchboard
breaker to avoid electric shock hazards, except when the exposure unit is to
be moved up/down.
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the lower right front cover of the elevation unit.
{MC:3.2.9_Lower Right Front Cover of the Elevation Unit}
(2) Turn ON the power of the RU.
Power ON in the following order.
- Power circuit breaker of the machine main body
- Start switch on the operation panel
(3) Lower the exposure unit until the two screws which retain the coupling
can be accessed.
REFERENCE
The coupling cannot be removed with the exposure unit elevated and stopped
there. Be sure to lower the exposure unit before removing the coupling.
(4) Turn OFF the power of the RU.
NOTE
The mass of the up-down drive motor is approx. 5 kg. Carefully handle it when you
remove or install it.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
Power OFF in the following order.
- "Shutdown" button on the operation panel
- Power circuit breaker of the machine main body
(5) Turn OFF the distribution switchboard breaker.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-210
MC-211
(6) Loosen the two screws which retain the coupling.
{CHECK 1}
(7) Remove the coupling rubber.
NOTES
- Exercise care not to drop the large and small keys into the machine or lose
them. The coupling cannot be reinstalled without those keys.
- Do not excessively tighten the screw (WP4x12) when temporarily retaining the
upper portion of the coupling. The shaft of the ball screw might get flawed, and
the upper portion of the coupling cannot be smoothly mounted/detached as a
result.
{CHECK 2}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-211
MC-212
(8) Remove the exposure unit up-down drive motor (MJ1) assembly.
{CHECK 3}
{CHECK 4}
(9) Disconnect the cable terminal of the exposure unit up-down drive
motor (MJ1) from the capacitor.
REFERENCE
Remove the screw which retains the capacitor before disconnecting the cable
terminal of the exposure unit up-down drive motor (MJ1) from the capacitor.
{CHECK 5}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-212
MC-213
(10) Remove the exposure unit up-down drive motor (MJ1).
{CHECK 6}
{CHECK 7}
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the exposure unit up-down drive motor (MJ1).
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE
When the upper and lower portions of the coupling are to be mounted, rotate the
ball screw shaft counterclockwise if the upper portion of the coupling cannot be
combined with the lower portion of the coupling.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-213
MC-214
Check/Adjustment Procedures
CHECK 1
Make a clearance of approx. 0.5 mm between the upper portion of the coupling and
the lower portion of the coupling.
CHECK 5
- Check that the cable terminal connected to the capacitor is correctly seated.
- Check that the FAST-ON terminal is inserted all the way in.
CHECK 2
Align the lower portion of the coupling and the end of the shaft so that they are flush
with each other, and then secure it in place.
CHECK 6
Check that the exposure unit up-down drive motor (MJ1) and the label stuck to the
gear head face forward of the machine.
CHECK 7
Place the notch on the shaft (indicated in the figure below) toward the label when
mounting the gear head on the exposure unit up-down drive motor (MJ1). Otherwise,
you cannot access the screw (WP5x5) with an Allen wrench to retain the lower portion
of the coupling with the screw after the exposure unit up-down drive motor (MJ1) is
mounted.
CHECK 3
Temporarily secure the upper portion of the coupling, and then install the exposure
unit up-down drive motor (MJ1) assembly.
CHECK 4
Check that the exposure unit up-down drive motor (MJ1) assembly is properly
mounted on the dampers.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-214
MC-215
9.2
Isolation Transformer
(4) Remove the grease receiving cover.
{SP:INDEX}
WARNING
To avoid electric shock hazards, be sure to turn OFF the power circuit
breaker on the machine main body and the circuit breaker on the distribution
switchboard.
NOTE
The mass of the isolation transformer is approx. 5 kg. Carefully handle it when you
remove or install it.
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the lower left-hand side cover of the elevation unit.
{MC:3.2.3_Lower Left-Hand Side Cover of the Elevation Unit}
(2) Remove the lower right-hand side cover of the elevation unit.
{MC:3.2.6_Lower Right-Hand Side Cover of the Elevation Unit}
(3) Remove the exposure unit up-down drive motor (MJ1) assembly.
{MC:9.1_Exposure Unit Up-Down Drive Motor (MJ1)_ Removal Procedures
Procedures (1) to (7)}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-215
MC-216
(5) Disconnect the cables from the connector (J-CN5) and the terminal
block (TB3).
(7) Remove the isolation transformer.
{CHECK 1}
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the isolation transformer.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
(6) Remove the damper assembly from the left-hand side of the machine.
REFERENCE
The procedures of reinstalling the isolation transformer onto the bracket in the
elevation unit are as shown below.
Check/Adjustment Procedures
CHECK 1
Make sure that the cable terminals are attached at their correct positions.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-216
MC-217
9.3
Brake (Permanent Magnetic Type)
{SP:INDEX}
WARNING
Do not remove the brake (permanent magnetic type) which retains the upper
portion of the ball screw with the exposure unit up-down drive motor (MJ1)
removed. Otherwise, the exposure unit might drop, causing injury on human
bodies or damage on the machine.
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the top cover of the elevation unit.
{MC:3.2.7_Top Cover of the Elevation Unit}
(2) Remove the LED21C board assembly.
NOTE
The mass of the brake (permanent magnetic type) is approx. 2 kg. Exercise care in
handling for removal/reinstallation.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-217
MC-218
(3) Remove the shield plate and the bracket.
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Turn ON the power of the RU.
Power ON in the following order.
- Power circuit breaker of the machine main body
- Start switch on the operation panel
(2) Press the exposure unit elevation switch, and place the key mount
(notched recess) on the shaft of the ball screw forward of the machine.
(4) Remove the brake (permanent magnetic type) and the key.
NOTE
Do not drop the key into the machine or lose it. The brake cannot be reinstalled
without the key.
{CHECK 1}
(3) Reinstall the brake (permanent magnetic type).
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
Check/Adjustment Procedures
CHECK 1
Check to make sure that the mount on the shaft of the ball screw faces forward of
the machine before reinstalling the brake (permanent magnetic type). Otherwise, the
screw holes on the brake and the bracket do not align.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-218
MC-219
9.4
LED21C Board
{SP:INDEX}
CAUTION
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the LED21C board.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
When servicing a board, be sure to wear a wristband to ground your body. If
your body is not grounded, static buildup on your body may damage electronic
components on the board.
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the top cover of the elevation unit.
{MC:3.2.7_Top Cover of the Elevation Unit}
(2) Remove the LED21C board.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-219
MC-220
9.5
Exposure Unit Elevation Upper-Limit
Interlock Switch (MSJ1)
(3) Remove the exposure unit elevation upper-limit interlock switch
(MSJ1).
{CHECK 1}
{SP:INDEX}
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the upper right front cover of the elevation unit.
{MC:3.2.11_Upper Right Front Cover of the Elevation Unit}
(2) Remove the exposure unit elevation upper-limit interlock switch (MSJ1)
assembly.
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the exposure unit elevation upper-limit interlock switch
(MSJ1).
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
(2) Move up the exposure unit, and check that the unit stops (MSJ1 is
turned OFF) at the uppermost point.
Check to make sure that the distance from the exposure center to the floor is approx.
1,530 mm.
{IN:33.6_Checking the Exposure Unit Elevation Upper-Limit Interlock Switch
(MSJ1), the Exposure Unit Elevation Lower-Limit Interlock Switch (MSJ2), and
the Exposure Unit Temporary Stop Interlock Switch (MSJ3)}
Check/Adjustment Procedures
CHECK 1
- Make sure that the cable terminals are attached at their correct positions.
- Check that the FAST-ON terminal is inserted all the way in.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-220
MC-221
9.6
Exposure Unit Elevation Lower Limit
Interlock Switch (MSJ2)
(3) Remove the exposure unit elevation lower limit interlock switch (MSJ2).
{CHECK 1}
{SP:INDEX}
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the upper right front cover of the elevation unit.
{MC:3.2.11_Upper Right Front Cover of the Elevation Unit}
(2) Remove the exposure unit elevation lower limit interlock switch (MSJ2)
assembly.
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the exposure unit elevation lower limit interlock switch
(MSJ2).
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
(2) Move down the exposure unit, and check that the unit stops (MSJ2 is
turned OFF) at the lowermost point.
Check to make sure that the distance from the exposure center to the floor is approx.
470 mm.
{IN:33.6_Checking the Exposure Unit Elevation Upper-Limit Interlock Switch
(MSJ1), the Exposure Unit Elevation Lower-Limit Interlock Switch (MSJ2), and
the Exposure Unit Temporary Stop Interlock Switch (MSJ3)}
Check/Adjustment Procedures
CHECK 1
- Make sure that the cable terminals are attached at their correct positions.
- Check that the FAST-ON terminal is inserted all the way in.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-221
MC-222
9.7
Exposure Unit Elevation Lower Limit
Interlock Switch (MSJ3)
(3) Remove the exposure unit elevation lower limit interlock switch (MSJ3).
{CHECK 1}
{SP:INDEX}
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the upper right front cover of the elevation unit.
{MC:3.2.11_Upper Right Front Cover of the Elevation Unit}
(2) Remove the exposure unit elevation lower limit interlock switch (MSJ3)
assembly.
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the exposure unit elevation lower limit interlock switch
(MSJ3).
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
(2) Move down the exposure unit, and check that the unit stops (MSJ3 is
turned OFF) at the temporary stop position.
Check to make sure that the distance from the exposure center to the floor is approx.
550 mm.
{IN:33.6_Checking the Exposure Unit Elevation Upper-Limit Interlock Switch
(MSJ1), the Exposure Unit Elevation Lower-Limit Interlock Switch (MSJ2), and
the Exposure Unit Temporary Stop Interlock Switch (MSJ3)}
Check/Adjustment Procedures
CHECK 1
- Make sure that the cable terminals are attached at their correct positions.
- Check that the FAST-ON terminal is inserted all the way in.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-222
MC-223
9.8
ELV21A Board
{SP:INDEX}
WARNING
To avoid electric shock hazards, be sure to turn OFF the power circuit
breaker on the machine main body and the circuit breaker on the distribution
switchboard.
(4) Remove the ELV21A board assembly.
NOTE
Disconnect the respective cable connectors from the ELV21A board while
drawing out the ELV21A board.
{CHECK 1}
CAUTION
When servicing a board, be sure to wear a wristband to ground your body. If
your body is not grounded, static buildup on your body may damage electronic
components on the board.
Removal Procedures
(1) Turn OFF the power of the RU.
Power OFF in the following order.
- "Shutdown" button on the operation panel
- Power circuit breaker of the machine main body
(2) Turn OFF the distribution switchboard breaker.
(3) Remove the lower left-hand side cover of the elevation unit.
{MC:3.2.3_Lower Left-Hand Side Cover of the Elevation Unit}
Exploded View
For the exploded view of the ELV21A board assembly, see the Service Parts List.
{SP:07B_ELEVATION UNIT MAIN BODY 1}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-223
MC-224
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the ELV21A board.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
Check/Adjustment Procedures
CHECK 1
The ELV21A board is equipped with the DIP switch (S1). Check that the setting of the
DIP switch is as indicated in the figure below after the ELV21A board is replaced or
the elevation jig cable is used.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-224
MC-225
9.9
Emergency Stop Switch (ESJ1)
{SP:INDEX}
(4) Remove the button of the emergency stop switch (ESJ1).
{CHECK 1}
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the lower right-hand side cover of the elevation unit.
{MC:3.2.6_Lower Right-Hand Side Cover of the Elevation Unit}
(2) Remove the terminal block of the emergency stop switch (ESJ1).
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the emergency stop switch (ESJ1).
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
(2) Check the operation of the emergency stop switch (ESJ1).
{IN:33.4_Checking the Emergency Stop Switch}
Check/Adjustment Procedures
CHECK 1
(3) Disconnect the cable terminal from the terminal block of the
emergency stop switch (ESJ1).
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
Locate the screw of the button downward when attaching the button of the emergency
stop switch (ESJ1).
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-225
MC-226
9.10
Emergency Stop Switch (ESJ2)
{SP:INDEX}
(4) Remove the button of the emergency stop switch (ESJ2).
{CHECK 1}
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the emergency stop switch cover.
{MC:3.2.1_Emergency Stop Switch Cover}
(2) Remove the terminal block of the emergency stop switch (ESJ2).
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the emergency stop switch (ESJ2).
(3) Disconnect the cable terminal from the terminal block of the
emergency stop switch (ESJ2).
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
(2) Check the operation of the emergency stop switch (ESJ2).
{IN:33.4_Checking the Emergency Stop Switch}
Check/Adjustment Procedures
CHECK 1
Locate the screw of the button downward when attaching the button of the emergency
stop switch (ESJ2).
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-226
MC-227
9.11
Power Circuit Breaker (NFB)
{SP:INDEX}
(3) Remove the power circuit breaker (NFB).
{CHECK 2}
WARNING
To avoid electric shock hazards, be sure to turn OFF the power circuit
breaker on the machine main body and the circuit breaker on the distribution
switchboard.
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the motor-driven grip handle (hand rail/elevation unit).
{MC:9.16_Motor-Driven Grip Handle (Hand Rail/Elevation Unit)}
REFERENCE
This step need not be performed if the motor-driven grip handle is not installed.
(2) Remove the power circuit breaker (NFB) assembly.
{CHECK 1}
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the power circuit breaker (NFB).
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
INSTRUCTION
Achieve installation with the power circuit breaker switch placed in the OFF
position.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-227
MC-228
Check/Adjustment Procedures
CHECK 1
- Make sure that the cable terminals are attached at their correct positions.
- Check that the FAST-ON terminal is inserted all the way in.
CHECK 2
Reinstall the power circuit breaker to place the OFF side (O-side) of the breaker on
the upper portion of the machine.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-228
MC-229
9.12
Terminal Block (TB1)
(5) Remove the terminal block (TB1).
{SP:INDEX}
WARNING
To avoid electric shock hazards, be sure to turn OFF the power circuit
breaker on the machine main body and the circuit breaker on the distribution
switchboard.
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the lower right front cover of the elevation unit.
{MC:3.2.9_Lower Right Front Cover of the Elevation Unit}
(2) Remove the motor-driven grip handle (hand rail/elevation unit).
{MC:9.16_Motor-Driven Grip Handle (Hand Rail/Elevation Unit)}
(3) Remove the exposure unit up-down drive motor (MJ1) assembly.
{MC:9.1_Exposure Unit Up-Down Drive Motor (MJ1)_ Removal Procedures
Procedures (1) to (7)}
(4) Disconnect the cable from the terminal block (TB1).
{CHECK 1}
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the terminal block (TB1).
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
Check/Adjustment Procedures
CHECK 1
The connection of the cable terminal differs between the single phase of three wires
and the single phase of two wires. Refer to the applicable procedures in connecting
the cable terminal.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-229
MC-230
9.13
Exposure Unit Up-Down Drive Motor (MJ1)
Relay Cable (with Resistor)
(4) Disconnect the exposure unit up-down drive motor (MJ1) relay cable.
{SP:INDEX}
REFERENCE
The exposure unit up-down drive motor (MJ1) relay cable (with resistor) can be
disconnected also from the rear of the machine by removing the elevation unit rear
lower cover. The exposure unit up-down drive motor (MJ1) assembly need not be
removed in this case. The procedures below are mentioned on the assumption that
there is no servicing space behind the machine.
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the lower right-hand side cover of the elevation unit.
{MC:3.2.6_Lower Right-Hand Side Cover of the Elevation Unit}
(2) Remove the exposure unit up-down drive motor (MJ1) assembly.
{MC:9.1_Exposure Unit Up-Down Drive Motor (MJ1)_ Removal Procedures
Procedures (1) to (7)}
(3) Remove the exposure unit up-down drive motor (MJ1) relay cable
together with the bracket.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Connect the exposure unit up-down drive motor (MJ1) relay cable (with
resistor).
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-230
MC-231
9.14
Operation Panel Assembly, LCD Panel and
LCN21A Board
(3) Disconnect the cable terminal and the cable connector, and remove
the operation panel assembly.
{CHECK 1}
{CHECK 2}
{CHECK 3}
{SP:INDEX}
CAUTION
When servicing a board, be sure to wear a wristband to ground your body. If
your body is not grounded, static buildup on your body may damage electronic
components on the board.
Removal Procedures
(1) Press the exposure unit elevation switch (descent) to lower the
exposure unit to below the operation panel.
(2) Remove the screws which retain the rear of the operation panel.
NOTE
Hold the operation panel by the hand when removing the screws which retain the
rear of the operation panel. Otherwise, the operation panel might drop, causing
the cable to break.
(4) Remove the brightness switch.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-231
MC-232
(5) Remove the LCD panel.
{CHECK 4}
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the operation panel assembly, the LCD panel and the LCN21A
board.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
Check/Adjustment Procedures
CHECK 1
The LCD panel is equipped with the DIP switches. Check that the settings of the DIP
switches are as indicated in the figure below when the LCD panel and the operation
panel assembly are to be replaced.
(6) Remove the LCN21A board.
CHECK 2
Boot up the machine M-Utility when the LCD panel is to be replaced, and check the
following items.
- Adjust Touch Check
- Touch Point Check
{MU:3.10_Adjust Touch Check}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-232
MC-233
CHECK 3
Adjust the screen display position (up/down, right/left) of the LCD panel, when the
LCD panel and the operation panel assembly are to be replaced. To adjust, turn the
screen display position adjusting trimmer while viewing on the LCD panel screen.
NOTE
Two screen display position adjustment trimmers are provided, one on the upper and
the other on the lower.
Upper: Right-left position adjustment trimmer
Lower: Up-down position adjustment trimmer
Turning a trimmer by one graduation, the screen display position moves one position
up or down or moves one position to the left or right.
CHECK 4
Route the cable as indicated in the figure below when the cable connectors (CN3 and
CN9) are to be connected.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-233
MC-234
9.15
Elevation Switch (Hand Switch) and
AWT21A/B Board
{SP:INDEX}
CAUTION
When servicing a board, be sure to wear a wristband to ground your body. If
your body is not grounded, static buildup on your body may damage electronic
components on the board.
When the switch is located on the left-hand side:
(1) Remove the lower right-hand side cover of elevation unit and upper
left-hand side cover of elevation unit.
{MC:3.2.6_Lower Right-Hand Side Cover of the Elevation Unit}
{MC:3.2.2_Upper Left-Hand Side Cover of Elevation Unit}
(2) Remove the elevation switch.
INSTRUCTION
The elevation switch is located either on the right-hand side or the left-hand side,
depending on the user’s demand. Refer to the applicable procedures to remove the
elevation switch.
Procedures for Removing the Elevation Switch (Hand Switch)
When the switch is located on the right-hand side:
(1) Remove the lower right-hand side cover of the elevation unit.
{MC:3.2.6_Lower Right-Hand Side Cover of the Elevation Unit}
(2) Remove the elevation switch.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-234
MC-235
Procedures for Removing the AWT21A/B Board
(1) Remove the elevation switch rear cover.
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the elevation switch (hand switch) and AWT21A/B board.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
Check/Adjustment Procedures
CHECK 1
Fasten the ground cable together when mounting the AWT21A/B board.
(2) Remove the AWT21A/B board.
REFERENCE
The board mounted on the elevation switch differs depending on the type of the
elevation switch.
- With the motor-driven grip handle: AWT21A board
- Without the motor-driven grip handle: AWT21B board
{CHECK 1}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-235
MC-236
9.16
Motor-Driven Grip Handle (Hand Rail/
Elevation Unit)
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the hand rail of the motor-driven grip handle.
{SP:INDEX}
WARNINGS
- The mass of the elevation unit of the motor-driven grip handle is approx.
18 kg. When removing/reinstalling the elevation unit, two or more persons
should always cooperate to do so.
- When reinstalling the elevation unit of the motor-driven grip handle,
exercise care not to have the cable caught. Pay special attention to the cable
connected with the capacitor.
CAUTION
The mass of the hand rail of the motor-driven grip handle is approx. 10 kg.
Exercise care not to drop the hand rail, causing a person to get injured or the
exposure unit to get damaged when removing/reinstalling the elevation unit of
the motor-driven grip handle.
REFERENCE
This step need not be performed if the motor-driven grip handle is not installed.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-236
MC-237
(2) Remove the lower right-hand side cover of the elevation unit.
{MC:3.2.6_Lower Right-Hand Side Cover of the Elevation Unit}
(3) Turn OFF the power of the RU.
Power OFF in the following order.
- "Shutdown" button on the operation panel
- Power circuit breaker of the machine main body
(4) Turn OFF the distribution switchboard breaker.
(5) Remove the elevation unit of the motor-driven grip handle.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the elevation unit and hand rail of the motor-driven grip
handle.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE
Tighten the bolts from downward when reinstalling the elevation unit of the motordriven grip handle. If tightened from upward, the elevation unit might not be
installed vertically, since the upper bolt holes are long.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-237
MC-238
9.17
Motor-Driven Grip Handle Up-Down Drive
Motor (MJ2)
{SP:INDEX}
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the elevation unit of the motor-driven grip handle.
{MC:9.16_Motor-Driven Grip Handle (Hand Rail/Elevation Unit)}
(2) Disconnect the cable terminal from the capacitor and remove the
tension belt protective cover.
(3) Remove the motor-driven grip handle up-down drive motor (MJ2)
assembly.
REFERENCE
The two screws toward the elevation unit of the motor-driven grip handle out of
a total of four screws which retain the motor-driven grip handle up-down drive
motor (MJ2) assembly cannot be removed with the motor mounted. Remove the
two screws together with the motor assembly.
{CHECK 2}
{CHECK 1}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-238
MC-239
(4) Remove the timing belt pulley from the motor-driven grip handle updown drive motor (MJ2) assembly.
{CHECK 3}
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the motor-driven grip handle up-down drive motor (MJ2).
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
Check/Adjustment Procedures
CHECK 1
Make sure that the cable terminals are attached at their correct positions.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-239
MC-240
CHECK 2
Adjust the tension of the timing belt when reinstalling the motor-driven grip handle
up-down drive motor (MJ2). The tension of the timing belt can be adjusted by
repositioning the motor-driven grip handle up-down drive motor (MJ2) in a longer side
direction of the long hole.
(2) Check to make sure that the length (with load applied) of the L portion
(indicated in the figure) is 23.5±0.5 mm when the A portion (indicated
in the figure) is pushed by a spring balance (f=500±50gf).
CHECK 3
(1) Check to make sure that the length (with no load applied) of the L
portion (indicated in the figure) is approx. 26 mm.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
- When the timing belt pulley is to be retained with a screw (WP), align the screw with
the D-cut flat surface of the shaft to retain.
- Retain with the timing belt pulley leveled with the shaft surface.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-240
MC-241
9.18
Grip Handle Elevation Upper-Limit
Interlock Switch (MSH6)
{SP:INDEX}
REFERENCE
This step need not be performed if the motor-driven grip handle is not installed.
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the lower right-hand side cover of the elevation unit.
{MC:3.2.6_Lower Right-Hand Side Cover of the Elevation Unit}
(2) Remove the grip handle elevation upper-limit interlock switch (MSH6).
{CHECK 1}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the grip handle elevation upper-limit interlock switch (MSH6).
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
(2) Check the operation of the grip handle elevation upper-limit interlock
switch (MSH6).
{IN:33.7_Checking the Grip Handle Elevation Upper-Limit/Lower-Limit Interlock
Switches (MSH6 and MSH7) and the Grip Handle Collision Prevention
Proximity Switch (MSH8) procedures (1) to (2)}
Check/Adjustment Procedures
CHECK 1
- Make sure that the cable terminals are attached at their correct positions.
- Check that the FAST-ON terminal is inserted all the way in.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-241
MC-242
9.19
Grip Handle Elevation Lower-Limit
Interlock Switch (MSH7)
{SP:INDEX}
REFERENCE
This step need not be performed if the motor-driven grip handle is not installed.
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the lower right-hand side cover of the elevation unit.
{MC:3.2.6_Lower Right-Hand Side Cover of the Elevation Unit}
(2) Remove the grip handle elevation lower-limit interlock switch (MSH7).
{CHECK 1}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the grip handle elevation lower-limit interlock switch (MSH7).
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
(2) Check the operation of the grip handle elevation lower-limit interlock
switch (MSH7).
{IN:33.7_Checking the Grip Handle Elevation Upper-Limit/Lower-Limit Interlock
Switches (MSH6 and MSH7) and the Grip Handle Collision Prevention
Proximity Switch (MSH8) procedures (3) to (4)}
Check/Adjustment Procedures
CHECK 1
- Make sure that the cable terminals are attached at their correct positions.
- Check that the FAST-ON terminal is inserted all the way in.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-242
MC-243
9.20
Grip Handle Collision Prevention Proximity
Switch (MSH8)
(4) Remove the grip handle collision prevention proximity switch (MSH8).
{SP:INDEX}
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the lower left-hand side cover of the elevation unit.
{MC:3.2.3_Lower Left-Hand Side Cover of the Elevation Unit}
(2) Remove the elevation unit of the motor-driven grip handle.
{MC:9.16_Motor-Driven Grip Handle (Hand Rail/Elevation Unit)}
REFERENCE
This step need not be performed if the motor-driven grip handle is not installed.
(3) Remove the cover from the rear of the exposure unit.
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the grip handle collision prevention proximity switch (MSH8).
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-243
MC-244
9.21
Routing the External Connection Cables
Touch panel cable (136N8676)
The routing of the external connection cables is described in this section. The
procedures to be referred depend on where the cable is connected. Refer to the
following description to proceed to the applicable procedures.
- Routing the cables connected to the operation panel
{MC:9.21.1_Routing the External Connection Cables (Operation Panel)}
- Routing the cables connected to the cable box on the rear of the exposure unit
{MC:9.21.2_Routing the External Connection Cables (Cable Box on the Rear
of the Exposure Unit)}
- Routing the cables connected from the right-hand side of the elevation unit to the
controller unit
{MC:9.21.3_Routing the External Connection Cables (Potentiometer Cable)}
9.21.1
Routing the External Connection Cables (Operation
Panel)
Display control cable (136Y8680)
{SP:INDEX}
Described in this section are the procedures of routing the cables connected from the
operation panel to the controller unit or other sections.
Outline of the Cables and Preparatory Procedures
(1) Check that the cable is marked.
If not marked, make the marking as indicated in the figure below. The marks are
used for checking cable locations.
RGB cable (136N0404)
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
Exposure Ready indication cable (136Y8692)
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-244
MC-245
Operation panel power cable (136Y8375)
Reinstallation Procedures
Described in this section are the procedures for routing the respective cables after all
of the cables connected to the operation panel unit are disconnected.
(1) Route the respective cables connected to the operation panel to the
elevation unit.
NOTE
Put the cables on the hooks when routing the cables to the arm assembly.
Operation panel FG cable (136Y8725)
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-245
MC-246
(2) Extend the arm straight, and mount the arm cover (bellows) together
with the stopper.
Route the cables into the cover (bellows).
(4) Connect the cable connectors (LCN21A-CN1, CN2, CN4, DISP-CN4 and
CN5) and the FG cable terminals (FG-P and P-FG2) to the operation
panel.
NOTE
Note that the cables are not disengaged from the hooks.
(3) Retain the operation panel rear cover on the arm assembly.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
(5) Install the operation panel.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-246
MC-247
(6) Retain the respective cables routed to the arm assembly with cable
ties.
(7) Retain the stopper of the arm cover on the operation panel rear cover.
NOTES
- Retain the cables with the cable ties while the cables stretch the most by tilting
the operation panel in the direction indicated by the arrow (see the figure).
- Do not tie the patient protection ground wire with the cable ties.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-247
MC-248
(8) Connect the cable connectors (LED21C-CN1 and ELV21A-CN12).
(9) Retain the respective cables with the stopper on the right-hand side
face of the elevation unit.
NOTE
Put the cables in the order as indicated in the figure below.
Check that the marks on the cables are around the stopper.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-248
MC-249
(10) Retain the respective cables with a cable tie on the elevation unit.
(11) Move the cables forward of the machine and retain them with the
stopper.
INSTRUCTION
Check the mark positions on the cables before retaining them with the stopper
in the procedure #3 of DETAIL B. If the marks on the cables are not within a
range of 20 mm upward and 30 mm downward from the lower end of the stopper,
reposition the cables.
(12) Connect the cable connectors to the controller unit.
{IN:22._Connecting the Cables between the Machine Main Body and
Controller Unit}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-249
MC-250
9.21.2
Routing the External Connection Cables (Cable Box
on the Rear of the Exposure Unit)
CCD, erasure and I/O power cable (136Y8673)
{SP:INDEX}
Described in this section are the procedures of routing the cables connected from the
cable box on the rear of the exposure unit to the controller unit or other sections.
Outline of the Cables and Preparatory Procedures (1)
(1) Check that the cable is marked.
If not marked, make the marking as indicated in the figure below. The marks are
used for checking cable locations.
LVDS cable (136Y8678)
LD power cable (136Y8672)
I/O control cable (136N0403)
Laser interlock cable (136Y8682)
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-250
MC-251
Exposure unit FG cable (136Y8734)
When a Cable Other than the LVDS Cable Is to Be Replaced:
Remove the grommet from the old cable, and mount it to align with the respective
marks on the new I/O control cable (RLY21A/B-CN2), the CCD, erasure, and I/O
power cable (H-CN2), the LD power cable (H-CN1), the laser interlock cable (H-CN3)
and the exposure unit FG cable (H-FG).
Preparatory Procedures (2)
When the LVDS Cable Is to Be Replaced:
Remove the grommet from the old cable and mount it to align the mark of the new
LVDS cable.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-251
MC-252
Installation Procedures
(2) Connect the FG cable terminal (H-FG) with the cable connector (H-CN3).
Described in this section are the procedures for routing the respective cables after
all of the cables connected to the cable box on the rear of the exposure unit are
disconnected.
(1) Insert the respective cables into the cable box, and connect the cable
connectors (RLY21A/B-CN1 and -CN2).
NOTE
Install the frame of the cable box to be surely fitted into the groove of the
grommet when inserting the cables into the cable box.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-252
MC-253
(3) Retain the H-CN1 cable with an aluminum clamp.
NOTE
(4) Retain the H-CN2 cable with aluminum clamps, and connect the cable
connectors (H-CN2 and H-CN1).
Connect the cable connector (H-CN1) after the cable connector (H-CN2) is
connected in the procedure (5).
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-253
MC-254
(5) Install the cover retaining bracket.
(6) Install the duct and the box cover.
NOTE
Put two or three peaks of the duct into the bracket when installing the duct in the
bracket.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-254
MC-255
(7) Connect the cable connector (J-CN2) coming out of the duct, and
accommodate the excess.
NOTE
Fix the clamp to be retained in the procedure #3 after the excess of the LD power
cable is accommodated as indicated in the figure below.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
(8) Route the cables to the left-hand side face of the elevation unit.
INSTRUCTION
Put the cables in the order as indicated in the figure below.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-255
MC-256
(9) Move the cables forward of the machine and retain them with the
stopper.
INSTRUCTION
(10) Connect the cable connectors to the controller unit.
{IN:22._Connecting the Cables between the Machine Main Body and
Controller Unit}
Check the mark positions on the cables before retaining them with the stopper
in the procedure #3 of DETAIL B. If the marks on the cables are not within a
range of 20 mm upward and 30 mm downward from the lower end of the stopper,
reposition the cables.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-256
MC-257
9.21.3
Routing the External Connection Cable (Potentiometer
Cable)
{SP:INDEX}
Described in this section are the procedures of routing the potentiometer cable.
Outline of the Cables and Preparatory Procedures
(1) Check that the cable is marked.
If not marked, make the marking as indicated in the figure below. The marks are
used for checking cable locations.
Potentiometer cable (136Y8675)
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
Installation Procedures
Described in this section are the procedures for routing the potentiometer cable after
it is disconnected. Note that all of the cables routed to the left-hand side face of the
elevation unit need be disconnected before disconnecting the potentiometer cable.
Reconnect these cables together when the potentiometer cable is to be reconnected.
(1) Pass the potentiometer cable through the elevation unit, and connect
the cable connector (J-CN3).
NOTE
Fix the clamp to be retained in the procedure #3 after the excess of the LD power
cable is accommodated as indicated in the figure below.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-257
MC-258
(2) Route the cable to the left-hand side face of the elevation unit.
Route the other cables together in this procedure.
INSTRUCTION
Put the cables in the order as indicated in the figure below.
(3) Move the cables forward of the machine and retain them with the
stopper.
INSTRUCTION
Check the mark positions on the cables before retaining them with the stopper
in the procedure #3 of DETAIL B. If the marks on the cables are not within a
range of 20 mm upward and 30 mm downward from the lower end of the stopper,
reposition the cables.
(4) Connect the cable connectors to the controller unit.
{IN:22._Connecting the Cables between the Machine Main Body and
Controller Unit}
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-258
MC-259
10. Controller Unit
REFERENCES
- When servicing the controller unit, remove its upper portion from the excess cable
accommodation box as needed, and move it to an appropriate place so as to
facilitate the procedures.
- The CR-IR364 uses the same CPS21A board and SND21A board as the CR-IR366.
However, the boards for the CR-IR364 differ from those for the CR-IR366 in board
mounting bracket shape. To differentiate the boards, check for a 2 mm diameter
hole in the board mounting bracket.
10.1
Controller Unit Upper Section
{SP:INDEX}
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the left-hand side cover of controller unit and front cover of
controller unit.
{MC:3.3_Controller Unit Covers}
(2) Remove the controller unit upper section by pulling it away from the
excess cable accommodation box claws.
CAUTION
When lifting the controller unit upper section, do not handle it by the louver
because the louver may come off, allowing the controller unit upper section to
drop.
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the controller unit upper section.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-259
MC-260
10.2
Power Supply (Alpha 600/450)
{SP:INDEX}
(5) Disconnect the cable connectors.
{CHECK 1}
WARNING
To avoid electric shock hazards, be sure to turn OFF the power circuit
breaker on the machine main body and the circuit breaker on the distribution
switchboard.
Removal Procedures
(1) Turn OFF the power of RU.
Power OFF in the following order.
- “Shutdown” button on the operation panel
- Power circuit breaker of the machine main body
(2) Turn OFF the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard.
(3) Remove the left-hand side cover of controller unit.
{MC:3.3_Controller Unit Covers}
(4) Remove the bracket that protects the cable terminal connection
section of the power supply (Alpha 600/450).
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-260
MC-261
(6) Remove the power supply (Alpha 600/450).
CAUTION
Never disconnect the cables from the power supply (Alpha 600/450).
{CHECK 2}
Check/Adjustment Procedures
CHECK 1
Retain the cables of the controller unit cooling fans (FANK1 and FANK2) together by
the clamp.
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the power supply (Alpha 600/450).
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-261
MC-262
10.3
Compact Flash Card
{SP:INDEX}
CAUTION
When servicing a board, be sure to wear a wristband to ground your body. If
your body is not grounded, static buildup on your body may damage electronic
components on the board.
NOTE
When a Compact Flash Card of 64 MB is replaced with a card of 128 MB, the RU
software need be updated to the version 1.14 or higher.
REFERENCE
When replacing the Compact Flash Card with a brand-new one, install the RU
software, restore data, and adjust the LCD panel touch positions.
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the left-hand side cover of controller unit.
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the Compact Flash Card.
INSTRUCTION
When the Compact Flash Card is replaced with a brand-new one, perform the
following procedures:
Installing the RU software
{IN:25._Installing the RU Software}
Restoring data
- Machine-specific data
- Configuration data
{MU:4.14_RESTORE}
Adjusting the LCD panel touch positions
{MU:3.9_Touch Point Check}
{MU:3.10_Adjust Touch Check}
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
{MC:3.3_Controller Unit Covers}
(2) Remove the Compact Flash Card.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-262
MC-263
10.4
CFI21A Board
{SP:INDEX}
CAUTION
When servicing a board, be sure to wear a wristband to ground your body. If
your body is not grounded, static buildup on your body may damage electronic
components on the board.
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the Compact Flash Card.
{MC:10.3_Compact Flash Card}
10.5
CPS21A Board
{SP:INDEX}
CAUTION
When servicing a board, be sure to wear a wristband to ground your body. If
your body is not grounded, static buildup on your body may damage electronic
components on the board.
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the left-hand side cover of controller unit and rear cover of
controller unit.
{MC:3.3_Controller Unit Covers}
(2) Remove the CFI21A board.
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the CFI21A board.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE
Remember to put the Compact Flash Card back where it was.
REFERENCE
The Compact Flash Card contains information, such as the IP addresses of the
FTP server and machine.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-263
MC-264
10.6
(2) Remove the CPS21A board.
INSTRUCTION
SND21A Board
{SP:INDEX}
The brackets are attached to the both sides of the CPS21A board. They are
for mounting the CPS21A board on the controller unit. If the CPS21A board is
removed and placed on a horizontal base or the like, it is in a bridge-like posture
with difference in height occurring between the right and left. If force is applied
to the board from upward in this posture, a flex may occur on the board, causing
a crack in IC solder. Therefore, be sure to place the CPS21A board horizontally
when removing and temporarily placing it.
Bracket
CAUTION
When servicing a board, be sure to wear a wristband to ground your body. If
your body is not grounded, static buildup on your body may damage electronic
components on the board.
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the left-hand side cover of controller unit and rear cover of
controller unit.
{MC:3.3_Controller Unit Covers}
(2) Remove the SND21A board.
REFERENCE
CPS21A board
Base
GOOD
NO GOOD
The SND21A board is connected to slot 2 (CN23) in the ATX board (motherboard).
{MC:10.8_ATX board (Motherboard)}
FRAH3A26.EPS
REFERENCE
The CPS21A board is connected to slot 4 (CN25) in the ATX board (motherboard).
{MC:10.8_ATX board (Motherboard)}
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the SND21A board.
INSTRUCTION
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the CPS21A board.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
012-201-09E
After the SND21A board is replaced, adjust the bucky timer.
{IN:27._Attaching the Grid and Adjusting the Bucky Timer}
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-264
MC-265
10.7
PAT21A Board
(3) Remove the PAT21A board.
{SP:INDEX}
CAUTION
When servicing a board, be sure to wear a wristband to ground your body. If
your body is not grounded, static buildup on your body may damage electronic
components on the board.
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the left-hand side cover of controller unit.
{MC:3.3_Controller Unit Covers}
(2) Disconnect the cable connectors.
{CHECK 1}
{CHECK 2}
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the PAT21A board.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
Check/Adjustment Procedures
CHECK 1
Check that the cable connector (CN7) is not inadvertently connected to the TP13.
CHECK 2
Check to make sure that the cable connector of the controller unit cooling fan (FANK1)
is connected to CN9 and the cable connector of the controller unit cooling fan (FANK2)
is connected to CN17.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-265
MC-266
10.8
ATX Board (Motherboard)
{SP:INDEX}
(4) Disconnect the cable connector from the PAT21A board.
{CHECK 1}
{CHECK 2}
CAUTIONS
- When the lithium battery is exhausted, replace the board.
- The board removed for replacement purposes must be returned to the parts
center (factory).
- If you improperly replace the battery, an explosion may occur.
When replacing the lithium battery, use the one recommended by Fuji Film
or its equivalent. Dispose of the old battery in compliance with Fuji Film's
instructions.
- When servicing a board, be sure to wear a wristband to ground your body.
If your body is not grounded, static buildup on your body may damage
electronic components on the board.
Removal Procedures
REFERENCE
The ATX board has four slots. The CPS21A board and SND21A board are connected
to the slots. The locations of the slots for connecting these boards are shown below.
(5) Remove the PAT21A board assembly.
{CHECK 3}
(1) Remove the left-hand side cover of controller unit and front cover of
controller unit and inner front cover of controller unit.
{MC:3.3_Controller Unit Covers}
(2) Remove the CPS21A board.
{MC:10.5_CPS21A Board}
(3) Remove the SND21A board.
{MC:10.6_SND21A Board}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-266
MC-267
(6) Remove the ATX board (motherboard).
NOTE
The cable connector connecting with the ATX board (motherboard) differs
depending on the type of the ATX board (motherboard). Refer to the
corresponding procedures when disconnecting the cable connector.
{CHECK 4}
<FB2M type>
#1 [Disconnect]
Connector x6
Lithium battery
CN6
{CHECK 5}
CN18
CN45
CHECK4
<FB5UM type>
#1 [Disconnect]
Connector x6
Lithium battery
CN17
I/F cable
connector
CN41
CN30
CHECK5
CN31
(POWER)
CN4
CN12
(PRIMARY)
#2
[Remove]
BR4x8 (x6)
CN3
I/F cable
connector
012-201-09E
ATX board
(motherboard)
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
FRAH3A05.EPS
MC-267
MC-268
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the ATX board (motherboard).
CHECK 4
Do not connect the ATX board (motherboard) connector (CN45) in a wrong way.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
Check/Adjustment Procedures
CHECK 1
Check that the cable connector (CN7) is not inadvertently connected to the TP13.
CHECK 2
Check to make sure that the cable connector of the controller unit cooling fan (FANK1)
is connected to CN9 and the cable connector of the controller unit cooling fan (FANK2)
is connected to CN17.
CHECK 5
Connect the connector (CN30) of the ATX board (motherboard) with the “UP” indicated
label facing upward.
CHECK 3
Pass the cable which connects the ATX board (motherboard) connector (CN41)
with the PAT21A board connector (CN5) below the PAT21A board assembly, before
retaining the PAT21A board assembly.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-268
MC-269
10.9
NFB21A Board
(4) Remove the NFB21A board.
{SP:INDEX}
WARNING
To avoid electric shock hazards, be sure to turn OFF the power circuit
breaker on the machine main body and the circuit breaker on the distribution
switchboard.
CAUTION
When servicing a board, be sure to wear a wristband to ground your body. If
your body is not grounded, static buildup on your body may damage electronic
components on the board.
Removal Procedures
(1) Turn OFF the power of RU.
Power OFF in the following order.
- “Shutdown” button on the operation panel
- Power circuit breaker of the machine main body
(2) Turn OFF the circuit breaker of the distribution switchboard.
(3) Remove the left-hand side cover of controller unit.
{MC:3.3_Controller Unit Covers}
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the NFB21A board.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-269
MC-270
10.10 Controller Unit Cooling Fans (FANK1 and
FANK2)
Check/Adjustment Procedures
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the left-hand side cover of controller unit and front cover of
controller unit.
{MC:3.3_Controller Unit Covers}
(2) Remove the controller unit cooling fans (FANK1 and FANK2).
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
(1) Reinstall the controller unit cooling fans (FANK1 and FANK2).
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
{SP:INDEX}
{CHECK 1}
Reinstallation Procedures
{CHECK 2}
CHECK 1
Check to make sure that the cable connector of the controller unit cooling fan (FANK1)
is connected to CN9 and the cable connector of the controller unit cooling fan (FANK2)
is connected to CN17.
CHECK 2
Make sure that the controller unit cooling fans (FANK1 and FANK2) are attached in
their correct orientations.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-270
MC-270.1
10.11 TLB21A Board (Optional)
{SP:INDEX}
CAUTION
When servicing a board, be sure to wear a wristband to ground your body. If
your body is not grounded, static buildup on your body may damage electronic
components on the board.
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the covers.
- Left-hand side cover of controller unit
{MC:3.3_Controller Unit Covers}
(2) Remove the TLB21A board.
Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-270.1
MC-270.2
BLANK PAGE
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-270.2
MC-271
11. Replacing the Fuses and Fuse
Locations
Fuse Classification
How to understand fuse notations
An example of a fuse classification symbol and rated amperage is shown below:
Fuse Replacement Procedures
CAUTIONS
- When servicing a board, be sure to wear a wristband to ground your body.
If your body is not grounded, static buildup on your body may damage
electronic components on the board.
- When replacing the fuse, check the rated amperage of the fuse to be replaced,
and replace it with a fuse of the same rated amperage.
At that time, check the rated amperage (A) silk-screened on the board as well.
- To remove the fuse, pull it straight up and off.
- When attaching the fuse, exercise care not to bend the pins of the fuse.
(1) Pull out the fuse, and replace it with a new one.
How to identify rated amperage
Fuse notation
LM
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
Rated amperage (A)
03 (D)
0.3
05 (D)
0.5
10 (D)
1
13 (D)
1.3
16 (D)
1.6
20 (D)
2
32 (D)
3.2
40 (D)
4
50 (D)
5
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-271
MC-272
11.1
PAT21A Board Fuses
Fuse Information
{SP:INDEX}
Board indications
Type
Removal Procedures
F1
-
125
15
F2
LM
48
4
F3
LM
48
4
F4
LM
48
2
F5
LM
48
5
F6
LM
48
5
F7
LM
48
5
F8
LM
48
2
F9
LM
48
2
F10
LM
48
2
F11
LM
48
3.2
F13
LM
48
2
F14
LM
48
3.2
F15
LM
48
1.6
F17
LM
48
3.2
F18
LM
48
1
(1) Remove the left-hand side cover of controller unit.
{MC:3.3_Controller Unit Covers}
(2) Replace the fuses.
{ Fuse Replacement Procedures}
Fuse Locations
Rated voltage (V) Rated amperage (A)
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the PAT21A board fuses.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-272
MC-273
11.2
SND21A Board Fuses
Fuse Information
{SP:INDEX}
Board indications
Type
Rated voltage (V)
Rated amperage (A)
Removal Procedures
F1
LM
48
1
F2
LM
48
1
(1) Remove the SND21A board.
{MC:10.6_SND21A Board}
(2) Replace the fuses.
{ Fuse Replacement Procedures}
Fuse Locations
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the SND21A board fuses.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-273
MC-274
11.3
ELV21A Board Fuses
Fuse Information
{SP:INDEX}
Board indications
Type
Rated voltage (V)
Rated amperage (A)
Removal Procedures
F1
LM
250
3.2
F2
LM
250
3.2
F3
LM
48
2
F4
LM
48
2
(1) Remove the ELV21A board.
{MC:9.8_ELV21A Board}
(2) Replace the fuses.
{ Fuse Replacement Procedures}
Fuse Locations
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the ELV21A board fuses.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-274
MC-275
11.4
SND21B Board Fuses
Fuse Information
{SP:INDEX}
Board indications
Type
Rated voltage (V)
Rated amperage (A)
Removal Procedures
F1
LM
48
5
F2
LM
48
5
F3
LM
48
3.2
F4
LM
48
1.3
F5
LM
48
1.3
F6
LM
48
1.3
F7
LM
48
1.3
F8
LM
48
1.3
F9
LM
48
2
F10
LM
48
1.3
F11
LM
48
2
F12
LM
48
1.3
F14
LM
48
1.3
(1) Remove the SND21B board.
{MC:4.7_SND21B Board Assembly}
(2) Replace the fuses.
{ Fuse Replacement Procedures}
Fuse Locations
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the SND21B board fuses.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-275
MC-276
11.5
ERS21A/B Board Fuses
Fuse Information
{SP:INDEX}
ERS21A board fuses
Removal Procedures
Board indications
Type
Rated voltage (V)
Rated amperage (A)
F1
LM
48
5
F2
LM
48
5
F3
LM
48
2
Board indications
Type
Rated voltage (V)
Rated amperage (A)
F1
LM
48
5
F2
LM
48
5
F3
LM
48
5
(1) Remove the grid support assembly.
{MC:4.1_Grid Support Assembly}
(2) Replace the fuses.
{ Fuse Replacement Procedures}
Fuse Locations
ERS21B board fuses
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Reinstall the ERS21B board fuses.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-276
MC-277
12. Updating Software Versions
The following example shows the version update procedure for an RU having a name
of “ru10” and an IP address of “172.16.1.11”.
(1) Turn ON the power of the CL.
(2) Turn ON the power of the RU.
REFERENCE
For steps (4) through (8), perform "Uninstall Setup PC-TOOL."
(4) Put the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the CL.
(5) Click on [UNINSTALL] button.
Power ON in the following order.
- Power circuit breaker of the machine main body
- Start switch on the operation panel.
(3) Start the Machine Maintenance of the RU.
After the main screen is displayed, touch the LCD panel [upper left] and [upper right]
in this sequence.
Your key touches are acceptable during the time interval (several seconds) between
the instant at which the following window, which reads "FCR", opens and the instant
at which the message "Mechanical Initialization 1" appears.
(6) Click on [NEXT] button.
After several seconds, the display switches to the Machine Maintenance window.
(7) Click on [Remove] button.
INSTRUCTION
If the RU's Machine Maintenance cannot start, turn the RU power OFF and then
back ON, and start the Machine Maintenance.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-277
MC-278
(8) When Uninstall is completed, click on [Finish] button.
REFERENCE
(11) Click on [Next] button.
(12) Click on [Install] button.
For steps (9) through (16), perform "Install Setup PC-TOOL."
(9) Click on [INSTALL] button.
(10) Select “For FTP-Server”, and then click on [SET].
NOTE
(13) When Install is completed, click on [Finish] button.
Be sure to select “For FTP-Server”. If “For Client PC” is selected, you cannot
complete the installation procedures properly.
(14) Click on [START] button.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-278
MC-279
(15) From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU for its version update, and
click on [FTP] button.
012-201-09E
(16) Check the IP address, and click on [OK] button.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-279
MC-280
REFERENCE
For steps (17) through (23), perform "Update RU Software Version."
(17) From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU for its version update, and
click on [VERSION UP] button.
(20) Click on [OK] button.
CAUTION
While the Compact Flash Card is being written, never turn OFF the power circuit
breaker on the machine main unit or the circuit breaker on the distribution
switchboard. Failure to observe this precaution damages the contents of the
Compact Flash Card so that the RU cannot restart.
(18) Click on [OK] button.
(21) After completion of the write into the Compact Flash Card, press the
Enter key.
REFERENCE
(19) Check "RU VERSION", and click on [OK] button.
012-201-09E
The write into the Compact Flash Card takes about 5 minutes.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-280
MC-281
(22) Click on [OK] button.
(24) Turn OFF the power of the RU.
Power OFF in the following order.
- "Shutdown" button on the operation panel.
- Power circuit breaker of the machine main body
(25) Turn ON the power of the RU.
(23) Check the version of the RU software, and close Setup PC-TOOL.
Power ON in the following order.
- Power circuit breaker of the machine main body
- Start switch on the operation panel.
(26) Check the following points.
The RU normally enters the READY state.
The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without
nonuniformity.
{MC:15._Checking for Image Problems}
There is no error occurrence.
INSTRUCTION
In the case of "NO GOOD" indication, return to step (1) and perform install
procedures all over again.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-281
MC-282
13. Performing Delta Y Calculations for
Verification
REFERENCE
The procedure for performing delta Y calculations for verification is to be completed
by conducting a read operation to check that the read data calculation results are
within the specified ranges. This procedure is used to check whether the positional
relationship among IP and the scanner unit is properly adjusted.
The scanner unit temperature need not be taken into consideration when performing
delta Y calculations.
Q3 Is the sum of "the number of pixels (A) when the CCD output value is exceeded"
and "the number of pixels (B) when the CCD output value is zero" less than 201?
{MC:13.3_Countermeasures When "Data NG Pixels" Appears_ Determination
Procedures}
N
Compare "the number of pixels (A) when the CCD output value is exceeded"
with "the number of pixels (B) when the CCD output value is zero".
Y
Q2
Q4 Which of (A) and (B) is larger?
{MC:13.3_Countermeasures When "Data NG Pixels" Appears_
Countermeasures to Be Taken When the Number of Pixels in the
Image Area Is Determined to Be Abnormal}
A>B
After any of the following components is replaced or removed and reinstalled, perform
delta Y calculations after scanner correction for verification purposes.
Set the X-ray dose slightly smaller, and re-calculate
delta Y.
A<B
Check the irradiation field, and re-calculate delta Y.
- Scanner unit
- IP
Q5 Does "data NG pixels" disappear from the delta Y calculation result?
Flowchart of Delta Y Calculations
Or, is the sum of "the number of pixels (A) when the CCD output value is
exceeded" and "the number of pixels (B) when the CCD output value is zero"
less than 201?
START
{MC:13.3_Countermeasures When "Data NG Pixels" Appears_
Determination Procedures}
{MC:13.3_Countermeasures When "Data NG Pixels" Appears_
Countermeasures to Be Taken when the Number of Pixels in the
Image Area Is Determined to Be Abnormal}
Calculate delta Y.
{MC:13.1_Precedures of Delta Y Calculations}
Q1 Does "data NG pixels" appear with the result of delta Y calculation?
{MC:13.1_Precedures of Delta Y Calculations}
N
Y
N
Q2
Q3
Check the image of the image area displayed in "data NG pixels".
Y
Q6 Check the image of the image area displayed in "data NG pixels"?
{MC:13.3_Countermeasures When "Data NG Pixels" Appears_
Countermeasures to Be Taken "data NG pixels" Appears
After the X-ray Dose or Irradiation Field Is Adjusted}
Check that the delta Y calculation result is within the specified range.
N
Check the IP.
Y
Q2 Are all of CCD1 to CCD5 values are within the specified range?
{MC:13.2_Checking the Delta Y Calculation Result}
N
Y
END
Q2
Q7 Does any foreign matter attach to the IP?
Reseat the IP or the scanner unit.
N
Y
Check the scanner unit if clear vertical streaks
are observed in the image region displayed by
"data NG pixels".
FRAH3D10.ai
Clean the IP.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
FRAH3D11.ai
MC-282
MC-283
13.1
Procedures of Delta Y Calculations
NOTE
(6) Click on the [Scanner Check] button on the MUTL window, and display
the scanner check window.
Perform delta Y calculations for verification while neither the grid nor the photo-timer is
installed.
(1) Remove the grid.
{Instruction Manual}
(2) Remove the photo-timer.
{IN:Appendix 6._Installing and Removing the Photo-Timer Kit}
(3) Start the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC-TOOL_ Starting and Exiting RU PC-TOOL}
(4) Select the RU to be corrected from “LIST OF EXISTING RU” on the RU
PC-TOOL window.
(7) From the CL, register the following exposure menu:
- “Test” - “Sensitivity” (size: 17 inches x 17 inches)
(8) Click on the minimize button ( ) on the upper-right corner of the RU
PC-TOOL window to close the RU PC-TOOL window.
(5) Click on the [MUTL] button on the RU PC-TOOL window to display the
MUTL window.
(9) Display the MUTL Correction window on the right-hand of the Study
window on the CL screen.
Adjust the position and the window display size of the Correction window.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-283
MC-284
(10) Click on the [Scanner Check Details >>] on the Scanner Check
window, and display the Scanner Check Details window.
(12) Make an X-ray exposure at 10 mR.
The calculation results are displayed on the scanner check details window.
INSTRUCTION
Specify the exposure conditions so that the measurement is 7.5 to 12.5 mR.
NOTE
“RESULT:OK” indicating that the procedures of delta Y calculations are completed
appears on the Scanner Check Details window after the X-ray exposure. This
does not indicate whether the calculation results are good or not.
REFERENCE
Typical exposure conditions for exposing an IP to a dose of 10 mR are indicated
below:
Distance: 1.8 m
Voltage:
80 kV
Amperage: 50 mA
Time:
0.13 sec
(11) Click on the [Calculate Delta Y] button on the Scanner Check Details
window.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-284
MC-285
(13) Check that “data NG pixels” does not appear with the delta Y
calculation result.
<Determination and countermeasure>
When “data NG pixels” appears: Take the procedures for the
countermeasures when “data NG pixels” appears.
{MC:13.3_Countermeasures When “Data NG Pixels” Appears}
When “data NG pixels” does not appear: Check the delta Y calculation result.
{MC:13.2_Checking the Delta Y Calculation Result}
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-285
MC-285.1
13.2
Checking the Delta Y Calculation Result
(1) Determine whether the scanner unit and the IP are correctly installed
based on the results of the delta Y calculations.
REFERENCES
- Prescribed values for CCDs 1, 3 and 5: 0.310-5.470
- Prescribed values for CCDs 2 and 4: 0.320-5.040
If the calculation results are out of the prescribed values, again install the scanner
unit and the IP.
INSTRUCTIONS
- Sucanner unit
{MC:7.1.2_Installing the Scanner Unit}
- IP
{MC:5.1.2_Reinstalling the IP}
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-285.1
MC-285.2
13.3
Countermeasures When “Data NG Pixels”
Appears
Calculations take place based on output values from the respective CCDs for the delta
Y calculations.
If the output value from the CCD is defective for the delta Y calculation and the
calculation cannot be performed, information is indicated as “data NG pixels”.
Described below is how to take the countermeasures when “data NG pixels” appears.
How to Check “Data NG Pixels”
Determination Procedures
Described below are the procedures for determining whether the number of pixels in
the image area displayed in “data NG pixels” is abnormal, and the action to be taken
is determined.
(1) Add the displayed numbers of “the number of pixels when the CCD
output value is exceeded” and “the number of pixels when the CCD
output value is zero”.
<Calculation formula>
“Number of pixels when the CCD output value is exceeded” + “number of
pixels when the CCD output value is zero”
(2) Determine the action to be taken next based on the calculation result
of step 1.
When the calculation result is less than 201:
The number of pixels in the image area displayed in “data NG pixels” is
determined to be error-free, and the delta Y calculation result is checked.
{MC:13.2_Checking the Delta Y Calculation Result}
When the calculation result is 201 or larger:
The number of pixels in the image area displayed in “data NG pixels” is
erroneous. Change the X-ray dose or the irradiation field, and then re-calculate
delta Y.
{ Countermeasures to Be Taken When the Number of Pixels in the Image
Area Is Determined to Be Abnormal}
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-285.2
MC-285.3
Countermeasures to Be Taken when the Number of Pixels in the
Image Area Is Determined to Be Abnormal
Described below are the procedures for determining that the number of pixels in the
image area displayed in “data NG pixels” is abnormal, and the procedures for recalculating delta Y.
(1) Compare “the number of pixels when the CCD output value is
exceeded” with “the number of pixels when the CCD output value is
zero”, and determine the action to be taken next.
- “Number of pixels when the CCD output value is exceeded” > “Number of
pixels when the CCD output value is zero”
↓
Set the X-ray dose slightly smaller, and re-calculate delta Y.
- “Number of pixels when the CCD output value is exceeded” < “Number of
pixels when the CCD output value is zero”
↓
Check the X-ray irradiation field, and re-calculate delta Y.
Countermeasures to Be Taken “data NG pixels” Appears After
the X-Ray Dose or Irradiation Field Is Adjusted
In this step, the image area displayed in “data NG pixels” is identified, and it is
checked if the abnormal image arises from the scanner unit or IP failures.
REFERENCE
Described below is an example where “CCD4/36cm/L:100/120” is displayed in “data
NG pixels”.
(1) Identify the image area in the main scanning direction from the
displayed CCD No.
(2) Identify the image area in the subscanning direction from the
displayed distance value from the lower end of the image.
(3) Identify an area where the image areas in the main scanning direction
and the subscanning direction identified in steps (1) and (2) overlap.
(4) Identify the detailed position in the displayed image area.
(5) Check the image in the identified image area.
NOTE
If “data NG pixels” appears after the delta Y calculations are repeated or the
sum of “number of pixels when the CCD output value is exceeded” of “number
of pixels when the CCD output value is zero” is 201 or larger, take the following
procedures.
{ Countermeasures to Be Taken “Data NG Pixels” Appears After the
X-Ray Dose or Irradiation Field Is Adjusted}
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-285.3
MC-285.4
(6) Determine the action to be taken next based on the result of checking
the image in the image area.
When the image is error-free:
The number of pixels in the image area displayed in “data NG pixels” is
determined to be normal. Check the delta Y calculation result.
{MC:13.2_Checking the Delta Y Calculation Result}
When an error is observed in the image:
Check if a foreign matter attaches to the IP.
If it does, clean the IP, and re-calculate delta Y.
Check the scanner unit if clear vertical streaks are observed in the image region
displayed by “data NG pixels”, although no foreign matter attaches to the IP.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-285.4
MC-286
14. Scanner Correction
Flowchart when the IP is to be mounted/dismounted or replaced:
Scanner correction can be performed by the performance check of the MUTL or
“Correction” of the scanner check. The procedures for the scanner check are
described as an example.
NOTE
Carry out the scanner correction before delta Y calculations for verification.
Flowchart for Scanner Correction
Scanner correction is performed when:
- the scanner unit is to be mounted/dismounted or replaced;
- the IP is to be mounted/dismounted or replaced.
Detailed procedures for the scanner correction differ between when the scanner
unit or the IP is to be mounted/dismounted and when it is to be replaced. When
performing the scanner correction, refer to the applicable flowchart for the scanner
correction.
When the IP is to be mounted/
dismounted
When the IP is to be replaced
- Installing the IP
- Installing the IP
↓
↓
- Scanner correction (flowchart B for
scanner correction)
- Scanner correction (flowchart C for
scanner correction)
↓
↓
- Delta Y calculation verification
- Delta Y calculation verification
↓
- Resetting the No. of IP exposure
Flowchart when the scanner unit is to be mounted/dismounted or
replaced:
When the scanner unit is to be replaced
- Collecting data on the troubled scanner unit
↓
- Installing the new scanner unit
↓
- Scanner correction (flowchart A for
scanner correction)
When the scanner unit is to be
mounted/dismounted
- Installing the scanner unit
↓
- Scanner correction (flowchart C for
scanner correction)
↓
- Delta Y calculation verification
↓
- Delta Y calculation verification
↓
- Resetting the total time of laser ON (laser
illumination time)/illumination count
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-286
MC-287
Flowchart A for scanner correction: When replacing the scanner unit
MUTL Tree Diagram for Use in Scanner Correction
Flowchart B for scanner correction: When the IP is to be replaced
Flowchart C for scanner correction: When the scanner unit or the IP
is to be mounted/dismounted
[1] Preparations for Scanner Correction
[2] Restoring the Machine-Specific Data
[3] Erase IP
[4] Gain Setting
[5] Adjust Correction Light Source
[6] Update Light Source Shading
[7] Update CCD Offset Data
[8] Erase IP
[9] Update 2D Offset Data
[10] Updating the Shading Data
[11] Display Scanner Data
[12] Update X-ray Damage Correction Data
[13] Cheking for Image Problems
[14] Backing Up the Machine-Specific Data
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-287
MC-288
[1]
Preparations for Scanner Correction
(1) Remove the grid.
{Instruction Manual}
(2) Remove the photo-timer.
{IN:Appendix 6._Installing and Removing the Photo-Timer Kit}
(3) Register the following exposure menu in the CL for measuring the
actual dosage by means of the dosimeter.
- "Test" - "Sensitivity" (size: 17 inches x 17 inches)
REFERENCE
It is recommended that the repeat button on the CL screen be set to ON. Setting
the repeat button to ON allows the exposure menu to be repeatedly registered
continuously up to 32 times.
(4) Set the dosimeter at the center of the exposure plane and make X-ray
exposures at settings of 3 mR and 10 mR.
[2]
Restoring the Machine-Specific Data
The new scanner unit is equipped with a floppy disk in which the machine-specific
data is stored. The machine-specific data stored in the floppy disk need be restored
to the RU when the new scanner unit is to be replaced.
CAUTION
When restoring data, never turn OFF the RU’s power circuit breaker or
distribution switchboard circuit breaker because the Compact Flash Card is
accessed for restore purposes. If you turn OFF the RU’s power circuit breaker
or distribution switchboard circuit breaker, the contents of the Compact Flash
card will become damaged so that the RU will no longer start up.
(1) Start the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC-TOOL_ Starting and Exiting RU PC-TOOL}
(2) From “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, select the RU to be restored.
Record the measured values (measurements) and the exposure conditions after
the X-ray exposures.
INSTRUCTIONS
- When the IP is exposed to a dose of 3 mR, set the exposure conditions so that
the measurement measured by the dosimeter is 2.5 to 5.0 mR.
- When the IP is exposed to a dose of 10 mR, set the exposure conditions so
that the measurement measured by the dosimeter is 7.5 to 12.5 mR.
(3) From the pull-down menu for “RESTORE”, choose “INDIVIDUAL
DATA”.
NOTE
Ensure that no radiation obstacle is positioned between the X-ray tube and
exposure unit front cover.
REFERENCES
- Typical exposure conditions for exposing an IP to a dose of 3 mR are indicated
below:
Distance: 1.8 m
Voltage:
80 kV
Amperage: 50 mA
Time:
0.039 sec
- Typical exposure conditions for exposing an IP to a dose of 10 mR are
indicated below:
Distance: 1.8 m
Voltage:
80 kV
Amperage: 50 mA
Time:
0.13 sec
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-288
MC-289
(4) Click on the [EXECUTE] button.
[3]
Erase IP
(1) Select the RU to be corrected from the “LIST OF EXISTING RU” on the
RU PC-TOOL window.
(5) Specify the directory.
“A:\” is specified in this case.
(2) Click on the [MUTL] button on the RU PC-TOOL window to display the
MUTL window.
(6) Insert the attached floppy disk, and click on [OK].
Clicking on [OK], the data is copied from the floppy disk to the FTP (hard disk).
(7) Make sure that data copy is completed, and click on [OK].
(8) Reboot the RU and make the restored data effective.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-289
MC-290
(3) Click on the [Scanner Check] button on the MUTL window, and display
the Scanner Check window.
(5) Click on the [Erase IP] button on the Correction window to erase the
IP.
REFERENCE
It takes approx. 2 minutes to erase the IP.
(4) Click on the [Correction>>] button on the Scanner Check window to
display the Correction window.
When you click on the [Correction>>] button, the window to request the removal of
the grid is displayed. However, the grid is removed in the preparatory procedures
for the scanner correction, just click on the [OK] button in this procedure.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK":
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-290
MC-291
[4]
Gain Setting
(1) Click on the [Display Scanner Temperature] button on the Correction
window, and display the temperature of the scanner unit.
(3) From the CL, register the following exposure menu:
- "Test" - "Sensitivity" (size: 17 inches x 17 inches)
REFERENCE
This setting may be omitted when the repeat button is set to ON in “[1]
Preparations for scanner correction, procedure (3)”. Setting the repeat button to
ON allows the exposure menu to be repeatedly registered continuously up to 32
times.
(4) Click on the minimize button ( ) on the upper-right corner of the RU
PC-TOOL window to close the RU PC-TOOL window.
(2) Check to make sure that the displayed scanner unit temperature
(Average) is within the range from 35 to 40°C.
(5) Display the MUTL Correction window on the right-hand of the Study
window on the CL screen.
Adjust the position and the window display size of the Correction window.
INSTRUCTIONS
- If the scanner unit temperature is below 35°C, exit the current mode, and then
repeat an “IP erasure” operation until the temperature is 35°C or higher (and
40°C or lower).
{Instruction Manual}
- If the scanner unit temperature is above 40°C, remove the exposure unit front
cover, and wait until the temperature in the scanner unit is 35°C or higher (and
40°C or lower). However, if the scanner unit temperature may lower to 40 °C
or lower in a short time with the exposure unit front cover put on, do not remove
the exposure unit front cover.
{MC:3.1.1_Exposure Unit Front Cover}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-291
MC-292
(6) Click on the [Gain Setting>>] button on the Correction window to
display the Gain Setting window.
(7) Click on the [Mode Setting] button on the Gain Setting window.
When you click on the [Mode Setting] button, the window for inquiring whether the
mode setting is to be done is displayed. Click on the [OK] button in this procedure.
“RESLUT:OK” appears when the mode setting is accepted.
(8) Make an X-ray exposure under the exposure conditions recorded in
“[1] Preparations for scanner correction, procedure (3)” (the exposure
conditions of the exposure at a setting of 10 mR).
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-292
MC-293
(9) Input the measured value recorded in “[1] Preparations for scanner
correction, procedure (3)” (measured value of the X-ray exposure at a
setting of 10 mR) in the gain setting field on the Gain setting window.
Make sure that the indicator on the machine (status lamp) or the
Ready indication on the CL screen lights up in green, and then click
on the [SET] button.
(10) Make sure that “RESULT: OK” appears on the Gain Setting window,
and then click on the [CANCEL] button to return to the Correction
window.
REFERENCE
“RESLUT:OK” appears in approx. 10 seconds after the [SET] button is clicked.
The gain setting is complete now.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK":
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
When the error code “12231” appears, the exposure dosage might differ. Make
another attempt under the exposure conditions varied.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-293
MC-294
[5]
Adjust Correction Light Source
(1) Click on the [Display Scanner Temperature] button on the Correction
window, and display the temperature of the scanner unit.
(3) Click on the [Adjust Correction Light Source] button on the Correction
window.
When you click on the [Adjust Correction Light Source] button, the window inquiring
as to whether the adjustment of correction light source luminosity appears. Click
on the [OK] button in response to the window, and the result of the adjustment of
correction light source luminosity is displayed.
(2) Check to make sure that the displayed scanner unit temperature
(Average) is within the range from 35 to 40°C.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK":
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
INSTRUCTIONS
- If the scanner unit temperature is below 35°C, exit the current mode, and then
repeat an “IP erasure” operation until the temperature is 35°C or higher (and
40°C or lower).
{Instruction Manual}
- If the scanner unit temperature is above 40°C, remove the exposure unit front
cover, and wait until the temperature in the scanner unit is 35°C or higher (and
40°C or lower). However, if the scanner unit temperature may lower to 40 °C
or lower in a short time with the exposure unit front cover put on, do not remove
the exposure unit front cover.
{MC:3.1.1_Exposure Unit Front Cover}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-294
MC-295
[6]
Update Light Source Shading
(1) Click on the [Display Scanner Temperature] button on the Correction
window, and display the temperature of the scanner unit.
(3) Click on the [Update Light Source Shading] button on the Correction
window.
When you click on the [Update Light Source Shading] button, the window inquiring
as to whether light source shading is to be updated appears. Click on the [OK]
button in response to the window, and the result of the light source shading update
is displayed.
(2) Check to make sure that the displayed scanner unit temperature
(Average) is within the range from 35 to 40°C.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK":
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
INSTRUCTIONS
- If the scanner unit temperature is below 35°C, exit the current mode, and then
repeat an “IP erasure” operation until the temperature is 35°C or higher (and
40°C or lower).
{Instruction Manual}
- If the scanner unit temperature is above 40°C, remove the exposure unit front
cover, and wait until the temperature in the scanner unit is 35°C or higher (and
40°C or lower). However, if the scanner unit temperature may lower to 40 °C
or lower in a short time with the exposure unit front cover put on, do not remove
the exposure unit front cover.
{MC:3.1.1_Exposure Unit Front Cover}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-295
MC-296
[7]
Update CCD Offset Data
(1) Click on the [Display Scanner Temperature] button on the Correction
window, and display the temperature of the scanner unit.
(3) Click on the [Update CCD Offset Data] button on the Correction
window.
When you click on the [Update CCD Offset Data] button, the window inquiring as
to whether CCD offset data is to be updated appears. Click on the [OK] button in
response to the window, and the result of the CCD offset data update is displayed.
(2) Check to make sure that the displayed scanner unit temperature
(Average) is within the range from 35 to 40°C.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK":
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
INSTRUCTIONS
- If the scanner unit temperature is below 35°C, exit the current mode, and then
repeat an “IP erasure” operation until the temperature is 35°C or higher (and
40°C or lower).
{Instruction Manual}
- If the scanner unit temperature is above 40°C, remove the exposure unit front
cover, and wait until the temperature in the scanner unit is 35°C or higher (and
40°C or lower). However, if the scanner unit temperature may lower to 40 °C
or lower in a short time with the exposure unit front cover put on, do not remove
the exposure unit front cover.
{MC:3.1.1_Exposure Unit Front Cover}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-296
MC-297
[8]
Erase IP
(1) Click on the [Erase IP] button on the Correction window to erase the
IP.
[9]
Update 2D Offset Data
(1) Click on the [Display Scanner Temperature] button on the Correction
window, and display the temperature of the scanner unit.
(2) Check to make sure that the displayed scanner unit temperature
(Average) is within the range from 35 to 40°C.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK":
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
INSTRUCTIONS
- If the scanner unit temperature is below 35°C, exit the current mode, and then
repeat an “IP erasure” operation until the temperature is 35°C or higher (and
40°C or lower).
{Instruction Manual}
- If the scanner unit temperature is above 40°C, remove the exposure unit front
cover, and wait until the temperature in the scanner unit is 35°C or higher (and
40°C or lower). However, if the scanner unit temperature may lower to 40 °C
or lower in a short time with the exposure unit front cover put on, do not remove
the exposure unit front cover.
{MC:3.1.1_Exposure Unit Front Cover}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-297
MC-298
(3) From the CL, register the following exposure menu:
- "Test" - "Sensitivity" (size: 17 inches x 17 inches)
REFERENCE
(6) Click on the [Update 2D Offset Data] button on the Correction window.
When you click on the [Update 2D Offset Data] button, the window inquiring as to
whether 2D offset data is to be updated appears. Click on the [OK] button.
This setting may be omitted when the repeat button is set to ON in “[1]
Preparations for scanner correction, procedure (3)”. Setting the repeat button to
ON allows the exposure menu to be repeatedly registered continuously up to 32
times.
(4) Click on the minimize button ( ) on the upper-right corner of the RU
PC-TOOL window to close the RU PC-TOOL window.
(5) Display the MUTL Correction window on the right-hand of the Study
window on the CL screen.
Adjust the position and the window display size of the Correction window.
(7) Make an X-ray exposure at 0 mR.
After the X-ray exposure is made at a setting of 0 mR dosage, the 2D offset data
is updated, and “RESULT:OK” appears in approx. 15 seconds, indicating that the
update is completed.
REFERENCE
The "Expose at 0 mR" step is to perform an IP read operation without exposing
an IP to radiation. The IP can be read without exposing it to radiation when you
make a radiographic exposure with the X-ray tube radiation field positioned
outside the machine (be sure to adjust the X-ray tube for the minimum output
value).
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK":
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-298
MC-299
[10] Updating the Shading Data
The following two kinds of shading data update are available. Refer to the
corresponding procedures for updating the data.
[10-1]
Updating the Shading Sensitivity Data
(1) Click on the [Display Scanner Temperature] button on the Correction
window, and display the temperature of the scanner unit.
When sensitivity corrections are to be made
{MC:14.[10-1]_Updating the Shading Sensitivity Data}
* A dosimeter is required for sensitivity correction.
When no sensitivity corrections are to be made
{MC:14.[10-2]_Update Shading Data}
* Take the procedures below only when:
- the scanner unit or the IP is not to be replaced;
- the S value of exposure under the same exposure conditions is not to be changed.
(2) Check to make sure that the displayed scanner unit temperature
(Average) is within the range from 35 to 40°C.
INSTRUCTIONS
- If the scanner unit temperature is below 35°C, exit the current mode, and then
repeat an “IP erasure” operation until the temperature is 35°C or higher (and
40°C or lower).
{Instruction Manual}
- If the scanner unit temperature is above 40°C, remove the exposure unit front
cover, and wait until the temperature in the scanner unit is 35°C or higher (and
40°C or lower). However, if the scanner unit temperature may lower to 40 °C
or lower in a short time with the exposure unit front cover put on, do not remove
the exposure unit front cover.
{MC:3.1.1_Exposure Unit Front Cover}
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-299
MC-300
(3) From the CL, register the following exposure menu:
- "Test" - "Sensitivity" (size: 17 inches x 17 inches)
(6) Click on the [Update Shading Data>>] button on the Correction
window to display the Update Shading Data window.
REFERENCE
This setting may be omitted when the repeat button is set to ON in “[1]
Preparations for scanner correction, procedure (3)”. Setting the repeat button to
ON allows the exposure menu to be repeatedly registered continuously up to 32
times.
(4) Click on the minimize button ( ) on the upper-right corner of the RU
PC-TOOL window to close the RU PC-TOOL window.
(5) Display the MUTL Correction window on the right-hand of the Study
window on the CL screen.
Adjust the position and the window display size of the Correction window.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-300
MC-301
(7) Click on the [Update Shading and Sensitivity Data>>] button on the
Update Shading Data window to display the Update Shading and
Sensitivity Data window.
When you click on the [Update Shading and Sensitivity Data>>] button, the window
inquiring as to whether the shading and sensitivity data is to be updated appears.
Click on the [OK] button.
(8) Click on the [Mode Setting] button on the Update Shading and
Sensitivity Data window.
When you click on the [Mode Setting] button, the window inquiring as to whether the
mode setting is to be done appears. Click on the [OK] button.
(9) Make an X-ray exposure under the exposure conditions recorded in
“[1] Preparations for scanner correction, procedure (3)” (the exposure
conditions of the exposure at a setting of 3 mR).
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-301
MC-302
(10) When an image is displayed on the CL screen, input the measured
value recorded in “[1] Preparations for scanner correction, procedure
(3)” (measured value of the X-ray exposure at a setting of 3 mR) in the
Mode Setting field in the Update Shading and Sensitivity Data window.
(12) Make sure that “RESULT: OK” appears on the Update Shading and
Sensitivity Data window. Then click on the [CANCEL] button to return
to the Correction window.
(11) Make sure that the indicator on the machine (status lamp) or the Ready
indication on the CL screen lights up in green, and then click on the
[SET] button in the Update Shading and Sensitivity Data window.
REFERENCE
“RESLUT:OK” appears in approx. 50 seconds after the [SET] button is clicked.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK":
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-302
MC-303
[10-2]
Update Shading Data
(1) Click on the [Display Scanner Temperature] button on the Correction
window, and display the temperature of the scanner unit.
(3) From the CL, register the following exposure menu:
- "Test" - "Sensitivity" (size: 17 inches x 17 inches)
REFERENCE
This setting may be omitted when the repeat button is set to ON in “[1]
Preparations for scanner correction, procedure (3)”. Setting the repeat button to
ON allows the exposure menu to be repeatedly registered continuously up to 32
times.
(4) Click on the minimize button ( ) on the upper-right corner of the RU
PC-TOOL window to close the RU PC-TOOL window.
(2) Check to make sure that the displayed scanner unit temperature
(Average) is within the range from 35 to 40°C.
(5) Display the MUTL Correction window on the right-hand of the Study
window on the CL screen.
Adjust the position and the window display size of the Correction window.
INSTRUCTIONS
- If the scanner unit temperature is below 35°C, exit the current mode, and then
repeat an “IP erasure” operation until the temperature is 35°C or higher (and
40°C or lower).
{Instruction Manual}
- If the scanner unit temperature is above 40°C, remove the exposure unit front
cover, and wait until the temperature in the scanner unit is 35°C or higher (and
40°C or lower). However, if the scanner unit temperature may lower to 40 °C
or lower in a short time with the exposure unit front cover put on, do not remove
the exposure unit front cover.
{MC:3.1.1_Exposure Unit Front Cover}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-303
MC-304
(6) Click on the [Update Shading Data>>] button on the Correction
window to display the Update Shading Data window.
(7) Click on the [Update Shading Data>>] button on the Update Shading
Data window to display the Update Shading Data window.
When you click on the [Update Shading Data>>] button, the window inquiring as to
whether the shading data is to be updated appears. Click on the [OK] button.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-304
MC-305
(8) Click on the [Mode Setting] button on the Update Shading Data
window.
When you click on the [Mode Setting] button, the window inquiring as to whether the
mode setting is to be done appears. Click on the [OK] button.
(9) Make an X-ray exposure under the exposure conditions recorded in
“[1] Preparations for scanner correction, procedure (3)” (the exposure
conditions of the exposure at a setting of 3 mR).
(10) Make sure that “RESULT:OK” appears on the Update Shading Data
window, and then click on the [CANCEL] button to return to the
Correction window.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK":
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-305
MC-306
[11] Display Scanner Data
(4) Click on the [Scanner Check] button on the MUTL window, and display
the Scanner Check window.
REFERENCE
The “RATIO OF X-RAY DAMAGE” value recorded in this section is used to compare
with the “RATIO OF X-RAY DAMAGE” value after the X-ray damage data is updated.
(1) Start the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC-TOOL_ Starting and Exiting RU PC-TOOL}
(2) Select the RU to be corrected from the “LIST OF EXISTING RU” on the
RU PC-TOOL window.
(3) Click on the [MUTL] button on the RU PC-TOOL window to display the
MUTL window.
012-201-09E
(5) Click on the [Display Scanner Data] button on the Scanner Check
window to display the scanner data list.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-306
MC-307
(6) Write down the “RATIO OF X-RAY DAMAGE” value in the scanner data
list.
[12] Update X-ray Damage Correction Data
(1) Click on the [Display Scanner Temperature] button on the Correction
window, and display the temperature of the scanner unit.
(2) Check to make sure that the displayed scanner unit temperature
(Average) is within the range from 35 to 40°C.
INSTRUCTIONS
- If the scanner unit temperature is below 35°C, exit the current mode, and then
repeat an “IP erasure” operation until the temperature is 35°C or higher (and
40°C or lower).
{Instruction Manual}
- If the scanner unit temperature is above 40°C, remove the exposure unit front
cover, and wait until the temperature in the scanner unit is 35°C or higher (and
40°C or lower). However, if the scanner unit temperature may lower to 40 °C
or lower in a short time with the exposure unit front cover put on, do not remove
the exposure unit front cover.
{MC:3.1.1_Exposure Unit Front Cover}
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-307
MC-308
(3) From the CL, register the following exposure menu:
- "Test" - "Sensitivity" (size: 17 inches x 17 inches)
(6) Click on the [Update X-ray Damage Correction Data] button on the
Correction window.
REFERENCE
This setting may be omitted when the repeat button is set to ON in “[1]
Preparations for scanner correction, procedure (3)”. Setting the repeat button to
ON allows the exposure menu to be repeatedly registered continuously up to 32
times.
(4) Click on the minimize button ( ) on the upper-right corner of the RU
PC-TOOL window to close the RU PC-TOOL window.
(5) Display the MUTL Correction window on the right-hand of the Study
window on the CL screen.
Adjust the position and the window display size of the Correction window.
(7) Make an X-ray exposure under the exposure conditions recorded in
“[1] Preparations for scanner correction, procedure (3)” (the exposure
conditions of the exposure at a setting of 10 mR).
(8) Display the scanner data and make sure that the “RATIO OF X-RAY
DAMAGE” value is smaller than the value written down in the
procedure (6) of [11] Display Scanner Data.
{MC:14.[11]_Display Scanner Data}
REFERENCE
The initial “RATIO OF X-RAY DAMAGE” value is zero.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-308
MC-309
[13] Checking for Image Problems
(1) Run an image check.
{MC:15._Checking for Image Problems}
[14] Backing Up the Machine-Specific Data
CAUTION
When backing up data, never turn OFF the RU’s power circuit breaker or
distribution switchboard circuit breaker because the Compact Flash card is
accessed for restore purposes. If you turn OFF the RU’s power circuit breaker
or distribution switchboard circuit breaker, the contents of the Compact Flash
card will become damaged so that the RU will no longer start up.
(1) Start the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC-TOOL_ Starting and Exiting RU PC-TOOL}
(2) Select the RU to be backed up from the “LIST OF EXSITING RU” on
the RU PC-Tool window.
(3) Select "INDIVIDUAL DATA (RU->HD)" from the “BACKUP” pull-down
menu, and click on the [EXECUTE] button.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-309
MC-310
(4) When a confirmation window opens, click on the [OK] button.
(5) When the message indicating the completion of data transfer appears,
click on the [OK] button, and terminate backup of the machine-specific
data.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-310
MC-311
15. Checking for Image Problems
Checking for Irregularities, Density Problems, and Sensitivity
Problems
Checking for False Image
(1) From the CL, register the following exposure menu:
- "Test" - "Sensitivity" (size: 17 inches x 17 inches)
(2) Attach 150 mm steel rule to the center of the exposure unit front cover.
INSTRUCTION
The check for image problems must be conducted without the grid and photo-timer (light
receiving unit) installed.
A machine with the grid and the photo-timer (light receiving unit) installed should be
checked with both of them removed and with both of them installed, respectively.
(1) From the CL, register the following exposure menu:
- "Test" - "Sensitivity" (size: 17 inches x 17 inches)
(2) Expose an IP to a dose of 1 mR.
REFERENCE
Typical exposure conditions for exposing an IP to a dose of 1 mR are indicated
below:
Distance:
1.8 m
Voltage:
80 kV
Amperage: 50 mA
Time:
0.013 sec.
(3) Have the printer generate a film output.
(4) Check the output film for irregularities and biased densities.
(5) Check for sensitivity and density problems.
Check to make sure that the system sensitivity value and the film density value
appearing on the output film are approximately 200 and 1.2, respectively.
{ Checking the Film Character Format Information}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
(3) Expose an IP to a dose of 1 mR.
REFERENCE
Typical exposure conditions for exposing an IP to a dose of 1 mR are indicated
below:
Distance:
1.8 m
Voltage:
80 kV
Amperage: 50 mA
Time:
0.013 sec.
(4) Have the printer generate a film output.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-311
MC-312
(5) Check to make sure that no false image is included in the image of the
frame and the steel rule on the output film.
Checking the Film Character Format Information
Make sure that the film character format information is displayed on the output film.
Verify that none of the characters look blurred or broken.
(1) Check the film character format information.
Check the following:
- The film character format information that has been set is correct.
- There is nothing abnormal such as blurred or broken characters.
REFERENCE
The details of the film character format information and the character display
locations are as follows.
(6) Detach the steel rules from the exposure unit front cover.
Checking the Read Center
Have on hand the output film used for " Checking for False Image". Check that the
steel rule images are centered with respect to the vertical and horizontal exposure
center lines.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-312
MC-313
16. Checking and Adjusting the Format
INSTRUCTION
The check for image problems must be conducted without the grid and photo-timer (light
receiving unit) installed.
A machine with the grid and the photo-timer (light receiving unit) installed should be
checked with both of them removed and with both of them installed, respectively.
16.1
(4) Have the printer generate a film output.
(5) Measure the length of a steel rule on the output film, and convert it to
a length of a steel rule at a 100 % magnification.
<Formula: A>
Steel rule length (mm) output at 100 % magnification =
Actual length of steel rule on output film (mm)
Film reduction percentage (%)/100
Checking and Adjusting the Format
(Subscan Length)
INSTRUCTION
Be sure to correct the scanner after the adjustment of the format (subscan length).
Procedures for Checking the Format (Subscan Length)
(1) From the CL, register the following exposure menu:
- "Test" - "Sensitivity" (Size: 14 inches × 17 inches)
(2) Attach a steel rule to the center of the exposure unit front cover.
(6) Calculate the steel rule length projected onto the IP.
<Formula: B>
Steel rule length projected onto IP (mm)
= Actual length of steel rule (mm) x (1 +
23.5 mm or 28.5 mm
X-ray tube-to-exposure plane distance (mm)
)
REFERENCE
23.5 (mm): Distance from the exposure plane when the IP is at the exposure
position.
Use the value of 28.5 (mm) when the spacer in the exposure unit (on the rear
side) is removed so as to install the following photo-timers.
- Hitachi's photo-timer (ion chamber AID)
- COMET's photo-timer (3ch)
- Siemens' photo-timer (ion chamber, 3ch)
- Philips' photo-timer (ion chamber, 3ch)
(3) Expose an IP to a dose of 1 mR.
REFERENCE
Typical exposure conditions for exposing an IP to a dose of 1 mR are indicated
below:
Distance:
1.8 m
Voltage:
80 kV
Amperage:
50 mA
Time:
0.013 sec.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-313
MC-314
(7) Check to make sure that the ratio of expansion and contraction of the
steel rule on the output film is 0.6 % or less.
<Formula: C>
|Steel rule length projected onto IP (mm) – Steel rule length output at 100% magnification|
x 100 % ≤ 0.6 %
Steel rule length projected onto IP
INSTRUCTION
If the ratio of expansion and contraction of the steel rule on the output film is 0.6
% or larger, adjust the format (subscan length).
{ Procedures for Adjusting Format (Subscan Length)}
Procedures for Adjusting Format (Subscan Length)
(1) Calculate the value to adjust the format (subscan length).
REFERENCE
When the value to adjust the format (subscan length) is to be calculated, use
the values of “steel rule length projected onto the IP” and “steel rule length when
output with 100% magnification” obtained in the procedures for checking the
format (subscan length).
<Calculation formula>
Value to adjust the format (subscan length)=((
Calculation example:
- Actual steel rule length: 175 mm
- Actual steel rule length on output film: 181.0 mm
- Film reduction percentage: 100% (High density setting/
14inches x 17 inches/Single image output)
- Distance between X-ray tube and exposure plane: 1,000 mm
- Distance from exposure plane with IP located at exposure
position: 23.5 mm
<Formula: A>
- Steel rule length when output at 100 % magnification:
181.0 mm
≈ 181.0 mm
1
Steel rule length projected onto the IP
Steel rule length when output with 100 % )-1) x 100 %
magnification
Calculation example
179.1
Value to adjust the format (subscan length)=(( 181.0 )-1) x 100 % ≈ -1.05
(2) Start the MUTL.
{MU:4.4_MUTL}
(3) Click on the [Mechanical Check] button on the MUTL window to
display the Mechanical Check window.
<Formula: B>
23.5 mm
- Steel rule length projected onto IP: 175 mm x (1+ 1000 mm ) ≈ 179.1 mm
<Formula: C>
|179.1 mm-181.0
mm|
- Ratio of expansion and contraction of steel rule on output film:
x 100 % ≈ 1.06 %
179.1 mm
* Since the reduction percentage of the steel rule on the film is 1.06 %, it is
determined that the reduction percentage of the steel rule on the film does not
conform to a value of 0.6 %. Therefore, the adjustment of the format (subscan
length) need be performed.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-314
MC-315
(4) Click on the [Sub-Scanning>>] button on the Mechanical Check
window to display the Sub-Scanning window.
(6) Input the calculated value to adjust the format (subscan length), and
click on the [SET] button.
When you click on the [SET] button, the window inquiring as to whether the value to
adjust the subscan length is to be changed appears. Click on the [OK] button.
(5) Click on the [Format Adjustment>>] button on the Sub-Scanning
window to display the Format Adjustment window.
(7) Make another film output, and check the format (subscan length).
{ Procedures for Checking the Format (Subscan Length)}
(8) Make sure that the expansion ratio of the steel rule on the output
film is approx. 0.6 % or less, and back up the machine-specific data
(INDIVIDUAL DATA (RU->HD)).
(9) Correct the scanner.
{MC:14._Scanner Correction_Flowchart C for scanner correction}
INSTRUCTION
Be sure to correct the scanner after the adjustment of the format (subscan
length). Note that the procedures of the scanner correction differ depending on
the conditions.
Refer to “Flowchart C for scanner correction: When the scanner unit or the IP is
to be mounted/dismounted” for the scanner correction to be performed here.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-315
MC-316
16.2 Procedures for Checking and Adjusting the
Format (Subscan Start Point)
INSTRUCTION
<Calculation formula>
Distance from the film frame to the image start point when output with 100 % magnification =
Distance from the film frame to the image start point (measurement)
< 2.0 (mm)
Film scale factor (%)/100
Be sure to correct the scanner after the adjustment of the format (subscan start point).
Procedures for Checking the Format (Subscan Start Point)
REFERENCE
To check the format (subscan start point), make use of the film output in checking the
format (subscan length).
(1) Measure the distance from the film frame to the image start point and
convert it into a distance output with 100 % magnification.
Make sure that the converted value is 2.0 mm or less.
INSTRUCTION
If the value that the distance from the film frame to the image start point is
converted into a distance output with 100 % magnification is 2.0 mm or more,
adjust the format (subscan start point).
{ Procedures for Adjusting the Format (Subscan Start Point)}
Calculation example:
- Actual distance from film frame to image start point: 2.5 mm
- Film reduction percentage: 100 % (High density setting/14 inches x 17 inches/
Single image output)
Distance from film frame to image start point when output at a 100 % = 2.5 mm
≈ 2.5 mm
1
magnification
* Since the value that the distance from the film frame to the image start point is
converted into a distance when output at a 100 % magnification is 2.0 mm or
larger, the format (subscan start point) need be adjusted.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-316
MC-317
Procedures for Adjusting the Format (Subscan Start Point)
(1) Calculate the value to adjust the format (subscan start point).
(4) Click on the [Sub-Scanning>>] button on the Mechanical Check
window to display the Sub-Scanning window.
REFERENCE
To calculate the value to adjust the format (subscan start point), make use of the
value of “distance from the film frame to the image start point when output with
100 % magnification”, which was calculated in the procedures for checking the
format (subscan start point).
<Calculation formula>
Value to adjust the format (subscan start point) =
Distance from the film frame to the image start point when output with 100 % magnification x 10
(2) Start the MUTL.
{MU:4.4_MUTL}
(3) Click on the [Mechanical Check] button on the MUTL window to
display the Mechanical Check window.
(5) Click on the [Format Adjustment>>] button on the Sub-Scanning
window to display the Format Adjustment window.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-317
MC-318
(6) Input the calculated value to adjust the format (subscan start point),
and click on the [SET] button.
When you click on the [SET] button, the window inquiring as to whether the subscan
start point is to be changed appears. Click on the [OK] button.
INSTRUCTION
A symbol “+” or “-“ needs to be input before the adjustment value when inputting
the adjustment value of the calculated format (subscan start point). By inputting
the symbol “+” or “-“, the image start point can be shifted upward or downward in
the subscanning direction.
- To shift the image start point upward:
Input “+” before the adjustment value of the calculated format (subscan start
point).
- To shift the image start point downward:
Input “-” before the adjustment value of the calculated format (subscan start
point).
(9) Correct the scanner.
{MC:14._Scanner Correction_Flowchart C for scanner correction}}
INSTRUCTION
Be sure to correct the scanner after the adjustment of the format (subscan start
point). Note that the procedures of the scanner correction differ depending on the
conditions.
Refer to “Flowchart C for scanner correction: When the scanner unit or the IP is
to be mounted/dismounted” for the scanner correction to be performed here.
(7) Make another film output, and check the format (subscan start point).
{ Procedures for Checking the Format (Subscan Start Point)}
(8) Make sure that the value that the distance from the film frame to
the image start point is converted into a distance output with 100 %
magnification is 2.0 mm or less, and back up the machine-specific
data (INDIVIDAUL DATA (RU->HD)).
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-318
MC-319
17. Jigs
{SP:INDEX}
17.1
REF No.
List of Jigs
Name
Common shorting cable
<Common with FCR5501 series/VELOCITY T>
1
PART No.
136Y8889
Manufacturer
FUJIFILM
Corporation
Model number
Remarks
The common shorting cable is used in connection with the
following cables.
- ELV21A maintenance cable (REF No.2)
- Interlock defeating jig cable in the exposure unit (REF No.3)
- Patient protection switch detector defeating jig cable (REF
No.4)
ELV21A maintenance cable
Used when the exposure unit and the motor-driven grip handle
are to be raised/lowered while the controller unit and the
machine main body are not connected. Setting the DIP switch
and the connection of the common shorting cable are required
for use.
{MC:17.2_How to Use the Elevation Jig Cable}
When purchased
individually (without the
common shorting cable)
136Y8848
FUJIFILM
Corporation
2
When purchased together
with the common shorting
cable (REF No.1,
136Y8889)
136Y8953
012-201-08E
10.02.2006 FM4977
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-319
MC-320
REF No.
Name
Interlock defeating jig cable in the exposure unit
<Common with VELOCITY T>
PART No.
Manufacturer
When purchased
individually (Without the
common shorting cable)
136Y8840
FUJIFILM
Corporation
3
Model number
Remarks
Used with the common shorting cable connected to check
the operation in the exposure unit while the front cover of the
exposure unit is removed, and used to defeat the following
interlock switches.
- Exposure unit front cover laser safety interlock switches (SH3
and SH4)
- Grid replacement cover interlock switches (MSH1 and MSH12)
When purchased together
with the common shorting
cable (REF No.1,
136Y8889)
136Y8954
Patient protection switch detector defeating jig cable
136Y8812
(Without the common
shorting cable)
4
Used in connection with the common shorting cable when the
exposure unit is to be raised/lowered while the front cover of
the exposure unit is removed, and used to defeat the patient
protection descent prevention interlock switches (MSH2 and
MSH3).
FUJIFILM
Corporation
Electromagnetic brake releasing jig
<Common with VELOCITY T>
5
012-201-08E
10.02.2006 FM4977
890Y0006
(Cable included)
FUJIFILM
Corporation
- Used to release the subscanning electromagnetic brake (MB1)
to manually move the scanner unit to a desired position.
- Used to release the IP movement electromagnetic brake (MB2)
to manually move the IP to a desired position.
Note that the subscanning electromagnetic brake (MB1) and
the IP movement electromagnetic brake (MB2) can be released
individually.
{MC:17.3_How to Use the Electromagnetic Brake
Releasing Jig}
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-320
MC-321
REF No.
Name
Loopback cable
<Common with PROFECT CS/VELOCITY T>
6
PART No.
Manufacturer
Model number
Remarks
898Y0981
FUJIFILM
Corporation
Used to verify that the network hardware connection up to and
including the hub entrance is normally made.
REF No.7.1:343N0059
REF No.7.2:343N0060
FUJIFILM
Corporation
Used to replace the SUS belt. The machine includes the
scanner unit leveling jig as a standard item.
357N1502
FUJIFILM
Corporation
Used when the scanner unit is removed and temporarily placed.
347N2007
FUJIFILM
Corporation
Used to adjust the gap between the body of the subscanning
electromagnetic brake (MB1) or the IP movement
electromagnetic brake (MB2) and its brake shoe.
347N1638
FUJIFILM
Corporation
Used as a floor plate of an adjuster bolt to be used for lifting up
the machine main body for the installation or transfer.
Scanner unit leveling jig
<Common with VELOCITY T>
7
Scanner unit base
<Common with VELOCITY T>
8
Brake adjusting jig
<Common with VELOCITY T>
9
Spacer jig
10
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-321
MC-322
17.2
How to Use the Elevation Jig Cable
Connection Procedures
(1) Remove the lower left-hand side cover of elevation unit.
REFERENCE
The elevation jig cable (ELV21A maintenance cable and common shorting cable),
when connected with the ELV21A board connector (CN9), allows the exposure unit
and the motor-driven grip handle to rise/lower while the controller unit is not connected
with the machine body. Note that, however, the exposure unit and the motor-driven
grip handle cannot be raised/lowered only by connecting the elevation jig cable. The
DIP switch (S1) setting of the ELV21A board should be changed when using the
elevation jig cable.
Since the exposure unit elevation upper-limit/lower-limit interlock switches also work
with the elevation jig cable used, the exposure unit will not overrun.
{MC:3.2.3_Lower Left-Hand Side Cover of Elevation Unit}
(2) Draw out the ELV21A board assembly.
Components
Name
Quantity
Remarks
ELV21A maintenance cable
1
136Y8848: Approx. 150 mm
Common shorting cable
1
136Y8889: Approx. 400 mm
(3) Connect the common shorting cable with the ELV21A maintenance
cable, to allow them to serve as the elevation jig cable.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-322
MC-323
(4) Disconnect the cable connector (CN9) from the ELV21A board, and
connect the connector (CN9) of the elevation jig cable.
(5) Change the DIP switch (S1) setting of the ELV21A board.
REFERENCE
The exposure unit cannot be raised/lowered unless the DIP switch (S1) setting is
not changed even if the elevation jig cable is connected.
INSTRUCTIONS
- The DIP switch (S1) is so small that it might probably get damaged if undue
force is applied to change the setting. Be sure to use a jeweler’s screwdriver (flat
blade screwdriver). Do not slide the switch to the ON position by unnecessarily
strong force.
- Be sure to return the DIP switch (S1) setting after the operation. Otherwise,
the backlight cathode ray tube of the operation panel keeps lit, resulting in the
reduction of the service life of the backlight cathode ray tube.
(6) Push in the ELV21A board assembly with the elevation jig cable
connected.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-323
MC-324
Operation Procedures
(1) Turn ON the circuit breaker on the distribution switchboard.
(2) Turn ON the power circuit breaker for the machine main body.
REFERENCE
The start switch of the operation panel need not be turned ON.
(3) Turn ON the elevation switch to raise/lower the exposure unit.
Removal Procedures
(1) Disconnect the elevation jig cable.
For removal, reverse the installation procedures.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-324
MC-325
17.3
How to Use the Electromagnetic Brake
Releasing Jig
Features
The electromagnetic brake releasing jig has its own main power supply, and the MB1
and MB2 brakes can be individually released.
- Turning ON the MB1 switch:
The scanner unit is unlocked, to permit the scanner unit to be manually moved to a
desired position.
Turn OFF the MB1 switch to stop the scanner unit at a desired position.
- Turning ON the MB2 switch:
The IP movement mechanism is unlocked, to permit the IP to be manually moved to
a desired position.
Turn OFF the MB2 switch to stop the IP at a desired position.
REFERENCE
The electromagnetic brake releasing jig is specified for AC 100V, but it can be used
with AC 240V if the power cable is replaced. Use the power cable conforming to the
local specifications.
Components
Name
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
Quantity
Electromagnetic brake releasing jig
1
Power cable
1
MB1 connection cable
1
MB2 connection cable
1
Remarks
AC100-240V (grounded 3-pin plug)
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-325
MC-326
Connection Procedures
(1) Connect the respective cables to the electromagnetic brake releasing
jig.
Operation Procedures
(1) Turn ON the power switch of the electromagnetic brake releasing jig.
(2) Unlock the scanner unit or the IP movement mechanism, and manually
move the scanner unit or the IP movement mechanism to a desired
position.
To stop the scanner unit or the IP movement mechanism at a desired position, turn
OFF the MB1 switch or the MB2 switch.
- To unlock the scanner unit: turn ON the MB1 switch.
- To unlock the IP movement mechanism: turn ON the MB2 switch.
(2) Disconnect the cable connectors (MB1 and MB2), and connect the
cables of the electromagnetic brake releasing jig.
CAUTIONS
- Support the bottom of the scanner unit by hand when the scanner unit is to
be moved. Do not touch the board and the flat cable of the scanner unit.
- When the IP is to be moved, wear gloves and support both side faces of the
IP (as shown in the figure) by hands. Do not touch the IP fluorescent surface
(protective layer) with the hand or fingers.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-326
MC-327
Removal Procedures
(1) Remove the electromagnetic brake releasing jig.
For removal, reverse the connection procedures.
INSTRUCTION
Be sure to connect the original cable after the cable connector of the
electromagnetic brake releasing jig cable is disconnected.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-327
MC-328
18. Tools
18.1
Standard Tools
NOTE
To service the machine, use the servicing instruments and tools that have been
inspected and calibrated.
If the machine were serviced using servicing instruments and tools that have not
been inspected and calibrated, proper performance of the machine could not be
guaranteed.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-328
MC-329
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-329
MC-330
18.2
Special Tools and Measuring Instruments
NOTE
To service the machine, use the servicing instruments and tools that have been
inspected and calibrated.
If the machine were serviced using servicing instruments and tools that have not
been inspected and calibrated, proper performance of the machine could not be
guaranteed.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-330
MC-331
18.3
Special Consumables
18.4
Semi-Standard Tools
Semi-standard tools are tools that are not needed normally, but improve ease of
servicing when available.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MC-331
Appx MC1-1
Appendix 1. Replacement of the ATX
Board (Motherboard) of FB2M
with the Board of FB5UM
Take the following procedures only when the ATX board (motherboard) of the FB2M
type is to be replaced with the ATX board of the FB5UM type.
As production of the ATX board (motherboard) of the FB2M has discontinued, the
FB2M type can no more be supplied to the market. Therefore, when the ATX board
(motherboard) is to be replaced, the board of the FB5UM type must be used instead.
The associated components in the controller unit also need be replaced as the
FB5UM type is larger than the FB2M type.
Case
No.
-
Part name
136Y100262A Cable
Qty.
Appearance
Remarks
Indicator panel control
cable (FB5UM)
1
FRAH3TVR.EPS
-
136Y100261A Cable
ATX power supply cable
(FB5UM)
1
FRAH3TVS.EPS
-
{SP:INDEX}
Part No.
356N9400A
Bracket
1
Cable clamp base
FRAH3TVT.EPS
CAUTIONS
- When the lithium battery is exhausted, replace the board.
- The board removed for replacement purposes must be returned to the parts
center (factory).
- If you improperly replace the battery, an explosion may occur.
- When replacing the lithium battery, use the one recommended by FUJIFILM or
its equivalent.
- Dispose of the old battery in compliance with FUJIFILM's instructions.
- When servicing a board, be sure to wear a wristband to ground your body.
If your body is not grounded, static buildup on your body may damage
electronic components on the board.
-
316S1240
Cord clamp
2
Retains the flat cable.
FRAH3TVU.EPS
-
357S0016
Fit-locking jig
FRAH3TVV.EPS
Retains the K-CN6
connector. Two flat
washers are spares.
FRAH3TVW.EPS
Retains the PAT cable.
2
-
316S1076
Cable tie
(PLT-1M)
2
-
114N0021
Memory
device
1
Compact Flash Card
(CF 128 MB)
FRAH3TVX.EPS
NOTES
- Since the ATX board (motherboard) of the FB5UM type does not support a Compact
Flash Card of 64 MB, the card need to be replaced with a Compact Flash Card of
128 MB.
- When the ATX board (motherboard) is replaced with the board of the FB5UM type,
the RU software need to be updated to the version 1.14 or higher.
1
Retains the PAT board.
318S1130
Cord clamp
(LWS-5S-2W)
Retains the ATX power
supply cable.
1
FRAH3TVZ.EPS
Part No.
Part name
Qty.
Appearance
Remarks
-
-
356Y100315 Bracket
FRAH3TVY.EPS
-
Components of the FB5UM Type Replacement Kit
Case
No.
-
Controller unit
814Y100030
(PC board)
ATX board (FB5UM)
with the memory
module (256MB)
mounted
1
316S1194
Cord clamp
(LWS-8S2.5W)
3
Retains the PAT cable.
FRAH3TW1.EPS
FRAH3TVQ.EPS
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Appx MC1-1
Appx MC1-2
Preparation
NOTE
When the ATX board (motherboard) of the FB2M type is to be replaced with the
board of the FB5UM type, the Compact Flash Card also need be replaced with a new
card (128 MB). When the Compact Flash Card is replaced with a new one, the RU
software need to be re-installed. Therefore, be sure to back up the data.
Backing up the data
(1) Back up the data.
{MU:4.13_BACKUP}
NOTE
When a trouble occurs such as the machine is unable to boot up, you cannot
back up the data by the normal backup procedures. If the machine does not boot
up, therefore, directly back up the machine-specific data stored in the CL.
{MT:12_Reinstalling the Compact Flash Card_ Backing Up the Data}
Removal Procedures
WARNING
To avoid electric shock hazards, be sure to turn OFF the power circuit
breaker on the machine main body and the circuit breaker on the distribution
switchboard.
CAUTION
When servicing a board, be sure to wear a wristband to ground your body.
If your body is not grounded, static buildup on your body may damage
electronic components on the board.
(1) Turn OFF the power of the RU.
- "Shutdown" button on the operation panel.
- Power circuit breaker of the machine main body
(2) Turn OFF the distribution switchboard power circuit breaker.
(3) Remove the covers.
-
Controller unit left-hand side cover
Controller unit rear cover
Controller unit front cover
Controller unit front inner cover
{MC:3.3_Controller Unit Covers}
(4) Remove the ATX board (motherboard).
{MC:10.8_ATX Board (Motherboard)}
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Appx MC1-2
Appx MC1-3
(5) Disconnect the indicator panel control cable (FB2M).
(6) Remove the bracket (cable clamp base).
NOTES
#1
[Unclamp]
Cord clamp
- Since the screw retaining agent is applied to the fit-locking jig which retains
the connector (K-CN5) of the indicator panel control cable (FB2M), the jig has
strong tightening force. Use a box screwdriver (support size 5mm: for M2.5)
and an adjustable end wrench to remove the jig.
- If the screw retaining agent remains inside the rear panel of the controller unit
after the cable connector is disconnected, clean it off completely.
#1
[Remove]
Fit-locking jig
(3B) x2
Indicator panel control
cable (FB2M)
#2
[Remove]
BR3x6 (x3)
FRAH3TW3.EPS
Controller unit rear panel
#3
[Disconnect]
Indicator panel control
cable (FB2M)
SND21A (CN3)
PAT21A (CN15)
PAT21A (CN14)
#2
[Cut]
Cable tie (PLT-1M)
ATX (CN45)
FRAH3TW2.EPS
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Appx MC1-3
Appx MC1-4
Reinstallation Procedures
(1) Put cord clamps on a bracket (cable clamp base) supplied with the
ATX board replacement kit, and place them on the controller unit side
panel.
(2) Retain the flat cable for the flash disk connected to the ATX board
connector (CN6) and the power supply cable for the flash disk
connected to the PAT21A board connector (CN20) with the cord
clamps.
Fold the flat cable on its lower end and retain with the cord clamps.
NOTES
- The orientation of the bracket (cable clamp base) is specified. Place the
bracket so that the shorter distance from the screw hole to the bracket end
surface is located on the right-hand side (close to the ATX board). Otherwise,
the bracket may interfere with the ATX board.
- Place the cord clamp so that its right-hand side (close to the ATX board) is an
opening.
- The bracket has been modified such that it is retained by two screws instead of
three screws. Therefore, one screw for retaining the bracket is excessive.
#2
[Tighten]
BR3x6 (x2)
#2
[Clamp]
Cord clamp
Connector (CN6)
Longer Shorter
#1
[Fold]
Flat cable
Power supply cable
for the flash disk
#1
[Clamp]
Cord clamp x2
<Supplied accessory>
Connector (CN20)
FRAH3TW5.EPS
Bracket
<Supplied accessory>
Controller unit side panel
012-201-09E
FRAH3TW4.EPS
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Appx MC1-4
Appx MC1-5
(3) Connect the connector (K-CN6) for the indicator panel control cable
supplied with the ATX board replacement kit to the controller unit rear
panel.
[Retain]
Fit-locking jig x2
<Supplied accessory>
A
Indicator panel control cable
<Supplied accessory>
(5) Connect the connector (Header) of the indicator panel control cable to
the connector (CN30) of the ATX board (motherboard).
NOTE
Connect the cable connector (Header) with the label (UP) facing upward.
[Connect]
Cable connector
(Header)
Connector
(CN30)
ATX board
(FB5UM)
Controller unit
rear panel
Cross section A
Controller unit rear panel
Fit-locking jig
<Supplied
accessory>
Flat washer *
<Supplied
accessory>
Connector (K-CN6) for
the cable
(ATX power supply)
Retain with screw
retaining agent.
Nut (3B)
<Supplied accessory>
Spring washer
<Supplied accessory>
Insert in
this direction.
Connect with the
label "UP" facing
upward.
* Two flat washers supplied with the machine are spares.
One of two flat washers which are supplied per fit-locking jig is a spare.
FRAH3TW6.EPS
(4) Place the ATX board (motherboard) supplied with the ATX board
replacement kit.
[Tighten]
BR4x8 (x6)
UP
GOOD
NO GOOD
ATX board (motherboard)
FB5UM
<Supplied accessory>
FRAH3TW8.EPS
FRAH3TW7.EPS
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Appx MC1-5
Appx MC1-6
(6) Connect the connector (CN6) of the indicator panel control cable to
the connector (CN12) of the ATX board.
(8) Mount the cable clamp on the bracket supplied with the ATX board
replacement kit.
NOTES
- When the ATX board of the FB2M type is replaced with the board of the
FB5UM type, the cable which has been connected with the board of the type
FB2M is used. Therefore, the cable connector No. might not be the same as
that for the board of the FB5UM type.
- Connect the connector (CN6) of the indicator panel control cable to the
connector (CN12) of the ATX board (FB5UM type). The indication of “PRIMARY”
is silk-screened on the connector (CN12).
[Connect]
Cable connector (CN6)
[Clamp]
Cord clamp x3
(LWS-8S)
<Supplied accessory>
[Clamp]
Cord clamp
(LWS-5S)
<Supplied accessory>
Bracket
<Supplied accessory>
FRAH3TWB.EPS
(9) Remove the PAT21A board from the bracket, and replace it with the
bracket supplied with the ATX board replacement kit.
[Remove]
BR4x8 (x5)
Connector (CN12)
<PRIMARY>
ATX board
FRAH3TW9.EPS
(7) Connect the connector (CN31) of the ATX power supply supplied with
the ATX board replacement kit to the connector (CN31) of the ATX
board.
[Connect]
Cable connector (CN31)
ATX board
ATX power supply cable
<Supplied accessory>
[Remove]
PAT21A board
[Fasten]
BR4x8 (x5)
[Replace]
PAT21A board
Bracket
<Supplied accessory>
FRAH3TWA.EPS
012-201-09E
FRAH3TWC.EPS
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Appx MC1-6
Appx MC1-7
(10) Mount the PAT21A board assembly.
Route the ATX power supply cable connected with the connector (CN31) of the ATX
board (motherboard) under the PAT21A board assembly, and retain it on the PAT21A
board assembly.
(11) Clamp the ATX power supply cable with the cord clamp located behind
the PAT21A board mounting bracket.
PAT21A board assembly
[Clamp]
Cord clamp
(LWS-5S)
ATX power supply cable
FRAH3TWE.EPS
(12) Connect the cable connector to the PAT21A board.
[Tighten]
BR3x6 (x4)
Reverse the disconnection procedures for connection.
{CHECK 1}
{CHECK 2}
PAT21A board
assembly
Route the cable under the
PAT21A board assembly.
ATX power supply cable
<Supplied accessory>
FRAH3TWD.EPS
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Appx MC1-7
Appx MC1-8
(13) Retain the cable with the cable tie supplied with the ATX board
replacement kit.
(17) Connect the operation panel cable connectors (CN17 and CN18) to the
ATX board connectors (CN3 and CN4).
NOTES
- When the ATX board of the FB2M type is replaced with the board of the
FB5UM type, the cable which has been connected with the board of the type
FB2M is used. Therefore, the cable connector No. might not be the same as
that for the board of the FB5UM type.
- Connect the connectors (CN17 and CN18) of the operation panel cables to the
connectors (CN3 and CN4) of the ATX board (FB5UM type).
(18) Connect the I/F cable connector to the ATX board.
CN4
ATX board
17. [Connect]
Cable connectors
(CN17 and CN18)
CN3
[Retain]
Cable tie (PLT-1M)
<Supplied accessory>
FRAH3TWF.EPS
18. [Connect]
I/F cable connector
Operation panel cable
(14) Reinstall the SND21A board.
{MC:10.6_SND21A Board}
(15) Reinstall the CPS21A board.
I/F cable
{MC:10.5_CPS21A Board}
FRAH3TWG.EPS
(16) Reinstall the optional TLB21A board.
{MC:10.11_TLB21A Board (Optional)}
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Appx MC1-8
Appx MC1-9
Check/Adjustment Procedures
CHECK 1
Check that the cable connector (CN7) is not erroneously connected with TP13.
CHECK 2
Check that the cable connector of the controller unit cooling fan (FAN1) is connected
with CN9 and the cable connector of the controller unit cooling fan (FAN2) is
connected with CN17.
Replacement of Compact Flash Card
INSTRUCTION
When the Compact Flash Card is replaced with a new one, the RU software need to
be re-installed. Therefore, be sure to back up the data beforehand.
{ Preparation}
(1) Insert the Compact Flash Card (128 MB) supplied with the ATX board
replacement kit into the CF slot of the PC.
(2) Insert the RU application CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the PC.
(3) Select “.\INITIAL\APL_INITIAL\FB5UM_INIT.BAT” in FILE EXECUTION.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Appx MC1-9
Appx MC1-10
(4) Enter a space and “E:” at the end of “.\INITIAL\APL_INITIAL\
FB5UM_INIT.BAT”.
(6) After the write into the Compact Flash Card is completed, click the
[EXIT] button.
NOTE
The procedures are for inputting the drive name of the Compact Flash Card.
Although the drive name of “E:” is input here as an example, the drive name for
the Compact Flash Card differs depending on the PC to be used. Verify the drive
name of the Compact Flash Card before inputting.
(7) Remove the Compact Flash Card (128 MB) from the PC.
(8) Remove the current Compact Flash Card (64 MB) from the controller
unit, and replace it with the Compact Flash Card (128 MB) which has
been written in.
(5) Click the [EXECUTE] button.
Write into the Compact Flash Card starts.
REFERENCE
It takes approx. 6 minutes to write in the Compact Flash Card.
{MC:10.3_Compact Flash Card}
[Replace]
Compact Flash Card
(128 MB)
<Supplied accessory>
FRAH3TWH.EPS
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Appx MC1-10
Appx MC1-11
(9) Set the IP address.
NOTES
- When the Compact Flash Card is installed, the IP address setting is defaulted.
Be sure to set the IP address when the machine is to be activated.
- The machine need to be booted when setting the IP address. Check to make
sure that the machine can normally boot up. If the machine cannot boot up
normally, check the machine by referring to the error code table and taking the
applicable countermeasure.
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
{IN:25.1_Setting the IP Address}
(10) Install the RU software.
Checking for Image Problems
(1) Output an image, and check to make sure that the machine can
normally work.
{PM:5.1_Checking for Irregularities, Density Problems, and Sensitivity
Problems}
(2) Reinstall the covers.
-
Controller unit front inner cover
Controller unit front cover
Controller unit rear cover
Controller unit left-hand side cover
{MC:3.3_Controller Unit Covers}
NOTE
Check that the version of the RU software is 1.14 or higher.
{IN:25._Installing RU Software}
(11) Restore the data which has been backed up in “ Preparation”.
- Machine-specific data
- Configuration data
{MU:4.14_RESTORE}
(12) Adjust the touch position on the LCD panel.
{MU:3.9_Touch Point Check}
{MU:3.10_Adjust Touch Check}
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Appx MC1-11
Appx MC1-12
BLANK PAGE
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Appx MC1-12
Appx MC1-13
BLANK PAGE
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Appx MC1-13
Appx MC1-14
BLANK PAGE
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Appx MC1-14
Control Sheet
Issue date
CR-IR 364 (Type U) Service Manual
Revision number
Reason
04.15.2003
07.31.2003
11.30.2003
06.30.2004
09.30.2004
00
01
02
03
04
New release (FM3976)
Revision (FM4055)
Revision (FM4147)
Revision (FM4357)
Revision (FM4437)
07.15.2006
06.10.2008
07
09
Revision (FM4915)
Revision (FM5369)
Maintenance Utility (MU)
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Pages affected
All pages
All pages
All pages
All pages
2-5, 16, 17, 29-32, 49, 49.1, 49.2, 124,
124.1, 124.2, 125, 126
All pages
3, 29, 34, 36, 67, 71-73, 82, 91, 102, 103,
110, 112, 140-144, 146, 158, 159
MU-1
1.
RU Utility
1.1
RU Utility Overview
The RU Utility consists of the following three components:
- User Utility
- Machine Maintenance
- RU PC-TOOL
The User Utility and the Machine Maintenance are operated from the LCD panel of
the RU, while the RU PC-TOOL is operated from the CL.
1.2
Tree of RU Utility Overall Tree Structure
{MU:1._RU Utility}
{MU:1.1_RU Utility Overview}
{MU:1.2_Tree of RU Utility Overall Tree Structure}
{MU:2._User Utility}
{MU:2.1_Function Overview}
{MU:3._Machine Maintenance}
{MU:3.1_RU IP Address}
{MU:3.2_FTP Server}
{MU:3.3_Default Gateway}
{MU:3.4_Subnet Mask}
{MU:3.5_Secure Host}
{MU:3.6_Secure Net}
{MU:3.7_Network Check}
{MU:3.8_Loop back Test}
{MU:3.9_Touch Point Check}
{MU:3.10_Adjust Touch Check}
{MU:3.11_Head Move}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-1
MU-2
{MU:4._RU PC-TOOL}
{MU:4.4 [1-7-7]_Update 2D Offset Data}
{MU:4.4 [1-7-8]_Update Shading Data}
{MU:4.1_NEW}
{MU:4.2_LIST OF EXISTING RU}
000
{MU:4.3_DELETE}
{MU:4.4 [1-7-8-1-1]_Mode Setting}
{MU:4.4_MUTL}
{MU:4.4 [1]_Performance Check}
{MU:4.4 [1-1]_Image Output 1}
{MU:4.4 [1-2]_Image Output 2}
{MU:4.4 [1-3]_Image Output 3}
{MU:4.4 [1-4]_Virtual Image Output 1}
{MU:4.4 [1-4-1]_Mode Setting}
{MU:4.4 [1-4-2]_Start Output}
{MU:4.4 [1-7-8-2]_Update Shading Data}
{MU:4.4 [1-7-8-2-1]_Mode Setting}
{MU:4.4 [1-7-9]_Updating the X-Ray Damage Data}
{MU:4.4 [2]_Conveyance Check}
{MU:4.4 [2-1]_Termination Mode Setting}
{MU:4.4 [2-2]_Sequence On Repeat Setting}
{MU:4.4 [1-4-3]_Cansel Setting}
{MU:4.4 [2-2-1]_Display Scanner Temperature}
{MU:4.4 [1-4-4]_Start RAW Image Output}
{MU:4.4 [2-2-2]_Number of Sequence Setting}
{MU:4.4 [1-5]_LD Performance}
{MU:4.4 [2-2-3]_Stop Sequence On Repeat}
{MU:4.4 [1-6]_Display Scanner Data}
{MU:4.4 [2-2-4]_Sequence Mode Setting}
{MU:4.4 [1-7]_Correction}
{MU:4.4 [2-2-5]_Display Number of Sequence}
{MU:4.4 [1-7-1]_Display Scanner Temperature}
{MU:4.4 [1-7-2]_Gain Setting}
{MU:4.4 [1-7-2-1]_Mode Setting}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
{MU:4.4 [1-7-8-1]_Update Shading and Sensitivity
Data}
{MU:4.4 [2-2-6]_Erasure-lamp Lighting Setting}
{MU:4.4 [3]_Board Check}
{MU:4.4 [3-1]_Mother Board}
{MU:4.4 [1-7-3]_Adjust Correction Light Source}
{MU:4.4 [3-1-1]_All Check}
{MU:4.4 [1-7-4]_Update Light Source Shading}
{MU:4.4 [3-1-2]_Board Check Details}
{MU:4.4 [1-7-5]_Update CCD Offset Data}
{MU:4.4 [3-1-2-1]_SDRAM}
{MU:4.4 [1-7-6]_Erase IP}
{MU:4.4 [3-1-2-2]_COMPACT FLASH}
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-2
MU-3
{MU:4.4 [3-1-2-3]_Interrupt}
{MU:4.4 [3-1-2-4]_Register}
{MU:4.4 [3-2]_PAT Board}
{MU:4.4 [3-2-1]_All Check}
{MU:4.4 [3-3]_SND Board}
{MU:4.4 [3-5-2]_Board Check Details}
{MU:4.4 [3-5-2-1]_DPRAM}
{MU:4.4 [3-5-2-2]_Communication between DSPs}
{MU:4.4 [3-5-2-3]_Transfer between DSPs}
{MU:4.4 [3-5-2-4]_FIFO}
{MU:4.4 [3-5-2-5]_Internal RAM}
{MU:4.4 [3-3-1]_All Check}
{MU:4.4 [3-5-2-6]_LVC Loopback}
{MU:4.4 [3-3-2]_Board Check Details}
{MU:4.4 [3-5-2-7]_LVC FPGA}
{MU:4.4 [3-3-2-1]_Register}
{MU:4.4 [3-3-2-2]_Solenoid}
{MU:4.4 [3-3-2-3]_Pulse-Motor}
{MU:4.4 [3-3-2-4]_Fuse}
{MU:4.4 [3-4]_ERS Board}
{MU:4.4 [3-4-1]_All Check}
{MU:4.4 [3-4-2]_Board Check Details}
{MU:4.4 [3-4-2-1]_Erasure-Lamp}
{MU:4.4 [3-5-2-8]_PCI Interrupt}
{MU:4.4 [3-5-2-9]_SDRAM}
{MU:4.4 [3-5-2-10]_Register}
{MU:4.4 [3-6]_CCD Board}
{MU:4.4 [3-6-1]_All Check}
{MU:4.4 [3-6-2]_Confirm Gain}
{MU:4.4 [3-6-3]_Confirm CCD Timing}
{MU:4.4 [3-6-4]_Confirm AD Offset}
{MU:4.4 [3-6-5]_Confirm AD MUX-Config}
{MU:4.4 [3-4-2-2]_Heater and Thermistor}
{MU:4.4 [3-7]_LED/Buzzer/PNL Board}
{MU:4.4 [3-4-3]_Turn Erasure-lamp On}
{MU:4.4 [3-4-4]_Turn Erasure-lamp Off}
{MU:4.4 [3-4-5]_Display Erasure Temperature}
{MU:4.4 [3-4-6]_View Erase Board Version}
{MU:4.4 [3-5]_CPS Board}
{MU:4.4 [3-5-1]_All Check}
012-201-09E
{MU:4.4 [3-7-1]_All Check}
{MU:4.4 [3-7-2]_Board Check Details}
{MU:4.4 [3-7-2-1]_Turn READY-LED ON}
{MU:4.4 [3-7-2-2]_Turn READY-LED OFF}
{MU:4.4 [3-7-2-3]_Turn CALL-LED ON}
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-3
MU-4
{MU:4.4 [3-7-2-4]_Turn CALL-LED OFF}
{MU:4.4 [3-7-2-5]_Ring Buzzer on Minimum}
{MU:4.4 [3-7-2-6]_Ring Buzzer on Medium}
{MU:4.4 [3-7-2-7]_Ring Buzzer on Maximum}
{MU:4.4 [3-7-2-8]_Stop Buzzer}
{MU:4.4 [3-7-3]_Display Test Pattern}
{MU:4.4 [3-7-4]_Quit Test Pattern}
{MU:4.4 [3-8]_All Board}
{MU:4.4 [4]_Mechanical Check}
{MU:4.4 [4-1]_Grid Change Door}
{MU:4.4 [4-7-5]_Format Adjustment}
{MU:4.4 [4-7-5-1]_Lengths Adjustment}
{MU:4.4 [4-7-5-2]_Start Point Adjustment}
{MU:4.4 [4-8]_FAN}
{MU:4.4 [4-9]_Electromagnetic brake}
{MU:4.4 [4-9-1]_Sub-Scanning (SOLZ1)}
{MU:4.4 [4-9-2]_IP Shift (SOLZ 2)}
{MU:4.4 [5]_Scanner Check}
{MU:4.4 [5-1]_LD Check Details}
{MU:4.4 [4-2]_Bucky HP}
{MU:4.4 [5-1-1]_LD Performance Check}
{MU:4.4 [4-3]_Bucky}
{MU:4.4 [5-1-2]_Turn LD On (Reading Level)}
{MU:4.4 [4-4]_IP Shift HP}
{MU:4.4 [5-1-3]_Turn LD On (Detection Level)}
{MU:4.4 [4-5]_IP Shift}
{MU:4.4 [5-1-4]_Turn LD Off}
{MU:4.4 [4-5-1]_Input Destination and Speed}
{MU:4.4 [4-5-2]_Number of Sequence Setting}
{MU:4.4 [4-5-3]_Stop Sequence}
{MU:4.4 [4-5-4]_Display Number of Sequence}
{MU:4.4 [4-6]_Sub-Scanning HP}
{MU:4.4 [4-7]_Sub-Scanning}
{MU:4.4 [4-7-1]_Input Mode and Speed}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
{MU:4.4 [4-7-4]_Display Number of Sequence}
{MU:4.4 [5-2]_Display Scanner Data}
{MU:4.4 [5-3]_Scanner Check Details}
{MU:4.4 [5-3-1]_Calculate CCD Electronic Noise}
{MU:4.4 [5-3-2]_Adjust Correction Light Source}
{MU:4.4 [5-3-3]_Calculate Delta Y}
{MU:4.4 [5-4]_Scanner Diagnostic}
{MU:4.4 [4-7-2]_Number of Sequence Setting}
{MU:4.4 [5-4-1]_Virtual Image Check (CCD21D Board Frame Memory)}
{MU:4.4 [4-7-3]_Stop Sequence}
{MU:4.4 [5-4-2]_Virtual Image Check (CPS Board - Frame
Memory)}
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-4
MU-5
{MU:4.4 [5-4-3]_Virtual Image Output 1}
{MU:4.4 [5-4-3-1]_Mode Setting}
{MU:4.4 [5-4-3-2]_Start Output}
{MU:4.4 [5-4-3-3]_Cansel Setting}
{MU:4.4 [5-4-3-4]_Start RAW Image Output}
{MU:4.4 [5-4-4]_Virtual Image Output 2}
{MU:4.4 [5-4-4-1]_Patterned Image Output}
{MU:4.4 [5-5]_Correction}
{MU:4.4 [5-5-1]_Display Scanner Temperature}
{MU:4.4 [5-5-2]_Gain Setting}
{MU:4.4 [5-5-2-1]_Mode Setting}
{MU:4.4 [5-6]_Display Scanner Temperature}
{MU:4.4 [5-7]_Image Re-Output}
{MU:4.4 [6]_Software Check}
{MU:4.4 [6-1]_Display MAC Address}
{MU:4.4 [7]_For Design} * Do not use for servicing purposes.
{MU:4.5_PING}
{MU:4.6_MON}
{MU:4.7_FTP}
{MU:4.8_INSTALL}
{MU:4.9_VERSION UP}
{MU:4.10_EDIT HISTORY}
{MU:4.4 [5-5-3]_Adjust Correction Light Source}
{MU:4.11_EDIT CONFIGURATION}
{MU:4.4 [5-5-4]_Update Light Source Shading}
{MU:4.12_EDIT CL NAME}
{MU:4.4 [5-5-5]_Updating the CCD Offset Data}
{MU:4.4 [5-5-6]_Erase IP}
{MU:4.4 [5-5-7]_Update 2D Offset Data}
{MU:4.13_BACKUP}
{MU:4.14_RESTORE}
{MU:4.15_I/O TRACE EXPERT}
{MU:4.16_ERROR DB}
{MU:4.4 [5-5-8]_Update Shading Data}
{MU:4.17_ALL RUs SETTING UNINSTALL}
{MU:4.4 [5-5-8-1]_Update Shading and Sensitivity
000
Data}
{MU:4.4 [5-5-8-1-1]_Mode Setting}
{MU:4.18_ALL RUs SETTING VERSION UP}
{MU:4.4 [5-5-8-2]_Update Shading Data}
{MU:4.4 [5-5-8-2-1]_Mode Setting}
{MU:4.4 [5-5-9]_Updating the X-Ray Damage Data}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-5
MU-6
2.
User Utility
User Utility overview
The User Utility is a tool for setting the RU main body function conditions and
confirming the condition setup. This tool is operated from the RU’s LCD panel.
User Utility window
User Utility tree
{MU:2._User Utility}
Alarm
Key touch tone
Screen OFF timer
Sleep timer
Equipment information
Starting and Exiting the User Utility
Starting the User Utility
NOTE
When starting the User Utility, make sure that the machine is READY (ready for
making an exposure).
(1) While the startup completion window is displayed on the RU’s LCD
panel, touch the [Utility] button.
The utility window then opens.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-6
MU-7
Exiting the User Utility
(1) In the utility window displayed on the RU’s LCD panel, touch the
[Return] button.
The startup completion window then opens.
2.1
Function Overview
REFERENCE
For the User Utility operating procedures, refer to Chapter 3 of the instruction manual.
{Instruction Manual}
Alarm
Turns ON/OFF the audible alarm, and selects a sound level (high/medium/low) of the
alarm, which sounds when it is turned ON.
Key touch tone
Turns ON/OFF the touch tone that sounds when you touch the LCD panel, and selects
a sound level (high/medium/low) of the tone, which sounds when it is turned ON.
Screen OFF timer
Specifies whether or not to automatically extinguish the LCD panel, and sets the time
(between 1 minute and 999 minutes) in which the LCD panel automatically becomes
extinguished.
Sleep timer
Specifies whether the LCD panel becomes extinguished for power saving purposes
when the RU main body or LCD panel is not used, and sets the time (between 1
minute and 999 minutes) in which the LCD panel becomes extinguished.
Equipment information
Displays the following four items of equipment information:
“Installation date/time”, “exposure count”, “erasure lamp illumination time”, and “laser
ON time”
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-7
MU-8
3.
Machine Maintenance
Machine Maintenance overview
The Machine Maintenance is a tool that is used exclusively by service engineers to
set the RU main body function conditions and confirm the condition setup. This tool is
operated from the RU’s LCD panel.
NOTE
Setup items of the Machine Maintenance cannot be set from the CL.
Window of Machine Maintenance
The Machine Maintenance consists of two windows. To toggle between them, touch
or
.
Tree of Machine Maintenance
{MU:3._Machine Maintenance}
{MU:3.1_RU IP Address}
{MU:3.2_FTP Server}
{MU:3.3_Default Gateway}
{MU:3.4_Subnet Mask}
{MU:3.5_Secure Host}
{MU:3.6_Secure Net}
{MU:3.7_Network Check}
{MU:3.8_Loop back Test}
{MU:3.9_Touch Point Check}
{MU:3.10_Adjust Touch Check}
{MU:3.11_Head Move}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-8
MU-9
Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance
Two different methods are used for starting/exiting the Machine Maintenance
depending on whether the initializing state or READY state (ready for making an
exposure) prevails.
(2) While the following initializing window is displayed on the RU’s LCD
panel, sequentially touch the upper left and upper right corners of the
LCD panel.
The Machine Maintenance window then opens.
Starting the Machine Maintenance during Initialization
(1) Turn ON the power of the RU.
Power ON in the following order.
- Power circuit breaker of the machine main body
- Start switch on the operation panel
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-9
MU-10
Starting the Machine Maintenance in the READY state (ready for
making an exposure)
(1) While the startup completion window is displayed on the RU’s LCD
panel, touch the [Utility] button.
Exiting the Machine Maintenance in the initializing state
(1) Turn OFF the power circuit breaker for the machine main body.
The utility window then opens.
(2) While the Utility window is displayed, sequentially touch the upper left
and upper right corners of the LCD panel.
The Machine Maintenance window then opens.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-10
MU-11
Exiting the Machine Maintenance in the READY state (ready for
making an exposure)
(1) In the Machine Maintenance window displayed on the RU’s LCD panel,
touch the [Return] button.
3.1
RU IP Address
Function
Sets the RU’s IP address into the Compact Flash Card in the controller unit.
REFERENCE
By factory default, the IP address of the RU is set to "172.016.001.010".
Procedures
The following example describes the procedure for setting the RU's IP address to
"172.016.002.100":
(1) Start the Machine Maintenance.
{MU:3._Machine Maintenance}
(2) While the Machine Maintenance window 1 is displayed on the RU’s
LCD panel, touch the [RU IP Address] button.
(2) In the utility window displayed on the RU’s LCD panel, touch the
[Return] button.
The startup completion window then opens.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-11
MU-12
(3) While the RU IP Address window is displayed on the RU’s LCD panel,
touch the [BS] button as needed to delete displayed IP address digits
for correction.
(5) While the RU IP Address window is displayed on the RU’s LCD panel,
touch the [OK] button.
REFERENCE
Touching the [OK] button makes the IP address setting effective.
(4) While the RU IP Address window is displayed on the RU’s LCD panel,
touch numeric keys to enter a desired value.
(6) Exit the Machine Maintenance.
{MU:3._Machine Maintenance}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-12
MU-13
3.2
FTP Server
Function
(3) While the FTP Server window is displayed on the RU’s LCD panel,
touch the [BS] button as needed to delete displayed IP address digits
for correction.
Sets the FTP server’s IP address into the Compact Flash Card in the controller unit.
REFERENCE
By factory default, the IP address of the FTP server is set to "172.016.001.020".
Procedures
The following example describes the procedure for setting the FTP Server's IP
address to "172.016.001.021":
(1) Start the Machine Maintenance.
{MU:3._Machine Maintenance}
(2) While the Machine Maintenance window 1 is displayed on the RU’s
LCD panel, touch the [FTP Server] button.
(4) While the FTP Server window is displayed on the RU’s LCD panel,
touch a numeric key to enter a desired value.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-13
MU-14
(5) While the FTP Server window is displayed on the RU’s LCD panel,
touch the [OK] button.
REFERENCE
Touching the [OK] button makes the IP address setting effective.
3.3
Default Gateway
Function
Sets the IP address of a gateway into the Compact Flash Card in the controller unit
when a network connection is established via the gateway.
REFERENCES
- By factory default, the IP address of the gateway is set to "000.000.000.000".
- If the gateway is not used, its IP address should be set to "000.000.000.000".
Procedures
The following example describes the procedure for setting the gateway's IP address to
"172.016.250.001":
(1) Start the Machine Maintenance.
{MU:3._Machine Maintenance}
(2) While the Machine Maintenance window 1 is displayed on the RU’s
LCD panel, touch the [Default Gateway] button.
(6) Exit the Machine Maintenance.
{MU:3._Machine Maintenance}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-14
MU-15
(3) While the Default Gateway window is displayed on the RU’s LCD
panel, touch the [BS] button as needed to delete displayed IP address
digits for correction.
(5) While the Default Gateway window is displayed on the RU’s LCD
panel, touch the [OK] button.
REFERENCE
Touching the [OK] button makes the IP address setting effective.
(4) While the Default Gateway window is displayed on the RU’s LCD
panel, touch a numeric key to enter a desired value.
(6) Exit the Machine Maintenance.
{MU:3._Machine Maintenance}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-15
MU-16
3.4
Subnet Mask
Function
(2) While the Machine Maintenance window 1 is displayed on the RU’s
LCD panel, touch the [Subnet Mask] button.
Sets a subnet mask in the Compact Flash Card in the controller unit. The network
devices that the RU can access are determined according to this subnet mask
address and the IP address that is entered from the LCD panel.
<Example 1>
IP address: 133.170.3.176
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
When the RU is set as indicated above, it can access network devices having an IP
address between 133.170.3.0 and 133.170.3.255.
<Example 2>
IP address: 133.170.3.176
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.128
When the RU is set as indicated above, it can access network devices having an IP
address between 133.170.3.128 and 133.170.3.255.
<Example 3>
IP address: 133.170.3.5
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.128
When the RU is set as indicated above, it can access network devices having an IP
address between 133.170.3.0 and 133.170.3.127.
(3) While the Subnet Mask window is displayed on the RU’s LCD panel,
touch the [BS] button as needed to delete displayed Subnet Mask
digits for correction.
REFERENCES
- For the last digit group of an IP address, “0” and “255” are not generally used. The
reason is that “0” and “255” are frequently used for the other purposes.
- By factory default, the subnet mask is set to "255.255.000.000".
- If the subnet mask will not be used, set it to “000.000.000.000”.
Procedures
The following example describes the procedure for setting the subnet mask to
"255.128.000.000":
(1) Start the Machine Maintenance.
{MU:3._Machine Maintenance}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-16
MU-17
(4) While the Subnet Mask window is displayed on the RU’s LCD panel,
touch a numeric key to enter a desired value.
3.5
Secure Host
Function
- Used to set one particular IP address for a device that can be connected to the RU.
The default IP address is “000.000.000.000”. When such a default setting is used, a
device having any IP address can be connected to the RU by means of telnet.
- A certain degree of security can be provided because the device that is connectable
to the RU can be defined by specifying the IP address.
Procedures
The following example describes the procedure for setting Secure Host's address to
"172.016.001.100":
(1) Start the Machine Maintenance.
{MU:3._Machine Maintenance}
(5) While the Subnet Mask window is displayed on the RU’s LCD panel,
touch the [OK] button.
(2) While the Machine Maintenance window 1 is displayed on the RU’s
LCD panel, touch the [Secure Host] button.
REFERENCE
Touching the [OK] button makes the Subnet Mask setting effective.
(6) Exit the Machine Maintenance.
{MU:3._Machine Maintenance}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-17
MU-18
(3) While the Secure Host window is displayed on the RU’s LCD panel,
touch the [BS] button as needed to delete displayed IP address digits
for correction.
(5) While the Secure Host window is displayed on the RU’s LCD panel,
touch the [OK] button.
REFERENCE
Touching the [OK] button makes the IP address setting effective.
(4) While the Secure Host window is displayed on the RU’s LCD panel,
touch a numeric key to enter a desired value.
(6) Exit the Machine Maintenance.
{MU:3._Machine Maintenance}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-18
MU-19
3.6
Secure Net
Function
Determines the network portion of the IP address to be limited.
[Example 1] When Secure Net: “172.21.15.128”
Devices having an IP address between 172.21.15.128 and 172.21.15.255 are
connectable.
Procedures
The following example describes the procedure for setting Secure Net's address to
"172.016.001.150":
(1) Start the Machine Maintenance.
{MU:3._Machine Maintenance}
(2) While the Machine Maintenance window 1 is displayed on the RU’s
LCD panel, touch the [Secure Net] button.
(3) While the Secure Net window is displayed on the RU’s LCD panel,
touch the [BS] button as needed to delete displayed IP address digits
for correction.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-19
MU-20
(4) While the Secure Net window is displayed on the RU’s LCD panel,
touch a numeric key to enter a desired value.
3.7
Network Check
Function
Executes the PING command from the RU in relation to the PC that is used as the
FTP server and to the gateway for the purpose of checking the network connection.
Procedures
The following example describes the procedure to be performed in situations where
the FTP server is connected and the gateway is not used:
(1) Start the Machine Maintenance.
{MU:3._Machine Maintenance}
(2) While the Machine Maintenance window 1 is displayed on the RU’s
LCD panel, touch the
button.
(5) While the Secure Net window is displayed on the RU’s LCD panel,
touch the [OK] button.
REFERENCE
Touching the [OK] button makes the IP address setting effective.
(6) Exit the Machine Maintenance.
{MU:3._Machine Maintenance}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-20
MU-21
(3) While the Machine Maintenance window 2 is displayed on the RU’s
LCD panel, touch the [Network Check] button.
(4) While the Network Check window is displayed on the RU’s LCD panel,
touch the [Check] button.
The “Network Check” result window then opens within the Network Check
window that displayed on the RU’s LCD panel.
(5) Exit the Machine Maintenance.
{MU:3._Machine Maintenance}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-21
MU-22
3.8
Loop back Test
Function
(3) While the Machine Maintenance window 2 is displayed on the RU’s
LCD panel, touch the [Loop back Test] button.
Conducts a test with the loopback cable (jig: 898Y0981) to check the network
hardware connection, up to and including the hub entrance.
Procedures
(1) Start the Machine Maintenance.
{MU:3._Machine Maintenance}
(2) While the Machine Maintenance window 1 is displayed on the RU’s
LCD panel, touch the
button.
The “Loop back Test” window then appears on the RU’s LCD panel.
(4) Connect the loopback cable (jig: 898Y0981) to the network connector.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-22
MU-23
(5) While the Loop back Test window is displayed on the RU’s LCD panel,
touch the [Check] button.
3.9
Touch Point Check
Function
Checks the LCD panel touch point position.
Procedures
(1) Start the Machine Maintenance.
{MU:3._Machine Maintenance}
(2) While the Machine Maintenance window 1 is displayed on the RU’s
LCD panel, touch the
button.
The “Loop back Test” result window then opens within the Loop back Test window
that displayed on the RU’s LCD panel.
(6) Exit the Machine Maintenance.
{MU:3._Machine Maintenance}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-23
MU-24
(3) While the Machine Maintenance window 2 is displayed on the RU’s
LCD panel, touch the [Touch Point Check] button.
(4) With your finger, touch an arbitrary position of the LCD panel.
The “X” mark then appears at the position you touched.
The “Touch Point Check” window then appears on the RU’s LCD panel.
INSTRUCTION
If the “X” mark is displaced from the touched position, run the “Adjust Touch Check”.
{MU:3.10_Adjust Touch Check}
(5) Exit the Machine Maintenance.
{MU:3._Machine Maintenance}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-24
MU-25
3.10
Adjust Touch Check
Function
(3) While the Machine Maintenance window 2 is displayed on the RU’s
LCD panel, touch the [Adjust Touch Check] button.
Adjusts the LCD panel touch point position.
Procedures
(1) Start the Machine Maintenance.
{MU:3._Machine Maintenance}
(2) While the Machine Maintenance window 1 is displayed on the RU’s
LCD panel, touch the
button.
The “Adjust Touch Check” window then appears on the RU’s LCD panel.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-25
MU-26
(4) With you finger, touch the four “X” mark positions sequentially as
indicated below.
3.11
Head Move
Function
Moves the scanner unit to a position that is approximately 10 cm above the lowermost
position. This function can be exercised to move the scanner unit even when
communication is not established between the RU and CL.
Procedures
(1) Start the Machine Maintenance.
{MU:3._Machine Maintenance}
(2) While the Machine Maintenance window 1 is displayed on the RU’s
LCD panel, touch the
button.
(5) Execute "Touch Point Check".
{MU:3.9_Touch Point Check}
INSTRUCTION
If the “X” mark is displaced from the touched position, perform the LCD panel
replacement procedure.
{MC:9.14_Operation Panel Assembly, LCD Panel and LCN21A Board}
(6) Exit the Machine Maintenance.
{MU:3._Machine Maintenance}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-26
MU-27
(3) While the Machine Maintenance window 2 is displayed on the RU’s
LCD panel, touch the [Head Move] button.
The IP then moves to the read position with the scanner unit placed at a position
that is approximately 10 cm above the lowermost position.
(4) Restart the RU.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-27
MU-28
4.
RU PC-TOOL
RU PC-TOOL overview
The RU PC-TOOL is a tool that is used exclusively by service engineers to set the RU
main body function conditions and confirm the condition setup. This tool is operated
from the CL.
RU PC-TOOL window
Tree of RU PC-TOOL
{MU:4._RU PC-TOOL}
{MU:4.1_NEW}
{MU:4.2_LIST OF EXISTING RU}
{MU:4.3_DELETE}
{MU:4.4_MUTL}
{MU:4.4 [1]_Performance Check}
{MU:4.4 [1-1]_Image Output 1}
{MU:4.4 [1-2]_Image Output 2}
{MU:4.4 [1-3]_Image Output 3}
{MU:4.4 [1-4]_Virtual Image Output 1}
{MU:4.4 [1-4-1]_Mode Setting}
{MU:4.4 [1-4-2]_Start Output}
{MU:4.4 [1-4-3]_Cansel Setting}
{MU:4.4 [1-4-4]_Start RAW Image Output}
{MU:4.4 [1-5]_LD Performance}
{MU:4.4 [1-6]_Display Scanner Data}
{MU:4.4 [1-7]_Correction}
{MU:4.4 [1-7-1]_Display Scanner Temperature}
{MU:4.4 [1-7-2]_Gain Setting}
{MU:4.4 [1-7-2-1]_Mode Setting}
{MU:4.4 [1-7-3]_Adjust Correction Light Source}
{MU:4.4 [1-7-4]_Update Light Source Shading}
{MU:4.4 [1-7-5]_Update CCD Offset Data}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-28
MU-29
{MU:4.4 [1-7-6]_Erase IP}
{MU:4.4 [1-7-7]_Update 2D Offset Data}
{MU:4.4 [1-7-8]_Update Shading Data}
{MU:4.4 [1-7-8-1]_Update Shading and Sensitivity
000
data}
{MU:4.4 [1-7-8-1-1]_Mode Setting}
{MU:4.4 [3-1-2-2]_COMPACT FLASH}
{MU:4.4 [3-1-2-3]_Interrupt}
{MU:4.4 [3-1-2-4]_Register}
{MU:4.4 [3-2]_PAT Board}
{MU:4.4 [3-2-1]_All Check}
{MU:4.4 [1-7-8-2]_Update Shading Data}
{MU:4.4 [1-7-8-2-1]_Mode Setting}
{MU:4.4 [1-7-9]_Updating the X-Ray Damage Data}
{MU:4.4 [2]_Conveyance Check}
{MU:4.4 [2-1]_Termination Mode Setting}
{MU:4.4 [2-2]_Sequence On Repeat Setting}
{MU:4.4 [3-3]_SND Board}
{MU:4.4 [3-3-1]_All Check}
{MU:4.4 [3-3-2]_Board Check Details}
{MU:4.4 [3-3-2-1]_Register}
{MU:4.4 [3-3-2-2]_Solenoid}
{MU:4.4 [3-3-2-3]_Pulse-Motor}
{MU:4.4 [3-3-2-4]_Fuse}
{MU:4.4 [2-2-1]_Display Scanner Temperature}
{MU:4.4 [2-2-2]_Number of Sequence Setting}
{MU:4.4 [2-2-3]_Stop Sequence On Repeat}
{MU:4.4 [3-4-1]_All Check}
{MU:4.4 [2-2-4]_Sequence Mode Setting}
{MU:4.4 [3-4-2]_Board Check Details}
{MU:4.4 [2-2-5]_Display Number of Sequence}
{MU:4.4 [2-2-6]_Erasure-lamp Lighting Setting}
{MU:4.4 [3]_Board Check}
{MU:4.4 [3-1]_Mother Board}
{MU:4.4 [3-1-1]_All Check}
{MU:4.4 [3-1-2]_Board Check Details}
{MU:4.4 [3-1-2-1]_SDRAM}
012-201-09E
{MU:4.4 [3-4]_ERS Board}
{MU:4.4 [3-4-2-1]_Erasure-Lamp}
{MU:4.4 [3-4-2-2]_Heater and Thermistor}
{MU:4.4 [3-4-3]_Turn Erasure-lamp On}
{MU:4.4 [3-4-4]_Turn Erasure-lamp Off}
{MU:4.4 [3-4-5]_Display Erasure Temperature}
{MU:4.4 [3-4-6]_View Erase Board Version}
{MU:4.4 [3-5]_CPS Board}
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-29
MU-30
{MU:4.4 [3-5-1]_All Check}
{MU:4.4 [3-5-2]_Board Check Details}
{MU:4.4 [3-5-2-1]_DPRAM}
{MU:4.4 [3-5-2-2]_Communication between DSPs}
{MU:4.4 [3-5-2-3]_Transfer between DSPs}
{MU:4.4 [3-5-2-4]_FIFO}
{MU:4.4 [3-5-2-5]_Internal RAM}
{MU:4.4 [3-5-2-6]_LVC Loopback}
{MU:4.4 [3-5-2-7]_LVC FPGA}
{MU:4.4 [3-5-2-8]_PCI Interrupt}
{MU:4.4 [3-5-2-9]_SDRAM}
{MU:4.4 [3-5-2-10]_Register}
{MU:4.4 [3-6]_CCD Board}
{MU:4.4 [3-7-2-3]_Turn CALL-LED ON}
{MU:4.4 [3-7-2-4]_Turn CALL-LED OFF}
{MU:4.4 [3-7-2-5]_Ring Buzzer on Minimum}
{MU:4.4 [3-7-2-6]_Ring Buzzer on Medium}
{MU:4.4 [3-7-2-7]_Ring Buzzer on Maximum}
{MU:4.4 [3-7-2-8]_Stop Buzzer}
{MU:4.4 [3-7-3]_Display Test Pattern}
{MU:4.4 [3-7-4]_Quit Test Pattern}
{MU:4.4 [3-8]_All Board}
{MU:4.4 [4]_Mechanical Check}
{MU:4.4 [4-1]_Grid Change Door}
{MU:4.4 [4-2]_Bucky HP}
{MU:4.4 [4-3]_Bucky}
{MU:4.4 [3-6-1]_All Check}
{MU:4.4 [4-4]_IP Shift HP}
{MU:4.4 [3-6-2]_Confirm Gain}
{MU:4.4 [4-5]_IP Shift}
{MU:4.4 [3-6-3]_Confirm CCD Timing}
{MU:4.4 [ 4-5-1]_Input Destination and Speed}
{MU:4.4 [3-6-4]_Confirm AD Offset}
{MU:4.4 [4-5-2]_Number of Sequence Setting}
{MU:4.4 [3-6-5]_Confirm AD MUX-Config}
{MU:4.4 [4-5-3]_Stop Sequence}
{MU:4.4 [4-5-4]_Display Number of Sequence}
{MU:4.4 [3-7]_LED/Buzzer/PNL Board}
{MU:4.4 [3-7-1]_All Check}
{MU:4.4 [3-7-2]_Board Check Details}
{MU:4.4 [3-7-2-1]_Turn READY-LED ON}
{MU:4.4 [4-6]_Sub-Scanning HP}
{MU:4.4 [4-7]_Sub-Scanning}
{MU:4.4 [4-7-1]_Input Mode and Speed}
{MU:4.4 [4-7-2]_Number of Sequence Setting}
{MU:4.4 [3-7-2-2]_Turn READY-LED OFF}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-30
MU-31
{MU:4.4 [4-7-3]_Stop Sequence}
{MU:4.4 [4-7-4]_Display Number of Sequence}
{MU:4.4 [5-4-2]_Virtual Image Check (CPS Board - Frame
000
Memory)}
{MU:4.4 [5-4-3]_Virtual Image Output 1}
{MU:4.4 [4-7-5]_Format Adjustment}
{MU:4.4 [4-7-5-1]_Lengths Adjustment}
{MU:4.4 [5-4-3-2]_Start Output}
{MU:4.4 [4-7-5-2]_Start Point Adjustment}
{MU:4.4 [5-4-3-3]_Cansel Setting}
{MU:4.4 [4-8]_FAN}
{MU:4.4 [4-9]_Electromagnetic brake}
{MU:4.4 [4-9-1]_Sub-Scanning (SOLZ1)}
{MU:4.4 [4-9-2]_IP Shift (SOLZ 2)}
{MU:4.4 [5]_Scanner Check}
{MU:4.4 [5-1]_LD Check Details}
{MU:4.4 [5-4-3-4]_Start RAW Image Output}
{MU:4.4 [5-4-4]_Virtual Image Output 2}
{MU:4.4 [5-4-4-1]_Patterned Image Output}
{MU:4.4 [5-5]_Correction}
{MU:4.4 [5-5-1]_Display Scanner Temperature}
{MU:4.4 [5-5-2]_Gain Setting}
{MU:4.4 [5-5-2-1]_Mode Setting}
{MU:4.4 [5-1-1]_LD Performance Check}
{MU:4.4 [5-5-3]_Adjust Correction Light Source}
{MU:4.4 [5-1-2]_Turn LD On (Reading Level)}
{MU:4.4 [5-5-4]_Update Light Source Shading}
{MU:4.4 [5-1-3]_Turn LD On (Detection Level)}
{MU:4.4 [5-5-5]_Update CCD Offset Data}
{MU:4.4 [5-1-4]_Turn LD Off}
{MU:4.4 [5-5-6]_Erase IP}
{MU:4.4 [5-2]_Display Scanner Data}
{MU:4.4 [5-3]_Scanner Check Details}
{MU:4.4 [5-3-1]_Calculate CCD Electronic Noise}
{MU:4.4 [5-3-2]_Adjust Correction Light Source}
{MU:4.4 [5-3-3]_Calculate Delta Y}
{MU:4.4 [5-4]_Scanner Diagnostic}
{MU:4.4 [5-4-1]_Virtual Image Check (CCD21D Board - Frame
Memory)}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
{MU:4.4 [5-4-3-1]_Mode Setting}
{MU:4.4 [5-5-7]_Update 2D Offset Data}
{MU:4.4 [5-5-8]_Update Shading data}
{MU:4.4 [5-5-8-1]_Update Shading and Sensitivity
000
data}
{MU:4.4 [5-5-8-1-1]_Mode Setting}
{MU:4.4 [5-5-8-2]_Update Shading data}
{MU:4.4 [5-5-8-2-1]_Mode Setting}
{MU:4.4 [5-5-9]_Updating the X-Ray Damage Data}
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-31
MU-32
{MU:4.4 [5-6]_Display Scanner Temperature}
{MU:4.4 [5-7]_Image Re-Output}
{MU:4.4 [6]_Software Check}
Starting and Exiting RU PC-TOOL
Starting RU PC-TOOL
(1) To switch from the CL screen to Windows, press the [Windows] key
from the CL’s PC.
{MU:4.4 [6-1]_Display MAC Address}
{MU:4.4 [7]_For Design} * Do not use for servicing purposes.
{MU:4.5_PING}
{MU:4.6_MON}
{MU:4.7_FTP}
(2) From the Start menu on the CL screen, choose “Run...”.
(3) In the “Open” field of the resulting dialog box, type in or select “C:\
Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\Tool\RuPcTool\RuPcTool.exe”, and then
click the [OK] button.
{MU:4.8_INSTALL}
{MU:4.9_VERSION UP}
{MU:4.10_EDIT HISTORY}
{MU:4.11_EDIT CONFIGURATION}
{MU:4.12_EDIT CL NAME}
{MU:4.13_BACKUP}
{MU:4.14_RESTORE}
{MU:4.15_I/O TRACE EXPERT}
{MU:4.16_ERROR DB}
{MU:4.17_ALL RUs SETTING UNINSTALL}
{MU:4.18_ALL RUs SETTING VERSION UP}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-32
MU-33
Exiting RU PC-TOOL
(1) Click on located in the upper right corner of the Main Screen of RU
PC-TOOL.
4.1
NEW
Function
Sets the name and IP address of the RU when it is to be newly installed or added.
Procedures
The example below shows how to register the RU whose IP address is “172.016.1.11”.
(1) Start up the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC-TOOL}
(2) Click the [NEW].
(3) Set the “RU NAME” and “RU IP ADDR”.
(4) Exit the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC-TOOL}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-33
MU-34
4.2
LIST OF EXISTING RU
Function
Displays a list of RUs that have been completely installed.
Procedures
(1) Start up the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC-TOOL}
The RU PC-TOOL window opens on the CL screen to display the “LIST OF
EXISTING RU”, which displays a list of RUs that have been completely installed.
INSTRUCTION
If any RU in the “LIST OF EXISTING RU” has a blank “RU TYPE” column, uninstall
it and then reinstall it.
4.3
DELETE
Function
Deletes the FTP server folder of an RU that is registered in the “LIST OF EXISTING
RU”.
NOTE
Be sure to back up the data before exercising the “DELETE” function.
{MU:4.13_BACKUP}
REFERENCE
When the “DELETE” function is exercised, the “LIST OF EXISTING RU” indication
disappears.
Procedures
(1) Start up the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC-TOOL}
{MU:4.17_ALL RUs SETTING UNINSTALL}
(2) In the RU PC-TOOL window, note the RUs in the “LIST OF EXISTING
RU” and select the RU to be DELETEd.
{MU:4.8_INSTALL}
(2) Exit the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC-TOOL}
(3) Click the [DELETE] button.
(4) Exit the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC-TOOL}
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-34
MU-35
4.4
MUTL
(3) Click on the [MUTL] button.
Function
Exercises various functions peculiar to servicing, including those for RU main body
detailed diagnostics, adjustments, and checks.
Procedures
Starting the MUTL
(1) Start up the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC-TOOL}
(2) From “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, select an [RU].
MUTL window 1 appears on the CL screen.
CAUTION
Do not start more than one MUTL function at a time. If an attempt is made to
start two or more MUTL functions at a time, they do not properly work.
Exiting the MUTL
NOTE
Before exiting the MUTL, make sure that the MUTL operation is terminated.
(1) Click on
in the upper right corner of the MUTL window.
(2) Exit the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC-TOOL}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-35
MU-36
Common MUTL Operating Procedures
The operating procedures common to various MUTL windows are described below:
"Category change" buttons
These buttons are used to change the displayed category. When you click the
rightward arrow button, the next category appears on the display. Clicking the leftward
arrow button displays the previous category.
The following windows are used for the MUTL categories:
- MUTL window 1: Performance check, conveyance check, and board check
- MUTL window 2: Mechanical check, scanner check, and software check
- MUTL window 3: For design
"Function execution" buttons
These buttons are used to execute the MUTL functions.
Some functions are executed the moment a button is clicked. The other functions are
executed when you enter a setting and then click a button.
"Lower hierarchical level" mark ">>"
When you click a button having this mark, the associated lower hierarchical level
buttons appear on the display.
"Result display area"
"Category selection" buttons
The "category selection" buttons are used to select an MUTL category. The following
MUTL categories are selectable:
- Performance Check
This category generates a virtual image output, checks the scanner unit status, and
performs a scanner correction process.
- Conveyance Check
This category provides automatic conveyance for IP mechanism operation.
- Board Check
This category runs a diagnostic check on the PC boards.
- Mechanical Check
This category operates various I/Os and mechanisms on an individual basis.
- Scanner Check
This category checks various states of the scanner unit.
- Software Check
This category displays the RU’s MAC address.
This area displays text to indicate the execution results that are produced by
clicking "function execution" buttons. The following result display types are used:
- "RESULT: OK/RESULT + error code display" type
Either GOOD or NO GOOD is returned to indicate the result of MUTL execution.
When the result is GOOD, the display reads "RESULT: OK". If the result is NO
GOOD, on the other hand, the display indicates an error code to the right of
"RESULT".
Note that “RESULT:OK” displayed with “Calculate Delta Y” just indicates that the
procedures of delta Y calculations are completed but not indicates whether the
calculation results are good or not.
- "Calculation result display" type
The display shows the calculation result derived from MUTL execution (e.g., X-ray
damage ratio).
- "Machine status display" type
The displays shows a numerical value that represents a machine status (e.g.,
scanner unit temperature).
Canceling your operation
To exit a specific mode or return to an upper hierarchical level, click [CANCEL].
- For Design
Do not use this category because it is not for servicing.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-36
MU-37
[1]
Performance Check
[1-1]
Image Output 1
(4) Change the [Image Output 1] window position and size so that the
image display area appears on the left-hand side of the CL screen with
the [Image Output 1] window displayed on the right-hand side.
Function
Generates an image output for imaging performance checkout purposes with only the
IP dust correction function turned OFF.
REFERENCE
This image output is used for IP status observation. If there is dust or dirt on the IP,
horizontal streaks are visible in the image area as artifacts.
Procedures
INSTRUCTION
Be sure that the image output operation is performed in the “Image Output 1”, “Image
Output 2”, and “Image Output 3” order. Do not change the order of image output or
generate a specific image output only. If the order of image output is changed or only
a specific image output is generated, you must turn the RU power OFF and then back
ON, and generate “Image Output 1”, “Image Output 2”, and “Image Output 3” in order
named.
(1) Click the [Performance Check].
(5) From the CL, register the following exposure menu:
- "Test" - "Sensitivity" (size: 17 inches x 17 inches)
(6) Expose an IP to a dose of 0 mR.
REFERENCE
The "Expose at 0 mR" step is to perform an IP read operation without exposing
an IP to radiation. The IP can be read without exposing it to radiation when you
make a radiographic exposure with the X-ray tube radiation field positioned
outside the machine (be sure to adjust the X-ray tube for the minimum output
value).
More specifically, the "Expose at 0 mR" step should be performed by making a
radiographic exposure with the X-ray tube irradiation field positioned outside the
machine while paying due attention to the generation of scattered radiation.
An image then appears in the CL’s exposure study window.
(2) Click the [Image Output 1].
INSTRUCTION
If horizontal streaks are visible in the image area as artifacts, clean the IP.
{MC:5.1.4_Cleaning the IP}
(7) Now, continue with [Image Output 2].
(3) Click
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
in the upper right corner of the RU PC-TOOL main window.
{MU:4.4 [1-2]_Image Output 2}
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-37
MU-38
[1-2]
Image Output 2
Function
Causes the CL screen to display an image for imaging performance checkout
purposes with only the IP X-ray damage correction function turned OFF.
Procedures
INSTRUCTION
Be sure that the image output operation is performed in the “Image Output 1”, “Image
Output 2”, and “Image Output 3” order. Do not change the order of image output or
generate a specific image output only. If the order of image output is changed or only
a specific image output is generated, you must turn the RU power OFF and then back
ON, and generate “Image Output 1”, “Image Output 2”, and “Image Output 3” in order
named.
(1) Perform the [Image Output 1] process.
{MU:4.4 [1-1]_Image Output 1}
(2) Click the [Image Output 2].
[1-3]
Image Output 3
Function
Causes the CL screen to display an image for imaging performance checkout
purposes with all the correction functions turned ON.
REFERENCE
This image is used for comparison with the “Image Output 1” and “Image Output 2”
images.
Procedures
INSTRUCTION
Be sure that the image output operation is performed in the “Image Output 1”, “Image
Output 2”, and “Image Output 3” order. Do not change the order of image output or
generate a specific image output only. If the order of image output is changed or only
a specific image output is generated, you must turn the RU power OFF and then back
ON, and generate “Image Output 1”, “Image Output 2”, and “Image Output 3” in order
named.
(1) Perform the [Image Output 2] process.
{MU:4.4 [1-2]_Image Output 2}
(2) Click the [Image Output 3].
(3) From the CL, register the following exposure menu:
- "Test" - "Sensitivity" (size: 17 inches x 17 inches)
(4) Expose an IP to a dose of 1 mR.
REFERENCE
Typical exposure conditions for exposing an IP to a dose of 1 mR are indicated
below:
Distance: 1.8 m
Voltage:
80 kV
Amperage: 50 mA
Time: 0.013 sec.
(3) From the CL, register the following exposure menu:
- "Test" - "Sensitivity" (size: 17 inches x 17 inches)
An image then appears in the CL’s exposure study window.
(5) Now, continue with [Image Output 3].
{MU:4.4 [1-3]_Image Output 3}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-38
MU-39
(4) Expose an IP to a dose of 1 mR.
REFERENCE
Typical exposure conditions for exposing an IP to a dose of 1 mR are indicated
below:
Distance: 1.8 m
Voltage:
80 kV
Amperage: 50 mA
Time: 0.013 sec.
An image then appears in the CL’s exposure study window.
[1-4]
Virtual Image Output 1
[1-4-1] Mode Setting
Function
Performs a read operation with the CCD function verification LED illuminated, and
causes the CL’s exposure study window to display the resulting read image.
REFERENCE
When vertical streaks or other similar image abnormalities are encountered, this
function is used to identify the cause of such image abnormalities. When, for instance,
vertical streaks are found in the VELOCITY U's output image, it can be concluded that
the IP and LD light source are normal if vertical streaks are found in the virtual images
derived from correction light source intensity levels 1 and 7 (use the minimum and
maximum luminosity levels for checkout purposes). Note that a setting of 0 (correction
light source OFF) may be used when a CCD dark output image is required.
Procedures
INSTRUCTION
Be sure that the operation is performed in the “Mode Setting” and “Start Output” order.
Do not change the order of operation or perform a specific procedure only. If the order
of operation is changed or only a specific procedure is performed, you must turn the
RU power OFF and then back ON, and perform the “Mode Setting” procedure and “Start
Output” procedure in order named.
(1) Click the [Performance Check].
(2) Click the [Virtual Image Output 1 >>].
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-39
MU-40
(3) Click
in the upper right corner of the RU PC-TOOL main window.
(4) Change the [Virtual Image Output 1] window position and size so that
the image display area appears on the left-hand side of the CL screen
with the [Virtual Image Output 1] window displayed on the right-hand
side.
[1-4-2] Start Output
Function
Performs a read operation with the CCD function verification LED illuminated, and
displays the read image in the CL’s exposure study window.
REFERENCE
When vertical streaks or other similar image abnormalities are encountered, this
function is used to identify the cause of such image abnormalities. When, for instance,
vertical streaks are found in the VELOCITY U's output image, it can be concluded that
the IP and LD light source are normal if vertical streaks are found in the virtual images
derived from correction light source intensity levels 1 and 7 (use the minimum and
maximum luminosity levels for checkout purposes). Note that a setting of 0 (correction
light source OFF) may be used when a CCD dark output image is required.
Procedures
(5) From the CL, register the following exposure menu:
- "Test" - "Sensitivity" (size: 17 inches x 17 inches)
(6) Perform correction light source setup.
REFERENCE
The procedure described here assumes that a Mode Setting of “1” is entered.
However, the following settings are also selectable:
0: Performs a read operation with the correction light source turned OFF.
1-7: Performs a read operation with the correction light source turned ON (the
higher the number, the higher the light source intensity).
INSTRUCTION
Be sure that the operation is performed in the “Mode Setting” and “Start Output” order.
Do not change the order of operation or perform a specific procedure only. If the order
of operation is changed or only a specific procedure is performed, you must turn the
RU power OFF and then back ON, and perform the “Mode Setting” procedure and “Start
Output” procedure in order named.
(1) Perform the “Mode Setting” procedure.
{MU:4.4 [1-4-1]_Mode Setting}
(2) Click the [Start Output].
(7) Click the [SET].
An image then appears in the CL’s exposure study window.
(8) Continue with [Start Output].
{MU:4.4 [1-4-2]_Start Output}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-40
MU-41
[1-4-3] Cansel Setting
[1-4-4] Start RAW Image Output
Function
Function
Cancels the correction light source setting that is entered by performing the “Mode
Setting” procedure.
Procedures
(1) Perform the “Mode Setting” procedure.
{MU:4.4 [1-4-1]_Mode Setting}
(2) Click the [Cansel Setting].
Saves the RAW image (PCIRAW.img) of a virtual image on the CL's hard disk. The
image saved in this manner is for design analysis. The image is to be saved in the
following directory:
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\CR-IR364\SYSTEM\ ✻ .✻ .✻ .✻ \LOG\ANALYSIS
\PCIRAW.img
("✻ . ✻ . ✻ . ✻" indicates the IP address of the RU.)
Procedures
(1) Click the [Performance Check].
(2) Click the [Virtual Image Output 1 >>].
(3) Click the [Start RAW Image Output].
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-41
MU-42
[1-5]
LD Performance
Function
Displays the LD's current value.
Procedures
(1) Click the [Performance Check].
(2) Click the [LD Performance Check].
The LD current value then appears on the display.
REFERENCE
If the following calculation results are obtained, an error or warning arises:
-
The ratio between [A] and [B] ([A]/[B]) is 1.2 or greater.
The current value is greater than 210 mA.
The current value is smaller than 30 mA.
All the LD current values are greater than 210 mA.
All the LD current values are smaller than 30 mA.
The LD exercises current value control in order to maintain the luminosity
constant. If the current value increases and is more than 1.2 times the initial
value, it means that the LD or other relevant circuit is faulty.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-42
MU-43
[1-6]
Display Scanner Data
Function
Displays the following scanner-related information:
-
CCD sensitivity adjustment value
CCD electronic noise calculation result
CCD correction light source luminosity setting
CCD defective pixel count
Defective pixel contiguousness check
X-ray damage ratio
Estimated X-ray dosage (mR) for exposure
Correction value for machine sensitivity adjustment
Procedures
(1) Click the [Performance Check].
(2) Click the [Display Scanner Data].
A list of scanner data then appears on the display.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-43
MU-44
Item
Description
Reference information
A
CCD GAIN (G) and CCD GAIN (Gm) are
CCD sensitivity adjustment values, which are
updated when a gain setting is corrected. CCD
GAIN (G) is an expected value. CCD GAIN
(Gm) is an actual setting. A maximum value
not greater than the CCD GAIN (G) value is set
as the CCD GAIN (Gm) value.
An AD gain error (error code: 12231)
occurs mainly if the actual setting
exceeds the expected value at the
time of gain setting correction. When
such an error occurs, it is conceivable
that X-ray tube or CCD assembly may
be faulty.
B
A value for verifying the image graininess.
This value is used as a guide for determining
whether the CCD assembly is damaged. This
information appears on the display when
"Calculate CCD Electronic Noise" is executed
from "Scanner Check".
For details on electronic noise,
see "[5-3-1] CCD Electronic Noise
Calculation".
C
INSTRUCTION
The correction process is performed after scanner unit/IP replacement. For the
procedure for performing the correction process, be sure to see under “14. Scanner
Correction” in the "MC" volume.
{MC:14._Scanner Correction}
[1-7-1] Display Scanner Temperature
Measures and displays the scanner unit temperature.
A luminosity setting for the CCD correction
light source, which is adjusted by correcting a
correction light source luminosity adjustment
value. A setting between 00 and 07 is used.
Procedures
(1) Click the [Performance Check].
If any defective pixel is encountered,
output an uniform image exposure to
check for vertical streaks. If vertical
streaks are found, it is conceivable
that the CCD assembly may be faulty.
E
Contiguous defective CCD pixels are checked
for. If there are no contiguous defective CCD
pixels, the display reads "RESULT: OK". If
contiguous defective CCD pixels exist, a
warning arises (error code: 12241).
If a warning arises, output an uniform
image exposure to check for vertical
streaks. If vertical streaks are found, it
is conceivable that the CCD assembly
may be faulty.
F
The ratio of X-ray damage to the IP is
displayed. The X-ray damage ratio is updated
when an X-ray damage data update is
corrected.
G
Indicates the dosage (mR) employed for
exposure. The value appears in the "mR
(DOWN)" or "mR (UP)" field. The displayed
value represents the dosage employed for the
last exposure. Note that the displayed dosage
value (mR) is estimated from a read image and
should therefore be used as a guide only. The
"QL (UP)" and "QL (DOWN)" fields indicate the
read image QL values.
H
The correction value for machine sensitivity
adjustment is displayed. For VELOCITY U, the
value 1.00 is usually displayed.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
Correction
Function
Indicates the number of defective CCD pixels.
If any of five CCDs exceeds a value of 20, a
warning arises (error code: 12241).
D
[1-7]
(2) Click the [Correction >>].
(3) A confirmation window opens, asking whether or not the grid is
removed.
- If the grid is removed, click [OK].
- If the grid is not removed, click [Cancel].
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-44
MU-45
(4) Click the [Display Scanner Temperature].
[1-7-2] Gain Setting
[1-7-2-1] Mode Setting
Function
The scanner unit temperature then appears on the display.
Compensates for CCD sensitivity variations such as an IP light emission amount
difference and CCD light collection efficiency difference.
Procedures
(1) Click the [Performance Check].
(2) Click the [Correction >>].
(3) A confirmation window opens, asking whether or not the grid is
removed.
- If the grid is removed, click [OK].
- If the grid is not removed, click [Cancel].
(4) Click the [Gain Setting >>].
(5) Click the [Mode Setting].
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-45
MU-46
(6) Enter a value in the gain setting field.
[1-7-3] Adjust Correction Light Source
Function
Adjusts the light intensity of the CCD function verification LED.
(7) Click the [SET].
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
Procedures
(1) Click the [Performance Check].
(2) Click the [Correction >>].
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
(3) A confirmation window opens, asking whether or not the grid is
removed.
- If the grid is removed, click [OK].
- If the grid is not removed, click [Cancel].
(4) Click the [Adjust Correction Light Source].
(5) In the resulting confirmation window, click [OK].
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-46
MU-47
[1-7-4] Update Light Source Shading
[1-7-5] Update CCD Offset Data
Function
Function
Updates the correction light source shading data that is to be referenced when various
correction processes are performed.
Procedures
Updates the CCD offset data that is to be referenced when various correction
processes are performed.
Procedures
(1) Click the [Performance Check].
(1) Click the [Performance Check].
(2) Click the [Correction >>].
(2) Click the [Correction >>].
(3) A confirmation window opens, asking whether or not the grid is
removed.
- If the grid is removed, click [OK].
- If the grid is not removed, click [Cancel].
(4) Click the [Update Light Source Shading].
(5) In the resulting confirmation window, click [OK].
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
(3) A confirmation window opens, asking whether or not the grid is
removed.
- If the grid is removed, click [OK].
- If the grid is not removed, click [Cancel].
(4) Click the [Update CCD Offset Data].
(5) In the resulting confirmation window, click [OK].
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-47
MU-48
[1-7-6] Erase IP
[1-7-7] Update 2D Offset Data
Function
Function
Erases the IP.
Procedures
Compensates for the level offset prevailing after filtration.
Procedures
(1) Click the [Performance Check].
(1) Click the [Performance Check].
(2) Click the [Correction >>].
(2) Click the [Correction >>].
(3) A confirmation window opens, asking whether or not the grid is
removed.
(3) A confirmation window opens, asking whether or not the grid is
removed.
- If the grid is removed, click [OK].
- If the grid is not removed, click [Cancel].
(4) Click the [Erase IP].
The IP erasure operation is then performed 10 times.
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
- If the grid is removed, click [OK].
- If the grid is not removed, click [Cancel].
(4) Click the [Update 2D Offset Data].
(5) In the resulting confirmation window, click [OK].
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-48
MU-49
[1-7-8] Update Shading Data
When sensitivity corrections are to be made
(5) In the resulting confirmation window, click [OK].
(6) Click the [Update Shading and Sensitivity Data >>].
{[1-7-8-1]_Update Shading and Sensitivity Data}
When no sensitivity corrections are to be made
{[1-7-8-2]_Update Shading Data}
[1-7-8-1] Update Shading and Sensitivity Data
[1-7-8-1-1]
Mode Setting
(7) In the resulting confirmation window, click [OK].
(8) Click the [Mode Setting].
Function
Compensates for changes in the LD light intensity and other two-dimensional
characteristics.
Procedures
(1) Click the [Performance Check].
(2) Click the [Correction >>].
(3) A confirmation window opens, asking whether or not the grid is
removed.
- If the grid is removed, click [OK].
- If the grid is not removed, click [Cancel].
(9) In the resulting confirmation window, click [OK].
(10) Enter a value in the shading sensitivity update field.
(11) Click the [SET].
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
(4) Click the [Update Shading Data >>].
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-49
MU-50
[1-7-8-2] Update Shading Data
(7) In the resulting confirmation window, click [OK].
[1-7-8-2-1] Mode Setting
(8) Click the [Mode Setting].
Function
Corrects the two-dimensional characteristics without making sensitivity corrections.
Procedures
(1) Click the [Performance Check].
(9) In the resulting confirmation window, click [OK].
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
(2) Click the [Correction >>].
(3) A confirmation window opens, asking whether or not the grid is
removed.
- If the grid is removed, click [OK].
- If the grid is not removed, click [Cancel].
(4) Click the [Update Shading Data >>].
(5) In the resulting confirmation window, click [OK].
(6) Click the [Update Shading Data >>].
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-50
MU-51
[1-7-9] Updating the X-Ray Damage Data
Function
Compensates for irregularities that are caused by X-ray damage to the IP.
Procedures
(1) Click the [Performance Check].
(2) Click the [Correction >>].
(3) A confirmation window opens, asking whether or not the grid is
removed.
- If the grid is removed, click [OK].
- If the grid is not removed, click [Cancel].
(4) Click the [Updating the X-Ray Damage Data].
(5) In the resulting confirmation window, click [OK].
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-51
MU-52
[2]
Conveyance Check
[2-2]
[2-1]
Termination Mode Setting
[2-2-1] Display Scanner Temperature
Function
Sets the IP and scanner unit positions at RU shutdown. The following three
termination modes are selectable:
- NORMAL
At shutdown, the IP and scanner unit stop at their home positions.
Sequence On Repeat Setting
Function
Measures and displays the scanner unit temperature.
Procedures
(1) Click the [Conveyance Check].
- IP-MNT
At shutdown, the IP stops at the exposure position and the scanner unit stops at the
home position.
- HEAD-MNT
At shutdown, the IP stops at the home position and the scanner unit stops at a
position approximately 10 cm above the lowermost end.
(2) Click the [Sequence On Repeat Setting >>].
Procedures
(1) Click the [Conveyance Check].
(3) Click the [Display Scanner Temperature].
(2) Click the [Termination Mode Setting].
The termination mode sequentially changes in the NORMAL, IP-MNT, and
HEAD-MNT order at each click of [Termination Mode Setting]. The currently
selected mode is enclosed in square brackets ([ ]).
The scanner unit temperature then appears on the display.
REFERENCE
When you restart the machine, it automatically reverts to the NORMAL
termination mode.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-52
MU-53
[2-2-2] Number of Sequence Setting
[2-2-3] Stop Sequence On Repeat
Function
Function
Enters a conveyance count to ensure that an automatic conveyance occurs in
accordance with the entered conveyance count.
Procedures
(1) Click the [Conveyance Check].
(2) Click the [Sequence On Repeat Setting>>].
(3) Enter a conveyance count (between 1 and 99999) in the “Number of
Sequence Setting” field.
Stops an automatic conveyance operation.
Procedures
(1) Click the [Conveyance Check].
(2) Click the [Sequence On Repeat Setting>>].
(3) Click the [Stop Sequence On Repeat].
The automatic conveyance operation then comes to a stop.
(4) Click the [SET].
The automatic conveyance operation is then started (performed three times).
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-53
MU-54
[2-2-4] Sequence Mode Setting
[2-2-5] Display Number of Sequence
Function
Function
Selects either of the following operation modes for automatic conveyance:
- READ: Read mode
- ERASE: Erasure mode
Procedures
Displays the number of automatic conveyance operations that have been performed.
Procedures
(1) Click the [Conveyance Check].
(1) Click the [Conveyance Check].
(2) Click the [Sequence On Repeat Setting>>].
(2) Click the [Sequence On Repeat Setting>>].
(3) Click the [Display Number of Sequence].
(3) Click the [Sequence Mode Setting].
The operation mode alternates between READ and ERASE at each click of [Sequence
Mode Setting]. The currently selected mode is enclosed in square brackets ([ ]).
The display then shows a conveyance count that is reached when you click [Display
Number of Sequence].
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-54
MU-55
[2-2-6] Erasure-lamp Lighting Setting
Function
Selects an erasure mode so that the erasure lamps are ON or OFF during automatic
conveyance.
CAUTION
After an automatic conveyance operation has been performed with the above
function exercised, be sure to select the “ON mode” as the erasure mode. If
the “OFF mode” persists, the erasure lamps remain extinguished during routine
processing.
Procedures
(1) Click the [Conveyance Check].
(2) Click the [Sequence On Repeat Setting >>].
(3) Click the [Erasure-lamp Lighting Setting].
The erasure mode alternates between “ON mode” and “OFF mode” at each click of
[Erasure-lamp Lighting Setting]. The currently selected mode is enclosed in square
brackets ([ ]).
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-55
MU-56
[3]
Board Check
“Board Check” provides self-diagnostic checks of PC boards and displays the check
results.
The following boards can be checked:
-
“Mother Board”
“PAT Board”
“SND Board”
“ERS Board”
“CPS Board”
“CCD Board”
“LED/Buzzer/PNL Board”
CAUTION
[3-1]
Mother Board
[3-1-1] All Check
Function
Runs the following diagnostic checks on the ATX board (motherboard):
-
SDRAM
COMPACT FLASH
Interrupt
Register
Procedures
CAUTION
After completion of a board check, be sure to turn the RU power OFF and then
back ON. In the board check process, the boards are initialized on an individual
basis. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of the
board check.
After completion of a board check, be sure to turn the RU power OFF and then
back ON. In the board check process, the boards are initialized on an individual
basis. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of the
board check.
NOTE
(1) Click the [Board Check].
After the board check process is started, do not exit the MUTL until the board check
result appears on the display. Even if you exit the MUTL, the board check process
continues on the RU.
(2) Click the [Mother Board >>].
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-56
MU-57
3.
Click the [All Check].
[3-1-2] Board Check Details
[3-1-2-1] SDRAM
Function
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
Runs an SDRAM diagnostic check on the ATX board (motherboard).
Procedures
CAUTION
After completion of a board check, be sure to turn the RU power OFF and then
back ON. In the board check process, the boards are initialized on an individual
basis. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of the
board check.
(1) Click the [Board Check].
(2) Click the [Mother Board >>].
(3) Click the [Board Check Details >>].
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-57
MU-58
(4) Click the [SDRAM].
[3-1-2-2] COMPACT FLASH
Function
Runs a diagnostic check on the Compact Flash Card.
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
Procedures
CAUTION
After completion of a board check, be sure to turn the RU power OFF and then
back ON. In the board check process, the boards are initialized on an individual
basis. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of the
board check.
(1) Click the [Board Check].
(2) Click the [Mother Board >>].
(3) Click the [Board Check Details >>].
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-58
MU-59
(4) Click the [COMPACT FLASH].
[3-1-2-3] Interrupt
Function
Runs a diagnostic check on the interrupt function.
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
Procedures
CAUTION
After completion of a board check, be sure to turn the RU power OFF and then
back ON. In the board check process, the boards are initialized on an individual
basis. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of the
board check.
(1) Click the [Board Check].
(2) Click the [Mother Board >>].
(3) Click the [Board Check Details >>].
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-59
MU-60
(4) Click the [Interrupt].
[3-1-2-4] Register
Function
Runs a register diagnostic check on the ATX board (motherboard).
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
Procedures
CAUTION
After completion of a board check, be sure to turn the RU power OFF and then
back ON. In the board check process, the boards are initialized on an individual
basis. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of the
board check.
(1) Click the [Board Check].
(2) Click the [Mother Board >>].
(3) Click the [Board Check Details >>].
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-60
MU-61
(4) Click the [Register].
[3-2]
PAT Board
[3-2-1] All Check
Function
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
Runs a fuse diagnostic check on the PAT21A board.
Procedures
CAUTION
After completion of a board check, be sure to turn the RU power OFF and then
back ON. In the board check process, the boards are initialized on an individual
basis. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of the
board check.
(1) Click the [Board Check].
(2) Click the [PAT Board >>].
(3) Click the [All Check].
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-61
MU-62
[3-3]
SND Board
(3) Click the [All Check].
[3-3-1] All Check
Function
Runs the following diagnostic checks on the SND21A board and SND21B board:
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
-
INSTRUCTION
Register
Solenoid
Pulse-Motor
Fuse
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
Procedures
CAUTION
After completion of a board check, be sure to turn the RU power OFF and then
back ON. In the board check process, the boards are initialized on an individual
basis. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of the
board check.
(1) Click the [Board Check].
(2) Click the [SND Board >>].
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-62
MU-63
[3-3-2] Board Check Details
(4) Click the [Register].
[3-3-2-1] Register
Function
Runs a register diagnostic check on the SND21A board and SND21B board.
Procedures
CAUTION
After completion of a board check, be sure to turn the RU power OFF and then
back ON. In the board check process, the boards are initialized on an individual
basis. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of the
board check.
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
(1) Click the [Board Check].
(2) Click the [SND Board >>].
(3) Click the [Board Check Details >>].
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-63
MU-64
[3-3-2-2] Solenoid
(4) Click the [Solenoid].
Function
Runs a diagnostic check on the grid cover lock drive solenoid (SOLH1).
Procedures
CAUTION
After completion of a board check, be sure to turn the RU power OFF and then
back ON. In the board check process, the boards are initialized on an individual
basis. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of the
board check.
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
(1) Click the [Board Check].
(2) Click the [SND Board >>].
(3) Click the [Board Check Details >>].
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-64
MU-65
[3-3-2-3] Pulse-Motor
(4) Click the [Pulse-Motor].
Function
Runs a diagnostic check on all pulse motors that are controlled by the SND21A board
and SND21B board.
Procedures
CAUTION
After completion of a board check, be sure to turn the RU power OFF and then
back ON. In the board check process, the boards are initialized on an individual
basis. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of the
board check.
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
(1) Click the [Board Check].
(2) Click the [SND Board >>].
(3) Click the [Board Check Details >>].
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-65
MU-66
[3-3-2-4] Fuse
(4) Click the [Fuse].
Function
Runs a fuse diagnostic check on the SND21A board and SND21B board.
Procedures
CAUTION
After completion of a board check, be sure to turn the RU power OFF and then
back ON. In the board check process, the boards are initialized on an individual
basis. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of the
board check.
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
(1) Click the [Board Check].
(2) Click the [SND Board >>].
(3) Click the [Board Check Details >>].
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-66
MU-67
[3-4]
ERS Board
[3-4-2] Board Check Details
[3-4-1] All Check
[3-4-2-1] Erasure-Lamp
Function
Function
Runs the following diagnostic checks on the ERS21A/B board:
- Erasure lamps
- Erasure unit internal heater
- Safety thermostat sensor (TSWA1)
Procedures
CAUTION
After completion of a board check, be sure to turn the RU power OFF and then
back ON. In the board check process, the boards are initialized on an individual
basis. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of the
board check.
Runs a diagnostic check on the erasure lamps.
Procedures
CAUTION
After completion of a board check, be sure to turn the RU power OFF and then
back ON. In the board check process, the boards are initialized on an individual
basis. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of the
board check.
(1) Click the [Board Check].
(1) Click the [Board Check].
(2) Click the [ERS Board >>].
(2) Click the [ERS Board >>].
(3) Click the [Board Check Details >>].
(3) Click the [All Check].
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-67
MU-68
(4) Click the [Erasure-Lamp].
[3-4-2-2] Heater and Thermistor
Function
Runs a diagnostic check on the erasure unit internal heater and safety thermostat
sensor (TSWA1).
The erasure lamp diagnostic check result then appears on the display.
Procedures
CAUTION
After completion of a board check, be sure to turn the RU power OFF and then
back ON. In the board check process, the boards are initialized on an individual
basis. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of the
board check.
(1) Click the [Board Check].
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
(2) Click the [ERS Board >>].
(3) Click the [Board Check Details >>].
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-68
MU-69
(4) Click the [Heater and Thermistor].
[3-4-3] Turn Erasure-lamp On
Function
Illuminates the erasure lamps.
The heater/thermistor diagnostic check result then appears on the display.
Procedures
CAUTION
After completion of a board check, be sure to turn the RU power OFF and then
back ON. In the board check process, the boards are initialized on an individual
basis. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of the
board check.
(1) Click the [Board Check].
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
(2) Click the [ERS Board >>].
(3) Click the [Turn Erasure-lamp On].
The erasure lamps then illuminate.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-69
MU-70
[3-4-4] Turn Erasure-lamp Off
[3-4-5] Display Erasure Temperature
Function
Function
Extinguishes the erasure lamps.
Procedures
CAUTION
Displays the erasure lamp temperatures.
Procedures
CAUTION
After completion of a board check, be sure to turn the RU power OFF and then
back ON. In the board check process, the boards are initialized on an individual
basis. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of the
board check.
After completion of a board check, be sure to turn the RU power OFF and then
back ON. In the board check process, the boards are initialized on an individual
basis. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of the
board check.
(1) Click the [Board Check].
(1) Click the [Board Check].
(2) Click the [ERS Board >>].
(2) Click the [ERS Board >>].
(3) Click the [Turn Erasure-lamp Off].
The erasure lamps then become extinguished.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-70
MU-71
(3) Click the [Display Erasure Temperature].
[3-4-6] View Erase Board Version
Function
Acquires the erasure board (ERS board) version.
The erasure lamp temperatures then appear on the display.
Procedures
(1) Click the [Board Check].
(2) Click the [ERS Board >>].
REFERENCE
Although the erasure unit of an old model (840Y0099) is equipped with three
thermistors for sensing the temperature of the erasure lamps, the erasure unit of a
new model (840Y0122) is equipped with only one thermistor. Therefore, the three
displayed temperature values of the erasure lamps all show the same value.
(3) Click the [View Erase Board Version].
The version of the erasure board (ERS board) appears.
REFERENCE
The version VER1 of the erasure board (ERS board) refers to the ERS21A board,
and the version VER2 refers to the ERS21B board.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-71
MU-72
[3-5]
CPS Board
(3) Click the [All Check].
[3-5-1] All Check
Function
Runs the following diagnostic checks on the CPS21A board:
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
-
INSTRUCTION
DPRAM
Communication between DSPs
Transfer between DSPs
FIFO
Internal RAM
LVC Loopback
LVC FPGA
PCI Interrupt
SDRAM
Register
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
Procedures
CAUTION
After completion of a board check, be sure to turn the RU power OFF and then
back ON. In the board check process, the boards are initialized on an individual
basis. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of the
board check.
(1) Click the [Board Check].
(2) Click the [CPS Board >>].
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-72
MU-73
[3-5-2] Board Check Details
[3-5-2-2] Communication between DSPs
[3-5-2-1] DPRAM
Function
Function
Performs a DPRAM marching test on the CPS21A board.
Procedures
CAUTION
After completion of a board check, be sure to turn the RU power OFF and then
back ON. In the board check process, the boards are initialized on an individual
basis. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of the
board check.
(1) Click the [Board Check].
(2) Click the [CPS Board >>].
(3) Click the [Board Check Details >>].
Performs an inter-DSP communication test on the CPS21A board.
Procedures
CAUTION
After completion of a board check, be sure to turn the RU power OFF and then
back ON. In the board check process, the boards are initialized on an individual
basis. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of the
board check.
(1) Click the [Board Check].
(2) Click the [CPS Board >>].
(3) Click the [Board Check Details >>].
(4) Click the [DPRAM].
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-73
MU-74
(4) Click the [Communication between DSPs].
[3-5-2-3] Transfer between DSPs
Function
Performs an inter-DSP transfer test on the CPS21A board.
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
Procedures
CAUTION
After completion of a board check, be sure to turn the RU power OFF and then
back ON. In the board check process, the boards are initialized on an individual
basis. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of the
board check.
(1) Click the [Board Check].
(2) Click the [CPS Board >>].
(3) Click the [Board Check Details >>].
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-74
MU-75
(4) Click the [Transfer between DSPs].
[3-5-2-4] FIFO
Function
Performs an FIFO input test on the CPS21A board.
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
Procedures
CAUTION
After completion of a board check, be sure to turn the RU power OFF and then
back ON. In the board check process, the boards are initialized on an individual
basis. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of the
board check.
(1) Click the [Board Check].
(2) Click the [CPS Board >>].
(3) Click the [Board Check Details >>].
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-75
MU-76
(4) Click the [FIFO].
[3-5-2-5] Internal RAM
Function
Performs an internal RAM marching test on the CPS21A board.
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
Procedures
CAUTION
After completion of a board check, be sure to turn the RU power OFF and then
back ON. In the board check process, the boards are initialized on an individual
basis. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of the
board check.
(1) Click the [Board Check].
(2) Click the [CPS Board >>].
(3) Click the [Board Check Details >>].
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-76
MU-77
(4) Click the [Internal RAM].
[3-5-2-6] LVC Loopback
Function
Performs an LVC loopback test on the CPS21A board.
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
Procedures
CAUTION
After completion of a board check, be sure to turn the RU power OFF and then
back ON. In the board check process, the boards are initialized on an individual
basis. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of the
board check.
(1) Click the [Board Check].
(2) Click the [CPS Board >>].
(3) Click the [Board Check Details >>].
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-77
MU-78
(4) Click the [LVC Loopback].
[3-5-2-7] LVC FPGA
Function
Performs an LVC FPGA read/write test on the CPS21A board.
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
Procedures
CAUTION
After completion of a board check, be sure to turn the RU power OFF and then
back ON. In the board check process, the boards are initialized on an individual
basis. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of the
board check.
(1) Click the [Board Check].
(2) Click the [CPS Board >>].
(3) Click the [Board Check Details >>].
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-78
MU-79
(4) Click the [LVC FPGA].
[3-5-2-8] PCI Interrupt
Function
Performs a PCI interrupt test on the CPS21A board.
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
Procedures
CAUTION
After completion of a board check, be sure to turn the RU power OFF and then
back ON. In the board check process, the boards are initialized on an individual
basis. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of the
board check.
(1) Click the [Board Check].
(2) Click the [CPS Board >>].
(3) Click the [Board Check Details >>].
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-79
MU-80
(4) Click the [PCI Interrupt].
[3-5-2-9] SDRAM
Function
Performs an SDRAM marching test on the CPS21A board.
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
Procedures
CAUTION
After completion of a board check, be sure to turn the RU power OFF and then
back ON. In the board check process, the boards are initialized on an individual
basis. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of the
board check.
(1) Click the [Board Check].
(2) Click the [CPS Board >>].
(3) Click the [Board Check Details >>].
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-80
MU-81
(4) Click the [SDRAM].
[3-5-2-10] Register
Function
Performs a register test on the CPS21A board.
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
Procedures
CAUTION
After completion of a board check, be sure to turn the RU power OFF and then
back ON. In the board check process, the boards are initialized on an individual
basis. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of the
board check.
(1) Click the [Board Check].
(2) Click the [CPS Board >>].
(3) Click the [Board Check Details >>].
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-81
MU-82
(4) Click the [Register].
[3-6]
CCD Board
[3-6-1] All Check
Function
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
Runs a diagnostic check on the CCD21A/D board.
Procedures
CAUTION
After completion of a board check, be sure to turn the RU power OFF and then
back ON. In the board check process, the boards are initialized on an individual
basis. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of the
board check.
(1) Click the [Board Check].
(2) Click the [CCD Board >>].
(3) Click the [All Check].
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-82
MU-83
[3-6-2] Confirm Gain
[3-6-3] Confirm CCD Timing
Function
Function
Checks whether the gain value setting for the AD coincides with the expected value.
Procedures
CAUTION
After completion of a board check, be sure to turn the RU power OFF and then
back ON. In the board check process, the boards are initialized on an individual
basis. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of the
board check.
(1) Click the [Board Check].
(2) Click the [CCD Board >>].
(3) Click the [Confirm Gain].
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
Checks whether the timing value setting for the CCD coincides with the expected
value.
Procedures
CAUTION
After completion of a board check, be sure to turn the RU power OFF and then
back ON. In the board check process, the boards are initialized on an individual
basis. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of the
board check.
(1) Click the [Board Check].
(2) Click the [CCD Board >>].
(3) Click the [Confirm CCD Timing].
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-83
MU-84
[3-6-4] Confirm AD Offset
[3-6-5] Confirm AD MUX-Config
Function
Function
Checks whether the offset value setting for the AD coincides with the expected value.
Procedures
CAUTION
After completion of a board check, be sure to turn the RU power OFF and then
back ON. In the board check process, the boards are initialized on an individual
basis. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of the
board check.
(1) Click the [Board Check].
(2) Click the [CCD Board >>].
(3) Click the [Confirm AD Offset].
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
Checks whether the data set for the AD on the CCD board coincides with the expected
value.
Procedures
CAUTION
After completion of a board check, be sure to turn the RU power OFF and then
back ON. In the board check process, the boards are initialized on an individual
basis. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of the
board check.
(1) Click the [Board Check].
(2) Click the [CCD Board >>].
(3) Click the [Confirm AD MUX-Config].
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-84
MU-85
[3-7]
LED/Buzzer/PNL Board
[3-7-2] Board Check Details
[3-7-1] All Check
[3-7-2-1] Turn READY-LED ON
Function
Function
Runs the following diagnostic checks on the LED21A board, LED21C board, LCD
panel, and LCN21A board:
- LED illumination and extinguishment
- Buzzer sound level
Illuminates the Ready LED and green indicator lamp on the operation panel.
Procedures
(1) Click the [Board Check].
Procedures
(1) Click the [Board Check].
(2) Click the [LED/Buzzer/PNL Board].
(2) Click the [LED/Buzzer/PNL Board].
(3) Click the [Board Check Details >>].
(3) Click the [All Check].
(4) Click the [Turn READY-LED ON].
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
The Ready LED and green indicator lamp on the operation panel then illuminate.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-85
MU-86
[3-7-2-2] Turn READY-LED OFF
[3-7-2-3] Turn CALL-LED ON
Function
Function
Extinguishes the Ready LED and green indicator lamp on the operation panel.
Procedures
Illuminates the Call LED and orange indicator lamp on the operation panel.
Procedures
(1) Click the [Board Check].
(1) Click the [Board Check].
(2) Click the [LED/Buzzer/PNL Board].
(2) Click the [LED/Buzzer/PNL Board].
(3) Click the [Board Check Details >>].
(3) Click the [Board Check Details >>].
(4) Click the [Turn READY-LED OFF].
(4) Click the [Turn CALL-LED ON].
The Ready LED and green indicator lamp on the operation panel then become
extinguished.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
The Call LED and orange indicator lamp on the operation panel then illuminate.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-86
MU-87
[3-7-2-4] Turn CALL-LED OFF
[3-7-2-5] Ring Buzzer on Minimum
Function
Function
Extinguishes the Call LED and orange indicator lamp on the operation panel.
Procedures
Sounds the buzzer at a low sound level.
Procedures
(1) Click the [Board Check].
(1) Click the [Board Check].
(2) Click the [LED/Buzzer/PNL Board].
(2) Click the [LED/Buzzer/PNL Board].
(3) Click the [Board Check Details >>].
(3) Click the [Board Check Details >>].
(4) Click the [Turn CALL-LED OFF].
(4) Click the [Ring Buzzer on Minimum].
The Call LED and orange indicator lamp on the operation panel then become
extinguished.
The buzzer then sounds at a low level.
REFERENCE
To silence the buzzer, click [Stop Buzzer].
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-87
MU-88
[3-7-2-6] Ring Buzzer on Medium
[3-7-2-7] Ring Buzzer on Maximum
Function
Function
Sounds the buzzer at a medium level.
Procedures
Sounds the buzzer at a high level.
Procedures
(1) Click the [Board Check].
(1) Click the [Board Check].
(2) Click the [LED/Buzzer/PNL Board].
(2) Click the [LED/Buzzer/PNL Board].
(3) Click the [Board Check Details >>].
(3) Click the [Board Check Details >>].
(4) Click the [Ring Buzzer on Medium].
(4) Click the [Ring Buzzer on Maximum].
The buzzer then sounds at a medium level.
REFERENCE
To silence the buzzer, click [Stop Buzzer].
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
The buzzer then sounds at a high level.
REFERENCE
To silence the buzzer, click [Stop Buzzer].
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-88
MU-89
[3-7-2-8] Stop Buzzer
[3-7-3] Display Test Pattern
Function
Function
Stops the buzzer.
Procedures
Displays a test pattern on the LCD panel.
Procedures
(1) Click the [Board Check].
(1) Click the [Board Check].
(2) Click the [LED/Buzzer/PNL Board].
(2) Click the [LED/Buzzer/PNL Board].
(3) Click the [Board Check Details >>].
(4) Click the [Stop Buzzer].
The buzzer then stops.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-89
MU-90
(3) Click the [Display Test Pattern].
[3-7-4] Quit Test Pattern
Function
Clears the displayed test pattern from the LCD panel.
The following test pattern appears on the display.
Procedures
(1) Click the [Board Check].
(2) Click the [LED/Buzzer/PNL Board].
(3) Click the [Quit Test Pattern].
REFERENCE
To exit the test pattern mode, click [Quit Test Pattern].
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
The displayed test pattern then disappears.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-90
MU-91
[3-8]
All Board
Function
Runs a diagnostic check on the following PC boards, LEDs, buzzer, and panel:
-
ATX board (mother board)
PAT21A Board
SND21A/SND21B board
ERS21A/B board
CPS21A board
CCD21A/D board
LED/Buzzer/Panel
Procedures
CAUTION
After completion of a board check, be sure to turn the RU power OFF and then
back ON. In the board check process, the boards are initialized on an individual
basis. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of the
board check.
(1) Click the [Board Check].
(2) Click the [All Board].
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-91
MU-92
[4]
Mechanical Check
[4-2]
[4-1]
Grid Change Door
Function
Function
Drives/stops the grid cover lock drive solenoid (SOLH1).
Procedures
CAUTION
After the mechanical check is conducted, be sure to turn the RU power OFF
and then back ON. In the mechanical check process, the I/Os are individually
operated. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of I/O
operations so that the parts may become damaged.
(1) Click
Bucky HP
Turns ON the Bucky motor (MZ3) and closes the Bucky HP sensor (SZ7).
Procedures
CAUTION
After the mechanical check is conducted, be sure to turn the RU power OFF
and then back ON. In the mechanical check process, the I/Os are individually
operated. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of I/O
operations so that the parts may become damaged.
(1) Click
at the upper right corner of the window.
at the upper right corner of the window.
MUTL window 2 then opens.
MUTL window 2 then opens.
(2) Click the [Mechanical Check].
(2) Click the [Mechanical Check].
(3) Click the [Bucky HP].
(3) Click the [Grid Change Door].
The grid cover lock drive solenoid (SOLH1) alternates between the “UNLOCK” mode
and “LOCK” mode at each click of [Grid Change Door]. The currently selected mode
is enclosed in square brackets ([ ]).
The Bucky mechanism then move to its home position, causing the display to read
“RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-92
MU-93
[4-3]
Bucky
Function
IP Shift HP
Function
Drives/stops the Bucky motor (MZ3).
Procedures
CAUTION
After the mechanical check is conducted, be sure to turn the RU power OFF
and then back ON. In the mechanical check process, the I/Os are individually
operated. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of I/O
operations so that the parts may become damaged.
(1) Click
[4-4]
at the upper right corner of the window.
MUTL window 2 then opens.
Turns ON the IP movement motor (MZ2) and closes the IP reading-side HP sensor
(SZ2).
Procedures
CAUTION
After the mechanical check is conducted, be sure to turn the RU power OFF
and then back ON. In the mechanical check process, the I/Os are individually
operated. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of I/O
operations so that the parts may become damaged.
(1) Click
at the upper right corner of the window.
MUTL window 2 then opens.
(2) Click the [Mechanical Check].
(2) Click the [Mechanical Check].
(3) Click the [Bucky].
(3) Click the [IP Shift HP].
The Bucky motor (MZ3) alternates between the “MOVE” mode and “STOP” mode at
each click of [Bucky]. The currently selected mode is enclosed in square brackets ([ ]).
The Bucky mechanism then move to its home position, causing the display to read
“RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-93
MU-94
[4-5]
IP Shift
(3) Click the [IP Shift >>].
[4-5-1] Input Destination and Speed
Function
Drives the IP movement motor (MZ2) to perform the following operations:
- Shift from the exposure position (SZ2: OPEN; SZ21: OPEN) to the reading position
(SZ2: CLOSE)
- Shift from the reading position (SZ2: CLOSE) to the erasure position (SZ21:
CLOSE)
- Shift from the erasure position (SZ21: CLOSE) to the exposure position (SZ2:
OPEN; SZ21: OPEN)
Procedures
CAUTION
After the mechanical check is conducted, be sure to turn the RU power OFF
and then back ON. In the mechanical check process, the I/Os are individually
operated. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of I/O
operations so that the parts may become damaged.
INSTRUCTION
Perform the following procedure after moving the scanner unit and erasure unit to their
home positions (SZ1: CLOSE). If the scanner unit or erasure unit is in a position other
than the home position (SZ1: OPEN), the IP cannot move.
{MU:4.4 [4-6]_Sub-Scanning HP}
(1) Click
at the upper right corner of the window.
MUTL window 2 then opens.
(2) Click the [Mechanical Check].
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
(4) Specify the shift direction and speed.
NOTES
- The procedure described here assumes that a shift direction setting of 0 and a
shift speed setting of 1 are entered in the shift position/shift speed setting input
("Input Mode and Speed") field. However, the following values can be set in
the shift position/shift speed setting input ("Input Mode and Speed") field.
Shift direction
Setting
Description
0 (single-byte)
Exposure position (SZ2: OPEN; SZ21: OPEN) → Reading
position (SZ2: CLOSE)
1 (single-byte)
Reading position (SZ2: CLOSE) → Erasure position (SZ21:
CLOSE)
2 (single-byte)
Erasure position (SZ21: CLOSE) → Exposure position (SZ2:
OPEN; SZ21: OPEN)
Shift speed
Setting
Description
0 (single-byte)
Normal speed
1 (single-byte)
Low speed
Example:
To move the IP shift mechanism from the erasure position to the exposure
position at the normal speed, you must enter "2,0" in the shift position/shift
speed setting input ("Input Mode and Speed") field.
- Separate the two settings with a single-byte comma (,).
- The two settings must always be entered.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-94
MU-95
(5) Click the [SET].
[4-5-2] Number of Sequence Setting
Function
Operates the IP movement motor (MZ2) as needed to perform a preselected number
of conveyance operations.
The preselected operation is then performed, and the display reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
Procedures
CAUTION
After the mechanical check is conducted, be sure to turn the RU power OFF
and then back ON. In the mechanical check process, the I/Os are individually
operated. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of I/O
operations so that the parts may become damaged.
(1) Click
at the upper right corner of the window.
MUTL window 2 then opens.
(2) Click the [Mechanical Check].
(3) Click the [IP Shift >>].
(4) Enter a conveyance count (a value between 0 and 99999).
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-95
MU-96
(5) Click the [SET].
[4-5-3] Stop Sequence
Function
Stops the operation that is performed in accordance with the conveyance count
entered as described under [4-5-2].
The preselected number of conveyance operations (three operations) are then
performed, and the display reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
Procedures
CAUTION
After the mechanical check is conducted, be sure to turn the RU power OFF
and then back ON. In the mechanical check process, the I/Os are individually
operated. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of I/O
operations so that the parts may become damaged.
(1) Perform the conveyance count input procedure as directed under
[4-5-2].
{MU:4.4 [4-5-2]_Number of Sequence Setting}
(2) Click the [Stop Sequence].
The conveyance operation then comes to a stop.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-96
MU-97
[4-5-4] Display Number of Sequence
[4-6]
Function
Function
Displays a conveyance count that is entered by performing the conveyance count
input procedure described under [4-5-2].
Procedures
CAUTION
After the mechanical check is conducted, be sure to turn the RU power OFF
and then back ON. In the mechanical check process, the I/Os are individually
operated. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of I/O
operations so that the parts may become damaged.
(1) Perform the conveyance count input procedure as directed under
[4-5-2].
Sub-Scanning HP
Turns ON the subscanning motor (MZ1) and closes the subscanning HP sensor (SZ1).
Procedures
CAUTION
After the mechanical check is conducted, be sure to turn the RU power OFF
and then back ON. In the mechanical check process, the I/Os are individually
operated. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of I/O
operations so that the parts may become damaged.
(1) Click
at the upper right corner of the window.
{MU:4.4 [4-5-2]_Number of Sequence Setting}
(2) Click the [Display Number of Sequence].
MUTL window 2 then opens.
(2) Click the [Mechanical Check].
The display then shows a conveyance count that is reached when you click.
(3) Click the [Sub-Scanning HP].
The Bucky mechanism then move to its home position, causing the display to read
“RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-97
MU-98
[4-7]
Sub-Scanning
(3) Click the [Sub-Scanning >>].
[4-7-1] Input Mode and Speed
Function
Drives the subscanning motor (MZ1) to perform the following operations:
- Performs a read operation along the outward path and a dosage detection/read
operation along the homeward path.
- Performs a read operation along the outward path and an erasure operation along
the homeward path.
- Performs an erasure operation along the outward path and homeward path.
- Performs a reciprocating motion along the lower 1/3 of the path.
- Performs a reciprocating motion along the lower 2/3 of the path.
Procedures
CAUTION
After the mechanical check is conducted, be sure to turn the RU power OFF
and then back ON. In the mechanical check process, the I/Os are individually
operated. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of I/O
operations so that the parts may become damaged.
INSTRUCTION
Perform the procedure after shifting the IP to its home position (SZ2: CLOSE). If the
IP is in the exposure position (SZ2: OPEN; SZ21: OPEN), the scanner unit/erasure
unit cannot move.
{MU:4.4 [4-4]_IP Shift HP}
(1) Click
at the upper right corner of the window.
MUTL window 2 then opens.
(2) Click the [Mechanical Check].
(4) Specify the shift mode and shift speed (erasure dosage table number).
NOTES
- The procedure described here assumes that a shift mode setting of 1 and a
shift speed (erasure dosage table number) setting of 3 are entered in the shift
position/shift speed setting input ("Input Mode and Speed") field. However, the
following values can be set in the shift position/shift speed setting input ("Input
Mode and Speed") field.
Shift mode
Setting
Description
0 (single-byte)
Outward: read; homeward: dosage detection/read.
1 (single-byte)
Outward: read; homeward: erasure.
2 (single-byte)
Outward: erasure; homeward: erasure.
3 (single-byte)
Reciprocating motion along the lower 1/3 of the path.
4 (single-byte)
Reciprocating motion along the lower 2/3 of the path.
Shift speed (erasure dosage table number)
Shift mode (*1)
Setting
Description
0
0-9 (single-byte)
Constant speed without regard to the setting (the
setting must always be entered).
1
0-9 (single-byte)
The higher the setting, the lower the speed (0: high
speed; 9: low speed).
2
2-9 (single-byte)
The higher the setting, the lower the speed (2: high
speed; 9: low speed).
3 or 4
0-9 (single-byte)
Constant speed without regard to the setting (the
setting must always be entered).
*1: The acceptable settings are limited depending on the selected shift mode.
Example:
To perform an erasure operation along the outward path and homeward path
at the lowest shift speed, you must enter "2,9" in the shift position/shift speed
setting input ("Input Mode and Speed") field.
- Separate the two settings with a single-byte comma (,).
- The two settings must always be entered.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-98
MU-99
(5) Click the [SET].
[4-7-2] Number of Sequence Setting
Function
Operates the subscanning motor (MZ1) as needed to perform a preselected number
of conveyance operations
The preselected operation is then performed, and the display reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
Procedures
CAUTION
After the mechanical check is conducted, be sure to turn the RU power OFF
and then back ON. In the mechanical check process, the I/Os are individually
operated. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of I/O
operations so that the parts may become damaged.
INSTRUCTION
Perform the procedure after shifting the IP to its home position (SZ2: CLOSE). If the
IP is in the exposure position (SZ2: OPEN; SZ21: OPEN), the scanner unit/erasure
unit cannot move.
{MU:4.4 [4-4]_IP Shift HP}
(1) Click
at the upper right corner of the window.
MUTL window 2 then opens.
(2) Click the [Mechanical Check].
(3) Click the [Sub-Scanning >>].
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-99
MU-100
(4) Enter a conveyance count (between 0 and 99999) and shift speed
(erasure dosage table number).
[4-7-3] Stop Sequence
Function
Stops the operation that is performed in accordance with the conveyance count
entered as described under [4-7-2].
Procedures
NOTES
- The procedure described here assumes that a conveyance count setting of 3
and a shift speed (erasure dosage table number) setting of 2 are entered in
the conveyance count input ("Number of Sequence Setting") field. However,
the following values can be set in the conveyance count input ("Number of
Sequence Setting") field.
Conveyance count
Setting
0-99999
Description
Conveyance count.
CAUTION
After the mechanical check is conducted, be sure to turn the RU power OFF
and then back ON. In the mechanical check process, the I/Os are individually
operated. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of I/O
operations so that the parts may become damaged.
(1) Perform the conveyance count input procedure as directed under
[4-7-2].
{MU:4.4 [4-7-2]_Number of Sequence Setting}
Shift speed (erasure dosage table number)
Setting
Description
2-9 (single-byte)
The higher the setting, the lower the speed (2: high speed; 9: low
speed).
Example:
To perform a conveyance operation 50 times in succession at the lowest
speed, you must enter "50,9" in the conveyance count input ("Number of
Sequence Setting") field.
(2) Click the [Stop Sequence].
The conveyance operation then comes to a stop.
- Separate the two settings with a single-byte comma (,).
- The two settings must always be entered.
(5) Click the [SET].
The preselected number of conveyance operations are then performed, and the
display reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-100
MU-101
[4-7-4] Display Number of Sequence
[4-7-5] Format Adjustment
Function
[4-7-5-1] Lengths Adjustment
Displays a conveyance count that is entered by performing the conveyance count
input procedure described under [4-7-2].
Procedures
CAUTION
After the mechanical check is conducted, be sure to turn the RU power OFF
and then back ON. In the mechanical check process, the I/Os are individually
operated. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of I/O
operations so that the parts may become damaged.
(1) Perform the conveyance count input procedure as directed under
[4-7-2].
{MU:4.4 [4-7-2]_Number of Sequence Setting}
(2) Click the [Display Number of Sequence].
INSTRUCTION
The subscan length is to be adjusted when an abnormality is revealed by image
checkout. For the subscan length adjustment procedure, be sure to see under “16.
Checking and Adjusting the Format” in the "MC" volume.
{MC:16._Checking and Adjusting the Format}
Function
Adjusts the subscan length.
Procedures
CAUTION
After the mechanical check is conducted, be sure to turn the RU power OFF
and then back ON. In the mechanical check process, the I/Os are individually
operated. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of I/O
operations so that the parts may become damaged.
(1) Click
at the upper right corner of the window.
The display then shows a conveyance count that is reached when you click.
MUTL window 2 then opens.
(2) Click the [Mechanical Check].
(3) Click the [Sub-Scanning >>].
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-101
MU-102
[4-7-5-2] Start Point Adjustment
(4) Click the [Format Adjustment >>].
INSTRUCTION
The subscan start point is to be set up when an abnormality is revealed by image
checkout. For the subscan start point setup procedure, be sure to see under “16.
Checking and Adjusting the Format” in the "MC" volume.
{MC:16._Checking and Adjusting the Format}
(5) Perform subscan length adjustment setup.
Function
Adjusts the subscan start point setting.
Procedures
Input value = ((
Steel rule length projected onto the IP
Steel rule length when output with 100% magnification
CAUTION
) − 1) x 100 %
Calculation example:
- Steel rule length projected onto the IP= 179.1 mm
- Steel rule length when output with 100 % magnification= 181.0 mm
Input value =((
179.1
181.0
) − 1) x 100 % ≈ −1.05
After the mechanical check is conducted, be sure to turn the RU power OFF
and then back ON. In the mechanical check process, the I/Os are individually
operated. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of I/O
operations so that the parts may become damaged.
(1) Click
at the upper right corner of the window.
(6) Enter a subscan length adjustment value and then click [SET].
(7) In the resulting confirmation window, click [OK].
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
MUTL window 2 then opens.
(2) Click the [Mechanical Check].
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
(3) Click the [Sub-Scanning >>].
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-102
MU-103
(4) Click the [Format Adjustment >>].
[4-8]
FAN
Function
Drives/stops the internal cooling fans (FANH1-FANH5).
(5) Perform subscan start point setup.
Procedures
CAUTION
After the mechanical check is conducted, be sure to turn the RU power OFF
and then back ON. In the mechanical check process, the I/Os are individually
operated. Therefore, the machine may not be entirely initialized at the end of I/O
operations so that the parts may become damaged.
Input value = + or - “distance from the film frame to the image start point when
output at a 100 % magnification” x 10
To move the start point upward: Attach a “+” sign to the input value.
To move the start point downward: Attach a “-” sign to the input value.
(1) Click
at the upper right corner of the window.
REFERENCE
The reference film frame is 2 mm.
- Smaller than 2 mm: “-”
- Greater than 2 mm: “+”
MUTL window 2 then opens.
(2) Click the [Mechanical Check].
Calculation example:
- Actual distance from the film frame to the image start point = 2.5 mm
- Film reduction percentage = 100 %
Input value: 2.5×10= + or -25
(6) Enter a subscan start point setup value and then click [SET].
(7) In the resulting confirmation window, click [OK].
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
(3) Click the [FAN].
The internal cooling fans (FANH1-FANH5) alternate between the “OFF” mode and
“ON” mode at each click of [Internal Cooling Fan]. The currently selected mode is
enclosed in square brackets ([ ]).
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-103
MU-104
[4-9]
Electromagnetic brake
[4-9-1] Sub-Scanning (SOLZ1)
(4) Click the [Sub-Scanning (SOLZ1)].
The subscanning electromagnetic brake (MB1) alternates between the “UNLOCK”
mode and “LOCK” mode at each click of [Sub-Scanning (SOLZ1)]. The currently
selected mode is enclosed in square brackets ([ ]).
Function
Drives/stops the subscanning electromagnetic brake (MB1).
Procedures
CAUTION
When using the electromagnetic brake release jig, reposition the subscanning
mechanism and IP shift mechanism so as not to let them have a free fall
and then turn ON the electromagnetic brake release jig, or turn ON the
electromagnetic brake release jig while properly supporting the subscanning
mechanism and IP shift mechanism by hand.
(1) Click
at the upper right corner of the window.
MUTL window 2 then opens.
(2) Click the [Mechanical Check].
(3) Click the [Electromagnetic brake >>].
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-104
MU-105
[4-9-2] IP Shift (SOLZ2)
Function
Drives/stops the IP movement electromagnetic brake (MB2).
(4) Click the [IP Shift (SOLZ2)].
The IP movement electromagnetic brake (MB2) alternates between the “UNLOCK”
mode and “LOCK” mode at each click of [IP Shift (SOLZ2)]. The currently selected
mode is enclosed in square brackets ([ ]).
Procedures
CAUTION
When using the electromagnetic brake release jig, reposition the subscanning
mechanism and IP shift mechanism so as not to let them have a free fall
and then turn ON the electromagnetic brake release jig, or turn ON the
electromagnetic brake release jig while properly supporting the subscanning
mechanism and IP shift mechanism by hand.
(1) Click
at the upper right corner of the window.
MUTL window 2 then opens.
(2) Click the [Mechanical Check].
(3) Click the [Electromagnetic brake >>].
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-105
MU-106
[5]
Scanner Check
[5-1]
LD Check Details
[5-1-1] LD Performance Check
Function
Displays the LD's current value.
Procedures
(1) Click
at the upper right corner of the window.
MUTL window 2 then opens.
(2) Click the [Scanner Check].
REFERENCE
(3) Click the [LD Check Details >>].
(4) Click the [LD Performance Check].
If the following calculation results are obtained, an error or warning arises:
-
The ratio between [A] and [B] ([A]/[B]) is 1.2 or greater.
The current value is greater than 210 mA.
The current value is smaller than 30 mA.
All the LD current values are greater than 210 mA.
All the LD current values are smaller than 30 mA.
The LD exercises current value control in order to maintain the luminosity
constant. If the current value increases and is more than 1.2 times the initial
value, it means that the LD or other relevant circuit is faulty.
The LD current value then appears on the display.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-106
MU-107
[5-1-2] Turn LD On (Reading Level)
[5-1-3] Turn LD On (Detection Level)
Function
Function
Causes the laser to emit light at the reading luminosity.
Procedures
(1) Click
at the upper right corner of the window.
Causes the laser to emit light at the dosage detection luminosity.
REFERENCE
When the laser emits light at the dosage detection luminosity, the resulting light
intensity is lower than provided by the reading luminosity.
Procedures
(1) Click
at the upper right corner of the window.
MUTL window 2 then opens.
(2) Click the [Scanner Check].
MUTL window 2 then opens.
(2) Click the [Scanner Check].
(3) Click the [LD Check Details >>].
(3) Click the [LD Check Details >>].
(4) Click the [Turn LD On (Reading Level)].
(4) Click the [Turn LD On (Detection Level)].
The laser then emits light at the reading luminosity.
REFERENCE
To stop the laser’s light emission, click [LD OFF].
The laser then emits light at the dosage detection luminosity.
REFERENCE
To stop the laser’s light emission, click [LD OFF].
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-107
MU-108
[5-1-4] Turn LD Off
[5-2]
Function
Function
Stops the laser’s light emission.
Procedures
(1) Click
at the upper right corner of the window.
MUTL window 2 then opens.
(2) Click the [Scanner Check].
(3) Click the [LD Check Details >>].
Display Scanner Data
Displays the following scanner-related information:
-
CCD sensitivity adjustment value
CCD electronic noise calculation result
CCD correction light source luminosity setting
CCD defective pixel count
Defective pixel contiguousness check
X-ray damage ratio
Estimated X-ray dosage (mR) for exposure
Correction value for machine sensitivity adjustment
Procedures
(1) Click
at the upper right corner of the window.
MUTL window 2 then opens.
(2) Click the [Scanner Check].
(4) Click the [Turn LD Off].
(3) Click the [Display Scanner Data].
The laser’s light emission then comes to a stop.
A list of scanner data then appears on the display.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-108
MU-109
Item
Description
Reference information
A
CCD GAIN (G) and CCD GAIN (Gm) are
CCD sensitivity adjustment values, which are
updated when a gain setting is corrected. CCD
GAIN (G) is an expected value. CCD GAIN
(Gm) is an actual setting. A maximum value
not greater than the CCD GAIN (G) value is set
as the CCD GAIN (Gm) value.
An AD gain error (error code: 12231)
occurs mainly if the actual setting
exceeds the expected value at the
time of gain setting correction. When
such an error occurs, it is conceivable
that X-ray tube or CCD assembly may
be faulty.
B
A value for verifying the image graininess.
This value is used as a guide for determining
whether the CCD assembly is damaged. This
information appears on the display when
"Calculate CCD Electronic Noise" is executed
from "Scanner Check".
For details on electronic noise,
see "[5-3-1] CCD Electronic Noise
Calculation".
C
A luminosity setting for the CCD correction
light source, which is adjusted by correcting a
correction light source luminosity adjustment
value. A setting between 00 and 07 is used.
Indicates the number of defective CCD pixels.
If any of five CCDs exceeds a value of 20, a
warning arises (error code: 12241).
If any defective pixel is encountered,
output an uniform image exposure to
check for vertical streaks. If vertical
streaks are found, it is conceivable
that the CCD assembly may be faulty.
E
Contiguous defective CCD pixels are checked
for. If there are no contiguous defective CCD
pixels, the display reads "RESULT: OK". If
contiguous defective CCD pixels exist, a
warning arises (error code: 12241).
If a warning arises, output an uniform
image exposure to check for vertical
streaks. If vertical streaks are found, it
is conceivable that the CCD assembly
may be faulty.
F
The ratio of X-ray damage to the IP is
displayed. The X-ray damage ratio is updated
when an X-ray damage data update is
corrected.
G
Indicates the dosage (mR) employed for
exposure. The value appears in the "mR
(DOWN)" or "mR (UP)" field. The displayed
value represents the dosage employed for the
last exposure. Note that the displayed dosage
value (mR) is estimated from a read image and
should therefore be used as a guide only. The
"QL (UP)" and "QL (DOWN)" fields indicate the
read image QL values.
H
The correction value for machine sensitivity
adjustment is displayed. For VELOCITY U, the
value 1.00 is usually displayed.
D
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-109
MU-110
[5-3]
Scanner Check Details
[5-3-1] Calculate CCD Electronic Noise
Function
Displays the result of CCD electronic noise calculation.
Procedures
(1) Click
at the upper right corner of the window.
MUTL window 2 then opens.
(2) Click the [Scanner Check].
(3) Click the [Scanner Check Details >>].
Item
(4) Click the [Calculate CCD Electronic Noise].
Description
A
The CCD temperatures are displayed. CCD electronic noise calculations are
performed at a temperature of 35°C or higher.
B
Electronic noise levels at the current temperature are displayed.
C
Electronic noise levels estimated at 45°C are displayed. The maximum or average
values are displayed.
D
The result of CCD electronic noise calculation then appears on the display.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-110
MU-111
[5-3-2] Adjust Correction Light Source
Function
Adjusts the light intensity of the CCD function verification LED.
Procedures
(1) Click
at the upper right corner of the window.
MUTL window 2 then opens.
(2) Click the [Scanner Check].
(3) Click the [Scanner Check Details >>].
(4) Click the [Adjust Correction Light Source].
(5) In the resulting confirmation window, click [OK].
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-111
MU-112
[5-3-3] Calculate Delta Y
INSTRUCTION
The delta Y calculation procedure is to be performed after IP replacement. For the
procedure, see under “13. Performing Delta Y Calculations for Verification” in the “MC”
volume.
{MC:13._Performing Delta Y Calculations for Verification}
Function
Displays the results of IP, light sorce unit, and light-collecting unit mounting position
calculations.
Procedures
(1) Click
at the upper right corner of the window.
MUTL window 2 then opens.
(2) Click the [Scanner Check].
(3) Click the [Scanner Check Details >>].
(4) Click the [Calculate Delta Y].
(5) Expose an IP to a dose of 10 mR.
NOTE
“RESULT:OK” indicating that the procedures of delta Y calculations are completed
appears on the Scanner Check Details window after the X-ray exposure. This
does not indicate whether the calculation results are good or not.
012-201-09E
(6) Click the [OK].
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-112
MU-113
[5-4]
Scanner Diagnostic
[5-4-1] Virtual Image Check (CCD21D Board - Frame Memory)
Function
Transfers a virtual image, which is generated by the CPS21A board, to the frame
memory to check for an improper image data transfer.
Function
Transfers a virtual image, which is generated by the CCD21D board, to the frame
memory to check for an improper image data transfer.
Procedures
(1) Click
[5-4-2] Virtual Image Check (CPS Board - Frame Memory)
Procedures
(1) Click
at the upper right corner of the window.
at the upper right corner of the window.
MUTL window 2 then opens.
MUTL window 2 then opens.
(2) Click the [Scanner Check].
(2) Click the [Scanner Check].
(3) Click the [Scanner Diagnostic >>].
(3) Click the [Scanner Diagnostic >>].
(4) Click the [Virtual Image Check (CCD21D Board - Frame Memory)].
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
(4) Click the [Virtual Image Check (CPS Board - Frame Memory)].
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-113
MU-114
[5-4-3] Virtual Image Output 1
(4) Click the [Virtual Image Output 1 >>].
[5-4-3-1] Mode Setting
Function
Performs a read operation with the CCD function verification LED illuminated, and
causes the CL’s exposure study window to display the resulting read image.
REFERENCE
When vertical streaks or other similar image abnormalities are encountered, this
function is used to identify the cause of such image abnormalities. When, for instance,
vertical streaks are found in the VELOCITY U’s output image, it can be concluded that
the IP and LD light source are normal if vertical streaks are found in the virtual images
derived from correction light source intensity levels 1 and 7 (use the minimum and
maximum luminosity levels for checkout purposes). Note that a setting of 0 (correction
light source OFF) may be used when a CCD dark output image is required.
(5) Click
in the upper right corner of the RU PC-TOOL main window.
(6) Change the [Virtual Image Output 1] window position and size so that
the image display area appears on the left-hand side of the CL screen
with the [Virtual Image Output 1] window displayed on the right-hand
side.
Procedures
INSTRUCTION
Be sure that the operation is performed in the “Mode Setting” and “Start Output” order.
Do not change the order of operation or perform a specific procedure only. If the order
of operation is changed or only a specific procedure is performed, you must turn the
RU power OFF and then back ON, and perform the “Mode Setting” procedure and “Start
Output” procedure in order named.
(1) Click
at the upper right corner of the window.
(7) From the CL, register the following exposure menu:
- "Test" - "Sensitivity" (size: 17 inches x 17 inches)
(8) Perform correction light source setup.
REFERENCE
MUTL window 2 then opens.
(2) Click the [Scanner Check].
The procedure described here assumes that a virtual image 1 read (correction
light source) mode setting of “1” is entered. However, the following settings are
also selectable:
0: Performs a read operation with the correction light source turned OFF.
1-7: Performs a read operation with the correction light source turned ON (the
higher the number, the higher the light source intensity).
(3) Click the [Scanner Diagnostic >>].
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-114
MU-115
(9) Click the [SET].
[5-4-3-2] Start Output
Function
Performs a read operation with the CCD function verification LED illuminated, and
displays the read image in the CL’s exposure study window.
(10) Continue with [Start Output].
{MU:4.4 [5-4-3-2]_Start Output}
REFERENCE
When vertical streaks or other similar image abnormalities are encountered, this
function is used to identify the cause of such image abnormalities. When, for instance,
vertical streaks are found in the VELOCITY U's output image, it can be concluded that
the IP and LD light source are normal if vertical streaks are found in the virtual images
derived from correction light source intensity levels 1 and 7 (use the minimum and
maximum luminosity levels for checkout purposes). Note that a setting of 0 (correction
light source OFF) may be used when a CCD dark output image is required.
Procedures
INSTRUCTION
Be sure that the operation is performed in the “Mode Setting” and “Start Output” order.
Do not change the order of operation or perform a specific procedure only. If the order
of operation is changed or only a specific procedure is performed, you must turn the
RU power OFF and then back ON, and perform the “Mode Setting” procedure and “Start
Output” procedure in order named.
(1) Perform the “Mode Setting” procedure.
{MU:4.4 [5-4-3-1]_Mode Setting}
(2) Click the [Start Output].
An image then appears in the CL’s exposure study window.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-115
MU-116
[5-4-3-3] Cansel Setting
[5-4-3-4] Start RAW Image Output
Function
Function
Cancels the correction light source setting that is entered by performing the “Mode
Setting” procedure.
Procedures
(1) Perform the “Mode Setting” procedure.
{MU:4.4 [5-4-3-1]_Mode Setting}
(2) Click the [Cansel Setting].
Saves the RAW image (PCIRAW.img) of a virtual image on the CL’s hard disk. The
image saved in this manner is for design analysis. The image is to be saved in the
following directory:
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\CR-IR364\SYSTEM\ ✻.✻.✻.✻ \LOG\ANALYSIS\
PCIRAW.img
(✻.✻.✻.✻: indicates the IP address of the RU)
Procedures
(1) Click
at the upper right corner of the window.
MUTL window 2 then opens.
(2) Click the [Scanner Check].
(3) Click the [Scanner Diagnostic >>].
(4) Click the [Virtual Image Output 1 >>].
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-116
MU-117
(5) Click the [Start RAW Image Output].
[5-4-4] Virtual Image Output 2
[5-4-4-1] Patterned Image Output
Function
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
Creates a virtual image with the CCD21A/D board and displays its image data in the
CL’s exposure study window.
Procedures
(1) Click
at the upper right corner of the window.
MUTL window 2 then opens.
(2) Click the [Scanner Check].
(3) Click the [Scanner Diagnostic >>].
(4) Click the [Virtual Image Output 2 >>].
(5) From the CL, register the following exposure menu:
- "Test" - "Sensitivity" (size: 17 inches x 17 inches)
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-117
MU-118
(6) Click the [Patterned Image Output].
[5-5]
Correction
INSTRUCTION
An image then appears in the CL’s exposure study window.
The correction process is performed after scanner unit/IP replacement. For the
procedure for performing the correction process, be sure to see under “14. Scanner
Correction” in the "MC" volume.
{MC:14._Scanner Correction}
[5-5-1] Display Scanner Temperature
Function
Measures and displays the scanner unit temperature.
Procedures
(1) Click
at the upper right corner of the window.
MUTL window 2 then opens.
(2) Click the [Scanner Check].
(3) Click the [Correction >>].
(4) A confirmation window opens, asking whether or not the grid is
removed.
- If the grid is removed, click [OK].
- If the grid is not removed, click [Cancel].
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-118
MU-119
(5) Click the [Display Scanner Temperature].
[5-5-2] Gain Setting
[5-5-2-1] Mode Setting
Function
The scanner unit temperature then appears on the display.
Compensates for CCD sensitivity variations such as an IP light emission amount
difference and CCD light collection efficiency difference.
Procedures
(1) Click
at the upper right corner of the window.
MUTL window 2 then opens.
(2) Click the [Scanner Check].
(3) Click the [Correction >>].
(4) A confirmation window opens, asking whether or not the grid is
removed.
- If the grid is removed, click [OK].
- If the grid is not removed, click [Cancel].
(5) Click the [Gain Setting >>].
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-119
MU-120
(6) Click the [Mode Setting].
[5-5-3] Adjust Correction Light Source
Function
Adjusts the light intensity of the CCD function verification LED.
(7) Enter a value in the gain setting field.
(8) Click the [SET].
Procedures
(1) Click
at the upper right corner of the window.
MUTL window 2 then opens.
(2) Click the [Scanner Check].
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
(3) Click the [Correction >>].
(4) A confirmation window opens, asking whether or not the grid is
removed.
- If the grid is removed, click [OK].
- If the grid is not removed, click [Cancel].
(5) Click the [Adjust Correction Light Source].
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-120
MU-121
(6) In the resulting confirmation window, click [OK].
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
[5-5-4] Update Light Source Shading
Function
Updates the correction light source shading data that is to be referenced when various
correction processes are performed.
Procedures
(1) Click
at the upper right corner of the window.
MUTL window 2 then opens.
(2) Click the [Scanner Check].
(3) Click the [Correction >>].
(4) A confirmation window opens, asking whether or not the grid is
removed.
- If the grid is removed, click [OK].
- If the grid is not removed, click [Cancel].
(5) Click the [Update Light Source Shading].
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-121
MU-122
(6) In the resulting confirmation window, click [OK].
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
[5-5-5] Update CCD Offset Data
Function
Updates the CCD offset data that is to be referenced when various correction
processes are performed.
Procedures
(1) Click
at the upper right corner of the window.
MUTL window 2 then opens.
(2) Click the [Scanner Check].
(3) Click the [Correction >>].
(4) A confirmation window opens, asking whether or not the grid is
removed.
- If the grid is removed, click [OK].
- If the grid is not removed, click [Cancel].
(5) Click the [Update CCD Offset Data].
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-122
MU-123
(6) In the resulting confirmation window, click [OK].
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
[5-5-6] Erase IP
INSTRUCTION
Function
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
Procedures
Erases the IP.
(1) Click
at the upper right corner of the window.
MUTL window 2 then opens.
(2) Click the [Scanner Check].
(3) Click the [Correction >>].
(4) A confirmation window opens, asking whether or not the grid is
removed.
- If the grid is removed, click [OK].
- If the grid is not removed, click [Cancel].
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-123
MU-124
(5) Click the [Erase IP].
[5-5-7] Update 2D Offset Data
Function
Compensates for the level offset prevailing after filtration.
The IP erasure operation is then performed 10 times.
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
Procedures
(1) Click
at the upper right corner of the window.
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
MUTL window 2 then opens.
(2) Click the [Scanner Check].
(3) Click the [Correction >>].
(4) A confirmation window opens, asking whether or not the grid is
removed.
- If the grid is removed, click [OK].
- If the grid is not removed, click [Cancel].
(5) Click the [Update 2D Offset Data].
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-124
MU-125
(6) In the resulting confirmation window, click [OK].
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
[5-5-8] Update Shading Data
When sensitivity corrections are to be made
{[5-5-8-1]_Update Shading and Sensitivity Data}
When no sensitivity corrections are to be made
{[5-5-8-2]_Update Shading Data}
[5-5-8-1] Update Shading and Sensitivity Data
[5-5-8-1-1]
Mode Setting
Function
Compensates for changes in the LD light intensity and other two-dimensional
characteristics.
Procedures
(1) Click
at the upper right corner of the window.
MUTL window 2 then opens.
(2) Click the [Scanner Check].
(3) Click the [Correction >>].
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-125
MU-126
(4) A confirmation window opens, asking whether or not the grid is
removed.
(12) Click the [SET].
- If the grid is removed, click [OK].
- If the grid is not removed, click [Cancel].
(5) Click the [Update Shading Data >>].
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
(6) In the resulting confirmation window, click [OK].
(7) Click the [Update Shading and Sensitivity Data >>].
(8) In the resulting confirmation window, click [OK].
(9) Click the [Mode Setting].
(10) In the resulting confirmation window, click [OK].
(11) Enter a value in the shading sensitivity update field.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-126
MU-127
[5-5-8-2] Update Shading Data
[5-5-8-2-1] Mode Setting
(6) In the resulting confirmation window, click [OK].
(7) Click the [Update Shading Data >>].
Function
Corrects the two-dimensional characteristics without making sensitivity corrections.
Procedures
(1) Click
at the upper right corner of the window.
MUTL window 2 then opens.
(2) Click the [Scanner Check].
(8) In the resulting confirmation window, click [OK].
(9) Click the [Mode Setting].
(10) In the resulting confirmation window, click [OK].
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
(3) Click the [Correction >>].
(4) A confirmation window opens, asking whether or not the grid is
removed.
- If the grid is removed, click [OK].
- If the grid is not removed, click [Cancel].
(5) Click the [Update Shading Data >>].
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-127
MU-128
[5-5-9] Updating the X-Ray Damage Data
The display then reads “RESULT: OK”.
Function
Compensates for irregularities that are caused by X-ray damage to the IP.
Procedures
(1) Click
(6) In the resulting confirmation window, click [OK].
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK”:
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
at the upper right corner of the window.
MUTL window 2 then opens.
(2) Click the [Scanner Check].
(3) Click the [Correction >>].
(4) A confirmation window opens, asking whether or not the grid is
removed.
- If the grid is removed, click [OK].
- If the grid is not removed, click [Cancel].
(5) Click the [Updating the X-Ray Damage Data].
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-128
MU-129
[5-6]
Display Scanner Temperature
Function
Measures and displays the scanner unit temperature.
Procedures
(1) Click
at the upper right corner of the window.
MUTL window 2 then opens.
(2) Click the [Scanner Check].
(3) Click the [Display Scanner Temperature].
The scanner unit temperature then appears on the display.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-129
MU-130
[5-7]
Image Re-Output
(4) Click the [Image Re-Output].
Function
Causes the CL screen to display an image that is stored in the DIMM.
NOTE
Turning OFF the RU power clears the image from the DIMM.
Procedures
(1) Click
at the upper right corner of the window.
An image then appears on the display.
REFERENCE
If the image does not remain in the DIMM, the following message appears in the
result display area.
HST: sysReoutput Init Start
HST: sysReoutput ImageRetrnsfer Start ///
Start-Process RES-Evt FAULT
HST: sysReoutput ImageRetrnsfer End ///
RESULT: OK
MUTL window 2 then opens.
(2) Click the [Scanner Check].
(3) Register an exposure menu.
NOTE
Use an exposure menu that was registered at the time when an image could not
be transmitted to the CL.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-130
MU-131
[6]
Software Check
[6-1]
Display MAC Address
Function
Displays the RU’s MAC address.
Procedures
(1) Click
at the upper right corner of the window.
MUTL window 2 then opens.
(2) Click the [Software Check].
(3) Click the [Display MAC Address].
A MAC address then appears on the display.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-131
MU-132
[7]
For Design
Do not use for servicing purposes.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-132
MU-133
4.5
PING
Function
Checks for improper network connection by causing the CL to execute the PING
command in relation to a device having an IP address displayed in the RU’s “RU IP
ADDR” field.
Procedures
The following example describes the procedure for executing the PING command in
relation to an RU having a name of “ru7” and an IP address of “172.16.1.110”:
(1) Start up the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC-TOOL}
(2) From “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, select a RU.
REFERENCE
“Lost = 0 (0 % loss)” means that there is no problem as a result of executing
the PING command. If other than “(0 % loss)”, it is a sign that there was some
problem.
<GOOD indication>
The result is normal when the following message appears. “✻ . ✻ . ✻ . ✻”
indicates the IP address of the selected RU.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<NO GOOD indication>
|
|
|
|
(3) Click the [PING] button.
Ping statistics for ✻. ✻. ✻. ✻:
Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0 % loss),
Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds:
Minimum = 0 ms, Maximum = 0 ms, Average = 0 ms
Ping statistics for ✻. ✻. ✻. ✻ :
Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (*** % loss),
Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds:
Minimum = 0 ms, Maximum = 0 ms, Average = 0 ms
|
|
|
|
***: “25 % loss”, “50 % loss”, or “100 % loss” is indicated
(4) Exit the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC-TOOL}
The “PING” result window appears on the CL screen.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-133
MU-134
4.6
MON
Function
Displays the RU’s I/O status (OPEN/CLOSE) in real time.
REFERENCE
When the RU operates, the display shows the sensor status in accordance with the
RU operation. While the RU is not operating, the display shows nothing.
Monitor display example
I/O name
The I/O name is displayed. No elevation unit I/O appears on the display.
Symbol
Name
SZ1
Subscanning HP sensor
SZ2
IP reading-side HP sensor
SZ21
IP erasure position sensor
SZ3
Subscanning overrun sensor (upper)
SZ4
Subscanning overrun sensor (lower)
SZ5
Subscanning operation sensor
SZ6
Grid availability sensor
SZ7
Bucky HP sensor
SH1
Grid cover lock sensor
SH3, 4
Exposure unit front cover laser safety interlock switch
MSH1, 12
Grid replacement cover interlock switch
MSH2, 3
Patient protection descent prevention interlock switch
TSWA1
Thermal switch
MZ1
Subscanning motor
MZ2
IP movement motor
MZ3
Bucky motor
MB1
Subscanning electromagnetic brake
MB2
IP Movement Solenoid Brake
SOLH1
Grid replacement cover lock solenoid
LEDH3, 4
CCD functional check LED
FRBIT
TIPDT
Scanner start point detection signal
Status
Either OPEN or CLOSE is displayed to indicate the status.
Status changed time
The time when the I/O status has changed is displayed.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-134
MU-135
Procedures
(4) Click the [START] button.
(1) Start up the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC-TOOL}
The RU PC-TOOL window opens on the CL screen.
(2) From “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, select a RU.
The information about the monitored RU operation status then appears, beginning
with the top of the window.
<Display example>
(3) Click the [MON] button.
The “MON” result window opens.
- To display the results of monitoring → Click the [STAT] button.
- To display no results of monitoring or
Click the [STOP] button.
abort the monitoring process →
(5) Exit the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC-TOOL}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-135
MU-136
4.7
FTP
(3) Click the [FTP] button.
Function
Executes a command on the CL to access the FTP server and checks whether the
FTP server is operating. Also, runs the RU’s software remotely to access the FTP
server and checks whether the FTP server is operating.
Procedures
The example below shows how to execute the FTP command in relation to an RU
having a name of “ru7” and an IP address of “172.16.1.110”.
The “FTP” result window then opens.
<GOOD indication>
(1) Start up the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC-TOOL}
(2) From “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, select a RU.
<NO GOOD indication>
Other than above.
(4) Exit the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC-TOOL}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-136
MU-137
4.8
INSTALL
(5) In the resulting confirmation window, click [OK].
Function
Installs the RU application for first-time RU installation or additional RU installation.
Procedures
INSTRUCTIONS
- Be sure that the RU PC-TOOL is installed.
{IN:25.3_Installing the RU PC-TOOL}
(6) Select “INSTALL VERSION”.
- Be sure that the RU’s RU name and IP address are set.
{MU:4.1_NEW}
(1) Start up the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC-TOOL}
(2) Insert the RU application CD-ROM into the CL’s CD-ROM drive.
(7) Select “LANGUAGE”.
(3) Click the [START] button.
(8) Select “BRAND TYPE”.
(4) Click the [INSTALL] button.
(9) Perform configuration settings as appropriate, and click on [SET].
{MU:4.11_EDIT CONFIGURATION}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-137
MU-138
4.9
VERSION UP
(6) From the “RU VERSION” area of the confirmation window, select an
RU application version.
Function
Performs a version update of the RU application.
Procedures
INSTRUCTIONS
- Be sure that the RU PC-TOOL is installed.
{IN:25.3_Installing the RU PC-TOOL}
(7) Click [OK].
- Be sure that the RU’s RU name and IP address are set.
{MU:4.1_NEW}
(1) Start up the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC-TOOL}
(2) Insert the RU application CD-ROM into the CL’s CD-ROM drive.
(3) From “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, select the RU to be subjected to a
version update.
(8) In the resulting confirmation window, click [OK].
CAUTION
While the Compact Flash Card is being written into, never turn OFF the
power circuit breaker on the machine main body or the circuit breaker on
the distribution switchboard. Failure to observe this precaution damages the
contents of the Compact Flash Card so that the RU cannot restart.
(4) Click the [VERSION UP] button.
(5) In the resulting confirmation window, click [OK].
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-138
MU-139
(9) Confirm the window that indicates the Compact Flash Card is
completely written into, and then press the Enter key.
REFERENCE
Writing into the Compact Flash Card will take about 5 minutes.
4.10
EDIT HISTORY
Function
Displays and clears the following machine information about the RU:
PROCESSING COUNTER
Displays the number of exposures that has been processed by the RU since its initial
installation or since the processed exposure count was last cleared. The displayed
count represents the total number of normal read operations and erasure operations.
LASER
Displays the cumulative time during which the laser has been illuminated by the RU
since its initial installation and the number of times the laser has been illuminated
by the RU since its initial installation or the cumulative time during which the laser
has been illuminated by the RU since the cumulative laser illumination time was last
cleared and the number of times the laser has been illuminated by the RU since the
laser illumination count was last cleared. The displayed count represents the total
number of normal read operations and erasure operations.
ERASURE LAMP
Displays the cumulative time during which the erasure lamps have been illuminated
by the RU since its initial installation and the number of times the erasure lamps have
been illuminated by the RU since its initial installation or the cumulative time during
which the erasure lamps have been illuminated by the RU since the cumulative
erasure lamp illumination time was last cleared and the number of times the erasure
lamps have been illuminated by the RU since the erasure lamp illumination count
was last cleared. The displayed count represents the total number of normal read
operations and erasure operations.
(10) In the resulting confirmation window, click [OK].
(11) Exit the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC-TOOL}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-139
MU-140
Procedures
(1) Start up the RU PC-TOOL.
Detailed Setup Descriptions
“PROCESSING COUNTER”
{MU:4._RU PC-TOOL}
(2) Click the [EDIT HISTORY] button.
The EDIT HISTORY window then opens.
- [RESET] button
When clicked, this button resets the values in the “TOTAL IP TRAVEL COUNTS”
field and “IP READ COUNTS” field to 0 and sets the current system date in the
“SINCE” field.
- “SINCE” field
This field displays the date of machine installation or the date (year/month/day) on
which the [RESET] button was clicked last.
REFERENCE
You can manually enter a date in the “SINCE” field.
- “TOTAL IP TRAVEL COUNTS” field
This field displays the number of times when the IP is moved since the date
displayed in the “SINCE” field.
- “IP READ COUNTS” field
This field displays the total number of normal read and erasure operations that have
been performed since the day that is indicated in the “SINCE” field.
(3) Confirm or edit the displayed contents.
For details, see under “ Detailed Setup Descriptions”.
(4) Exit the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC-TOOL}
012-201-09E
- [CANCEL] button
Brings you back to the previous window.
- [RESET ALL]
Resets all the displayed values and displays the date of this reset in the “SINCE”
field.
- [SET]
Saves the setup data and then brings you back to the RU PC-TOOL window.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-140
MU-141
“LASER”
“ERASURE LAMP”
- [RESET] button
When clicked, this button resets the values in the “TOTAL TIME FOR THE LASER
ON” field and “TOTAL COUNT FOR THE LASER ON” field to 0 and sets the current
system date in the “SINCE” field.
- [RESET] button
When clicked, this button resets the values in the “TOTAL TIME FOR THE
ERASURE LAMP LIGHTING” field and “TOTAL COUNT FOR THE ERASURE
LAMP LIGHTING” field to 0 and sets the current system date in the “SINCE” field.
- “SINCE” field
This field displays the date of machine installation or the date (year/month/day) on
which the [RESET] button was clicked last.
- “SINCE” field
This field displays the date of machine installation or the date (year/month/day) on
which the [RESET] button was clicked last.
REFERENCE
You can manually enter a date in the “SINCE” field.
REFERENCE
You can manually enter a date in the “SINCE” field.
- “TOTAL TIME FOR THE LASER ON” field
This field displays the total number of hours for which the laser has been illuminated
since the day that is indicated in the “SINCE” field.
- “TOTAL TIME FOR THE ERASURE LAMP LIGHTING” field
This field displays the total number of hours for which the erasure lamp has been
illuminated since the day that is indicated in the “SINCE” field.
- “TOTAL COUNT FOR THE LASER ON” field
This field displays the total number of times the laser has been turned ON since the
day that is indicated in the “SINCE” field.
- [CANCEL] button
Brings you back to the previous window.
- [RESET ALL]
Resets all the displayed values and displays the date of this reset in the “SINCE”
field.
- [SET]
Saves the setup data and then brings you back to the RU PC-TOOL window.
- “TOTAL COUNT FOR THE ERASURE LAMP LIGHTING” field
This field displays the total number of times the erasure lamp has been illuminated
since the day that is indicated in the “SINCE” field.
- [CANCEL] button
Brings you back to the previous window.
- [RESET ALL]
Resets all the displayed values and displays the date of this reset in the “SINCE”
field.
- [SET]
Saves the setup data and then brings you back to the RU PC-TOOL window.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-141
MU-142
4.11
EDIT CONFIGURATION
Function
Sets the following RU configuration data.
NOTE
EDIT CONFIGURATION does not enable you to set the configuration data (e.g., RU’s
IP address) that is to be set by the Machine Maintenance.
-
RU identification code
Alarm setting for a dose of higher than 1 R
X-ray tube interlock (auto collimation) setting
Exposure field coupling (clear)
Exposure field setting
Shot-ready signal output setting in cassette exposure
Automatic erasure setting when switching to CR-IR 364 selection
Setting the erasure sensitivity
Setting the erasure speed
Patient info size setting
Patient info display setting
Specifies the reference position selection switchover
Procedures
CAUTION
While the configuration data are being updated, never turn OFF the RU’s power
circuit breaker or the circuit breaker on the distribution switchboard.
If it is powered OFF, the contents of the Compact Flash Card will be corrupted,
so that the RU will no longer boot up.
(1) Start up the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC-TOOL}
(2) Click the [EDIT CONFIGURATION] button.
(3) Confirm or edit the displayed contents.
For details, see under “ Detailed Setup Descriptions”.
(4) Exit the RU PC-TOOL.
The EDIT CONFIGURATION window then opens.
012-201-09E
{MU:4._RU PC-TOOL}
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-142
MU-143
Detailed Setup Descriptions
Identification code of the RU (EQUIPMENT CODE (A-Z))
When multiple units of the RU are used, an identification code (one alphanumeric
digit) is set to allow the user to confirm, on the film, the RU that has performed image
reading.
Alarm setting in case where the dose exceeds 1 R (WARNING OF REERASURE)
It concerns alarms upon exposure at dose of 1 R or greater. There are three options,
as follows.
0: LOG&MESSAGE: Recorded in the log file with an error message displayed to the
user.
1: LOG ONLY
Only recorded in the log.
2: NONE
Nothing is done
X-ray tube interlock (auto collimation) setting (EXPOSURE FIELD
COUPLING)
REFERENCE
Determine the setting in accordance with the X-ray tube conditions and user
requirements.
{IN: Appendix 8._Supplementary Information about Tube Interlock (Auto
Collimation)}
Set an tube interlock (auto collimation) parameter. The machine can output 27
different parameters (9 sizes x 3 references).
When the optional TLB21A board is installed, the RU transfers out a contact signal in
accordance with the operator’s exposure size selection. An irradiation field interlock
(auto-collimation) operation can be performed by using such a contact signal.
Top reference (T)
Center reference (C)
Bottom reference (B)
17inch×17inch (T)
17inch×17inch (C)
17inch×17inch (B)
18cm×43cm (T)
18cm×43cm (C)
18cm×43cm (B)
14inch×17inch (T)
14inch×17inch (C)
14inch×17inch (B)
17inch×14inch (T)
17inch×14inch (C)
17inch×14inch (B)
14inch×14inch (T)
14inch×14inch (C)
14inch×14inch (B)
10inch×12inch (T)
10inch×12inch (C)
10inch×12inch (B)
12inch×10inch (T)
12inch×10inch (C)
12inch×10inch (B)
8inch×10inch (T)
8inch×10inch (C)
8inch×10inch (B)
10inch×8inch (T)
10inch×8inch (C)
10inch×8inch (B)
The following 16 patterns of numerical data are to be set as the configuration data.
"0001", "0002", "0004", "0008",
"0010", "0020", "0040", "0080",
"0100", "0200", "0400", "0800",
"1000", "2000", "4000", "8000"
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-143
MU-144
Exposure field coupling (clear) (EXPOSURE FIELD COUPLING (CLEAR))
Effective when “1: CLEAR” is set in the exposure field coupling (clear), and a size
signal of the setting is output. The default setting is “0000”, with which no size signal
is output.
Exposure field setting (EXPOSURE FIELD SETTING)
Specifies whether or not the exposure size signal is to be output unless the status
lamp is lit in green.
This is set in combination with the setting in the EXPOSURE FIELD COUPLING
(CLEAR) field.
“1:CLEAR” is set by default, with which the exposure size signal is output only when
the exposure is available.
Note that the previously selected exposure size signal is continuously output
irrespective of the machine conditions when “0: NO CLEAR” is set.
Shot-ready signal output setting in cassette exposure
(SWITCH OF SHOT-READY OUTPUT WHEN BEEN OFF RADIOGRAPHY)
Specifies whether or not the Shot-Ready signal is to be output from the VELOCITY
irrespective of the machine conditions. No X-ray irradiation can take place with a tube
whose technique cannot be changed when exposures are to be made in a machine
other than the VELOCITY. In this case, setting “0:OUTPUT” enables the X-ray
irradiation.
“1: NO OUTPUT” is set by default, and you cannot set “0:OUTPUT” for other cases
than the case mentioned above.
INSTRUCTION
Since the X-ray irradiation can take place even if the machine is not prepared for
exposures, double exposure is highly probable. You need to give a detailed account
to the customer, if this field is to be set to “0:OUTPUT” by necessity.
Automatic erasure setting when switching to CR-IR 364 selection
(SWITCH FOR WHETHER ERASURE WHEN BEING CHOSEN AS A
RADIOGRAPHY)
Setting the erasure speed (SWITCH FOR ERASURE)
The erasure speed during normal processing is to be set. The following two choices
are available.
0: Fixed For High-Sensitivity
Fixed to high sensitivity erasure
1: Switched depending on Menu
Varies depending on the exposure menu
Patient info size setting (PATIENT NAME AREAS DISPLAY SETTING)
This function is for changing the display size/display data on the operation panel.
Three settings including “0: Default”, “1: 1Byte Char Patient Name” and “2: ID” are
available.
Patient info display setting (PATIENT INFO DISPLAY SETTING)
This function is for switching over whether the patient information is to be displayed on
the operation panel.
The following four settings are available:
- “0:Display Patient Info.”
The patient information is always displayed.
- “1:Do not Display Patient Info.”
The patient information is not displayed anytime.
- “2: Enable to switch Display on Panel.”
Touching on the operation panel enables the patient information to be changed over
between visible and invisible.
- “3:Hide Patient Info every Update”
The patient information is specified not to be displayed every time it is updated.
Reference position selection switchover (REFERENCE POSITION
SELECTION SWITCHOVER SETTING)
You might, by mistake, touch a button for selecting the reference position when
selecting the exposure size on the operation panel, resulting in unintended selection
of the reference position.
To avoid such misoperation, the buttons for selecting the reference position can be
disabled.
Specifies whether or not automatic erasure is to take place when CR-IR36* is
switched over from other settings on the CR-Console selector.
“0:ERASURE” is set by default, with which automatic erasure takes place.
INSTRUCTION
When “1: NO ERASURE” is set if exposures by machines other than the VELOCITY
in the same exposure room, automatic erasure does not take place, possibly causing
double exposures. Do not change the setting normally.
Setting the erasure sensitivity (RELATIVE SPEED FOR NORMAL X-RAY
LEVEL)
The erasure sensitivity during normal processing is to be set. The following two
choices are available.
0: RS400
Normal sensitivity
1: RS600
High sensitivity
012-201-09E
You can disable the buttons for
selecting the reference position
FRAH4600.EPS
0: Disable to select it on panel: Disables the buttons for selecting the reference
positions.
1: Enable to select it on panel: Enables the buttons for selecting the reference
positions (initial setting).
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-144
MU-145
4.12
EDIT CL NAME
Used to edit the list of master CL’s displayed on the “Master CL Setting” of the User
Utility.
NOTE
This function is not used with the VELOCITY U.
4.13
BACKUP
Function
The configuration data or the ERROR LOG data shown below are backed up (saved)
from the RU via the FTP server into an external storage device (FD, USB, etc.,) or the
HD.
INSTRUCTION
When the data is to be backed up (saved) in a medium other than the HD, prepare the
external storage device (FD, USB, etc.,) before hand. The data “INDIVIDUAL DATA
(RU ->HD)” is backed up in the HD.
“ALL LOGS”
Various kinds of LOG data are saved together in the external storage device or in the
HD.
“ERROR LOG”
The ERROR LOG data is saved in the external storage device or in the HD.
“CONFIGURATION”
The configuration data is saved in the external storage device or in the HD.
“TRACE LOGS”
The TRACE LOG data (information for design analysis) is saved in the external
storage device or in the HD.
“HISTORY LOG”
The HISTORY LOG data (exposure count, laser illumination time, erasure lamp
illumination time) is saved in the external storage device or in the HD.
“INDIVIDUAL DATA (RU -> HD)”
The machine shipment control data is backed up to the hard disk.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-145
MU-146
Procedures
(5) From the BACKUP pull-down menu, select an item to be backed up.
CAUTION
When backing up “INDIVIDUAL DATA (RU->HD)”, never turn OFF the RU’s power
circuit breaker or the circuit breaker on the distribution switchboard because
the Compact Flash Card in the controller unit needs to be accessed.
If power is turned OFF, the contents of the Compact Flash Card of the controller
unit will be corrupted, so that the RU will no longer boot up.
(1) Start up the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC-TOOL}
(2) From “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, select an RU to be backed up.
(6) Click the [EXECUTE] button.
REFERENCE
When “INDIVIDUAL DATA (RU->HD)” is selected, the dialogue for selecting the
drive does not appear and storage of the data into the HD starts.
(3) Click the [FTP] button.
(7) Specify the drive of an external memory device or a folder to
temporarily save.
Mount the external storage device on the CL when the external storage device is to
be selected.
(4) The FTP result window then opens. Verify that the results are normal.
{MU:4.7_FTP}
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-146
MU-147
(8) Click the [OK] button.
The backup starts, and when it is completed, the following dialog box appears.
(9) Click the [OK] button.
4.14
RESTORE
Function
Restores (copies) the following data from a floppy disk, hard disk, or CD-R to the
Compact Flash Card or DIMM via the FTP server.
NOTE
The RU PC-TOOL window appears back on screen.
(10) Exit the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC-TOOL}
Errors That May Occur during BACKUP and Their Probable
RU is not connected
The following error message appears on the display if the RU is turned OFF or the
network connection to the RU is not established.
In that case, check the network connection, and then power ON the RU.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
The data restored to the Compact Flash Card becomes effective when you restart the
RU.
“CONFIGURATION”
Configuration data is restored.
“HISTORY LOG”
Restores the HISTORY LOG data (exposure count, laser illumination time, and
erasure lamp illumination time).
“INDIVIDUAL DATA (HD->RU)”
Restores the machine-specific data from the hard disk. Before this restore
operation, the machine-specific data must be backed up at least once.
“INDIVIDUAL DATA (CD->HD ->RU)”
Restores the machine-specific data from the machine-specific data CD-R, which
is supplied with the machine.
“SCN ALL DATA”
When the scanner unit is replaced with a new one, use “SCN ALL DATA (FD>HD->RU)” to restore the scanner unit data (scanner data) from the floppy disk
that is supplied with the new scanner unit.
“SCN EXCITATION DATA”
When the LD assembly is replaced with a new one, use “SCN EXCITATION
DATA (FD->HD->RU)” to restore the LD assembly data (LD-specific data) from
the floppy disk that is supplied with the new LD assembly.
“SCN COLLECTION DATA”
When the CCD assembly is replaced with a new one, use “SCN COLLECTION
DATA (FD->HD->RU)” to restore the CCD assembly data (LD-specific data) from
the floppy disk that is supplied with the new CCD assembly.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-147
MU-148
Procedures
(4) Click the [EXECUTE] button.
CAUTION
When restoring the data, never turn OFF the RU’s power circuit breaker or the
circuit breaker on the distribution switchboard because the Compact Flash Card
is accessed for restore purposes.
If power is turned OFF, the contents of the Compact Flash Card of the controller
unit will be corrupted, so that the RU will no longer boot up.
(1) Start up the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC-TOOL}
(2) From “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, select an RU to be restored.
REFERENCES
- For “INDIVIDUAL DATA (CD -> HD -> RU)”, a dialog box appears to prompt
you to insert the CD.
- For “INDIVIDUAL DATA (HD -> RU)”, a dialog box appears to prompt you to
insert the FD.
(5) Insert the floppy disk or CD-R into the CL’s drive and then click the [OK]
button.
(6) In the resulting confirmation window, click [OK].
(7) Turn OFF the power of the RU and back ON.
(3) From the RESTORE pull-down menu, select an item to be restored.
Errors That May Occur during RESTORE and Their Probable
Causes
RU is not connected
If the RU has not been powered ON or if no network connection has been established
with the RU, the following error message appears.
In that case, check the network connection, and then power ON the RU.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-148
MU-149
4.15
I/O TRACE EXPERT
Function
Usage
The use of the I/O TRACE EXPERT window is explained below:
This function displays I/O trace data in the form of a timing chart.
Note, however, that only the I/O trace data can be displayed.
Procedures
(1) Start up the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC-TOOL}
(2) Click on the [I/O TRACE EXPERT] button.
(3) For the use of the I/O TRACE EXPERT window, see “ Usage”.
1 [FILE OPEN] button
The file specified in the “Pass” text box appears in the timing chart display area.
(4) Click on
to close the window.
(5) Exit the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC-TOOL}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
2 [Pass] text box
The path of IOT.LOG to be displayed as the timing chart is entered.
3 [Scale] button
The display scale for the time base (horizontal axis) is changed.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-149
MU-150
4 I/O name display text box
The I/O name is displayed.
5 Timing chart display area
The timing chart is displayed. With the scroll bar available, the display range may be
moved by manipulating the scroll bar.
6 “Measure Point (Unit: msec)” area
When you click the left or right mouse button with the mouse pointer placed within the
timing chart display area, the following values appear in the A, B, and A-B fields.
- A:
- B:
- A-B:
Time elapsed from RU power ON to the position pointed by the left mouse
button.
Time elapsed from RU power ON to the position pointed by the right mouse
button.
Elapsed time difference between positions A and B.
Clicking the [CLEAR] button clears the values in the A, B, and A-B fields.
7 REFERENCE CURSOR] button
Sets the type of the REFERENCE CURSOR (the size of the cursor) for use within the
timing chart display area.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
I/O Name List
I/O Name
SH3
MSH1
SH2
SH1
SZ6
SZ2
SZ1
SZ7
SZ3
SZ4
SZ5
SZ21
TIPDET
SZ3L
SZ4L
MZ1FUSE
MZ2FUSE
MZ3FUSE
SOLFUSE
FANFUSE
5VSNS
33VFUSE
5VFUSE
MB1FUSE
MB2FUSE
6V1FUSE
6V2FUSE
6VFUSE1
6VFUSE2
8VFUSE
18VFUSE
12V1FUSE
24V1FUSE
24V2FUSE
24VFUSE
5VSBFUSE
33VMFUSE
12VFUSE1
12VFUSE2
Description
Exposure unit front cover laser safety interlock switch
Grid replacement cover interlock switch
Grid cover open switch
Grid cover lock sensor
Grid availability sensor
IP reading-side HP sensor
Subscanning HP sensor
Bucky HP sensor
Subscanning overrun sensor (upper)
Subscanning overrun sensor (lower)
Subscanning operation sensor
IP erasure position sensor
Leading end detection signal
Subscan overrun (upper) sensor latch status
Subscan overrun (lower) sensor latch status
SNS21B F13
SNS21B F2
SNS21B F3
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-150
MU-151
I/O Name
XRDY
DSPR1
DSPR2
DSPRUN
SOLZ2
SOLZ1
SOLH1
LOCATOR
MZ3
MZ2
MZ1
Description
Shot switch status
Image transfer interrupt 1 during a read
Image transfer interrupt 2 during a read
CPS board DSP startup status
IP movement electromagnetic brake
Subscanning electromagnetic brake
Grid replacement cover lock solenoid
Touch panel
Bucky motor
IP movement motor
Subscanning motor
4.16
ERROR DB
Function
Displays the RU’s error log data on the CL.
Procedures
REFERENCE
The RU’s latest ERROR LOG data exists in the RU’s Compact Flash Card. It is
necessary to copy the data from the RU to the CL’s FTP server by exercising the
[UPDATE] function from the RU PC-TOOL’s ERROR DB window.
(1) Start up the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC-TOOL}
(2) From “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, select a RU.
(3) Click the [ERROR DB] button.
The ERROR DB window then opens.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-151
MU-152
(4) Click the [UPDATE] button.
(6) Click on the [ERROR DB] button.
The ERROR DB window then opens.
For the use of the ERROR DB window, see “ Usage”.
The ERROR LOG data is then copied from the RU’s Compact Flash Card to the
CL's FTP server.
REFERENCE
This step is performed (by clicking the [UPDATE] button) to simply copy the
contents of the ERROR DB window from the RU’s Compact Flash Card to the
FTP server. The subsequent steps are performed to update the information
displayed on the CL.
(5) Click on
to close the window.
The RU PC-TOOL window appears back on screen.
(7) Click on
to close the window.
The RU PC-TOOL window appears back on screen.
(8) Exit the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC-TOOL}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-152
MU-153
Usage
The use of the ERROR DB window is explained below:
4 [BOTH] button
Displays both FATAL and WARNING error events.
5 [CLEAR] button
Clears the entire ERROR LOG data from the FTP server.
6 [UPDATE] button
Copies the latest ERROR LOG data from the RU to the CL’s FTP server.
7 Error message list box
Displays the contents the selected ERROR LOG data.
8 “Error Code” text box
The error code selected (highlighted) in the error message list box is displayed.
9 “Error Name” text box
The error name selected (highlighted) in the error message list box is displayed.
10 “Meaning”/”Information” text box
The occurrence condition of the error message selected (highlighted) in the error
message list box is displayed
11 [Details Info.] Button (unavailable)
12 [Analysis Flow] button (unavailable)
13 “Memo.” text box
A memo may be attached to the error message (highlighted) in the error message list
box.
REFERENCE
To update the ERROR LOG data, it is necessary to click the [UPDATE] button, close
the ERROR DB window, and open it.
1 [SELECT] button
Used to select the ERROR LOG data file to be viewed.
14 “Author” text box
The name of the person (author) who entered text in the “Memo.” text box is entered.
15 [SAVE] button
Saves the memo (contents of the “Memo.” text box) and name (contents of the “Author”
text box). To delete the memo or name, first delete the text from the “Memo.” and
“Author” text boxes with the Delete key, and then click the [SAVE] button.
2 [FATAL] button
Displays only FATAL error events among the ERROR LOG data.
3 [WARNING] button
Displays only WARNING error events among the ERROR LOG data.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-153
MU-154
4.17
ALL RUs SETTING UNINSTALL
Function
Uninstalls the RU software for the VELOCITY U from the RUs registered in the “LIST
OF EXISTING RU”.
Upon completion of uninstallation, the VELOCITY U listings targeted for uninstallation
disappear from the “LIST OF EXISTING RU”.
NOTE
(3) Click on the [PING] button and then verify the network connection.
{MU:4.5_PING}
(4) Back up the following files for the RU to be uninstalled.
- CONFIGURATION
- HISTORY LOG
{MU:4.13_BACKUP}
(5) Click the [UNINSTALL] button.
When you execute UNINSTALL in a situation where two or more sets of RU software
for VELOCITY U are installed, a single execution will delete the entire VELOCITY U
data from the FTP server.
Procedures
When the RU software is uninstalled, the contents in the “C:\ProgramFiles\FujiFilm\
FCR” directory on the CL are deleted.
(6) Click the [OK] button.
CAUTIONS
- Before executing UNINSTALL, be sure to take note of the IP addresses (user
settings) of the RU, CL, and FTP server.
Once UNINSTALL is executed, all the user settings are lost.
- For the RU connected to the CL, back up the following files. Those files must
be resorted after installation.
- CONFIGURATION
- HISTORY LOG
If there are two or more VELOCITY U units, it is necessary to identify which
files belong to which VELOCITY U units.
(1) Start up the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC-TOOL}
(2) From “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, select a RU.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
Uninstall is performed.
(7) Click the [OK] button.
The RU PC-TOOL window appears back on screen.
(8) Exit the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC-TOOL}
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-154
MU-155
4.18
ALL RUs SETTING VERSION UP
Function
Updates the RU software versions of all the RUs that are registered in the “LIST OF
EXISTING RU”.
Procedures
(1) Start up the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC-TOOL}
(2) From “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, select a RU.
CAUTIONS
- While the software is being updated, never turn OFF the CL or VELOCITY U. If
the power turns OFF during an update process, the machine fails to start up.
- If two or more units of the VELOCITY U are targeted for a version update, they
are updated one by one in order of registration in the “LIST OF EXISTING
RU”. The update takes about 4 minutes per unit.
Do not turn OFF the CL or VELOCITY U until the VELOCITY U installation
process is completed.
After installation, be sure to confirm all the RU software versions to verify that
the version update is completed.
(3) Click the [VERSION UP] button.
(4) Insert the RU application CD-ROM into the CL’s CD-ROM drive.
(5) In the resulting confirmation window, click [OK].
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-155
MU-156
(6) In the confirmation window, select an RU application version from the
“RU VERSION” area and then click the [OK] button.
(7) In the resulting confirmation window, click [OK].
After about four minutes, the version update is completed for the first RU, and then
the version update for the next RU starts.
When the RU software version update is entirely completed, a dialog box opens.
(8) In the resulting confirmation window, click [OK].
The RU PC-TOOL window appears back on screen.
(9) Exit the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4._RU PC-TOOL}
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-156
MU-157
BLANK PAGE
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-157
MU-158
BLANK PAGE
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-158
MU-159
BLANK PAGE
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
MU-159
Control Sheet
Issue date
CR-IR 364 (Type U) Service Manual
Revision number
Reason
04.01.2003
07.10.2003
09.30.2003
05.30.2004
08.30.2004
00
01
02
03
04
New relese (FM3975)
Corrections (FM4054)
Corrections (FM4146)
Corrections (FM4351)
Corrections (FM4409)
10.30.2004
09.10.2005
03.01.2006
10.02.2006
05
06
07
08
02.20.2008
09
Corrections (FM4481)
Corrections (FM4680)
Revision (FM4790)
Change of Corporate Name and Corporate Logo
(FM4976)
Revision (FM5240)
Service Parts List (SP)
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Pages affected
All pages
All pages
All pages
All pages
SP-3-7, 11-13, 15-17, 19-21, 25, 26, 28,
29, 41-43
SP-3-45
SP-2-51
All pages
SP-38-48
SP-2-23, 25-59
SP-1
How to Use Service
Parts List
● Handling RANK characters (parts that
are handled in a special manner during
parts operation, such as management)
Character Under Warranty
Must be
R
returned.
Must be
returned.
Q
(We use for
analysis.)
Must NOT be
returned.
(Consumable
T
part. Not
applicable to
free-of-change
warranty.)
without Must Not be
R, Q, T returned.
Out of Warranty
Not repairable
Not repairable
Not repairable
Significance
Parts applicable to export
regulations.
● Fault RANK characters (which provide
reference for determining the recommended stock quantity)
All parts are assigned with one of characters
A through E.
012-201-07E
03.01.2006 FM4790
C
D
Repairable
● Export regulation-applicable
character(Par ts with the following
character are controlled by Expor t
regulation.)
＋
A
B
■ RANK
Character
Character
E
Significance
Consumable parts or parts
that will be replaced at short
intervals.
Parts that may become faulty
accidentally and have a relatively
high failure rate.
Parts that have a sufficiently long
MTBF, but are expected to have
a relatively high failure rate.
Parts that have a sufficiently
long MTBF, but are expected to
become faulty.
Parts that are necessary for fault
analysis, or parts that may be
needed in case of unexpected
accidents such as man-induced
damage.
<The RANK guide>
The Fault RANK characters, Handling RANK
characters, and Export regulation-applicable
character are assigned in that order.
Thus, at least one character or up to three
characters are assigned in the RANK
column.
■ REF.NO.
REF. NO. is a part number indicated in the
Service Parts Exploded Views. For parts
having different functions, they are clearly
distinguished in the REMARKS and SERIAL
NUMBER columns.
■ PART NUMBER
PART NUMBER is a code number that is
unique to each part. An alphabetic letter at
the rightmost position of the code number
has the following meaning.
○ For hardware
The alphabet denotes the version number
of a part. If parts have different version
numbers, they are upward-compatible.
○ For software
The alphabet denotes a difference in the
specifications. Parts differing in the suffix are
not compatible with each other. Although the
version number is omitted in the list.
■ PART NAME
PART NAME represents a general name of
a part.
■ QTY.
○ QTY. denotes the quantity of parts used
in each unit.
○ A part whose quantitiy is suffixed with -S
represents a small part that is shipped in
packs of 50. (Even if such a part is ordered
in quantity of 1, a pack containing 50 pieces
of that part is supplied.)
■ REMARKS
The REMARKS column indicates a unique
name of a part or relevant information of
each part.
■ SERIAL NUMBER
The units may contain different par ts
depending on their shipment control number.
SERIAL NUMBER indicates the shipment
control number to which the relevant parts
are applicable. If the SERIAL NUMBER
column is blank, the parts are applicable to
all the relevant units. The shipment control
number is represented by lower five digits
of eight-digit number indicated on the rating
indication label.
■ Quantities of recommended spare
parts
It is recommended as a rough guide to hold
in stock a certain quantity of parts according
to the rank (A, B, C, D, E) assigned to the
parts, as follows. For periodically replaced
p a r t s, h o l d t h e m i n s t o ck s e p a ra t e l y.
Adjust the stock quantity of service parts
depending on the number of working units
(N).
Quantity used in a single system : Q
○N=1
Rank A ＝ １ ＋ Ｑ × 0.3
Rank C ＝ １ ＋ Ｑ × 0.05
Rank D ＝ １ ＋ Ｑ × 0.02
○ 2 ≦ N ≦ 10
Rank A ＝ ２ ＋ Ｎ × Ｑ × 0.3
Rank C ＝ ２ ＋ Ｎ × Ｑ × 0.05
Rank D ＝ １ ＋ Ｎ × Ｑ × 0.02
○ 11 ≦ N ≦ 300
Rank A ＝ ３ ＋ Ｎ × Ｑ × 0.3
Rank C ＝ ３ ＋ Ｎ × Ｑ × 0.05
Rank D ＝ ２ ＋ Ｎ × Ｑ × 0.02
■ Precautions to be Observed When
Returning Parts for Repair
When returning a component for repair, pack
it in the same manner as for the supplied
substitute, using the substitute packing
materials.
The use of different packing materials or
packing methods may incur damage to
packed component during transit.
■ REFER TO
T h e " R E F E R TO " c o l u m n s h o w s t h e
reference sections concerning the part.
C l i ck i n g t h e r e fe r e n c e s e c t i o n i n t h e
"REFER TO" column jumps to the top page
of the refrence section where the related
information is in.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
SP-1
SP-2
INDEX
INDEX 01
● 撮影部カバー
EXPOSURE UNIT COVER
INDEX 02
● IP 移動機構
IP MOVEMENT
MECHANISM
INDEX 03
● スキャナ部／消去部
SCANNER UNIT/
ERASURE UNIT
INDEX 10
● フォトタイマ／オプション
PHOTO-TIMER/OPTION
INDEX 11
● グリッド／オプション
GRID/OPTION
INDEX 12
●ケーブル
CABLE
INDEX 04
● 副走査機構
SUBSCANNING
MECHANISM
INDEX 05
● ブッキ−
BUCKY
INDEX 06
● 撮影部フレーム／電装
EXPOSURE UNIT FRAME/
WIRING
INDEX 13
● 回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
INDEX 14
● 部品番号検索表
PARTS NOS. SEARCH
TABLE
INDEX 15
● ネジ・座金類の表示
記号一覧表
TABLE OF SCREWS /
WASHERS INDICATION
SYMBOLS
INDEX 07
● 昇降部
ELEVATION UNIT
INDEX 08
● 制御部
CONTROLLER UNIT
INDEX 09
● 撮影補助具／オプション
EXPOSURE AID/OPTION
INDEX 16
● 消耗品一覧表
LIST OF QUICK
WEARING PARTS
012-201-09C
INDEX
17
● 治具
JIG
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
SP-2
SP-3
01A
撮影部カバー 1
EXPOSURE UNIT COVER 1
・INDEX 01A : #24999 or earlier
・INDEX 01B : #25001 or later
撮影部カバー 1
EXPOSURE UNIT COVER 1
RANK
D
E
E
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
E
E
D
D
E
E
D
D
E
E
D
D
E
D
D
D
D
D
E
E
D
D
E
*1
*2
012-201-09C
REF.
1
2
3
4.1
4.2
5.1
5.2
6
7
8.1
8.2
9.1
9.2
10.1
10.2
11.1
11.2
12
13
14.1
14.2
15.1
15.2
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
PART NO.
350N2784E/F
347N1894B/C
347N1895A/B
388N5351C
388N5409
388N5350C
388N5408
350N2693D
350Y1688K
385N0081
385N0099
356N9505
356N10062
128S0955
128S0956
346N1256A
346N1452
388N5363A
382N1678
356N9506
356N10061
128S0955
128S0956
356N9446B
382N1631
350Y1802
350N2764C/D
350N2678A
***
***
385N0088
347N2017
***
405N3212
***
382N1691
382N1681
308N0210A
PART NAME
カバー
Cover
スペーサ
Spacer
スペーサ
Spacer
板ばね
Leaf Spring
板ばね
Leaf Spring
板ばね
Leaf Spring
板ばね
Leaf Spring
カバー
Cover
カバー
Cover
被覆材
Covering
被覆材
Covering
ブラケット
Bracket
ブラケット
Bracket
スイッチ
Switch
スイッチ
Switch
補助板
Auxiliary Plate
補助板
Auxiliary Plate
板ばね
Leaf Spring
テープ
Tape
ブラケット
Bracket
ブラケット
Bracket
スイッチ
Switch
スイッチ
Switch
ブラケット
Bracket
スポンジテープ
Sponge Tape
カバー
Cover
カバー
Cover
カバー
Cover
QTY.
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
被覆材
スペーサ
Covering
Spacer
1
1
銘板
Label
1
テープ
テープ
特殊ねじ
Tape
Tape
Special Screw
1
2
2
REMARKS
01A
SERIAL NO.
REFER TO
*1
*2
*1
*2
MSH2
MSH2
MSH3
MSH3
*1
*2
*1
*2
*2
*1
*1
*2
*1
*2
*2
*1
Japan: #20320 or earlier
Japan: #20321 - 24999
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
SP-3
SP-4
01B
撮影部カバー 2
EXPOSURE UNIT COVER 2
・INDEX 01A : #24999 or earlier
・INDEX 01B : #25001 or later
撮影部カバー 2
EXPOSURE UNIT COVER 2
RANK
D
D
E
E
D
D
D
D
D
D
E
D
E
D
E
D
E
E
D
D
D
E
E
D
D
D
D
E
E
D
D
D
D
D
D
E
012-201-09C
REF.
1.1
1.2
2
3
4
5
6.1
6.2
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33.1
33.2
34
35
36
37
38
39
PART NO.
350N2840A
350Y100340
345Y0287
345Y0288
388N5409
388N5408
350N2794
350Y100334
350Y1818A/C
385N0099
356N10062
128S0955
346N1452
***
382N1678
356N10061
128S0955
356N9446B
***
350Y1854/A
350N2764C/D
350N2678A
***
***
385N0088
347N2017
***
405N3212
345N1784A
388N5412B
385N0083
345N1773
345N1783
345N1782
345N1824
345N1825
382N1755
382N1756
***
382N1691
382N1681
308N0210A
カバー
カバー
仕切板
仕切板
板ばね
板ばね
カバー
カバー
カバー
被覆材
ブラケット
スイッチ
補助板
PART NAME
Cover
Cover
Spacer
Spacer
Leaf Spring
Leaf Spring
Cover
Cover
Cover
Covering
Bracket
Switch
Auxiliary Plate
QTY.
REMARKS
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1 MSH2
2
テープ
ブラケット
スイッチ
ブラケット
Tape
Bracket
Switch
Bracket
2
1
1
1
カバー
カバー
カバー
Cover
Cover
Cover
1
1
1
被覆材
スペーサ
Covering
Spacer
1
1
銘板
遮板
板ばね
被覆材
遮板
遮板
遮板
シールド材
シールド材
テープ
テープ
Label
Shield Plate
Leaf Spring
Covering
Shield Tape
Shield Plate
Shield Tape
Shield Sponge
Shield Sponge
Tape
Tape
1
16
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
テープ
テープ
特殊ねじ
Tape
Tape
Special Screw
1
2
2
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
01B
SERIAL NO.
REFER TO
MSH3
標準
SP-4
SP-5
02A
IP 移動機構 1
IP MOVEMENT MECHANISM 1
IP 移動機構 1
IP MOVEMENT MECHANISM 1
RANK REF.
PART NO.
E
1 356N10763
E
2 319N4478
D
3 322SP206
E
4 338N0554
5 ***
6 ***
7 ***
D
8 324Y3027A
D
9 322SP214
D
10 324N0064A
D
11 323S3353
D
12 324N0057A
D
13 324N0066A
E
14 356N9206B
D
15 319N3976A
D
16 319N4053
E
17.1 356N9535B/C/D
E
17.2 356N100734
18 ***
*1
*2
012-201-09C
D
19
E
D
E
D
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
D
D
E
D
D
D
20
21
22
23
24
25
26.1
26.2
27
28.1
28.2
29
30
31
32
33
34
PART NAME
ブラケット
Bracket
軸
Shaft
ころがり軸受
Ball Bearing
リング
Ring
タイミングベルト車
ころがり軸受
ベルト車
タイミングベルト
ベルト車
ベルト車
ブラケット
軸
軸
ブラケット
ブラケット
386N1179C/D
防振ゴム
356N9559
388N5352C
346N1262C
362N0734C
356N9349C
356N9338C
356N9538B/C/D
356N100733
356N9558
356N9491
356N10776
824Y0118A
106Y0010
356N9560
319N3978B
324N0061B
323S3356
ブラケット
板ばね
補助板
受
ブラケット
ブラケット
ブラケット
ブラケット
ブラケット
ブラケット
ブラケット
駆動部
電磁ブレーキ
ブラケット
軸
ベルト車
タイミングベルト
Timing Belt Wheel
Ball Bearing
Belt Pully
Timing Belt
Belt Pully
Belt Pully
Bracket
Shaft
Shaft
Bracket
Bracket
Rubber Vibration
Isolator
Bracket
Leaf Spring
Auxiliary Plate
Support
Bracket
Bracket
Bracket
Bracket
Bracket
Bracket
Bracket
Drive Unit
Solenoid Brake
Bracket
Shaft
Belt Pully
Timing Belt
QTY.
1
1
2
1
1
6
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
REMARKS
02A
SERIAL NO.
REFER TO
*1
*1
*1
*2
*2
2
1
4
4
4
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
*2
*2
#20989 or earlier
#20990 or later
MZ2
MB2
REF.12、REF.14、REF.15 の各パーツ交換時、部品在庫がない場合、REF.1 + REF.2 + REF.3 + REF.4 の一式で交換のこと。
If REF.12, REF.14, REF.15 are not available for replacement, replace the in set of REF.1 + REF.2 + REF.3 + REF.4.
REF.17.1 と REF.26.1 は REF.17.2 と REF.26.2 とペアで交換のこと。
REF.17.1 and REF.26.1 should be replaced with REF.17.2 and REF.26.2 in pairs.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
SP-5
SP-6
02B
IP 移動機構 2
IP MOVEMENT MECHANISM 2
IP 移動機構 2
IP MOVEMENT MECHANISM 2
RANK REF.
1
D
2
E
3
D
4
D
5
D
6
D
7
E
8
D
9
D
10
D
11
D
12
D
13
D
14
E
15
E
16
*2
*3
*4
012-201-09C
PART NAME
***
319N3996A
347S0409
319N3998A
322SP214
319N3975A
341N1082A/B
347N1951
319N3995A
322SP206
341N1084
329N0164E
319N4008A
319N3997A
347S0409
356N9512A
***
軸
スペーサ
軸
ころがり軸受
軸
アーム
スペーサ
軸
ころがり軸受
アーム
カム
軸
軸
スペーサ
ブラケット
D
17
388N2548/A
引張りコイルばね
D
D
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
341Y0328A
324N0065B
***
324N0062A
323S3352
324N0063C
319N3977B
341Y0359
341Y0339A
341Y0361
350N2978A
341Y0411
341Y0409
341Y0377
341Y0376
338N0553
329Y0021
322SP206
319N4511
アーム
ベルト車
***
ベルト車
タイミングベルト
ベルト車
軸
アーム
アーム
アーム
カバー
アームアセンブリ
アームアセンブリ
アーム
アーム
リング
カム
ころがり軸受
軸
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
E
D
E
*1
PART NO.
QTY.
Shaft
Spacer
Shaft
Ball Bearing
Shaft
Arm
Spacer
Shaft
Ball Bearing
Arm
Cam
Shaft
Shaft
Spacer
Bracket
Extension Coil
Spring
Arm
Belt Pully
2
2
2
14
2
2
2
2
8
2
2
2
2
2
1
Belt Pully
Timing Belt
Belt Pully
Shaft
Arm
Arm
Arm
Cover
Arm Assembly
Arm Assembly
Arm
Arm
Ring
Cam
Ball Bearing
Shaft
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
REMARKS
02B
SERIAL NO.
REFER TO
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
1
Approx.L=24mm
1
2
*1
*1, *2
*1
*2
*2
*2
*4
*4
*4
REF.18/REF.19/REF.25 の各パーツ交換時、部品在庫がない場合は、REF.30 へ交換のこと。
If REF.18/REF.19/REF.25 are not available for replacement, replace with REF.30.
REF.19/REF.26/REF.27 の各パーツ交換時、部品在庫がない場合は、REF.29 へ交換のこと。
If REF.19/REF.26/REF.27 are not available for replacement, replace with REF.29.
#21219 or earlier, #25001-25180 (CR-IR 364UM: #30094 or earlier, #30096, #35001-35003)
#21220-24999, #25181 or later (CR-IR 364UM: #30095, #30097-34999, #35004 or later)
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
SP-6
SP-7
02C
IP 移動機構 3
IP MOVEMENT MECHANISM 3
IP 移動機構 3
IP MOVEMENT MECHANISM 3
RANK REF.
PART NO.
E
1 347S0409
D
2 319N3996A
3 ***
D
4 146S0029/A
E
5 356N9894A
D
6 319N3998A
D
7 146S0029/A
8 ***
D
9 322SP214
E
10 341Y0374
D
11 341Y0338A
D
12 323S3352
D
13 350N2977A
D
14 324N0062A
D
15 324N0065B
D
16 341Y0360
D
17 319N3977B
D
18 324N0063C
E
19 356N9512A
D
20 341Y0358
D
21 341Y0327A
D
22 341N1083A/B
D
23 341N1085
*1
*2
*3
*4
012-201-09C
PART NAME
Spacer
Shaft
スペーサ
軸
***
ホトインタラプタ
ブラケット
軸
ホトインタラプタ
***
ころがり軸受
アーム
アーム
タイミングベルト
カバー
ベルト車
ベルト車
アーム
軸
ベルト車
ブラケット
アーム
アーム
アーム
アーム
QTY.
2
2
Photo Sensor
Bracket
Shaft
Photo Sensor
1
1
2
1
Ball Bearing
Arm
Arm
Timing Belt
Cover
Belt Pully
Belt Pully
Arm
Shaft
Belt Pully
Bracket
Arm
Arm
Arm
Arm
14
1
1
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
E
24
347N1951
スペーサ
Spacer
2
D
D
D
25
26
27
319N3975A
319N3995A
319N4003A
軸
軸
軸
2
2
2
D
28
388N1220A
圧縮コイルばね
Shaft
Shaft
Shaft
Compression Coil
Spring
D
D
E
D
D
D
D
D
E
D
E
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
***
322SP206
329N0164E
347S0409
341Y0410
341Y0408
341Y0378
341Y0379
338N0553
329Y0020
322SP206
319N4511
***
ころがり軸受
カム
スペーサ
アームアセンブリ
アームアセンブリ
アーム
アーム
リング
カム
ころがり軸受
軸
Ball Bearing
Cam
Spacer
Arm Assembly
Arm Assembly
Arm
Arm
Ring
Cam
Ball Bearing
Shaft
4
2
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
REMARKS
02C
SERIAL NO.
REF.ER TO
*3
SZ21
*3
SZ2
*1
*1, *2
*1
*2
*2
*3
Approx.L=16mm
*3
*3
*3
*4
*4
*4
REF.11/REF.15/REF.16 の各パーツ交換時、部品在庫がない場合は、REF.33 へ交換のこと。
If REF.11/REF.15/REF.16 are not available for replacement, replace with REF.30.
REF.15/REF.20/REF.21 の各パーツ交換時、部品在庫がない場合は、REF.34 へ交換のこと。
If REF.15/REF.20/REF.21 are not available for replacement, replace with REF.34.
#21219 or earlier, #25001-25180 (CR-IR 364UM: #30094 or earlier, #30096, #35001-35003)
#21220-24999, #25181 or later (CR-IR 364UM: #30095, #30097-34999, #35004 or later)
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
SP-7
SP-8
03
012-201-09C
スキャナ部／消去部
SCANNER UNIT/ERASURE UNIT
スキャナ部／消去部
SCANNER UNIT/ERASURE UNIT
RANK
C
C
D
D
D
D
D
D
CR
E
D
D
E
C
E
E
E
E
D
C
E
E
CR
D
REF.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11.1
11.2
12
13
14
15.1
15.2
16
17
18
19.1
19.2
20
21
22
23
PART NO.
840Y0102
113Y1714A
362N0757C/D
332N0618C
332N0619C
357N1491C/D/E
606N0038A/B
605N0036/A
840Y0099
316N0473A
115S0152/A
115S0154
316N0463A
113Y1668C
347N1913D
347N1897C
347N2107A
316N0468B
382N1630
113Y1667B
347N1896A
347N2106
898Y0993F
139N0066
***
***
D
24
388N1221A
D
D
D
25
26
27
28
319N4004A
316S0451
350N2849
***
AT
29
137S1280
AT
30
137S1277
PART NAME
QTY.
REMARKS
光源部
Light Source Unit
1
LIT21A
LIT21A
2
受
Support
2
ストッパ
Stopper
2
ストッパ
Stopper
2
台
Base
1
光導材
Optical Guide Material 1
平行平面板
Plane Parallel Plate
1
消去部
Erasure Lamp Unit
1 *3
止め具
Clamp
2
感熱スイッチ
Thermo-switch
1
感熱スイッチ
Thermo-switch
1
止め具
Clamp
1
JCT21B
JCT21B
1
調整板
Adjustable Plate
1
調整板
Adjustable Plate
1
調整板
Adjustable Plate
1
止め具
Clamp
1
テープ
Tape
1
JCT21A
JCT21A
1
調整板
Adjustable Plate
1
調整板
Adjustable Plate
1
スキャナ部
Scanner Unit
1 *4, *5, *6
絶縁材
Insulator
2
***
***
Compression Coil
圧縮コイルばね
2 Approx.L=13mm
Spring
軸
Shaft
2
止め具
Rivet
2
カバー
Cover
1
***
48V/5.0A
ヒューズ
FUSE
2
for ERS21A
48V/2.0A
ヒューズ
FUSE
1
for ERS21A
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
SERIAL NO.
03
REFER TO
*1
*1
*2
*1
*2
*1
*2
SP-8
SP-9
03
RANK
E
E
E
E
E
E
CR
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
REF.
31.1
31.2
32
33.1
33.2
34
35
スキャナ部／消去部
SCANNER UNIT/ERASURE UNIT
PART NO.
356N9463D
356N10658A
356N9302C
401N0864B
401N0967A
345N1675B
840Y0122
ブラケット
ブラケット
ブラケット
押え板
押え板
遮板
消去部
PART NAME
Bracket
Bracket
Bracket
Clamp
Clamp
Shield Plate
Erasure Lamp Unit
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
スキャナ部／消去部
SCANNER UNIT/ERASURE UNIT
REMARKS
SERIAL NO.
03
REFER TO
*1
*2
#21478 or earlier
#21479 or later
#21066 or earlier, #21071, #25001-#25129 (CR-IR 364UM: #30081 or earlier, #35001, #35002)
#21067-21070, #21072-24999, #25130 or later (CR-IR 364UM: #30082-34999, #35003 or later)
840Y0099 交換時、部品在庫がない場合は、REF.35 と INDEX 06B REF.16 を手配のこと。
If there is no 840Y0099 in stock for replacement, use REF.35 and INDEX 06B REF.16.
本品の修理依頼時には、必ず専用梱包箱を使用し、工場へ戻して下さい。
When returning this Scanner Unit for repair, make sure to use the specified box for packing and send it to a factory.
REF.20 が Ver.E の場合、RU APL ソフトウェアは 1.14 が必須。
RU APL software version 1.14 is necessary when REF.20 is version E.
REF.20 が Ver.F 以降の場合、RU APL ソフトウェアは 1.15 以降が必須。
RU APL software version 1.15 or later is necessary when REF.20 is version F or later.
012-201-09C
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
SP-9
SP-10
04A
副走査機構 1
SUBSCANNING MECHANISM 1
副走査機構 1
SUBSCANNING MECHANISM 1
RANK REF.
1
D
2
D
3
D
4
012-201-09C
PART NAME
***
322SP214
357Y0228A
319N3992B
ころがり軸受
台
軸
D
5
388N2539B
引張りコイルばね
D
D
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
322SF061
341Y0372
***
324N0058D
356N9278B
323N0043B
319N4489
324N0060E
324N0059D
364N0109
319N4009A
346N1285C
356N9898
386N1149A
347N0409
ころがり軸受
アーム
Ball Bearing
Base
Shaft
Extension Coil
Spring
Ball Bearing
Arm
ベルト車
ブラケット
ベルト
軸
ベルト車
ベルト車
ガード
軸
補助板
ブラケット
緩衝機材
スペーサ
Belt Pully
Bracket
Belt
Shaft
Belt Pully
Belt Pully
Guard
Shaft
Auxiliary Plate
Bracket
Shock Absorber
Spacer
D
E
D
D
D
D
E
D
E
E
E
D
*1
PART NO.
QTY.
6
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
2
3
REMARKS
2
Approx.L=48mm
4
1
*1
04A
SERIAL NO.
REFER TO
*1
REF.6 と REF.12 はペアで交換のこと。
REF.6 and REF.12 should be replaced with pairs.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
SP-10
SP-11
04B
副走査機構 2
SUBSCANNING MECHANISM 2
副走査機構 2
SUBSCANNING MECHANISM 2
RANK REF.
PART NO.
D
1 146S0029/A
E
2 356N9330D
3 ***
D
4 322SP214
D
5 324N0058D
E
6 364N0108
D
7 324N0059D
D
8 323N0043B
E
9 319N4489
D
10 324N0060E
E
11 356N9278B
E
12 341Y0373
D
13 322SF061
012-201-09C
ころがり軸受
ベルト車
ガード
ベルト車
ベルト
軸
ベルト車
ブラケット
アーム
ころがり軸受
D
14
388N2539B
引張りコイルばね
D
D
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
357Y0227A
319N3992B
***
347N1885A
362N0741A
388N5353B
146S0029/A
146S0029/A
356N9280D
146S0029/A
319N4009A
346N1284C
356N9899
386N1149A
347S0409
332N0630
台
軸
Ball Bearing
Belt Pully
Guard
Belt Pully
Belt
Shaft
Belt Pully
Bracket
Arm
Ball Bearing
Extension Coil
Spring
Base
Shaft
スペーサ
受
板ばね
ホトインタラプタ
ホトインタラプタ
ブラケット
ホトインタラプタ
軸
補助板
ブラケット
緩衝機材
スペーサ
ストッパ
Spacer
Support
Leaf Spring
Photo Sensor
Photo Sensor
Bracket
Photo Sensor
Shaft
Auxiliary Plate
Bracket
Shock Absorber
Spacer
Stoper
E
D
D
D
D
E
D
D
E
E
E
E
E
*1
PART NAME
ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor
ブラケット
Bracket
QTY.
REMARKS
1 SZ3
3
5
2
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
4
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
1
2
04B
SERIAL NO.
REFER TO
*1
*1
Approx.L=48mm
1
1
SZ4
SZ1
SZ5
REF.9 と REF.13 はペアで交換のこと。
REF.9 and REF.13 should be replaced with pairs.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
SP-11
SP-12
04C
副走査機構 3
SUBSCANNING MECHANISM 3
副走査機構 3
SUBSCANNING MECHANISM 3
RANK REF.
PART NO.
D
1 322SP224
2 ***
D
3.1 337N0069A
D
3.2 337N0072
D
4 106Y0010
E
5 356N9209D
D
6 322SP214
D
7.1 319N3990D
D
7.2 319N4196A
8 ***
D
9.1 319N3990D
D
9.2 319N4197
D
10 322SP214
D
11.1 337N0069A
D
11.2 337N0072
D
12 338N0519
D
13 320S0057
E
14 356N9500/A
D
15 118YA183/A
D
16 338N0519
*1
*2
012-201-09C
PART NAME
ころがり軸受
Ball Bearing
QTY.
2
ホイール
ホイール
電磁ブレーキ
ブラケット
ころがり軸受
軸
軸
Wheel
Wheel
Solenoid Brake
Bracket
Ball Bearing
Shaft
Shaft
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
軸
軸
ころがり軸受
ホイール
ホイール
リングカラー
軸継手
ブラケット
パルスモータ
リングカラー
Shaft
Shaft
Ball Bearing
Wheel
Wheel
Ring Collar
Coupling
Bracket
Stepping Motor
Ring Collar
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
REMARKS
04C
SERIAL NO.
REFER TO
*1
*2
MB1
*1
*2
*1
*2
*1
*2
MZ1
#20001-20048, #20050-20062, #20064-20105, #20107-20110, #20113-20181
#20049, #20063, #20106, #20111, #20112, #20182 or later
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
SP-12
SP-13
05A
ブッキ− 1
BUCKY 1
ブッキ− 1
BUCKY 1
RANK
E
D
D
D
D
E
E
E
D
D
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
D
*1
*2
*3
012-201-09C
REF.
1
2.1
2.2
2.3
3
4.1
4.2
5
6.1
6.2
7.1
7.2
7.3
8.1
8.2
9.1
9.2
9.3
10.1
10.2
10.3
11
PART NO.
405N3103
350N2787E
350N2976A
350N2944
319N4028B
346N1295F
346N1401C
347N1866
386N1221A
386N1265
356N9275F
356N10060
356N9827
347N1935
347N1945
350Y1762
350Y1793
350Y1745
356Y0318
356Y0371
356Y0365
382N1679
銘板
カバー
カバー
カバー
軸
補助板
補助板
スペーサ
緩衝機材
緩衝機材
ブラケット
ブラケット
ブラケット
スペーサ
スペーサ
カバー
カバー
カバー
ブラケット
ブラケット
ブラケット
テープ
PART NAME
Label
Cover
Cover
Cover
Shaft
Auxiliary Plate
Auxiliary Plate
Spacer
Shock Absorber
Shock Absorber
Bracket
Bracket
Bracket
Spacer
Spacer
Cover
Cover
Cover
Bracket
Bracket
Bracket
Tape
QTY.
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
REMARKS
Standard
Option *3
05A
SERIAL NO.
REFER TO
*1
*2
Standard
Option *3
Standard
Option *3
Standard
*2
*1
Option *3
Standard
Option *3
Standard
Option *3
Standard
Option *3
*1
*2
*1
*2
#2001-20636, #20641, #20642, #20644, #20645, #20648-20650 and #20666
#20637-20640, #20643, #20646, #20647, #20651-20665 and #20667 or later
オプション（フォトタイマ厚み大（t ≒ 8mm）タイプ）
（日立イオンチャンバ、COMET イオンチャンバ、シーメンスイオンチャンバ、フィリップスイオンチャンバ）
Photo timer thicker Type (Hitachi Ion chamber, COMET Ion chamber, Siemens Ion Chamber, Philips Ion Chamber)
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
SP-13
SP-14
05B
ブッキ− 2
BUCKY 2
ブッキ− 2
BUCKY 2
RANK
E
E
E
E
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
E
E
D
D
E
D
D
D
E
D
D
D
D
D
D
E
E
D
E
E
E
E
E
012-201-09C
REF.
1.1
1.2
2
3
4.1
4.2
5.1
5.2
5.3
6
7.1
7.2
8
9
10.1
10.2
11
12
13
14
15
16.1
16.2
16.3
17
18
19
20.1
20.2
21
22
23.1
23.2
24
25
PART NO.
347S0506
347S0817
313N1225A
313N1224A
319N4035A
319N4137
319N4077
319N4139
319N4138
322SF097
388S0031
388S0036
345N1655G
347N1811
319N3946A
319N4160
363N2459B
322SF076
362N0733B
319N4081
347S0811
350N2688D
350N3098B
350N2945
345N1712B
345N1708B
146S0029A
356N9342B
356N9750
347N0787
363N2537B
363N2574A
363N2549
347N1775
401N0915
PART NAME
スペーサ
Spacer
スペーサ
Spacer
ステ−
Stay
ステ−
Stay
軸
Shaft
軸
Shaft
軸
Shaft
軸
Shaft
軸
Shaft
軸受
Bearing
ばね
Spring
ばね
Spring
仕切板
Partition
スペーサ
Spacer
軸
Shaft
軸
Shaft
ガイド
Guide
軸受
Bearing
受
Support
軸
Shaft
スペーサ
Spacer
カバー
Cover
カバー
Cover
カバー
Cover
シールド材
Shield
シールド材
Shield
ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor
ブラケット
Bracket
ブラケット
Bracket
スペーサ
Spacer
ガイド
Guide
ガイド
Guide
ガイド
Guide
スペーサ
Spacer
Counter Plate
押え板
QTY.
4
4
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
11
4
4
2
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
REMARKS
Standard
Option *3, *4
05B
SERIAL NO.
REFER TO
*1
*1
Standard
Option *5
Standard
Option *3
Option *4, *5
Standard
Option *5
*6
Standard
Option *3, *4, *5
Option *3, *4, *5
Standard
Standard
Option *5
*1
*2
#25000 or earlier
#25000 or earlier
SZ6
Standard
Option *3, *4, *5
Option *3, *4, *5
Standard
Option *5
#25001 or later
SP-14
SP-15
05B
ブッキ− 2
BUCKY 2
RANK REF.
PART NO.
D
26 345N1768/A
D
27 345N1785
E
28 401N0917
D
29 322SY138
D
30 385N0084
E
31 356N9728
E
32 362Y0111
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
遮板
遮板
押え板
軸受
被覆材
ブラケット
受
ブッキ− 2
BUCKY 2
PART NAME
Shield Plate
Shield Plate
Counter Plate
Bearing
Covering
Bracket
Support
E
33.1 345Y0286
仕切板
Partition
E
33.2 345Y0313
仕切板
Partition
E
33.3 345Y0316
仕切板
Partition
QTY.
REMARKS
1
2
2
4
6
2 Option *3, *4
1
REF.27,28 を含
1 まない /Without
REF.27, 28
REF.27,28 を含
1 まない /Without
REF27, 28
REF.17,18 を含
1 まない /Without
REF.17, 18
SERIAL NO.
#25001 or later
#25001 or later
#25001 or later
05B
REFER TO
*1
*1
*2
#25001 or later
#20001-20636, #20641, #20642, #20644, #20645, #20648-20650 and #20666
#20637-20640, #20643, #20646, #20647, #20651-20655 and #20667 or later
#Photo timer thicker Type (Hitachi Ion chamber, COMET Ion chamber)
#Photo timer thicker Type (Philips Ion Chamber)
#Photo timer thicker Type (Siemens Ion Chamber)
シーメンスイオンチャンバー搭載時は 9 個使用となる。/Use 9 pcs if Siemens Ion Chamber is mounted.
012-201-09C
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
SP-15
SP-16
05C
ブッキ− 3
BUCKY 3
ブッキ− 3
BUCKY 3
RANK REF.
PART NO.
D
1 146S0029/A
QTY.
REMARKS
1 SH1
標準フォトタイマ
1 /Phototimer
standard Type
1
E
2
401N0856C
押え板
Counter Plate
E
3
347N0524
スペーサ
D
4
388N2543A
引張りコイルばね
D
E
D
D
D
107Y0182A
356N9067D
322SF237
319N4034
341Y0325
***
341N1095B
347N1814
356N9068B
***
347N1815
319N3949
316Y3013
347S0508
363N2544A
401N0854J
ソレノイド
ブラケット
軸受
軸
アーム
アーム
スペーサ
ブラケット
Arm
Spacer
Bracket
1
1
1
E
D
E
E
E
E
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Spacer
Extension Coil
Spring
Solenoid
Bracket
Bearing
Shaft
Arm
スペーサ
軸
ロック
スペーサ
ガイド
押え板
1
1
1
2
2
1
D
21
388N2544A
引張コイルばね
E
E
D
D
D
E
22
23
24
25.1
25.2
26
316N0457D
401N0855G
334N2389
319N4029
319N4049
363N2441A
止め具
押え板
樹脂ローラ
軸
軸
ガイド
Spacer
Shaft
Lock
Spacer
Guide
Counter Plate
Extension Coil
Spring
Clamp
Counter Plate
Plastic Roller
Shaft
Shaft
Guide
E
27
401N0885
押え板
Counter Plate
1
D
D
D
D
E
D
28
29
30
31
32
33
107Y0189
382N1680B
386N1321
128S0257
356N9360
128S0257
ソレノイド
テープ
緩衝機材
マイクロスイッチ
ブラケット
マイクロスイッチ
Solenoid
Tape
Shock Absorber
Micro-switch
Bracket
Micro-switch
1
1
1
1
2
1
D
E
E
012-201-09C
PART NAME
ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor
1
Approx.L=18mm
1
1
2
1
1
SOLH1
1
05C
SERIAL NO.
REFER TO
Approx.L=20mm
1
1
3
2
1
2
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
厚み大フォトタ
イマ /Phototimer
thicker Type
MSH1
MSH12
SP-16
SP-17
06A
撮影部フレーム／電装 1
EXPOSURE UNIT FRAME/WIRING 1
撮影部フレーム／電装 1
EXPOSURE UNIT FRAME/WIRING 1
RANK REF.
PART NO.
D
1 322SF044
E
2 363N2521A
D
3 341N1079A/B
E
4 356N9273G
D
5 118NA013B
D
6 146S0029/A
E
7 356N9274C
D
8 322SF104
D
9 319N3982A
E
10 346N1288A
E
11 356N9372B
E
12 346Y0081
E
13 346Y0080C
E
14 356N9501
E
15.1 356N9341B/C
E
15.2 356N100732
16 ***
17 ***
18 ***
19 ***
E
20 356N9214D
E
21 347S0254
CR
22 113Y1671C
E
23 356N9373A
E
24 356N9540/B
25 ***
26 ***
E
27 356N9518
E
28 346N1370B
29 ***
D
30 401N0916A
E
31 347N1813
E
32 898Y1109
E
33 898Y1112
*1
012-201-09C
PART NAME
ころがり軸受
Ball Bearing
ガイド
Guide
アーム
Arm
ブラケット
Bracket
パルスモータ
Stepping Motor
ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor
ブラケット
Bracket
軸受
Bearing
軸
Shaft
補助板
Auxiliary Plate
ブラケット
Bracket
補助板
Auxiliary Plate
補助板
Auxiliary Plate
ブラケット
Bracket
ブラケット
Bracket
ブラケット
Bracket
QTY.
REMARKS
1
1
1
1
1 MZ3
1 SZ7
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
2
ブラケット
スペーサ
PWC21A
ブラケット
ブラケット
Bracket
Spacer
PWC21A
Bracket
Bracket
1
7
1
1
1
ブラケット
補助板
Bracket
Auxiliary Plate
1
1
押え板
スペーサ
ケーブル
ケーブル
Counter Plate
Spacer
Cable
Cable
2
8
1
1
06A
SERIAL NO.
REFER TO
*1
*1
#25001 or later
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
SP-17
SP-18
06B
撮影部フレーム／電装 2
EXPOSURE UNIT FRAME/WIRING 2
撮影部フレーム／電装 2
EXPOSURE UNIT FRAME/WIRING 2
RANK REF.
PART NO.
E
1 356N9369B
E
2 356N9370C
012-201-09C
ブラケット
ブラケット
D
3
386Y0047
防振ゴム
E
E
E
E
D
E
4
5
6
7
8
9
346N1344A
343N0059A
356N9350D
356N9356E
362N0738A
346N1282A
補助板
フック
ブラケット
ブラケット
受
補助板
D
10
386Y0046A
防振ゴム
E
E
E
E
D
E
E
D
E
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
356N9555B
356N9554
356N9553/A
364S0003
119S0007/A/B
345N1801B
356N9552
119Y2029
343N0060A
ブラケット
ブラケット
ブラケット
ガード
電動ファン
遮板
ブラケット
電動ファン
フック
PART NAME
Bracket
Bracket
Rubber Vibration
Isolator
Auxiliary Plate
Hook
Bracket
Bracket
Support
Auxiliary Plate
Rubber Vibration
Isolator
Bracket
Bracket
Bracket
Guard
Fan
Shield Plate
Bracket
Fan
Hook
QTY.
1
1
1
REMARKS
06B
SERIAL NO.
REFER TO
2piece/set
2
1
2
2
2
4
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
4
1
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
2piece/set
For 840Y0122
SP-18
SP-19
06C
撮影部フレーム／電装 3
EXPOSURE UNIT FRAME/WIRING 3
撮影部フレーム／電装 3
EXPOSURE UNIT FRAME/WIRING 3
RANK REF.
PART NO.
D
1 382N1630
E
2 345N1710
E
3 356N9507A
E
4 356N9497A
E
5 356N9448A
E
6 346N1358A/B
D
7 350N2836B
E
8 309N0116
E
9 347S0506
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
E
10.1 401N0871A
押さえ板
Counter Plate
1
E
10.2 401N0883A
押さえ板
Counter Plate
1
被覆材
Covering
4
D
11
385N0082A
D
12.1 388N5366
板ばね
Leaf spring
1
D
12.2 388N5389A
板ばね
Leaf spring
1
128S0915
352N0629
405N3077/A
スイッチ
パネル
銘板
Switch
Panel
Label
2
2
1
E
16.1 401N0871A
押さえ板
Counter Plate
1
E
16.2 401N0884A
押さえ板
Counter Plate
1
D
17.1 388N5365
板ばね
Leaf spring
1
D
17.2 388N5390A
板ばね
Leaf spring
1
グロメット
ブラケット
スペーサ
ブラケット
カバー
スペーサ
ブラケット
SND21B
ブラケット
ブラケット
グロメット
ブラケット
グロメット
Grommet
Bracket
Spacer
Bracket
Cover
Spacer
Bracket
SND21B
Bracket
Bracket
Grommet
Bracket
Grommet
1
1
3
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
D
D
E
E
E
E
E
D
E
E
CR
E
E
E
E
E
012-201-09C
テープ
遮板
ブラケット
ブラケット
ブラケット
補助板
カバー
座金
スペーサ
PART NAME
Tape
Cover
Bracket
Bracket
Bracket
Auxiliary Plate
Cover
Washer
Spacer
13
14
15
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
318S3302
356N9490B
347N0226
356N9430
350N2793B/C
347N0395
356N9429A
113Y1673H
356N9456
356N9457B
318N3033
356N9508
318N3700
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
REMARKS
06C
SERIAL NO.
REFER TO
標準フォトタイマ /
Phototimer standard
Type
厚み大フォトタイマ
/Phototimer thicker
Type
標準フォトタイマ /
Phototimer standard
Type
厚み大フォトタイマ
/Phototimer thicker
Type
SH2,3
標準フォトタイマ /
Phototimer standard
Type
厚み大フォトタイマ
/Phototimer thicker
Type
標準フォトタイマ /
Phototimer standard
Type
厚み大フォトタイマ
/Phototimer thicker
Type
SP-19
SP-20
06C
撮影部フレーム／電装 3
EXPOSURE UNIT FRAME/WIRING 3
RANK REF.
PART NO.
C
31 113Y1669A
D
32 352N0598E
D
33 350N2841A
D
34 352N0604C/D
E
35 346N1292B
E
36 346N1291B
C
37 113Y1709B
D
38 382N1637
E
39 350N2829A
E
40 356N9452C
D
41 350N2827A
D
42 350N2815
D
43 128S0809
E
44 356N9443
*1
*2
PART NAME
LDS21A
LDS21A
パネル
Panel
カバー
Cover
パネル
Panel
補強板
Auxiliary Plate
補強板
Auxiliary Plate
RLY21A
RLY21A
スポンジテープ
Sponge Tape
カバー
Cover
ブラケット
Bracket
カバー
Cover
カバー
Cover
スイッチ
Switch
ブラケット
Bracket
AT
45
137S1280
ヒューズ
FUSE
AT
46
137S1278
ヒューズ
FUSE
AT
47
137S1275
ヒューズ
FUSE
AT
48
137S1277
ヒューズ
FUSE
D
E
E
D
E
C
C
C
E
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
316N0456
316N0502
347N1776
382N1677A
343N0054B
857Y0418A
113Y1903A
113Y1904A
405N3077A
止め具
止め具
スペーサ
テープ
フック
ボードアセンブリ
RLY21B
LDS21B
銘板
Clamp
Clamp
Spacer
Tape
Hook
Board Assembly
RLY21B
LDS21B
Label
QTY.
REMARKS
1 *2
1
1
1
1
1
1 *2
2
2
1
1
1
1 MSH8
1
48V/5.0A
2
for SND21B
48V/3.2A
1
for SND21B
48V/1.3A
8
for SND21B
48V/2.0A
2
for SND21B
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
撮影部フレーム／電装 3
EXPOSURE UNIT FRAME/WIRING 3
SERIAL NO.
06C
REFER TO
*1
*1
*1
*1
#25001 or later
REF.31、37 はペアで交換時のみ REF.54 へ相互互換で交換可 /
REF.31 and REF.37 can be replaced with REF.54 only when replacing as a pairs they are mutually compatible.
012-201-09C
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
SP-20
SP-21
07A
昇降部カバー
ELEVATION UNIT COVER
昇降部カバー
ELEVATION UNIT COVER
RANK REF.
PART NO.
D
1 350N2766B
D
2 350N2773B
D
3 407N0134A
C
4 113Y1711A
D
5 352N0612A
A
6 603N0242
D
7 350N2742B
D
8 350N2681D
D
9 350N2680A/B/C
D
10 350N2769E
D
11 350N2813A
D
12 350N2814B/C
E
13.1 347S0499
E
13.2 347S0850
*1
012-201-09C
PART NAME
カバー
Cover
カバー
Cover
反射板
Reflector
LED21C
LED21C
パネル
Panel
フィルタ
Filter
背面上カバー
Cover
昇降右上カバー
Cover
カバー
Cover
カバー
Cover
カバー
Cover
カバー
Cover
スペーサ
Spacer
スペーサ
Spacer
E
14
318S3300
グロメット
Grommet
D
15
317N1055
キャップ
Cap
D
E
D
D
D
D
D
E
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
350N2059A/B/C
405N3086/A
350N2771B
350N2740F
350N2760B
350N2770B
350N2743A
356N9359A
カバー
銘板
カバー
昇降右カバー
カバー
カバー
背面下カバー
ブラケット
Cover
Label
Cover
Cover
Cover
Cover
Cover
Bracket
D
24
304N0023A
六角ボルト
Bolt
D
D
D
D
D
D
25
26
27
28
29
30
350N2802B
382N1578
350N2803B
350N2748B
350N2747B
350N2801B
昇降前右上カバー
テープ
昇降前右下カバー
前面下カバー
前面上カバー
昇降左前カバー
Cover
Tape
Cover
Cover
Cover
Cover
QTY.
REMARKS
1
1
1
1
1
1 *1
1
1
11
1
1
1
3
3
昇降スイッチあり
2
/With Elevation
昇降スイッチなし
2
/Without Elevation
3
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
装置移動用 /
For transporting
4
the equipment
moving
1
1
1
1
1
1
07A
SERIAL NO.
REFER TO
REF.3 が Ver.A（材質：鋼材）以降は、REF.6 の取付なし。
REF.6 is not installed if REF.3 is version A (material: steel) or later.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
SP-21
SP-22
07A
昇降部カバー
ELEVATION UNIT COVER
RANK REF.
PART NO.
D
31 350N2741F
32 ***
D
33 350N2808C
D
34 350N2768B
D
35 350N2839
D
36 350N2838
D
37 350N2809
E
38 356N9424
E
39 405N3087
D
40 345N1702
E
41 350N2774B/C
E
42.1 304S1001240
E
42.2 304S1001250
E
43 309S0220012
E
44 309S0120012
E
45 309S0120016
E
46 305S0061B
E
47 405N3102
E
48 350N2877
E
49.1 405N3072
E
49.2 405N100245
D
50 350N2786
E
51.1 304S1001245
E
51.2 304S1001235
D
52 350N2781
012-201-09C
PART NAME
昇降左カバー
Cover
昇降左上カバー
カバー
カバー
カバー
カバー
ブラケット
銘板
遮板
カバー
六角ボルト
六角ボルト
バネ座金
平座金
平座金
ナット
銘板
カバー
銘板
銘板
カバー
六角ボルト
六角ボルト
カバー
Cover
Cover
Cover
Cover
Cover
Bracket
Label
Cover
Cover
Bolt
Bolt
Spring washer
Washer
Washer
Nut
Label
Cover
Label
Label
Cover
Bolt
Bolt
Cover
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
1
1
1
2
2
4
4
昇降部カバー
ELEVATION UNIT COVER
REMARKS
SERIAL NO.
07A
REFER TO
M12x40
M12x50
Other than Japan
M12x45
M12x35
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
SP-22
SP-23
07B
昇降部本体 1
ELEVATION UNIT MAIN BODY 1
昇降部本体 1
ELEVATION UNIT MAIN BODY 1
RANK REF.
PART NO.
E
1 356N9124C
D
2 331S0004
D
3 322SY291
4 ***
E
5.1 347S0479
E
5.2 347S0356
E
6 356N9413A
E
7 356N9108C
D
8 128S0664
E
9.1 347S0407
E
9.2 347S0848
E
10 356N9107C
E
11 356N9123A
D
12 128S0909/A
E
13 356N9120B
D
14 118YA179A
D
15 395NA001
D
16 386N1218
E
17 347N1921
E
18 356N9038C
E
19 316N0475
E
20 347N0707
E
21 347N1847A
D
22 320N0026
E
23 305S0126
D
24 ***
D
25 ***
D
26 ***
D
27 ***
D
28 ***
D
29 ***
D
30 357N1503
D
31 108N0042
E
32 356N9104C
D
33 135S0712
E
34 350N2739B
E
35 347N0360
E
36 312S0015
D
37 135S0713
012-201-09C
ブラケット
ブレーキ
軸受
***
スペーサ
スペーサ
ブラケット
ブラケット
スイッチ
スペーサ
スペーサ
ブラケット
ブラケット
スイッチ
ブラケット
モータ
減変速機
緩衝機材
スペーサ
ブラケット
止め具
スペーサ
調整板
軸継手
ナット
台
トランス
ブラケット
端子台
カバー
スペーサ
キー
端子台
PART NAME
Bracket
Brake
Bearing
QTY.
1
1
1
Spacer
Spacer
Bracket
Bracket
Switch
Spacer
Spacer
Bracket
Bracket
Switch
Bracket
Motor
Gear Box
Shock Absorber
Spacer
Bracket
Clamp
Spacer
Adjustable Plate
Coupling
Nut
3
3
1
2
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
2
1
2
2
1
1
1
Base
Teansformer
Bracket
Terminal Block
Cover
Spacer
Key
Terminal Block
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
REMARKS
07B
SERIAL NO.
REFER TO
ESJ1
MJ1
key 含む 6x6x25
SP-23
SP-24
07C
昇降部本体 2
ELEVATION UNIT MAIN BODY 2
昇降部本体 2
ELEVATION UNIT MAIN BODY 2
RANK REF.
PART NO.
E
1 356N9488
E
2 388N5362
E
3 346N1359
D
4 128S0955
E
5 356N9487
E
6 356N9487
E
7 356N9489
E
8 388N5362
D
9 128S0955
E
10 346N1359
D
11 128S0955
E
12 346N1359
E
13 356N9489
E
14 388N5362
E
15 356N9487
E
16 356N9039C
E
17 356N9043C
D
18 135N0016
E
19 316N0452C
CR
20 113Y1665C
E
21 347N1817B
E
22 356N9048B
E
23 356N9050B
D
24 363S0013
E
25 369N0271A
E
26 356N9121C
D
27 128S0664
E
28 316N0455A
E
29 347N0787
E
30.1 347S0479
E
30.2 347S0356
012-201-07C
PART NAME
ブラケット
Bracket
板ばね
Leaf Spring
補助板
Auxiliary Plate
マイクロスイッチ Micro-switch
ブラケット
Bracket
ブラケット
Bracket
ブラケット
Bracket
板ばね
Leaf Spring
マイクロスイッチ Micro-switch
補助板
Auxiliary Plate
マイクロスイッチ Micro-switch
補助板
Auxiliary Plate
ブラケット
Bracket
板ばね
Leaf Spring
ブラケット
Bracket
ブラケット
Bracket
ブラケット
Bracket
端子台
Terminal Block
止め具
Clamp
ELV21A
ELV21A
スペーサ
Spacer
ブラケット
Bracket
ブラケット
Bracket
ガイドレール
Guide Rail
ダクト
Duct
ブラケット
Bracket
スイッチ
Switch
止め具
Clamp
スペーサ
Spacer
スペーサ
Spacer
スペーサ
Spacer
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
8
8
AT
31
137S1286
ヒューズ
FUSE
2
AT
32
137S1277
ヒューズ
FUSE
2
E
E
E
33
34
35
346N1395
347S0849
347S0792
補助板
スペーサ
スペーサ
Auxiliary Plate
Spacer
Spacer
4
4
2
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
REMARKS
07C
SERIAL NO.
REFER TO
MSJ1
MSJ3
MSJ2
ESJ2
t=10mm
t=10mm
250V/3.2A
for ELV21A
48V/2.0A
for ELV21A
#25001 or later
t=14mm
t=15mm
SP-24
SP-25
07D
昇降部（操作パネル、スイッチ）
昇降部（操作パネル、スイッチ）
ELEVATION UNIT（OPERATION PANEL&SWITCH）
ELEVATION UNIT（OPERATION PANEL&SWITCH）
RANK REF.
PART NO.
D
1 350N2807
E
2 347S0501
E
3 356N9367B
C
4 845Y0098A/B/C
D
5 350N2761D
D
6 340N0232B
C
7 113Y1686A
E
8 356N9449
D
9 341N1108A
D
10 341N1112A
D
11 341N1113
D
12 341N1109A
D
13 341N1100B
E
14 347N1871
D
15 350N2775A/B
E
16 316N0459B
D
17 350N2914
CR
18 845Y0097
D
19 341N1102B/C
D
20 309N0112
D
21 341N1101B
D
22 341N1111A
D
23 341N1110A
012-201-09C
PART NAME
カバー
Cover
スペーサ
Spacer
ブラケット
Bracket
パネル部
Panel
パネル
Panel
キートップ
Keytop
LCN21A
LCN21A
ブラケット
Bracket
アーム
Arm
アーム
Arm
アーム
Arm
アーム
Arm
アーム
Arm
スペーサ
Spacer
カバー
Cover
止め具
Clamp
カバー
Cover
パネル部
Panel
アーム
Arm
プラワッシャ
Plastic Washer
アーム
Arm
アーム
Arm
アーム
Arm
QTY.
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
D
24.1 ***
スイッチ
Switch
1
D
24.2 ***
スイッチ
Switch
1
D
25
340N0235C/D
キートップ
Keytop
1
D
26
340N0236B
キートップ
Keytop
1
D
27
340N0233B/C
ボタン
Button
1
D
28.1 350N2777A
カバー
Cover
1
D
28.2 350N2776B
カバー
Cover
1
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
REMARKS
*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
07D
SERIAL NO.
REFER TO
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*3
*1
*3
*1
*3
*1
製品略称参照 /
REFER TO
PRODUCT CODE
電動つかまり棒な
し /Without Grip
Handle Elevation
製品略称参照 /
REFER TO
PRODUCT CODE
電動つかまり棒
あり /With Grip
Handle Elevation
電動つかまり棒
あり /With Grip
Handle Elevation
電動つかまり棒
あり /With Grip
Handle Elevation
電動つかまり棒な
し /Without Grip
Handle Elevation
電動つかまり棒
あり /With Grip
Handle Elevation
SP-25
SP-26
07D
RANK REF.
*1
*2
*3
昇降部（操作パネル、スイッチ）
ELEVATION UNIT（OPERATION PANEL&SWITCH）
PART NO.
PART NAME
QTY.
D
29.1 352N100024
パネル
Panel
1
D
29.2 352N100023
パネル
Panel
1
D
30
340N0234B/C
ボタン
Button
1
C
31
113Y1685A
AWT21A
AWT21A
1
D
E
32
33
350N2778B
346N1347
カバー
補助板
Cover
Auxiliary Plate
1
1
C
34
113Y1725B
AWT21B
AWT21B
1
D
35.1 ***
スイッチ
Switch
1
D
35.2 ***
スイッチ
Switch
1
スペーサ
Spacer
6
E
36
347N2084
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
341N100093
341N100095
341N100097
341N100071A
341N100098
341N100094
341N100096
D
44
898Y100276
E
E
45
46
304S0032
305S0018
アーム
Arm
アーム
Arm
アーム
Arm
アーム
Arm
アーム
Arm
アーム
Arm
アーム
Arm
Kit
キット
（アーム交換キット）(Arm Replacement Kit)
ボルト
Bolt
ナット
Nat
REMARKS
電動つかまり棒
なし /Without Grip
Handle Elevation
電動つかまり棒
あり /With Grip
Handle Elevation
SERIAL NO.
07D
REFER TO
電動つかまり棒
あり /With Grip
Handle Elevation
電動つかまり棒
なし /Without Grip
Handle Elevation
製品略称参照 /
REFER TO
PRODUCT CODE
for Japan
製品略称参照 /
REFER TO
PRODUCT CODE
other than Japan
電動つかまり棒
あり /With Grip
Handle Elevation
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
1
*2
2
2
昇降部（操作パネル、スイッチ）
ELEVATION UNIT（OPERATION PANEL&SWITCH）
U-Nat
*2
*2
#21263 以前の右側取付け時
In case the panel is on the right side of the equipment of #21263 or earlier.
#21263 以前の左側取付け時と #21264-24999, #25221 以降
In case the panel is on the left side of the equipment of #21263 or earlier, or #21264-24999, #25221 or later.
在庫がない場合は、REF.44 で交換
Replace with Ref.44 if there is no stock.
012-201-09C
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
SP-26
SP-27
07E
管球昇降連動／オプション
X RAYTUBE ELEVATION INTERLOCK/OPTION
管球昇降連動／オプション
X RAY TUBE ELEVATION INTERLOCK/OPTION
RANK REF.
012-201-09C
PART NO.
PART NAME
QTY.
C
7.1 112Y0007
ポテンショメータ
Potentiometer
1
C
7.2 112Y0008A
ポテンショメータ
Potentiometer
1
C
7.3 112Y0009A
ポテンショメータ
Potentiometer
1
C
7.4 112Y0010
ポテンショメータ
Potentiometer
1
Shaft
Hexagon Socket
Setscrew
Spur Gear
1
REMARKS
製品略称参照 /
REFER TO
PRODUCT CODE
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION/
5k Ω for TOSHIBA
OPTION/
2k Ω for HITACHI
OPTION/
1k Ω for
SHIMADZU
OPTION/
10k Ω for PHILIPS
OPTION
2
OPTION
1
OPTION
D
1
***
キット
Kit
1
D
D
D
D
E
2
3
4
5
6
327N1107501
320N0025B
327N0205
322SF237
356N9412
平歯車
軸継手
平歯車
軸受
ブラケット
Spur Gear
Coupling
Spur Gear
Bearing
Bracket
1
1
1
2
1
D
8
319N3956
軸
D
9
303S0041
六角穴付止ねじ
D
10
327N1102503A 平歯車
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
07E
SERIAL NO.
REFER TO
SP-27
SP-28
08
制御部
CONTROLLER UNIT
制御部
CONTROLLER UNIT
RANK REF.
PART NO.
CR
1 113Y1595G/H
CR
2 113Y1672E/F
CR
3.1 113Y1717
PART NAME
CPS21A
SND21A
ATX Board
CR
3.2 113Y100088
ATX ボード
ATX Board
C
C
C
E
E
E
CR
D
A
D
E
E
E
E
E
E
D
E
D
E
E
C
E
D
C
E
E
E
E
E
C
D
E
CR
E
D
D
D
D
E
E
D
4.1
4.2
4.3
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13.1
13.2
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42.1
メモリボード
メモリボード
メモリボード
ブラケット
ブラケット
ブラケット
PAT21A
ルーバ
エアフィルタ
カバー
銘板
ブラケット
ブラケット
スペーサ
台
座金
電動ファン
ガード
コードクランプ
ブラケット
ブラケット
TLB21A
ブラケット
記憶素子
CFI21A
スペーサ
ブラケット
台
ブラケット
スペーサ
NFB21A
カバー
ブラケット
電源部
ブラケット
テープ
テープ
カバー
ちょうボルト
ブラケット
ブラケット
ブッシュ
ROM/RAM
Memory Board
Memory Board
Bracket
Bracket
Bracket
PAT21A
Louver
Air Filter
Cover
Label
Bracket
Bracket
Spacer
Base
Washer
Motor Fan
Guard
Clamp
Bracket
Bracket
TLB21A
Bracket
Memory Card
CFI21A
Spacer
Bracket
Spacer
Bracket
Spacer
NFB21A
Cover
Bracket
Power Supply
Bracket
Tape
Tape
Cover
Wing Bolt
Bracket
Bracket
Bushing
ブッシュ
Bushing
D
012-201-09C
CPS21A
SND21A
ATX ボード
102S5929
102S5550
113S0185B
356N9393A
356N9385D
356Y100315
113Y1670F
345N1683/A/B
376N0238
350N2797A/B
405N100246
356Y0298
356N9394A
347S0896
357N1490D
309S0158
119Y0059A
364S0003
316S1240
356N9400A
356N9401
113Y1674A
356Y100458
114N0021
113Y1676B
347S0035
356Y0297A
357S0016
356N9391
347S0417
113Y1722A
350N2833A
356N9383A
813Y0146
356N9417
382N1731
382N1625B
350N2796
304S0023
356N9395
356N9396
318S1239
42.2 318S1256
QTY.
REMARKS
1
1
1 FB2M 基板 *6
FB5UM Board
1
(Mather Board)
1 FB2M 用
1 FB2M 用
1 FB5UM 用
1
1
1
1
4
4
1
1
1
1
4
1
4
2 FANK1-2
2
3
1
1
1 OPTION
1 OPTION
1 128MB *7
1
3
1
4
1
4
1
1
1
1 Alpha 600 *5
1
3
2
1
2
1
1
2
REF.42.1 代替品 /
2 Substiution of
REF.42.1.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
SERIAL NO.
08
REFER TO
*3
*4
*3
*3
*4
*3
*3
*1
*1
*1
*1
SP-28
SP-29
08
RANK REF.
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
制御部
CONTROLLER UNIT
PART NO.
制御部
CONTROLLER UNIT
PART NAME
QTY.
AT
43
137S1053
ヒューズ
FUSE
1
AT
44
137S1279
ヒューズ
FUSE
2
AT
45
137S1277
ヒューズ
FUSE
5
AT
46
137S1280
ヒューズ
FUSE
3
AT
47
137S1278
ヒューズ
FUSE
3
AT
48
137S1276
ヒューズ
FUSE
1
AT
49
137S1178
ヒューズ
FUSE
1
AT
50
137S1178
ヒューズ
FUSE
2
CR
E
E
E
E
51
52
53
54
55
56
898Y1345
813Y0158
356N10824
347S0873
356N10773
356N10766A
898Y100045
Power Supply Kit
Power Supply
Bracket
Spacer
Bracket
Bracket
FM5UM First
replacement kit
1
1
1
1
1
1
57
電源キット
電源部
ブラケット
スペーサ
ブラケット
ブラケット
FM5UM
初回交換キット
REMARKS
250V/15A
for PAT21A
48V/4.0A
for PAT21A
48V/2.0A
for PAT21A
48V/5.0A
for PAT21A
48V/3.2A
for PAT21A
48V/1.6A
for PAT21A
48V/1.0A
for PAT21A
48V/1.0A
for SND21A
Alpha 450
SERIAL NO.
08
REFER TO
*2
*2
*2
1
#21079 or earlier, #21083, #21084, #21089, #25001-25129
#21080-21082, #21085-21088, #21090-24999, #25130 or later
#21104 or earlier, #21113, #21116, #21120 (CR-IR 364UM: #30083 or earlier, #35001-35004)
#21105-21112, #21114, #21115-21119, #21121-24999, #25155 or later (CR-IR 364UM: #30084-34999, #35004 or later)
REF.34（電源部：Alpha 600）から REF.52（電源部：Alpha 450）に交換する場合は、REF.51（電源キット）で交換すること。
Replace with REF.51 (Power Supply Kit) if replacing REF.34 (Power Supply Unit: Alpha 600) with
REF.52 (Power Supply Unit: Alpha 450).
REF.3.1（FB2M）から REF.3.2（FB5UM）へ交換する場合は、REF.57（初回交換キット）での交換が必要。
Replace with REF.57 (First Replacement Kit) if replacing REF.3.1 (FB2M) with REF.3.2 (FB5UM).
RU APL ソフトウェアは Ver.1.14 以降が必須。
RU APL software version 1.14 or later is necessary.
012-201-09C
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
SP-29
SP-30
09A
撮影補助具（つかまり棒）／オプション 1
EXPOSURE AID (GRIP HANDLE) / OPTION 1
撮影補助具（つかまり棒）／オプション 1
EXPOSURE AID (GRIP HANDLE) / OPTION 1
RANK REF.
PART NO.
D
1 340Y0072
D
2 340Y0073
E
3 347N1905
E
4 347N1906
D
5 317N1076
*1
*2
012-201-09C
DR
6.1 831Y0024B/D
DR
6.2 831Y0032D
D
D
D
7 118YA185/A
8.1 323N0036A
8.2 323S3390
D
9
E
E
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
10
11
12
13
14.1
14.2
15.1
15.2
16.1
16.2
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
PART NAME
Handle
Handle
Spacer
Spacer
Cap
Grip Handle
昇降部
Elevation
Grip Handle
昇降部
Elevation
モータアセンブリ Motor Assembly
タイミングベルト Timing Belt
タイミングベルト Timing Belt
取手
取手
スペーサ
スペーサ
キャップ
QTY.
REMARKS
1 Left
1 Right
2
2
2
SERIAL NO.
1
*1
1
*2
1
1
1
***
電動つかまり棒
Motor-driven grip
handle
1
405N3115
405N3114
128S0257
128S0257
340Y0046A
898Y1082A
324N3201
324N3210
324N3202
324N3211
347N1816/A
350N2795
350N3441
332N100036
350N100321
332N100037
350N3394
341Y100060
銘板
銘板
マイクロスイッチ
マイクロスイッチ
取手
取手キット
タイミングベルト車
タイミングベルト車
タイミングベルト車
タイミングベルト車
スペーサ
カバー
カバー
ストッパ
カバー
ストッパ
カバー
アーム
Label
Label
Micro-switch
Micro-switch
Handle
Handle Kit
Timing Belt Pulley
Timing Belt Pulley
Timing Belt Pulley
Timing Belt Pulley
Spacer
Cover
Cover
Stopper
Cover
Stopper
Cover
Arm
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
09A
REFER TO
MJ2
*1
*2
製品略称参照 /
REFER TO
PRODUCT CODE
MSH6
MSH7
for Japan
except for Japan
*1
*2
*1
*2
*1
*2
*2
#21205 or earlier, #25001 - 25170
#21206-24999, #25171 or later
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
SP-30
SP-31
09B.a
撮影補助具（生殖腺防護具）／オプション 2-1
EXPOSURE AID (GONAD PROTECTOR) / OPTION 2-1
Other than Japan
Distinguishing the gonad protector
Appearance of the gonad protector Type A and Type B is similar, but their
parts do not have compatibility.
You can distinguish the installed gonad protector by checking whether or
not there is handle. (See the picture.)
09B.a
撮影補助具（生殖腺防護具）／オプション 2-1
EXPOSURE AID(GONAD PROTECTER)/OPTION 2-1
RANK REF.
PART NO.
E
1 898Y100093
E
2 898Y100094
E
3 898Y100095
E
4 309S0114
E
5 309N0115
E
E
E
D
6
7
8
9
309N0145
364N0090
405N3109
405N100203
PART NAME
キット（1 軸）
Kit
キット（2 軸）
Kit
キット（3 軸）
Kit
さらばね座金
Conical Spring Washer
座金
Washer
座金
ガード
銘板
銘板
Washer
Guard
Label
Label
QTY.
REMARKS
1
1
1
4
4 Φ20xΦ8.1 t=1
8
1
1
1
SERIAL NO.
REFER TO
*1
*1
*1
Φ20xΦ8.1 t=1
*1: Torque of the shaft assembly of REF.1, 2, 3 is adjusted, so the parts cannnot be replaced individually.
*2: Part without part number cannot be replaced.
If any replacement is necessary, replace with gonad protector type B. (898Y100302)
012-201-09C
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
SP-31
SP-32
09B.b
撮影補助具（生殖腺防護具）／オプション 2-2
EXPOSURE AID (GONAD PROTECTOR) / OPTION 2-2
生殖腺防護具判断方法
生殖腺防護具のタイプ A とタイプ B の外観は類似しているが、使用している
部品に互換性がない。
装置に取付けられている生殖腺防護具を判断するには、ハンドルの有無で判
断する。（イラスト参照）
Distinguishing the gonad protector
Appearance of the gonad protector Type A and Type B is similar, but their
parts do not have compatibility.
You can distinguish the installed gonad protector by checking whether or
not there is handle. (See the picture.)
撮影補助具（生殖腺防護具）／オプション 2-2
EXPOSURE AID(GONAD PROTECTER)/OPTION 2-2
RANK REF.
PART NO.
D
1 350Y100707
D
2 388N100295A
D
3 350N100840A
E
4 308S8130616
E
5 356Y100534A
E
6 308S8130420
E
7 341Y100070B
E
8 316N100116
E
9 347N100246
D
10 317S1055
D
11 350N100839A
D
12 319N100700
D
13 350N100837A
E
14 341Y100071
E
15 364N0090
D
16 317N1058
D
17 405N3109
D
18 405N100203
E
012-201-09C
19
898Y100302
PART NAME
カバー
Cover
引張りコイルばね Extension Coil Spring
カバー
Cover
特殊ねじ
Special Screw
ブラケット
Bracket
特殊ねじ
Special Screw
アーム
Arm
コードストッパ Code Stopper
スペーサ
Spacer
キャップ
Cap
カバー
Cover
軸
Shaft
カバー
Cover
アーム
Arm
ガード
Guard
キャップ
Cap
銘板
Label
銘板
Label
Kit
キット
(Replacement kit)
（交換キット）
QTY.
REMARKS
1
2
1
4 BQ6x16
1
6 BQ4x20
1
1
1
2
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
09B.b
SERIAL NO.
REFER TO
1
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
SP-32
SP-33
09C
撮影補助具（カセッテホルダー）／オプション 3
EXPOSURE AID (CASSETTE HOLDER) / OPTION 3
撮影補助具（カセッテホルダー）／オプション 3
EXPOSURE AID (CASSETTE HOLDER) / OPTION 3
RANK REF.
PART NO.
E
1 346N1357A
D
2 340S0020
D
3 350N2828B
E
4 346N1355B
E
5 346N1356A
E
6 346N1351
D
7 314N0071A
D
8 350N2812B
E
9 356N9431B
E
10 405N3101
E
11 316S3136
E
12 356N9432A
E
13 405N3448
E
14 346N1350A
E
012-201-09C
15
301S7000307
補助板
取手
カバー
補助板
補助板
補助板
蝶番
カバー
ブラケット
銘板
キャッチ
ブラケット
銘板
補助板
十字穴付
サラ小ネジ
PART NAME
Auxiliary Plate
Handle
Cover
Auxiliary Plate
Auxiliary Plate
Auxiliary Plate
Hinge
Cover
Bracket
Label
Catch
Bracket
Label
Auxiliary Plate
Cross-recessed
flat-head screw
QTY.
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
3
2
12
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
REMARKS
09C
SERIAL NO.
REFER TO
S3x7
SP-33
SP-34
09D
国内のみ /Japan
012-201-09C
撮影補助具（患者補助ベルト）／オプション 4
EXPOSURE AID (PATIENT AID BELT) / OPTION 4
撮影補助具（患者補助ベルト）／オプション 4
EXPOSURE AID (PATIENT AID BELT) / OPTION 4
RANK REF.
PART NO.
E
1 347N1971
D
2 309S0038
E
3 319N4473
E
4 323N0052
D
5 347S0220
D
6 350N3303
E
7 356N10730/A
PART NAME
スペーサ
Spacer
プラワッシャ
Plastic Washer
軸
Shaft
ベルト
Belt
スペーサ
Spacer
カバー
Cover
ブラケット
Bracket
QTY.
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
E
8
323Y0006
ベルト
Belt
1
E
D
9
10
11
***
323N0048
405N3117
ベルト
銘板
Belt
Label
1
1
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
REMARKS
09D
SERIAL NO.
REFER TO
REF.4,10 を含まない
/ without REF.4,10
SP-34
SP-35
09E
撮影補助具（長尺カセッテホルダー）／オプション 5
EXPOSURE AID (LONG CASSETTE HOLDER) / OPTION 5
撮影補助具（長尺カセッテホルダー）／オプション 5
EXPOSURE AID (LONG CASSETTE HOLDER) / OPTION 5
RANK REF.
PART NO.
E
1 319N4453
E
2 332N0690
E
3 335N0100
E
4 341N1216
E
5 341N1217
E
6 350N3289
E
7 350N3292
E
8 350N3295
E
9 355N0814A
E
10 355N0815A
E
11 356N10698
E
12 356N10699
E
13 356Y0472
E
14 356Y0473A
E
15 356Y0474A
E
16 358N0225A
E
17 360N0570
E
18 360N0571
E
19 363N2824
D
20 382N1838
012-201-09C
D
21
388N1255
D
D
E
D
D
E
E
E
E
E
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
405N3422
405N3423
308S0508
316N4008A/B
316N4009A/B
322SY064
340S0168
347S0860
367S0027
405N3104
PART NAME
シャフト
Shaft
ストッパ
Stopper
フランジ
Flange
アーム
Arm
アーム
Arm
カバー
Cover
カバー
Cover
カバー
Cover
フレーム
Frame
フレーム
Frame
ブラケット
Bracket
ブラケット
Bracket
ブラケット
Bracket
ブラケット
Bracket
ブラケット
Bracket
ボックス
Box
ハウジング
Housing
ハウジング
Housing
ガイド
Guide
テープ
Tape
Compression Coil
圧縮コイルばね
Spring
表示銘板
Label
表示銘板
Label
特殊ねじ
Special Screw
ファスナ
Fastener
ファスナ
Fastener
すべり軸受
Plain Bearing
取手
Handle
スペーサ
Spacer
ゴム足
Rubber foot
銘板
Label
QTY.
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
3
REMARKS
09E
SERIAL NO.
REFER TO
2
2
2
1
4
3
2
1
1
1
2
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
SP-35
SP-36
09F
撮影補助具（補助つかまり棒）／オプション 6
EXPOSURE AID (AUXILIARY GRID HANDLE) / OPTION 6
撮影補助具（補助つかまり棒）／オプション 6
EXPOSURE AID (AUXILIARY GRID HANDLE) / OPTION 6
RANK REF.
PART NO.
350N3372A
E
1
E
2 342N0168
D
3 340Y0067B
D
4 386N1397B
D
5 386N1396A
E
6 347N2134
D
7 386N1393
D
8 386N1394
D
9 362Y0126A
D
10 317N1075/A
E
11 350N3368A
E
12 322SP212
E
13 319N4510
D
14 388S2155
E
15 356Y0631
D
16 386N1395
012-201-09C
D
17 356Y0633B
E
D
E
D
D
18
19
20
21
22
328N0065A
388N3121
319N4509
405N3701
405N3702
PART NAME
カバー
Cover
レバー
Lever
取手アセンブリ Handle Assembly
緩衝機材
Shock Absorber
緩衝機材
Shock Absorber
スペーサ
Spacer
緩衝機材
Shock Absorber
緩衝機材
Shock Absorber
受
Support
キャップ
Cap
カバー
Cover
ころがり軸受
Ball Bearing
軸
Shaft
引張りコイルばね Extension Coil Spring
ブラケット
Bracket
緩衝機材
Shock Absorber
ブラケットアセン
Bracket Assembly
ブリ
爪
Latch
ねじりコイルばね Torsion coil spring
軸
Shaft
銘板
Label
銘板
Label
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
4
1
2
1
1
REMARKS
SERIAL NO.
09F
REFER TO
1
1
1
2
2
1
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
SP-36
SP-37
10
フォトタイマ／オプション
PHOTO-TIMER/OPTION
フォトタイマ／オプション
PHOTO-TIMER/OPTION
RANK REF.
PART NO.
E
1 347N1923
E
2 401N0870A
E
3 347N1922
E
4.1 401N0853
E
012-201-09C
4.2 401N0879A
スペーサ
押え板
スペーサ
押え板
PART NAME
Spacer
Clamp
Spacer
Clamp
押え板
Clamp
E
5
347N1811
スペーサ
Spacer
E
6
357Y100128
台
Base
E
7
356N9461C
ブラケット
Bracket
E
8
350N2846B
カバー
Cover
E
9
346N1381
補助板
Auxiliary Plate
E
10 350N2847A
カバー
Cover
E
11 356N9517A
ブラケット
Bracket
E
12 350N2858A
カバー
Cover
E
13 356N9586A
ブラケット
Bracket
E
14 350N2842A
カバー
Cover
E
15 356N9504B
ブラケット
Bracket
E
16 347S0364
スペーサ
Spacer
E
17 401N0886
押え板
Clamp
E
18 401N0896
押え板
Clamp
E
19 401N0845
押え板
Clamp
E
20 401N0847
押え板
Clamp
E
21 401N0892A
押え板
Clamp
D
22 386N1289
緩衝機材
Shock Absorber
QTY.
REMARKS
1 COMET
1 COMET
2 COMET
5
日立イオン
5 チャンバ /HITACHI
IonChamber
5
東芝 1CH/2CH
1 /TOSHIBA 1CH/
2CH
東芝 1CH/
1
TOSHIBA 1CH
東芝 1CH/
1
TOSHIBA 1CH
日立イオン
チャンバ ,
1 COMMET/HITACHI
IonChamber
/COMET
東芝 2CH/
1
TOSHIBA 2CH
東芝 2CH/
1
TOSHIBA 2CH
東芝半導体
1 /TOSHIBA
Semiconductor
東芝半導体
1 /TOSHIBA
Semiconductor
日立イオン
1 チャンバ /HITACHI
IonChamber
日立イオン
1 チャンバ /HITACHI
IonChamber
日立イオン
3 チャンバ /HITACHI
IonChamber
シーメンス /
2 Siemens
IonChamber
シーメンス /
2 Siemens
IonChamber
フィリップス /
2
Philips IonChamber
フィリップス /
2
Philips IonChamber
フィリップス /
1
Philips IonChamber
患者補助ベルトが
ある場合 /
2 Required for
Patient assistance
belt.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
SERIAL NO.
10
REFER TO
SP-37
SP-38
11
グリッド／オプション
GRID/OPTION
グリッド／オプション
GRID/OPTION
RANK REF.
PART NO.
D
1 340N0240A
E
2 347N1904
E
3 405N3105
E
4 405N3104
012-201-09C
取手
スペーサ
銘板
銘板
PART NAME
Handle
Spacer
Label
Label
QTY.
1
1
1
1
D
5
***
グリッド
Grid
1
E
E
6
7
405N3448
405S0179
銘板
銘板
Label
Label
1
1
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
REMARKS
SERIAL NO.
11
REFER TO
製品略称参照 /
REFER TO
PRODUCT CODE
WEEE
SP-38
SP-39
12
ケーブル
CABLE
RANK REF.
PART NO.
E
1 136N0473A
E
2 136N0474B
E
3 136N0405D
E
4 136N0406D
E
5 136N0407B
E
6 136N0408D
E
7 136N0409D
E
8 136N0468A
E
9 136N0426C
E
10 136N0428A
E
11 136Y8647A/B
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22.1
22.2
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
136Y8653F
***
136Y8660C
136Y8662B/C
136Y8663B
136Y8664C
136Y8665C
136Y8667A
136Y8668C
136Y8669C
136Y8670C
136Y9484A
136Y8671G/H
136Y8672C/D/E
136Y8673A/C/D
136Y8675B/C
136Y8676C/D
136Y8678D
136Y8680B/C
136Y8682A/B
136Y8689B
136Y8692D
136Y8703B
136Y8703B
136Y8704C
***
***
***
136Y8714B/C
012-201-09C
ケーブル
CABLE
ケーブル
ケーブル
ケーブル
ケーブル
ケーブル
ケーブル
ケーブル
ケーブル
ケーブル
ケーブル
ケーブル
PART NAME
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
ケーブル
Cable
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ケーブル
ケーブル
ケーブル
ケーブル
ケーブル
ケーブル
ケーブル
ケーブル
ケーブル
ケーブル
ケーブル
ケーブル
ケーブル
ケーブル
ケーブル
ケーブル
ケーブル
ケーブル
ケーブル
ケーブル
ケーブル
ケーブル
ケーブル
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
ケーブル
Cable
1
REMARKS
SERIAL NO.
for 813Y0146
(Alpha 600)
for FB2M
for FB2M
REFER TO
RANK REF.
PART NO.
E
40 136Y9487A
E
41 136Y8722A
E
42 136Y8725B/C
E
43 136Y8731F
E
44 136Y8732C/D
E
45 136Y8733E
E
46 136Y8734B/C
E
47 136Y8735B
E
48 136Y8803E
E
49 136Y8808D
E
50 136Y8809B/C
E
51 136Y8810D
*1
*1
*1
*2
ケーブル
ケーブル
ケーブル
ケーブル
ケーブル
ケーブル
ケーブル
ケーブル
ケーブル
ケーブル
ケーブル
ケーブル
PART NAME
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
E
52
136Y8815J/K
ケーブル
Cable
1
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
136Y8816D
136Y8817C
136Y8818E
136Y8819D
136Y8820B
136Y8833B
136Y8834B
***
***
136Y8703B
136Y9129B
136Y5031A
136Y100261A
136Y100262A
136Y8849A
ケーブル
ケーブル
ケーブル
ケーブル
ケーブル
ケーブル
ケーブル
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
E
E
E
E
E
E
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
ケーブル
ケーブル
ケーブル
ケーブル
ケーブル
ケーブル
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
8
2
1
1
1
3
E
68
136Y9482A
ケーブル
Cable
1
REMARKS
for FM5UM
for FM5UM
SERIAL NO.
12
REFER TO
*2
*2
for 813Y0158
(Alpha 450)
#21104 or earlier, #21113, #21116, #211120. (CR-IR 364UM: #30083 or earlier, #35001-35004)
#21105-21112, #21114, #21115-21119, #21121-24999, #25155 or later. (CR-IR 364UM: #30084-34999, #35004 or later)
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
SP-39
SP-40
回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
13
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
To Controller Unit (K)
135S0712
Outside the machine
A
J-TB2
To the Distribution Switchboard
135N0016
136Y8681
1φ-3W External cable 1φ-2W
J-TB1
L1
.
.
N
.
.
L2
.
.
FG
外部ケーブル
AC200-240V_L1
AC200-240V_N
AC200-240V_L2
FG
.
128S0909
NFB１
136Y8731
.
.
LOAD
LINE
.
.
LOAD
.
.
.
.
.
.
AC_Line
AC_Neutral
AC_FrameGrand
136Y8671
AC200_CTRL 4
NFB21A-CN1/K-FG
A
Outside the machine
FG
7.5A
LINE
.
機外
136Y8731
AC200_ELV
J-TB3
AC_Line
AC_Neutral
FG
3
To Transformer Primary Side Terminal Block
B
3
Operation Panel
パネル部
136Y8735
Panel_Power
ELV21A-CN12
+5V
GND
+12V
GND
Pillar of the Elevation Unit
昇降部柱
.
.
.
1
2
3
4
CN1
CN3
LCN21A
113Ｙ1686
.
External cable
136Y8680
.
.
.
K-CN6
1
14
2
15
3
16
4
17
5
18
6
19
7
20
8
21
9
22
10
23
11
24
12
25
13
D
E
Signal name
POS0+
POS0POS1+
POS1BUZ1+
BUZ1DISP+
DISPBLON+
BLONGND
GND
Ready+
ReadyCall+
CallBUZ2+
BUZ2GND
GND
PWR-SW1
PWR-SW2
+5V
+5VSB
GND
LCN21A-CN2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1 CN2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
PowerOn
21
Switch
22
23
24
25
26
CN4
4 3 2 1
136N0404
RGBsig
ATX-CN18
F
6
.
External cable
6
136Y8689
.
GND
POS0
POS1
POS2
DISP
BLON
GND
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
+5V
GND
GND
+12VD
GND
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
+5V
Call
GND
Ready
+5VSB
.
.
.
.
.
.
1
2
3
4
5
CN1
.
LED21A
.
.
113Y1684
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
外部ケーブル
.
.
.
136Y8725
.
操作パネル
固定アーム
G
.
操作パネル
ユニット
Protective Earth
保護接地線
1
2
3
4
5
CN1
.
.
昇降部側板
C
.
.
136Y8834
845Y0098
.
FG line
昇降部柱
LCD/タッチパネル
.
外部ケーブル
Pillar of the Elevation Unit
LCD/Touch panel
.
.
136Y8676
CN2
.
.
External cable
RS232Csig
ATX-CN17
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1 CN4
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Operation Panel
←→ ATX-CN18
9
-CN4
Signal name № Signal name
10
RED
19
DDC-VDD
11
GREEN
2 10 GND
12
BLUE
3 11 NC
13
NC
4 12 DDC-SDA
14
GND
5 13 HSYNC
GND
6 14 VSYNC
15
GND
7 15 DDC-SCL
GND
8
D
E
.
C
外部ケーブル
.
Panel_LCDsig
K-CN6
.
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
B
845Y0097
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CN5
1
2
3
CN3
ATX
-CN17 Signal name
1
DCD2#
2
RXD2
3
TXD2
4
DTR2#
5
GND
6
DSR2#
7
RTS2#
8
NC
9
NC
.
F
LCD
-CN5
7
3
2
6
5
4
1
8
9
操作パネル
背面カバー
G
CN9
LCD Contrast Adjustment Board
LCDコントラスト調整基板
.
.
VR1 136Y8693
VR2
VR3
+12V
+12V
Ready
Call
.
.
.
.
1
2
3
4
LED21C
CN2 1
2
113Y1711
3
4
Call/Ready indicator lamp
CN1
Call/Ready
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
136Y8692
H
1
2
3
Ready
Ready
Call
Call
機種
5119
ユニット -
名称
回路図
補助名称 ATLAS
コード
.
Z22Y0005119
H
05
Rev.
頁
表示ランプ
2
12
1
012-201-09C
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
11
SP-40
SP-41
13
回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
to the Exposure Unit rear cover
Outside the machine
機外
B
Elevation Switch(Option)
昇降スイッチ（オプション）
Elevation Switch 昇降スイッチ
128Y0307（withoutGriphandle）
（つかまり棒あり）
128Y0308（withGriphandle）
（つかまり棒なし）
CN1
Right
AWT21A
C
113Ｙ1685
Elevation Switch(Option)
昇降スイッチ（オプション）
1
Left
2
3
AWT21A
4
5
113Ｙ1685
6
7
Elevation
8
Switch
9
(Option)
10
昇降
1
1
SWパネル
（オプション） 12
13
14
CN1
D
.
.
.
.
.
.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
.
GRID_OPEN-H
GRID_OPEN-L
INTERLOCK_SW1H
INTERLOCK_SW1L
INTERLOCK_SW2H
INTERLOCK_SW2L
INTERLOCK_SW3H
INTERLOCK_SW3L
INTERLOCK_SW4H
INTERLOCK_SW4L
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
AWT21A基板
.
昇降部側板
.
.
.
.
5 PS_ON/Potentiometer
136Y8660
昇降部側板
J-CN3
1
.
.
6
.
.
2
.
.
7
.
.
3
.
.
8
.
.
4
.
.
9
.
.
5
136Y8675
K-CN5
.
.
J-CN4
1
.
.
2
.
.
3
136Y8733
.
.
.
.
1 CN6
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
READER_CW
READER_CCW
136Y8732
.
.
READER_BRK-L
C OM
.
.
.
READER_BRK-N
.
.
.
.
.
.
5VSB
PS_ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
READUP_LIM_H
READUP_LIM_L
READDN_LIM_H
READDN_LIM_L
HOLDUP_LIM_H
HOLDUP_LIM_L
HOLDDN_LIM_H
HOLDDN_LIM_L
NEARNESS_H
NEARNESS_L
READDN_SES_H
READDN_SES_L
.
136Y8731
CN3
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1 CN13
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
.
.
.
NC
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2
3
IN200V
IN220V
4
IN230V
5
IN240V
OUT_N1
7
OUT_L2
8
OUT_N2
2
6
.
.
HAND_CW
HAND_CCW
HAND_BRK-L
9
.
NC
.
.
.
C OM
.
.
1
2
CN11
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN12
.
.
.
J-CN5
136Y8732 AC 15V
1
.
.
AC 15V
2
.
.
3
.
.
4
.
.
AC100V-L
AC100V-N
.
.
HOLD_BRK-N
WHT CCW
.
BLK
.
RED CW
CN8
1
2
3
4
.
.
.
FOOT_UP-H
FOOT_UP-L
FOOT_DOWN-H
FOOT_DOWN-L
Left
Right
J-CN11
1
.
.
8
.
.
2
.
.
9
.
.
3
.
.
10
.
.
4
.
.
11
.
.
5
.
.
12
.
.
6
.
.
13
.
.
7
.
.
14
J-CN13
1
.
.
8
.
.
2
.
.
9
.
.
3
.
.
10
.
.
4
.
.
11
.
.
5
.
.
12
.
.
6
.
.
13
.
.
7
.
.
14
.
SOLJ2
ORN
ORN
.
.
.
Foot Switch (Option)
128Y0266 Japan 国内
フットスイッチ（オプション）128Y0270 Overseas 海外
Right
CN5
1
4
2
5
3
6
.
NO
COM
.
.
F
Foot Switch (Option)
Outside the machine
フットスイッチ（オプション）
Left
機外
NO
COM
.
.
NO
COM
.
.
.
G
136Y8733
.
.
EMERGENCY-2A
EMERGENCY-2B
.
Emergency Stop Switch (right)
非常停止スイッチ
.
Emergency Stop Switch (left)
非常停止スイッチ
.
.
.
CN1
128S0664
.
ESJ2
.
E
NO
COM
.
.
1
2
Grip handle elevation drive motor
つかまり棒昇降モータ
ESJ1
.
.
MJ2
.
.
EMERGENCY-1A
EMERGENCY-1B
1
2
D
J-CN10
1
.
.
4
.
.
2
.
.
5
.
.
3
.
.
6
136Y8732
136Y8733
CN4
OUT_L1
COM MSH6
.
Grip handle upper limit
つかまり棒上限
COM MSH7
.
Grip handle lower limit
つかまり棒下限
.
108N0042
IN_COM
NC
.
.
.
C
831Y0024
Auto Grip handle(Option)
J-CN8
1
.
2
.
3
.
4
B
.
NC
.
+5V
T1
1
MSJ1
128S0911
Elevation upper limit
昇降上限
MSJ2
COM
128S0911
.
Elevation lower limit
昇降下限
COM MSJ3
.
128S0911
Pause
一時停止
COM
.
.
.
.
Clutch
内臓クラッチ
136Y8733
.
.
J-TB3
SOLJ1
.
.
Potentiometer
112Y0007
112Y0008
112Y0009
136Y8735
Neutral
L in e
MJ1
.
J-CN7(MJ1)
J-CN7
1
136Y8647 1
.
.
.
.
4
4
.
.
.
.
2
2
60W 50Ω .
.
.
.
5
5
.
.
.
.
3
3
.
.
.
.
6
6
.
.
GND
GND
LCN21A-CN1
012-201-09C
.
113Y1665
.
.
.
J-CN12-1 136Y8733
CPL_LED1_+12V
1
.
.
CPL_LED2_+12V
2
.
.
INT_LED_+12V
3
.
.
READER_UP
4
.
.
READER_DOWN
5
.
.
HAND_UP
6
.
.
HAND_DOWN
7
.
.
INTERLOCK_LED
8
.
.
COUPLING_SW
9
.
.
COUPLING_LED
10
.
.
+5V
11
.
.
+5V
12
.
.
+5V
13
.
.
+5V
14
G
1
.
ELV21A
CN7
.
H
.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
NC
+12V
NFB/J-TB2
.
CN2
A
Elevation drive motor
撮影部昇降モーター
.
.
AC200_ELV
.
.
.
.
.
AWT21A基板
2
.
118YA179
RED CW
.
WHT CCW
.
BLK
.
E
2 Panel_Power
.
.
136Y8733
J-CN12
CPL_LED1_+12V
1
.
.
CPL_LED2_+12V
2
.
.
INT_LED_+12V
3
.
.
READER_UP
4
.
.
READER_DOWN
5
.
.
HAND_UP
6
.
.
HAND_DOWN
7
.
.
INTERLOCK_LED
8
.
.
COUPLING_SW
9
.
.
COUPLING_LED
10
.
.
+5V
11
.
.
+5V
12
.
.
+5V
13
.
.
+5V
14
.
.
F
1 CN9
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
.
.
136Y8660
11
10
9
8
7
136Y8733
J-CN2
1
.
.
2
.
.
3
.
.
4
.
.
5
.
.
6
.
.
7
.
.
8
.
.
9
.
.
10
.
.
11
.
.
12
.
.
13
.
.
14
.
.
15
136Y8682
8 InterLocks
H-CN3
A
6
5
4
3
2
1
128S0664
機種
5119
ユニット -
名称
回路図
補助名称 ATLAS
コード
Z22Y0005119
H
05
Rev.
頁
.
3
12
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
11
SP-41
SP-42
13
回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
A
A
Power supply unit 813Y0146
電源部
Power supply α600
2
AC200_CTRL
J-TB2
136Y8671
AC_Line
L
External cable
.
外部ケーブル
.
AC_Neutral
N
1
2
3
CN1
CN2
.
1
3
2
4
.
136Y8653
.
.
.
.
.
L
N
E
α600
α600電源 125N0131
136Y8659
SLOT1_CTRL1
.
B
Outside the machine
AC_FrameGrand
機外
FG
FG
NFB21A
Slot1
113Y1722
1
2
3
4
5
6
CNT
5VSB
.
.
.
B
TOG
.
.
α_Slot1
5
.
PAT21A-CN4
+6V
+6V_GND
+6V
+6V_GND
SLOT1
.
.
.
.
C
C
Slot2
+24V1
+24V1_GND
+24V1
+24V1_GND
SLOT2
.
.
.
.
α_Slot1.4
5
PAT21A-CN2
D
Slot3
D
+24V2
+24V2_GND
+24V2
+24V2_GND
SLOT3
.
.
.
.
Slot4
+5V
+5V_GND
+5V
+5V_GND
SLOT4
.
.
.
E
E
.
Slot5
+18V
+18V_GND
+9V
+9V_GND
SLOT5
.
.
.
.
F
F
α_Slot2.3.5.6
5
PAT21A-CN1
G
G
H
機種
5119
ユニット -
名称
回路図
補助名称 ATLAS
コード
Z22Y0005119
H
Rev.
05
頁
4
12
1
012-201-09C
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
11
SP-42
SP-43
13
回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
��������
�A
� �������
����������
���
����
�
�
�
���
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
���
���
��
��
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
���������
�������������
���������
�������������
�������������������������������������
�����������
��������������
�����
������
��
��������
�
�
��
�
�
��������
��
�
�
��
�
�
���
B
� ���������
�������
���
�������
���
�������
���
�������
���
�������
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
���
��
��
��
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
��
����
� �������������
���������
�����
���������
�����
���������
�����
���������
�����
���������
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
D
�
���
�������
����
��������
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
��������
������������
���������
�������������
��������
�
�
�
�
�
�
�����������
���������������
�����������
���������������
�
�
C
�
��
� ���
��
�
��
�
��
�
��
�
��
�
��
�
��
�
��
�
��
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�������������
���������
��������
��
��
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
F
��������������������
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
��
��
��
��
���
��
��
��
��
� ����������
� �������
� ���������������
�
�
�
�
�
�
��
��
����
�
�
�
�
�
�
���������
�������������
���������
�������������
�
�
������
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
��������
�
�
�����
��������
�
�
�����
��������
�
�
����
����
�
H
�
�
��������
�
�
�
C
�
�
����
�
�
��
����
����������������������
�
�
�
�
�
���� ��������
����
����
�
�
�
������
�����
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
����
���������������������
����
�
��������������� �
����������
���
���
��
��
��
��
�
�
���������
�����
���
�
�
�
�
����� �
����������
�������������������
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
��
��
��
��
��������
���������������������������
��������
D
��������
�����
�������������������
�
�
��������������
�
�����
������
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
E
����������
����������
�����������
�����������
�����������
�����������
��������
�
��������
�����
���������
�
��������
���������
�
���������������������������������������
��������
�
�
B
���
��
�������������������
����
�
��
��
��
��
�
�
��
�
�
�
���
�
�������������������
�
�
G
��
��
��
��
�
���
���
��������
�
�
�
A
�
��������������������
����������� � �����������
�����
� �
�����
���
� �
���
���
� �
���
�����
� �
���
����
� ��
�����
����
�� ��
�����
�����
�� ��
���
���
�� ��
���
���
�� ��
���
���
�� ��
���
�
�
����
�
�
�
�
�
�
���
�������
� �����
� ���
� ���
� ���
� ���
� ���
� ���
� ���
� ���
� ���
�� ���
�� ���
�� ���
�� ���
�� ���
�� ���
�� ���
�� ���
�� ���
�� ���
�� ���
�� ���
�� ���
�� ���
�� ���
�� ���
�� ���
�
����������������
�����
�
�
�
�
��������
��������� �
��������
�
�
�
�
��������
�
�
��������
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
������
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
��
�����������������������
�
��������
�
�
��������������������������������������������������
�
�
�
���������������
E
����������
����������
���������
���������
�������
�������
�������
�������
����
����
����
�
�
�
���������������������
����� �
�����
�
�����
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
��
�
������
�
��������������
�
���
���
���
���
� ����������� ����������� �����������
����
����
�
����
����
����
�
����
����
����
�
����
����
����
�
����
����
����
�
����
����
����
�
����
����
����
�
����
����
����
�
����
����
����
�
����
����
�� ����
����
�� ����
����
����
�� ����
����
����
�� ����
����
����
�� ����
����
����
�� ����
����
����
�� ����
����
����
��������������
�����
������������������
���
���
���
�������������������
�������� �
�����
�
�
��
��������������������������������������������������
����������������������
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
F
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
��������
�
��������
����������
�
G
��������
���������������������������
��������
������
��
����
���� �
��������
��
���
���� �����
���
�����������
H
��
����
�
�
��
1
012-201-09C
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
11
SP-43
SP-44
13
回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
PAT21A-CN5
5
ATX_Power
136Y8664
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN41
.
.
A
.
.
.
.
.
.
1
2
3
4
CN5
ATX>> 7
-
17
18
19
20
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
113Y1717
CN2
(DIMM SOCKET0)
B
DIMM
1
Controller Unit rear relay connector
制御部背面中継コネクタ
136N0428
TX+
TXRX+
LAGND
LAGND
RXLAGND
LAGND
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
LAN
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
External cable (network)
ネットワークケーブル
Outside the machine
.
.
A
B
機外
20
External cable
CPU
Celeron
733MHz
FC-PGA
(Serial 1)
102S5556
ATX Board Unit
C
CN17
制御部
814Y0505
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
外部ケーブル
136Y8676
RS232Csig 2
.
Operation Panel CN5
.
.
.
C
.
.
.
.
.
External cable
GND
FANVCC
FAN SENSE
CPU
cooling fan
FAN
119S0032
D
.
.
1
2
3
CN18
(CRT)
CN42
(CPU FAN)
.
外部ケーブル
1
2
3
4
12
13
14
15
136N0404
RGBsig
2
.
Operation Panel CN4
.
D
.
.
.
.
.
.
Memory card
E
CFI21A
113Ｙ1676
5
FlashDisk_Power
PAT21A-CN20
136Y8722
+5V
+5V_GND
.
1
2
CN45
CN1
CN3
.
37
38
39
40
CFI21A-CN1←→ATX-CN6
Signal name № Signal name
GPO30*
1 2
GND
SDD(7)
3 4
SDD(8)
SDD(6)
5 6
SDD(9)
SDD(5)
7 8
SDD(10)
SDD(4)
9 10 SDD(11)
SDD(3)
11 12 SDD(12)
SDD(2)
13 14 SDD(13)
SDD(1)
15 16 SDD(14)
SDD(0)
17 18 SDD(15)
GND
19 20 NC
SDDRQ
21 22 GND
SDIOW*
23 24 GND
SDIOR*
25 26 GND
SIORDY*
27 28 GND
SDDACK* 29 30 GND
IRQ15
31 32 NC
SDA1
33 34 NC
SDA0
35 36 SDA2
SDCS1*
37 38 SDCS3*
CDDLED* 39 40 GND
F
G
1
2
3
4
136Y8670
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1
2
3
4
CN6
(IDE Primary)
37
38
39
40
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
E
.
.
ATX-CN45 (Board Side)
Signal name
№
Signal name
POWER LED+
1 2 POWER LED+
GND
3 4 GREEN LED+
GREEN LED+
5 6 GREEN LEDCMOS RESET
7 8 (KEYLOCK)
GND
9 10 +5V
GND
11 12 GND
SYSSPKR
13 14 HDD LED+
HDD LED+
15 16 HDD LEDPOWER-BUTTON 17 18 GND
POWER-BUTTON 19 20 GND
RESET SW
21 22 GND
POWER-BUTTON 23 24 POWER ON
Reserved
25 26 P-SW POWER ON
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
PWR_ON+_EXT
PWR_ON-_EXT
PWR_ON+_OUT
PWR_ON-_OUT
.
.
.
ATX-CN45 (Cable Side)
Signal name
№
Signal name
POWER LED+
1 14 POWER LED+
GND
2 15 GREEN LED+
GREEN LED+
3 16 GREEN LEDCMOS RESET
4 17 (KEYLOCK)
GND
5 18 +5V
GND
6 19 GND
SYSSPKR
7 20 HDD LED+
HDD LED+
8 21 HDD LEDPOWER-BUTTON 9 22 GND
POWER-BUTTON 10 23 GND
RESET SW
11 24 GND
POWER-BUTTON 12 25 POWER ON
Reserved
13 26 P-SW POWER ON
136Y8665
USB_PwrOn
PAT21A-CN5
ATX_PwrOn
PAT21A-CN5
.
.
F
5
5
G
.
.
.
.
.
H
機種
5119
ユニット -
名称
回路図
補助名称 ATLAS
コード
Z22Y0005119
H
Rev.
05
頁
6
12
1
012-201-09C
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
11
SP-44
SP-45
13
回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
Controller Unit rear relay Connectors
制御部背面中継コネクタ
CPS21A
ATX>> 6
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
LVC21A
LVC21A
-CN1
-CN1
(Board side) (Cable side)
№
№
1
19
2
18
3
17
4
16
5
15
6
14
7
13
8
12
9
11
10
10
9
11
12
8
13
7
14
6
15
5
16
4
17
3
18
2
19
1
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
136Y8678
113Ｙ1595
113Y1717
1
2
LVC21A-CN1
(Image data signal)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
YOBI_IP
YOBI_IM
GND(YOBI_O_SLD)
RxIN3_1P
RxIN3_1M
GND(RxCLK_SLD)
RxIN2_1P
RxIN2_1M
GND(RXIN1_1_SLD)
RxIN0_1P
RxIN0_1M
GND(RxIN3_2_SLD)
RxCLK_2P
RxCLK_2M
GND(RxIN2_2_SLD)
RxIN1_2P
RxIN12M
GND(RxIN0_3_SLD)
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
LVC21A
PCI_SLOT4
CN25
IMAGEDATA
8
.
.
17
18
19
20
RLY21A
-CN1
Signal name №
N.C.
GND(YOBI_I_SLD)
YOBI_OM
YOBI_OP
GND(RxIN3_1_SLD)
RxCLK_1P
RxCLK_1M
GND(RxIN2_1_SLD)
RxIN1_1P
RxIN1_1M
GND(RxIN0_1_SLD)
RxIN3_2P
RxIN3_2M
GND(RxCLK_2_SLD)
RxIN2_2P
RxIN2_2M
GND(RxIN1_2_SLD)
RxIN0_2P
RxIN0_2M
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
RLY21A_CN1
External cable
外部ケーブル
A
.
.
.
.
113Ｙ1596
36
37
.
.
B
136N0403
SND21A-CN2
(Bucky)
(RS442)
1
2
3
4
SND21A
Reserved
PCI_SLOT3
CN24
SND21A&B_I/F1
External cable
外部ケーブル
.
.
RLY21A_CN2
.
113Ｙ1672
65
66
67
68
.
.
.
C
.
136Y8665
1
2
(LCD Operation Panel controller)
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
SND21A-CN3
PCI_SLOT2
CN23
SND21A-CN2←→RLY21A-CN2
Signal name
№
Signal name
SND_AS+
1 35 SND_ASGND
2 36 GND
SND_DS+
3 37 SND_DSGND
4 38 GND
SND_W/Rn+
5 39 SND_W/RnGND
6 40 GND
SND_RESETn+
7 41 SND_RESETnGND
8 42 GND
SND_ACK+
9 43 SND_ACKGND
10 44 GND
SND_INTn+
11 45 SND_INTnGND
12 46 GND
SND_A/WD[0]+
13 47 SND_A/WD[0]SND_A/WD[1]+
14 48 SND_A/WD[1]SND_A/WD[2]+
15 49 SND_A/WD[2]SND_A/WD[3]+
16 50 SND_A/WD[3]GND
17 51 GND
SND_A/WD[4]+
18 52 SND_A/WD[4]SND_A/WD[5]+
19 53 SND_A/WD[5]SND_A/WD[6]+
20 54 SND_A/WD[6]SND_A/WD[7]+
21 55 SND_A/WD[7]GND
22 56 GND
SND_RD[0]+
23 57 SND_RD[0]SND_RD[1]+
24 58 SND_RD[1]SND_RD[2]+
25 59 SND_RD[2]SND_RD[3]+
26 60 SND_RD[3]GND
27 61 GND
SND_RD[4]+
28 62 SND_RD[4]SND_RD[5]+
29 63 SND_RD[5]SND_RD[6]+
30 64 SND_RD[6]SND_RD[7]+
31 65 SND_RD[7]GND
32 66 GND
RDY0+
33 67 RDY0+
RDY1+
34 68 RDY1+
8
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
136Y8680
POS0＋
POS0－
POS1＋
POS1－
BUZ1+
BUZ1DISP＋
DISP－
BLON＋
BLON－
GND
GND
Ready＋
Ready－
Call＋
Call－
BUZ2+
BUZ2GND
GND
.
5
PWR_SW1
PWR_SW2
+5V
+5VSB
GND
Power_On
PAT21A_CN15
1
.
14
.
2
.
15
.
3
.
16
.
4
.
17
.
5
.
18
.
6
.
19
.
7
.
20
.
8
.
21
.
9
.
22
.
10
.
23
.
11
.
24
.
12
.
25
.
13
.
5
Outside the machine
機外
.
.
.
.
D
.
.
PAT21A-CN13←→SND21A-CN5
Signal name
№
Signal name
GND
1 2 GND
GND
3 4 GND
PS_OFF
5 6 Reserve
LD_+6V1 Det
7 8 LD_+6V2 Det
LD_+6V Det
9 10 +24VF Det
+9V Det
11 12 +18V Det
+24V Det
13 14 ERS_+24V1 Det
ERS_+24V2 Det 15 16 +24VP Det
+5VSB Det
17 18 +3.3V Det
+12V Det
19 20 -12V Det
GND
21 22 GND
GND
23 24 GND
SHOT-RDY
25 26 SHOT-GO
RDY_1 A
27 28 RDY_1 B
RDY_2 A
29 30 RDY_2 B
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
23
24
25
26
E
.
.
F
Fuse_Mon
5
PAT21A_CN13
TLB21B-CN1←→SND21A-CN4
Signal name
№
Signal name
VCC
1 2
VCC
RU1
3 4
RU2
RU3
5 6
RU4
RU5
7 8
RU6
RU7
9 10
RU8
VCC
11 12
VCC
VCC
13 14
VCC
VCC
15 16
RD1
RD2
17 18
RD3
RD4
19 20
RD5
RD6
21 22
RD7
RD8
23 24
VCC
VCC
25 26
VCC
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
136Y8669
1
2
3
4
2
LCN21A-CN2
.
.
SND21A-CN4
H
.
136Y8668
1
2
3
Remote Power OFF
4
Fuse monitor I/F
（X-ray tube interlock）
27
28
29
30
Panel_LCDsig
External cable
外部ケーブル
.
LED_Power
PAT21A_CN14
SND21A-CN5
Reserved
PCI_SLOT1
CN22
K-CN6
RU/RD
5
TLB21B_CN1
.
.
G
.
.
.
.
.
機種
5119
ユニット -
名称
回路図
補助名称 ATLAS
H
.
コード
Z22Y0005119
05
Rev.
頁
7
12
1
012-201-09C
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
11
SP-45
SP-46
13
回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Exposure Unit rear relay Connectors
撮影部背面中継コネクタ
7
A
136Y8678
IMAGEDATA
.
External cable
LVC21A_CN1
.
外部ケーブル
.
.
1
20
2
21
CN3
CN1
RLY21A >> 11
A15
A16
B1
B2
113Y1709
.
.
.
.
A1
A2
36
18
37
19
B15
B16
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
A1
A2
A15
A16
B1
B2
CN3
A
LDS21A>> 11
113Y1669
B15
B16
136Y8817
B
7
136N0403
SND21A&B_I/F1
.
SND21A_CN2
External cable
.
外部ケーブル
.
.
.
.
.
C
1
35
2
36
CN4
CN2
A1
A2
A33
A34
B1
B2
33
67
34
68
B33
B34
.
B
SND21A&B_I/F2
9
.
SND21B-CN1
.
.
.
.
.
.
C
.
Pillar of the Elevation Unit
昇降部側板
136Y8734
3
136Y8682
InterLocks
J-CN2
D
1
2
3
.
4
.
5
.
6
.
7
.
8
.
9
.
10
External cable
外部ケーブル
.
.
.
.
136Y8815
H-CN3
.
GridCoverOP
MSH8
COM 128S0809
.
Proximity switch
近接ＳＷ
NC
.
.
.
H-CN23
1
.
.
2
.
.
3
.
.
4
.
.
.
.
.
.
136Y8808
MSH2
COM
NC
.
.
MSH3
.
.
COM
NC
.
.
E
5
136Y8672
LD_Power
K-CN2
+6V_1(LD)
+6V_GND_1(LD)
+6V_2(LD)
+6V_GND_2(LD)
External cable
外部ケーブル
1
2
3
.
4
5
F
.
.
.
Right
128S0912
Patient protection descent prevention
患者保護下降防止
E
.
136Y8817
+9V(CCD)
1
.
+9V_GND(CCD)
2
.
+18V(CCD)
3
.
+18V_GND(CCD)
4
.
+6VCP(LD/CCD)
5
.
+6VCP_GND(LD/CCD) 6
.
+24V1(IO)
7
.
+24V1_GND(IO)
8
.
+24V_1(INV)
9
.
+24V_GND_1(INV)
10
.
+24V_2(INV)
11
.
+24V_GND_2(INV)
12
.
+24V2(IO)
13
.
+24V2_GND(IO)
14
External cable
外部ケーブル
G
.
5
Left
128S0912
Patient protection descent prevention
患者保護下降防止
.
136Y8673
Power
K-CN3
D
H-CN1
.
.
9
SND21B-CN10
F
H-CN2
.
HeadUnitPower 11
.
.
PWC21A_CN2
.
.
.
.
.
.
I/O_Power
9
SND21B_CN11/CN12
.
.
G
.
.
.
Hi-Current_Power
K-CN4
PhotoTimer
External connection cable
H
Photo-timer
機種
5119
ユニット -
フォトタイマー
名称
回路図
補助名称 ATLAS
外部接続ケーブル
コード
H
Z22Y0005119
Rev.
05
頁
8
12
1
012-201-09C
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
11
SP-46
SP-47
13
回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
8
A
※１ ED2対応機では使用されない
(Not used for complying with EMC standard IEC60101-1-2: 2001)
136Y8817
SND21A&B_I/F2
RLY21A-CN4
.
.
.
.
.
.
A1
A2
CN1
※２ ED2対応機でのみ使用される
(Added for complying with EMC standard IEC60601-1-2 : 2001)
A33
A34
B1
B2
SND21B
10
-
.
8
GridCoverOP
H-CN3
136Y8815
POFF_UPDN+
POFF_UPDN-
.
113Y1673
.
8
136Y8817
I/O_Power
H-CN2
1
2
3
C
Signal name
LDS SND
21A
2
CCD_DOUT
40
4
CCD_CS
38
6
CCD_TIP_DET 36
8
LD_POW_SEL 34
10
LD_DIN
32
12
LD_CS
30
14
LD_ADR1
28
16
LD_SEL1
26
18
ERS_DOUT
24
20
ERS_DCLK
22
22
ERS_ADR0
20
24
ERS_ADR2
18
26
GND
16
28
GND
14
30
GND
12
32
GND
10
34
+5VOUT
8
36
+5VOUT
6
38
+3.3VOUT
4
40
+3.3VOUT
2
Signal name
D
11
11
.
.
LDS
21A
CCD_DCLK
39
CCD_ADR0
37
LD_ON
35
LD_DOUT
33
LD_DCLK
31
LD_ADR0
29
LD_SEL0
27
LD_SEL2
25
ERS_DIN
23
ERS_CS
21
ERS_ADR1
19
ERS_PLD_RST-N 17
GND
15
GND
13
GND
11
GND
9
+5VOUT
7
+3.3VOUT
5
+3.3VOUT
3
+3.3VOUT
1
LD_PWROFF
PWC21A-CN1
PWC_5V
PWC21A-CN1
.
Housing
CN10
.
.
.
.
.
CN3
+24V1(IO)
+24V1_GND(IO)
.
.
.
.
.
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN12
.
POFF_LASER+
.
POFF_LASER.
GND
.
GND
.
+5VOUT
.
+5VOUT
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN13
.
.
for PC
SERIAL I/F
.
.
1
2
3
4
5
CN14
.
.
.
.
1
2
3
4
CN15
.
for debug
JTAG port
.
.
.
.
136Y8815
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
SH3-NO
SH3-COM
.
.
.
.
.
1
2
3
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1
2
3
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
SZ3
Subscanning overrun sensor (upper)
ケーブルダクト（右）
Cable duct (Right)
上オーバーラン検出
※２
C
136Y8703
1
2
3
.
.
SZ4
Subscanning overrun sensor (lower)
※２
下オーバーラン検出
.
136Y8703
146S0029
1
2
3
.
.
SZ5
※２
Subscanning operation sensor
136Y8703
副走査動作検出
.
D
146S0029
1
2
3
.
.
SZ6
Grid availability sensor
※２
グリット有無検出
136Y8703
.
146S0029
1
2
3
.
.
※２
SZ7
136Y8703
Bucky HP sensor
ブッキ-HP検出
E
.
146S0029
.
.
.
.
MSH1-NO
MSH1-COM
.
.
.
.
.
.
Reserve
Reserve
Reserve
1
2
3
SZ21
IP erasure position sensor
IP消去ポジション検出
※２
.
136Y9129
146S0029
1
2
3
.
.
F
※２
SH1
Grid replacement cover lock sensor
136Y9129
グリットカバーロック検出
.
146S0029
1
2
3
4
CN18
H-CN29
1
.
.
2
CN16
80
1
SND21B-S
.
1
H-CN25
1
.
.
2
37 38 39 40
128S0257
128S0257
Left
Right
MSH12
MSH1
COM
NO
COM NO
.
.
.
.
136Y8833
Grid replacement cover （Laser interlock）
グリットカバー（レーザーインターロック）
G
128S0915
128S0915
Right
Left
SH4
SH3
COM Front cover(Laser interlock）
NO
COM NO
.
.
.
.
本体カバー（レーザーインターロック）
.
136Y8810
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
80
CN17
113Y1707
CN9
1 2 3 4
.
.
11
12
13
14
.
.
.
136Y8703
146S0029
.
for debug
JTAG port
※２
IP読取HP 検出
.
.
.
IP reading-side HP sensor
146S0029
SZ1-VCC
SZ1-VOUT
SZ1-GND
SZ2-VCC
SZ2-VOUT
SZ2-GND
SZ3-VCC
SZ3-VOUT
SZ3-GND
SZ4-VCC
SZ4-VOUT
SZ4-GND
SZ5-VCC
SZ5-VOUT
SZ5-GND
SZ6-VCC
SZ6-VOUT
SZ6-GND
SZ7-VCC
SZ7-VOUT
SZ7-GND
SYOBI1-VCC
SYOBI1-VOUT
SYOBI1-GND
SH1-VCC
SH1-VOUT
SH1-GND
B
SZ2
.
11
12
13
14
136Y8815
Partition
※１
H
11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
.
.
G
.
.
F
SND21B-CN1←→RLY21A-CN4
Signal name SND RLY Signal name
SND
B01
RDY0+
A01 B34 RDY1+
RDY0A02 B33 RDY1B02
B03
SND_RD[7]+
A03 B32 GND
B04
SND_RD[7]A04 B31 GND
SND_RD[5]+
A05 B30 SND_RD[6]+
B05
B06
SND_RD[5]A06 B29 SND_RD[6]B07
GND
A07 B28 SND_RD[4]+
GND
A08 B27 SND_RD[4]B08
B09
SND_RD[2]+
A09 B26 SND_RD[3]+
B10
SND_RD[2]A10 B25 SND_RD[3]SND_RD[0]+
A11 B24 SND_RD[1]+
B11
B12
SND_RD[0]A12 B23 SND_RD[1]SND_A/WD[7]+ A13 B22 GND
B13
SND_A/WD[7]- A14 B21 GND
B14
SND_A/WD[5]+ A15 B20 SND_A/WD[6]+ B15
SND_A/WD[5]- A16 B19 SND_A/WD[6]- B16
GND
A17 B18 SND_A/WD[4]+ B17
GND
A18 B17 SND_A/WD[4]- B18
SND_A/WD[2]+ A19 B16 SND_A/WD[3]+ B19
SND_A/WD[2]- A20 B15 SND_A/WD[3]- B20
SND_A/WD[0]+ A21 B14 SND_A/WD[1]+ B21
SND_A/WD[0]- A22 B13 SND_A/WD[1]- B22
B23
SND_INTn+
A23 B12 GND
SND_INTnA24 B11 GND
B24
SND_ACK+
A25 B10 GND
B25
B26
SND_ACKA26 B09 GND
SND_RESETn+ A27 B08 GND
B27
B28
SND_RESETn- A28 B07 GND
B29
SND_W/Rn+
A29 B06 GND
SND_W/RnA30 B05 GND
B30
B31
SND_DS+
A31 B04 GND
B32
SND_DSA32 B03 GND
SND_AS+
A33 B02 GND
B33
B34
SND_ASA34 B01 GND
.
E
RLY
A34
A33
A32
A31
A30
A29
A28
A27
A26
A25
A24
A23
A22
A21
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A09
A08
A07
A06
A05
A04
A03
A02
A01
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
※２
136Y8703
136Y8816
H-CN26
CN11
MZ1HP 検出
146S0029
.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
136Y8703
Subscanning HP sensor
副走査部
.
.
136Y8817
Subscanning
筐体部
※２
SZ1
.
.
+24V2(IO)
+24V2_GND(IO)
SND21B-CN9←→LDS21A-CN2
SND
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
B33
B34
1
2
3
A
ケーブルダクト（左）
Cable duct (Left)
.
.
B
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
仕切板
136Y8703
Head_Serial_I/F
LDS21A-CN2
※１
136Y8703
機種
5119
ユニット -
名称
回路図
補助名称 ATLAS
コード
H
Z22Y0005119
05
Rev.
頁
9
12
1
012-201-09C
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
11
SP-47
SP-48
13
回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
Housing
Subscanning
筐体部
SND21B
-
113Y1673
B
CN21 12
11
10
9
8
7
9
6
5
4
3
2
1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
MZ1-BLUE
M1-BRAKE+
M1-BRAKEM2-BRAKE+
MZ3AMZ3A+
MZ1-RED
MZ1-ORANGE
MZ1-GREEN
MZ1-BLACK
M2-BRAKEMZ2-BLUE
136Y8818
136Y8818
.
.
HALF_POWER
FULL_POWER
SOLH1-24V
.
CN22
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
D
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
MZ3BMZ3B+
MZ3COM-A
MZ3COM-B
MZ2-RED
MZ2-ORANGE
MZ2-GREEN
MZ2-BLACK
.
.
SH2
E
CN6
.
LED21B
CN8
1
2
3
4
5
Subscanning Solenoid brake
副走査電磁ブレーキ
MB1
.
B
106Y0010
MB2
1
.
.
2
.
IP movement Solenoid brake
IP移動電磁ブレーキ
MB2
.
.
.
.
SOLH1
1
.
.
2
.
.
3
.
.
.
.
.
.
MZ2
1
.
MZ2-ORANGE 2
.
MZ2-BLACK 3
.
MZ2-GREEN 4
.
MZ2-RED
5
.
MZ2-BLUE
6
.
SOLH1
Grid replacement cover lock drive
グリット交換扉ロック
.
.
MZ3BMZ3COM-B
MZ3B+
MZ3A+
MZ3COM-A
MZ3A-
136Y8819
C
107Y0182
.
1
2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.
.
118NA013
MZ3
Bucky
ブッキD
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
118YA182
MZ2
IP movement moter
IP移動モータ
136Y8703
E
.
.
.
.
.
.
136Y8815
LAMPM1-A
LAMPM1-K
LAMPM2-A
LAMPM2-K
1
2
3
.
4
.
5
.
6
.
.
.
.
.
1
2
3
.
H-CN24
136Y8809
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1
2
3
.
FAN1
136Y8815
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
106Y0010
.
.
.
.
CN7
1
2
.
.
.
G
..
.
.
F
..
.
M2-BRAKE+
M2-BRAKE-
.
Subscanning motor
副走査モータ
..
.
.
.
1
2
3
4
118YA183
MZ1
..
136Y8819
136Y8703
1
2
.
.
H-CN22
1
.
.
2
.
.
3
.
.
4
.
.
5
.
.
6
.
.
7
.
.
8
136Y8818
.
CN4
..
MB1
H-CN26
1
136Y8704
.
.
2
.
.
3
.
.
4
H-CN21
1
6
.
2
.
7
.
3
.
8
.
4
.
9
.
5
.
10
.
CN5
1
2
3
A
.
.
.
C
副走査部
MZ1
1
.
MZ1-ORANGE 2
.
MZ1-BLACK 3
.
MZ1-GREEN 4
.
5
MZ1-RED
.
6
MZ1-BLUE
A
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FAN1-ON
FAN1-0V
FAN2-ON
FAN2-0V
FAN3-ON
FAN3-0V
FAN4-ON
FAN4-0V
H-CN31
1
.
.
2
.
.
3
.
.
4
.
.
5
.
.
6
.
.
7
.
.
8
.
.
9
.
.
10
.
.
1
2
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1
.
2
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
136Y8820
FAN2
.
1
2
.
FAN3
.
FAN4
1
2
CN1
LIT21A
CCD functional check LED
明補正ランプ
113Y1714 Right
CN1
LIT21A
113Y1714
FAN1
FAN2
CCD functional check LED
明補正ランプ
Left
F
119Y2029
Internal Cooling fan
機内冷却ファン
119Y2029
Internal Cooling fan
機内冷却ファン
G
119Y0007
Internal Cooling fan
FAN3
機内冷却ファン
FAN4
119Y2029
Internal Cooling fan
機内冷却ファン
.
FAN5
.
.
1
2
FAN5
119Y2029
Internal Cooling fan
機内冷却ファン
H
機種
5119
ユニット -
名称
回路図
補助名称 ATLAS
コード
H
Z22Y0005119
富士写真フイルム株式会社
1
012-201-09C
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
05
Rev.
頁
10
12
11
SP-48
SP-49
13
回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
+24V_1(INV)
+24V_GND_1(INV)
+24V_2(INV)
+24V_GND_2(INV)
+9V(CCD)
+9V_GND(CCD)
+18V(CCD)
+18V_GND(CCD)
A
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1
5
2
6
3
7
4
8
.
B
136Y8817
+6VCP(LD/CCD)
.
+6VCP_GND(LD/CCD)
.
+6V_1(LD)
.
+6V_GND_1(LD)
.
+6V_2(LD)
.
+6V_GND_2(LD)
1
4
2
5
3
6
CN21
1
6
2
PWC21A 7
113Y1671 3
8
4
9
5
10
CN22
CN32
.
9
C
SND21B_CN13
9 LD_PWROFF
136Y8817
SND21B_CN13
9 PWC_5V
.
.
.
.
.
1
2
3
4
5
6
+5VOUT
+5VOUT_GND
.
+24V_1
.
+24V_GND_1
.
+24V_2
.
+24V_GND_2
.
+9V
.
+9V_GND
.
+18V
.
+18V_GND
.
+5VOUT
+5VOUT_GND
+24V_1
+24V_GND_1
+24V_2
+24V_GND_2
+9V
+9V_GND
+18V
+18V_GND
+6VCP
+6VCP_GND
+6V_1
+6V_GND_1
+6V_2
+6V_GND_2
136Y8712
.
8 8 HeadUnitPower
H-CN1/H-CN2
POFF_LASER+
POFF_LASERGND
GND
+5VOUT
+5VOUT
CN22
Flexible cable
CN31
CN1
1
4
2
5
3
6
.
.
.
.
.
+6VCP
+6VCP_GND
+6V_1
+6V_GND_1
+6V_2
+6V_GND_2
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1 CN1
9
2
10
CN21
3
11
JCT21B
4
113Y1668
12
5
13
CN3
6
14
7
15
8
16
4
3
2
1
.
.
.
+6V_1
+6V_GND_1
+6V_2
+6V_GND_2
136Y8713
VCC-LD1
GND-LD1
VCC-LD2
GND-LD2
.
1
2
3
4
.
.
.
.
LDA21A
113Y1688
4
3
2
1
.
.
.
136Y8706
+6VCP
+6VCP_GND
+5V
+5V_GND
VCC-A
GND-A
VCC
GND
.
136Y8714
1
2
3
4
5
6
.
.
.
.
.
1
2
3
4
.
.
.
.
+5VCCD
+5VCCD_GND
+9V
+9V_GND
+16V
+16V_GND
1
2
3
4
.
.
.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
.
LDA21A
113Y1688
CN9
LDD21A
113Y1687
LDA21A
113Y1688
LDA21A
113Y1688
CN1
LDA21A
113Y1688
.
27
28
29
30
.
CN4
JCT21A-CN6←→LDD21A-CN1
№ Signal name
CN2
.
.
.
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
.
.
.
.
.
.
+5V
+5V_GND
+24V_1
+24V_GND_1
+24V_2
+24V_GND_2
.
.
LDA21A
113Y1688
.
Subscanning
副走査部
FG
LDONH
LDONL
PSELH
PSELL
NC
NC
SEL0
DGND
SEL1
DGND
SEL2
DGND
INH
DGND
CS0
DGND
NC
DGND
NC
DGND
NC
DGND
Din
DGND
Dout
DGND
CLK
DGND
FG
136Y8715
D
RLY21A >> 8
LDS21A >> 8
113Y1709
113Y1669
CN4
E
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
136Y8815
9
F
.
Head_Serial_I/F
SND21B-S-CN9
1
2
3
4
CN2
136N0405
1
2
3
4
47
48
49
50
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
50
49
48
47
1
2
3
4
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
CN6
4
3
2
1
113Y1667
136N0407
1
2
3
4
27
28
29
30
50
49
48
47
+16V
+16V_GND
+9V
+9V_GND
+5VCCD
+5VCCD_GND
CN2
JCT21A
136N0406
47
48
49
50
37
38
39
40
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1
2
3
4
5
6
.
CN9
1
1
.
50
.
CCD21B
.
50
.
136Y8850
.
CN10
CCD21A
1
1
.
50
.
CCD21C
.
50
CN3
40
39
38
37
4
3
2
1
136N0408
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1
2
3
4
CN2
CN11
1
37
38
39
40
1
.
50
.
CCD21B
.
50
№
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
Signal name
GND_F
VCC_1
VCC_1
VCC_1
VCC_1
VCC_1
VCC_1
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
FRAME+
FRAMEGND
LD_ON-P+
LD_ON-PGND
PSEL+
PSELGND
ADR4+
ADR4ADR3+
№
№
Signal name
№
№
Signal name
№
№
Signal name
№
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
ADR3ADR2+
ADR2ADR1+
ADR1ADR0+
ADR0GND
SDCLK+
SDCLKGND
DIN_TH+
DIN_THGND
RESET-N+
RESET-NGND
DOUT_TH+
DOUT_THGND
OUTY+
OUTYGND
GND
GND_F
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
FG
DGND
Tx+
TxDGND
DATA3+
DATA3DGND
CLK0+
CLK0DGND
DATA2+
DATA2DGND
DATA1+
DATA1DGND
DATA0+
DATA0DGND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
DGND
DATA7+
DATA7DGND
CLK1+
CLK1DGND
DATA6+
DATA6DGND
DATA5+
DATA5DGND
DATA4+
DATA4DGND
Rx+
RxDGND
FG
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
28
27
26
25
CN4
4
3
2
1
136N0409
.
1
2
3
4
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
25
26
27
28
113Y1664
CN7
1
.
50
.
CN3
1
.
D
CCD
№
Signal name
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
FG
VCC_+5V
VCC_+5V
VCC_+5V
VCC_+5V
VCC_+5V
VCC_+5V
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
START
DGND
RSTL
DGND
SDIN
DGND
SDOUTD
DGND
SDCLK
DGND
ADR2
ADR1
ADR0
DGND
FG
№
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
E
F
CCD21C
.
136Y8851
113Y1708
136Y8851
CCD21D
1
1
.
50
.
CCD21B
.
113Y1719
50
136Y8850
G
113Y1664
136Y8850
.
136N0410
ERS_SIGNAL 12
ERS21A-CN2
CN5
1234
JCT21A⇔CCD21A
CN4
CN3
JCT
CN8
CN13
17 18 19 20
.
№
DATA1DATA1+
GND
DATA2DATA2+
GND
CLK0CLK0+
GND
DATA3DATA3+
GND
IRDATAIRDATA+
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
VCC_2
VCC_2
VCC_2
VCC_2
VCC_2
GND_F
.
Signal name
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
.
№
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
CCD
.
№
GND_F
GND
GND
OTDATAOTDATA+
GND
DATA4DATA4+
GND
DATA5DATA5+
GND
DATA6DATA6+
GND
CLK1CLK1+
GND
DATA7DATA7+
GND
GND
DATA0DATA0+
GND
CCD JCT
.
Signal name
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
JCT
136Y8850
136Y8850
.
CN12
JCT21A CN3←→CCD21A CN2
JCT
.
№
JCT LDS
.
H
LDS
113Y1708
CN6
4
3
2
1
.
G
LDS21A-CN4←→JCT21A-CN1
JCT
136Y8851
136Y8851
.
50
JCT LDS
113Y1664
.
113Y1663
136N0426
LDS21A-CN3←→JCT21A-CN2
LDS
136Y8850
CN5
CN1
C
CN4
CN1
.
.
B
ERS_POWER 12
ERS21A-CN1
Erasing
消去部
CN3
A
機種
5119
ユニット -
名称
回路図
補助名称 ATLAS
コード
Z22Y0005119
H
Rev.
05
頁
11
12
1
012-201-09C
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
11
SP-49
SP-50
13
回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
ERS21A
CN2
CN11
113Y1666
JCT21B
11 ERS-Power
B
6
5
4
3
2
1
.
.
.
.
.
.
LAMP1_H
LAMP1_L
ERS21A-CN*←→INV21A-CN1
№
Signal name
1
+24V
2
NC
3
+24_GND
LMP1 123Ｓ0031
.
INV21A
113Y1675
CN4 1
2
.
LAMP2_H
LAMP2_L
LMP3
A
.
CN12
+5V
5V_GND
+24V_1
+24_GND_1
+24V_2
+24_GND_2
CN3 1
2
CN1
CN10
A
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN3 1
2
CN1
CN1
CN2
CN13
.
LAMP1_H
LAMP1_L
LMP5
LAMP2_H
LAMP2_L
LMP7
LAMP1_H
LAMP1_L
LMP9
LAMP2_H
LAMP2_L
LMP11
ERS21A-CN*←→INV21A-CN2
№
Signal name
+5V
1
LAMPON1
2
LAMPON2
3
LDSNC1
4
LDSNC2
5
+5V_GND
6
.
INV21A-2
113Y1675
CN4 1
2
.
B
.
.
CN1
CN14
JCT21A
11 ERS-Signal
CN2
1
2
3
4
.
.
C
.
.
.
.
.
.
CN15
CN2
CN3 1
2
.
INV21A-3
113Y1675
CN4 1
2
CN1
CN16
17
18
19
20
CN2
CN17
CN3 1
2
.
LAMP1_H
LAMP1_L
LMP2
LAMP2_H
LAMP2_L
LMP4
LAMP1_H
LAMP1_L
LMP6
LAMP2_H
LAMP2_L
LMP8
LAMP1_H
LAMP1_L
LMP10
LAMP2_H
LAMP2_L
LMP12
.
INV21A-4
113Y1675
CN4 1
2
.
.
CN1
CN2
CN19
CN3 1
2
.
D
.
INV21A-5
113Y1675
CN4 1
2
.
.
JCT21ACN6←→ERS21A-CN2
Signal name
№
F
.
C
CN18
E
INV21A-CN3,4
№
Signal name
1
CCFL-L
2
CCFL-H
.
D
FG
GND
Reset
GND
Dout
GND
Din
GND
SCLK
GND
A2
A1
A0
GND
ERS_CS
NC
NC
NC
NC
FG
.
CN20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
CN1
CN2
CN21
CN3 1
2
.
.
INV21A-6
113Y1675
E
CN4 1
2
.
.
TSWA1
CN3
1
2
136Y8803
.
COM
NC
.
.
.
CN4
CN8
CN9
1
2
1
2
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FANA1
FANA2
119Ｙ0060
Inverter cooling fan
インバータ冷却ファン
CN5
119Ｙ0060
Inverter cooling fan
インバータ冷却ファン
CN6
G
CN7
1
2
3
4
5
6
.
.
.
.
HEAT1
.
.
.
HEAT2
.
.
.
.
H
HEST3
.
117Ｎ0042
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
115
Thermo switch
感熱スイッチ
F
.
.
.
.
.
TSWA2
115Ｙ0043
Temperature sensor (thermistor)
温度センサー（サーミスタ）
.
.
.
.
.
TSWA3
115Ｙ0044
Temperature sensor (thermistor)
温度センサー（サーミスタ）
G
.
.
.
.
.
TSWA4
Rubber heater 5W
ラバーヒータ 5W
115Ｙ0045
Temperature sensor (thermistor)
温度センサー（サーミスタ）
117Ｎ0041
Rubber heater 5W
ラバーヒータ 5W
117Ｎ0041
Rubber heater 5W
ラバーヒータ 5W
機種
5119
ユニット -
名称
回路図
補助名称 ATLAS
コード
Z22Y0005119
H
Rev.
05
頁
12
12
1
012-201-09C
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
11
SP-50
SP-51
14
部品番号検索表
PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE
PART NO.INDEX NO.- REF NO.
PART NO.INDEX NO.- REF NO.
PART NO.INDEX NO.- REF NO.
PART NO.INDEX NO.- REF NO.
PART NO.INDEX NO.- REF NO.
PART NO.INDEX NO.- REF NO.
102S5550
102S5929
106Y0010
106Y0010
107Y0182A
107Y0189
108N0042
112Y0007
112Y0008A
112Y0009A
112Y0010
113S0185B
113Y100088
113Y1595G/H
113Y1665C
113Y1667B
113Y1668C
113Y1669A
113Y1670F
113Y1671C
113Y1672E/F
113Y1673H
113Y1674A
113Y1676B
113Y1685A
113Y1686A
113Y1709B
113Y1711A
113Y1714A
113Y1717
113Y1722A
113Y1725B
113Y1903A
113Y1904A
114N0021
115S0152/A
115S0154
118NA013B
118YA179A
118YA183/A
118YA185/A
119S0007/A/B
119Y0059A
119Y2029
128S0257
128S0257
128S0257
128S0257
128S0664
128S0664
128S0809
128S0909/A
128S0915
128S0955
128S0955
128S0955
128S0955
128S0955
128S0955
128S0955
128S0956
128S0956
135N0016
135S0712
135S0713
136N0405D
136N0406D
136N0407B
136N0408D
136N0409D
136N0426C
136N0428A
136N0468A
136N0473A
136N0474B
136Y100261A
136Y100262A
136Y5031A
136Y8647A/B
136Y8653F
136Y8660C
136Y8662B/C
136Y8663B
136Y8664C
136Y8665C
136Y8667A
136Y8668C
136Y8669C
136Y8670C
136Y8671G/H
136Y8672C/D/E
136Y8673A/C/D
136Y8675B/C
136Y8676C/D
136Y8678D
136Y8680B/C
136Y8682A/B
136Y8689B
136Y8692D
136Y8703B
136Y8703B
136Y8703B
136Y8704C
136Y8714B/C
136Y8722A
136Y8725B/C
136Y8731F
136Y8732C/D
136Y8733E
136Y8734B/C
136Y8735B
136Y8803E
136Y8808D
136Y8809B/C
136Y8810D
136Y8812A
136Y8815J/K
136Y8816D
136Y8817C
136Y8818E
136Y8819D
136Y8820B
136Y8833B
136Y8834B
136Y8840A
136Y8848A
136Y8849A
136Y8889A
136Y9129B
136Y9482A
136Y9484A
136Y9487A
137S1053
137S1178
137S1178
137S1275
137S1276
137S1277
137S1277
137S1277
137S1277
137S1278
137S1278
137S1279
137S1280
137S1280
137S1280
137S1286
139N0066
146S0029/A
146S0029/A
146S0029/A
146S0029/A
146S0029/A
146S0029/A
146S0029/A
146S0029/A
146S0029A
301S7000307
303S0041
304N0023A
304S0023
304S0032
304S1001235
304S1001240
304S1001245
304S1001250
305S0018
305S0061B
305S0126
308N0210A
308N0210A
308S0508
308S8130420
308S8130616
309N0112
309N0115
309N0116
309N0145
309S0038
309S0114
309S0120012
309S0120016
309S0158
309S0220012
312S0015
313N1224A
313N1225A
314N0071A
316N0452C
316N0455A
316N0456
316N0457D
316N0459B
316N0463A
316N0468B
316N0473A
316N0475
316N0502
316N100116
316N4008A/B
316N4009A/B
316S0451
316S1240
316S3136
316Y3013
317N1055
317N1058
317N1075/A
317N1076
317S1055
318N3033
318N3700
318S1239
318S1256
318S3300
318S3302
319N100700
319N3946A
319N3949
319N3956
319N3975A
319N3975A
319N3976A
319N3977B
319N3977B
319N3978B
319N3982A
319N3990D
319N3990D
319N3992B
319N3992B
319N3995A
319N3995A
319N3996A
319N3996A
319N3997A
319N3998A
319N3998A
319N4003A
319N4004A
319N4008A
319N4009A
319N4009A
319N4028B
319N4029
319N4034
319N4035A
319N4049
319N4053
319N4077
319N4081
319N4137
319N4138
319N4139
319N4160
319N4196A
319N4197
319N4453
319N4473
319N4478
319N4489
319N4489
319N4509
012-201-09C
08-4.2
08-4.1
02A-30
04C-4
05C-5
05C-28
07B-31
07E-7.1
07E-7.2
07E-7.3
07E-7.4
08-4.3
08-3.2
08-1
07C-20
03-18
03-13
06C-31
08-8
06A-22
08-2
06C-25
08-22
08-25
07D-31
07D-7
06C-37
07A-4
03-2
08-3.1
08-31
07D-34
06C-55
06C-56
08-24
03-11.1
03-11.2
06A-5
07B-14
04C-15
09A-7
06B-15
08-17
06B-18
05C-31
05C-33
09A-12
09A-13
07B-8
07C-27
06C-43
07B-12
06C-13
01A-10.1
01A-15.1
01B-10
01B-15
07C-4
07C-9
07C-11
01A-10.2
01A-15.2
07C-18
07B-33
07B-37
12-3
12-4
12-5
12-6
12-7
12-9
12-10
12-8
12-1
12-2
12-65
12-66
12-64
12-11
12-12
12-14
12-15
12-16
12-17
12-18
12-19
12-20
12-21
12-22.1
12-23
12-24
12-25
12-26
12-27
12-28
12-29
12-30
12-31
12-32
12-33
12-34
12-62
12-35
12-39
12-41
12-42
12-43
12-44
12-45
12-46
12-47
12-48
12-49
12-50
12-51
17-7
12-52
12-53
12-54
12-55
12-56
12-57
12-58
12-59
17-4
17-3
12-67
17-2
12-63
12-68
12-22.2
12-40
08-43
08-49
08-50
06C-47
08-48
03-30
06C-48
07C-32
08-45
06C-46
08-47
08-44
03-29
06C-45
08-46
07C-31
03-21
02C-4
02C-7
04B-1
04B-21
04B-22
04B-24
05C-1
06A-6
05B-19
09C-15
07E-9
07A-24
08-39
07D-45
07A-51.2
07A-42.1
07A-51.1
07A-42.2
07D-46
07A-46
07B-23
01A-30
01B-39
09E-24
09B.b-6
09B.b-4
07D-20
09B.a-5
06C-8
09B.a-6
09D-2
09B.a-4
07A-44
07A-45
08-16
07A-43
07B-36
05B-3
05B-2
09C-7
07C-19
07C-28
06C-49
05C-22
07D-16
03-12
03-16
03-10
07B-19
06C-50
09B.b-8
09E-25
09E-26
03-26
08-19
09C-11
05C-17
07A-15
09B.b-16
09F-10
09A-5
09B.b-10
06C-28
06C-30
08-42.1
08-42.2
07A-14
06C-18
09B.b-12
05B-10.1
05C-16
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
07E-8
02B-6
02C-25
02A-15
02B-24
02C-17
02A-32
06A-9
04C-7.1
04C-9.1
04A-4
04B-16
02B-9
02C-26
02B-2
02C-2
02B-14
02B-4
02C-6
02C-27
03-25
02B-13
04A-16
04B-25
05A-3
05C-25.1
05C-8
05B-4.1
05C-25.2
02A-16
05B-5.1
05B-14
05B-4.2
05B-5.3
05B-5.2
05B-10.2
04C-7.2
04C-9.2
09E-1
09D-3
02A-2
04A-12
04B-9
09F-20
SP-51
SP-52
14
部品番号検索表
PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE
PART NO.INDEX NO.- REF NO.
PART NO.INDEX NO.- REF NO.
PART NO.INDEX NO.- REF NO.
PART NO.INDEX NO.- REF NO.
PART NO.INDEX NO.- REF NO.
PART NO.INDEX NO.- REF NO.
319N4510
319N4511
319N4511
320N0025B
320N0026
320S0057
322SF044
322SF061
322SF061
322SF076
322SF097
322SF104
322SF237
322SF237
322SP206
322SP206
322SP206
322SP206
322SP206
322SP212
322SP214
322SP214
322SP214
322SP214
322SP214
322SP214
322SP214
322SP224
322SY064
322SY138
322SY291
323N0036A
323N0043B
323N0043B
323N0048
323N0052
323S3352
323S3352
323S3353
323S3356
323S3390
323Y0006
324N0057A
324N0058D
324N0058D
324N0059D
324N0059D
324N0060E
324N0060E
324N0061B
324N0062A
324N0062A
324N0063C
324N0063C
324N0064A
324N0065B
324N0065B
324N0066A
324N3201
324N3202
324N3210
324N3211
324Y3027A
327N0205
327N1102503A
327N1107501
328N0065A
329N0164E
329N0164E
329Y0020
329Y0021
331S0004
332N0618C
332N0619C
332N0630
332N0690
332N100036
332N100037
334N2389
335N0100
337N0069A
337N0069A
337N0072
337N0072
338N0519
338N0519
338N0553
338N0553
338N0554
338N100015
340N0232B
340N0233B/C
340N0234B/C
340N0235C/D
340N0236B
340N0240A
340S0020
340S0168
340Y0046A
340Y0067B
340Y0072
340Y0073
341N100071A
341N100093
341N100094
341N100095
341N100096
341N100097
341N100098
341N1079A/B
341N1082A/B
341N1083A/B
341N1084
341N1085
341N1095B
341N1100B
341N1101B
341N1102B/C
341N1108A
341N1109A
341N1110A
341N1111A
341N1112A
341N1113
341N1216
341N1217
341Y0325
341Y0327A
341Y0328A
341Y0338A
341Y0339A
341Y0358
341Y0359
341Y0360
341Y0361
341Y0372
341Y0373
341Y0374
341Y0376
341Y0377
341Y0378
341Y0379
341Y0408
341Y0409
341Y0410
341Y0411
341Y100060
341Y100070B
341Y100071
342N0168
343N0054B
343N0059A
343N0060A
345N1655G
345N1675B
345N1683/A/B
345N1702
345N1708B
345N1710
345N1712B
345N1768/A
345N1773
345N1782
345N1783
345N1784A
345N1785
345N1801B
345N1824
345N1825
345Y0286
345Y0287
345Y0288
345Y0313
345Y0316
346N1256A
346N1262C
346N1282A
346N1284C
346N1285C
346N1288A
346N1291B
346N1292B
346N1295F
346N1344A
346N1347
346N1350A
346N1351
346N1355B
346N1356A
346N1357A
346N1358A/B
346N1359
346N1359
346N1359
346N1370B
346N1381
346N1395
346N1401C
346N1452
346N1452
346Y0080C
346Y0081
347N0226
347N0360
347N0395
347N0409
347N0524
347N0707
347N0787
347N0787
347N100246
347N1775
347N1776
347N1811
347N1811
347N1813
347N1814
347N1815
347N1816/A
347N1817B
347N1847A
347N1866
347N1871
347N1885A
347N1894B/C
347N1895A/B
347N1896A
347N1897C
347N1904
347N1905
347N1906
347N1913D
347N1921
347N1922
347N1923
347N1935
347N1945
347N1951
347N1951
347N1971
347N2007
347N2017
347N2017
347N2084
347N2106
347N2107A
347N2134
347S0035
347S0220
347S0254
347S0356
347S0356
347S0364
347S0407
347S0409
347S0409
347S0409
347S0409
347S0409
347S0417
347S0479
347S0479
347S0499
347S0501
012-201-09C
09F-13
02B-36
02C-40
07E-3
07B-22
04C-13
06A-1
04A-6
04B-13
05B-12
05B-6
06A-8
05C-7
07E-5
02A-3
02B-10
02B-35
02C-30
02C-39
09F-12
02A-9
02B-5
02C-9
04A-2
04B-4
04C-6
04C-10
04C-1
09E-27
05B-29
07B-3
09A-8.1
04A-11
04B-8
09D-10
09D-4
02B-22
02C-12
02A-11
02A-34
09A-8.2
09D-8
02A-12
04A-9
04B-5
04A-14
04B-7
04A-13
04B-10
02A-33
02B-21
02C-14
02B-23
02C-18
02A-10
02B-19
02C-15
02A-13
09A-15.1
09A-16.1
09A-15.2
09A-16.2
02A-8
07E-4
07E-10
07E-2
09F-18
02B-12
02C-31
02C-38
02B-34
07B-2
03-4
03-5
04B-30
09E-2
09A-20
09A-22
05C-24
09E-3
04C-3.1
04C-11.1
04C-3.2
04C-11.2
04C-12
04C-16
02B-33
02C-37
02A-4
17-9
07D-6
07D-27
07D-30
07D-25
07D-26
11-1
09C-2
09E-28
09A-14.1
09F-3
09A-1
09A-2
07D-40
07D-37
07D-42
07D-38
07D-43
07D-39
07D-41
06A-3
02B-7
02C-22
02B-11
02C-23
05C-11
07D-13
07D-21
07D-19
07D-9
07D-12
07D-23
07D-22
07D-10
07D-11
09E-4
09E-5
05C-9
02C-21
02B-18
02C-11
02B-26
02C-20
02B-25
02C-16
02B-27
04A-7
04B-12
02C-10
02B-32
02B-31
02C-35
02C-36
02C-34
02B-30
02C-33
02B-29
09A-24
09B.b-7
09B.b-14
09F-2
06C-53
06B-5
06B-19
05B-8
03-34
08-9
07A-40
05B-18
06C-2
05B-17
05B-26
01B-30
01B-32
01B-31
01B-27
05B-27
06B-16
01B-33.1
01B-33.2
05B-33.1
01B-2
01B-3
05B-33.2
05B-33.3
01A-11.1
02A-22
06B-9
04B-26
04A-17
06A-10
06C-36
06C-35
05A-4.1
06B-4
07D-33
09C-14
09C-6
09C-4
09C-5
09C-1
06C-6
07C-3
07C-10
07C-12
06A-28
10-9
07C-33
05A-4.2
01A-11.2
01B-11
06A-13
06A-12
06C-20
07B-35
06C-23
04A-20
05C-3
07B-20
05B-21
07C-29
09B.b-9
05B-24
06C-51
05B-9
10-5
06A-31
05C-12
05C-15
09A-17
07C-21
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
07B-21
05A-5
07D-14
04B-18
01A-2
01A-3
03-19.1
03-15.1
11-2
09A-3
09A-4
03-14
07B-17
10-3
10-1
05A-8.1
05A-8.2
02B-8
02C-24
09D-1
17-8
01A-24
01B-24
07D-36
03-19.2
03-15.2
09F-6
08-26
09D-5
06A-21
07B-5.2
07C-30.2
10-16
07B-9.1
02B-3
02B-15
02C-1
02C-32
04B-29
08-30
07B-5.1
07C-30.1
07A-13.1
07D-2
SP-52
SP-53
14
部品番号検索表
PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE
PART NO.INDEX NO.- REF NO.
PART NO.INDEX NO.- REF NO.
PART NO.INDEX NO.- REF NO.
PART NO.INDEX NO.- REF NO.
PART NO.INDEX NO.- REF NO.
PART NO.INDEX NO.- REF NO.
347S0506
347S0506
347S0508
347S0792
347S0811
347S0817
347S0848
347S0849
347S0850
347S0860
347S0873
347S0896
350N100321
350N100837A
350N100839A
350N100840A
350N2059A/B/C
350N2678A
350N2678A
350N2680A/B/C
350N2681D
350N2688D
350N2693D
350N2739B
350N2740F
350N2741F
350N2742B
350N2743A
350N2747B
350N2748B
350N2760B
350N2761D
350N2764C/D
350N2764C/D
350N2766B
350N2768B
350N2769E
350N2770B
350N2771B
350N2773B
350N2774B/C
350N2775A/B
350N2776B
350N2777A
350N2778B
350N2781
350N2784E/F
350N2786
350N2787E
350N2793B/C
350N2794
350N2795
350N2796
350N2797A/B
350N2801B
350N2802B
350N2803B
350N2807
350N2808C
350N2809
350N2812B
350N2813A
350N2814B/C
350N2815
350N2827A
350N2828B
350N2829A
350N2833A
350N2836B
350N2838
350N2839
350N2840A
350N2841A
350N2842A
350N2846B
350N2847A
350N2849
350N2858A
350N2877
350N2914
350N2944
350N2945
350N2976A
350N2977A
350N2978A
350N3098B
350N3289
350N3292
350N3295
350N3303
350N3368A
350N3372A
350N3394
350N3441
350Y100334
350Y100340
350Y100707
350Y1688K
350Y1745
350Y1762
350Y1793
350Y1802
350Y1818A/C
350Y1854/A
352N0598E
352N0604C/D
352N0612A
352N0629
352N100023
352N100024
355N0814A
355N0815A
356N10060
356N10061
356N10061
356N10062
356N10062
356N100732
356N100733
356N100734
356N10658A
356N10698
356N10699
356N10730/A
356N10763
356N10766A
356N10773
356N10776
356N10824
356N9038C
356N9039C
356N9043C
356N9048B
356N9050B
356N9067D
356N9068B
356N9104C
356N9107C
356N9108C
356N9120B
356N9121C
356N9123A
356N9124C
356N9206B
356N9209D
356N9214D
356N9273G
356N9274C
356N9275F
356N9278B
356N9278B
356N9280D
356N9302C
356N9330D
356N9338C
356N9341B/C
356N9342B
356N9349C
356N9350D
356N9356E
356N9359A
356N9360
356N9367B
356N9369B
356N9370C
356N9372B
356N9373A
356N9383A
356N9385D
356N9391
356N9393A
356N9394A
356N9395
356N9396
356N9400A
356N9401
356N9412
356N9413A
356N9417
356N9424
356N9429A
356N9430
356N9431B
356N9432A
356N9443
356N9446B
356N9446B
356N9448A
356N9449
356N9452C
356N9456
356N9457B
356N9461C
356N9463D
356N9487
356N9487
356N9487
356N9488
356N9489
356N9489
356N9490B
356N9491
356N9497A
356N9500/A
356N9501
356N9504B
356N9505
356N9506
356N9507A
356N9508
356N9512A
356N9512A
356N9517A
356N9518
356N9535B/C/D
356N9538B/C/D
356N9540/B
356N9552
356N9553/A
356N9554
356N9555B
356N9558
356N9559
356N9560
356N9586A
356N9728
356N9750
356N9827
356N9894A
356N9898
356N9899
356Y0297A
356Y0298
356Y0318
356Y0365
356Y0371
356Y0472
356Y0473A
356Y0474A
356Y0631
356Y0633B
356Y100315
356Y100458
356Y100534A
357N1490D
357N1491C/D/E
357N1502B
357N1503
357S0016
357Y0227A
357Y0228A
357Y100128
358N0225A
360N0570
360N0571
362N0733B
362N0734C
362N0738A
362N0741A
362N0757C/D
362Y0111
362Y0126A
363N2441A
363N2459B
012-201-09C
05B-1.1
06C-9
05C-18
07C-35
05B-15
05B-1.2
07B-9.2
07C-34
07A-13.2
09E-29
08-54
08-14
09A-21
09B.b-13
09B.b-11
09B.b-3
07A-16
01A-20
01B-20
07A-9
07A-8
05B-16.1
01A-6
07B-34
07A-19
07A-31
07A-7
07A-22
07A-29
07A-28
07A-20
07D-5
01A-19
01B-19
07A-1
07A-34
07A-10
07A-21
07A-18
07A-2
07A-41
07D-15
07D-28.2
07D-28.1
07D-32
07A-52
01A-1
07A-50
05A-2.1
06C-22
01B-6.1
09A-18
08-38
08-11
07A-30
07A-25
07A-27
07D-1
07A-33
07A-37
09C-8
07A-11
07A-12
06C-42
06C-41
09C-3
06C-39
08-32
06C-7
07A-36
07A-35
01B-1.1
06C-33
10-14
10-8
10-10
03-27
10-12
07A-48
07D-17
05A-2.3
05B-16.3
05A-2.2
02C-13
02B-28
05B-16.2
09E-6
09E-7
09E-8
09D-6
09F-11
09F-1
09A-23
09A-19
01B-6.2
01B-1.2
09B.b-1
01A-7
05A-9.3
05A-9.1
05A-9.2
01A-18
01B-7
01B-18
06C-32
06C-34
07A-5
06C-14
07D-29.2
07D-29.1
09E-9
09E-10
05A-7.2
01A-14.2
01B-14
01A-9.2
01B-9
06A-15.2
02A-26.2
02A-17.2
03-31.2
09E-11
09E-12
09D-7
02A-1
08-56
08-55
02A-28.2
08-53
07B-18
07C-16
07C-17
07C-22
07C-23
05C-6
05C-13
07B-32
07B-10
07B-7
07B-13
07C-26
07B-11
07B-1
02A-14
04C-5
06A-20
06A-4
06A-7
05A-7.1
04A-10
04B-11
04B-23
03-32
04B-2
02A-25
06A-15.1
05B-20.1
02A-24
06B-6
06B-7
07A-23
05C-32
07D-3
06B-1
06B-2
06A-11
06A-23
08-33
08-6
08-29
08-5
08-13.2
08-40
08-41
08-20
08-21
07E-6
07B-6
08-35
07A-38
06C-24
06C-21
09C-9
09C-12
06C-44
01A-16
01B-16
06C-5
07D-8
06C-40
06C-26
06C-27
10-7
03-31.1
07C-5
07C-6
07C-15
07C-1
07C-7
07C-13
06C-19
02A-28.1
06C-4
04C-14
06A-14
10-15
01A-9.1
01A-14.1
06C-3
06C-29
02B-16
02C-19
10-11
06A-27
02A-17.1
02A-26.1
06A-24
06B-17
06B-13
06B-12
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
06B-11
02A-27
02A-20
02A-31
10-13
05B-31
05B-20.2
05A-7.3
02C-5
04A-18
04B-27
08-27
08-13.1
05A-10.1
05A-10.3
05A-10.2
09E-13
09E-14
09E-15
09F-15
09F-17
08-7
08-23
09B.b-5
08-15
03-6
17-5
07B-30
08-28
04B-15
04A-3
10-6
09E-16
09E-17
09E-18
05B-13
02A-23
06B-8
04B-19
03-3
05B-32
09F-9
05C-26
05B-11
SP-53
SP-54
14
部品番号検索表
PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE
PART NO.INDEX NO.- REF NO.
PART NO.INDEX NO.- REF NO.
PART NO.INDEX NO.- REF NO.
PART NO.INDEX NO.- REF NO.
363N2521A
363N2537B
363N2544A
363N2549
363N2574A
363N2824
363S0013
364N0090
364N0090
364N0108
364N0109
364S0003
364S0003
367S0027
369N0271A
376N0238
382N1578
382N1625B
382N1630
382N1630
382N1631
382N1637
382N1677A
382N1678
382N1678
382N1679
382N1680B
382N1681
382N1681
382N1691
382N1691
382N1731
382N1755
382N1756
382N1838
385N0081
385N0082A
385N0083
385N0084
385N0088
385N0088
385N0099
385N0099
386N1149A
386N1149A
386N1179C/D
386N1218
386N1221A
386N1265
386N1289
386N1321
386N1393
386N1394
386N1395
386N1396A
386N1397B
386Y0046A
386Y0047
388N100295A
388N1220A
388N1221A
388N1255
388N2539B
388N2539B
388N2543A
388N2544A
388N2548/A
388N3121
388N5350C
388N5351C
388N5352C
388N5353B
388N5362
388N5362
388N5362
388N5363A
388N5365
388N5366
388N5389A
388N5390A
388N5408
388N5408
388N5409
388N5409
388N5412B
388S0031
388S0036
388S2155
395NA001
401N0845
401N0847
401N0853
401N0854J
401N0855G
401N0856C
401N0864B
401N0870A
401N0871A
401N0871A
401N0879A
401N0883A
401N0884A
401N0885
401N0886
401N0892A
401N0896
401N0915
401N0916A
401N0917
401N0967A
405N100203
405N100203
405N100245
405N100246
405N3072
405N3077/A
405N3077A
405N3086/A
405N3087
405N3101
405N3102
405N3103
405N3104
405N3104
405N3105
405N3109
405N3109
405N3114
405N3115
405N3117
405N3212
405N3212
405N3422
405N3423
405N3448
405N3448
405N3701
405N3702
405S0179
407N0134A
603N0242
605N0036/A
606N0038A/B
813Y0146
813Y0158
824Y0118A
831Y0024B/D
831Y0032D
840Y0099
840Y0102
840Y0122
845Y0097
845Y0098A/B/C
857Y0418A
890Y0006A/B
898Y0981
898Y0993F
898Y100045
898Y100093
898Y100094
898Y100095
898Y100276
898Y100302
898Y1082A
898Y1109
898Y1112
898Y1345
012-201-09C
06A-2
05B-22
05C-19
05B-23.2
05B-23.1
09E-19
07C-24
09B.a-7
09B.b-15
04B-6
04A-15
06B-14
08-18
09E-30
07C-25
08-10
07A-26
08-37
03-17
06C-1
01A-17
06C-38
06C-52
01A-13
01B-13
05A-11
05C-29
01A-29
01B-38
01A-28
01B-37
08-36
01B-34
01B-35
09E-20
01A-8.1
06C-11
01B-29
05B-30
01A-23
01B-23
01A-8.2
01B-8
04A-19
04B-28
02A-19
07B-16
05A-6.1
05A-6.2
10-22
05C-30
09F-7
09F-8
09F-16
09F-5
09F-4
06B-10
06B-3
09B.b-2
02C-28
03-24
09E-21
04A-5
04B-14
05C-4
05C-21
02B-17
09F-19
01A-5.1
01A-4.1
02A-21
04B-20
07C-2
07C-8
07C-14
01A-12
06C-17.1
06C-12.1
06C-12.2
06C-17.2
01A-5.2
01B-5
01A-4.2
01B-4
01B-28
05B-7.1
05B-7.2
09F-14
07B-15
10-19
10-20
10-4.1
05C-20
05C-23
05C-2
03-33.1
10-2
06C-10.1
06C-16.1
10-4.2
06C-10.2
06C-16.2
05C-27
10-17
10-21
10-18
05B-25
06A-30
05B-28
03-33.2
09B.a-9
09B.b-18
07A-49.2
08-12
07A-49.1
06C-15
06C-57
07A-17
07A-39
09C-10
07A-47
05A-1
09E-31
11-4
11-3
09B.a-8
09B.b-17
09A-11
09A-10
09D-11
01A-26
01B-26
PART NO.INDEX NO.- REF NO.
PART NO.INDEX NO.- REF NO.
09E-22
09E-23
09C-13
11-6
09F-21
09F-22
11-7
07A-3
07A-6
03-8
03-7
08-34
08-52
02A-29
09A-6.1
09A-6.2
03-9
03-1
03-35
07D-18
07D-4
06C-54
17-1
17-6
03-20
08-57
09B.a-1
09B.a-2
09B.a-3
07D-44
09B.b-19
09A-14.2
06A-32
06A-33
08-51
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
SP-54
SP-55
15
ネジ・座金類の表示記号一覧表
TABLE OF SCREWS / WASHERS INDICATION SYMBOLS
消耗品一覧表
LIST OF QUICK WEARING PARTS
List Of Quick Wearing Parts
Table of Screws/Washers Indication Symbols
No.
Part name
Indication
Symbols
Symbol in the
dissassembly
chart (example)
Size
1
Cross-recessed flat-head
screw
S
S3×10
M3×10
1
Fixing plug
T
**T4×8
M4×8
M4×10
2
Binding band
A
M2.6×16
M2.6×16
3
N.K. clamp
B
B3×6
M3×6
M3×30
M3×35
4
Edging
5
Edge saddle
2
3
4
Cross-recessed trusshead screw
Cross-recessed panhead screw with spring
washer
Cross-recessed panhead screw with spring
and plain washers
BR3×10
(308S9420310)
5
Cross-recessed
hexagonheaded screw
with spring and plain
washers
BR
6
Hexagon-headed bolt
Q
BR3×12
(308S9420312)
Q3×20
7
Hexagon-Headed bolt
with spring and plain
washer
BQ
BQ4×10
M4×10
8
Deltight screw*
DT
*DT3×6
（308S0254）
9
Plax**
Ps
**Ps3×6
10
Hexagon-headed
setscrew (double-point)
WP
WP4×6
M3×6
M4×8
Nominal
diameter
3×6
M3×5
M4×6
M4×8
11 TPscrew
TP
TP3×6
（308S0311）
M3×6
M4×8
12 Hexagon nut
Na
Na20
M16
M20
13 Plain washer
W
W4
M4
SW
SW3
M3
14 Spring washer
16
M3×10
M3×12
M4×8
M4×12
Shape
No.
Part name
Shape
M3×20
15 E ring
E
E6
Nominal
diameter 4
Nominal
diameter 6
16 K-CL ring
KL
KL4（315N0009）
KL6（315N0010）
M4
M6
* ： Self-tapping screw with a noncircular end
** ： Stainless-made
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
SP-55
SP-56
17
治具
JIG
治具
JIG
RANK REF.
PART NO.
E
1 890Y0006A/B
E
2 136Y8889A
E
3 136Y8848A
E
4 136Y8840A
E
5 357N1502B
012-201-09C
E
6
898Y0981
E
E
E
7
8
9
136Y8812A
347N2007
338N100015
工具
ケーブル
ケーブル
ケーブル
台
ループバック
ケーブル
ケーブル
スペーサ
リング
PART NAME
Tool
Cable
Cable
Cable
Base
QTY.
REMARKS
1
2 L=400mm
1
1
1
Loop Back Cable
1
Cable
Spacer
Ring
1
1
2
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
SERIAL NO.
17
REFER TO
SP-56
SP-57
BLANK PAGE
012-201-09C
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
SP-57
SP-58
BLANK PAGE
012-201-09C
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
SP-58
SP-59
BLANK PAGE
012-201-09C
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
SP-59
Control Sheet
Issue date
CR-IR 364 (Type U) Service Manual
04.15.2003
07.31.2003
11.30.2003
06.30.2004
09.30.2004
11.30.2004
07.15.2006
06.10.2008
Revision number
00
01
02
03
04
05
07
09
Reason
New release (FM3976)
Revision (FM4055)
Revision (FM4147)
Revision (FM4357)
Revision (FM4437)
Revision (FM4505)
Revision (FM4915)
Revision (FM5369)
Preventive Maintenance (PM)
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Pages affected
All pages
All pages
All pages
1-9, 9.1, 9.2, 10-13, 17- 29, 32-47
1-4, 47
10-59
All pages
All pages
PM-1
1.
Preventive Maintenance Program
1.1
How to Use the Preventive Maintenance
Volume
- Perform the corresponding maintenance programs according to the notations of age
( 0.5Y , 1Y , 1.5Y , 2Y , 2.5Y , 3Y , 3.5Y , 4Y , 4.5Y , 5Y , 5.5Y ,
120,000
times
).
- The preventive maintenance program list is prepared for the respective ages of 0.5,
1, 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 4.5, 5 and 5.5 years. As the tasks to be performed depend
on the age of service, follow the list in carrying out the preventive maintenance
program.
1.2
Notation of Age
The following notations are mentioned for the respective maintenance programs.
Check what the notation means before starting the task.
0.5Y
1Y
1.5Y
2Y
2.5Y
3Y
3.5Y
4Y
4.5Y
5Y
5.5Y
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
120,000
times
012-201-09E
Procedure performed at an age of 0.5 year.
Procedure performed at an age of 1 year.
Procedure performed at an age of 1.5 years.
Procedure performed at an age of 2 years.
Procedure performed at an age of 2.5 years.
Procedure performed at an age of 3 years.
Procedure performed at an age of 3.5 years.
Procedure performed at an age of 4 years.
Procedure performed at an age of 4.5 years.
Procedure performed at an age of 5 years.
Procedure performed at an age of 5.5 years.
: Procedure performed when the erasure lamp lighting count reaches
120,000 times.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-1
PM-2
1.3
Preventive Maintenance Program List
INSTRUCTION
Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power cable and additional protective ground wire connections and securing the parts with retaining screws. To
maintain safety, ensure that the parts and retaining screws removed for servicing purposes are restored to states existing upon installation. After the parts and retaining screws are
restored to the above-mentioned states, follow the procedures set forth in this service manual to verify that the retaining screws are securely tightened to properly secure the parts.
Preventive Maintenance Program List
Refer to the corresponding procedure for preventive maintenance when either the age of the machine or the erasure lamp lighting count reaches the specified value. Shown below is
the correspondence between the list of maintenance programs and the age of the machine. Refer to sections 1.3.1 and later for the preventive maintenance program for each age.
Maintenance program
2. Checking the Error Log
0.5Y 1Y 1.5Y 2Y 2.5Y 3Y 3.5Y 4Y 4.5Y 5Y
: Procedure which must be performed for each preventive maintenance
: Procedure to be performed when the erasure unit is replaced.
Replacement
Time
5.5Y requirements
Jigs/tools/measuring instruments used
parts
10 min
2 min
2 min
20 min
2 min
5 min
5 min
15 min
Erasure unit:
15 min
840Y0099
10 min
10 min
10 min
Electromagnetic brake releasing jig
5 min
10 min
Interlock defeating jig cable in the exposure unit
5 min
10 min
5. Checking for Image Problems
6. Setting the Termination Mode (*1)
7. Removing the Exposure Unit Front Cover (*1)
8. Removing the Grid Support Assembly (*1)
9.1 Cleaning the Erasure Filter
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
9.2 Replacing the Erasure Unit (*2)
10. Test Conveyance (*1)
11. Cleaning the Interior of the Machine
12. Cleaning the SUS Belts and Their Belt Pulleys (*1)
13. Reinstalling the Grid Support Assembly (*1)
14. Checking the Interlocks (1)
15. Reinstalling the Exposure Unit Front Cover (*1)
16. Checking the Interlocks (2)
17. Delta Y Calculation Verification and
Two-Dimensional Offset Data Update
18. Checking for Image Problems
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
10 min
-
-
-
-
-
-
20 min
5 min
5 min
5 min
5 min
10 min
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
10 min
3. Checking the Erasure Lamp Lighting Count
4. Checking IP Exposure Count
19. Clearing the Error Log
20. Resetting the Erasure Lamp Lighting Count (*3)
21. Cleaning around the Machine and the Exterior Cover
22. Checking for Improper Protective Grounding
23. Checking the Gonad Protector
24. Checking the Patient Aid Belt (Only in Japan)
*1: Perform when the erasure unit is replaced or during the preventive maintenance at the age of 2 and 4 years.
*2: Replace the exposure unit when the erasure lamp lighting count reaches 120,000 times.
*3: The erasure lamp lighting count should be reset only when the erasure unit is replaced.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-2
PM-3
1.3.1
Maintenance Program at the Age of 0.5, 1.5, 2.5, 3.5,
4.5 and 5.5 Years
Maintenance program at the age of 0.5, 1.5, 2.5, 3.5, 4.5 and 5.5 years
and when the erasure lamp lighting count reaches 120,000 times
( 0.5Y ,
1.5Y
,
2.5Y
,
3.5Y
,
4.5Y
,
5.5Y
,
120,000
times
Checking the Error Log
Checking the Erasure Lamp Lighting Count
Checking IP Exposure Count
Checking for Image Problems
Setting the Termination Mode (*1)
Removing the Exposure Unit Front Cover (*1)
Maintenance program at the age of 1, 3 and 5 years and when the
erasure lamp lighting count reaches 120,000 times
(
1Y
,
3Y
,
5Y
,
120,000
times
)
Maintenance program
Jigs/tools/
Time
Replacement
measuring
requirements
parts
instruments used
10 min
2 min
2 min
20 min
2 min
8. Removing the Grid Support Assembly (*1)
5 min
5 min
9.2 Replacing the Erasure Unit (*2)
15 min
10. Test Conveyance (*1)
10 min
12. Cleaning the SUS Belts and Their Belt
Pulleys (*1)
10 min
13. Reinstalling the Grid Support Assembly (*1)
15. Reinstalling the Exposure Unit Front Cover (*1)
16. Checking the Interlocks (2)
18. Checking for Image Problems
19. Clearing the Error Log
20. Resetting the Erasure Lamp Lighting Count (*3)
21. Cleaning around the Machine and the Exterior
Cover
22. Checking for Improper Protective Grounding
5 min
5 min
10 min
20 min
5 min
5 min
Erasure unit:
840Y0099 or
840Y0122
Electromagnetic
brake releasing
jig
5 min
5 min
*1: Perform when the erasure unit is replaced or during the preventive maintenance at the age of
2 and 4 years.
*2: Replace the exposure unit when the erasure lamp lighting count reaches 120,000 times.
*3: The erasure lamp lighting count should be reset only when the erasure unit is replaced.
012-201-09E
Maintenance Program at the Age of 1, 3 and 5 Years
)
Maintenance program
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.3.2
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Checking the Error Log
Checking the Erasure Lamp Lighting Count
Checking IP Exposure Count
Checking for Image Problems
Setting the Termination Mode (*1)
Removing the Exposure Unit Front Cover (*1)
Removing the Grid Support Assembly (*1)
Jigs/tools/
Time
Replacement
measuring
requirements
parts
instruments used
10 min
2 min
2 min
20 min
2 min
5 min
5 min
9.2 Replacing the Erasure Unit (*2)
15 min
10. Test Conveyance (*1)
12. Cleaning the SUS Belts and Their Belt
Pulleys (*1)
13. Reinstalling the Grid Support Assembly (*1)
15. Reinstalling the Exposure Unit Front Cover
(*1)
16. Checking the Interlocks (2)
17. Delta Y Calculation Verification and
Two-Dimensional Offset Data Update
18. Checking for Image Problems
19. Clearing the Error Log
20. Resetting the Erasure Lamp Lighting Count
(*3)
21. Cleaning around the Machine and the
Exterior Cover
22. Checking for Improper Protective Grounding
23. Checking the Gonad Protector
10 min
10 min
Erasure unit:
840Y0099 or
840Y0122
Electromagnetic
brake releasing jig
5 min
5 min
10 min
10 min
20 min
5 min
5 min
5 min
5 min
10 min
*1: Perform when the erasure unit is replaced or during the preventive maintenance at the age of
2 and 4 years.
*2: Replace the exposure unit when the erasure lamp lighting count reaches 120,000 times.
*3: The erasure lamp lighting count should be reset only when the erasure unit is replaced.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-3
PM-4
1.3.3
Maintenance Program at the Age of 2 and 4 Years
Maintenance program at the age of 2 and 4 years and when the
erasure lamp lighting count reaches 120,000 times
(
2Y
,
4Y
,
120,000
times
)
Maintenance program
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Checking the Error Log
Checking the Erasure Lamp Lighting Count
Checking IP Exposure Count
Checking for Image Problems
Setting the Termination Mode (*1)
Removing the Exposure Unit Front Cover
(*1)
8. Removing the Grid Support Assembly (*1)
9.1 Cleaning the Erasure Filter
Time
Replacement
requirements
parts
10 min
2 min
2 min
20 min
2 min
5 min
5 min
15 min
9.2 Replacing the Erasure Unit (*2)
15 min
10. Test Conveyance (*1)
11. Cleaning the Interior of the Machine
12. Cleaning the SUS Belts and Their Belt
Pulleys (*1)
13. Reinstalling the Grid Support Assembly (*1)
10 min
10 min
14. Checking the Interlocks (1)
10 min
15. Reinstalling the Exposure Unit Front Cover
(*1)
16. Checking the Interlocks (2)
17. Delta Y Calculation Verification and
Two-Dimensional Offset Data Update
18. Checking for Image Problems
19. Clearing the Error Log
20. Resetting the Erasure Lamp Lighting Count
(*3)
21. Cleaning around the Machine and the
Exterior Cover
22. Checking for Improper Protective
Grounding
23. Checking the Gonad Protector
23. Checking the Patient Aid Belt (Only in
Japan)
Jigs/tools/
measuring
instruments used
10 min
Erasure unit:
840Y0099 or
840Y0122
Electromagnetic
brake releasing jig
5 min
Interlock defeating
jig cable in the
exposure unit
5 min
10 min
10 min
20 min
5 min
5 min
5 min
5 min
10 min
10 min
*1: Perform when the erasure unit is replaced or during the preventive maintenance at the age of
2 and 4 years.
*2: Replace the exposure unit when the erasure lamp lighting count reaches 120,000 times.
*3: The erasure lamp lighting count should be reset only when the erasure unit is replaced.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-4
PM-5
2.
Checking the Error Log
(5) From Window’s Start menu, choose “Run...”, type in or select [“C:\
Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\Tool\RuPcTool\RuPCTool.exe”], and click
the [OK] button.
(1) Turn ON the power of the CL.
(2) Turn ON the circuit breaker of the power distribution switchboard.
(3) Turn ON the power of the RU.
Power ON in the following order.
- Power circuit breaker of the machine main body
- Start switch on the operation panel
(4) Press the PC's [Windows] key of the CL to open the Start menu of
Windows.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-5
PM-6
(6) Open the ERROR-DB window of the RU.
(7) Select the log to check the error log.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-6
PM-7
3.
Checking the Erasure Lamp
Lighting Count
NOTE
If the erasure lamp illumination count is more than 120,000, replace the erasure unit
and reset the erasure lamp illumination count.
(1) From the RU PC-TOOL window, open the EDIT HISTORY window.
(2) Check the erasure lamp lighting count, and determine whether the
erasure lamp is to be replaced during the current servicing.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-7
PM-8
4.
Checking IP Exposure Count
(1) From the RU PC-TOOL window, open the EDIT HISTORY window.
(2) Check the IP exposure count.
(3) Click on
on the upper right of the RU PC-TOOL screen to quit the
RU PC-TOOL.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-8
PM-9
5.
Checking for Image Problems
5.2
Updating the X-ray Damage Correction
Data
INSTRUCTION
NOTE
The check for image problems must be conducted without the grid and photo-timer (light
receiving unit) installed.
A machine with the grid and the photo-timer (light receiving unit) installed should be
checked with both of them removed and with both of them installed, respectively.
The X-ray damage correction data cannot properly be updated if the scanner
temperature is outside the range from 35°C to 40°C.
Update the X-ray damage correction data while the scanner temperature is within the
predetermined range.
5.1
Checking for Irregularities, Density
Problems, and Sensitivity Problems
(1) From the CL, register the following exposure menu:
- "Test" - "Sensitivity" (size: 17 inches x 17 inches)
(2) Expose an IP to a dose of 1 mR.
REFERENCE
The X-ray damage ratio refers to a degree of damage by the X-ray exposure
expressed as a numerical value. The value is decreased by updating the X-ray
damage correction data.
(1) Open the RU PC-TOOL window.
(2) Start the MUTL of RU.
REFERENCE
Typical exposure conditions for exposing an IP to a dose of 1 mR are indicated
below:
Distance:
1.8 m
Voltage:
80 kV
Amperage: 50 mA
Time:
0.013 sec.
(3) Have the printer generate a film output.
(4) Check the output film for irregularities and biased densities.
(5) Check for sensitivity and density problems.
Check to make sure that the system sensitivity value and the film density value
appearing on the output film are approximately 200 and 1.2, respectively.
{PM:5.6_Checking the Film Character Format Information}
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-9
PM-10
(3) Record (note down) the x-ray damage ratio.
REFERENCE
The X-ray damage ratio is a numerical value that indicates the severity of IP
damage caused by exposure to X-rays. Normally, this value increases, as more
IP damaged portions occur. However, the X-ray damage ratio varies depending
on the exposure conditions.
The value recorded (noted down) here will be used in step 10.
(5) Click the [Display Scanner Temperature] to verify that the temperature
(average) is within the range from 35°C to 40°C.
INSTRUCTIONS
- If the scanner unit temperature is below 35°C, exit the current mode, and then
repeat an “IP erasure” operation until the temperature is 35°C or higher (and
40°C or lower).
{Instruction Manual}
- If the scanner unit temperature is above 40°C, remove the exposure unit front
cover, and wait until the temperature in the scanner unit is 35°C or higher (and
40°C or lower). However, if the scanner unit temperature may lower to 40 °C
or lower in a short time with the exposure unit front cover put on, do not remove
the exposure unit front cover.
{PM:7._Removing the Exposure Unit Front Cover}
(4) Click the [Correction >>].
(6) Click the [UpDate X-ray Damage Correction Data].
(7) When a confirmation window opens, click [OK].
(8) From the CL, register the following exposure menu:
- "Test" - "Sensitivity" (size: 17 inches x 17 inches)
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-10
PM-11
(9) Expose an IP to a dose of 10 mR.
NOTES
- Set the X-ray tube irradiation field for 17 inches x 17 inches size.
- Ensure that no X-ray block obstacle such as a lead character marking is placed
between the X-ray tube and exposure unit front cover.
- Make sure that neither the grid nor the photo-timer is installed.
5.3
Checking the Format (Subscan Length)
(1) From the CL, register the following exposure menu:
- "Test" - "Sensitivity" (size: 14 inches x 17 inches)
(2) Attach steel rule to the center of the exposure unit front cover.
REFERENCE
Typical exposure conditions for exposing an IP to a dose of 10 mR are indicated
below:
Distance: 1.8 m
Voltage:
80 kV
Amperage: 50 mA
Time:
0.13 sec
After about 1 minute, the MUTL window displays the calculation results and reads
"RESULT: OK". In this instance, you may ignore the calculation results.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK":
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
(10) Compare the damage ratio after the X-ray damage data update with
the unupdated data (value noted down in procedure (3)), and check to
make sure that the X-ray damage ratio has lowered.
(3) Expose an IP to a dose of 1 mR.
REFERENCE
Typical exposure conditions for exposing an IP to a dose of 1 mR are indicated
below:
Distance:
1.8 m
Voltage:
80 kV
Amperage: 50 mA
Time:
0.013 sec.
(4) Have the printer generate a film output.
(11) Click on
on the upper right of the RU PC-TOOL screen to quit the
RU PC-TOOL.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-11
PM-12
(7) Check to make sure that the ratio of expansion and contraction of the
steel rule on the output film is 0.6% or less.
(5) Measure the length of a steel rule on the output film, and convert it to
a length of a steel rule at a 100 % magnification.
<Formula: C>
<Formula: A>
Steel rule length (mm) output at 100 % magnification =
Actual length of steel rule on output film (mm)
Film reduction percentage (%)/100
|Steel rule length projected onto IP (mm) – Steel rule length output at 100 % magnification|
x 100 % ≤ 0.6 %
Steel rule length projected onto IP
INSTRUCTION
If the ratio of expansion and contraction of the steel rule on the output film is
0.6% or larger, adjust the format (subscan length).
{IN:34.2_Checking and Adjusting the Format (Subscan Length) Procedures
for Adjusting Format (Subscan Length)}
Calculation example:
(6) Calculate the steel rule length projected onto the IP.
<Formula: B>
Steel rule length projected onto IP (mm) =
Actual length of steel rule (mm) x (1 +
23.5 mm or 28.5 mm
X-ray tube-to-exposure plane distance (mm)
REFERENCE
23.5 (mm): Distance from the exposure plane when the IP is at the exposure
position.
Use the value of 28.5 (mm) when the spacer in the exposure unit (on the rear
side) is removed so as to install the following photo-timers.
- Hitachi's photo-timer (ion chamber AID)
- COMET's photo-timer (3ch)
- Siemens' photo-timer (ion chamber, 3ch)
- Philips' photo-timer (ion chamber, 3ch)
)
- Actual steel rule length: 175 mm
- Actual steel rule length on output film: 181.0 mm
- Film reduction percentage: 100% (High density setting/14 inches x 17 inches/Single
image output)
- Distance between X-ray tube and exposure plane: 1,000 mm
- Distance from exposure plane with IP located at exposure position: 23.5 mm
<Formula: A>
- Steel rule length when output at 100 % magnification:
181.0 mm
≈ 181.0 mm
1
<Formula: B>
23.5 mm
- Steel rule length projected onto IP: 175 mm x (1+ 1,000 mm ) ≈ 179.1 mm
<Formula: C>
- Ratio of expansion and contraction of steel |179.1 mm-181.0 mm|
x 100 % ≈ 1.06 %
179.1 mm
rule on output film:
* Since the reduction percentage of the steel rule on the film is 1.06 %, it is
determined that the reduction percentage of the steel rule on the film does not
conform to a value of 0.6 %. Therefore, the adjustment of the format (subscan
length) need be performed.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-12
PM-13
5.4
Checking the Format (Subscan Start Point)
REFERENCE
The film output for checking the format (subscan length) is used to check the format
(subscan start point).
(1) Measure the distance from the film frame to the image start point, and
convert this into a distance when output at a 100 % magnification.
Check to make sure that the converted value is 2.0 mm or less.
INSTRUCTION
If the value that the distance from the film frame to the image start point is
converted into a distance when output at a 100 % magnification is 2.0 mm or
larger, the format (subscan start point) need be adjusted.
{IN:34.3_Procedures for Checking and Adjusting the Format (Subscan Start
Point) Procedures for Adjusting the Format (Subscan Start Point)}
Calculation example:
- Actual distance from film frame to image start point: 2.5 mm
- Film reduction percentage: 100 % (High density setting/14 inches x 17 inches/
Single image output)
Distance from film frame to image start point when output at a 100 % = 2.5 mm
≈ 2.5 mm
1
magnification
* Since the value that the distance from the film frame to the image start point is
converted into a distance when output at a 100 % magnification is 2.0 mm or
larger, the format (subscan start point) need be adjusted.
<Formula>
Distance from film frame to image start point when output at a 100 %
magnification = Actual distance film frame to image start point
< 2.0 (mm)
Film reduction percentage (%)/100
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-13
PM-14
5.5 Checking for False Images and Problems in
Read Center
(5) Check to make sure that no false image is included in the image of the
frame and the steel rule on the output film.
Checking for False Image
(1) From the CL, register the following exposure menu:
- "Test" - "Sensitivity" (Size: 17 inches×17 inches)
(2) Attach 150 mm steel rules to the center of the vertical and horizontal
exposure center lines on the exposure unit front cover.
(6) Detach the steel rules from the exposure unit front cover.
Checking the Read Center
Have on hand the output film used for " Checking for False Image". Check that the
steel rule images are centered with respect to the vertical and horizontal exposure
center lines.
(3) Expose an IP to a dose of 1 mR.
REFERENCE
Typical exposure conditions for exposing an IP to a dose of 1 mR are indicated
below:
Distance:
1.8 m
Voltage:
80 kV
Amperage: 50 mA
Time:
0.013 sec.
(4) Have the printer generate a film output.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-14
PM-15
5.6
Checking the Film Character Format
Information
Make sure that the film character format information is displayed on the output film.
Verify that none of the characters look blurred or broken.
(1) Check the film character format information.
Check the following:
- The film character format information that has been set is correct.
- There is nothing abnormal such as blurred or broken characters.
REFERENCE
The details of the film character format information and the character display
locations are as follows.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-15
PM-16
6.
Setting the Termination Mode
NOTE
Set the termination mode when the erasure unit is replaced or in the preventive
maintenance at the age of 2 and 4 years. The procedure need not be performed on
other occasions.
(4) Choose Conveyance Check to set the termination mode.
INSTRUCTIONS
- If the erasure unit is to be replaced in the preventive maintenance at the age
of 0.5 year, set the termination mode to HEAD-MNT (erasure unit replacement
mode).
- Set the termination mode to IP-MNT (IP replacement mode) in the preventive
maintenance at the age of 1 and 2 years.
(1) Remove the grid.
{Instruction Manual}
(2) Open the RU PC-TOOL window.
(3) Start the MUTL of RU.
(5) Click on
on the upper right of the MUTL screen to quit the MUTL.
(6) Click on
on the upper right of the RU PC-TOOL screen to quit the
RU PC-TOOL.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-16
PM-17
(7) Turn OFF the power of the RU.
Power OFF in the following order.
- "Shutdown" button on the operation panel.
- Power circuit breaker of the machine main body
(8) Turn OFF the circuit breaker of the power distribution switchboard.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-17
PM-18
7.
Removing the Exposure Unit Front
Cover
NOTE
Take the following procedures for removing/reinstalling the exposure unit front cover
at the time of replacing the erasure unit or in the preventive maintenance at the age of
2 and 4 years.
(1) Remove the exposure unit front cover.
INSTRUCTIONS
- When the front cover of the exposure unit is to be removed, be sure to disconnect
the cable connector (H-CN23). If the front cover of the exposure unit is to be
removed without disconnecting the cable connector (H-CN23), the connector
might get damaged or the cable might be broken.
- When the front cover of the exposure unit is to be removed, do not bring it into
contact with the shaft (door sensing) of the grid replacement cover interlock
switches (MSH1 and MSH12).
CAUTIONS
- When servicing the interior of the exposure unit, exercise care not to bend or
damage the SUS belts.
- When servicing the SUS belts and their belt pulleys within the exposure unit,
be sure to wear gloves.
If they are accidentally touched with bare hands or soiled with dust, dirt, or
other foreign matters, be sure to wipe them clean with a cloth dampened with
dehydrated ethanol.
- Do not touch the guide rails with bare hands when servicing in the exposure
unit.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-18
PM-19
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-19
PM-20
8.
Removing the Grid Support
Assembly
NOTE
Take the following procedures for removing/reinstalling the grid support assembly at
the time of replacing the erasure unit or in the preventive maintenance at the age of 2
and 4 years.
8.1
(2) Remove the grid support assembly.
INSTRUCTION
When the grid support assembly is to be removed, be sure to disconnect the
cable connector (SZ6). If the grid support assembly is to be removed without
disconnecting the cable connector (SZ6), the connector might get damaged or
the cable might be broken.
For units of “#20001 to #24999”
(1) Remove the cover on the top of the grid support assembly.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-20
PM-21
8.2
For units of "#25001 or later”
(1) Remove the cover on the top of the grid support assembly.
012-201-09E
(2) Draw out the shield plates from the right- and left-hand side faces of
the grid support assembly.
(3) Remove the shield plate retaining bracket under the grid support
assembly.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-21
PM-22
(4) Remove the grid support assembly.
INSTRUCTION
When the grid support assembly is to be removed, be sure to disconnect the
cable connector (SZ6). If the grid support assembly is to be removed without
disconnecting the cable connector (SZ6), the connector might get damaged or
the cable might be broken.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-22
PM-23
9.
Cleaning the Erasure Filter or
Replacing the Erasure Unit
NOTE
If the erasure lamp illumination count is more than “120,000” in “3. Checking the
Erasure Lamp Lighting Count”, replace the erasure unit without cleaning the erasure
filter.
{PM:9.2_Replacing the Erasure Unit}
9.1
(1) Attach a IP protective sheet.
CAUTION
If your hand, your finger, or tape comes into contact with the IP fluorescent
surface, clean the IP.
{MC:5.1.4_Cleaning the IP}
Cleaning the Erasure Filter
CAUTIONS
- Do not touch the surface (erasure filter face) of the erasure lamp immediately
after the operation is stopped. Since it remains at high temperatures, you may
suffer burns.
- When servicing the erasure unit, be sure to wear a wristband to ground your
body. If your body is not grounded, static buildup on your body may damage
board-mounted electronic components.
- After the erasure unit is cooled down, place it on a clean sheet to prevent it
from being soiled by dust or dirt on the floor. Also, ensure that the erasure
unit is laid down with the erasure filter surface facing downward.
- When removing/installing the erasure unit, exercise care not to drop the
screws.
NOTE
The mass of the erasure unit is approx. 2 kg. Carefully handle the erasure unit when
you remove or install it.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-23
PM-24
(2) Remove the cable retaining brackets.
012-201-09E
(3) Remove the brackets that retain the erasure unit and scanner unit.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-24
PM-25
(4) Disconnect the cable from the erasure unit connector.
(5) Remove the erasure unit.
NOTE
INSTRUCTIONS
When the connectors (CN3, CN21 and CN22) are to be disconnected, do not pull
the cables too firmly.
- When grasping the erasure unit, do not touch its printed circuit board, cables
such as a flat cables, or erasure filter.
- If you inadvertently touch the erasure filter, clean it with a moistened cloth.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-25
PM-26
INSTRUCTIONS
- When you remove the erasure unit, remove the right- and left-hand side
mounting screws (4 places). In this instance, first remove the upper two screws
and then remove the lower two screws. Failure to observe this precaution may
tilt the erasure unit and damage the IP fluorescent surface.
- When removing the erasure unit, be sure to support the erasure unit by hand
for removing.
(6) With a moistened cloth, clean the erasure filter (surface only).
CAUTIONS
- Do not use ethanol for cleaning the erasure filter surface. Wipe only the
erasure filter surface clean with a moistened cloth.
- Never remove the erasure lamps.
(7) Reinstall the erasure unit.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
INSTRUCTIONS
- When grasping the erasure unit, do not touch its erasure filter and printed
circuit boards.
- If you inadvertently touch the erasure filter, clean it with a moistened cloth.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-26
PM-27
INSTRUCTIONS
INSTRUCTIONS
- Insert the flat cable horizontally into its position. Use care not to erroneously
interchange its front and back surfaces.
- Properly mount the cable retaining bracket for the JCT21B board.
- Insert the flat cable all the way into the connector.
- Properly mount the cable retaining bracket for the JCT21A board.
(8) Remove the IP protective sheet.
NOTE
Store the removed IP protective sheet for later use.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-27
PM-28
9.2
Replacing the Erasure Unit
(2) Remove the erasure unit from the rest.
NOTE
Replace the erasure unit only when the erasure lamp lighting count is found to be
more than 120,000 when the “3. Checking the Erasure Lamp Lighting Count” program
is performed. When the erasure unit is replaced, you must also reset the erasure lamp
lighting count.
{PM:20._Resetting the Erasure Lamp Lighting Count}
(1) Opening the packing box and then obtain the erasure unit and its rest.
(3) Replace the erasure unit with a new one.
When removing/installing the erasure unit, refer to the procedure set forth under
“9.1 Cleaning the Erasure Filter”.
{PM:9.1_Cleaning the Erasure Filter}
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-28
PM-29
10. Test Conveyance
WARNING
When servicing through the use of the interlock defeating jig cable in the
exposure unit, follow the precautions below against laser radiation.
- Never fail to observe the procedures set forth in the service manual.
- Never place your finger or other part of your body in an area exposed to a
laser beam.
- Never place a mirror or other light-reflecting article in the optical path of a
laser beam.
- Never change the optical path of a laser beam.
- Never remove the scanner unit while the laser is activated.
- When checking the scanner unit while it is uncovered, never stare at the
secondary scattered laser light. Also, do not forget to wear safety goggles.
012-201-09E
(1) Retain the grid replacement cover interlock switches (MSH1 and
MSH12) with a tape or the like, and release the interlock switches.
REFERENCE
If two sets of the interlock defeating jig cables in the exposure unit are present,
they need not be retained with the tape. Disconnect the cable connector (H-CN29),
and connect the connector (H-CN29) of the interlock defeating jig cable in the
exposure unit.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-29
PM-30
(2) Remove the bottom cover of the exposure unit.
(3) Disconnect the cable connector (H-CN25), and connect the interlock
defeating jig cable connector (H-CN25) in the exposure unit.
(4) Turn ON the circuit breaker of the power distribution switchboard.
(5) Turn ON the power of the RU.
Power ON in the following order.
- Power circuit breaker of the machine main body
- Start switch on the operation panel
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-30
PM-31
(6) Press the PC's [Windows] key of the CL to open the Start menu of
Windows.
(8) Start the MUTL of RU.
(7) From Window’s Start menu, choose [Run...], type in or select [“C:\
Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\Tool\RuPcTool\RuPCTool.exe”], and click
the [OK] button.
(9) Click the [Conveyance Check].
(10) Click the [Sequence On Repeat Setting>>].
(11) Enter a conveyance count (between 20 and 30) in the "Number of
Sequence Setting" field.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-31
PM-32
(12) Click the [SET].
Automatic conveyance is performed by the number of sequences input in step (11).
(13) Make sure that automatic conveyance is normally done.
(14) Turn OFF the power of the RU.
Power OFF in the following order.
- [Shutdown] button on the operation panel.
- Power circuit breaker of the machine main body
(15) Disconnect the interlock defeating jig cable connector (H-CN25) in the
exposure unit, and connect the original cable connector (H-CN25).
(16) Reinstall the bottom cover of the exposure unit.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
(17) Remove the tapes that retain the grid replacement cover interlock
switches (MSH1 and MSH12).
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-32
PM-33
11. Cleaning the Interior of the
Machine
CAUTIONS
- When servicing the interior of the exposure unit, exercise care not to bend or
damage the SUS belts.
- When servicing the SUS belts and their belt pulleys within the exposure unit,
be sure to wear gloves. If they are touched with bare hands or soiled with
dust, dirt, or other foreign matter, be sure to wipe them clean with a cloth
dampened with dehydrated ethanol.
- Do not touch the guide rails with bare hands when servicing in the exposure
unit.
012-201-09E
(1) Remove dust from the interior of the exposure unit.
NOTES
- If the sensors in the exposure unit are soiled with dust, they might not work
normally. Clean the dust also around the sensors.
- If the IP is soiled with dust or smears and is determined to possibly cause a
defective image, clean the IP.
{MC:5.1.4_Cleaning the IP}
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-33
PM-34
12. Cleaning the SUS Belts and Their
Belt Pulleys
CAUTIONS
- When using the electromagnetic brake releasing jig, reposition the
subscanner mechanism and IP shifter mechanism so as not to let them have
a free fall before turning ON the electromagnetic brake releasing jig. Or turn
ON the electromagnetic brake releasing jig while properly supporting the
subscanner mechanism and IP shifter mechanism by hand.
- Do not touch the SUS belts or their belt pulleys in the exposure unit with
bare hands. If fat on your hands is transferred to them, their operations may
become abnormal. If they are inadvertently soiled with fat on your hands,
wipe them clean with a cloth dampened with dehydrated ethanol.
- Always wear gloves when cleaning the SUS belts and their pulleys. If they are
touched with bare hands, not only they are soiled with grease, but also you
might injure your hands.
(2) While moving the scanner unit by turning ON/OFF the electromagnetic
brake releasing jig (MB1 brake releasing switch), entirely clean the
SUS belts (the front and rear faces of the belts) and their belt pulleys.
CAUTIONS
- To move the scanner unit upward, raise the center of the scanner unit bottom
by the hands. To move the scanner unit downward, support the center of the
scanner unit bottom by the hands.
- Do not touch the board, cables and flat cables.
NOTE
Use dehydrated ethanol to clean the SUS belts and their belt pulleys.
REFERENCE
Clean the SUS belts and their belt pulleys while moving the scanner unit with the
electromagnetic brake releasing jig.
(1) Disconnect the cable connector (H-CN26), and connect the connector
(MB1) of the electromagnetic brake releasing jig cable.
(3) While supporting the center of the scanner unit bottom, turn ON the
electromagnetic brake releasing jig (MB1 brake releasing switch), and
move the scanner unit to its home position.
(4) Turn OFF the electromagnetic brake releasing jig (MB1 brake releasing
switch).
(5) Disconnect the connector (MB1) of the electromagnetic brake
releasing jig cable, and connect the original cable connector (H-CN26).
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-34
PM-35
13. Reinstalling the Grid Support
Assembly
NOTE
Take the following procedures for removing/reinstalling the grid support assembly at
the time of replacing the erasure unit or in the preventive maintenance at the age of 2
and 4 years.
012-201-09E
13.1
For units of “#20001 to #24999”
(1) Retain the upper side of the grid support assembly.
INSTRUCTION
To retain the upper side of the grid support assembly, be sure to keep the bracket
(A portion) of the assembly against the machine frame to secure. If the assembly
comes onto the frame and retained there, the scanner unit might be in contact
with the grid support assembly shield. Exercise care.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-35
PM-36
(2) Retain the lower side of the grid support assembly, and connect the
cable connector (SZ6).
(3) Put the cover on the upper portion of grid support assembly.
Be sure to fasten the FG cable together.
INSTRUCTION
To attach the FG cable, check the orientation of the FG cable terminal, and bring
it into the bracket under the bracket.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-36
PM-37
13.2
For units of "#25001 or later”
(1) Retain the upper side of the grid support assembly.
(2) Retain the lower side of the grid support assembly, and connect the
cable connector (SZ6).
INSTRUCTION
To retain the upper side of the grid support assembly, be sure to keep the bracket
(A portion) of the assembly against the machine frame to secure. If the assembly
comes onto the frame and retained there, the scanner unit might be in contact
with the grid support assembly shield. Exercise care.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-37
PM-38
(3) Retain the shield plate under the grid support assembly with the
bracket.
(4) Insert the shield plates on the right- and left-hand side faces of the
grid support assembly into the frames.
CAUTION
Do not forcibly press the screwdriver against the bracket when retaining the
shield plate under the grid support assembly with the bracket. Otherwise, the
scanner unit might get damaged.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-38
PM-39
(5) Check to make sure that a gap remains between the shield plate of the
grid support assembly, which has been inserted into the frame, and
the flexible cable retaining bracket.
(6) Put the cover on the upper portion of grid support assembly.
INSTRUCTION
If the shield plate of the grid support assembly and the flexible cable retaining
bracket are in contact, draw out the shield plate of the grid support assembly, and
leave a gap between the shield plate of the grid support assembly and the flexible
cable retaining bracket.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-39
PM-40
14. Checking the Interlocks (1)
14.1 Checking the Exposure Unit Front Cover
Laser Safety Interlock Switches (SH3 and
SH4) during Bootup
(1) Disconnect the cable connector (H-CN29), and connect the connector
(H-CN29) of the interlock defeating jig cable in the exposure unit.
REFERENCE
Connecting the jig cable with the connector (H-CN29) allows the grid replacement
cover interlock switches (MSH1 and MSH12) to be released. The connection
of the jig cable with the connector (H-CN25) allows also the exposure unit front
cover laser safety interlock switches (SH3 and SH4) to be released.
(2) Turn ON the circuit breaker of the power distribution switchboard.
(3) Turn ON the power of the RU.
Power ON in the following order.
- Power circuit breaker of the machine main body
- Start switch on the operation panel
(4) Check to make sure that the error code (10390) and the [Shutdown]
button prompting the system shutdown appear on the operation panel.
REFERENCE
When the error code (10390) is displayed, the exposure unit front cover laser
safety interlock switches (SH3 and SH4) can be determined to be working
normally. When the CL has booted up, the error also appears on the CL screen.
(5) Touch the [Shutdown] button appearing on the operation panel, and
turn OFF the power of the RU.
(6) Turn off the power circuit breaker of the machine main body.
(7) Disconnect the connector (H-CN29) of the interlock defeating jig
cable in the exposure unit, and connect the original cable connector
(H-CN29).
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-40
PM-41
14.2 Checking the Exposure Unit Front Cover
Laser Safety Interlock Switches (SH3 and
SH4) during the Routine Mode
WARNING
When checking the exposure unit front face cover laser safety interlock
switches (SH3 and SH4) through the use of the interlock defeating jig cable in
the exposure unit, follow the precautions below against laser radiation.
- Never fail to observe the procedures set forth in the service manual.
- Never place your finger or other part of your body in an area exposed to a
laser beam.
- Never place a mirror or other light-reflecting article in the optical path of a
laser beam.
- Never change the optical path of a laser beam.
- Never remove the scanner unit while the laser is activated.
- When checking the scanner unit while it is uncovered, never stare at the
secondary scattered laser light. Also, do not forget to wear safety goggles.
012-201-09E
(1) Retain the grid replacement cover interlock switches (MSH1 and
MSH12) with a tape or the like, and release the interlock switches.
REFERENCE
If two sets of the interlock defeating jig cables in the exposure unit are present,
they need not be retained with the tape. Disconnect the cable connector (H-CN29),
and connect the connector (H-CN29) of the interlock defeating jig cable in the
exposure unit.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-41
PM-42
(2) Remove the bottom cover of the exposure unit.
INSTRUCTION
When the bottom cover of the exposure unit is to be reinstalled, do not use
a kind of screws other than that specified in the manual (TP4x8). When
another kind of screw (such as BR4x8) is used by mistake, the following
failure occurs.
- Even if the exposure unit elevation switch (descent) is turned ON and the
patient protection descent prevention interlock switch cover is pressed
while the exposure unit is lowering, the electric circuit of the patient
protection descent prevention interlock switches (MSH2 and MSH3) do
not close (turn ON), and as a result the exposure unit keeps going down.
(3) Disconnect the cable connector (H-CN25), and connect the interlock
defeating jig cable connector (H-CN25) in the exposure unit.
REFERENCE
Connecting the jig cable with the connector (H-CN25) allows the exposure unit
front cover laser safety interlock switches (SH3 and SH4) to be released.
(4) Turn ON the power of the CL.
(5) Turn ON the power of the RU, and make sure that the machine starts
up normally.
Power ON in the following order.
- Power circuit breaker of the machine main body
- Start switch on the operation panel
REFERENCE
When the machine boots up normally, [ON LINE] indicating the normal connection
with the CL appears on the operation panel. The IP is ready at the exposure
position.
(6) Disconnect the connector (H-CH25) of the interlock defeating jig cable
in the exposure unit.
REFERENCE
Do not disconnect the interlock defeating jig cable in the exposure unit during the
erasure operation of the machine. If the cable is disconnected during the erasure
operation, no error code is displayed.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-42
PM-43
(7) Touch the erasure button on the operation panel (to erase the IP), and
check to make sure that the error code (10210) and the [Shutdown]
button prompting the system shutdown appear on the operation panel.
REFERENCE
The error code appears also on the CL screen.
(8) Touch the [Shutdown] button appearing on the operation panel, and
turn OFF the power of the RU.
(9) Turn off the power circuit breaker of the machine main body.
(10) Disconnect the interlock defeating jig cable connector (H-CN25) in the
exposure unit, and connect the original cable connector (H-CN25).
(11) Reinstall the bottom cover of the exposure unit.
(12) Remove the tapes that retain the grid replacement cover interlock
switches (MSH1 and MSH12).
REFERENCE
When the error code (10210) is displayed, the exposure unit front cover laser
safety interlock switches (SH3 and SH4) can be determined to be working
normally. When no error appears on the operation panel or the CL screen,
display the CL’s exposure menu selection window, and click on the [Start study]
button. The error code can be displayed on the exposure menu selection
window.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-43
PM-44
15. Reinstalling the Exposure Unit
Front Cover
NOTE
Take the following procedures for removing/reinstalling the exposure unit front cover
at the time of replacing the erasure unit or in the preventive maintenance at the age of
2 and 4 years.
(1) Reinstall the exposure unit front cover.
NOTES
- When reinstalling the exposure unit front cover, exercise care not to have the
cable caught in.
- When reinstalling the exposure unit front cover, always connect the cable
connector (H-CN23). Otherwise, the exposure unit will not lower even if the
exposure unit elevation switch (descent) is turned ON.
- When the exposure unit front cover is to be reinstalled, do not bring it into
contact with the shaft (door sensing) of the grid replacement cover interlock
switches (MSH1 and MSH12).
Check/Adjustment Procedures
Check to make sure that there is no gap between the front cover and the rear cover of
the exposure unit. If a gap is present, the external light might enter the exposure unit,
resulting in image problems.
CHECK 1
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-44
PM-45
16. Checking the Interlocks (2)
16.1
Checking the Patient Protection Descent
Prevention Interlock Switches (MSH2 and
MSH3)
(1) Turn ON the power of the RU.
Power ON in the following order.
- Power circuit breaker of the machine main body
- Start switch on the operation panel
(2) Press the exposure unit elevation switch (descent), and press the ten
positions on the lower of the patient protection descent prevention
interlock switch cover while the exposure unit is lowering.
Check to make sure that the exposure unit stops lowering with any of the positions
pressed. Also make sure that the elevation safety switch activation LED on the
elevation switch lights up.
NOTE
Do not forcibly press the cover of the patient protection descent prevention
interlock switch.
REFERENCE
If the exposure unit stops lowering with the patient protection descent prevention
interlock switch cover pressed while the exposure unit is lowering, the patient
protection descent prevention interlock switches (MSH2 and MSH3) can be
determined to be working normally.
012-201-09E
16.2
Checking the Emergency Stop Switch
NOTE
The emergency stop switch is located on the right and left of the exposure unit.
Individually check both of the emergency stop switches located on the right and left to
check the switches.
(1) Press the exposure unit elevation switch (ascent/descent), and
press the emergency stop switch while the exposure unit is rising or
lowering.
Check to make sure that the exposure unit stops moving up/down.
REFERENCE
If the exposure unit stops moving up/down with the emergency stop switch
pressed while the exposure unit is moving, the emergency stop switch can be
determined to be working normally.
(2) Press the motor-driven grip handle elevation switch (ascent/descent),
and press the emergency stop switch while the motor-driven grip
handle is moving up/down.
Check to make sure that the motor-driven grip handle stops moving up/down.
REFERENCE
If the motor-driven grip handle stops moving up/down with the emergency stop
switch pressed while the grip handle is moving, the emergency stop switch can
be determined to be working normally. This procedure is not necessary with a
machine without the motor-driven grip handle mounted.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-45
PM-46
16.3 Checking the Grid Replacement Cover
Interlock Switches (MSH1 and MSH12)
(1) Touch the [Replace the grid] button on the bootup completion window
of the operation panel to release the grid replacement cover lock
solenoid (SOLH1).
(2) Press the exposure unit elevation switch (ascent/descent) with the
grid replacement cover kept open.
Check to make sure that the exposure unit does not move up/down.
REFERENCE
If the exposure unit is to be moved up/down with the grid replacement cover kept
open, the grid replacement cover interlock switches (MSH1 and MSH12) can be
determined to be working normally.
(3) Close the grid replacement cover.
REFERENCE
Closing the grid replacement cover, the display on the operation panel restores to
the bootup completion window.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-46
PM-47
16.4 Checking the Expos ure Un it Elevation
Upper- Limit Interlock Switch (MSJ 1), th e
Exposure Unit Elevation Lower-Limit Interlock
Switch (MSJ2), and the Exposure Unit
Temporary Stop Interlock Switch (MSJ3)
The exposure unit is checked as to whether it surely stops at the uppermost point,
a temporary stop position and the lowermost point when the unit is moved up/down.
The distance where the exposure unit stops moving is also checked.
(1) Press the exposure unit elevation switch (ascent) and raise the
exposure unit until it stops.
(2) Measure the distance from the uppermost position where the unit
stops (the exposure center) to the floor.
(3) Press the exposure unit elevation switch (descent) and lower the
exposure unit until it temporarily stops.
(4) Measure the distance from the position where the unit stops (the
exposure center) to the floor.
Check to make sure that the distance from the exposure center to the floor is approx.
550 mm.
REFERENCE
If the exposure unit stops lowering at the temporary stop point (approx. 550 mm),
the exposure unit temporary stop interlock switch (MSJ3) can be determined to
be working normally.
Check to make sure that the distance from the exposure center to the floor is approx.
1,530 mm.
REFERENCE
If the exposure unit stops rising at the uppermost point (approx. 1,530 mm), the
exposure unit elevation upper-limit interlock switch (MSJ1) can be determined to
be working normally.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-47
PM-48
(5) Press the exposure unit elevation switch (descent), and keep it
lowering further from the position where the unit stops in step (3) until
it stops.
(6) Measure the distance from the lowermost position where the unit
stops (the exposure center) to the floor.
Check to make sure that the distance from the exposure center to the floor is approx.
470 mm.
REFERENCE
If the exposure unit stops lowering at the lowermost point (approx. 470 mm), the
exposure unit elevation lower-limit interlock switch (MSJ2) can be determined to
be working normally.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-48
PM-49
16.5 Checking the Grip Handle Elevation UpperLimit/Lower-Limit Interlock Switches (MSH6
and MSH7) and the Grip Handle Collision
Prevention Proximity Switch (MSH8)
The motor-driven grip handle is checked as to whether it surely stops at the uppermost
point, and the lowermost point when the unit is moved up/down, and whether it stops
when the distance between the exposure unit and the motor-driven grip handle
approaches a predetermined value. The distances at which the motor-driven grip
handle stops moving up/down are also checked.
This procedure is not necessary with a machine without the motor-driven grip handle
mounted.
(2) Measure the distance from the position where the motor-driven grip
handle stops at its uppermost point (the upper side of the hand rail of
the grip handle) to the floor.
Check to make sure that the distance from the hand rail of the motor-driven grip
handle to the floor is approx. 2,200/2,300/2,400 mm.
REFERENCE
If the motor-driven grip handle stops moving up at the uppermost point (approx.
2,200/2,300/2,400 mm), the grip-handle elevation upper-limit interlock switch
(MSH6) can be determined to be normally working.
(1) Press the motor-driven grip handle elevation switch (ascent) and raise
the grip handle until it stops.
REFERENCE
The uppermost point of the motor-driven grip handle is specified to be 2,200 mm
before shipment, it can be optionally changed to 2,300 mm or 2,400 mm.
Therefore note that the uppermost point may vary depending on the user’s site.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-49
PM-50
(3) Press the motor-driven grip handle elevation switch (descent) and
lower the grip handle until it stops.
(4) Measure the distance from the point where the motor-driven grip
handle stops at its lowermost point (the upper side of the hand rail of
the grip handle) to the floor.
Check to make sure that the distance from the hand rail of the motor-driven grip
handle to the floor is approx. 1,515 mm.
REFERENCE
If the motor-driven grip handle stops moving down at the lowermost point (approx.
1,515 mm), the grip-handle elevation lower-limit interlock switch (MSH7) can be
determined to be normally working.
012-201-09E
(5) Press the exposure unit elevation switch (ascent) or the motor-driven
grip handle elevation switch (descent), and bring the exposure unit
and the hand rail of the motor-driven grip handle close to each other
until they stop.
(6) Measure the distance from the lower side of the hand rail of the motordriven grip handle to the upper surface of the exposure unit when they
are the most proximate.
Check to make sure that the distance from the lower side of the hand rail of the
motor-driven grip handle to the upper surface of the exposure unit is approx. 350
mm.
REFERENCE
If the distance from the lower side of the hand rail of the motor-driven grip handle
to the upper surface of the exposure unit is approx.350 mm, the grip handle
collision prevention proximity switch (MSH8) can be determined to be normally
working.
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-50
PM-51
17. Delta Y Calculation Verification
and Two-Dimensional Offset Data
Update
(5) Display the Scanner Check window on the right-hand side of the
check window displayed on the CL.
INSTRUCTION
Perform the delta Y calculation verification and two-dimensional offset data update
procedures without the grid and photo-timer (light receiving unit) attached.
REFERENCE
The scanner temperature need not be taken into consideration when delta Y
calculation is to be performed.
(1) Open the RU PC-TOOL window.
(2) Start the MUTL of RU.
(3) Click on the [Scanner Check] button on the MUTL window, and display
the scanner check window.
(6) Click on the [Scanner Check Details] button on the Scanner Check
window to display the Scanner Check Details window.
(4) From the CL, register the following exposure menu:
- "Test" - "Sensitivity" (size: 17 inches x 17 inches)
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-51
PM-52
(7) Click on the [Calculate Delta Y] button on the Scanner Check Details
window.
(8) Make an X-ray exposure at 10 mR.
INSTRUCTION
Set the exposure conditions to attain an actual measurement value of 7.5 to
12.5 mR.
NOTE
“RESULT:OK” indicating that the procedures of delta Y calculations are completed
appears on the Scanner Check Details window after the X-ray exposure. This
does not indicate whether the calculation results are good or not.
REFERENCE
Typical exposure conditions for exposing an IP to a dose of 1 mR are indicated
below:
Distance: 1.8 m
Voltage:
80 kV
Amperage: 50 mA
Time:
0.013 sec.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-52
PM-53
INSTRUCTIONS
If the delta Y calculation result is not a prescribed value, check whether the IP
and scanner unit are properly positioned.
- Sucanner unit
{MC:7._Scanner Unit}
- IP
{MC:5._IP}
If “data NG pixels” appears, determine whether the number of pixels in the
image region displayed in the “data NG pixels” is correct or not. If the number
is not correct, take the measures according to the procedures mentioned in the
manual.
{MC:13.3_Countermeasures When “Data NG Pixels” Appears}
(9) Click the [Performance Check] button.
(10) Click the [Correction>>] button.
(11) Click the [Erase IP] button.
REFERENCE
When you click "Erase IP" button, the machine performs an IP erasure operation
10 times. The erasure process terminates in about 3 minutes.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-53
PM-54
(12) Click the [Display Scanner Temperature] button to verify that the
temperature (average) is within the range from 35°C to 40°C.
INSTRUCTIONS
- If the scanner unit temperature is below 35°C, exit the current mode, and then
repeat an “IP erasure” operation until the temperature is 35°C or higher (and
40°C or lower).
{Instruction Manual}
- If the scanner unit temperature is above 40°C, remove the exposure unit front
cover, and wait until the temperature in the scanner unit is 35°C or higher (and
40°C or lower). However, if the scanner unit temperature may lower to 40°C or
lower in a short time with the exposure unit front cover put on, do not remove
the exposure unit front cover.
{PM:7._Removing the Exposure Unit Front Cover}
(16) Make an X-ray exposure at 0 mR.
REFERENCE
The "Expose at 0 mR" step is to perform an IP read operation without exposing
an IP to radiation. The IP can be read without exposing it to radiation when you
make a radiographic exposure with the X-ray tube radiation field positioned
outside the machine (be sure to adjust the X-ray tube for the minimum output
value).
After about 1 minute, the MUTL window displays the calculation results and reads
"RESULT: OK". In this instance, you may ignore the calculation results.
INSTRUCTION
If the displayed result is other than "RESULT: OK":
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
(17) Click on
on the upper right of the MUTL screen to quit the MUTL.
on the upper right of the RU PC-TOOL screen to quit the
(18) Click on
RU PC-TOOL.
(19) Turn OFF the power of the RU.
(13) Click the [Update 2D Offset Data] button.
Power OFF in the following order.
- [Shutdown] button on the operation panel.
- Power circuit breaker of the machine main body
(20) Turn ON the power of the RU.
(14) When a confirmation window opens, click [OK].
Power ON in the following order.
- Power circuit breaker of the machine main body
- Start switch on the operation panel
(15) From the CL, register the following exposure menu:
- "Test" - "Sensitivity" (size: 17 inches x 17 inches)
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-54
PM-55
18. Checking for Image Problems
{PM:5._Checking for Image Problems}
NOTE
The procedure set forth under "5.2 Updating the X-Ray Damage Correction Data"
need not be performed again.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-55
PM-56
19. Clearing the Error Log
(3) Open the ERROR-DB window of the RU.
(4) Select the log to check the error log.
(1) Press the PC's [Windows] key of the CL to open the Start menu of
Windows.
(2) From Window’s Start menu, choose “Run...”, type in or select [“C:\
Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\Tool\RuPcTool\RuPCTool.exe”], and click
the [OK] button.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-56
PM-57
(5) Clear the error log.
on the upper right of the RU PC-TOOL screen to quit the
(6) Click on
RU PC-TOOL.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-57
PM-58
20. Resetting the Erasure Lamp
Lighting Count
NOTE
Replace the erasure unit and reset the erasure lamp illumination count only when the
"3. Checking the Erasure Lamp Lighting Count" procedure indicates that the erasure
lamp illumination count is more than 120,000.
(1) Open the RU PC-TOOL window.
(2) Open the EDIT HISTORY window of RU.
(3) Reset the erasure lamp lighting count.
on the upper right of the RU PC-TOOL screen to quit the
(4) Click on
RU PC-TOOL.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-58
PM-59
21. Cleaning around the Machine and
the Exterior Cover
(1) Check that there is no dust or dirt around the machine body. If there
is dust or dirt, clean up around the machine body.
(2) Wipe the exposure unit front cover with a moistened cloth.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-59
PM-60
22. Checking for Improper Protective
Grounding
(1) Check that the power cable and additional protective ground wire
connections are established in the same manner as for installation.
(2) Check that the parts and cables removed for servicing purposes are
connected in the same manner as for installation.
(3) Check that the removed screws are properly tightened.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-60
PM-61
23. Checking the Gonad Protector
REFERENCE
This procedure is not necessary with a machine without the gonad protector mounted.
(1) Check to make sure that the movement (rotation) of each arm of the
gonad protector is free from failures. Also check to make sure that
any retaining screw/nut is not loose.
INSTRUCTION
If some failure is found in the movement (rotation) of an arm, or its retaining arm/
nut is loose, make the adjustment.
{IN: Appendix 5._Installing and Removing the Gonad Protector}
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-61
PM-62
24. Checking the Patient Aid Belt (Only
in Japan)
REFERENCE
This procedure is not necessary with a machine without the patient aid belt mounted.
(1) Check to make sure that no failure is found on the buckle of the
patient aid belt.
- The buckle is surely locked.
- The buckle does not come off even if the belt is pulled while the buckle is
locked.
- The buckle surely comes off when the buckle release button is pressed.
INSTRUCTION
Replace the buckle of the patient aid belt with a new one if any failure is found.
{IN: Appendix 4._Installing and Removing the Patient Aid Belt}
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-62
PM-63
BLANK PAGE
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
PM-63
Control Sheet
Issue date
CR-IR 364 (Type U) Service Manual
Installation (IN)
012-201-09E
Revision number
Reason
04.15.2003
07.31.2003
11.30.2003
06.30.2004
00
01
02
03
New release (FM3976)
Revision (FM4055)
Revision (FM4147)
Revision (FM4357)
09.30.2004
04
Revision (FM4437)
11.30.2004
05
Revision (FM4505)
07.15.2006
10.02.2006
07
08
06.10.2008
09
Revision (FM4915)
Change of Corporate Name and
Corporate Logo (FM4977)
Revision (FM5369)
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Pages affected
All pages
All pages
All pages
1~2, 4~68, 70~83,
Appx IN 1-1, Appx IN 2-1~5,
Appx IN 3-1~4, 6~14, 17~21, 24, 28,
30, 31, 33, 37, Appx IN4-1, 4,
Appx IN5-1~3, Appx IN6-1,
Appx IN7-1~4, Appx IN8-1~2,
Appx IN10-1~2, Appx IN11-1~2,
Appx IN12-1~2, Appx IN13-1~2
13, 32, 58,
Appx IN3-2, 2.1, 2.2, 22, 31
14, 15, 22, 35-88,
Appx IN3-1-44
All pages
Appx IN4-4
4, 5, 5.1, 5.2, 7, 8, 15-18, 26, 27,
27.1, 27.2, 37-115,
Appx IN 4-2, Appx IN 5-1~6,
Appx IN 6-3, 12~14, 14.1~14.4, 16~23,
23.1~23.6, 38~41,
Appx IN 8-4,
Appx IN 12-1, 11~20
Appx IN 14-1,
Appx IN 15-1-4
IN-1
1.
Specifications of Machine
Product Code
CR-IR 364
Center of Gravity
The center of gravity is factory positioned as indicated below:
Height (from bottom): 712 mm
From rear:
191 mm
Dimensions (with Options Installed: Motor-Driven Grip Handles
and Side Grip Handles)
Means for Moving and Fixing the Machine
Moving: Use the adjuster bolts and hand lifter (recommended).
Fixing: - Four anchor bolts, four anchor nuts (machine main body)
- Four anchor bolts, four anchor nuts (controller unit)
Weight
Machine main body (standard configuration): 220 kg approx.
Machine main body (with full options):
240 kg approx.
Controller unit:
21 kg approx.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
IN-1
IN-2
Upper- and Lower-Limit Positions of the Exposure Unit
Movement Range (Center Reference)
The exposure center works between the upper-limit position and the lower-limit
position shown in the figure below.
Controller Unit Installation Location
The controller unit can be installed to the right or left of the machine main body.
The maximum permissible distance between the controller unit and machine main
body is illustrated below.
NOTE
The controller unit cannot always be installed within the cable length range indicated
below depending on the cable routing between the machine main body and controller
unit. Therefore, confirm the installation location of the controller unit before securing it
by performing its anchoring procedure.
When the controller unit faces
forward
Operation Panel Attachment Location
When the controller unit faces
sideways
Installed
to the left
(factory
default)
The operation panel may be installed on either the right or left side.
Installed
to the
right
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
IN-2
IN-3
Installation Space
<Left-right direction>
Machine main body
<Front-rear direction>
REFERENCES
*1: When the following photo-timers are installed, the distance between the exposure
unit surface and IP surface is 28.5 mm.
- Hitachi's photo-timer (ion chamber AID)
- COMET's photo-timer (3ch)
- Siemens' photo-timer (ion chamber, 3ch)
- Philips' photo-timer (ion chamber, 3ch)
*2: The focal distance between the X-ray tube and grid surface varies with the grid
type.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
IN-3
IN-4
<Height direction>
Controller unit
The controller unit may be serviced with its bottom portion (excess cable
accommodation box) separated.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
IN-4
IN-5
Anchor Locations in Installation/Maintenance Space
<For units of #20001 to #21232 and #25001 to #25184>
012-201-09E
<For units of #21233 or later and #25185 or later>
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
IN-5
IN-5.1
Anchor Locations
Machine main body anchor locations
Controller unit anchor locations
<For units of #20001 to #21232 and #25001 to #25184>
<For units of #21233 or later and #25185 or later>
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
IN-5.1
IN-5.2
Anchor Nut Installation Methods
Controller unit
Machine main body
<For units of #20001 to #21232 and #25001 to #25184>
<For units of #21233 or later and #25185 or later>
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
IN-5.2
IN-6
2.
Installation Work Flowchart
START
A
3. Preparation for Installation
9.
3.3 Unloading
Installing the Elevation Switch (Hand Switch)
10. Installing the Optional Items (1)
3.4 Preparation for Transfer
10.1 Installing the Foot Switch
3.5 Transfer
10.2 Installing the Motor-Driven Grip Handle (Elevation Unit)
3.6 Checking the Items Supplied
11. Removing the Exposure Unit Front Cover
4. Installing the Machine Main Body
12. Removing and Unclamping the Grid Support Assembly
4.1 Transfer to Installation Position
4.2 Adjusting the Exposure Unit Orientation and Machine Main Body Tilt
13. Unclamping the Subscanning Unit and Replacing the Label
4.3 Securing the Machine Main Body
14. Checking the Exposure Unit Fuses
5. Removing the Elevation Unit Covers and Unclamping
15. Reinstalling the Grid Support Assembly
6. Unclamping Inside the Elevation Unit
16. Installing the Optional Items (2)
7. Checking Fuses on the ELV21A Board
16.1 Installing the Side Grip Handle
8. Checking Voltage and Connecting the Power Supply
A
16.2 Installing the Patient Aid Belt
8.1 Checking and Changing the Cable Terminal (J-TB3) Connection
16.3 Installing the Gonad Protector
8.2 Routing and Securing the Power Cable
16.4 Installing the Photo-Timer Kit
8.3 Connecting the Power Cable of the Machine Main Body
17. Reinstalling the Exposure Unit Front Cover
8.4 Checking the Wiring Connections and Connecting to the
Distribution Switchboard
18. Repositioning the Operation Panel
19. Changing the Cable Routing Path
B
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
IN-6
IN-7
B
C
20. Removing the Controller Unit Covers
33. Checking the Interlocks
21. Checking the Board Connection and Fuses of the Control Unit
33.1 Checking the Exposure Unit Front Cover Laser Safety
Interlock Switches (SH3 and SH4) during Bootup
22. Connecting the Cables between the Machine Main Body and
Controller Unit
33.2 Checking the Exposure Unit Front Cover Laser Safety
Interlock Switches (SH3 and SH4) during the Routine Mode
23. Securing the Controller Unit and Handling Excess Cables
33.3 Checking the Patient Protection Descent Prevention Interlock
Switches (MSH2 and MSH3)
24. Installing the CL
33.4 Checking the Emergency Stop Switch
25. Installing RU Software
33.5 Checking the Grid Replacement Cover Interlock Switches
(MSH1 and MSH12)
33.6 Checking the Exposure Unit Elevation Upper-Limit Interlock
Switch (MSJ1), the Exposure Unit Elevation Lower-Limit
Interlock Switch (MSJ2), and the Exposure Unit Temporary
Stop Interlock Switch (MSJ3)
25.1 Setting the IP Address
25.2 Setting the CL and Checking Connection
25.3 Installing the RU PC-TOOL
33.7 Checking the Grip Handle Elevation Upper-Limit/Lower-Limit
Interlock Switches (MSH6 and MSH7) and the Grip Handle
Collision Prevention Proximity Switch (MSH8)
25.4 Installing the RU Software
26. Checking Fan Operation
34. Checking for Image Problems
34.1 Checking for Irregularities, Density Problems, and Sensitivity
Problems
27. Attaching the Grid and Adjusting the Bucky Timer
34.2 Checking and Adjusting the Format (Subscan Length)
28. Adjusting the Height of Motor-Driven Grip Handle
34.3 Procedures for Checking and Adjusting the Format
(Subscan Start Point)
29. Installing the Optional Items (3)
29.1 Installing the Tube Interlock (Auto Tracking)
30. Reinstalling the Elevation Unit Cover and Replacing the Label
34.4 Checking for False Images, and Problems in Read Center and
Film Character Format Information
35. Checking the Error Log
36. Installing the Optional Items (4)
31. Reinstalling the Controller Unit Cover
32. Installing the Hand Rail (for Use of the Motor-Driven Grip
Handle) and Replacing the Label
C
012-201-09E
36.1 Installing the Long Cassette Holder
36.2 Installing the Auxiliary Grip Handle
END
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
IN-7
IN-8
3.
Preparation for Installation
3.1
Preinstallation Work
The place where the machine is installed needs to meet the criteria set forth in "
Installation Site Requirements” described below, as well as “Safety Precautions”
and “Product Specifications” described at the beginning of this service manual.
Preinstallation procedures should be performed beforehand for necessary construction
work, electrical utility, and air-conditioning system installation.
Installation Site Requirements
3.2
Marking the Machine Main Body
Installation Position
Determine the installation position of the machine main body before transferring the
machine. With the X-ray tube’s travel on the overhead railing taken into consideration,
determine the X-ray tube’s exposure position and the installation position for the
machine main body. Mark the floor with a tape or the like to indicate the pedestal
outer frame or the exposure plane/exposure center of the machine main body.
REFERENCE
The above floor marking completed prior to machine transfer facilitates the position
adjustment of the X-ray tube and the machine main body, allowing subsequent
installation steps to be followed efficiently.
Avoid the following installation sites:
- Places where the temperature changes drastically.
- Places near heat sources such as heaters.
- Places where water leakage or equipment submersion may occur.
- Places where corrosive gas may be generated.
- Dusty places.
- Places where the machine is subject to constant or excessive vibration or shock.
- Places that are exposed to direct sunlight.
- Places that are not ventilated.
Power Supply and Grounding Requirements
A circuit breaker rated at 250V 20A or greater should be provided for a power source
used solely for the machine. To ground the machine, it should be connected to the
protective ground line of the indoor wiring.
REFERENCES
*1: When the following photo-timers are installed, the distance between the exposure
unit surface and IP surface is 28.5 mm.
- Hitachi's photo-timer (ion chamber AID)
- COMET's photo-timer (3ch)
- Siemens' photo-timer (ion chamber, 3ch)
- Philips' photo-timer (ion chamber, 3ch)
*2: The focal distance between the X-ray tube and grid surface varies with the grid type.
*3: The size of the pedestal differs depending on the concerned machine.
450 mm
- For units of #20001 to #21323 and #25001 to #25184:
370 mm
- For units of #25185 or later:
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
IN-8
IN-9
3.3
Unloading
(3) Remove the rear end of the crate.
CAUTIONS
- When unloading the machine, two or more persons should always cooperate
to do so.
- Before unloading the machine, secure a proper machine transfer route.
REFERENCE
Before unloading the machine, together with the carrier pallet, from the load-carrying
platform of the truck, make sure that there is enough space on the rear side of the
machine.
(1) Move down the machine together with the carrier pallet from the loadcarrying platform of the truck.
(2) Remove the corrugated cardboards.
(4) Remove the lug screws from the crate.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
IN-9
IN-10
(5) Incline the crate to take it out.
CAUTION
When removing the crate, incline the crate to take it out. If you try to move the
crate, it might hit the machine, thereby damaging the machine.
NOTES
- After the crate is removed, break up the crate and put the resulting pieces
together for ease of conveyance.
- Because the crate is assembled with nails, hit it with a hammer or the like from
inside to break up the crate.
- Use care not to get injured by protruding nails when breaking up the crate.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
IN-10
IN-11
3.4
Preparation for Transfer
Tools Required
-
Hand lifter (width: approx. 520 mm or less; height: 90 mm)
Wrench
Scissors
Cutter
Procedures
(1) Unload the controller unit and the hand rail (of the motor-driven grip
handle) from the carrier pallet.
REFERENCE
The dimensions of the hand lifter insertion slits of the carrier pallet are as indicated
below:
(2) Remove the reinforcement member.
REFERENCE
The reinforcement member which has been removed will be used in transferring
the machine on the hand lifter (step 8).
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
IN-11
IN-12
(3) Remove the hex head bolts which retain the floor members.
REFERENCE
The floor members are retained with the lag screws outside Japan.
(4) Remove the floor members.
REFERENCE
Removing the floor members, you can shift the machine by the hand lifter.
(5) Cut off the lower portion of the vinyl cover, and move away the cable
containing box to the right- or left-hand of the machine.
REFERENCE
The adjuster bolts (M20x160) are also packed in the cable containing box.
(6) Remove the hex head bolts which retain the pedestal of the machine
main body.
REFERENCE
The hex head bolts, flange bushes or the like which have been removed are used
at step 8 to move the machine by the hand lifter.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
IN-12
IN-13
(7) Lift up the machine main body through the use of the hand lifter and
move it.
WARNING
If you attempt to lift the machine with the hand lifter located inward from the
pedestal (rear of the machine), the machine main body may topple, resulting in
personal injury or the machine getting damaged.
Accordingly, cause the hand lifter to protrude from the pedestal (rear of the
machine) when the hand lifter is to be inserted below the pedestal. Note,
however, that the protrusion length should be within 20 mm from the pedestal.
If the hand lifter protrudes from the pedestal (rear of the machine) more than 20
mm, it comes into contact with the crate of the carrier pallet.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
(8) Reinstall the reinforcement members onto the pedestal of the machine
through the use of the hex head bolts which are removed in step (6).
Face the protruding portions downward when reinstalling the reinforcement members
onto the pedestal.
CAUTION
Always mount the reinforcement members on the pedestal of the machine when
the machine is to be transferred (moved).
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
IN-13
IN-14
3.5
Transfer
INSTRUCTION
The subsequent procedures assume that the clearance from the wall to the rear of
the machine is 100 mm or more. If the clearance between the machine rear and the
wall is less than 100 mm, complete the following procedures before transferring the
machine main body to the installation position.
Secure a sufficient working space in taking the following procedures:
- Installing the side grip handle
- Installing the gonad protector
- Installing the patient aid belt
- Installing the photomultiplier box
- Changing the operation panel attachment location
- Changing the cable routing path
- Installing the elevation unit rear covers
{IN: Appendix 11._Preparatory Procedures to Be Followed when Clearance to the
Machine Rear is less than 100 mm}
(1) Transfer the machine into the installation place.
(2) Remove the reinforcement members mounted on the pedestal of the
machine.
(3) Move the machine main body to an installation position that was
marked before machine transfer to the installation site.
(4) Attach the adjuster bolts, and move down the machine from the hand
lifter.
REFERENCES
- The adjuster bolts are used when the machine main body is to be moved by
the hand lifter or temporarily placed.
- The adjuster bolts are packed in the cable containing box.
CAUTIONS
- After the machine is unpacked, do not transfer it with a forklift.
- While transferring the machine to its installation site, ensure that it is in an
upright position. Never place it in an inclined or horizontal position.
- Be sure to transfer the machine with at least one assistant.
- Be sure that the machine is supported by more than one person when
transferring the machine by the hand lifter, to prevent the machine from
toppling.
- If it is necessary to transfer the machine over differing floor levels, slowly
move it while exercising care not to shock it. Note that the hand lifter is
capable of moving over a level difference of up to about 10 mm.
NOTES
- If the bump is 10 mm or higher, a slope should be provided.
- When lowering the machine main body onto the floor with the adjuster bolts, lay
adjuster bolt support spacer for floor protection. When you use the spacer shown
below, the machine main body can be lowered and set in position efficiently and
accurately.
(5) Remove the vinyl cover.
INSTRUCTION
During the winter season, allow the machine to stand under its cover-attached
condition for sufficient time before unpacking, to prevent moisture condensation.
If the vinyl cover is removed immediately after the machine is carried into the
room, moisture condensation may occur on the machine.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
IN-14
IN-15
3.6
Checking the Items Supplied
3.6.1
For units of “#20001 to #24999”
CASE NO.
Check whether all the items are supplied in accordance with the PACKING LIST.
INSTRUCTION
Item
Qty.
Item
Qty.
Machine main body
1
Adjuster bolt
4
Controller unit
1
Handle
1
Relevant
chapter/
section
Remarks
M20x160 (to be used for moving the machine main
body by the hand lifter or temporarily placing it)
3.5
For use with the motor-driven grip handle (only when
32
machine is equipped with the motor-driven grip handle)
Standard Accessories
CASE NO.
Item
Qty.
Remarks
Relevant
chapter/
section
2
3
Plain washer
Plain washer
4
4
- M12x40 (for retaining the machine main
body): For units of #20001 to #21232
- M12x35 (for retaining the machine main
body): For units of #21233 or later
W16 (for retaining the machine main body)
W12 (for retaining the machine main body)
4
Spring washer
4
SW12 (for retaining the machine main body)
4.3
5
Anchor bolt
4
M8x20 (for retaining the controller unit)
23
6
Plain washer
4
W8 (for retaining the controller unit)
23
7
Spring washer
4
SW8 (for retaining the controller unit)
23
8
Anchor nut
4
M12x50 (for retaining the machine main body) 4.3
9
Anchor nut
4
M8x35 (for retaining the controller unit)
23
10
Cover
4
4.3
11
Cover
1
12
Screw
2
Anchor bolt cap
For use of the elevation unit right-hand side
middle cover (used when the operation
panel is mounted on the left-hand side of the
machine)
T3x6 (for retaining the controller unit cable
bracket)
1
012-201-09E
Anchor bolt
4
4.3
4.3
4.3
BR4x8(for retaining the FG clamp of the
elevation switch cable)
13
Screw
1
14
Aluminum clamp
1
15
Elevation switch
1
16
Label
1
17
Label
2
18
Screw
8
19
Screw
4
BR4x6 (for protecting the screw holes for the
13
exposure unit transit clamp against light)
20
CD-ROM
1
Machine-specific data
-
21
CD-ROM
1
Control software
-
22
Test Result Sheet
1
23
1
FCR VELOCITY U
-
1
(Japan Only)
-
25
Instruction Manual
FUJI FILM letter of
guarantee
Attached document
1
CR-IR364 (Japan Only)
-
26
Attached document
1
R-IP (Japan Only)
-
The Test Result Sheet contained should be kept for later use.
Machine
Remarks
Relevant
chapter/
section
24
9
AL-4 (for FG clamp of elevation switch cable) 9
Elevation hand switch
- With the motor-driven grip handle mounted:
The motor-driven grip handle elevation
switch is mounted.
9
- Without the motor-driven grip handle
mounted:
The motor-driven grip handle elevation
switch is not mounted.
Laser class 3B panel label
13
Caution label for up-down operation
T4x8 (for retaining the elevation unit upper
rear cover)
30
30
-
30
Appendix 12
22
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
IN-15
IN-16
CASE NO.
Item
Qty.
28
Cable tie
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
29
Label
1
30
Hexagon bolt with
washer
4
31
Screw
2
32
Screw
2
33
Insulating material
2
34
Shaft
2
35
Spring
2
36
Cap
1
37
Anchor bolt (spare)
2
27
38
39
Fuse
Installation
completion report
Performance check
sheets
Remarks
0.5A
1.0A
1.3A
1.6A
2.0A
3.2A (LM32D)
4.0A
5.0A
3.2A (HM32D)
15A
PLT-2S (for retaining the power cable)
Caution label for the motor-driven grip
handle
Relevant
chapter/
section
8.2
32
BQ6x15 (for retaining the motor-driven grip
32
handle)
BR4x16 (for retaining the left side of the
scanner unit)
BR3x25 (for retaining the right side of the
scanner unit)
M4 (for retaining the left side of the scanner
unit)
Head-free shaft (for retaining the right side
of the scanner unit)
L=12 mm (for retaining the right side of the
scanner unit)
Blind cover for the elevation switch cable
hole
- M12x50 (for retaining the machine main
body): For units of #20001 to #21232
- M12x45 (for retaining the machine main
body): For units of #21233 or later
13
13
13
13
Optional Items
Item
Remarks
Motor-driven grip handle (hand rail
Retrofittable if not mounted.
and elevation unit)
Foot switch
Elevation switch (hand switch)
Two switches can be mounted (the second switch is
optional).
Note that the type of the elevation switch depends on
whether the machine is equipped with the motor-driven grip
handle.
Side grip handle
Auxiliary grip handle
Patient aid belt
(Japan only)
Gonad protector
Photo-timer kit
Tube auto-tracking kit
1 kΩ/2 kΩ/5 kΩ/10 kΩ
X-ray auto-collimating kit
X-ray camera connection cable
15 m 6 core
Grid
1.4 m/1.8 m/3 m
Cassette holder
For use in exposure by means of a standard cassette.
Long cassette holder
For use in exposure by means of a long cassette.
Power cable
15 m, 25 m (only in Japan)
13
30
4.3
1
1 set of seven sheets (Japan only)
-
1
1 set of five sheets (Japan only)
-
40
Attached document
1 Not applicable to Japan
41
(Vacant number)
42
Cover
2 Anchor bolt cover
4.3
Note that the cases Nos. 29 and 30 are not included for the machine without the motor-driven
grip handle mounted.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
IN-16
IN-17
3.6.2
For units of "#25001 or later”
Check whether all the items are supplied in accordance with the PACKING LIST.
CASE NO.
Item
Qty.
INSTRUCTION
13
The Test Result Sheet contained should be kept for later use.
Machine
Item
Qty.
Machine main body
1
Adjuster bolt
4
Controller unit
1
Handle
1
Remarks
M20x160 (to be used for moving the machine main
body by the hand lifter or temporarily placing it)
Item
Remarks
BR4x8
9
For retaining the ground cables in the
subscanning unit: 4 pcs.
AL-4 (for FG clamp of elevation switch cable)
Elevation hand switch
- With the motor-driven grip handle mounted:
The motor-driven grip handle elevation switch
is mounted.
- Without the motor-driven grip handle
mounted:
The motor-driven grip handle elevation switch
is not mounted.
Laser class 3B panel label
13
Aluminum clamp
1
15
Elevation switch
1
16
Label
2
17
Label
2
18
Screw
8
19
Screw
4
4.3
20
CD-ROM
1
Machine-specific data
-
21
CD-ROM
1
Control software
-
4.3
4.3
22
Test Result Sheet
1
23
Instruction Manual
1
FCR VELOCITY U
-
Relevant
chapter/
section
3.5
For use with the motor-driven grip handle (only when
32
machine is equipped with the motor-driven grip handle)
Qty.
5
For retaining the FG clamp of the
elevation switch cable: 1 pc
14
Standard Accessories
CASE NO.
Screw
Relevant
chapter/
section
Remarks
Relevant
chapter/
section
9
9
13
Caution label for up-down operation
30
T4x8 (for retaining the elevation unit upper
30
rear cover)
For protecting the screw holes for the
exposure unit transit clamp against
BR4x6 light: 2 pcs.
13
Spare: 2 pcs.
1
Anchor bolt
4
2
3
Plain washer
Plain washer
4
4
- M12x40 (for retaining the machine main
body): For units of #25001 to #25184
- M12x35 (for retaining the machine main
body): For units of #25185 or later
W16 (for retaining the machine main body)
W12 (for retaining the machine main body)
4
Spring washer
4
SW12 (for retaining the machine main body)
4.3
24
-
-
(Vacant number)
-
5
Anchor bolt
4
M8x20 (for retaining the controller unit)
23
25
-
-
(Vacant number)
-
6
Plain washer
4
W8 (for retaining the controller unit)
23
26
-
-
(Vacant number)
-
7
Spring washer
4
SW8 (for retaining the controller unit)
23
8
Anchor nut
4
M12x50 (for retaining the machine main body) 4.3
9
Anchor nut
4
M8x35 (for retaining the controller unit)
23
10
Cover
4
4.3
11
Cover
1
12
Screw
2
Anchor bolt cap
For use of the elevation unit right-hand side
middle cover (used when the operation
panel is mounted on the left-hand side of the
machine)
T3x6 (for retaining the controller unit cable
bracket)
012-201-09E
-
30
Appendix 12
22
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
IN-17
IN-18
CASE NO.
Item
Qty.
Remarks
0.5A
1.0A
1.3A
1.6A
2.0A
3.2A (LM32D)
4.0A
5.0A
3.2A (HM32D)
15A
PLT-2S (For retaining the power cable)
Caution label for the motor-driven grip
handle
BQ6x15 (for retaining the motor-driven grip
handle)
BR4x16 (For retaining the left side of the
scanner unit)
BR3x25 (for retaining the right side of the
scanner unit)
M4 (For retaining the left side of the scanner
unit)
Head-free shaft (for retaining the right side
of the scanner unit)
L=12 mm (For retaining the right side of the
scanner unit)
Blind cover for the elevation switch cable
hole
- M12x50 (for retaining the machine main
body): For units of #25001 to #25184
- M12x45 (for retaining the machine main
body): For units of #25185 or later
(Vacant number)
(Vacant number)
28
Cable tie
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
29
Label
1
30
Hexagon bolt with
washer
4
31
Screw
2
32
Screw
2
33
Insulating material
2
34
Shaft
2
35
Spring
2
36
Cap
1
37
Anchor bolt
(spare)
2
27
38
39
Fuse
Relevant
chapter/
section
8.2
32
32
13
13
13
Optional Items
Item
Remarks
Motor-driven grip handle (hand
rail and elevation unit)
Retrofittable if not mounted.
Foot switch
Elevation switch (hand switch)
Two switches can be mounted (the second switch is
optional).
Note that the type of the elevation switch depends on
whether the machine is equipped with the motor-driven
grip handle.
Side grip handle
Auxiliary grip handle
Gonad protector
Photo-timer kit
Tube auto-tracking kit
1 kΩ/2 kΩ/5 kΩ/10 kΩ
X-ray auto-collimating kit
X-ray camera connection cable
15 m 6 core
Grid
1.4 m/1.8 m/3 m
Cassette holder
For use in exposure by means of a standard cassette.
Long cassette holder
For use in exposure by means of a long cassette.
13
13
30
4.3
Attached
40
1
document
41
Ground cable
2 For subscanning unit
13
42
Cover
1 Anchor bolt cover
4.3
Note that the cases Nos. 29 and 30 are not included for the machine without the motor-driven
grip handle mounted.
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
IN-18
IN-19
3.7
List of Clamped Location
3.7.1
For units of “#20001 to #24999”
Exposure Unit
Clamped location
Elevation Unit
Clamped location
Operation panel
Motor-driven grip handle (only
when machine is equipped with
the motor-driven grip handle)
Between the elevation unit and
the exposure unit
Transparent cover of the power
circuit breaker (Lower right hand
side cover of elevation unit)
Exposure unit up-down drive
motor (MJ1) Up side
Exposure unit up-down drive
motor (MJ1) Down side
Clamping method
Action after unclamping
Discarded Retained Repositioned
Tape x2
Tape x1
Protector board
(cardboard)
Tape x1
Spacer (POM) x2
Spacer (POM)
Retaining screw
(BR4x35 (x2))
Retaining clamp
(with shock absorber)
x2
Clamp retaining screw
(BQ8x12 (x2),
BR4x12 (x2))
Upper rear cover of the elevation
Screw (BR4×8 (×8))
unit
Clamping method
Patient protection descent
prevention interlock switch Tape x2
cover
Top of grid support
Tape x3
assembly
Clamp x2
Subscanning mechanism
Clamp retaining screw
(upper)
(BQ4x10 (x8))
Clamp x2
Subscanning mechanism
Clamp retaining screw
(lower)
(BR6x12 (x8))
Clamp x4
IP movement mechanism Clamp retaining screw
(BR4x12 (x8), BR4x25 (x8))
Clamp x2
Clamp retaining screw
Scanner unit
(BR4x8 (x4), BR4x25 (x4))
Scanner unit retaining screw
(BR3x12 (x2), BR4x12 (x2))
Flexible cable retaining
bracket
Shock absorber x2
(Both sides of the exposure
unit)
Exposure unit front cover
Tape x2
laser interlock switch
IP protective sheet x1
IP surface
Tape x4
Action after unclamping
Discarded Retained Repositioned
(Four
(Four screws)
screws)
Controller Unit
Clamped location
Clamping
method
Both side louvers of the controller unit Tape x2
Front louver of the controller unit
Tape x1
Rear of the controller unit (Rear of the
Screw (T4x8 (x2))
excess cable accommodation box)
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
Action after unclamping
Discarded Retained Repositioned
IN-19
IN-20
3.7.2
For units of "#25001 or later”
Exposure Unit
Elevation Unit
Clamped location
Clamped location
Clamping method
Operation panel
Tape x2
Motor-driven grip handle (only when
machine is equipped with the motor- Tape x1
driven grip handle)
Between the elevation unit and the
Protector board (cardboard)
exposure unit
Transparent cover of the power circuit
breaker (Lower right hand side cover Tape x1
of elevation unit)
Spacer (POM) x2
Exposure unit up-down drive motor
Spacer (POM)
(MJ1) Up side
Retaining screw (BR4x35 (x2))
Retaining clamp (with shock
Exposure unit up-down drive motor absorber) x2
(MJ1) Down side
Clamp retaining screw
(BQ8x12 (x2), BR4x12 (x2))
Upper rear cover of the elevation unit Screw (BR4×8 (×8))
Action after unclamping
Discarded Retained Repositioned
Patient protection descent
prevention interlock switch cover
IP movement mechanism
Scanner unit
Tape x2
Action after unclamping
Discarded Retained Repositioned
Top of grid support assembly
Tape x3
Shield plate of grid support assembly Tape x4
Clamp x2
Subscanning mechanism (upper)
Clamp retaining screw
(BQ4x10 (x8))
Clamp x2
Subscanning mechanism (lower)
Clamping method
(Four
(Four screws)
screws)
Clamp retaining screw
(BR6x12 (x8))
Clamp x4
Clamp retaining screw
(BR4x12 (x8), BR4x25 (x8))
Clamp x2
Clamp retaining screw (BR4x8
(x4), BR4x25 (x4))
Scanner unit retaining screw
(BR3x12 (x2), BR4x12 (x2))
Flexible cable retaining bracket
(Both sides of the exposure unit)
Shock absorber x2
Exposure unit front cover laser
interlock switch
Tape x2
IP surface
IP protective sheet x1
Tape x4
Controller Unit
Clamped location
Clamping method
Action after unclamping
Discarded Retained Repositioned
Both side louvers of the controller unit
Front louver of the controller unit
Tape x2
Tape x1
Rear of the controller unit (Rear of the excess
Screw (T4x8 (x2))
cable accommodation box)
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
IN-20
IN-21
4.
Installing the Machine Main Body
NOTES
- To complete machine main body installation efficiently, clearly determine the X-ray
tube’s exposure position and the machine main body’s installation position before
transferring the machine to its installation site.
{IN:3.2_Marking the Machine Main Body Installation Position}
- Perform the installation steps while obtaining the user’s approval at the end of each
step.
- If the installation procedure is to be performed by an external agent, have the agent
complete all the steps for anchoring the machine main body and winning the user’s
approval.
4.1
(2) Lift the machine main body with a crowbar and insert floor plates (150
mm, t = 2 mm) for floor protection. Then remove adjuster bolt support
spacers.
NOTE
For floor protection purpose, lay the floor plates also beneath the fulcrum of the
crowbar.
REFERENCE
When moving the machine main body with a crowbar or the installation position
is to be fine-adjusted, insert a crowbar into the crowbar inlets at both ends of the
pedestal.
Transfer to Installation Position
(1) Rotate the adjuster bolt counterclockwise, and lower the machine
main body onto the floor.
WARNING
Equally rotate the four adjuster bolts to lower the machine main body.
Otherwise, the machine main body might topple, thereby causing severe
personal injury or machine damage.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
IN-21
IN-22
(3) With the crowbar, move the machine main body to its installation
position.
(4) Lift the machine main body as needed with the crowbar and remove
floor plate.
(5) Precisely position machine main body in place through the use of the
crowbar.
(6) Let the user observe the position where the machine main body has
been installed, and obtain the user’s approval.
4.2
Adjusting the Exposure Unit Orientation
and Machine Main Body Tilt
INSTRUCTION
The X-ray tube is used to adjust the exposure unit orientation and the machine main
body tilt. The X-ray tube, however, cannot be lowered to a height of about 700 mm
above the floor surface in some user’s sites. The exposure unit should be lifted
with the power cable of the machine main body connected in this case. Therefore,
complete the following operations before the adjustment of the exposure unit
orientation and the machine main body tilt.
{IN:5._Removing the Elevation Unit Covers and Unclamping}
{IN:7._Checking Fuses on the ELV21A Board}
{IN:8._Checking Voltage and Connecting the Power Supply}
{IN:9._Installing the Elevation Switch (Hand Switch)}
The exposure unit cannot be lifted without the control unit and the machine main body
connected. Use the elevation jig cable in this case.
{MC:17.2_How to Use the Elevation Jig Cable}
NOTES
Adjust the exposure unit orientation and machine main body tilt each time after the
machine main body is moved.
To adjust the machine main body tilt, use the following U-shaped spacer.
- Thickness: 0.5 mm/1.0 mm/2.0 mm (three types)
- Material: Stainless steel
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
IN-22
IN-23
(1) Move the X-ray tube to the front of the exposure unit and then lower it
down until it is flush with the exposure unit (to a height of about 700
mm above the floor surface).
(2) Apply a tape to the top of the X-ray tube and then mark precisely the
center of the X-ray tube on the tape.
(3) Precisely align the center of the X-ray tube (the marked position) with
the exposure center.
(4) Adjust the exposure unit’s orientation.
NOTE
For the adjustment of the exposure unit orientation, measure the respective
distances a and b between the center of the X-ray tube (mark) to the 17i nches x
17 inches frame printed on the exposure unit, and adjust the orientation so that
the difference between a and b is 1 mm or less. If the orientation of the exposure
unit is correctly adjusted, the image may differ in density on the right and left
sides.
|a – b| ≤ 1 mm
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
IN-23
IN-24
(5) Adjust the tilt of the machine main body with the exposure center as
reference by means of a plumb.
NOTE
Adjust the machine main body tilt by inserting U-shaped spacers between the
pedestal and the floor while keeping verticality with the plumb. It is recommended
that the plumb be positioned 3 to 5 mm forward of the exposure unit by the
wrapper or the like.
|c – d| ≤ 1 mm
| e – f | ≤ 1.5 mm
(8) Turn ON the X-ray tube’s irradiation field lamp to illuminate the exposure
unit. Verify that the intersection of the crosshairs is constantly
projected onto the center of the exposure unit even when the X-ray tube
is moved forward and backward.
INSTRUCTION
If the intersection of the crosshairs leaves the center of the exposure unit when
the X-ray tube is moved forward or backward, make adjustments as suggested
below:
- Review the left/right stop position of the X-ray tube.
- Adjust the illumination direction of the X-ray tube. After completion of this
adjustment, return to step (3), and check and readjust the exposure unit
orientation and machine main body tilt.
- Readjust the position of the machine main body.
(6) Check both the exposure unit orientation and machine main body
tilt. Make adjustments repeatedly until they both comply with the
requirements.
(7) Record the thicknesses of the U-shaped spacers that are inserted
between the pedestal and the floor (at four locations).
(9) Let the user observe the machine main body, which is now in the final
installation position, to obtain the user’s approval for anchoring the
machine.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
IN-24
IN-25
4.3
Anchoring the Machine Main Body
(1) Accurately mark the floor surface to indicate the machine main body
installation position.
(2) Mark the anchor nut embedded positions with a center punch or the
like.
REFERENCE
Marking with the center punch may alternatively be conducted after the machine
main body is moved. Mark the anchor nut hole drilling positions before moving
the machine main body.
(6) Drill holes at the positions that are marked (4 places) with a center
punch or like device. (Drill bit diameter: 18 mm; depth: 50 to 52 mm)
NOTES
- Use a drill that is suitable for floor hole drilling.
- When drilling the anchor holes, collect dust with a vacuum cleaner or like
device. If no vacuum cleaner or like device is available, protect the machine
from dust, for instance, by covering the machine with a vinyl sheet.
REFERENCE
Drill prepared holes with a drill bit having a diameter of 6 to 8 mm in order to
prevent the resulting anchor holes from being decentered.
(3) Lift the machine main body as needed with a crowbar, and insert the
adjuster bolt support spacers into the anchor positions.
(4) Set the four adjuster bolts in their positions. Lift the machine main
body until it accepts a hand lifter.
WARNING
Turn the adjuster bolts alternately and evenly to lift the machine main body. If
the adjuster bolts are not turned alternately and evenly, the machine main body
may topple, causing machine damage and personal injury.
(5) Insert the hand lifter and move the machine main body to a place
where it does not interfere with the embedding of the anchor nuts.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
IN-25
IN-26
(7) With a vacuum cleaner or like device, remove concrete chips and dust
from the drilled holes.
(8) Embed the anchor nuts in the holes.
NOTES
- Remove the cuttings that are stuck in the holes.
- To protect the anchor nut bolt insertion holes, embed the anchor nuts while
disposable bolts (M12x30 to M12x50) are attached to the anchor nuts.
- Embed the anchor nuts until their upper surface is 0.5 to 1.0 mm below the
floor surface.
(12) Check the number of the U-shaped spacers that have been inserted
between the pedestal (four locations) and the floor, and determine the
size of the anchor bolts.
REFERENCE
Guide for selective use of anchor bolt.
Selectively use anchor bolts in accordance with the sum of the inserted spacer
thickness (a) and embedded anchor nut insertion depth (b) from the top of the
anchor nut to the floor:
<For units of #20001 to #21232 and #25001 to #25184>
- When a + b = < 5.5 mm, use anchor bolt (M12x40) <CASE No.1>.
- When a + b = ≥ 5.5 mm, use anchor bolt (M12x50) <CASE No.37>.
<For units of #21233 or later and #25185 or later>
- When a + b = < 5.5 mm, use anchor bolt (M12x35) <CASE No.1>.
- When a + b = ≥ 5.5 mm, use anchor bolt (M12x45) <CASE No.37>.
(9) Return the machine main body to its installation position and lower it
down onto the floor.
{IN:4.1_Transfer to Installation Position}
(10) Insert the U-shaped spacers of a height recorded for the adjustment of
the exposure unit orientation and the machine main body tile between
the pedestal (four locations) and the floor.
(11) Readjust the exposure unit orientation and the machine main body tile
before anchoring with the anchor bolts.
{IN:4.2_Adjusting the Exposure Unit Orientation and Machine Main Body Tilt}
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
IN-26
IN-27
(13) Secure the machine main body with anchor bolts.
<For units of #21233 or later and #25185 or later>
<For units of #20001 to #21232 and #25001 to #25184>
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
IN-27
IN-27.1
(14) Let the user observe the machine main body which has been anchored
in place, and obtain the user’s final approval.
INSTRUCTION
At this stage, the user might want to verify the up/down operation of the exposure
unit. To let the user observe such an up/down operation, move the exposure unit
up and down with the elevation jig cable.
{MC:17.2_How to Use the Elevation Jig Cable}
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
IN-27.1
IN-27.2
BLANK PAGE
012-201-09E
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
IN-27.2
IN-28
5.
Removing the Elevation Unit Covers
and Unclamping
Operation panel
Motor-driven grip handle (only when
machine is equipped with the motordriven grip handle)
Clamping method
Action after unclamping
Discarded Retained Repositioned
Tape x2
Tape x1
Between the elevation unit and the exposure Protector board
unit
(cardboard)
Transparent cover of the power circuit breaker
Tape x1
(Lower right hand side cover of elevation unit)
Upper rear cover of the elevation unit
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
(1) Remove the tapes applied to the elevation unit cover and the operation
panel.
(2) Remove the protector board between the elevation unit and the
exposure unit.
Portions to Be Unclamped
Clamped location
Unclamping
Screw (BR4x8 (x8))
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
IN-28
IN-29
Removing the Elevation Unit Covers
NOTE
(1) Remove the three kinds of covers on the left-hand side of elevation
unit.
A machine for use outside Japan is equipped with the cable protective cover. Remove
the cable protective cover before removing the lower left-hand side cover of the
elevation unit.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
IN-29
IN-30
(2) Remove the two kinds of covers on the right-hand side of the elevation
unit.
(3) Remove the two kinds of covers on the rear of the elevation unit.
NOTE
The screws (BR4x8 (x8)) which retain the upper cover on the rear of the elevation
unit should be kept for future transfer of the machine.
Use the standard screws (T4x8 (x8)) to mount the upper cover on the rear of the
elevation unit.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
IN-30
IN-31
(4) Remove the lower front cover of the elevation unit.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
IN-31
IN-32
6.
Unclamping Inside the Elevation
Unit
(2) Remove the lamps which retain the lower part of the exposure unit updown drive motor (MJ1).
Portions to Be Unclamped
Clamped location
Exposure unit up-down drive
motor (MJ1) Up side
Exposure unit up-down drive
motor (MJ1) Down side
Clamping method
Spacer ( POM) x2
Spacer ( POM)
Retaining screw (BR4x35 (x2))
Retaining clamp (with shock
absorber) x2
Clamp retaining screw
(BQ8x12 (x2), BR4x12 (x2))
Action after unclamping
Discarded Retained Repositioned
Unclamping
(1) Remove the spacers over the exposure unit up-down drive motor (MJ1).
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
IN-32
IN-33
7.
Checking Fuses on the ELV21A
Board
CAUTION
When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an antistatic wristband to
ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body
may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.
(1) Pull out the ELV21A board assembly.
(2) Depress the fuses (F1 through F4) of the ELV21A board by hand to
check for disconnection.
(3) Reverse the pull-out procedures to put back the ELV21A board
assembly where it was.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
IN-33
IN-34
8.
Checking Voltage and Connecting
the Power Supply
8.1
(2) Change the connection of the cable terminal (J-TB3-L) connected to
the terminal block (TB3) according to the specifications on the user’s
site.
Checking and Changing the Cable Terminal
(J-TB3) Connection
INSTRUCTION
The cable terminal (J-TB3-L) connected to the terminal block (TB3) for voltage
setting is connected with 240 V prior to shipment. Change the connection of the
cable terminal depending on the specifications on the user’s site before installing the
machine. This is not necessary when the specification at the user’s site is 240 V.
(1) Turn OFF the power circuit breaker.
012-201-07E
07.15.2006 FM4915
CR-IR 364 Service Manual
IN-34
IN-35
8.2
Routing and Securing the Power Cable
INSTRUCTIONS
- A power cable that is locally procured should be used to meet the regional
specification.
- The power cable should be installed in conduit.
(2) Remove the cable retaining bracket which is mounted on the pedestal
on t
